dual food...2018-05-09construct dual food jbsa-sam houston, texas aafes pn: 3720-14-000002 architect...

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 of 2 CONSTRUCT DUAL FOOD JBSA-SAM HOUSTON, TEXAS AAFES PN: 3720-14-000002

CONTRACTS: COMBINED WORK – ALL TRADES

BY:

DATE: 04 MAY 2018 SOLICITATION SPECIFICATIONS

Illinois Design Firm License Number 184-002661 Post Office Box 820 600 West Main Street ▪ Suite 2 Carbondale, Illinois 62901 618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5709 Fax 618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5638

A R C H I T E C T S

CONSTRUCT DUAL FOOD JBSA-SAM HOUSTON, TEXAS

AAFES PN: 3720-14-000002

ARCHITECT

h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS 600 West Main Street Suite 2

Carbondale, Illinois 62901 618 457 5709 Fax 457 5638

E-mail [email protected]

PROFESSIONAL CONSULTANTS

LAND SURVEYING/CIVIL ENGINEERING/LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE

Mach IV Engineering & Surveying LLC 2260 Salscheider Court

Green Bay, Wisconsin 54313 920 569 5765 Fax 569 5767 E-mail [email protected]

STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

Hodge Structural Engineers, P.C. 22 Chestnut Street

Evansville, Indiana 47713 812 422 2558 Fax 422 3337

E-mail [email protected] TX Firm No. F-9028, Exp. 11/30/2018

MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEERING

McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc. 413 West Main Street Post Office Box 581

Mt. Vernon, Illinois 62864 618 242 0473 Fax 242 2330

E-mail [email protected]

hmb PROJECT NO. 1506.0

04 MAY 2018

© 2018 h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS


AAFES PN: 3720-14-000002

ARCHITECT: h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS

Project Manual: Section 00 86 00

All Sections of Division 1 (Except Section 01 35 56)

All Sections of Division 2 (Except Section 02 41 16)

Section 03 35 56

Section 04 20 00

Section 05 40 00

Section 05 50 00

Section 05 52 00

All Sections of Division 6





SIGNATURE All Sections of Division 11

Section 12 48 13

CURRENT DATE 04 May 2018 Section 31 31 16

Section 32 31 00

LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Nov 2018 Section 32 33 13

Drawing Sheets: All T-Sheets, All CA-Sheets, All A-Sheets, All FS-Sheets

PROFESSIONAL LAND SURVEY/CIVIL ENGINEER: Mach IV Engineering & Surveying, LLC


Section 02 41 16

Section 31 10 00

Section 31 20 00

Section 31 21 00

Section 31 23 23

Section 31 23 33

Section 32 01 00

Section 32 12 16

Section 32 13 13

Section 32 13 73

SIGNATURE Section 32 17 23


CURRENT DATE 04 May 2018

LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Jun 2018

Drawing Sheets: All C-Sheets

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: Yellow Springs Design, LLC


Section 32 93 00

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 31 Dec 2018

Drawing Sheets: All L-Sheets STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Hodge Structural Engineers


Section 05 12 00

Section 05 21 00

Section 05 31 00

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Sept 2018

Drawing Sheets: All S-Sheets

MECHANICAL ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.

Project Manual: All Sections of Division 22


SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Nov 2019

Drawing Sheets: All M-Sheets, All P-Sheets

FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.


SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Sep 2019 Drawing Sheets: Sheet FA-1.00, Sheet LS-1.00

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.

Project Manual: All Sections of Division 26

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Nov 2019

Drawing Sheets: All E-Sheets

PROJECT MANUAL TOC – Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1


AAFES PN: 3720-14-000002

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS PAGES

CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 0 – BIDDING CONTRACTING

List of Drawings 00 86 00-2

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Requirements of JBSA-Sam Houston 01 00 00-8 Summary of Work 01 10 00-12 Unit Prices 01 10 10-2 AAFES Furnished & Installed Equipment 01 10 17-4 AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment 01 10 18-3 AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures 01 10 60-4 AAFES Safety Regulations & Codes 01 13 00-8 Substitution Procedures 01 25 00-3 Schedule of Values 01 29 73-2 Progress Payments 01 29 76-3 Project Management & Coordination 01 31 13-3 Phasing 01 31 15-2 AAFES Progress Meetings 01 31 19-2 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 00-3 Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals 01 33 00-17 AAFES Environmental Protection 01 35 43-10 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures (SWPPP) 01 35 56-77 AAFES Weather Table 01 42 10-2 Quality Control 01 45 16-3

Testing Laboratory Services 01 45 29-4 Temporary Utilities 01 51 00-6 Field Offices & Sheds 01 52 00-3 Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls 01 55 00-9

Project Identification & Signs 01 58 00-2 Material & Equipment 01 65 00-3 Storage & Protection 01 66 00-3 Grades, Lines & Levels 01 73 13-1 Cutting & Patching 01 73 29-2 Cleaning 01 74 00-2 Construction Waste Management & Disposal (with Attachments) 01 74 19-13 Systems Start-up 01 75 00-3 Project Closeout (with DoD Form 1354 Attachments) 01 77 00-29 Project Record Documents 01 78 00-2

DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

Subsurface Investigation & Geotechnical Report 02 31 00-64 Structure Demolition 02 41 16-12 Hazmat Investigation & Report 02 81 10-26 Removal of Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's) 02 81 33-6 Removal of Mercury Containing Lamps & Devices 02 81 34-7 Ozone Depleting Substance Recovery 02 91 10-3


DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00-11 Polished Concrete Floor Finish 03 35 36-9

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

Unit Masonry 04 20 00-20

DIVISION 5 – METALS

Structural Steel 05 12 00-6 Steel Joists 05 21 00-4 Steel Deck 05 31 00-4 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00-8 Metal Fabrications 05 50 00-15 Metal Railings 05 52 00-10

DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS

Rough Carpentry 06 10 00-6 Finish Carpentry 06 20 00-6 Fire Retardant Wood Treatment 06 30 00-4 Architectural Woodwork 06 40 00-10

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

Building Insulation 07 21 00-8 Exterior Insulation & Finish System - Class PB 07 24 00-9 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO) 07 54 00-12 Preformed Metal Soffit Panels 07 61 03-5 Flashing & Sheet Metal 07 62 00-11 Firestopping 07 84 00-5 Building Joint Sealers 07 90 00-5

DIVISION 8 – DOORS & WINDOWS

Metal Doors & Frames 08 11 00-7 Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16-5 Access Doors 08 31 00-5 Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors 08 41 10-11 Finish Hardware 08 71 00-13 Glass & Glazing 08 81 00-8

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

Gypsum Drywall Systems 09 21 16-10 Tile 09 30 00-8 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 00-4 Resilient Tile Flooring 09 65 00-4 Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels 09 77 00-4 Painting 09 90 00-7

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

Specialty Signs 10 14 00-7 Toilet Compartments 10 21 13-4 Wall Surface Protection Systems 10 26 00-4 Toilet Accessories 10 28 13-4 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets & Accessories 10 44 00-4 Metal Lockers 10 51 13-3 Fixed Sunshades & Canopies 10 71 10-6


DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

Food Service Equipment 11 40 00-7 Used Cooking Oil Equipment 11 80 00-6

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

Floor Mats & Frames 12 48 13-4

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

General Provisions - Plumbing 22 05 10-5 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 12-9 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 22 05 13-1 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 22 05 19-3 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23-4 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 29-7 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 53-4 Plumbing Insulation 22 07 19-9 Domestic Water Piping 22 11 16-7 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 11 19-4 Domestic Water Pumps 22 11 23-4 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 13 16-5 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 22 13 19-4 Storm Drainage Piping 22 14 13-4 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 22 14 23-3 Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 16 13-9 Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters 22 34 00-4 Commercial Plumbing Fixtures 22 42 13-5

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

Mechanical-General Provisions 23 01 00-3 Basic Materials and Methods-Mechanical 23 05 00-2 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 13-2 Hangers and Supports for Mechanical 23 05 29-4 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53-3 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC Systems 23 05 95-2 Mechanical Insulation 23 07 00-3 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 23 09 00-9 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 23 09 93-3 Metal Ductwork 23 31 13-4 Ductwork Accessories 23 33 00-3 Fans 23 34 23-3 Air Curtains 23 34 33-2 Air Terminal Units 23 36 00-3 Air Outlet and Inlet 23 37 13-2 Food Service Ventilation Systems 23 38 15-2 Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units 23 74 13-6

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19-3 Manufactured Wiring Systems 26 05 20-2 Grounding and Bonding 26 05 26-3 Supporting Devices 26 05 29-2 Conduit 26 05 33-5 Boxes 26 05 34-3


Cabinets and Enclosures 26 05 35-2 Duct Bank 26 05 43-4 Electrical Identification 26 05 53-3 Electric Controls 26 09 23-2 Enclosed Contactors 26 09 24-3 Occupancy Sensors 26 09 25-2 Distribution Switchboards 26 24 13-4 Panelboards 26 24 16-3 Wiring Devices 26 27 26-4 Enclosed Switches 26 28 17-2 Enclosed Motor Controllers 26 29 13-3 Surge Protection Devices (SPDs) 26 43 13-4 Interior Luminaires 26 51 00-3 Site Lighting 26 56 00-3 Testing 26 60 00-3

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY

Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Systems 28 31 76-17

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

Site Clearing 31 10 00-5 Earthwork 31 20 00-14 Landscape Grading 31 21 00-2 Utility Backfill Materials 31 23 23-9 Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 33-13 Termite Control 31 31 16-3

DIVISION 32 – SITEWORK

Pavement Repair and Restoration 32 01 00-3 Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Pavement 32 12 16-3 Concrete Paving 32 13 13-10 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 13 73-5 Pavement Markings 32 17 23-2 Fences & Gates 32 31 00-4 Site Bicycle Racks 32 33 13-3 Turf & Grasses 32 92 00-5 Plants 32 93 00-8

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

Pressure and Leakage Tests 33 01 10-3 Disinfecting Pipelines 33 01 15-10 Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers 33 01 30-14 Tracer Wire 33 05 27-3 Piping-General Provisions 33 11 00-8 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 33 11 11-6 Polyethylene Wrap 33 11 17-4 Gate Valves 33 12 16-2 Tapping Sleeves and Valves 33 12 17-5 Fire Hydrants 33 12 19-4 Gravity Sanitary Sewers 33 31 11-4 Precast Concrete Manholes 33 31 12-8 Storm Sewerage System 33 41 00-6

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Section 00 86 00 – LIST OF DRAWINGS

LIST OF DRAWINGS 00 86 00-1

SHEET NO. TITLE

TITLE:

T-1.00 Title Sheet/ Index of Drawings T-1.01 Abbreviations & Codes

CIVIL:

C-1.00 Site Control & Key Plan C-2.00 Topographic Survey & Site Demolition Plan C-2.01 Stormwater Detention Pond Topographic Survey Demolition Plan C-3.00 Site Layout Plan C-3.01 Paint Striping, Signage & Joint Layout Plan C-4.00 Site Grading Plan C-4.01 Detention Pond Grading & Utility Plan C-5.00 Site Drainage & Utility Plan C-6.00 Site Erosion Control Plan C-6.01 Stormwater Detention Pond Erosion Control Plan C-7.00 Site Details Erosion Control C-7.01 Site Utility Details C-7.02 Site Utility Details C-7.03 Site Utility Details C-7.04 Site Utility Details C-7.05 Site Utility Details C-7.06 Site Paving Details C-7.07 Site Details Paving & Signage CU-2.00 Site Plan Electrical

LANDSCAPING:

L-1.00 Site Landscape Plan L-1.01 Stormwater Detention Pond Landscape Plan

ARCHITECTURAL:

CA-1.00 Architectural Site Plan CA-1.01 Site Signage Details CA-1.02 Site Signage Details A-1.00 Floor Plan A-2.00 Exterior Elevations A-3.00 Building Sections A-3.01 Building Sections A-3.02 Building Sections A-4.00 Wall Sections A-4.01 Wall Sections A-4.02 Wall Sections A-5.00 Roof Plan & Details A-5.10 Roof Details A-5.20 Canopy-Sunshade Plans A-5.30 Canopy-Sunshade Connection Details A-5.40 Canopy-Sunshade Details A-6.00 Large Scale Floor Plan A-6.10 Interior Elevations A-6.11 Interior Elevations & Large Scale Plans A-7.00 Reflected Ceiling Plan

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Section 00 86 00 – LIST OF DRAWINGS

LIST OF DRAWINGS 00 86 00-2

A-8.00 Door Schedule, Elevations & Door/Window Details A-9.00 Floor Finish Plan, Room Finish Schedule & Finish Materials List A-9.10 Wall Finish Plan

FOOD SERVICE:

FS-1.00 Food Service Equipment Plan FS-1.01 Food Service Equipment Schedule – Popeye’s & Common Building FS-1.02 Food Service Equipment Schedule – Burger King

STRUCTURAL:

S-1.00 Structural General Notes S-1.01 Structural General Notes S-2.00 Foundation Plan at Finished Slab Elevation S-2.10 Foundation Details S-3.00 Low Steel Framing S-3.01 Roof Framing Plan S-3.02 Parapet Framing Plan S-3.10 Framing Details S-4.00 Brace Elevations & Details

MECHANICAL:

M-1.01 Floor Plan - Mechanical M-1.02 Roof Plan - Mechanical M-2.01 Details - Mechanical M-3.01 Symbols & Schedules - Mechanical

PLUMBING: P-1.00 Underfloor Plan - Plumbing P-1.01 Floor Plan - Plumbing P-2.00 General Notes, Symbols & Schedules P-5.00 Roof Plan - Plumbing

FIRE PROTECTION:

FA-1.00 Floor Plan Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems LS-1.00 Life Safety Plan

ELECTRICAL:

E-1.00 Floor Plan - Lighting E-2.00 Floor Plan - Power E-2.01 Large Scale Floor Plan Popeye's - Power E-2.02 Large Scale Floor Plan Burger King - Power E-3.00 Floor Plan Communications E-4.00 Details & Schematics - Electrical E-5.00 Panel Schedules & Riser Diagram E-6.00 Electrical Symbols & Schedules All drawings dated: 04 May 2018 END 00 86 00.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 00 00 – REQUIREMENTS OF JBSA-SAM HOUSTON

REQUIREMENTS OF JBSA-SAM HOUSTON 01 00 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Excavation Permit.

B. Work Schedule.

C. Protection of Government Property and Personnel.

D. Covering of Debris.

E. Utility Line Marking.

F. Environmental Protection.

G. Contractor Installation Identification Credentials.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 10 00 – Project Summary.

B. Section 01 35 43 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

C. Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities.

D. Section 01 52 00 – Field Offices & Sheds.

E. Section 01 55 00 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

F. Division 2 – Existing Conditions.

G. Division 31 – Earthwork.

H. Division 32 – Site Work.

I. Army & Air Force Exchange Service - General Provisions, a copy of which is included in the Solicitation Package.

1.3 EXCAVATION PERMIT

A. No excavation shall be done prior to receiving a JBSA-Sam Houston Excavation Permit.

1. Schedule Digging Permit at Building 4196. 2. JBSA-Sam Houston Digging Permit for Fort Sam Houston/Camp Bullis 502 CES Fort

Sam Houston shall be obtained, completed and submitted for approval. 3. Upon approval, signed permits may be picked up at Building 4196, Cubicle 25.

B. Contractor and all subcontractors intending to perform excavation shall request permits a minimum of 21 days prior to scheduled start of digging.


1. An Excavation Permit for a specified area of excavation expires 30-days after date of issuance.

2. Contractor and subcontractors shall reapply for a new Excavation Permit if excavation does not commence within the 30-day period.

C. Hand digging shall be required to locate utilities shown on the contract drawings or 3 feet on either side of locations identified by JBSA-Sam Houston.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for all repairs, costs and damages due to excavating without Digging Permit or for damaging an unidentified utility.

E. Excavation Permit information – JBSA-Sam Houston:

1. POC: Johnny R. Almaguer 2. E-mail: [email protected] 3. Phone: 210.221.4276

1.4 WORK SCHEDULE

A. All work at JBSA-Sam Houston shall be accomplished during normal working hours 0700 to 1600 hours exclusive of Saturdays, Sundays, and federal holidays unless other times are approved by the Contracting Officer, or otherwise stated in the contract.

1. Coordinate the work schedule with the Contracting Officer and JBSA-Sam Houston CES.

2. Work may be expanded to 0600 and 1800 hours if approved by the Contracting Officer and JBSA-Sam Houston CES.

1.5 PROTECTION OF GOVERNMENT PROPERTY AND PERSONNEL

A. Contractor shall furnish, place, and maintain all required barricades as directed by the Safety Office and the Contracting Officer.

B. Access drives and roadways shall remain clear at all times.

C. Contractor shall conduct operations to offer the least possible obstruction and inconvenience to public traffic.

1. All traffic shall be permitted to pass adjacent to work without delay. 2. Where the nature of construction operations in progress, equipment, and machinery

in use are of character to endanger passing traffic, Contractor shall provide lights and signs, erect fences or barriers, and station flaggers necessary to give adequate warning to avoid damage or injury to passing traffic.

3. Signs, flags, lights, warning and safety devices shall conform to applicable installation, city, county, and state requirements.

D. If road/lane closures or traffic interruption becomes necessary during the course of work:

1. Contractor shall submit to CES for approval a barricade and sign plan clearly showing work area, location, and type of sign to be placed for rerouting traffic.

a. The traffic control plan shall be in accordance with “Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction and Maintenance Operations”, latest edition, of the “Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices”.

b. At least one lane of traffic shall be maintained operational at all time.


2. Submit traffic control plan to JBSA-Sam Houston CES a minimum of 21 days prior to commencing work affecting traffic and allow JBSA-Sam Houston sufficient time for notification of concerned parties.

1.6 SITE USE

A. Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain temporary construction fencing to separate construction areas from entry by unauthorized personnel including, but not limited to:

1. Building construction site. 2. Construction trailers. 3. Temporary storage trailers, sheds and lay-down areas. 4. Equipment parking areas. 5. Other areas subject to construction work under this Contract.

B. Contractor shall coordinate all site use areas with JBSA-Sam Houston CES and Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1. Submit detailed site plan for approval indicating all areas to be temporarily fenced and indicate specific use proposed for all areas within fencing at least 21 days prior to commencing work.

a. Indicate proposed location of all temporary construction trailers, storage trailers and sheds.

b. Provide temporary utility needs and proposed source for each.

2. Obtain written approval of proposed site use plan from JBSA-Sam Houston CES and Contracting Officer prior to construction of temporary fencing or utilities.

1.7 COVERING OF DEBRIS

A. Contractor and all subcontractors shall be required to cover all loads of debris before hauling them off from the Site.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for clean up of all incidental debris that inadvertently falls onto pavements or other properties during hauling operations.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall abide by the environmental requirements of JBSA-Sam Houston, the State of Texas and Federal Government.

1. Detailed requirements are set forth in Section 01 35 43, AAFES Environmental Protection.

2. Refer to Section 02 41 16, Structure Removal for Phase 2 demolition of the existing Popeye's building and site and related Division 2 Sections for removal of hazardous materials and universal waste materials prior to demolition.

B. All personnel shall be familiar with the JBSA-Sam Houston Environmental Management System (EMS) Policy and shall be required to read that Document.

1. Obtain information by contacting CES Environmental at 210.221.1142.

C. Vehicles and other powered equipment shall meet local air quality regulations for emissions.

1. Vehicles and equipment shall be mechanically sound and have all seals, grease rings, and other containment systems in place to ensure against leakage.

2. Drip pans shall be maintained such that overflow and spills do not occur.


3. There shall be no activities for equipment maintenance including oil changes, filter replacements, or hydraulic equipment repair performed on JBSA-Sam Houston Property.

D. Whenever a spill of oil or hazardous material is discovered, Contractor shall take immediate action to:

1. Stop the flow of product. 2. Advise personnel of the incident. 3. Immediately shut down equipment and minimize sources of ignition. 4. Contain the spill. 5. Notify JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental immediately for further instruction.

E. Contractor shall also prepare a formal “Spill Report” chronicling the events leading to the spill and the efforts to contain it.

1. This Spill Report shall be submitted to the JBSA-Sam Houston Environmental Division representative investigating the spill.

F. Contractor shall submit monthly report of fuel consumption for each fuel burning unit, whether permitted or not, for all operational time throughout construction until Substantial Completion or when that unit is retired from service on this Project, whichever is longer.

1. Make monthly submittals to JBSA-Sam Houston CES. 2. At Substantial Completion submit the total amount of fuel used for each unit to JBSA-

Sam Houston CES substantiating monthly reports.

1.9 RECYCLING

A. JBSA-Sam Houston promotes recycling of demolished materials and construction waste and requires that the Contractor recycle as many materials as are feasible under this Contract.

B. Recycling of Construction waste shall be mandatory in an effort to reduce the amount of solid waste deposited in landfills and shall follow procedures outlined in Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management & Disposal and the Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1. Examples of materials that Contractor shall consider for recycling include, but are not limited to all materials listed in Section 01 74 19.

C. All construction debris, demolition debris and refuse shall be recycled to the maximum extent possible and not less than 50% per the JBSA-Sam Houston Environmental Management System (EMS).

1. All refuse and recycle disposal shall be reported to JBSA-Sam Houston CES on a monthly basis with submittal to:

POC: Glenn Williams E-mail: [email protected] Phone: 210.221.5063

2. The disposal and recycle report shall include:

a. Quantity, measured in weight by pounds, and material disposed. b. Quantity, measured in weight by pounds, and material recycled. c. Date upon which material was disposed or recycled. d. Final destination of material disposal or recycling.


3. Per AR 200-1, all manifest or shipping papers that require the Installation EPA ID number must be signed by authorized a responsible party of the Environmental Division, JBSA-Sam Houston, Texas.

1.10 DISPOSAL

A. Contractor shall refer to applicable paragraphs in Section 01 35 43, AAFES Environmental Protection for details pertaining to waste disposal including:

1. Hazardous waste generation, handling and disposal. 2. Non-hazardous waste disposal. 3. Normal construction debris disposal.

B. All excess soils and organic matter shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of in approved landfill on JBSA-Sam Houston property as directed by JBSA-Sam Houston CES and in accordance with Section 01 35 43.

C. Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.9 above, or hazardous waste, all other solid waste shall be collected and disposed of off JBSA-Sam Houston Property.

1. There shall be no accumulation of solid waste unless properly containerized or put within a fenced area to prevent wind blown pollution.

2. No materials shall be put into dumpsters owned or managed by JBSA-Sam Houston.

D. Only empty paint cans shall be allowed in Contractor furnished trash receptacles.

1. Paint cans are considered empty if paint comprises less than 1 inch or 3% by weight of the total capacity of the container, whichever is less.

2. If the residue in the container exceeds these limits, contact the Contracting Officer for disposal instructions.

E. All site paving scheduled for removal shall be recycled, salvaged or salvaged and reused in new construction.

F. All underground piping scheduled for removal shall be recycled when appropriate, removed from the site and legally disposed of in accord with Section 01 74 19, off JBSA-Sam Houston property.

G. Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.9 above, all solid waste not specifically indicated shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of in approved landfill off JBSA-Sam Houston property.

1.11 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL IDENTIFICATION CREDENTIALS

A. Contractor shall comply with the following procedures for obtaining Installation identification passes for the Contractor’s personnel and subcontractors.

1. Contractor shall submit a written request on company letterhead stationary to the JBSA-Sam Houston sponsoring entity (identified at the Pre-construction Meeting) specifying:

a. Contract number. b. Location of work site. c. Date entry to the Installation must begin and contemplated termination date of

entry.


d. Names, date of birth (DOB) and social security numbers (SSN) of Contractor and subcontractor employee requiring access to the Installation.

e. The name of the individual who will submit the Request for Identification Credentials for each employee for whom identification credentials are needed.

2. The JBSA-Sam Houston sponsoring entity will submit information to authority having jurisdiction and that authority may:

a. Endorse the request. b. Attach a copy of the contract cover page and any other pages that provide

performance information, such as the need for and duration of access to the work site.

c. Forward this request to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office of the installation where the work is to be performed.

d. Provide appropriate blank Form to the Contractor.

3. The Contractor shall be required to complete and submit Form and request for identification credentials, for each of the firm’s employees and for each subcontractor employee who must have access to the installation.

4. The Contractor shall also request appropriate Form for vehicle decals when the request for identification credentials is submitted.

5. To obtain the vehicle decal from the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office, the Contractor shall produce:

a. A valid drivers license. b. Proof of financial responsibility or insurance c. Current vehicle registration.

B. Contractor employees, at all times while on a military installation shall wear visible identification either as a part of, or attached to, their outer clothing.

C. The identification shall clearly identify the individual as being a Contractor employee.

D. During performance of the contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining required identification for newly assigned personnel, and for prompt return of credentials and vehicle registration decals to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office, for any employee who no longer requires access to the work site.

E. At the termination or completion of the contract, or upon expiration of credentials (if any such expirations are specified), the Contractor shall return all installation identification credentials and vehicle registration decals for all Contractor and subcontractor employees to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office.

2 PRODUCTS (Not Used).

3 EXECUTION (Not Used).

END 01 00 00. ATTACHMENT: JBSA-Sam Houston Digging Permit Form.

DIGGING PERMIT FOR FT SAM HOUSTON/CAMP BULLIS 502D Civil Engineer Squadron

CONTROL NUMBER: _______________________ PROJECT (ACES) NUMBER: _______________________ DATE: _____________________

Note: This form is used to coordinate required work with key post activities, protect underground utilities and keep customer inconvenience to a minimum. Completed Digging Permit is valid a maximum of 30 days before excavation / construction start. Contractor is responsible for maintaining all markings and setting off-sets as required. THIS IS NOT A ROAD CLOSURE OR UTILITY OUTAGE REQUEST. Requestor is responsible for assuring that required road closures and utility outage requests are processed separately and timely. Please print clearly or type. PROJECT TITLE & DESCRIPTION REASON FOR DIGGING: _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Clearance is requested to proceed under Contract No.: ___________________________ involving excavation at the location shown on attached drawing. (Contractor shall attach 5 annotated copies of site plan (civil site and utility plans) that shows entire area to be disturbed) Requestor:_____________________________________ Contractor/Company Name: __________________________________________________ Phone: ________________________________________ The following date and time has been scheduled by 502D Civil Engineer Squadron (502D CES) for the contractor to meet and coordinate with locate personnel, (10 working days are required for scheduling). DATE: __________________________________________________ TIME: ___________________________________________ MEETING LOCATION: _______________________________________________________________________________________________ (Date requested by contractor MAY be adjusted by the 502D CES representative to avoid overbooking of locate personnel) ORGANIZATION 502D Civil Engineer Squadron

LOCATE PERSONNEL PRINTED NAME/SIGNATURE

MARKED (CIRCLE

ONE)

DEPTH /REMARKS

Water, Sewer, & Drainage: (210) 221-0207

YES / NO

Electrical: (210) 221-3212 YES / NO Road & Grounds: (210) 221-3209/295-4980

YES / NO

HVAC: (210) 221-3212 YES / NO *** CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR NOTIFYING/ SCHEDULING THE FOLLOWING CLEARANCES/LOCATES*** 502D Communications Squadron 808-6912

DIG TESS ( 800)-344-8377: CPS (Gas Lines, Electr.); Southwestern Bell; Time Warner Cable

__________________________________________ __________________________________________ __________________________________________

YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO

_________________________________ __________________________________________________________________

San Antonio Water System (Recycled Water Line): [email protected]

YES / NO

Sprint (Lodging) (800)-669-8344

YES / NO

*CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO CALL DEPARTMENTS LISTED BELOW BEFORE DIGGING AND OBTAIN CONCURRANCE* 502D CES, Natural Resources Management Section (Environmental, Bldg. 4196): (210) 221-4842 (1) Compliance Signature:_______________________________________________

Historical Signature:_______________________________________________ (2) 502D Fire Emergency Services Flight, Fire Dept. (210) 221-5452 Signature________________________________________________ (3) 502D Security Forces Squadron, Traffic Officer : (210) 221-0212 Signature________________________________________________ (4) 502D Air Base Wing Safety Office: (210) 221-3836 Signature:_______________________________________________ If site is located at OR near BAMC the following contacts also need to be made: (14) Facilities Management: (210) 916-3534 Signature:_______________________________________________ (15) Provost Marshall: (210) 916-1007 Signature:_______________________________________________ (16) Safety Manager: (210) 916-1427 Signature: _______________________________________________ CONTRACTOR SHALL RETURN THIS FORM TO 502D CIVIL ENGINEER SQUADRON, FORT SAM HOUSTON (Bldg. 4196) FOR FINAL APPROVAL UPON COMPLETION OF ALL ABOVE COORDINATION AND SIGNATURES. Quality Assurance Representative: ________________________________________________ Phone: _________________________________ (Government Point of Contact) FINAL APPROVAL: _________________________________________________________ DATE: _________________________________ 502D CES, Fort Sam Houston REVISED: 28Jul15,CENMP

***INSTRUCTIONS***

1. The contractor shall fill out the permit and attach the contract utility plans, site/grading plan and any other plan sheets showing limits of excavation to scale (5 complete copies) and submit to his/her Quality Assurance Representative or credit card holder.

2. Clearance date is the date the contractor will meet locate personnel at the site to witness locating of known utility lines and obtain signatures.

a. Allow up to 10 working days to schedule 502D Civil Engineer Squadron, Ft Sam Houston personnel and for review of

existing utility plans. b. Clearances will be accomplished on MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY at either 0900 or 1300 Hours in most cases.

3. Contractor is responsible for notifying the following agencies on Fort Sam Houston as noted on front of permit, see location below: a. 502D Civil Engineer Squadron, Natural Resources Management Section (Environmental) in Bldg. 4196, See form for phone

number/contact information. b. 502d Security Forces Squadron, Traffic Officer, Fort Sam Houston in Bldg. 2244/Call the phone number on the front of the permit to

ensure the appropriate person is going to be in the office before you go. c. 502D Air Base Wing Safety Office in Bldg. 4196, Call the phone number on the front of the permit to contact. d. Brook Army Medical Center (BAMC) Facilities Management, Provost Marshall and Safety Manager for projects in the BAMC area in

Bldg. 3600. Call the phone numbers on the front of the permit for directions and to make contact. 4. Locate personnel must accomplish the following on the clearance date:

a. Known utilities must be located and marked b. Original digging permit must be legibly annotated as follows:

(1) Name of Individual who marked/cleared permit. (Printed name and signature)

(2) Indicate if utility is present and marked. (3) Any necessary remarks (i.e. Depth of Line or state unknown)

5. Requestor shall be accompanied by his government point of contact (Quality Assurance Representative or Contracting Officer

Representative- COR) at all times during the processing of the digging permit in Bldg. 4196. 6. Quality Assurance Representative must also sign and date the permit. 7. Completed form (upon initial request) is submitted by the Quality Assurance Representative and contractor (together) for

scheduling to the 502 CES Representative in Bldg 4196. Final form with signatures is returned to the same office for final approval and signature. FINAL APPROVAL is required prior to start of construction/excavation.

8. Short suspense’s will be reviewed and processed on a case by case basis. 9. Digging permits shall be initiated no more than 30 days prior to start of construction. 10. Contractor is required to set offsets and maintain all markings from completion of digging permit and during entire

construction period.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK

SUMMARY OF WORK 01 10 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 STATEMENT OF WORK

A. Scope: The work covered by these specifications consists of furnishing all plant, supervision, labor, equipment and materials required to construct a new Dual Food building and related site development in accordance with these specifications and the applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract.

B. Phasing: Work under this Project shall be accomplished in two (2) phases as follows:

1. Phase 1: Demolition of the existing Popeye's building and related site work:

a. Disconnects, capping and/or sealing site utilities. b. Legal removal, handling, packaging, transport and disposal of universal and

hazardous waste and recovery of ozone depleting substances as set forth in Division 2.

c. Complete demolition of building, structures and site developments. d. Backfill, compaction, grading and seeding and permanent grade stabilization.

2. Phase 2: Complete construction of new Dual Food building and related site development through Substantial Completion.

C. Location: The work to be performed is located on Scott Road directly north of Walters-Scott Gate:

1. Access from Installation security perimeter by Walters-Scott Gate less than 1/2 mile north of Interstate 35.

2. Site is bounded by to the north by Taylor Road, Scott Road on the east, a new separation/access drive on the south and Camp Travis Road on the west.

D. Principal Features of Phase 1:

1. Preparation for demolition activities:

a. Verification of existing data and conditions. b. Cooperation and coordination with JBSA-Sam Houston, AAFES Contracting

Officer and utility owners. c. Provide notifications:

1.) Equipment, fixtures and furnishings salvage operations by AAFES. 2.) Utility disconnects, capping and/or sealing.

2. Universal and hazardous materials abatement:

a. Legal removal, packaging, transport and disposal of:

1.) Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's). 2.) Mercury containing lamps and devices. 3.) Ozone depleting substance recovery.

3. Site and building demolition:

a. Demolish and legal disposal of site utility services and related structures. b. Demolish and legal disposal of miscellaneous equipment, fixtures and

furnishings not salvaged by AAFES. c. Demolish and legal disposal of site paving, outdoor dining patio and site

improvements. d. Demolish and legal disposal of building, canopies and superstructure.


e. Demolish and legal disposal of below grade construction and substructure:

1.) Concrete masonry foundations and piers. 2.) Cast-in-place concrete footing based on parameters indicated and

provisions for Unit Prices.

4. Site restoration/preparation:

a. Backfill and compact all excavations and voids. b. Rough grade, place topsoil and finish grade site as indicated. c. Remove unused materials, unsuitable soil and debris indicated. d. Demolish utilities. e. Clearing and grubbing. f. Export/import of earthwork materials. g. Site grading and compaction. h. Treatment of soils materials used for select fill. i. Horizontal and vertical controls and staking.

E. Principal Features of Phase 2:

1. Construction new facility for:

a. Popeye’s Chicken Food Concept:

1.) Drive through service. 2.) Order/Serving areas. 3.) Preparation areas. 4.) Dry storage. 5.) Shared receiving area. 6.) Medium temperature walk-in refrigeration. 7.) Shared low temperature refrigeration. 8.) Food concept administrative office. 9.) Shared break room.

b. Burger King Food Concept:

1.) Dual OCU drive through service. 2.) Order/Serving areas. 3.) Preparation areas. 4.) Dry storage. 5.) Shared receiving area. 6.) Medium temperature walk-in refrigeration. 7.) Shared low temperature refrigeration. 8.) Food concept administrative office. 9.) Shared break room.

c. Shared Dining Area. d. Shared Dry Storage. e. Common Areas:

1.) Toilet Rooms. 2.) Vestibule. 3.) Mechanical.

2. Site paving:

a. Curb and gutter. b. Parking lot paving. c. Dual drive-up lanes. d. Sidewalks.


3. Construction of all related Civil, Plumbing, HVAC and Electrical work commensurate with the Project Scope:

a. Site utilities. b. Storm water control. c. Site lighting. d. Fire alarm and mass notification systems. e. Plumbing, heating ventilating and air conditioning. f. Security/communication rough-ins, data and sound system. g. Preview boards, menu boards and speaker posts. h. Landscaping and other site amenities.

F. General Provisions:

1. A copy of the General Provisions of the Contract is included in the Solicitation Package.

2. Bidders/Contractors are advised to take note of the following:

a. Cleaning up. b. Material and Workmanship. c. Accident Prevention. d. Existing structures on and surrounding site. e. Utilities and improvements. f. Operation and storage areas. g. Site investigation. h. Permits. i. Other responsibilities indicated in General Provisions.

1.2 SPECIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General working hours on Installation are from 0700 to 01600 hours.

B. No streets will be blocked without Installation CES approval.

C. Contractor shall immediately clean up any debris tracked on to streets resulting from this construction operation.

D. Construction areas, including equipment, temporary office and storage areas, shall be kept clean and neat.

E. No burning is permitted on the Installation.

1.3 UTILITIES (WATER, SEWER, GAS AND ELECTRICITY)

A. Refer to Section 01 51 00, Temporary Utilities.

B. Contractor will be required to pay designated utility companies the prevailing rate for utilities consumed for this Project (water, sewer, gas and electricity).

C. JBSA-Sam Houston utilities information:

1. Water/Sewer – JBSA-Sam Houston:

a. POC: Kelly Kane b. E-mail: [email protected] c. Phone: 210.671.7215

2. Natural gas:


a. JBSA-Sam Houston:

1.) POC: Kelly Kane 2.) E-mail: [email protected] 3.) Phone: 210.671.7215

b. CPS Energy:

1.) POC: Yvonne Haecker 2.) E-mail: [email protected] 3.) Phone: 210.353.3115

3. Electrical power:



b. CPS Energy:

1.) POC: John San Miguel 2.) E-mail: [email protected] 3.) Phone: 210.353.3760

4. DSN Communication (NEC) and Commercial:


1.) POC: Ken Jordon 2.) E-mail: [email protected] 3.) Phone: 210.808.0507

b. AT & T:

1.) POC: Robert Gibson or Vincent Bain 2.) Phone: 210.808.7529

5. Data/LAN – JBSA-Sam Houston:

a. POC: Ken Jordon b. E-mail: [email protected] c. Phone: 210.808.0507

D. Utility service responsibilities:

1. Water/Sewer: Water and sewer utilities are owned and operated by JBSA-Sam Houston.

a. Contractor responsibilities:

1.) Phase 2:

a) Notify and coordinate with JBSA-Sam Houston CES. b) Tap main and provide the complete water service to the new

Dual Food Building as indicated. c) Tap main and provide the complete sewer service to the new

Dual Food Building as indicated.

b. JBSA-Sam Houston CES will inspect Contractor’s installation during construction of the water and sewer services under Phase 2 to ensure compliance with their specifications.

c. Notifications:


1.) Phase 1: 21 calendar days prior to need for disconnects. 2.) Phase 2: 72 hour advance notification will be required.

2. Natural Gas/Power: Natural Gas and Power utilities are owned and operated by CPS Energy.

3. Communications: Communication lines available at the Site are owned by JBSA-Sam Houston and commercial lines are leased back to AT & T.

1.4 LAYING OUT WORK

A. Layout:

1. Dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of work shall be verified by Contractor.

2. Discrepancies between Drawings, specifications, and Conditions shall be referred to the Contracting Officer in writing for adjustment before work affected is performed.

3. Failure to make such notifications shall place responsibility upon Contractor to carry out work in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for the location and elevation of all the construction contemplated by the construction documents.

C. Prior to commencing work, Contractor shall carefully compare and check all Architectural, Civil, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical drawings, each with the other, that in any way affect the locations of elevation of the work to be executed by him.

1. Any discrepancy shall be immediately reported to the Contracting Officer or designated representative for verifications and adjustment.

2. Any duplication of work made necessary by failure or neglect on Contractor's part to comply with this function shall be done at his expense.

D. Field Dimensions:

1. The drawings accompanying these specifications indicate the general design and arrangement of all apparatus, fixtures and accessories necessary to complete the work required.

2. Exact location or arrangement of equipment may be subject to minor changes necessitated by field conditions and shall be made as required without additional cost to AAFES.

3. Measurements shall be verified by actual observations at the construction site, and Contractor shall be responsible for all work fitting into place in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner meeting the approval of the Contracting Officer.

1.5 EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND WORK

A. Carefully check the site where project is to be erected and observe any overhead wires and equipment.

1. Any such work shall be moved, replaced, or protected, as required, whether or not shown or specified.

B. Attention is directed to the existence of pipe and other underground improvements that are shown on the drawings.

1. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to preserve and protect all such improvements shown on the drawings and not scheduled for demolition.

C. Locations of underground lines, shown on the drawings, are based on the best available sources, but are to be regarded as approximate only.


1. Exercise extreme care in locating and identifying these lines before excavating in adjacent areas.

1.6 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SERVICES

A. Contractor shall make utility connections “Hot/Live” whenever possible.

B. When “Hot/Live” connections are not feasible, Contractor shall perform the work under this Contract with a minimum of outage time for all utilities.

1. Contractor may be required to perform the work while the existing utility is in service.

2. Interruption shall be by written approval from utility owner. 3. Existing utility services may only be interrupted when approved, in writing, by the

Contracting Officer and JBSA-Sam Houston CES.

C. When it is necessary to interrupt the existing utilities, Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, JBSA-Sam Houston CES and utility owner in writing at least ten (10) business days in advance of the time he desires the existing service to be interrupted.

1. Interruption time shall be kept to a minimum. 2. Depending upon the activities at the facility that require continuous service from

the existing utility, an interruption may not be subject to schedule at the time desired by the Contractor.

a. In such cases the interruption may have to be scheduled at a time of minimum requirement of demand for the utility including nights, weekends or holidays.

b. The amount of time requested by the Contractor for interruption of existing utility services shall be as approved, in writing, by the Contracting Officer, JBSA-Sam Houston CES and utility owner.

1.7 EXCAVATION

A. Prior to commencing any excavation work the Contractor shall obtain a valid Excavation Permit from JBSA-Sam Houston CES.

B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to submit a completed FH Form 200-X10 application, obtain the necessary signatures and coordinate for the permit.

C. Forms shall be obtained from JBSA-Sam Houston CES, JBSA-Sam Houston, Texas by contacting POC listed in Section 01 00 00.

1.8 BARRICADES AND WARNING DEVICES

A. Contractor shall provide barricades and lighting devices, in accordance with Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices by Department of Transportation, latest Edition, at all points of excavation and construction in vehicle traffic areas.

B. Refer to Section 01 55 00, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls for additional information and provide detailed Traffic Control Plan for review and approval by Contracting Officer and JBSA-Sam Houston Safety Officer.

1. Include provisions for transportation and delivery of materials and equipment to site without interference with normal traffic operations.

2. Include provisions for controlling and directing customers on site for ingress and egress to and from Temporary Parking without interference with other site functions.


1.9 FIRE PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall at all times maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of fire damage.

B. All scrap materials, rubbish, and trash shall be removed daily from in and about the building and shall not be permitted to be scattered on adjacent property.

C. Suitable storage space shall be provided 50 feet minimum outside the building area for storing flammable materials and paints.

1. No storage will be permitted within the building.

D. Excess flammable liquids being used inside the building shall be kept in closed metal containers and removed from the building during unused periods.

E. Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations of NFPA Nos. 10 and 241, however, in all cases a minimum of four fire extinguishers shall be available for each area of work and temporary building.

F. Fire Codes: Contractor shall obey all requirements of the National Fire Codes, Army Fire Regulations and Installation Fire Regulations, as they relate to his work on this Installation.

1. JBSA-Sam Houston Fire Department:

a. Assistant Chief for Prevention (AHJ): Dana Pelletier b. E-mail: [email protected] c. Phone: 210.221.5452

G. Contractor shall provide a fire extinguisher at each location where cutting and welding is being performed.

1. Where electric or gas welding or cutting is done, interposed shields of incombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks and hot metal.

2. When temporary heating devices are used they shall be monitored when operating when other workmen are not on the premises.

1.10 WELDING PERMIT & EMERGENCIES

A. Prior to commencing any welding, Contractor shall obtain a JBSA-Sam Houston Hot Permit by contacting the following:

1. JBSA-Sam Houston Hot Permit applications:

a. POC: Scott P. Rath b. E-mail: [email protected] c. Phone: 210.221.5450

B. All emergencies shall also be reported by dialing 911.

1.11 PROTECTION FOR OPEN FLAME DEVICES

A. When open flame and/or spark producing devices, i.e., acetylene oxygen welding equipment, electric arc welding, sweat soldering, etc., are employed for job accomplishment, the following procedures are mandatory:


1. Inspect all surroundings and equipment to insure that combustible substances are not present in any area where contact of metal at a temperature above the flashpoint of any compound is possible.

2. Ensure that no open containers or spills of combustible substances are present. 3. Ensure that ignition is not possible by conduction, convection, radiation, or

dispersion of molten metal. 4. Proper protection equipment and practices will be used, i.e., fireproof blankets,

wetting of surrounding area, removal o combustible materials where practicable, earth filled backing and portable fire extinguishers of proper type on hand.

5. When the above devices are being used notify the Installation Fire Department 24 hours ahead of usage and obtain a permit from POC listed in 1.8 above.

1.12 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Work not included: Except for such auxiliary work as is shown or specified or is necessary as a part of the construction, the following work is not included in the Contract:

1. Any work shown, but marked "NOT IN CONTRACT" (N.I.C.). 2. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by the Vendors or

Concessionaires. 3. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by AAFES.

1.13 AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A. See Specification Section 01 10 17, AAFES Furnished and Installed Equipment (AF/AI).

1.14 AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A. See Specification Section 01 10 18, AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment (AF/CI).

1.15 LINING OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALS

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain in the installation of jointed floor, wall, and ceiling materials that:

1. The joints line through in a straight line and in both directions wherever possible. 2. The joints relate to all openings and breaks in the structure and be symmetrically

placed wherever possible including:

a. Grills and registers. b. Lighting fixtures. c. Equipment. d. Miscellaneous items not specifically address but requiring alignment for

aesthetic purpose.

3. If, because of the non-related sizes of the various materials and locations of openings, etc., it is not possible to accomplish the above, Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer or designated representative to determine the most satisfactory arrangement.

4. The Contractor shall establish centerlines for all trades.

1.16 INTEGRATING WORK

A. All streets, buildings, and other improvements shall be protected from damage.


B. Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the project work and shall not in any way interfere with or obstruct the ingress or egress to and from street or adjacent property.

C. If new work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised not to disturb or damage the existing work more than necessary.

D. All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired, and restored to its original condition at no cost to AAFES, the Army or JBSA-Sam Houston.

1.17 HEADROOM UNDER PIPES

A. All horizontal runs of plumbing and heating pipes and/or electrical conduit suspended from ceilings shall provide for a maximum headroom clearance, but in no case shall this clearance be less than 8'-0" without written consent from the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

B. Where piping or conduit is left exposed within a room, the same shall run true to plumb, horizontal or intended planes.

C. Where possible, uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and/or adjacent wall, floor, or ceiling surfaces.

1.18 PATCHING GOVERNMENT-OWNED FACILITIES

A. Government-owned structures, facilities, streets, curbs, walks and other features and landscaping that are damaged or removed due to required excavations or other construction work, shall be patched, repaired or replaced, and be left in their original state of repair by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer, JBSA-Sam Houston CES and of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.19 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING

A. Drawings showing location of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., are diagrammatic and job conditions may not always permit installation in the location shown.

B. When this situation occurs, it shall be brought to the Contracting Officer or designated representative’s immediate attention and the relocation determined in a joint conference.

C. The Contractor will be held responsible for relocating any items without first obtaining the Contracting Officer's approval.

D. He shall remove and relocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.20 OVERLOADING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for excessive overloading of any part or parts of structures beyond their safe calculated carrying capacities by placing of materials, equipment, tools, machinery, or any other item thereon.

B. No loads shall be placed on floors or roofs before they have attained their permanent and safe strength.


1.21 STANDARDS

A. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title of a specific standard such as Commercial Standard, a Federal Specification, a trade association standard, or other similar standard shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof, and any amendment or supplement thereto, in effect on the date of invitation for proposals, except as limited to type, class, or grade, or modified in such reference, and except as otherwise indicated.

B. The standard referred to, except as modified in the specifications, shall have full force and effect as though printed in these specifications.

1. Where Federal Specifications are referred to as a measure of quality and standard, they refer to Federal Specifications established by the Procurement Division of the United States Government and are available from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office.

2. Where Federal Specification numbers are used, they refer to the latest edition including amendments thereto.

3. Where Commercial Standards are referred to as a measure of quality, standard, and method of fabrication, they refer to Commercial Standards issued by the U.S. Department of Commerce.

4. Where ASTM Serial Numbers are used, they refer to the latest tentative specifications, standards specifications, standards methods, or standard method of testing issued by the American Society for Testing and Materials.

1.22 CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE

A. Except where tests and/or inspections in connection with structural or other materials are specified or required by applicable laws, rules, and regulations, manufacturer's certificate covering conformance with the requirements of the above mentioned Federal Specifications and Commercial Standards may be acceptable in lieu of such items.

B. Such certificates shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer and designated representative for all items so specified.

1.23 OCCUPANCY BY THE EXCHANGE

A. The Exchange shall reserve the right and privilege of partial occupancy during progress of the work.

B. Access shall be allowed at all times to the Exchange and its own Contractors in the endeavor.

1.24 TESTS AND REPORTS

A. Refer to outline requirements in Section 01 45 16, Quality Control and Section 01 45 29, Testing Laboratory Services.

B. See Specification Sections for detailed requirements of testing and reporting.

1.25 REFERENCES

A. All references to the word "Government" in the specifications shall mean Army and Air Force Exchange Service (AAFES).


B. Wherever the word "provide" is used in the Contract Documents as a directive, it shall be interpreted as meaning "provide and install completely and ready for use".

C. Definitions:

1. Vendor: Person or persons selling any material item. 2. Base or Facility: Location on which Project is being constructed. 3. Concessionaire: Person who is directly responsible for the lease of and operation

of the concession. 4. Architect-Engineer: That person or firm responsible for preparing the working

drawings and specifications.

a. h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS 600 West Main Street, Suite 2 Post Office Box 820 Carbondale, Illinois 62901 618.457.5709

5. AAFES or Exchange: Army and Air Force Exchange Service. 6. Inspection Agency: Project Construction Inspector contracted by AAFES.

1.26 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Do not incorporate any materials or equipment into the work that contain asbestos, lead-based paint, PCB’s or any other know hazardous material.

B. AAFES has caused a non-destructive hazardous materials survey and other hazardous materials evaluations to be performed at the existing Popeye's Building 380 scheduled for demolition under Phase 1 upon completion of the new Dual Food Project.

1. This hazardous materials survey was performed on 01 November 2016 by:

a. AEHS, Inc. 4402 Center Gate San Antonio, Texas 78217

Phone: (210) 656-9300 E-mail: [email protected]

2. Results of this non-destruction hazardous material survey work is presented in the "LIMITED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS (Asbestos, Lead, PCB & Mercury) SURVEY" contained in Section 02 81 10, Hazardous Materials Report.

3. Abatement of universal and hazardous wastes defined in the Survey shall be removed under this construction contract as set forth in Section 02 81 33, Removal of Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's) and Section 02 81 34, Removal of Mercury Containing Lamps & Devices.

4. Recovery of all ozone depleting substances shall be contained, transported and disposed of in accordance with requirements set forth in Section 02 91 10, Ozone Depleting Substance Recovery.

C. Discovery of unidentified hazardous Site materials:

1. Removal and disposal of Hazardous Materials not identified in the Survey found in Section 02 81 10, Hazardous Materials Report, is not included in this Contract.

2. If the Contractor encounters such materials, immediately notify JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental, the Contracting Officer and designated representative.

3. Immediately cease work until resolution is determined by JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental and the Contracting Officer.


4. Advise Contracting Officer or designated representative in writing of the extent and time delay anticipated where such materials are encountered.

1.27 SUBMISSION OF PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Contractor shall submit a monthly progress report and photographs taken on or about the first of every month to the AAFES Contracting Officer, Project Manager and designated representative showing the general conditions of the work as viewed from the north, south, east, west where applicable and interior.

B. Photographs shall be digital (minimum of 1200 pixels x 1600 pixels [2 MB]) with a minimum of twenty (20) 3" x 5" standard prints accompanying each Application for Payment.

C. Each print shall be identified by date of exposure, project title, and AAFES Project Number, location and direction taken.

D. The Contractor may also submit a digital video of the above requirements as an option to photographs.

1.28 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS FURNISHED

A. After Contract award, and for construction purposes only, the Contractor will be provided:

1. A record set of “Issued for Construction” Drawings and Specifications. 2. A reproducible set of the “Issued for Construction” Drawings and Specifications in

electronic format (CD/.pdf)

B. Additional copies will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)

3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

END 01 10 00.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 10 – UNIT PRICES

UNIT PRICES 01 10 10-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE

A. Contractor provide:

1. Unit prices as indicated for specified items. 2. Conformity to administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Contract Documents.

B. Division 1 – General Requirements.

C. Section 02 41 16 – Structure Demolition.

D. Section 31 10 00 – Site Clearing.

E. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price means a fixed price, including all overhead, profit, labor, equipment, transporting and all other costs of whatever nature and character, for a specific unit of work.

B. Unit price shall be included in Contractor’s proposal on AAFES Solicitation Form 4450-024, as a price per unit of in place measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices shall include all necessary removal and/or incorporation of materials, plus cost for hauling and disposal and/or delivery, placement and/or installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment:

1. Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices.

2. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C. AAFES reserves the right to reject Contractor’s measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at AAFES' expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

D. List of Unit Prices:

1. A list of unit prices is included in Part 3 of this Section. 2. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for

materials described under each unit price.

UNIT PRICES 01 10 10-2

2 PRODUCTS

A. See Section 31 20 00, Earthwork for specific fill material, placement and compaction to backfill excavations at the site of the existing Popeye's restaurant scheduled for demolition in Phase 2 of this Project.

B. See Section 31 20 00, Earthwork for specific products and methods of treatment for on-site select fill soil materials and imported select fill soil materials to reduce soil plasticity index (PI) and increase soil stiffness.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES

A. Refer to Section 02 41 16, Structure Demolition for detailed description of work and method for computing cost for the following items related to demolition of the Popeye's restaurant under Phase 1 of this Project:

1. Demolition cost per in place cubic yard of reinforced concrete mat footing to be loaded, hauled and legally disposed of or recycle off-site.

2. Include in place costs for hauling, placement and compaction of fill material to properly backfill excavations related to reinforced concrete footing demolition.

B. Refer to Section 31 20 00, Earthwork for detailed description of work and method for computing cost for the following items:

1. Materials and Unit of Measure:

a. Material: Lime. b. Unit of measure: Per ton (2,000 pounds) of material delivered to site.

2. Placement and Unit of Measure:

a. Method: Lime treatment for subgrade preparation. b. Unit of measure: Inches compacted depth per square yard of subgrade

treated. END 01 10 10.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 17 – AAFES FURNISHED & INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

AAFES FURNISHED & INSTALLED EQUIPMENT 01 10 17-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED PROPERTY (AF/AI) or (VF/VI)

A. Property: Property is indicated on the drawings.

B. Schedule: Contractor shall schedule early completion of designated areas for beneficial occupancy by AAFES usage prior to completion of entire project.

C. AAFES or others, including vendors and concessionaires, will furnish and install equipment as indicated on Equipment Plans and Schedules in the drawings.

1. Contractor's Duties:

a. Provide access for AAFES personnel. b. Coordinate work and cooperate with the installers of the property so that

installation can be accomplished in accordance with construction schedule. c. Provide mechanical and electrical rough-ins in coordination with AFFES

furnished and installed equipment and building systems. d. Provide final hard wired or piped mechanical and electrical connections

between property and rough-ins where indicated. e. Provide initial start-up and testing of equipment to ensure operation for

intended use. f. Provide written notification to and coordination with Contracting Officer or

designated representative for final equipment start-up and training conducted by AAFES.

2. AAFES Duties:

a. Inspect designated area prior to use and issue statement of acceptance of area for installation of property.

b. Make final plug-in or quick couple mechanical and electrical connections between property and building systems and Contractor provided rough-ins and devices where indicated.

c. Provide custodial services for designated areas during use after beneficial occupancy.

d. Provide all equipment start-up, training and training documentation.

1.2 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES

A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing to Contracting Officer or designated representative at least 30 days in advance of the designated delivery date.

B. If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of AAFES furnished property the Contractor shall be responsible for storage, protection and/or redelivery cost.

C. Should AAFES be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit his request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under this contract and as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon which he can file a claim under these conditions.


1.3 AAFES ACTIVITIES AFFECTING PROGRESS OF WORK:

A. Walk-in Coolers/Freezer:

1. Schedule date of possession of these areas for installation of walk-in boxes, fixtures, equipment and accessories with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

2. Coordinate with AAFES cooler/freezer supplier and schedule Contractor provided pipe/power portals and equipment supports with other roofing system work prior to designated delivery date of walk-in boxes.

B. Popeye’s Preparation and Serving: Schedule date of possession of this area for installation of fixtures, equipment, accessories and signage with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

C. Burger King Preparation and Serving: Schedule date of possession of this area for installation of fixtures, equipment, accessories and signage with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

D. Dining Area and Drink Station: Schedule date of possession of this area for installation of fixtures, equipment, accessories and signage with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

1.4 ACCEPTANCE OF AREAS FOR BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY

A. Completion: Construction in each area at date scheduled for its use and possession by AAFES or others:

1. Shall be sufficiently complete, in accordance with Contract Documents, so that AAFES or others may occupy the area for the use for which it is intended.

2. Comply with Contract Clauses titled Inspection of Construction, and Use and Possession Prior to Completion.

B. Inspection: Prior to acceptance by AAFES of an area for beneficial occupancy:

1. The Contracting Officer will conduct an inspection of the specific area. 2. A list of deficiencies will be provided to the Contractor.

C. Acceptance: If the Contracting Officer determines the specific area is sufficiently complete for beneficial occupancy by AAFES:

1. The area will be accepted in writing with the exception of deficiencies listed. 2. The deficiencies listed shall be completed or corrected prior to final acceptance at

the completion of the project.

D. Damage: Damage resulting from AAFES' use will not be considered the Contractor's responsibility.

E. General Provisions: Refer to clause entitled "Final Inspection and Acceptance" of the AAFES "General Provisions".


2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WALK-IN COOLERS/FREEZER:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Equipment and Furnishing Items: AAFES will furnish and install the items indicated (AF/AI).

B. Contractor Provide: Sleeves, core drilling, initial start-up and equipment testing and coordination for routing lines and final start-up and training for items furnished and installed by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.

1. Coordinate with cooler/freezer manufacturer and installer for size and location of rooftop mounted condensers on building.

a. Provide appropriately sized equipment supports and counter flashing as indicated and specified in Section 07 54 00 for all roof-mounted condenser equipment.

b. Provide support angles between bar joists under roof deck at equipment supports and provide solid blocking anchorage to roof deck support structure.

c. Provide equipment support flashing to TPO roof membrane.

2. Coordinate with cooler/freezer manufacturer and installer for location of roof mounted pipe portals for routing refrigerant lines, power and control wiring inside building. (Routing of line sets, power and control wiring across roof and on exterior building wall will NOT be allowed and shall be concealed within wall and finish ceiling construction.)

a. Provide appropriately sized pipe portals and top housings as indicated and specified in Section 07 54 00 and 07 62 00 for line sets, power conduits and control wiring.

b. Provide solid blocking and pipe portal curb anchorage to roof deck support structure.

c. Provide pipe/power portal flashing to TPO roof membrane. d. Provide core drilling and/or sleeves for routing lines and wiring between roof

of building to interior and through exterior wall into walk-in boxes.

3. Installation of standard and tapered insulation system, edge blocking, TPO membrane roofing, base flashing and manufactured sheet metal counter flashing and fascia as specified in Sections 07 54 00 and 07 62 00.

2.2 POPEYE’S PREPARATION & SERVING:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Serving Items: AAFES will furnish and install the items indicated (AF/AI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of equipment requirements, rough-ins, hard-piped and hard-wired final connection for items furnished and installed by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.

2.3 BURGER KING PREPARATION & SERVING:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Serving Items: AAFES will furnish and install the items indicated (AF/AI).



2.4 DINING AREA AND DRINK STATION:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Dining and Drink Station Items: AAFES will furnish and install the items indicated (AF/AI).



END 01 10 17.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 18 – AAFES FURNISHED/ CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

AAFES FURNISHED/ CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT 01 10 18-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (AF/CI):

A. AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed (AF/CI) and Vendor Furnished/Contractor Installed (VF/CI) equipment shall be handled in accordance with the "Army and Air Force Exchange Service General Provisions" clause entitled "AAFES Furnished Property".

B. AAFES will furnish equipment indicated for installation by the Contractor and will provide final equipment start-up and training.

C. Contractor shall provide:

1. Coordination and confirmation of exact equipment dimensions and rough-in requirements for all equipment furnished by AAFES.

2. All rough-ins and final connections to equipment designated for installation by Contractor.

3. Provide initial start-up and testing of equipment to ensure operation for intended use.

4. Provide written notification to and coordination with Contracting Officer or designated representative for final equipment start-up and training conducted by AAFES.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 POPEYE’S PREPARATION & SERVING:

A. AAFES Furnished, Contractor Installed Food Service Equipment and Fixtures: AAFES will furnish the equipment and fixtures indicated for installation in the Back-of-House Preparation Areas and Serving Areas for installation by the Contractor (AF/CI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of equipment requirements, complete installation of equipment including appropriate rough-ins, and final connections for items furnished by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth in these Solicitation Documents.

2.2 BURGER KING PREPARATION & SERVING:

A. AAFES Furnished, Contractor Installed Equipment and Fixtures: AAFES will furnish the equipment, fixtures and signage indicated for installation in the Burger King Preparation and Serving Area for installation by the Contractor (AF/CI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of equipment requirements, complete installation of equipment including appropriate rough-ins, and final connections for items furnished by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth in these Solicitation Documents.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES

A. Designate required delivery date for each product.


1. Notify the Contracting Officer or designated representative in writing at least 60 days in advance of the date that AAFES furnished equipment and furnishings will be needed.

2. Shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all plumbing and electrical rough-ins will be furnished by AAFES.

B. The equipment, fixtures and furnishings will be received at the job site by a representative of AAFES who will jointly, with the Contractor, verify condition and quantities.

1. The representative will then effect receipted transfer of custody of the equipment, fixtures and furnishings to the Contractor.

2. After receipt of equipment, fixtures and furnishings Contractor shall:

a. Unload, handle, store (on-site), protect, uncrate, assemble, install set in final position, align, join, level, and make all utility connections to all items of equipment.

b. Installation shall be performed in accordance with the specifications, equipment, fixture and furnishing plans and schedules shown on the Drawings and the rough-in drawings provided by AAFES.

c. Construct all openings, furnish and install required sleeves and furnish and install all reinforcing, miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and bolts necessary to secure AAFES furnished equipment in place.

d. Repair or replace items damaged as a result of Contractor's operations. e. Apply finish indicated, if any.

3. The installation shall be complete in all respects, including mechanical and electrical hook ups, and put into good operating condition.

4. Upon completion of installation Contractor shall provide:

a. Start-up and adjustments to all equipment. b. Written notification to Contracting Officer or designated representative of

completion and readiness for demonstration and training to appropriate personnel.

c. Establish date, time and provide written notification of training sessions to Contracting Officer or designated representative and to manufacturer’s representative necessary to conduct training sessions.

d. Provide written notification to appropriate personnel required in attendance at training sessions.

e. Maintain an attendance sheet and minutes of each training session for submittal at Project Closeout.

f. Provide video recording and four (4) CD copies of each training session and equipment demonstration for submittal at Final Closeout.

C. AAFES Duties:

1. Deliver all AAFES furnished items to the job site. 2. Schedule delivery date with supplier in accordance with Progress Chart. 3. Provide Contractor with installation drawings and instructions. 4. Provide Contractor with shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all

plumbing and electrical rough-ins.

3.2 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES:

A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing at least 60 days in advance of the designated delivery date.


B. If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of AAFES furnished equipment the Contractor shall be responsible for storage and delivery cost.

C. Should AAFES be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit his request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under his contract and as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon which he can file a claim under these conditions.

END 01 10 18.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 60 – AAFES SAFETY POLICIES & PROCEDURES

AAFES SAFETY POLICIES & PROCEDURES 01 10 60-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Contractor required health and safety plan.

1. Contractor is responsible for risk assessment plan. 2. Contractor shall maintain OSHA permissible exposure limits related by the risk

assessment of 25 ppm (170 mg/cubic meter) during any 8 hour work shift for a 40-hour week

B. Construction Hazard Plan.


A. Submittals – Section 01 33 00 (Construction Hazard Plan, Job Safety and Health Plan, Emergency Response Plan).

B. AAFES Environmental Protection – Section 01 35 43.

C. Project Record Documents - Section 01 78 00.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

1. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Publication:

a. EM 385-1-1 Safety and Health Requirements Manual (03 November 2003).

2. OSHA 1910 R.E.G. - 29CFR, OSHA 1910.120

B. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for AAFES approval: The following items shall be submitted for AAFES approval:

1. Designation of Safety Representative - The Contractor shall designate in writing a qualified employee OSHA Trained under 1910.120 responsible for the overall supervision of all accident prevention activities.

a. Duties shall include ensuring applicable safety requirements are incorporated into work methods and inspecting the job site to ensure that safety measures and instructions are actually being applied.

b. This person shall be on site at all time that work is in progress.

2. The Contractor shall be trained/certified in OSHA 1910.120 procedures. 3. All other employees performing site work will meet OSHA 1910 training

requirements for their job capacity.


B. Submittals for Information Only - The following items shall be Contractor certified:

1. Job Hazard Analysis: Contractor shall develop a job hazard analysis for presentation at the pre-construction conference.

a. The Contractor's job hazard analysis shall list potential hazards that could arise during the course of the work.

b. For each hazard, the applicable paragraph of EM 385-1-1 shall be cited.

2. Job Safety and Health Plan.

a. The Contractor shall develop a Job Safety and Health Plan for presentation at the Pre-construction conference.

b. The Contractor's Safety Plan shall make whatever provisions are necessary to conduct his work in accordance with current OSHA standards.

c. The safety and health plan must specifically address the excavation portion of construction and will be specific to all Hazardous Materials (Haz-Mats), and incorporate decontamination procedures for personnel and equipment, continuous vapor monitoring, a prohibition against eating in proximity to the site, and a prohibition against the smoking of tobacco products in the proximity to the site.

d. The following are minimum requirements for the health and safety plan:

1.) The Contractor is responsible for all compounds and degredation products addressed by the Risk Assessment Plan.

2.) Specialized Designs: Specialized designs will be provided when the situation requires.

a) Examples of such designs include, but are not limited to, vapor barriers in areas of known vapor hazard.

3.) Safety Plans: Safety Plans will be the responsibility of the Contractor for construction areas identified by the installation and/or AAFES as areas of known hazards only.

a) These plans are required by 29 CFR 1910 and are the responsibility of the Contractor.

b) This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation by the Contractor.

4.) Minimum Requirements for the Health and Safety Plan are as follows:

a) Must be kept on site and must be written. b) Will contain a hazard analysis (safety and health risk) for

each site task and operation (to be supplied by the installation).

c) Will include employee training (per paragraph (3) of 1910.120).

d) Will include personal protective equipment to be used by employees for each of the site tasks and operations (paragraph (g) (5) of 1910.120).

e) Will include provision for medical surveillance (paragraph (f) of 1910.120).


f) Will include the frequency and types of air monitoring, personal monitoring, environmental sampling techniques and instruments to be used (their maintenance and calibration).

g) Will include a site control program (per paragraph (d) of 1910.120) to be coordinated with the installation.

h) Will include a decontamination procedure (per paragraph (k) of 1910.120).

i) Will include an emergency response plan (per paragraph (1) of 1910.120).

j) Will include a confined space entry procedure (per 1910.146, 147 or program equivalent).

k) Will include provision for spill containment (per paragraph (j) of 1910.120).

l) Will include pre-entry briefings (prior to each site task activity) for all employees involved in the task, supervision, or emergency response.

m) Written verification of adherence to the "plan" by a Safety and Health Supervisor is required (the supervisor must meet the 1910.120 training requirements for supervisors).

n) Deficiencies will be corrected immediately upon discovery and after consultation with the AAFES Contracting Officer.

e. Hazard Response Plan: The planned, unplanned or non-predicted discovery of such hazards as transite pipe, contaminated soils, and other possible hazards will be addressed within an Emergency Response Plan (ERP) by Contractor.

f. This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation by the Contractor.

g. Material Safety Data Sheets will be maintained at the site for all hazardous materials in use.

1.5 MONTHLY SAFETY MEETINGS

A. Schedule safety meetings with Contractor and subcontractor personnel on a monthly basis in conjunction with Progress/Pay Meetings.

1. Minutes of safety meetings shall be prepared and signed by the Contractor. 2. Concurrence signed by Inspection Section and the original submitted to the

Contracting Officer for inclusion in the contract file.

1.6 ACCIDENT REPORTING AND RECORD KEEPING

A. Accident reporting and record keeping shall be in accordance with Section 2, EM 385-1-1.

B. Telephonic reports of injuries or property damage will be made as soon as possible after the incident and will be followed by a copy of U.S. Army Investigation Accident Report (DA Form 285).



3 EXECUTION

3.1 LIFE OF CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall comply with EM 385-1-1 and all provisions of this section during the life of the contract.

3.2 HEAD PROTECTION (HARD HATS)

A. All work sites under this contract are designated Hard Hat Areas.

B. Contractor shall post the area in accordance with Paragraph 7.C.03, EM 385-1-1 and shall ensure that all personnel, vendors and visitors use hard hats while within the limits of the work site.

C. Other PPE as required by referenced publications including, but not limited to, reflective vests, eye protection and steel toed shoes shall be worn at all times within construction area.

END 01 10 60.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 13 00 – AAFES SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES

AAFES SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES 01 13 00-1

1 GENERAL


A. Reference Standards.

B. Licenses and Permits.

C. Safety.

D. Affirmative Procurement Program.

E. Ozone Depleting Substances.

F. Lead Based Paint.

G. Cleaning & Debris Control.

H. Nuisance Dumping & Polluting Activities.

I. Stormwater Pollution Prevention.

J. Excavation at IRP Sites.

K. Contaminated Soil.

L. Suspected Hazardous Materials.

M. Oil-Filled or Impregnated Electrical Components.

N. Spill Response and Reporting.

O. Waste Disposal and Environmental Protection.


A. Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of JBSA-Sam Houston.

B. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work.

C. Section 01 10 60 – AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures.

D. Section 01 31 13 – Project Management & Coordination.

E. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

F. Section 01 35 43 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

G. Section 01 45 16 – Quality Control.


H. Section 01 45 29 – Testing Laboratory Services.

I. Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities.

J. Section 01 52 00 – Field Offices & Sheds.

K. Section 01 65 00 – Material & Equipment.

L. Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management & Disposal.

M. Section 01 81 00 – Sustainable Design Requirements.

N. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Federal, State and Local Codes and Ordinances take precedence over these Specifications and Drawings where conflicts occur, unless the Drawings or Specifications call for more stringent requirements.

1. Notify the Contracting Officer and designated representative of conflicts in writing.

B. Comply with all applicable laws, building and construction codes, OSHA Safety and Health Regulations and applicable requirements of any governmental agency under whose jurisdiction this Work is being performed.

C. Obtain a copy of standards referenced in the various Specification Sections.

1. Maintain copy at the jobsite during execution of Work to which the standard applies.

D. Construction that is not governed by the contract specifications will be governed by the more stringent provisions of the latest published edition or statute adopted edition, of the following applicable codes, regulations and standards.

1. ACI – American Concrete Institute.

a. ACI 318-11 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. b. ACI 530-11 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.

2. ADAAG – Americans With Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities, U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.

3. AISC – American Institute of Steel Construction.

a. AISC 360-10, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

4. AISI – American Iron and Steel Institute,

a. AISI S100-07, Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members, with Supplement 2.

5. ANSI – American National Standards Institute. 6. ASCE/SEI – American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute.

a. ASCE/SEI 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

7. ASHRAE – American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.

a. Energy Conservation in New Buildings Design (ASHRAE 90.1). b. Standard for Natural and Mechanical Ventilation (No. 62).


8. ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 9. ASPE – American Society of Plumbing Engineers. 10. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials, Standards and Certifications. 11. ATBCB – Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. 12. AWS – American Welding Society.

a. AWS D1.1-1.4, Structural Welding Code, latest edition. b. AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum, latest edition.

13. CFR – Code of Federal Regulations. 14. CPSP – Consumer Products Safety Commission.

a. Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Material.

15. CRSI – Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.

a. Manual of Standard Practice, 2009 edition.

16. EPA – Environmental Protection Agency.

a. Oil Pollution Prevention, 40 CFR, Ch.1, Part 112, 1July 2004 Edition.

17. FM – Factory Mutual, Standards and Certifications. 18. I3A – Technical Criteria for the Installation Information Infrastructure Architecture,

February 2010. 19. IBC – International Building Code, 2015 Edition. 20. IECC – International Energy Conservation Code, 2012 Edition. 21. IMC – International Mechanical Code, 2012. 22. IPC – International Plumbing Code, 2012. 23. MIL-STD-3007F – Standard Practice for unified Facilities Criteria and Unified

Facilities Guide Specifications, 15 February 2006. 24. NCMA – National Concrete Masonry Association.

a. Specifications for the design and Construction of Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry.

25. NESHAPS – National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants. 26. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association.

a. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 2015. b. NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, 2013. c. NFPA 13, Wet Pipe Sprinkler Standard, 2013. d. NFPA 17A, Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems, 2013. e. NFPA 54, ANSI Z223.1-2015 National Fuel Gas Code, 2015. f. NFPA 58, Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code, 2011. g. NFPA 70, National Electric Code, 2014. h. NFPA 72, Fire Alarm Code, 2013. i. NFPA 96, Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations, 2014.

27. NLMA – Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association.

a. National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings.

28. OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

a. Occupational Safety and Health Act.

29. PCA – Portland Concrete Association.

a. Concrete Floors on Grade.

30. PCI – Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute.


31. UFAS – Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards, U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.

32. UFC – Unified Facilities Criteria.

a. UFC 1-200-01, General Building Requirements, 1 July 2013 (including Change 2, 1 November 2014).

b. UFC 1-300-08, Criteria for Transfer and Acceptance of DoD Real Property, 16 April 2009 (including Change 2, August 2011).

c. UFC 3-120-10, Interior Design 15 June 2006 (including Change 1, July 2007).

d. UFC 3-201-01, Civil Engineering, 1 June 2013. e. UFC 3-202-02, Landscape Architecture, 23 February 2009 (including Change

1, November 2009). f. UFC 3-310-01, Structural Load Data, 25 May 2005. g. UFC 3-310-04, Seismic Design for Buildings, 1 June 2013. h. UFC 3-401-01, Mechanical Engineering, 1 July 2013. i. UFC 3-410-01, Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems, 1 July

2013 (including Change 1, October 2014). j. UFC 3-420-01, Plumbing Systems, 25 October 2004 (including Change 8, 27

October 2009). k. UFC 3-501-01, Electrical Engineering, 3 February 2010 replaces 3-500-10

(draft) and 3-500-10N (draft) (including Change 2, 1 July 2012). l. UFC 3-600-01, Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities, 26 September 2006

(including Change 3, 1 March 2013). m. UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings, 09

February 2012 (including Change 1, 01 October 2013). n. UFC 4-010-02, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standoff Distances for Building

(FOUO), 09 February 2012.

33. UL – Underwriters Laboratories, Standards and Certifications. 34. I3A – Technical Criteria for the Installation Information Infrastructure Architecture,

February 2010. 35. Other applicable codes and standards as applicable or as referenced by the

individual specification Sections.

1.4 LICENSES AND PERMITS

A. Contractor shall obtain and maintain current for the duration of this Contract, all required Federal, State and local licenses and permits.

1. All associated fees and taxes shall be paid by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government.

B. Obtain from Base security all required vehicle and entry permits as specified in Section 01 10 00, Summary of Work.

C. Obtain any additional permits as required by JBSA-Sam Houston CES at no additional cost to the Government.

1.5 SAFETY

A. Comply with all Federal and State regulations concerning safety of personnel and equipment.

1. All Contractor personnel shall wear hard hats and steel toe safety shoes while on the project site.


2. All Contractor personnel shall wear hearing protection (ear muffs or ear plugs) when required by OSHA regulations.

B. Ensure that lock out, tag out procedures are established and used as directed by 29 CFR 1910.145.

C. Comply with all safety, traffic and protection requirements in effect on JBSA-Sam Houston.

D. Provide safety barriers around open excavations, openings in floors and other hazards created by the Contractor’s activities.

E. The Contracting Officer may direct the Contractor to cease activities that are deemed unsafe.

1.6 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT PROGRAM

A. These standards apply to all new construction, demolition, rehabilitation, alteration, modification, repair, and maintenance of existing facilities.

B. In an effort to comply with the affirmative procurement requirements of Section 6002 of the Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) and Executive Order 13101, the government strongly promotes the use of the recycled and recovered materials and products identified in the Environmental Protection Agency’s Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines.

C. Recycled and recovered materials and products shall be used throughout the project in quantities as set forth in the technical Sections of the specifications and subject to compliance with performance requirements of these specifications.

1.7 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

A. No ozone depleting substances (refrigerants or any other compounds) shall be used in any capacity on this project.

1.8 LEAD BASE PAINT

A. No paint with a lead content of 0.06 percent or greater shall be used in any capacity on this project.

1.9 CLEANING AND DEBRIS CONTROL

A. During the term of this Contract, the Contractor shall remove any materials and equipment that are not required for the completion of the work as promptly as possible.

1. All debris shall be removed from the site and legally disposed. 2. The Contractor shall take particular care to eliminate any hazards created by his

operations.

B. The Contractor is responsible for any damage caused by his debris without additional cost to the Government.

C. The Contractor shall maintain at all times during his work at this Project Site a strict windblown debris control program.


1. This program shall ensure no windblown debris or other debris from his work shall contaminate or interfere with any access to or operation of any facility or any parking area, road or street.

1.10 NUISANCE DUMPING AND POLLUTING ACTIVITIES

A. Polluting, dumping, or discharging of any harmful, nuisance, or regulated materials (such as concrete truck washout, vehicle maintenance fluids, residue from saw cutting operations, solid waste or hazardous substances) into building drains, site drains, streams, waterways, holding ponds or to the ground surface is not permitted.

1. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damages resulting from dumping or discharges.

2. Contractor shall conduct activities in such a fashion to avoid creating any legal nuisance, including but not limited to, suppression of noise and dust, control of erosion, and implementation of other measures as necessary to minimize off site impacts of work activities.

B. Fugitive dust emissions (airborne dust generated by vehicles operating on unpaved surfaces, transfer or transport of dust producing materials, etc.) shall be controlled at the construction site, along haul routes and at staging areas.

1. Water spraying shall be conducted as necessary to minimize fugitive dust generation.

1.11 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION

A. Prior to clearing, grading or excavating, the Contractor shall notify the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) as indicated on Civil Drawings.

B. Coordinate required onsite Pre-Site Construction Meeting a minimum of seven (7) days prior to commencement of any site work.

C. If contaminated ground water should be encountered during excavation activities Contractor shall notify JBSA-Lackland Bioenvironmental Engineering office immediately and provide written notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.

1.12 CONTAMINATED SOIL

A. If unexpected contaminated soil is encountered while performing work, stop work immediately, notify JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental and provide written notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.

B. Do not resume work until approved by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.13 SUSPECTED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Any suspect hazardous materials encountered during demolition or construction shall immediately be brought to the attention of JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental and provide written notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.

B. Work shall not resume until the Contracting Officer is satisfied that the materials are not hazardous.

C. Should suspect materials be found to be hazardous, Contractor shall immediately take steps to contain the material, so further damage and contamination does not occur.

D. Contractor shall then submit a proposal for removal.


1.14 OIL-FILLED OR IMPREGNATED ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

A. Notify Base Environmental Safety Office before demolition or installation of any oil-filled electrical equipment.

B. All transformers and light ballasts, unless labeled “No PCBs”, shall be disposed through the Base Hazardous Material and Waste Handling facility.

1.15 SPILL RESPONSE AND REPORTING

A. Spills of hazardous waste, hazardous materials or non-regulated substances such as oils, antifreeze, grease, latex paint, hydraulic fluid, etc. shall immediately be reported.

1. If a spill occurs after normal working hours, or on a weekend or holiday, report spills to the Installation Fire Department.

B. Contractor is encouraged to have a supply of absorbent pads on-site to aid in immediate clean-up of smaller spills, such as oil, coolant or hydraulic fluid leaks from vehicles or equipment.

C. Spill notification placards are to be placed on the job site prior to construction.

D. Contractor shall develop a spill plan.

E. The format for the plan shall be approved by JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental prior to construction.

1.16 WASTE DISPOSAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall comply, and ensure that all subcontractors comply, with all Federal, State, local laws, and regulations, ordinances and standards related to environmental pollution control and abatement in effect and the specific requirements stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

B. All hazardous wastes as defined in 40 CFR, Part 261, shall be collected and disposed of in accordance with 40 CFR, Parts 260-268.

C. The Contractor is responsible for properly storing, marking, labeling, securing and transporting hazardous wastes.

D. All hazardous wastes shall be collected in contractor furnished DOT/UN approved containers and taken to JBSA-Sam Houston Hazardous Waste Facility for disposal.

1. Call the Hazardous Waste Facility prior to transporting wastes to the facility to coordinate delivery of the waste materials.

2. The Contractor shall not store hazardous waste on Post for more than 30 days.

E. Any previously unidentified suspected hazardous materials encountered during performance of the work of the contract shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

F. All general construction wastes, other than those specifically allowed, or required, to be disposed of on the Post shall be legally disposed at an off-base sanitary landfill.

G. Contractor shall refer to Waste Disposal Form attached at the end of this Section.



END 01 13 00.


(POST OR BASE) WASTE DISPOSAL Contractor shall obtain all permits required by federal, state and local laws for the construction activities involved.

Contractor shall perform all work in such a manner as to minimize the polluting of air, water or land and shall, within reasonable limits, control noise and the disposal of solid waste materials, as well as other pollutants.

Contractor shall ensure that all construction, repair, maintenance operations and practices and waste disposal performed under this contract shall be in strict compliance with all applicable city, county, state and federal environmental laws and regulations.

1. Hazardous and Non-hazardous Waste Disposal: There are no known existing sources of hazardous waste involved with this project. If the Contractor generates or discovers suspected hazardous waste it shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contracting Officer for review and direction on how to proceed with handling and disposal. As part of the proposed implementation above and prior to on-site construction, the Contractor shall submit for approval, a plan for storing, characterizing and disposing of hazardous and non-hazardous waste materials resulting from the work under this contract. Waste includes, but is not limited to, paint waste, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers. If any waste material is dumped in unauthorized areas, the Contractor shall remove the materials and restore the area to the condition of the adjacent undisturbed areas. Where directed and approved by the Contracting Officer, contaminated ground shall be excavated, characterized, stored, disposed of and replaced with suitable fill material at the expense of the Contractor. All waste disposal shall be in strict accordance with local, state and federal requirements and regulations. Waste paint, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers shall be disposed of off base by the Contractor, at the Contractors’ expense. Any soil contaminated through spillage shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with the requirements specified herein. Soil that is required to be removed shall be replaced by similar soil approved by the Contracting Officer.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 25 00 – SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES

SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES 01 25 00-1

1 GENERAL


A. Substitution submission procedures.

B. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time.


A. AAFES Solicitation/Proposal/Award Form, contained in the AAFES solicitation package.

B. AAFES Instructions to Offerors and Conditions of Proposal/Awards form, contained in the AAFES solicitation package.

C. Individual specification Sections relevant to the work required under each option.

1.3 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. List proposed substitutions on the AAFES Proposal Substitution Form.

B. Substitutions listed on the AAFES Proposal Substitution Form will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at AAFES's discretion.

C. Accepted substitutions will be identified by Solicitation Amendment.

D. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each option.

1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS DURING SOLICITATION

A. Prior to solicitation closing, Contracting Officer will consider written requests to amend Solicitation Documents to ADD products not specified provided such requests are received with sufficient advance time to issue an Amendment, which must be issued 10 days prior to proposal date.

1. Requests received without sufficient advance time to review and be incorporated into an Amendment will not be considered as determined by Contracting Officer.

2. If a request is approved, an Amendment will be issued indicating approval.

B. No substitutions will be considered after award of Contract except under one or more of the following conditions:

1. Required for compliance with final interpretations of code requirements or insurance regulations.

2. Unavailability of specified product, through no fault of Contractor. 3. Subsequent information discloses inability of specified product to perform properly

or fit designated space. 4. Manufacturer or fabricator refusal to certify or guarantee performance of product

as specified for intended use.

SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES 01 25 00-2

1.5 SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS

A. In the event a material substitution is to be submitted, the Offeror will follow the procedure outlined in Paragraphs A1 thru 3 below and Paragraph B1 thru 6:

1. Proposing Offeror shall submit three copies of request for substitution. 2. Request shall be accompanied by complete data on proposed substitution

substantiating compliance with Contract Documents including product identification and description, performance and test data, references and samples where applicable, and an itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product specified.

3. Request shall be accompanied by accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product specified, whether or not modification or Contract sum is to be a consideration.

B. Requests for substitution based on the above, when forwarded by Offeror to Contracting Officer, are understood to mean that Offeror:

1. Represents that he/she has personally investigated proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to product specified.

2. Represents that he/she has coordinated the substitute product with subcontractors for compatibility of installation into Project and that no additional costs will be incurred due to acceptance of the substitution.

3. Will provide same guarantee for substitution that he/she would for specified product.

4. Certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts and redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution.

5. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution, making such changes as may be required for work to be completed in all respects.

6. Product substitutions price increases will not be considered, only price decreases.

C. Substitutions will not be considered if:

1. They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing submittals without formal request required above.

2. For implementation they require a substantial revision of Contract Documents in order to accommodate use.

3. They are unacceptable to the Contracting Officer.

D. NO FURTHER SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE PERMITTED AFTER CONTRACT AWARD.

E. Refer to AAFES Proposal Substitution Form (CSI) attached to the end of this Section.



END 01 25 00.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 29 73 – SCHEDULE OF VALUES

SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Preparation of required documents.

B. Submittal procedures

C. Review procedures.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

1. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01 29 76 – Progress Payments. 3. Section 01 31 19 – AAFES Progress Meetings. 4. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 5. Section 01 78 00 – Project Closeout.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. Contractor shall submit Schedule of Values (CSV) to Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer for review within (15) days after notification of award of Contract.

B. Contractor, upon request by Architect-Engineer and/or Contracting Officer, shall support any values given with data that will substantiate value correctness.

C. Contractor shall use approved CSV as a basis of periodical progress application for payment.

1.4 FORM OF SUBMITTAL

A. CSV Submittal format:

1. Typewritten, on Application and Certificate for Payment (AIA Form G-702) and Continuation Sheet for G-702 (AIA Form G-703) available from the AIA Bookstore, 911 Washington Avenue - #225, St. Louis, Missouri 6310, (314) 231-4252.

2. Contractor’s form, similar to the AIA Forms specified above, may be substituted as long as all information is formatted identically to AIA format.

B. Contractor shall use specification index as a basis of example and format for listing and itemizing costs of work.

1.5 PREPARING SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Itemize separate line items for total installed costs.

1. Itemize so that amounts shown for individual items do not exceed $20,000.00 wherever possible.

a. Break large items of work into smaller items, groups or phases to achieve specified amounts.

b. Individual items of equipment may be itemized in lump sum amounts for each piece of equipment.

c. Itemize demolition into separate line item or items. d. Labor and materials shall be separate line items if Contractor intends to request

payment for stored materials. e. List all subcontractors and supplier contracts that exceed $1,000.00.

SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73-2

2. Format to indicate separate line items for:

a. Overhead and profit. b. Bonds. c. Insurance. d. General Requirements and mobilization. e. Separate line item cost for all subcontractors and any supplier whose

subcontract exceeds $1,000.00. f. Separate line item cost for each section of the Project Manual.

3. Payment for Stored Materials will not be made unless itemized separately from Labor.

B. Itemized separate line items shall reflect each phase or scope of Contract Work.

C. Contractor shall prepare CSV in sequential order of accepted construction practice.

1.6 REVIEW AND SUBMITTAL

A. If required after review by Architect-Engineer and/or Contracting Officer, revise and resubmit Schedule of Values in accordance with initial submittal requirements.

B. Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer will approve final submittal.

C. Architect-Engineer will distribute approved copies to AAFES and Contractor for use in preparing Pay Requests.

END 01 29 73.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 29 76 – PROGRESS PAYMENTS

PROGRESS PAYMENTS 01 29 76-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 COST BREAKDOWN

A. After the Notice to Proceed is issued, the Contractor shall be required to provide a breakdown of costs as indicated in Section 01 29 73.

B. Each item of work must also indicate the subcontractor who will perform this work.

1.2 PREPARATION OF PAY REQUEST

A. Within 15 days after Notice to Proceed and prior to scheduling the first Progress/Pay Meeting the Contractor shall prepare and submit a Schedule of Values (CSV) to the Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer for review and approval in accord with requirements of Section 01 29 73.

B. Itemize separate line items for total installed costs.

1. Itemize so that amounts shown match those for individual items per the CSV. 2. Format to indicate separate line items for overhead and profit, bonds,

insurance, general requirements and mobilization as described in Section 01 29 73.

a. Separate line item cost for all subcontractors and any supplier whose subcontract exceeds $1,000.00.

b. Separate line item cost for each section of the Project Manual.

3. Payment for Stored Materials will not be made unless itemized separately from Labor.

C. Itemized separate line items shall reflect each phase or scope of Contract Work.

1.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTS

A. Format and Data Required:

1. Submit pencil copy applications to Architect-Engineer for review at least 4-days in advance of scheduled Progress/Pay Meeting.

2. Applications shall be itemized on forms and in format required for CSV with values broken down as specified above.

B. Preparation of Pencil Copy Application for Each Progress Payment:

1. Application form:

a. Fill in required information, including that for change orders executed prior to date of submittal of application.

b. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets.

c. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of contracting firm.

2. Continuation sheets:

a. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item number and scheduled dollar value for each item.


b. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored.

1.) Round off values to nearest dollar, or as specified for Schedule of Values.

c. List each change order executed prior to date of submission at end of continuation sheets.

1.) List by change order number and description the same as for an original component item of work.

3. Architect-Engineer will use pencil copy of application for payment as a basis for evaluating completed work upon arrival to Site for monthly scheduled Progress/Pay Meetings.

a. Architect-Engineer will review progress of work with Contractor’s on-site Superintendent and make any changes in amounts requested.

b. The Architect-Engineer will present reviewed and initialed pencil copy of pay request to Contractor at Progress/Pay Meeting for formal preparation and presentation to Contracting Officer for payment.

C. Preparation of Formal Application for Each Progress Payment:

1. The Contractor shall prepare formal typewritten copy of application for payment, edited as determined and agreed to on initialed pencil copy at the Progress/Pay Meeting.

2. Submit one (1) signed/notarized copy to Architect-Engineer via e-mail for formal approval, signature and presentation to the Contracting Officer.

a. Architect-Engineer will forward approved, signed application to Contracting Officer via e-mail within two (2) days of receipt from Contractor.

b. Upon acceptance of e-mailed application, payment to Contractor will be processed by AAFES subject to General Provisions of the Contract.

3. Submit one (1) additional hard copy to Architect-Engineer for formal approval and transmittal to Contracting Officer.

a. Attach current Construction Photos per requirements of Section 01 10 00. b. Attach revised Progress Schedule per requirements of Section 01 32 00. c. Attach Summary Report of progress since last request for payment and

anticipated progress until next request for payment.

D. Each request for payment shall be accompanied by the certification contained in Exhibit A, Clause 45b(2)(b) with Invoice number included.

E. If requested by AAFES, Contractor shall submit receipts or other vouchers showing his payments for material and labor, including payments to subcontractors.

1.4 STORED MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT NOT INCORPORATED IN THE WORK

A. Progress Payments will be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work provided that:

1. Such materials and equipment have been delivered to and suitably stored at site or some other location approved in writing by the Contracting Officer.

a. Provide list of stored materials for which payment is being requested for Contracting Officer and designated representative.

b. Store in like lots for ease of inventory by Contracting Officer or designated representative.


2. All materials stored off-site shall be marked or tagged with identification of project to which they are assigned and shall be accessible for inspection.

3. Contractor submits evidence of title to such materials and equipment in the form of detailed receipts to Contracting Officer.

4. Care and custody of such materials and equipment and all costs incurred for movement and storage shall be responsibility of Contractor.

B. Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Insurance showing AAFES as an additional insured and showing amount of insurance coverage for the stored items or suitable proof that material and equipment are stored in a Bonded Warehouse.

C. Payment for stored materials will be subject to all conditions and approval of Contracting Officer.

1.5 PAYMENTS WITHHELD

A. The KO may withhold or, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, nullify the whole or a part of any payment to such extent as may be necessary to protect AAFES from loss on account of:

1. Defective work not remedied. 2. Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims. 3. Failure of the GC to make payments properly to subcontractors or for materials

or labor. 4. A reasonable doubt that the contract can be completed for the balance then

unpaid. 5. Damage to another Contractor or to some third party. 6. Failure to maintain milestones in accordance with the approved construction

progress schedule 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Schedules”. 7. Failure to supply enough skilled workmen or proper materials.

END 01 29 76.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 31 13 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION

PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION 01 31 13-1

1 GENERAL


A. Request For Information (RFI’s).

B. Pre-construction Meeting.

C. Pre-installation Conferences.

D. Other Coordination Meetings applicable to work at any given time.

1.2 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. RFI Forms: Software-generated form acceptable to Architect-Engineer and AAFES Project Manager.

B. Architect-Engineer's Action: Allow seven working days for Architect-Engineer's response for each RFI.

C. RFI Log:

1. Maintain a tabular log of RFIs. 2. Submit log weekly.

1.3 PROJECT WEB SITE

A. Use Contractor's Project Web site for project communication and documentation.

B. Contractor shall provide a minimum of ten Project Web site user licenses for use of, AAFES, AAFES's Commissioning Authority, Contractor, Architect-Engineer, and Architect-Engineer's consultants.

1. Contractor shall provide up to eight hours of software training to Project Web site users.

C. Project Web site software package:

1. Prolog – Converge, or equal Construction Management Software.

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. The Contracting Officer will schedule and preside at Pre-construction meeting.

B. Attendance Required:

1. Contracting Officer, Project Manager and other AAFES HQ representatives. 2. Local and regional AAFES representatives. 3. Architect-Engineer 4. Installation representatives (Engineering, Fire Chief, Security, Environmental, etc.) 5. Contractor 6. Major Sub-contractors

C. Agenda:

PROGRESS MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION 01 31 13-2

1. Execution of Notice to Proceed. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of sub-contractors. 4. Review of AAFES checklist of contract requirements. 5. Discussion of Contractor’s Schedule of Values. 6. Discussion of Construction Schedule. 7. Discussion of critical sequencing. 8. Designation of responsible personnel. 9. Processing of field decisions and change orders. 10. Submission of applications for payment. 11. Submittal of shop drawings. 12. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 13. Fire, safety and spill procedures. 14. Security procedures. 15. Accident prevention and reports. 16. Housekeeping procedures. 17. Use of premises

a. Office and storage locations. b. Personnel parking.

18. Major equipment deliveries. 19. Other issues pertinent to completing the contract.

D. Meeting minutes: Minutes will be taken by the A/E and distributed to AAFES, Contractor, and Installation Engineer.

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. The Contractor shall schedule and preside at other project meetings when required.

B. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a Pre-installation conference at Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting.

a. Advise Architect-Engineer of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules.

PROGRESS MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION 01 31 13-3

l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

a. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

C. Coordination Meetings: At weekly intervals, in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, conduct Project Coordination Meetings to resolve routine issues.

END 01 31 13.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 31 15 – PHASING

PHASING 01 31 15-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


1. Work under this Project performed in two (2) distinct Phases:

a. Phase 1: Complete demolition of existing Popeye's building, related site demolition and related new site work after completion of new Project.

b. Phase 2: Complete construction of Dual Food Project for occupancy.

2. Cooperative efforts related to two Phases of construction including:

a. Coordination. b. Barriers and controls. c. Utility operation. d. Notifications. e. Scheduling.


A. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.


C. Section 01 31 13 – Project Management & Coordination.

D. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule.

E. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

F. Section 01 35 43 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

G. Section 01 35 56 – Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures (SWPPP)

H. Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities.

I. Section 01 55 00 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

J. Section 01 73 13 – Grades, Lines & Levels.

K. Section 01 73 29 – Cutting & Patching.

L. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.3 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor shall be responsible for provision of phasing under this Contract for Construction implemented as follows:

1. Phase 1: Demolition of the existing Popeye's restaurant, utilities and all related site work upon occupancy of the new Dual Food facility by AAFES including:

a. Give proper notifications and coordination indicated. b. Allow AAFES personnel to salvage equipment, fixtures, furnishings and signage

deemed of value to AAFES. c. Disconnect and demolish site and building utilities. d. Building and site demolition. e. Site restoration, grading and planting.

2. Phase 2: Complete construction of the new Dual Food facility and all related work in order to accomplish Substantial Completion, AAFES beneficial occupancy and use of the new facility for intended purpose.

PHASING 01 31 15-2

B. In preparing construction phasing system, scheduling of construction and demolition operations shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Construction operations shall be phased and coordinated with AAFES Contracting Officer and designated representative, JBSA-Sam Houston CES, and privatized utility companies in order to minimize disruption.

B. Contractor shall provide notifications as indicated prior to commencement of Phase 1 work to the following parties:

1. Texas Department of State Health Services (TDSHS) regarding intent to demolish existing Popeye's building and site.

2. AAFES Contraction Officer, JBSA-Sam Houston Environmental Management Division and other regulatory agencies regarding demolition activities and abatement efforts.

3. JBSA-Sam Houston of activities that may affect operations of existing adjacent occupied buildings.

4. Utility companies of required service disconnects at least 21 calendar days prior to needing disconnects.

C. Contractor shall provide notifications as indicated near the end of Phase 2 work to the following parties:

1. Contracting Officer and designated representative at least 21 calendar days prior to Substantial Completion of the new Dual Food Project as indicated.

D. The Contractor shall keep the Contracting Officer and designated representative advised of any anticipated changes in the Construction Schedule in sufficient time to permit adjustment of prior Contractor scheduling arrangements with AAFES, JBSA-Sam Houston CES and utility companies.

1. Refer to Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress Schedule for development of Construction Schedule.

2. Refer to Section 02 41 16, Structure Demolition for additional information pertinent to required scheduling of construction phasing.

E. Substantial Completion inspection of the new Dual Food Project will be made prior to occupancy and use by AAFES.

F. Both major phases shall be included in the contract performance period.

1.5 BARRIERS

A. Other adjacent buildings and sites will not be vacated by AAFES or JBSA-Sam Houston during demolition of the existing Popeye's restaurant and site under Phase 1 construction.

B. Temporary barriers and controls shall be erected by the Contractor as demolition work progresses as specified in Section 01 55 00, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

1.6 UTILITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Permanently reroute underground piping where required in areas where lines are affected by new or demolition construction in order to maintain utility systems in operational condition for as long as needed.



END 01 31 15.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 31 19 – AAFES PROGRESS MEETINGS

AAFES PROGRESS MEETINGS 01 31 19-1

1 GENERAL


A. AAFES Progress Meetings.


A. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work.

B. Section 01 31 13 – Project Management & Coordination.

C. Section 01 31 15 – Phasing.

D. Section 01 29 73 – Schedule of Values.

E. Section 01 29 76 – Progress Payments.

F. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

G. Section 01 78 00 – Project Record Documents.

1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. The AAFES representative shall schedule and preside at monthly progress meetings.

B. The AAFES representative shall make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants.

C. Location of Meetings: Construction office, or as directed in the notice.

D. Attendance Required:

1. AAFES representatives. 2. Architect-Engineer. 3. Architect-Engineer’s on-site representative. 4. Contractor's project manager. 5. Contractor's superintendent. 6. Major sub-contractors and suppliers. 7. JBSA-Sam Houston Environmental Division representative.

E. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.

AAFES PROGRESS MEETINGS 01 31 19-2

9. Coordination of projected progress. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to work.

F. Meeting Minutes: AAFES designated representative or Architect-Engineer shall record meeting minutes, and distribute copies to the participants, Environmental Division representative and Contracting Officer within five (5) business days of the meeting.



END 01 31 19.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 32 00 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES 01 32 00-1

1 GENERAL


A. Format.

B. Content.

C. Revisions to schedules.

D. Submittals.




C. Section 01 29 73 – Schedule of Values.

D. Section 01 29 76 – Progress Payments.

E. Section 01 31 13 – Project Management & Coordination.

F. Section 01 31 15 – Phasing.

G. Section 01 31 19 – AAFES Progress Meetings.

H. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

1.3 SCOPE

A. Exhibit "A" - General Provisions of the AAFES Contract for Construction, Article entitled: "Schedule and Progress"

B. The Contractor prepared scheduling progress chart system shall serve as a guide in managing the construction progress and scheduling.

1.4 GENERAL

A. The scheduling progress chart system shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall consist of a Critical Path bar chart as described in this Section.

B. In preparing this system, the scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be developed in accordance with construction phasing indicated or shown on the construction drawings where applicable.

C. The requirement for the system is included to assure adequate planning and execution of the work and to assist the Contracting Officer in appraising the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and evaluating progress of the work.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a preliminary scheduling progress chart to the Contracting Officer or designated representative defining the Contractor's proposed operations for the first sixty (60) of the contract within ten (10) days after date of Notice to Proceed.

1. Indicate the Contractor's general approach for the balance of the project. 2. Include the cost of the activities expected to be completed or partially completed

before submission and approval of the complete progress schedule.

B. Upon approval of the preliminary scheduling progress chart by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, and within thirty (30) calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit the complete progress chart with copy to the Architect-Engineer.

C. Contractor shall also submit a narrative report with the updated bar chart, including a description of problem areas (current and anticipated) delaying factors and their impact, and an explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed.

D. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires plus four (4) copies that will be retained by Contracting Officer and one (1) copy to be retained by the Architect-Engineer.

1.6 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES

A. Submit revised progress chart system with each monthly Application for Payment.

1. Copy of the complete bar chart with the current activity progress clearly indicated. 2. Current cost of each activity completed and each partially completed shall be

updated and included.

B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal and revised projected completion date of each activity.

C. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope and other identifiable changes that could affect the overall schedule.

D. Provide revised narrative report with each submittal describing work accomplished during the previous period, the work scheduled for the next period, anticipated problem areas and delays and impact on the Schedule.

E. Report corrective action taken or proposed.

1.7 PROGRESS CHART SYSTEM

A. The system consists of keeping a record of the time allotted for each activity and the actual progress of the activity.

B. Activities shall be listed vertically and shall include the units of work required for the project.

1. All activities of AAFES, which affect progress and Contract required dates for completion shall be shown.

2. Include activities for AAFES FURNISHED/AAFES INSTALLED and AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED ITEMS.


C. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the Contracting Officer's approval.

1.8 FORMAT

A. Prepare schedules as a horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation, identifying first workday of each week.

1. A scale of time, from date of the beginning of the contract work to the date of completion of the contract work, shall be indicated horizontally on the chart.

2. The units of time indicated shall be days. 3. Indicate time allotted for each major activity, the actual progress of the activity and

the time spent to date or to the finish of the activity.

B. The format shall be such to enable the Contracting Officer or designated representative to evaluate the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and to determine if the actual construction is on schedule.

1.9 CONTENT

A. Clearly identify Phase 1 and Phase 2 work independently and coordinated as indicated for proper timing and notifications.

B. Show complete sequence of construction by activity with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction.

C. Identify each item by specification section number.

D. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item and total percentage of Work completed as of the first day of each month.

E. Indicate delivery dates for AAFES furnished products.

1.10 DISTRIBUTION

A. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to project site file, subcontractors, suppliers and other concerned parties.

B. Instruct recipients to promptly report in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules.



END 01 32 00.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 33 00 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS 01 33 00-1

1 GENERAL


A. Submittal procedures.

B. Construction progress schedules.

C. Shop Drawings.

D. Samples.

E. Product Data.

F. Certificates.



B. Section 01 10 10 – Unit Prices.

C. Section 01 10 18 – AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment.

D. Section 01 10 60 – AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures.

E. Section 01 29 73 – Schedule of Values.

F. Section 01 31 15 – Phasing.

G. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedules.

H. Section 01 45 43 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

I. Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout.

J. Technical Sections of the Specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Transmit each submittal with AAFES Form 4450-048 as provided by AAFES or equivalent Contractor generated transmittal form in same format.

B. Sequentially number the transmittal form.

C. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix.

D. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate.

E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and in accordance with the List of Required Submittals in this Section.

1. Transmit submittals to Contracting Officer and Architect-Engineer. 2. Coordinate submission of related items.


G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.

1. Failure to identify such variations will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for completing the work in full accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Review/approval by the Contracting Officer does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for completing work in full accordance with the Contract Documents.

3. Review by the Architect-Engineer does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for completing work in full compliance with the Contract Documents.

H. Prior to approval of the material/product submitted:

1. Contractor shall include with the submittal a written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos.

2. This certificate is mandatory before review will be made and/or Contracting Officer approval issued.

I. Provide space for Contractor, Contracting Officer and Architect-Engineer review stamps.

J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.

K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate.

L. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit preliminary Scheduling Progress Chart within ten (10) days of the Notice to Proceed.

B. Submit complete (final) Scheduling Progress Chart within thirty (30) days of the Notice to Proceed.

C. Submit monthly revisions of Scheduling Progress Chart.

D. Submit monthly revised narrative reports.

E. Refer to Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Schedule, for submittal information.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Shop Drawings for Review:

1. Submitted to Contracting Officer for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

2. Submittals as indicated in Paragraph 1.9 shall also be submitted to JBSA-Sam Houston Environmental Division.

3. Shop drawings shall be prepared by a qualified detailer. 4. Minimum sheet size for shop drawings shall be 8 1/2" x 11". 5. After review, distribute copies in accordance with Submittal Procedures above and

for record documents purposes described in Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout.

B. Submittal Quantities:

1. Where hard copies are provided submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus four for O & M Manuals, plus two (three on civil, structural, mechanical, and electrical submittals) copies that will be retained by Architect-Engineer.


2. Where submittals are transmitted electronically provide a copy in digital format that shall be transmitted to A-E for review by A-E and/or Consultants

C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service and for functional equipment and appliances.

D. Shop Drawings for Project Close-out:

1. Submitted for the AAFES's benefit during and after project completion. 2. Retain four (4) A-E reviewed, Contractor approved sets of each Shop

Drawing and Product Data sheet for submittal to AAFES at Project Close-out as part of O & M Manuals per Section 01 77 00.

1.6 SAMPLES

A. Samples for Review:

1. Submit to Architect-Engineer for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

2. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 77 00, Project Closeout.

B. Samples for Information:

1. Submit for the Architect-Engineer’s review and Contracting Officer's knowledge as project administrator or for AAFES.

C. Samples for Selection:

1. Submit to Architect-Engineer for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. 2. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors,

or in custom colors (if so stated in the product specification section), textures, and patterns for Architect-Engineer selection and Contracting Officer’s approval.

3. After review, distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 77 00, Project Closeout.

D. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices.

E. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

F. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.

G. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification Sections; two of which will be retained by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

H. Reviewed samples that may be used in the work are indicated in individual specification Sections.

I. Coordinate sample submittals with respective shop drawings.

1.7 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, specifications, illustrations, and other descriptive data.

B. Product data that relates to shop drawings or samples must be submitted with the respective shop drawings or samples.

1.8 CERTIFICATES


A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor or the Contractor to Architect-Engineer in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Certify that material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.

C. Submit supporting reference data, test results, affidavits, and/or certifications as appropriate.

D. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

1.9 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. General Construction: (Provide copy of * designated submittals to JBSA-Sam Houston Environmental Division for review.)

1. * Section 01 00 00, Requirements of JBSA-Sam Houston:

a. Site plans. b. Applications. c. Schedules. d. Documentation. e. Reports.

2. Section 01 00 00, Unit Prices:

a. Cost proposals. b. Documentation.

3. Section 01 10 60, AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures:

a. Permits. b. Notifications. c. Hazardous waste response plans. d. Waste disposal plans. e. Documentation.

4. Section 01 13 00, AAFES Safety Regulations & Codes:

a. Schedules. b. Documentation. c. Hazard, Health/Safety, Response Plans.

5. Section 01 31 15, Phasing:

a. Schedules. b. Notifications. c. Documentation.

6. Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress Schedule:

a. Preliminary Schedule. b. Complete Schedule. c. Revised Schedules. d. Revised Narrative Reports.


7. Section 01 33 00, Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals:

a. Schedules. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

8. Section 01 58 00, Project Identification & Signs:

a. Product Data. b. Shop Drawings.

9. Section 01 66 00, Storage & Protection:

a. Schedules. b. Documentation.

10. Section 01 73 29, Cutting & Patching:

a. Schedules. b. Documentation.

11. Section 01 74 00, Cleaning:

a. Instructions. b. Product Data.

12. * Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management & Disposal:

a. Waste Management Plan. b. Waste Reduction Progress Reports. c. Waste Reduction Calculations. d. Records of Donations. e. Records of Sales f. Recycling and Processing Facility Records. g. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records. h. Qualification Data.

13. Section 01 77 00, Project Closeout:

a. Project Record Documents. b. Operation & Maintenance Manuals. c. A-E reviewed, contractor approved Shop Drawings, bound. d. Training Documentation. e. Warranties. f. End user agreement(s) and software license(s) where applicable. g. DD Form 1354 Quantities and Cost Information. h. Other Closeout Submittals.

14. Section 01 78 00, Project Record Documents:

a. As-built Drawings. b. As-built Specifications.

15. Section 01 35 56, Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures (SWPPP):

a. Product Data. b. As-built Survey.


16. Section 02 41 16, Structure Demolition:

a. Data. b. Report narratives. c. Schedules. d. Inventory list. e. Photographic evidence. f. Landfill records. g. Manifests. h. Recovery verifications.

17. Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete:

a. Test Reports. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Certifications.

18. Section 03 35 36, Polished Concrete Floor Finish:

a. Installer’s Certifications. b. Applicator Qualifications. c. Product Data. d. Samples. e. Maintenance Manual.

19. Section 04 20 00, Unit Masonry:

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

20. Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Qualifications. f. Calculations.

21. Section 05 21 00, Steel Joists:

a. Test Reports. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Documentation.

22. Section 05 31 00, Steel Deck:

a. Test Reports. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Documentation.


23. Section 05 40 00, Cold-Formed Metal Framing:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Product Data. d. Calculations.

24. Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications:

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data.

25. Section 05 52 00, Metal Railings:

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data.

26. Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Product Data.

27. Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Samples.

28. Section 06 30 00, Fire Retardant Wood Treatment:

a. Test Reports. b. Product Data. c. Certifications.

29. Section 06 40 00, Architectural Woodwork:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Samples.

30. Section 07 21 00, Building Insulation:

a. Certifications. b. Product Data. c. Instructions.

31. Section 07 24 00, Exterior Insulation & Finish System – Class PB:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Samples.


32. Section 07 54 00, Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO):

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples. e. Documentation.

33. Section 07 61 03, Preformed Metal Soffit Panels:


34. Section 07 62 00, Flashing & Sheet Metal:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Samples.

35. Section 07 84 00, Firestopping:

a. Certifications. b. Product Data. c. Assembly Drawings.

36. Section 07 90 00, Building Joint Sealers:

a. Product Data. b. Samples. c. Documentation.

37. Section 08 11 00, Metal Doors & Frames:

a. Schedules. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Calculations.

38. Section 08 14 16, Flush Wood Doors:

a. Schedules. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Samples. f. Documentation.

39. Section 08 31 00, Access Doors:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data.

40. Section 08 41 10, Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors:

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples. e. Calculations.


41. Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware:

a. Schedules. b. Product Data.

42. Section 08 81 00, Glass & Glazing:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Instructions. d. Product Data. e. Samples.

43. Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Drywall Systems:

a. Certifications. b. Instructions. c. Product Data.

44. Section 09 30 00, Tile:


45. Section 09 51 00, Acoustical Panel Ceilings:

a. Certifications. b. Product Data. c. Samples.

46. Section 09 65 00, Resilient Tile Flooring:


47. Section 09 77 00, Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels:


48. Section 09 90 00, Painting:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

49. Section 10 14 00, Specialty Signs:

a. Schedules. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.


50. Section 10 21 13, Toilet Compartments:


51. Section 10 26 00, Wall Surface Protection Systems:


52. Section 10 28 13, Toilet Accessories:

a. Instructions. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

53. Section 10 44 00, Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets & Accessories:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Samples.

54. Section 10 51 13, Metal Lockers:


55. Section 10 71 10, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies:

a. Certifications. b. Instructions. c. Product Data. d. Samples. e. Calculations. f. Documentation.

56. Section 11 40 00, Food Service Equipment:

a. Instructions. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples. e. Schedules.

57. * Section 11 80 00, Used Cooking Oil Equipment:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data.

58. Section 12 48 13, Floor Mats & Frames:



c. Samples.

B. Plumbing:

1. Section 22 05 12, Common Work Results for Plumbing:

a. Product Data. b. Certifications.

2. Section 22 05 19, Meters & Gages for Plumbing Piping:

a. Product Data.

3. Section 22 05 23, General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping:

a. Product Data.

4. Section 22 05 29, Hangers & Supports for Plumbing Piping & Equipment:


5. Section 22 05 53, Identification for Plumbing Piping & Equipment:

a. Product Data. b. Equipment Label Schedule. c. Valve Numbering Scheme. d. Valve Schedules.

6. Section 22 07 19, Plumbing Insulation:

a. Product Data.

7. Section 22 11 16, Domestic Water Piping:

a. Product Data. b. Test Results.

8. Section 22 11 19, Domestic Water Piping Specialties:

a. Product Data. b. Operation & Maintenance Data.

9. Section 22 11 23, Domestic Water Pumps:


10. Section 22 13 16, Sanitary Waste & Vent Piping:

a. Product Data. b. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

11. Section 22 13 19, Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties:


12. Section 22 14 13, Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Product Data. b. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

13. Section 22 14 23, Storm Drainage Piping Specialties:

a. Product Data.


14. Section 22 16 13, Facility Natural Gas Piping:

a. Product Data. b. Certifications. c. Field Quality Control Test Reports. d. Operation & Maintenance Data.

15. Section 22 34 00, Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters:


16. Section 22 42 13, Commercial Plumbing Fixtures:

a. Product Data. b. Operation and Maintenance Data.

C. Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning (HVAC):

1. Section 23 05 29, Hangers & Supports for Mechanical:

a. Product Data.

2. Section 23 05 53, Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment:

a. Product Data. b. Equipment Label Schedule.

3. Section 23 07 00, Mechanical Insulation:

a. Product Data.

4. Section 23 09 00, Instrumentation & Control for HVAC:

a. Product Data. b. Shop Drawings. c. Operation & Maintenance Data.

5. Section 23 09 93, Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls:

a. Written Sequence of Operations.

6. Section 23 23 00, Refrigerant Piping & Specialties:

a. Product Data. b. Reports.

7. Section 23 31 13, Metal Ductwork:

a. Product Data.

8. Section 23 33 00, Ductwork Accessories:


9. Section 23 34 23, Fans:


10. Section 23 34 33, Air Curtains:


11. Section 23 36 00, Air Terminal Units:



12. Section 23 37 13, Air Outlets and Inlets:

a. Product Data.

13. Section 23 74 13, Packaged, Outdoor, Central Station Air Handling Units:


D. Electrical:

1. Section 26 05 19, Building Wire & Cable:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Test Reports.

2. Section 26 05 20, Manufactured Wiring Systems:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Calculations. d. Manufacturer’s Instructions.

3. Section 26 05 26, Grounding & Bonding:


4. Section 26 05 29, Supporting Devices:


5. Section 26 05 33, Conduit:

a. Product Data.

6. Section 26 05 34, Boxes:

a. Product Data.

7. Section 26 05 35, Cabinets & Enclosures:

a. Product Data.

8. Section 26 05 43, Duct Bank:


9. Section 26 05 53, Electrical Identification:

a. Product Data.

10. Section 26 09 23, Electrical Controls:

a. Product Data.

11. Section 26 09 24, Enclosed Contactors:

a. Product Data.


12. Section 26 09 25, Occupancy Sensors:


13. Section 26 24 16, Panelboards:

a. Shop Drawings.

14. Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices:

a. Product Data. b. Samples.

15. Section 26 28 17, Enclosed Switches:

a. Product Data.

16. Section 26 29 13, Enclosed Motor Controllers:

a. Product Data. b. Test Reports.

17. Section 26 43 13, Surge Protection Devices (SPDs):


18. Section 26 51 00, Interior Luminaires:


19. Section 26 56 00, Site Lighting:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Photometric Data.

20. Section 26 60 00, Testing:

a. Test Reports.

E. Communications:

1. Section 27 15 00, Telephone Service, Raceways & Wiring:

a. Product Data.

F. Electronic Safety & Security:

1. Section 28 31 76, Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Systems:

a. Design Data. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Test Reports. e. Operation & Maintenance Data.

G. Earthwork:

1. Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing:

a. Schedule.


2. Section 31 20 00, Earth Moving:

a. Schedule. b. Test Reports. c. Documentation. d. Product Samples.

3. Section 31 23 23, Utility Backfill Materials:

a. Schedule. b. Test Reports. c. Documentation. d. Product Samples.

4. Section 31 23 33, Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities:

a. Schedule. b. Proposed Trench Widths. c. Installation Procedures. d. Compaction Procedures.

5. Section 31 31 16, Termite Control:

a. Product Data. b. Installer Qualifications. c. Product Certificates. d. Application Reports. e. Warranties.

H. Sitework:

1. Section 32 01 00, Pavement Repair & Restoration:

a. Product Data. b. Manufacturer Qualifications. c. Material Certificates. d. Material Test Reports.

2. Section 32 12 16, Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Pavement:

a. Product Data. b. Design Mixtures. c. Manufacturer Qualifications. d. Material Certificates. e. Material Test Reports.

3. Section 32 13 13, Concrete Paving:

a. Product Data. b. Design Mixtures. c. Certifications. d. Test Reports.

4. Section 32 13 73, Concrete Paving Joint Sealants:


5. Section 32 17 23, Pavement Markings:

a. Product Data.


6. Section 32 31 00, Fences & Gates:


7. Section 32 33 13, Site Bicycle Racks:


8. * Section 32 92 00, Turf & Grasses:

a. Product Data. b. Seed Certification. c. Installer Qualifications. d. Product Certificates. e. Material Test Reports.

9. * Section 32 93 00, Plants:

a. Product Data. b. Samples. c. Installer Qualifications. d. Product Certificates. e. Material Test Reports. f. Maintenance Instructions. g. Warranties. h. Planting Schedule.

I. Utilities:

1. Section 33 01 10, Pressure and Leakage Tests:

a. Schedule. b. Procedures. c. Test Reports.

2. Section 33 01 15, Disinfecting Pipelines:

a. Schedule. b. Procedures. c. Test Reports.

3. Section 33 01 30, Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers:

a. Test Plan. b. Test Reports. c. Video/Television Records.

4. Section 33 05 27, Tracer Wire:

a. Product Data.

5. Section 33 11 11, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe:

a. Installation Instructions. b. Product Data. c. Test Reports.


d. As-built Survey.

6. Section 33 11 17, Polyethylene Wrap:

a. Product Data.

7. Section 33 12 16, Gate Valves:

a. Product Data.

8. Section 33 12 17, Tapping Sleeves and Valves:

a. Product Data.

9. Section 33 12 19, Fire Hydrants:

a. Product Data. b. Engineering Control Drawing Number.

10. Section 33 31 11, Gravity Sanitary Sewers:

a. Schedule. b. Operations Plan. c. Test Reports.

11. Section 33 31 12, Precast Concrete Manholes:


12. Section 33 41 00, Storm Sewerage System:

a. * Installation instructions. b. * Product Data. c. * Test Reports. d. * Certifications. e. * As-built Survey.



END 01 33 00.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 35 43 – AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 01 35 43-1

1 GENERAL


A. Furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and performing all work required for the prevention of environmental degradation during and as a result of construction operations under this contract.

B. These requirements are in addition to any environmental protection requirements elsewhere in these specifications.

C. For the purpose of this specification, environmental pollution is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents, not naturally occurring at the site, which adversely affect:

1. Human health or welfare. 2. Unfavorably alter ecological balances important to human life. 3. Other species of importance to humans. 4. Degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic and recreational purposes.

D. The control of environmental pollution by the Contractor requires consideration of air, water, and land, and involves noise control, solid waste management and management of radiant energy and radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants.

E. This section also requires the protection of cultural and historic resources.

F. Contractor shall coordinate the work of this section with the work called for under the various sections of Division 2.

1.2 CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OBLIGATIONS

A. Work under this contract is to be performed on a government facility.

B. All environmental rules applying to Contractor operations elsewhere will also apply on the government facility.

C. Contractor (and any subcontractor, agent or representative) shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations providing for environmental protection and pollution control and abatement.

D. Contractor has the duty to determine for himself where such laws and regulations apply.

E. These regulations include but are not limited to:

1. Clean Air Act. 2. Clean Water Act. 3. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. 4. Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA). 5. Toxic Substances Control Act. 6. Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act. 7. Coastal Zone Management Act.


8. Endangered Species Act. 9. National Historic Preservation Act. 10. Safe Drinking Water Act. 11. Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act. 12. Oil Pollution Act. 13. Archeological Resources Protection Act. 14. Pollution Prevention Act. 15. National Environmental Policy Act.

F. Although the Contractor may request assistance from the Contracting Officer in delineating applicable environmental laws and regulations, Contractor has an independent responsibility to make its own determination and to do so in a timely fashion.

1.3 FINES OR PENALTIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL NON-COMPLIANCE

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying any fines or penalties assessed against AAFES or the installation or the Army or the Air Force for violations of environmental laws or regulation resulting from acts or omissions of the Contractor or its employees, subcontractors, or agents.

B. This obligation is in addition to any fines or penalties that may be assessed against the Contractor for the same conduct.

C. Contractor may either reimburse these fines or penalties through the Contracting Officer, or with the consent of the Contracting Officer, the Contractor may pay such fines or penalties directly to the regulatory agency or agencies concerned.

1.4 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGES

A. Contractor agrees to hold harmless and indemnify AAFES (which includes the Army, Air Force, or other Department of Defense component, as appropriate) for any and all damages of any kind resulting from environmentally harmful activities by the Contractor, Contractor’s employees or agents or subcontractors.

B. “Damages” includes but are not limited to personal injury, property damage (including diminution of value) or death, environmental restoration and response costs, natural resource damages, expert witness and attorney’s fees, and reimbursement of any and all expenses incurred to obtain permits as a result of Contractor’s failure to identify or obtain permits for itself or AAFES.

1.5 CONTACTS WITH ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY OFFICIALS

A. Contractor shall immediately advise the Contracting Officer and the installation environmental office of the content of all contacts with Federal, State, or local environmental regulators, before, during, and after the performance of this contract concerning the performance of this contract.


2 PERMITS

2.1 PERMITS FOR EQUIPMENT USED BY CONTRACTOR IN PERFORMING AAFES CONTRACTS

A. For equipment used in the performance of this contract, Contractor shall obtain in Contractor’s name and at no additional expense to AAFES, all permits, coordination, certifications or other regulatory authorization necessary to perform and complete the work required by this contract under applicable environmental laws and regulations.

B. “Applicable environmental laws and regulations” includes but is not limited to:

1. Clean Air Act. 2. Clean Water Act. 3. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. 4. Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA). 5. Toxic Substances Control Act. 6. Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act. 7. Coastal Zone Management Act. 8. Endangered Species Act. 9. National Historic Preservation Act. 10. Safe Drinking Water Act. 11. Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act. 12. Oil Pollution Act. 13. Pollution Prevention Act. 14. State, County, and Local laws and regulations on the same subjects. 15. National Environmental Policy Act.

2.2 PERMITS NEEDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, EXCAVATION, MODIFICATION, RENOVATION, DEMOLITION, INSTALLATION, OR OTHER ALTERATION OF BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, INSTALLATIONS, REAL PROPERTY OR SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall identify all Federal, State, County, or local, permits, coordination, certifications or other regulatory authorization requirements under all applicable environmental laws and regulations as defined in (A.) above.

B. Contractor shall then prepare and submit in draft all applicable permit applications, coordination, notices, or other required filings, together with all supporting data to the Contracting Officer for review.

C. Permit applications or notifications or other documents that must be submitted by AAFES will be submitted by AAFES, and any documents that must be submitted by the Contractor will be returned after review to the Contractor for submission.

D. No work requiring permit or other written authorization shall proceed before the Contractor has the permit or authorization or a copy thereof in its possession.


3 MATERIALS

3.1 RECYCLED MATERIALS

A. Materials used in this contract shall be, to the greatest extent practicable and consistent with financial prudence, made of recycled materials or of materials that are recyclable.

B. Where construction debris such as concrete or asphalt or wood can be recycled, this alternative will be considered.

3.2 ASBESTOS

A. Asbestos will not be used or included in this project.

3.3 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL’S (PCBS)

A. PCBs will not be used or included in this project.

3.4 LEAD-BASED PAINT

A. Lead-based paint will not be used or included in this project.

3.5 OZONE-DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

A. “Class I substance,” as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class I by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to chlorofluorocarbons, halons, carbon tetrachloride, and methyl chloroform.

B. “Class II substance,” as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class II by EPA (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to hydorchlorofluorocarbons.

C. As required by 42 USC 7671j(b), c, and (d) and 40 CFR Part 82, Subpart E, the Contractor shall label products which contain class I or class II ozone-depleting substances or are manufactured with a process that uses class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, or containers of class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, as follows:

“WARNING: Contains (or manufactured with, if applicable) _________*_________, (a) substance(s) which harm(s) public health and the environment by destroying ozone in the upper atmosphere.”

(*The Contractor shall insert the name of the substance(s).)

D. The Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Sections 608 and 609 of the Clean Air Act (42 USC 7671g, National Recycling Emission Reduction Program and 7671h, Servicing of Motor Vehicle Air Conditioners) as each or both apply to the contract.

3.6 PESTICIDES

A. Except as may be specified elsewhere in this contract, Contractor will not use or apply pesticides (such as herbicides or weed-killers, insecticides, or rodenticides) without the specific written prior approval of the Contracting Officer.


4 EXECUTION

4.1 GENERAL: SITE DISTURBANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITES

A. Contractor shall use industry-recognized best management practices to avoid creation of fugitive dust emissions and to avoid and control storm water runoff from the construction site and any temporary roads that may be used for access to it.

1. Water sprinkling may be used to control dust.

B. Contractor shall perform all work under this contract in such a manner that no pollutants of any kind are released into ditches, storm drains, streams, lakes, or other surface waters on or connected to the site.

4.2 PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCES

A. General:

1. The Contractor shall not pollute storm drainage, streams, lakes, or reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, acids, construction wastes or other harmful materials or pollutants.

2. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and comply with all applicable Federal, State, Regional, Municipal, and other regulations.

B. Spillage:

1. The Contractor shall take special measures to prevent chemicals, fuels, oils, greases, bituminous materials, waste washings, herbicides, cement, and surface drainage from entering public waters.

2. In the event of a spill, the Contractor must make all required notifications to Federal, State or local authorities and will notify the Contracting Officer immediately.

C. Washing and Curing Water:

1. Water used in aggregate processing, concrete curing, foundation, and concrete lift clean-up and other waste water shall not be allowed to enter the storm drainage system.

4.3 PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCES

A. General:

1. It is intended that the land resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work performed under this contract be preserved in their present condition or be restored to a condition after completion of construction that will appear to the natural and not detract from the appearance of the project.

2. The Contractor shall limit his construction activities to areas defined by the Drawings or Specifications.

B. Prevention of Landscape Defacement:

1. Except in areas marked on the plans to be cleared, the Contractor shall not deface, remove, cut, injure or destroy trees or shrubs without specific written authority.

2. Trees designated to be saved shall be protected from either excavation or filling within the root zone.


3. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened or attached to any existing trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized by the Contracting Officer.

4. The Contractor shall in any event be responsible for any damage resulting from such use.

C. Restoration of Landscape Damage:

1. Any trees or other landscape features scarred or damaged by the Contractor’s equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to the original condition at the Contractor’s expense.

2. The Contracting Officer will decide what method of restoration shall be used, and whether damaged trees shall be treated and healed or removed and disposed of under requirements for clearing and grubbing (Section 31 10 00).

3. All scars made on trees not designated on the plans to be removed by equipment construction operations, or by the removal of limbs larger than 1-inch in diameter shall be coated immediately with an approved tree wound dressing.

4. All trimming or pruning shall be performed in an approved manner by experienced landscape personnel.

5. Tree trimming with axes shall not be permitted. 6. Trees that are to remain, either within or outside established clearing limits, that are

subsequently damaged by the Contractor and are beyond saving in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, shall be immediately removed and replaced with a nursery-grown tree of the same species.

4.4 CONTROL OF AIR EMISSIONS

A. Contractor’s actions shall conform to all Federal, State, and local requirements for the control of air emissions during work under this contract.

B. Trucks leaving the site will be brushed or washed to remove all practicable amounts of dust or other material that may become airborne.

C. Contractor will ensure that all internal construction vehicles and equipment used will have the lowest practicable emissions characteristics and be maintained in optimum operating condition for the reduction of air emissions.

D. Where use of electric motors instead of internal combustion engines is feasible, electric motors will be used during construction.

5 WASTE DISPOSAL

5.1 POLLUTION PREVENTION & WASTE DISPOSAL

A. The Contractor should use prior planning to find those materials that will minimize the creation of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular.

B. Recycling shall be implemented at every practicable stage of the project.

5.2 WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Pollution Prevention:

1. The Contractor should use prior planning to find those materials and work practices that will minimize the creation of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular.


B. Hazardous Waste Generation, Handling, and Disposal.

1. Work done under this contract is to be performed on a government facility. According to rules and procedures of the United States Environmental Protection Agency, the federal facility is required to have a generator identification number under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and to be responsible for wastes (as defined under RCRA) produced, managed, stored, disposed on, or transported from the facility.

2. Accordingly, Contractor will, to the greatest extent practicable, use materials, processes, and techniques that will avoid the creation of hazardous waste.

3. Contractor shall prepare and follow a written waste management and disposal plan for all hazardous wastes generated on the site.

4. Prior to generation of any hazardous wastes, Contractor will coordinate planned activities regarding hazardous materials and hazardous waste with the Contracting Officer.

5. Contractor shall submit a written waste management plan, through the Contracting Officer, to installation environmental office.

a. Contractor shall follow this plan after approval by the Contracting Officer.

6. Under no circumstances will Contractor bring onto the site hazardous waste that has been generated elsewhere.

7. All hazardous waste will be properly disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with all Federal, State, and local requirements.

C. Disposal of Non-RCRA Wastes.

1. All non-hazardous wastes generated on the site as a result of this contract must be disposed of properly, in accordance with all Federal, State, and local requirements.

2. Materials will be recycled whenever practicable. 3. Prior to creation of such wastes, the Contractor shall submit to the installation

environmental management function, through the Contracting Officer, a plan for disposal of wastes. Such plan shall include the types of waste to be created, how they shall be stored, managed and disposed. Contractor shall follow this plan once it has been approved by the installation and Contracting Officer.

4. Such wastes will not be created until approved by the Contracting Officer.

D. Construction Debris.

1. Debris from demolition of existing structures will ordinarily be removed to a location on the installation or as designated by the installation authorities.

2. If a location on the installation is not available, other sections in this contract may require the Contactor to remove clean construction debris from the site to a location of the Contractor’s choosing off the installation. (Site soil or other site media are not covered by this paragraph.)

3. Debris will be recycled or disposed of in accordance with JBSA-Sam Houston and all applicable Federal, State and local rules.

a. Such debris must be free of all contamination, including but not limited to, lead paint, asbestos, and insecticides.

4. Prior to removal of any construction debris, that debris must be certified by the installation to be free of contamination and of no value to the United States, and this certification must be provided to the Contracting Officer.


a. To expedite work, this may be accomplished by e-mail or other suitable electronic means, however, the original certification form must be provided to the Contracting Officer.

b. No form is prescribed for this certification so long as all necessary information is provided and the document is signed by an authorized installation representative.

c. However, an example is provided at page 01 35 43-9 and this form may be used.

5. All construction debris removed from the installation must be covered by a certification.

6. The Contractor must arrange with the installation POC whether all debris will be covered by one certification or if several certifications will be required.

E. Consolidated Waste Disposal Plans:

1. Contractor may, at Contractor’s option, submit for approval as specified above one consolidated plan for handling hazardous and non-hazardous wastes.

F. Earthwork and Removal of Potentially Contaminated Media:

1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, the site has been inspected and is, consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination or pollution.

a. However, work under this contract will be performed on a military installation, where the history of prior military and industrial activities is not necessarily completely known.

b. The following provisions prohibit the removal from the installation of soil or other materials found on site and are included, in an abundance of caution, for the protection of AAFES, the installation, and the Contractor.

2. Notwithstanding any other clause in this contract, including but not limited to all standard site work general provisions (Divisions 31 and 32); no media by-product resulting from site preparation, construction or excavation shall be moved off the post, base, or installation where the construction is occurring.

a. If the construction is off the post, base or installation, no media by-product shall be moved off the construction site.

3. The Contractor shall:

a. Leave the media in place at the site, subject to appropriate erosion control or; b. Haul the media to and place it at a location on the installation that has been

designated either in this contract or in writing by the Contracting Officer; and c. If unforeseen difficulties arise, such as excessive quantity of media is generated,

the Contractor shall advise the Contracting Officer and shall not remove media from the site without written authorization from the Contracting Officer.

4. Definitions.

a. Media – Any soil, water, or air, moved, disturbed or released from a site. b. The terms hazardous, waste, pollutant, contaminate, substance have the same

meanings and usage here as they commonly do in CERCLA, RCRA, FWPCA, CAA, TSCA, and SDWA respectively.


INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FOR CLEAN CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS TO BE REMOVED FROM AAFES PROJECT SITE As representative of ___________________________ (insert name of installation), I am authorized to certify, and hereby do so certify, that the construction debris to be removed from the AAFES project site at ______________________ ____________________________________________ (describe project and list address, for example Main Exchange Project, 111 Road A, X installation) has been inspected and is of no value to the United States and is free of all contamination, including but not limited to: lead paint, asbestos, PCBs, and pesticides. CERTIFICATION: Signed: ______________________________________________ Date: ____________________ Printed Name, Rank or Grade, and Duty Title: ___________________________________________ ORIGINAL OF THIS FORM MUST BE PROVIDED TO CONTRACTING OFFICER


6 UNEXPECTED SITE CONDITIONS

6.1 CONTAMINATED SOIL OR GROUNDWATER

A. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, site has been inspected and is, consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination or pollution. However, unexpected conditions can always arise.

B. Contractor or subcontractor personnel may encounter soil or groundwater that is suspected to be contaminated, either because of odors, colors, free liquids, unexpected construction debris, or other suspicious conditions.

C. Should this occur, Contractor will immediately notify the Contracting Officer and the installation environmental office and take necessary initial measures to protect workers, the site, and other personnel.

6.2 UNEXPECTED ARTIFACTS OR RELICS

A. Should Contractor employees in the course of site preparation or other work on this contract find unexpected historic or archeological remains, such as bones, arrow points, pottery remnants, foundations, or other evidence of previous uses of the site, Contractor will cease further site-disturbing activity and immediately notify the Contracting Officer and installation environmental office.

END 01 35 43.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 35 56- STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION MEASURES

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION MEASURES 01 35 56-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS/REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM D 4439 (2002) Geosynthetics 2. ASTM D 4491 (1999a) Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity 3. ASTM D 4533 (1991; R 1996) Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles 4. ASTM D 4632 (1991; R 1996) Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of

Geotextiles 5. ASTM D 4751 (1999a) Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile 6. ASTM D 4873 (2002) Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic

Rolls and Samples

C. The National Archives and Records Administration (NARA)

1. 40 CFR 136 NPDES Stormwater Sampling Guidance Document

D. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

1. EPA 833-B-92-001 NPDES Stormwater Sampling Guidance Document

E. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality

1. NPDES Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan

1.2 GENERAL

Contractor to submit a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and Notice of Intent (NOI) to JBSA Sam Houston BCE for approval and subsequent submittal to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality for the NPDES permit. See attached preliminary SWPPP at the end of this section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Certificates

1. Mill Certificate or Affidavit; G, PO 2. Certificate attesting that the Contractor has met all specified requirements.

1.4 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS

A. All erosion and sedimentation control measures and/or Best Management Practices (BMP) shall be planned, and implemented in accordance with the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. Any deviation from this must be approved by the State or designated agency during the revision of the plan.




B. The controls and measures required by the Contractor are described below.

C. Stabilization Practices

The stabilization practices to be implemented shall include mulching, geotextiles, erosion control matting, protection of trees, preservation of mature vegetation, etc. On his daily CQC Report, the Contractor shall record the dates when the major grading activities occur, (e.g., clearing and grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading); when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site; and when stabilization practices are initiated. Except as provided in paragraphs UNSUITABLE CONDITIONS and NO ACTIVITY FOR LESS THAN 21 DAYS, stabilization practices shall be initiated as soon as practicable, but no more than 14 days, in any portion of the site where construction activities have temporarily or permanently ceased.

1. Unsuitable Conditions Where the initiation of stabilization measures by the fourteenth day after construction activity temporarily or permanently ceases is precluded by unsuitable conditions caused by the weather, stabilization practices shall be initiated as soon as practicable after conditions become suitable.

2. No Activity for Less Than 21 Days Where construction activity will resume on a portion of the site within 21 days from when activities ceased (e.g., the total time period that construction activity is temporarily ceased is less than 21 days), then stabilization practices do not have to be initiated on that portion of the site by the fourteenth day after construction activity temporarily ceased.

D. Structural Practices

Structural practices shall be implemented to divert flows from exposed soils, temporarily store flows, or otherwise limit runoff and the discharge of pollutants from exposed areas of the site. Structural practices shall be implemented in a timely manner during the construction process to minimize erosion and sediment runoff. Structural practices shall include the following devices. Location and details of installation and construction are shown on the drawings.

1. Silt Fences The Contractor shall provide silt fences as a temporary structural practice to minimize erosion and sediment runoff. Silt fences shall be properly installed to effectively retain sediment immediately after completing each phase of work where erosion would occur in the form of sheet and rill erosion (e.g. clearing and grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading). Silt fences shall be installed in the locations indicated on the drawings. Final removal of silt fence barriers shall be upon approval by the Contracting Officer.

2. Straw Bales The Contractor shall provide bales of straw as a temporary structural practice to minimize erosion and sediment runoff. Bales shall be properly placed to effectively retain sediment immediately after completing each phase of work (e.g., clearing and grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading) in each independent runoff area (e.g., after clearing and grubbing in an area between a ridge and drain, bales shall be placed as work progresses, bales shall be




removed/replaced/relocated as needed for work to progress in the drainage area). Areas where straw bales are to be used are shown on the drawings. Final removal of straw bale barriers shall be upon approval by the Contracting Officer. Rows of bales of straw shall be provided as follows: a. Along the downhill perimeter edge of all areas disturbed. b. Along the top of the slope or top bank of drainage ditches, channels,

swales, etc. that traverse disturbed areas. c. Along the toe of all cut slopes and fill slopes of the construction areas. d. Perpendicular to the flow in the bottom of existing drainage ditches,

channels, swales, etc. that traverse disturbed areas or carry runoff from disturbed areas. Rows shall be spaced a maximum of 200 feet apart as shown on the drawings.

e. Perpendicular to the flow in the bottom of new drainage ditches, channels, and swales. Rows shall be spaced a maximum of 200 feet apart as shown on the drawings.

f. At the entrance to culverts that receive runoff from disturbed areas. 3. Diversion Dikes

Diversion dikes shall have a maximum channel slope of 2 percent and shall be adequately compacted to prevent failure. The minimum height measured from the top of the dike to the bottom of the channel shall be 18 inches. The minimum base width shall be 6 feet and the minimum top width shall be 2 feet. The Contractor shall ensure that the diversion dikes are not damaged by construction operations or traffic. Diversion dikes shall be located as shown on the drawings.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS FOR SILT FENCES

A. Filter Fabric

The geotextile shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D 4439, and shall consist of polymeric filaments which are formed into a stable network such that filaments retain their relative positions. The filament shall consist of a long-chain synthetic polymer composed of at least 85 percent by weight of ester, propylene, or amide, and shall contain stabilizers and/or inhibitors added to the base plastic to make the filaments resistance to deterioration due to ultraviolet and heat exposure. Synthetic filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of six months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 to 120 degrees F. The filter fabric shall meet the following requirements:

FILTER FABRIC FOR SILT SCREEN FENCE

PHYSICAL PROPERTY TEST PROCEDURE STRENGTH REQUIREMENT

Grab Tensile ASTM D 4632 100 lbs. min.

Elongation (%) 30 % max.

Trapezoid Tear ASTM D 4533 55 lbs. min.

Permittivity ASTM D 4491 0.2 sec-1

AOS (U.S. Std Sieve) ASTM D 4751 20-100




B. Silt Fence Stakes and Posts

The Contractor may use either wooden stakes or steel posts for fence construction. Wooden stakes utilized for silt fence construction, shall have a minimum cross section of 2 inches by 2 inches when oak is used and 4 inches by 4 inches when pine is used, and shall have a minimum length of 5 feet. Steel posts (standard "U" or "T" section) utilized for silt fence construction, shall have a minimum weight of 1.33 pounds per linear foot and a minimum length of 5 feet.

C. Mill Certificate or Affidavit

A mill certificate or affidavit shall be provided attesting that the fabric and factory seams meet chemical, physical, and manufacturing requirements specified above. The mill certificate or affidavit shall specify the actual Minimum Average Roll Values and shall identify the fabric supplied by roll identification numbers. The Contractor shall submit a mill certificate or affidavit signed by a legally authorized official from the company manufacturing the filter fabric.

D. Identification Storage and Handling

Filter fabric shall be identified, stored and handled in accordance with ASTM D 4873.

2.2 COMPONENTS FOR STRAW BALES

A. The straw in the bales shall be stalks from oats, wheat, rye, barley, rice, or from grasses such as byhalia, bermuda, etc., furnished in air dry condition. The bales shall have a standard cross section of 14-inches by 18-inches. All bales shall be either wire-bound or string-tied. The Contractor may use either wooden stakes or steel posts to secure the straw bales to the ground. Wooden stakes utilized for this purpose, shall have minimum dimensions of 2-inches by 2-inches in cross section and shall have a minimum length of 3 feet. Steel posts (standard “U” or “T” section) utilized for securing straw bales, shall have a minimum weight of 1.33 pounds per linear foot and a minimum length of 3 feet.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF SILT FENCES

A. Silt fences shall extend a minimum of 16 inches above the ground surface and shall not exceed 34 inches above the ground surface. Filter fabric shall be from a continuous roll cut to the length of the barrier to avoid the use of joints. When joints are unavoidable, filter fabric shall be spliced together at a support post, with a minimum 6 inch overlap, and securely sealed. A trench shall be excavated approximately 4 inches wide and 4 inches deep on the upslope side of the location of the silt fence. The 4-inch by 4-inch trench shall be backfilled and the soil compacted over the filter fabric. Silt fences shall be removed upon approval by the Contracting Officer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STRAW BALES

A. Straw bales shall be placed in a single row, lengthwise on the contour, with ends of adjacent bales tightly abutting one another. Straw bales shall be installed so that bindings are oriented around the sides rather than along the tops and bottoms of the bales in order to prevent deterioration of the bindings. The barrier shall be




entrenched and backfilled. A trench shall be excavated the width of a bale and the length of the proposed barrier to a minimum depth of 4 inches. After the bales are staked and chinked (gaps filled by wedging with straw), the excavated soil shall be backfilled against the barrier. Backfill soil shall conform to the ground level on the downhill side and shall be built up to 4 inches against the uphill side of the barrier. Loose straw shall be scattered over the area immediately uphill from a straw bale barrier to increase barrier efficiency. Each bale shall be securely anchored by at least two stakes driven through the bale. The first stake or steel post in each bale shall be driven toward the previously laid bale to force the bales together. Stakes or steel pickets shall be driven a minimum 18 inches deep into the ground to securely anchor the bales.

3.3 MAINTENANCE

A. General

The Contractor shall maintain the temporary and permanent vegetation, erosion and sediment control measures, and other protective measures in good and effective operating condition by performing routine inspections to determine condition and effectiveness, by restoration of destroyed vegetative cover, and by repair of erosion and sediment control measures and other protective measures. The following procedures shall be followed to maintain the protective measures.

B. Silt Fence Maintenance

Silt fences shall be inspected in accordance with paragraph INSPECTIONS. Any required repairs shall be made promptly. Close attention shall be paid to the repair of damaged silt fence resulting from end runs and undercutting. Should the fabric on a silt fence decompose or become ineffective, and the barrier is still necessary, the fabric shall be replaced promptly. Sediment deposits shall be removed when deposits reach one-third of the height of the barrier. When a silt fence is no longer required, it shall be removed. The immediate area occupied by the fence and any sediment deposits shall be shaped to an acceptable grade.

C. Straw Bale Maintenance

Straw bale barriers shall be inspected in accordance with paragraph INSPECTIONS. Close attention shall be paid to the repair of damaged bales, end runs and undercutting beneath bales. Necessary repairs to barriers or replacement of bales shall be accomplished promptly. Sediment deposits shall be removed when deposits reach one-half of the height of the barrier. Bale rows used to retain sediment shall be turned uphill at each end of each row. When a straw bale barrier is no longer required, it shall be removed. The immediate area occupied by the bales and any sediment deposits shall be shaped to an acceptable grade.

D. Diversion Dike Maintenance

Diversion dikes shall be inspected in accordance with paragraph INSPECTIONS. Close attention shall be paid to the repair of damaged diversion dikes and necessary repairs shall be accomplished promptly. When diversion dikes are no longer required, they shall be shaped to an acceptable grade.

3.4 INSPECTIONS




A. General

The Contractor shall inspect disturbed areas of the construction site, areas used for storage of materials that are exposed to precipitation that have not been finally stabilized, stabilization practices, structural practices, other controls, and area where vehicles exit the site at least once every seven (7) calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches or more rainfall at the site. Where sites have been finally stabilized, such inspection shall be conducted at least once every month.

B. Inspections Details

Disturbed areas and areas used for material storage that are exposed to precipitation shall be inspected by the Contractor for evidence of, or the potential for, pollutants entering the drainage system. Erosion and sediment control measures identified on the drawings shall be observed to ensure that they are operating correctly. Discharge locations or points shall be inspected to ascertain whether erosion control measures are effective in preventing significant impacts to receiving waters. Locations where vehicles exit the site shall be inspected for evidence of offsite sediment tracking.

C. Inspection Reports

For each inspection conducted, the Contractor shall prepare a report summarizing the scope of the inspection, name(s) and qualifications of personnel making the inspection, the date(s) of the inspection, major observations relating to the implementation of the erosion control plan, maintenance performed, and actions taken. The report shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of the inspection as a part of the Contractor's daily CQC REPORT. A copy of the inspection report shall be forwarded to JBSA Sam Houston and be maintained on the job site.

END SECTION 01356A SWPPP TO FOLLOW

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWP3)

TPDES Construction General Permit, TXR150000

FOR


Project Site Address: Southwest Quadrant of Taylor Road & Scott Road

Contract Number: AAFES 3720-14-000002

Task Number:

Prepared by: Mach IV Engineering & Surveying LLC

2260 Salscheider Court Green Bay, WI 54313

920-569-5765 Scott Harrig, P.E.

SWP3 Preparation Date: March 26, 2018

Reference TPDES Construction General Permit, TXR150000, Effective Date: 5 Mar 2018, Texas

Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ)

Project Name: Construct Dual Food, JBSA-Sam Houston, Texas Contract Number: AAFES 3720-14-000002

CERTIFICATIONS

To Be Completed by Primary Operator

“I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to ensure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, to the best of my knowledge and belief, the information submitted is true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations.”

To Be Completed by Secondary Operator

“I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to ensure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, to the best of my knowledge and belief, the information submitted is true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations.”

Operator’s Name and Title Operator’s Telephone Number

Operator’s Signature Date

Operator’s Name and Title Operator’s Telephone Number

Operator’s Signature Date

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1: CONTACT INFORMATION/RESPONSIBILITIES……………………………

1.1 Primary Operator……………….………………………………………………………………….

1.2 Secondary Operator.……………………………………………………………………………...

SECTION 2: OBJECTIVE………………………………………………………………………

SECTION 3: SWP3 REVIEW AND AMMENDMENTS

3.1 Review

3.2 Amendments……………………………………………………………………………………….

SECTION 4: SITE OR PROJECT DESCRIPTION…………………………………………..

4.1 Construction Activity with Potential Pollutants and Sources…………………………….

4.2 Major Activities Schedule………………………………………………………………………..

4.3 Property Acreage………………………………………………………………………………….

4.4 Construction Activity Acreage………………………………………………………………….

4.5 Soil Data…………………………………………………………………………………………….

4.6 General Site Map………………………………………………………………………………….

4.7 Erosion and Sediment Control Site Map……………………………………………………..

4.8 Asphalt and/or Concrete Plants………………………………………………………………..

4.9 Receiving Waters………………………………………………………………………………….

4.10 TDPES Construction General Permit, TXR150000……………..………………………….

4.11 Notice of Intent (NOI), Construction Site Notice (CSN)…………………………………...

4.12 Locations of Allowable Stormwater and Non-Stormwater Discharges………………..

4.13 Locations of All Pollutant-Generating Discharges………………………………………...

SECTION 5. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS…………………………………....

5.1 General Requirements…………………………………………………………………….……..

5.2 Non-Structural Controls…………….…………………………………………………………...

5.3 Erosion Control Practices……………………………………………………………………….

5.4 Sediment Control Practices…………………………………………………………………….

SECTION 6. OTHER CONTROLS....................................................................................

6.1 Dewatering Controls………………………………………………………………………………

6.2 Concrete Washout Controls……………………………………………………………………..

6.3 Concrete Mixing Area Controls…………………………………………………………………

6.4 Spill Prevention Controls………………………………………………………………………...

6.5 Paving Controls……………………………………………………………………………………

6.6 Paint /Stucco Washout Controls and Water Disposal………………………………………

6.7 Solid Waste Storage and Disposal……………………………………………………………..

SECTION 7. PERMANENT STORM WATER CONTROLS……………………………….

SECTION 8. STABILIZATION……………………………..…………………………………

8.1 Temporary Stabilization Practices……………………………………………………..……

8.2 Final Stabilization Practices……………………….…………………………………………..

8.3 Stabilization Practice Schedule…………………….…………………………………………..

SECTION 9. TRAINING AND MAINTENANCE……………………………………………...

SECTION 10. INSPECTION OF CONTROLS……………………………………………….

SECTION 11. ENDANGERED SPECIES…………………………………………………….

SECTION 12. TERMINATION OF SWPPP………………………………………………….

APPENDIX A, General Site Map…..…………………………………………………………..

APPENDIX B, Erosion and Sediment Control Site Map………………………………….

APPENDIX C, BMP Details and Specifications……………………………………………

APPENDIX D, Construction Site Notice …………..………………………………………

APPENDIX E, Construction Site Inspection Report…………………...………………….

APPENDIX F, Corrective Action Log………………………………………………………...

APPENDIX G, Long Term Maintenance Requirements………………...…..………..…

APPENDIX H, Storm Water Management Calculations………………...…..………..…

SECTION 1: CONTACT INFORMATION/RESPONSIBILITIES 1.1 Primary Operator: Operator’s Name Point of Contact (POC) Complete Address POCs Telephone Number POCs Email Address List operator’s responsibilities:_______________________ 1.2 Secondary Operator: Operator’s Name Point of Contact (POC) Complete Address POCs Telephone Number POCs Email Address List operator’s responsibilities:________________________ SECTION 2: OBJECTIVE This document is intended to be used as the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3) for the Proposed Dual Food Facility Construction on Scott Road at JBSA-Sam Houston, Texas. This plan is intended to comply with applicable Federal, State, local, and JBSA-Sam Houston regulations in the management of storm water erosion and sediment for construction sites. The objects of the SWP3 are as follows:

To protect human life and health. To comply with JBSA-SAM HOUSTON, Texas Commission on Environmental Quality

(TCEQ), and USEPA regulations. To protect water resources quantity and quality and prevent degradation of these

resources. To protect and enhance storm water quality at the level of designated use. To control erosion and sediment runoff. To maintain and protect the natural, physical, and biological characteristics and functions

(e.g., no significant changes in the hydrological regime or pollutant input) of the receiving water.

SECTION 3: SWP3 REVIEW AND AMMENDMENTS 3.1 Review: This SWP3 must be retained on-site at the construction site or, if the site is inactive or does not have an on-site location to store the plan, a notice must be posted

describing the location of the SWP3. This SWP3 must be made readily available at the time of an on-site inspection to:

1. JBSA-Sam Houston DPW, Operator of the small Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving discharges from site.

2. Executive director of Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ).

3. Federal, state, or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans, grading plans,

or storm water management plans.

4. Local government officials. 3.2 Amendments: The Contractor must revise or update the SWP3 whenever the following occurs: 1. A change in design, construction, operation, or maintenance that has a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants and that has not been previously addressed in the SWP3;

2. Changing site conditions based on updated plans and specifications, new operators, new areas of responsibility, and changes in BMPs; or

3. Results of inspections or investigations by site operators, operators of a municipal

separate storm sewer system receiving the discharge, authorized TCEQ personnel, or a federal, state, or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans indicate the SWP3 is proving ineffective in eliminating or significantly minimizing pollutants in discharges authorized under this general permit.

SECTION 4: SITE OR PROJECT DESCRIPTION The Dual Food project site is approximately 4.0 acres. The site is currently developed with an existing Popeye’s restaurant and associated parking/drive through. The existing building and impervious surface will be demolished prior to new construction. The proposed site will consist of a new Dual Food building, drive through lanes, parking lot, site utilities and a dry detention basin for stormwater control. 4.1 Construction Activity with Potential Pollutants and Sources

Construction Activity and/or Materials

Pollutant BMP

Clear & Grub Site Sediment Construction Entrance Basin/Inlet Protection Sediment Fence Sweeping Sediment Basin Stripping Topsoil Sediment Same as above

Earthwork Activities Sediment Same as above Utility Construction Sediment Same as above Landscaping/Topsoil Placement

Sediment Same as above

Concrete Placement Waste concrete Concrete Washout Station 4.2 Major Activities Schedule 1. Estimate Construction Start Date: __________ 2. Estimate Construction End Date: __________

Activity Est. Time Frame Start Date End Date Clear & Grub site days Strip Topsoil days Earthwork Activities days Utility Construction days Pavement Construction days Landscaping/Topsoil Placement days Final Restoration days

4.3 Property Acreage The site is located within boundaries of JBSA-Sam Houston, east of Camp Travis Road, south of Taylor Road and west of Scott Road, approximately 0.75 mile north of USH35.

4.4 Construction Activity Acreage: The total number of acres of construction activities, material storage areas, stockpiles, and borrows areas are listed below.

Activity or Material Acres Construction Activities (resulting in land disturbance) 3.13 Off-site Material Storage Areas TBD Overburden and Stockpiles of Dirt TBD Borrow Areas TBD

4.5 Soil Data In-situ soil conditions have been investigated by geotechnical engineering firm Raba Kistner through nine soil borings (three building, three pavement, and three historic). The borings revealed primarily stiff clay over pockets of gravel (chert). Soils encountered on site are known to be highly expansive. Recommendations of the geotechnical reports shall be incorporated to limit the expansive characteristics. 4.6 General Site Map: See Appendix A

4.7 Erosion and Sediment Control Site Map: See Appendix B 4.8 Asphalt and/or Concrete Plants Asphalt and/or concrete plants will not be located on site. 4.9 Receiving Waters: Runoff from the project is tributary to the San Antonio River Basin. 4.10 TDPES Construction General Permit, TXR150000: TCEQ has renewed the Construction General Permit TXR15000 effective March 5, 2018. The general permit authorizes the discharge of stormwater runoff associated with small and large construction site and certain non-stormwater discharges into surface waters of the state. 4.11 Notice of Intent (NOI), Construction Site Notice (CSN) and acknowledgement certificate(s): Land disturbance (including laydown area, building, pond, roadway and parking) for the project is estimated to be 3.13 acres. If authorized changes to the plan increase land disturbance to 5 acres or greater, a TCEQ Notice of Intent (NOI) will be required. Land disturbance of 1 acre to less than 5 acres requires a Site Notice for Small Construction Activities to be filed with TCEQ (See Appendix D) 4.12 Locations of Stormwater Discharges Authorized Under CGP: The following non-stormwater discharges from sites authorized under this general permit are also eligible for authorization under this general permit.

(a) discharges from fire fighting activities (fire fighting activities do not include washing of

trucks, run-off water from training activities, test water from fire suppression systems, or similar activities);

(b) uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings (excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated

water, unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life), which include flushings from systems that utilize potable water, surface water, or groundwater that does not contain additional pollutants (uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings do not include systems utilizing reclaimed wastewater as a source water);

(c) water from the routine external washing of vehicles, the external portion of buildings

or structures, and pavement, where detergents and soaps are not used, where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not occurred (unless spilled materials have been removed; and if local state, or federal regulations are applicable, the materials are removed according to those regulations), and where the purpose is to remove mud, dirt, or dust;

(d) uncontaminated water used to control dust;

(e) potable water sources, including waterline flushings, but excluding discharges of

hyperchlorinated water, unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life;

(f) uncontaminated air conditioning condensate;

(g) uncontaminated ground water or spring water, including foundation or footing drains where flows are not contaminated with industrial materials such as solvents; and

(h) lawn watering and similar irrigation drainage.

4.13 Locations of All Pollutant Discharges See Appendix B 5. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS 5.1 General Requirements No construction shall be performed in a manner that will negatively impact the storm water quantity or quality of any storm water conveyance of JBSA-Sam Houston. All development shall be conducted in a manner which minimizes soil erosion and resulting sedimentation. Under no circumstances is construction to allow sediment to leave a construction site in a way that would be a violation of state, local, or federal regulations. The exposed area of any disturbed land shall be limited to the smallest practical area for the shortest possible period of time. A rain gauge will be used to record rainfall events at the site. The Contractor is required to have a person qualified to perform erosion prevention and sediment control inspections. Erosion and sediment measures include but are not limited to the following: 1. Erosion prevention on denuded areas 2. Non-structural management practices to be implemented 3. Perimeter controls 4. Permanent storm water conveyance structures 5. Final stabilized conditions of the site 6. Provision for removing temporary control measures 7. Stabilization of the site where temporary measures are removed 8. Maintenance requirements for temporary management practices 9. Maintenance requirements for any permanent measures 10. Storm water inlet protection to ensure only storm water enters. 11. Land/soil disturbed areas shall be mulched/stabilized as needed to prevent erosion and sediment loss. No land/soil disturbing activity may begin until the following conditions have been met: • Erosion and sediment controls are in place and functional. • Storm Water Inspection Program and qualified person are in place. • Site specific Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan is complete and is on site or readily available.

Temporary erosion control measures may be removed at the beginning of the workday, but shall be replaced at the end of the day. 5.2 Non-Structural Controls Preserve the existing natural conditions as much as feasible throughout the construction process. This could be accomplished through phasing the construction operations in order to minimize the amount of disturbed land at any one time. The contractor shall establish and maintain a proactive method to prevent the off-site migration or deposit of sediment on roadways used by the general public. 5.3 Erosion Control Practices A. Temporary Seeding Temporary seeding to establish temporary cover on disturbed areas by planting appropriate rapidly growing annual grasses or small grains. Temporary seeding shall be applied on exposed soil where additional work (grading, etc.) is not scheduled for more than 21 days. Permanent seeding shall be applied if the areas will be idle for more than one year. Provide seeding in accordance with State standards, and in accordance with project specifications. B. Permanent Seeding/Sodding Perennial vegetation is established on areas that will not be re-disturbed for periods longer than 12 months. Permanent seeding includes site preparation, seedbed preparation, planting seed, mulching, irrigation and maintenance. Permanent vegetation is used to stabilize soil, reduce erosion, prevent sediment pollution, reduce runoff by promoting infiltration, and provide storm water quality benefits offered by dense grass cover. Provide permanent seeding/sodding in accordance with State standards, and in accordance with project specifications. C. Tree Preservation Trees to be preserved from damage are indicated on drawings and project specifications. Provide tree preservation shall be in accordance with State standards, and in accordance with project specifications. D. Temporary Rolled Erosion Control Matting A Temporary Rolled Erosion Control Product (TRECP) is a degradable manufactured material used to stabilize easily eroded areas while vegetation becomes established. Temporary Rolled Erosion Control Products are degradable products composed of biologically, photo chemically or otherwise degradable materials. TRECPs consist of erosion control netting, open weave textiles, and erosion control blankets and mats. These products reduce soil erosion and assist vegetative growth by providing temporary cover from the erosive action of rainfall and runoff while providing soil-seed contact. Temporary rolled erosion control products (matting or blankets) shall be installed in areas as shown on the plans. Provide TRECP in accordance with State standards, and in accordance with project specifications.

E. Mulching A protective layer of mulch applied to bare soil is used to abate erosion by shielding it from raindrop impact. Mulch shall be used in conjunction with seeding to establish vegetation or by itself to provide erosion control when the season does not allow grass to grow. Mulch and other vegetative practices must be applied on all disturbed portions of construction sites that will not be re-disturbed for more than 21 days. Provide mulching in accordance with State standards, and in accordance with project specifications. F. Outlet Stabilization Outlet Stabilization shall be provided by means of rock protection where indicated on plans, in accordance with State standards, and in accordance with project plans, and specifications. 5.4 Sediment Control Practices Sediment control practices shall be used to control erosion and trap sediment for a site remaining disturbed for more than 14 days. All sediment control practices are capable of ponding runoff in order to be considered functional. Sediment control structures shall remain functional throughout the course of earth disturbing activity. Details for the proposed structural practices can be found in Appendix “B”. A. Sediment Basin A sediment basin is a temporary settling pond that releases runoff at a controlled rate. The basin is designed to slowly release runoff, detaining it long enough to allow most of the sediment to settle. The proposed dry detention basin shall be used as a sediment basin during construction. The sediment basins will be in accordance with project plans and specifications. B. Silt Fence Silt fence is a sediment-trapping practice utilizing a geotextile fence, topography and sometimes vegetation to cause sediment deposition. Silt fence reduces runoff’s ability to transport sediment by ponding runoff and dissipating small rills of concentrated flow into uniform sheet flow. Silt fence is used to prevent sediment-laden sheet runoff from entering into downstream streams and sewer systems. Silt fence is not to be installed in gullies, ditches or channels. Silt fence to be provided in accordance with State standards, and in accordance with project plans, and specifications. C. Storm Drain Inlet Protection Storm drain inlet protection devices remove sediment from storm water before it enters storm sewers and downstream areas. Inlet protection devices are sediment barriers that may be constructed of washed gravel or crushed stone, geotextile fabrics and other materials that are supported around or across storm drain inlets. Inlet protection is installed to capture some sediment and reduce the maintenance of storm sewers and other underground piping systems

prior to the site being stabilized. Provide inlet protection provided in accordance with State standards, and in accordance with project plans, and specifications. D. Construction Entrance(s) A construction entrance is a stabilized pad of stone underlain with a geotextile and is used to reduce the amount of mud tracked off-site with construction traffic. Located at points of ingress/egress, the practice is used to reduce the amount of mud tracked off-site with construction traffic. A Construction Entrances will be provided indicated on plans, and in accordance with State standards, and in accordance with project specifications. 6. OTHER CONTROLS (Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures) 6.1 Dewatering Controls There shall be no turbid discharges to surface waters of the State resulting from dewatering activities. If trench or ground water contains sediment, it must pass through a sediment settling pond or other equally effective sediment control device, prior to being discharged from the construction site. Alternatively, sediment may be removed by settling in place or by dewatering into a sump pit, filter bag or comparable practice. Ground water dewatering which does not contain sediment or other pollutants is not required to be treated prior to discharge. However, care must be taken when discharging ground water to ensure that it does not become pollutant-laden by traversing over disturbed soils or other pollutant sources. No dewatering activities are anticipated but if they are required, they will be in accordance with State standards. 6.2 Concrete Washout A concrete washout will be provided to minimize or eliminate the discharge of concrete waste materials to the storm drain system or watercourse. Washout shall consist of a manufactured portable washout container or containment area with 10 millimeter leak free liner. Washout will be provided in accordance with State standards, and in accordance with project plans, and specifications. 6.3 Concrete Mixing Area Controls It is anticipated that concrete will be mixed at a plant and not on site. 6.4 Spill Prevention Controls: The following lists hazardous materials and/or petroleum products that are expected to be used and stored on site with the appropriate pollution prevention measures to prevent spills.

Material Pollution Prevention Measures Fuel (Diesel and gasoline) Secondary containment for storage

Drip pans for refueling

1. The list above will be updated if other hazardous materials are used on site.

2. Outside the cantonment area (ranges, etc), report the types of spills listed below immediately to contact the Base Environmental Department 3. Within the cantonment area, report the following types of spills immediately to the JBSA-Sam Houston Fire Department. JBSA-Sam Houston Reportable Spills:

A. Spills of 25 gallons or more of petroleum products B. Spills of any hazardous substance (e.g. fuel, battery acid, etc.). C. Spills covering more than 100 square feet of area. D. Spills harmful to, or potentially threatening to, the public health/environment E. Any spill causing a visible sheen on water.

4. Turn off ignition sources; no flares, smoking, or flames in the hazard area. Contain the spill. Stay upwind and avoid low-lying areas. 6.5 Paving Controls Only concrete pavement will be utilized for this this project. It is anticipated that concrete will be mixed at a plant and not on site. Concrete trucks shall be directed to use the designated concrete washout. 6.6 Paint/Stucco Washout Controls and Water Disposal Paint/Stucco materials shall be washed and legally disposed of offsite. 6.7 Solid Waste Storage and Disposal A. Contaminated Sediment While conditions for contaminated sediment are not expected on site, if such conditions are discovered operators must be aware that concentrations of materials that fall under other criteria (is not considered a Hazardous Waste, meeting VAP standards, etc.) may still result in storm water discharges in excess of Texas Water Quality Standards. Such discharges are not authorized by this permit. Appropriate BMPs include, but are not limited to: • The use of berms, trenches, and pits to collect contaminated runoff and prevent discharges • Pumping runoff into a sanitary sewer (with prior approval of the sanitary sewer operator) or into a container for transport to an appropriate treatment/disposal facility • Covering areas of contamination with tarps or other methods that prevent storm water from coming into contact with the material. Operators should consult with Texas EPA Division of Surface Water prior to seeking permit coverage.

B. Construction Waste Materials Waste material (earth and rock) not required for the construction of the project shall be stockpiled in designated locations, and shall be disposed of at an approved offsite location. The contractor shall not dispose of any material at JBSA-Sam Houston. Borrow and waste disposal areas shall be located in upland (non-wetland) areas and above the 100-year Federal Emergency Management Agency floodplain. Borrow and waste disposal areas shall not affect any waters of the State/U.S./ JBSA-Sam Houston Military Reserve and shall be above ordinary high water of any adjacent watercourse. So long as waste is not classified as hazardous, the JBSA-Sam Houston Municipal Landfill can be used for all construction debris generated within the boundaries of JBSA-Sam Houston. Disposal at the landfill is subject to inspection and permission from the JBSA-Sam Houston’s Directorate of Public Works as well as all applicable federal, state, and local regulations. 7. PERMANENT STORM WATER CONTROLS Permanent runoff controls convey water in a manner that is stable and doesn’t contribute sediment and additional pollutants to runoff. The following structural practices will be incorporated in order to treat the water quality volume as defined in Texas’s CGP. The structural BMP’s will be installed to USGBC LEED standards for quantity reduction and quality improvements. Calculations for the BMP’s are included in Appendix “H”. A. DRY DETENTION POND The project will incorporate a dry detention basin for water quantity control. During the construction phase, temporary sediment basins will be constructed at the locations of the detention facilities. Upon site stabilization, any sediment accumulation shall be removed and the sediment basins will be converted permanent dry detention basins in accordance with Appendix “C”. Calculations for the dry basin can be found in Appendix “H”. 8. STABILIZATION Soil stabilization refers to measures that protect soil from the erosive forces of raindrop impact and flowing water. Applicable practices include but are not limited to temporary or permanent vegetative establishment, mulching, sod application, vegetative buffers, rock buffers, and the early application of gravel base on areas to be paved. Selected soil stabilization measures shall be appropriate for the time of year, site conditions, and estimated duration of use.

8.1 Temporary Stabilization

Table 8.1.1: Temporary Stabilization

Area requiring temporary stabilization

Time frame to apply erosion controls

Any disturbed areas within 50 feet of a surface water of the State and not at final grade

Within two days of the most recent disturbance if the area will remain idle for more than 21 days

For all construction activities, any disturbed areas that will be dormant for more than 21 days but less than one year, and not within 50 feet of a surface water of the State

Within seven days of the most recent disturbance within the area

8.2 Final Stabilization

Table 8.2.1: Permanent Stabilization

Area requiring permanent stabilization

Time frame to apply erosion controls

Any areas that will lie dormant for one year or more

Within seven days of the most recent disturbance

Any areas within 50 feet of a surface water of the State and at final grade

Within two days of reaching final grade

Any other areas at final grade Within seven days of reaching final grade within that area

8.3 Stabilization Practice Schedule The following stabilization practices will be implemented according to the following schedule. If construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of a site, then it will be noted below.

Stabilization Practices Location Time Frame Date Started Date Ended Example: Sod 50’ from

footprint 2 days

00/00/00 00/00/00

9. TRAINING AND MAINTENANCE 9.1 Training Contractor shall make employees, subcontractors, and suppliers abide by practices and procedures described herein the SWPPP. Educating employees, subcontractors, and suppliers through training provides the greatest chance the SWPPP will be successful. 9.2 Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance (I&M) of the erosion & sediment controls, and post construction BMP’s is crucial to their performance. If maintained as suggested in the SWPPP, chances that the proposed BMP’s fail can be significantly reduced. If not maintained properly, the chance of failure is high.

Contractor shall maintain erosion & sediment controls during construction, and prior to final stabilization. The Contractor shall install the post construction BMP’s near the end of the construction activities, and maintain them until final acceptance from the Owner, who will then assume responsibility for inspection and maintenance to perpetuity, or until the BMP’s are removed by a subsequent project.

I&M forms and manuals can be found in Appendices “E” and “F” respectively.

It is recommended that the Contractor install a rain gauge on-site and maintain it in good working condition. The Contractor shall record daily precipitation amounts on the project and provide this information to the JBSA-Sam Houston BCE on a monthly basis.

Outfall points shall be inspected by the contractor to determine whether erosion and sediment control measures are effective in preventing siltation impacts to surrounding waters. Upon conclusion of the inspections, erosion and sediment control measures found to be ineffective shall be repaired, replaced, or modified before the next rain event, if possible, but in no case more than seven days after the condition is identified.

Sediment shall be removed from sediment control structures when the design capacity has been reduced by fifty percent. Sediment removed from sediment control structures shall be placed and be treated in a manner so that the sediment is contained within the project limits and does not migrate into waters of the State/U.S. During sediment removal, the Contractor shall take care to ensure that structural components of erosion control structures are not damaged and thus made ineffective. If damage does occur, the Contractor shall replace the structures at the Contractor’s expense.

The Contractor shall establish and maintain a proactive method to prevent the off-site migration or deposit of sediment on roadways used by JBSA-Sam Houston residents and the general public. Locations where vehicles enter and exit the site shall be inspected for evidence of off-site roadway sediment tracking.

Whenever there is a change in the scope of work of the project, which would be expected to have a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants to the water of the state and which has not otherwise been addressed the SWPPP will be modified.

9.3 Long-Term Maintenance Following construction and termination of the SWPPP, JBSA-Sam Houston will assume ownership of permanent stormwater best management practices. JBSA-Sam Houston personnel shall perform post construction inspection and maintenance of the BMP's in accordance with Appendix "H". 10. INSPECTION OF CONTROLS 10.1 Inspection Frequency:

Inspection and maintenance of erosion and sediment control structures is to be performed on a regular basis throughout the life of the project. Inspections of erosion and sediment control measures shall be done before anticipated storm events (or series of storm events such as intermittent showers over one or more days), within 24 hours after the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater, and at least once per week. The Contractor shall maintain at the site the following records of construction activities:

1. The dates when major grading activities occur 2. The dates when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site 3. The dates when stabilization measures are initiated 4. Daily rainfall amounts 5. Required Inspection Records/Reports The JBSA-Sam Houston BCE will retain copies of storm water pollution prevention plans and all reports required by this permit. If at any time it is determined by AAFES/JBSA-Sam Houston representatives that the designated construction site inspector/manager is not preventing erosion and sediment control from leaving the site, additional controls shall be implemented immediately to correct the deficiency at Contractor’s expense. If AAFES/JBSA-SAM Houston representatives determine that adequate inspections and maintenance procedures are not being implemented, or the controls as designed are not meeting control performance objectives presented in this plan, or they violate state regulations, then government representatives shall issue a Stop Work Order until adequate controls are met.

10.2 Inspector Qualifications: The inspector is knowledgeable of CGP, familiar with the construction site, and knowledgeable of the SWP3 for the site. 11. ENDANGERED SPECIES Discharges that would adversely affect a listed endangered or threatened aquatic or aquatic-dependent species or its critical habitat are not authorized by this permit, unless the requirements of the Endangered Species Act are satisfied. Discharges from the site will not adversely affect a listed endangered or threatened aquatic or aquatic-dependent species or its critical habitat. At this time, the endangered/threatened species of birds on JBSA-Sam Houston, Black-capped Vireo and Golden-cheeked Warbler, are not found in the project area. In addition, these species are not aquatic-dependent species and the bird’s critical habitat is not associated with an aquatic environment. 12. TERMINATION OF SWPPP Once the site appears to meet requirements for final stabilization, the operator(s) will schedule a Final Construction Site Stormwater Inspection with 502 CES/CEIE, Environmental Compliance’s Water Quality Lead. Once Environmental Compliance concurs that the site has achieved final stabilization, the operator will terminate coverage under the CGP and comply with Part F which is summarized below. Small Construction Sites: Both primary and secondary operator will remove the CSN, fill in the requested information at the bottom right section of the notice, and forward a copy of the completed notice to 502 CES/CEIE, Environmental Compliance’s Water Quality Lead. .

APPENDIX A

General Site Map

SITE LOCATION MAP

Legend JBSA SAM HOUSTON - DUAL FOODS

400 ft

N

➤➤

N© 2018 Google

© 2018 Google

© 2018 Google© 2018 Europa Technologies

© 2018 Europa Technologies

© 2018 Europa Technologies

APPENDIX B

Erosion and Sediment Control Site Map

APPENDIX C

BMP Details and Specifications

APPENDIX D

Construction Site Notice

SMALL CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE

Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Stormwater Program

TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000

The following information is posted in compliance with Part II.E.2. of the TCEQ General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from small construction sites. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at:

http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq_construction.html

Operator Name:

Contact Name and Phone Number:

Project Description: Physical address or description of the site’s location, estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized

Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan:

For Small Construction Activities Authorized Under Part II.E.2. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed:

I (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification) certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.2. of TPDES General Permit TXR150000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations.

Signature and Title Date

Date Notice Removed

MS4 operator notified per Part II.F.3.

http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq_construction.html

APPENDIX E

Construction Site Inspection Report

Construction Site Inspection Report

General Information Project Name CONSTRUCT DUAL FOOD JBSA-Sam Houston, Texas

NPDES Tracking No. Location

Date of Inspection Start/End Time

Inspector’s Name(s)

Inspector’s Title(s)

Inspector’s Contact Information

Type of Inspection: Regular Pre-storm event During storm event Post-storm event

Weather Information Has there been a storm event since the last inspection? Yes No If yes, provide: Storm Start Date & Time: Storm Duration (hrs): Approximate Amount of Precipitation (in): Weather at time of this inspection? Clear Cloudy Rain Sleet Fog Snowing High Winds Other: Temperature: Have any discharges occurred since the last inspection? Yes No If yes, describe: Are there any discharges at the time of inspection? Yes No If yes, describe:

Site-specific BMPs

CERTIFICATION STATEMENT I certify that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Print name and title: ___________________________________________________________________________ Signature:_________________________________________________________ Date:_____________________

APPENDIX F

Corrective Action Log

Corre

ctive

Acti

on Lo

g

Pr

ojec

t Nam

e:

SWPP

P Co

ntac

t:

Insp

ectio

n D

ate

Insp

ecto

r N

ame(

s)

Des

crip

tion

of B

MP

Def

icie

ncy

Cor

rect

ive

Act

ion

Nee

ded

(incl

udin

g pl

anne

d da

te/r

espo

nsib

le p

erso

n)

Dat

e A

ctio

n T

aken

/Res

pons

ible

pe

rson

APPENDIX G

Long Term Maintenance Requirements

Long Term Maintenance Requirements

IMPLEMENTED STORMWATER CONTROL = DRY DETENTION BASIN 1. Pond embankments shall be checked after heavy rains for signs of erosion. Any eroding areas

shall be repaired immediately to prevent further sediment loss to downstream waters. Erosion matting is recommended for repairing grassed areas.

2. NO trees are to be planted or allowed to grow on ANY earthen berms. Tree root systems can reduce soil compaction and cause berm failure. The berms must be inspected annually and any woody vegetation removed.

3. Remove and dispose all garbage and debris that collects within the basin

4. Inspect and maintain turf grass.

APPENDIX H

Storm Water Management Calculations

1 2

3

5

67

9

1

Watershed Model SchematicHydraflow Hydrographs Extension for AutoCAD® Civil 3D® 2014 by Autodesk, Inc. v10.3

Project: 0996-07-18 hydraflow 100%.gpw Thursday, 03 / 22 / 2018

Hyd. Origin Description

Legend

1 SCS Runoff EXISTING 1

2 SCS Runoff EXISTING 2

3 Combine TOTAL EXISTING

5 SCS Runoff PROPOSED 1

6 Reservoir PROP 1 ROUTED

7 SCS Runoff PROPOSED 2

9 Combine PROPOSED TOTAL

Hydrograph Return Period Recap2

Hyd. Hydrograph Inflow Peak Outflow (cfs) Hydrograph

No. type hyd(s) Description

(origin) 1-yr 2-yr 3-yr 5-yr 10-yr 25-yr 50-yr 100-yr

1 SCS Runoff ------ ------- ------- ------- 8.353 ------- 13.27 ------- 18.13 EXISTING 1

2 SCS Runoff ------ ------- ------- ------- 7.460 ------- 13.18 ------- 18.97 EXISTING 2

3 Combine 1, 2 ------- ------- ------- 15.80 ------- 26.46 ------- 37.10 TOTAL EXISTING

5 SCS Runoff ------ ------- ------- ------- 12.09 ------- 18.87 ------- 25.56 PROPOSED 1

6 Reservoir 5 ------- ------- ------- 4.590 ------- 6.137 ------- 14.77 PROP 1 ROUTED

7 SCS Runoff ------ ------- ------- ------- 5.417 ------- 9.573 ------- 13.77 PROPOSED 2

9 Combine 6, 7, ------- ------- ------- 9.660 ------- 14.45 ------- 25.97 PROPOSED TOTAL

Proj. file: 0996-07-18 hydraflow 100%.gpw Thursday, 03 / 22 / 2018

Hydraflow Hydrographs Extension for AutoCAD® Civil 3D® 2014 by Autodesk, Inc. v10.3

Hydrograph Summary Report3

Hyd. Hydrograph Peak Time Time to Hyd. Inflow Maximum Total Hydrograph

No. type flow interval Peak volume hyd(s) elevation strge used Description

(origin) (cfs) (min) (min) (cuft) (ft) (cuft)

1 SCS Runoff 8.353 2 732 37,992 ------ ------ ------ EXISTING 1


3 Combine 15.80 2 732 70,965 1, 2 ------ ------ TOTAL EXISTING

5 SCS Runoff 12.09 2 730 51,524 ------ ------ ------ PROPOSED 1

6 Reservoir 4.590 2 750 51,523 5 740.10 11,135 PROP 1 ROUTED


9 Combine 9.660 2 734 75,465 6, 7, ------ ------ PROPOSED TOTAL

0996-07-18 hydraflow 100%.gpw Return Period: 5 Year Thursday, 03 / 22 / 2018


Hydrograph ReportHydraflow Hydrographs Extension for AutoCAD® Civil 3D® 2014 by Autodesk, Inc. v10.3 Thursday, 03 / 22 / 2018

Hyd. No. 1

EXISTING 1

Hydrograph type = SCS Runoff Peak discharge = 8.353 cfsStorm frequency = 5 yrs Time to peak = 732 minTime interval = 2 min Hyd. volume = 37,992 cuftDrainage area = 2.700 ac Curve number = 90*Basin Slope = 0.0 % Hydraulic length = 0 ftTc method = TR55 Time of conc. (Tc) = 18.99 minTotal precip. = 5.00 in Distribution = Type IIIStorm duration = 24 hrs Shape factor = 484

* Composite (Area/CN) = [(1.550 x 98) + (1.150 x 80)] / 2.700

4

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

2.00 2.00

4.00 4.00

6.00 6.00

8.00 8.00

10.00 10.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)

EXISTING 1Hyd. No. 1 -- 5 Year

Hyd No. 1

TR55 Tc Worksheet5


Hyd. No. 1

EXISTING 1

Description A B C Totals

Sheet FlowManning's n-value = 0.240 0.011 0.011Flow length (ft) = 100.0 0.0 0.0Two-year 24-hr precip. (in) = 4.00 0.00 0.00Land slope (%) = 1.00 0.00 0.00

Travel Time (min) = 16.84 + 0.00 + 0.00 = 16.84

Shallow Concentrated FlowFlow length (ft) = 130.00 270.00 0.00Watercourse slope (%) = 3.07 2.55 0.00Surface description = Unpaved Paved PavedAverage velocity (ft/s) =2.83 3.25 0.00

Travel Time (min) = 0.77 + 1.39 + 0.00 = 2.15

Channel FlowX sectional flow area (sqft) = 0.00 0.00 0.00Wetted perimeter (ft) = 0.00 0.00 0.00Channel slope (%) = 0.00 0.00 0.00Manning's n-value = 0.015 0.015 0.015Velocity (ft/s) =0.00

0.000.00

Flow length (ft) ({0})0.0 0.0 0.0

Travel Time (min) = 0.00 + 0.00 + 0.00 = 0.00

Total Travel Time, Tc .............................................................................. 18.99 min


Hyd. No. 2

EXISTING 2



6

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

2.00 2.00

4.00 4.00

6.00 6.00

8.00 8.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)


Hyd No. 2

TR55 Tc Worksheet7


Hyd. No. 2

EXISTING 2



Travel Time (min) = 16.84 + 0.00 + 0.00 = 16.84

Shallow Concentrated FlowFlow length (ft) = 70.00 73.00 354.00Watercourse slope (%) = 2.14 10.95 4.52Surface description = Unpaved Unpaved UnpavedAverage velocity (ft/s) =2.36 5.34 3.43

Travel Time (min) = 0.49 + 0.23 + 1.72 = 2.44


0.000.00

Flow length (ft) ({0})0.0 0.0 0.0

Travel Time (min) = 0.00 + 0.00 + 0.00 = 0.00



Hyd. No. 3

TOTAL EXISTING

Hydrograph type = Combine Peak discharge = 15.80 cfsStorm frequency = 5 yrs Time to peak = 732 minTime interval = 2 min Hyd. volume = 70,965 cuftInflow hyds. = 1, 2 Contrib. drain. area = 5.840 ac

8

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

3.00 3.00

6.00 6.00

9.00 9.00

12.00 12.00

15.00 15.00

18.00 18.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)

TOTAL EXISTINGHyd. No. 3 -- 5 Year

Hyd No. 3 Hyd No. 1 Hyd No. 2


Hyd. No. 5

PROPOSED 1



9

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

2.00 2.00

4.00 4.00

6.00 6.00

8.00 8.00

10.00 10.00

12.00 12.00

14.00 14.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)

PROPOSED 1Hyd. No. 5 -- 5 Year

Hyd No. 5

TR55 Tc Worksheet10


Hyd. No. 5

PROPOSED 1



Travel Time (min) = 12.08 + 0.00 + 0.00 = 12.08

Shallow Concentrated FlowFlow length (ft) = 55.00 201.00 100.00Watercourse slope (%) = 3.18 2.23 1.00Surface description = Paved Paved UnpavedAverage velocity (ft/s) =3.63 3.04 1.61

Travel Time (min) = 0.25 + 1.10 + 1.03 = 2.39


0.000.00

Flow length (ft) ({0})0.0 0.0 0.0

Travel Time (min) = 0.00 + 0.00 + 0.00 = 0.00



Hyd. No. 6

PROP 1 ROUTED

Hydrograph type = Reservoir Peak discharge = 4.590 cfsStorm frequency = 5 yrs Time to peak = 750 minTime interval = 2 min Hyd. volume = 51,523 cuftInflow hyd. No. = 5 - PROPOSED 1 Max. Elevation = 740.10 ftReservoir name = DETENTION Max. Storage = 11,135 cuft

Storage Indication method used.

11

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

2.00 2.00

4.00 4.00

6.00 6.00

8.00 8.00

10.00 10.00

12.00 12.00

14.00 14.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)

PROP 1 ROUTEDHyd. No. 6 -- 5 Year

Hyd No. 6 Hyd No. 5 Total storage used = 11,135 cuft

Pond Report 12

Hydraflow Hydrographs Extension for AutoCAD® Civil 3D® 2014 by Autodesk, Inc. v10.3 Thursday, 03 / 22 / 2018

Pond No. 2 - DETENTION

Pond DataContours -User-defined contour areas. Conic method used for volume calculation. Begining Elevation = 737.50 ft

Stage / Storage TableStage (ft) Elevation (ft) Contour area (sqft) Incr. Storage (cuft) Total storage (cuft)

0.00 737.50 01 0 00.50 738.00 571 99 991.50 739.00 5,606 2,655 2,7542.50 740.00 9,353 7,399 10,1543.50 741.00 11,105 10,215 20,3694.50 742.00 12,839 11,960 32,329

Culvert / Orifice Structures Weir Structures

[A] [B] [C] [PrfRsr] [A] [B] [C] [D]

Rise (in) = 12.00 Inactive 0.00 0.00

Span (in) = 12.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

No. Barrels = 1 1 0 0

Invert El. (ft) = 737.50 0.00 0.00 0.00

Length (ft) = 185.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Slope (%) = 0.54 0.00 0.00 n/a

N-Value = .010 .010 .013 n/a

Orifice Coeff. = 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60

Multi-Stage = n/a No No No

Crest Len (ft) = 10.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Crest El. (ft) = 741.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Weir Coeff. = 2.60 3.33 3.33 3.33

Weir Type = Broad --- --- ---

Multi-Stage = No No No No

Exfil.(in/hr) = 0.000 (by Wet area)

TW Elev. (ft) = 0.00

Note: Culvert/Orifice outflows are analyzed under inlet (ic) and outlet (oc) control. Weir risers checked for orifice conditions (ic) and submergence (s).

0.00 3.00 6.00 9.00 12.00 15.00 18.00 21.00 24.00 27.00 30.00 33.00

Stage (ft)

0.00 737.50

1.00 738.50

2.00 739.50

3.00 740.50

4.00 741.50

5.00 742.50

Elev (ft)

Discharge (cfs)

Stage / Discharge

Total Q


Hyd. No. 7

PROPOSED 2


* Composite (Area/CN) = + (2.280 x 80)] / 2.280

13

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

1.00 1.00

2.00 2.00

3.00 3.00

4.00 4.00

5.00 5.00

6.00 6.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)


Hyd No. 7

TR55 Tc Worksheet14


Hyd. No. 7

PROPOSED 2



Travel Time (min) = 16.84 + 0.00 + 0.00 = 16.84

Shallow Concentrated FlowFlow length (ft) = 116.00 116.00 180.00Watercourse slope (%) = 1.50 7.75 2.77Surface description = Unpaved Unpaved UnpavedAverage velocity (ft/s) =1.98 4.49 2.69

Travel Time (min) = 0.98 + 0.43 + 1.12 = 2.53


0.000.00

Flow length (ft) ({0})0.0 0.0 0.0

Travel Time (min) = 0.00 + 0.00 + 0.00 = 0.00



Hyd. No. 9

PROPOSED TOTAL


15

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

2.00 2.00

4.00 4.00

6.00 6.00

8.00 8.00

10.00 10.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)

PROPOSED TOTALHyd. No. 9 -- 5 Year



Hyd. No. 1

EXISTING 1



17

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

2.00 2.00

4.00 4.00

6.00 6.00

8.00 8.00

10.00 10.00

12.00 12.00

14.00 14.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)


Hyd No. 1


Hyd. No. 2

EXISTING 2



18

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

2.00 2.00

4.00 4.00

6.00 6.00

8.00 8.00

10.00 10.00

12.00 12.00

14.00 14.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)


Hyd No. 2


Hyd. No. 3

TOTAL EXISTING


19

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

4.00 4.00

8.00 8.00

12.00 12.00

16.00 16.00

20.00 20.00

24.00 24.00

28.00 28.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)




Hyd. No. 5

PROPOSED 1



20

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

3.00 3.00

6.00 6.00

9.00 9.00

12.00 12.00

15.00 15.00

18.00 18.00

21.00 21.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)


Hyd No. 5


Hyd. No. 6

PROP 1 ROUTED



21

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

3.00 3.00

6.00 6.00

9.00 9.00

12.00 12.00

15.00 15.00

18.00 18.00

21.00 21.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)




Hyd. No. 7

PROPOSED 2



22

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

2.00 2.00

4.00 4.00

6.00 6.00

8.00 8.00

10.00 10.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)


Hyd No. 7


Hyd. No. 9

PROPOSED TOTAL


23

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

3.00 3.00

6.00 6.00

9.00 9.00

12.00 12.00

15.00 15.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)




Hyd. No. 1

EXISTING 1



25

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

3.00 3.00

6.00 6.00

9.00 9.00

12.00 12.00

15.00 15.00

18.00 18.00

21.00 21.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)


Hyd No. 1


Hyd. No. 2

EXISTING 2



26

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

3.00 3.00

6.00 6.00

9.00 9.00

12.00 12.00

15.00 15.00

18.00 18.00

21.00 21.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)


Hyd No. 2


Hyd. No. 3

TOTAL EXISTING


27

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

10.00 10.00

20.00 20.00

30.00 30.00

40.00 40.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)




Hyd. No. 5

PROPOSED 1



28

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

4.00 4.00

8.00 8.00

12.00 12.00

16.00 16.00

20.00 20.00

24.00 24.00

28.00 28.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)


Hyd No. 5


Hyd. No. 6

PROP 1 ROUTED



29

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

4.00 4.00

8.00 8.00

12.00 12.00

16.00 16.00

20.00 20.00

24.00 24.00

28.00 28.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)




Hyd. No. 7

PROPOSED 2



30

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

2.00 2.00

4.00 4.00

6.00 6.00

8.00 8.00

10.00 10.00

12.00 12.00

14.00 14.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)


Hyd No. 7


Hyd. No. 9

PROPOSED TOTAL


31

0 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 1080 1200 1320 1440 1560

Q (cfs)

0.00 0.00

4.00 4.00

8.00 8.00

12.00 12.00

16.00 16.00

20.00 20.00

24.00 24.00

28.00 28.00

Q (cfs)

Time (min)



Hydraflow Rainfall Report32


Return Intensity-Duration-Frequency Equation Coefficients (FHA)Period

(Yrs) B D E (N/A)

1 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 --------

2 69.8703 13.1000 0.8658 --------

3 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 --------

5 79.2597 14.6000 0.8369 --------

10 88.2351 15.5000 0.8279 --------

25 102.6072 16.5000 0.8217 --------

50 114.8193 17.2000 0.8199 --------

100 127.1596 17.8000 0.8186 --------

File name: SampleFHA.idf

Intensity = B / (Tc + D)^E

Return Intensity Values (in/hr)Period

(Yrs) 5 min 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

2 5.69 4.61 3.89 3.38 2.99 2.69 2.44 2.24 2.07 1.93 1.81 1.70

3 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

5 6.57 5.43 4.65 4.08 3.65 3.30 3.02 2.79 2.59 2.42 2.27 2.15

10 7.24 6.04 5.21 4.59 4.12 3.74 3.43 3.17 2.95 2.77 2.60 2.46

25 8.25 6.95 6.03 5.34 4.80 4.38 4.02 3.73 3.48 3.26 3.07 2.91

50 9.04 7.65 6.66 5.92 5.34 4.87 4.49 4.16 3.88 3.65 3.44 3.25

100 9.83 8.36 7.30 6.50 5.87 5.36 4.94 4.59 4.29 4.03 3.80 3.60

Tc = time in minutes. Values may exceed 60.

Rainfall Precipitation Table (in)

Precip. file name: R:\Blocks\Hydraflow Rain Files\Texas San Antonio.pcp

StormDistribution 1-yr 2-yr 3-yr 5-yr 10-yr 25-yr 50-yr 100-yr

SCS 24-hour 0.00 4.00 0.00 5.00 6.00 7.50 9.00 10.00

SCS 6-Hr 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Huff-1st 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Huff-2nd 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Huff-3rd 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Huff-4th 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Huff-Indy 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Custom 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Hydraflow Table of Contents 0996-07-18 hydraflow 100%.gpw


Watershed Model Schematic..................................................................................... 1

Hydrograph Return Period Recap............................................................................. 2

5 - YearSummary Report......................................................................................................................... 3Hydrograph Reports................................................................................................................... 4

Hydrograph No. 1, SCS Runoff, EXISTING 1.......................................................................... 4TR-55 Tc Worksheet............................................................................................................ 5

Hydrograph No. 2, SCS Runoff, EXISTING 2.......................................................................... 6TR-55 Tc Worksheet............................................................................................................ 7

Hydrograph No. 3, Combine, TOTAL EXISTING..................................................................... 8Hydrograph No. 5, SCS Runoff, PROPOSED 1....................................................................... 9

TR-55 Tc Worksheet.......................................................................................................... 10Hydrograph No. 6, Reservoir, PROP 1 ROUTED.................................................................. 11

Pond Report - DETENTION............................................................................................... 12Hydrograph No. 7, SCS Runoff, PROPOSED 2.................................................................... 13

TR-55 Tc Worksheet.......................................................................................................... 14Hydrograph No. 9, Combine, PROPOSED TOTAL................................................................ 15

25 - YearSummary Report....................................................................................................................... 16Hydrograph Reports................................................................................................................. 17

Hydrograph No. 1, SCS Runoff, EXISTING 1........................................................................ 17Hydrograph No. 2, SCS Runoff, EXISTING 2........................................................................ 18Hydrograph No. 3, Combine, TOTAL EXISTING................................................................... 19Hydrograph No. 5, SCS Runoff, PROPOSED 1..................................................................... 20Hydrograph No. 6, Reservoir, PROP 1 ROUTED.................................................................. 21Hydrograph No. 7, SCS Runoff, PROPOSED 2.................................................................... 22Hydrograph No. 9, Combine, PROPOSED TOTAL................................................................ 23

100 - YearSummary Report....................................................................................................................... 24Hydrograph Reports................................................................................................................. 25

Hydrograph No. 1, SCS Runoff, EXISTING 1........................................................................ 25Hydrograph No. 2, SCS Runoff, EXISTING 2........................................................................ 26Hydrograph No. 3, Combine, TOTAL EXISTING................................................................... 27Hydrograph No. 5, SCS Runoff, PROPOSED 1..................................................................... 28Hydrograph No. 6, Reservoir, PROP 1 ROUTED.................................................................. 29Hydrograph No. 7, SCS Runoff, PROPOSED 2.................................................................... 30Hydrograph No. 9, Combine, PROPOSED TOTAL................................................................ 31

IDF Report.................................................................................................................. 32

Sto

rm S

ewer

Siz

ing

Cal

cula

tio

ns

PR

OJE

CT

# :

0996

-07-

18LO

CA

TIO

N:

JBS

A S

AM

HO

US

TO

ND

ES

IGN

ER

:S

AH

DA

TE

:3/

26/2

018

Des

ign

Sto

rm:

10P

ipe

"n"

vlau

e:0.

011

(PV

C)

PIP

ES

<18

" D

IA.

0.01

3(R

CP

) P

IPE

S 1

8" D

IA. A

ND

LA

RG

ER

Cur

b H

eigh

t =0.

5

FR

OM

TO

DR

AIN

.R

UN

-OF

FC

x A

C

x A

IN

LET

RA

INR

UN

OF

F"Q

"IN

VE

RT

INV

ER

TLE

NG

TH

SLO

PE

PIP

E

VE

LOC

ITY

CA

PA

CIT

YF

LOW

FLO

W

CO

VE

RC

OV

ER

GR

AT

E/R

IMP

T.

PT

.A

RE

AC

OE

FF

.IN

CR

.A

CC

UM

.T

IME

FA

LL"Q

"A

CC

UM

.U

P

LOW

D

IAM

.T

IME

RA

TIO

UP

PE

RLO

WE

RE

LEV

.IN

CR

.ac

res

"C"

min

.in

/hr

cfs

cfs

ft ft

./ft.

inch

es ft

./sec

.cf

sm

in.

Qp/

Qf

ft.ft.

ft.R

OO

FC

I-4

0.15

0.90

0.14

0.14

15.0

06.

400.

890.

8974

7.70

743.

3569

0.06

306

8.50

1.67

0.14

0.54

2.80

3.36

751.

00C

I-5

CI-

40.

700.

810.

570.

7015

.00

6.40

3.65

3.65

743.

5974

3.35

480.

0050

153.

734.

580.

210.

802.

373.

0074

7.21

CI-

4C

I-2

0.15

0.49

0.07

0.78

15.2

16.

320.

485.

0274

3.35

740.

8017

90.

0142

156.

307.

730.

470.

653.

002.

7574

7.60

CI-

3C

I-2

0.90

0.71

0.64

1.42

15.0

06.

404.

144.

1474

5.00

740.

8018

60.

0226

126.

845.

370.

450.

773.

003.

0074

9.00

CI-

2A

EW

1.21

0.75

0.91

2.33

15.6

96.

165.

6214

.78

740.

8074

0.50

150.

0200

188.

4314

.90

0.03

0.99

2.50

0.00

744.

800.

00

RE

FE

R T

O H

YD

RA

FLO

W C

ALC

ULA

TIO

NS

FO

R D

ET

EN

TIO

N R

OU

TIN

G A

ND

OU

TF

ALL

PIP

ES

Ma

ch

IV

Eng

inee

ring

& S

urve

ying

LL

C

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 42 10 – AAFES WEATHER TABLE

AAFES WEATHER TABLE 01 42 10-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 INFORMATION AND DATA

A. Information and data furnished or referred to in the weather table is furnished for the Contractor's information.

B. The Contractor is responsible for submitting a written request for time extension under this specification Section.

1. The Contractor request shall include backup justification for each written request for time extension.

2. Any time extension granted under this specification Section shall be at no cost to AAFES.

1.2 CONTRACT TIME LIMITS

A. The contract time limits include weather conditions that are shown in the table listed herein.

1.3 TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER

A. This provision specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for unusually severe weather affecting exterior work in accordance with the Contract.

B. The following listing defines the monthly anticipated adverse weather for the contract period and is based on NOAA data for the geographic location of the project.

MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER CALENDAR DAYS

JBSA-Sam Houston, Texas (Bexar County)

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEPT OCT NOV DEC

07 07 08 07 09 06 04 05 06 06 07 06

C. This listing of anticipated adverse weather will constitute the base line monthly weather time evaluations.

1. Throughout the contract each month, actual adverse weather days will be recorded on a calendar basis (including weekends and holidays) and compared to the monthly anticipated adverse weather in this listing.

a. The term "actual adverse weather days" shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather.

b. The number of actual adverse weather days affecting exterior work shall be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day in each month.

2. Adverse weather days must prevent work for 50 percent or more of the contractor's work day and delay work critical to the timely completion of the project.

3. If the number of actual adverse weather days exceeds the number of days anticipated in the above listing, the Contractor may submit in writing to the Contracting Officer a request for a time extension within 30 days of the adverse weather.

01 42 10-2

a. Based upon the above NOAA data the Contracting Officer will determine if time extension for the Contractor is warranted.

4. The Contracting Officer will convert any qualifying delays to calendar days and issue a modification in accordance with the contract.

5. Any time extension granted under this provision will be at no cost to the Exchange.



END 01 42 10.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 45 16 – QUALITY CONTROL

QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 16-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE

A. Contractor shall establish a quality control system to perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of subcontractor(s) to ensure conformation to applicable specifications and drawings with respect to the materials, workmanship, construction, finish and functional performance.

1. Tests of materials and/or special inspections will be made, when required by these specifications, by applicable law, rules and regulations in accordance with respective Sections.

2. Where required by individual specification Sections, the Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency, licensed in the State of Texas, to perform specific services and testing.

a. Examples of professional testing services that shall be provided by the Contractor include tests during the manufacturing and fabrication processes that are not performed in the field, but required to assure quality control including, but not limited to:

1.) Ready-mix plant testing. 2.) Steel fabrication and shop welding.

b. Examples of professional testing services that shall be provided by the Contractor include field tests during construction to assure quality control including, but not limited to:

1.) Provision of a Qualified Professional, licensed in the State of Texas, to provide initial installation supervision and quality control inspections of environmental controls.

2.) Initial testing of borrow site material to determine suitability for compliance with specifications for use as fill material

3.) Termiticide application verification. 4.) Pipe pressure testing.

a) Building services. b) Distribution and waste.

5.) Electrical testing. 6.) Utility service testing required by utility provider. 7.) Incidental testing required by the Installation. 8.) Installation Fire Department tests.

B. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all services and testing indicated above and those specified that are not specifically indicated to be provided by AAFES.

C. Testing agencies and test to be performed shall be approved by AAFES.

D. If a material is not required to be field tested, the Contracting Officer shall require the supplier to furnish a certificate bearing legal signature of said supplier with each delivery of such material stating that such material complies with specification requirements.

E. If any work or materials requiring tests and inspections is executed, enclosed or covered before tests are made, or test reports distributed, whether the responsibility of the Contractor or AAFES:


1. Contractor shall, at his own expense, uncover such part of this work or material and keep it uncovered until such tests and inspections have been made and test reports distributed.

2. If work or material so tested and inspected shall be found not to conform to the requirements of the Construction Documents, it shall be deemed and construed to be defective materials or faulty workmanship and the Contractor, at his own expense, shall replace work or material removed and repair all work disturbed thereby.

F. The Contractor's (') testing agency(ies) shall report results of all tests in writing via e-mail transmittal simultaneously to the following:

1. Contracting Officer 3 copies 2. Site Inspector 1 copy 3. Contractor 1 copy 4. Architect-Engineer 1 copy

G. Reports shall state that tests were made under responsible charge of a Testing Engineer, holding a license to operate in the state where the project is being constructed, and that material or materials were tested in accordance with provisions of these specifications, and that material and/or materials tested, passed or failed to pass such requirements.

1.2 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY

A. Make notifications to testing agencies and coordinate services with Construction Schedule, whether provided by Contractor or AAFES.

1. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for its assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

2. Make arrangements with testing agency for on site inspection services in conjunction with Construction Schedule.

3. All costs for ill-timed scheduling of testing agency on-site services shall be borne by the Contractor.

B. Cooperate with the Contracting Officer or designated representative and laboratory personnel and provide access to work and to manufacturer’s operations.

1. Provide samples of materials to be tested, in required quantities. 2. Furnish casual labor and facilities required to provide access to work to be tested:

a. To obtain and handle samples at the site. b. To facilitate inspections and tests. c. For laboratory’s exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples.

C. The use of AAFES’ or Contractor’s independent testing services shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with the plans and specifications.

D. Contractor shall coordinate with both AAFES and his own testing laboratories so that the work will be inspected and tested according to contract requirements.

1. This coordination includes notification of when tests should be taken, easy access to the work, and general cooperation in every way to insure proper control of the work.


E. Upon completion of the project the Contractor shall submit signed certificates stating tests for this work were made in accordance with provisions of these specifications and, further, all such tests and reports made were reported as required.

1. These certificates shall list all tests and dates when work was completed.

1.3 AAFES’ TESTING RESPONSIBILITY

A. AAFES will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Agency to perform specified quality control testing during construction indicated in the following Sections:

1. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00. 2. Polished Concrete Floor Finish: Section 03 35 36 (by AAFES Concrete Finish

Consultant). 3. Structural Steel: Section 05 12 00 (Field Q/C, Connections & Welding). 4. Steel Joists: Section 05 21 00 (Field Q/C & Welding). 5. Steel Deck: Section 05 31 00 (Field Q/C & Fastening). 6. Testing and Balancing of HVAC Equipment: Section 23 05 95. 7. Soils Treatment and Compaction Control: Section 31 20 00. 8. Concrete Paving: Section 32 13 13.

B. AAFES employment of Independent Testing Agency in no way relieves Contractor of his responsibilities to deliver Project in full compliance with the Contract Documents.


A. Section 01 10 10 – Unit Prices. (Soil Treatment with Lime).

B. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

C. Section 01 45 29 – Testing Laboratory Services.

D. Related requirements and tests specified in Division 2 through 12, Divisions 21 through 23, Divisions 26 through 28 and Divisions 31 through 33.



END 01 45 16.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 45 29 – TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 45 29-1

1 GENERAL


A. Selection and payment.

B. Laboratory/Agency responsibilities.

C. Laboratory/Agency reports.

D. Limits on testing authority.

E. Contractor responsibilities.

F. Schedule of tests.


A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 03 35 36 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish (AAFES Concrete Finish Consultant).

C. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel (Field Q/C, Connections & Welding).

D. Section 05 21 00 – Steel Joists (Field Q/C & Welding).

E. Section 05 31 00 – Steel Deck (Field Q/C & Fastening).

F. Section 23 05 95 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.

G. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork.

H. Section 32 12 16 – Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Pavement.

I. Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving.

1.3 AAFES SELECTION AND PAYMENT

A. AAFES will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory to perform testing as specified in the individual Sections listed in Article 1.2 above.

B. In addition to 1.2 above, AAFES will employ and pay for services of a concrete finish expert to make recommendations and evaluate concrete floor polishing and finishing work.

C. Employment of testing agency or laboratory in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

1.4 LABORATORY/AGENCY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.

B. Provide qualified personnel at site.

C. Cooperate with Contracting Officer or designated representative and Contractor in performance of services.

D. Perform specified sampling and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards.


E. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Promptly notify Contracting Officer or designated representative and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Products.

G. Perform additional tests required by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

H. Submit e-mail or server based written test reports within 3-days after test is performed to the following parties:

1. Contracting Officer. 2. Site Inspector. 3. Contractor. 4. Architect. 5. Applicable Consulting Engineer. 6. Testing Documents to 502d Civil Engineering upon request.

I. Each report shall include:

1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing Laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results.

J. Upon completion of the project, the testing agency shall prepare a certificate, certified in the presence of a Notary Public, stating testing for this work was conducted in accordance with the provisions of these specifications, and further, all tests and reports were provided for this job were reported as required.

1.5 LIMITS ON TESTING AUTHORITY

A. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.

C. Agency or laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.

D. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.


A. Deliver to agency or laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.

B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.


C. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested. 3. To facilitate tests. 4. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

D. Notify Contracting Officer, designated representative and field testing agency laboratory a minimum of 24 hours prior to time for operations requiring testing services.

E. Employ services of an independent testing laboratory, licensed in the State of Texas, and pay for additional samples and tests required by Contractor beyond specified requirements:

1. For Contractor's convenience. 2. When initial tests indicate work does not comply with contract documents. 3. When, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer or designated representative,

additional tests or inspections are required because of the manner in which the Contractor executes his work, provide and pay for additional testing.

4. Examples of such tests and inspections are:

a. Tests of materials substituted for previously approved or specified materials. b. Retests made necessary by failure of materials to comply the requirements of

the specifications. c. Load tests made necessary because portions of the structure do not meet

specifications or drawings requirements.

5. Testing specified in Section 01 45 16, Quality Control and other Sections of the Project Manual that are identified to be provided by the Contractor.

1.7 SCHEDULE OF TESTS

A. Test required and standards for testing are specified in the individual specification Sections .

B. Inspection, sampling and testing as paid for by AAFES is required for the following individual components or systems of Work:

1. Concrete Work, Section 03 30 00.

a. Testing and evaluation of concrete strength shall conform to latest edition of American Concrete Institute Standard 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".

b. Tests for compressive strength of concrete cylinders:

1.) One composite sample shall be obtained for each day’s pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cubic yards but less than 25 cubic yards.

2.) One additional composite test shall be taken for each additional 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof over the initial 25 cubic yards.

3.) Each test shall be comprised of 4 cylinders cured under exact conditions as the related concrete pour for a minimum of 24-hours before being removed from the site.

2. Structural Steel field testing, bolt tensioning testing and other structural performance testing as specified in Sections 05 12 00, 05 21 00 and 05 31 00.

3. Testing and balancing of heating and ventilation equipment is specified in Section 23 05 93.

4. Soils treatment with lime and compaction control in accord with specification Section 31 20 00; ASTM D-1557, Modified Proctor Test and referenced TxDOT Items.


5. Asphalt Paving in accord with Specification Section 32 12 16. 6. Concrete paving in accord with Specification Section 32 13 13 and subject to

provisions set forth below for Concrete Work.

C. Testing and/or certification paid for by the Contractor is required for the following individual components or systems of Work:

1. Supervision and quality control inspection of environmental controls. 2. Initial testing of borrow site material to determine suitability for compliance with

Specifications for use as fill material. 3. Certification of termiticide application in accord with specification Section 31 31 16. 4. Ready-mix plant testing or certification as specified in Sections 03 30 00 and 32 13

13. 5. Structural steel fabricator shop quality control procedures and shop welds as

specified in Sections 05 12 00 and 05 21 00. 6. Pipe pressure testing as specified in Division 22. 7. Testing of electrical components and systems as specified in Divisions 26, 27 and 28. 8. Other utility services testing as required by authorities having jurisdiction.



END 01 45 29.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 51 00 – TEMPORARY UTILITIES

TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1

1 GENERAL


A. Contractor provide and maintain during construction period:

1. All temporary utilities for construction:

a. Electricity. b. Lighting. c. Heat. d. Ventilation. e. Telephone service. f. Water. g. Sanitary facilities.

2. All temporary utilities listed above for temporary field offices and storage sheds. 3. Pay utility fees and use charges. 4. All temporary utilities in excess of those specified, or exceeding capacity of

existing or permanent systems.




C. Section 01 31 15 – Phasing.

D. Section 01 52 00 – Field Offices and Sheds.

E. Section 01 66 00 – Storage & Protection.

F. Division 22 – Plumbing.

G. Division 23 – Mechanical.

H. Division 26 – Electrical.

1.3 UTILITY PROVIDERS

A. Contractor shall pay the prevailing rates to utility owner for utilities consumed for this new Building Project (water, sewer, gas and electricity).

B. Contractor shall pay prevailing rates to utility owner for utilities used for temporary offices, construction trailers and storage sheds.

C. Utilities information:

1. Water/Sewer – JBSA Sam Houston:

a. POC: Kelly Kane b. E-mail: [email protected] c. Phone: 210.671.7215


2. Natural gas – CPS Energy:



b. CPS Energy:

1.) POC: Yvonne Haecker 2.) E-mail: [email protected] 3.) Phone: 210.671.7215

3. Electrical power – CPS Energy:



b. CPS Energy:


4. DSN Communication (502d Communications Squadron) and Commercial:


1.) POC: Ken Jordon 2.) E-mail: [email protected] 3.) Phone: 210.808.0507

b. For any commercial communications service contact the commercial representative directly.

5. Data/LAN – JBSA-Sam Houston:

a. POC: Ken Jordon b. E-mail: [email protected] c. Phone: 210.808.0507

1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Obtain and pay for permits and inspections required by governing authorities.

B. Comply with specified codes and regulations: Latest editions in effect as of date of bidding documents.

1. National Fire Protection Agency, NFPA 241. 2. Engineer’s Manual, Safety-Safety & Health Requirements, EM-385-1-1. 3. Uniform Facilities Criteria, UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7. 4. National Electric Code (ANSI C1). 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Standards. 6. Federal and State Requirements.

1.5 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC

A. Contractor shall furnish and install a complete metered temporary electric service for construction needs throughout the construction period.


1. The temporary electric service shall originate from the nearest available power pole as directed and authorized by CPS Energy and JBSA-Sam Houston.

a. CPS Energy:


2. Furnish and install all fused cutouts, meter, transformers, primary and secondary conductors, disconnects, and miscellaneous hardware.

3. The temporary electric service shall be a 120/208-volt, 3-phase, 4-wire, 200-amp service for construction operations.

4. Provide a power center, located on the main temporary electric power pole drop, consisting of:

a. Electric meter. b. Main disconnect. c. 20 amp, 120 and 208 volt, each protected by a circuit breaker, for use by all

trades.

1.) All outlets shall be grounded. 2.) Outlets shall be located so that no extensions are more than 100 feet

in length.

5. Users shall provide grounded, Underwriters’ Laboratories approved extension cords from power center to point of operations.

6. The cost of electricity consumed during construction, up until beneficial occupancy by AAFES, shall be paid by the Contractor.

B. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of five (5) foot candles in all work areas.

1. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.

2. Provide guarded lighting sockets and lamps.

a. Use 100 watt lamps, minimum. b. Maintain socket voltage of 100 volts minimum in lighting system.

3. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 4. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during final stages of construction.

C. Field Offices and Sheds: Provide electric service to the field office(s) and shed(s) to meet the requirements listed in Section 01 52 00 – Field Offices and Sheds.

D. Standards: The temporary electric service shall comply with the National Electric Code.

E. Extension cords used by any and all trades, shall be UL approved.

F. Contractor shall pay all costs for service or service extensions and electricity used for temporary field offices, construction trailers and storage sheds per requirements listed in Section 01 52 00 – Field Offices and Sheds.

1.6 TEMPORARY HEATING


A. General: The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain temporary heat in the construction areas throughout the construction period to facilitate the progress of work, protect work against cold, dampness, condensation, and to provide suitable ambient temperatures and humidity levels for proper installation and curing of materials.

B. Requirements: The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary heat meeting the following requirements:

1. As required under each individual specification Section for each product or material during storage.

2. As required under each individual specification Section for proper placement, setting, and curing of materials.

3. Maintain a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F. (5 degrees C.) for twenty-four (24) hours a day during placing, setting, and curing of cementitious materials.

4. Maintain a minimum temperature of 65 degrees F. (28 degrees C.) for twenty four (24) hours a day, seven day prior to and during placing of interior finishes, including but not limited to:

a. Gypsum drywall. b. Painting. c. Vinyl wall covering. d. Resilient flooring and base. e. Tile work. f. Acoustic ceilings. g. Finish woodwork.

5. Maintain specified temperatures from the time of placement until beneficial occupancy, for installation all finish materials.

C. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and pay for temporary heating equipment of adequate capacity to provide temporary heat meeting the requirements of this Section.

D. The Contractor may use the new permanent heating system for construction purposes during the finish work stage under the following conditions:

1. The Contractor shall verify the system is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and proper filters are in place.

2. The Contractor shall provide and pay for operation maintenance. 3. The Contractor shall vacuum ductwork, provide new filters and replace any

damaged or worn parts immediately prior to acceptance of the system by AAFES.

E. The Contractor shall pay for the fuel consumed by the temporary and permanent heating equipment.

F. Contractor shall pay all costs for consumables required for temporary field offices, construction trailers and storage sheds per requirements listed in Section 01 52 00 – Field Offices and Sheds.

1.7 TEMPORARY COOLING

A. The Contractor may utilize the new permanent cooling system to maintain temperatures and humidity during construction subject to the same restrictions as specified above for use of the permanent heating system.

1. Extend and supplement with temporary cooling devices as needed. 2. Maintain conditions during the installation of finish materials as specified in

individual specification Sections.


B. Maintain maximum ambient temperature of 80 degrees F (26 degrees C) in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.

C. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary cooling purposes, the Contractor shall verify that installation of equipment is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place.

D. The Contractor shall provide and pay for operation, maintenance, regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts and vacuum ductwork upon completion of work and immediately prior to acceptance of the system by AAFES.

E. The Contractor shall pay for the amount of energy consumed by the new permanent cooling equipment.

F. Contractor shall pay all costs for consumables required for temporary field offices, construction trailers and storage sheds per requirements listed in Section 01 52 00 – Field Offices and Sheds.

1.8 TEMPORARY VENTILATION

A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and pay for adequate ventilation to:

1. Aid in curing installed materials. 2. Dispersal of humidity. 3. Ventilation of temporary sanitary facilities. 4. Prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapors, or gases in areas

occupied during construction.

B. The Contractor shall employ the use of temporary ventilating equipment, adequately sized to accomplish the required ventilation.

1.9 TELEPHONE AND DATA SERVICE

A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field offices at time of project mobilization.

B. Provide, maintain and pay for high speed internet service to field offices at time of project mobilization.

C. Refer to Section 01 52 00 – Field Offices and Sheds.

1.10 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE

A. Contractor shall provide, maintain and pay for temporary water service required for construction needs, fire protection, cleaning and miscellaneous use throughout the construction period.

1. Extend piping from source to points as needed for construction in compliance with referenced Codes and regulations of JBSA-Sam Houston CES and private utility company.

2. Size temporary water service as needed for construction operations. 3. Provide certified reduced pressure zone (RPZ) backflow protection. 4. Provide water hoses from source to point of operations.

B. Contractor shall install a water meter to record usage and pay for water consumed for construction purposes.


1.11 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide, maintain and pay for temporary toilet facilities and enclosures for use by construction personnel and authorized parties throughout construction period.

1. Existing facility use in nearby buildings is not permitted. 2. Provide at time of project mobilization.

B. Furnish, install, and maintain adequate portable chemical toilets.

C. Provide regular maintenance service to maintain clean and sanitary conditions.



END 01 51 00.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 52 00 – FIELD OFFICES & SHEDS

FIELD OFFICES & SHEDS 01 52 00-1

1 GENERAL


A. Temporary field offices, construction trailers and sheds.

B. Maintenance and cleaning.

C. Removal.



B. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Project.

C. Section 01 35 43 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

D. Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities.

E. Section 01 55 00 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, FURNISHINGS

A. Materials, Equipment, Furnishings: Serviceable, new or used, adequate for required purpose.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors.

B. Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight enclosures for office and storage spaces. Maintain during progress of Work; remove at completion of Work.

C. Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Compatible with occupancy and storage requirements.

D. Exterior Materials: Weather resistant, finished in one color acceptable to Contracting Officer.

E. Interior Materials in Offices: Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, pre-finished or painted; resilient floors and bases.

F. Lighting for Offices: 50 ft-C (538 lx) at desk top height, exterior lighting at entrance doors.

G. Fire Extinguishers: One 10# standard dry chemical (ABC) type fire extinguisher at each office and each storage area.


H. Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified conditions for storage of products.

2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL

A. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating for Offices: Automatic equipment to maintain 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) heating and 76 degrees F (23 degrees C) cooling.

B. Storage Spaces: Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain Products in accordance with Contract Documents; adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of Products.

2.4 CONTRACTOR OFFICE AND FACILITIES

A. Size: For Contractor's needs and to provide space for project meetings. Minimum size: 150 square feet.

B. Telephone: Contractor shall install, maintain and pay for telephone service for the Contractor's field office including an answering device and outside bell.

C. Internet:

1. Contractor shall provide high speed internet service for Contractor's field office throughout the duration of Construction.

2. High speed internet service shall be made available for use by Contracting Officer or designated representative during on-site visits.

D. Fax: Install, maintain and pay for facsimile service for the Contractor's Field Office.

E. Furnishings in Meeting Area: Conference table and chairs to seat at least fifteen (15) persons; racks and files for Contract Documents, submittals, and project record documents.

F. Other Furnishings: Contractor's option.

G. Equipment: Six (6) adjustable band protective helmets for visitors, one 10 inch (250 mm) outdoor weather thermometer and a weather protected bulletin board for posting information required by the contract.

2.5 STORAGE AREAS AND SHEDS

A. Size to storage requirements for products of individual Sections, allowing for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of products.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed.

B. Employee Residential Occupancy: Not permitted on Installation property.


3.3 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

A. Weekly cleaning services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage areas.

B. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow.

3.4 REMOVAL

A. At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. Restore areas.

END 01 52 00.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 55 00 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES, BARRIERS & CONTROLS

TEMPORARY FACILITIES, BARRIERS & CONTROLS 01 55 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE.

A. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary facilities and controls, including construction aids and equipment for common use and to facilitate execution of the work:

1. Chutes. 2. Cranes. 3. Hoists. 4. Platforms. 5. Railings. 6. Ramps. 7. Runways. 8. Stairs.

B. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary barriers and enclosures to separate construction areas and areas occupied for use by AAFES and the Installation.

C. Contractor shall provide all other construction aids required to complete work:

1. Temporary devices and equipment. 2. Temporary protection coverings.

D. Contractor shall provide Site security program at mobilization:

1. Enforce site security program. 2. Implement installation rules and regulations for all work at JBSA-Sam Houston. 3. Enforce supplemental security program specified in the Section. 4. Coordinate and cooperate with JBSA-Sam Houston CES in establishing,

maintaining and enforcing security program during construction. 5. Protect work, stored materials and construction equipment from theft and

vandalism. 6. Prevent access to construction areas by unauthorized persons. 7. Protect Installation and AAFES property at site from theft, vandalism or damage

from Contractor’s work or employees.

E. Contractor shall provide temporary nonsmoking signage after building enclosure.

1. Signage shall indicate no smoking within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows or outdoor air intakes.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Specified elsewhere:

1. Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of JBSA-Sam Houston. 2. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work. 3. Section 01 10 60 – AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures. 4. Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities. 5. Section 01 52 00 – Field Offices & Sheds. 6. Section 02 41 16 – Structure Demolition.

B. Installed but specified elsewhere:


1. Structural cold-formed metal framing members related to work under this Section are specified in Section 05 50 00, Cold-Formed Metal Framing.

2. Wood framing, plywood, fasteners and other wood materials related to work under this Section are specified in Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry.

3. Hollow metal doors frames and hardware requirements related to work under this Section are specified in Section 08 11 00, Metal Doors & Frames and Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware.

4. Non-structural cold-formed metal drywall framing members and gypsum drywall are specified in Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Drywall Systems.

5. Other technical Sections of the specifications as related to work under this Section.

C. Temporary facilities, barriers and controls must comply with NFPA 241, EM-385-1-1 and UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Coordinate and comply with requirements established by JBSA-Sam Houston CES.

B. Obtain all permits and inspections required.

C. Comply with specified codes and regulations: Latest editions in effect as of date of bidding documents.

1. National Fire Protection Agency, NFPA 241. 2. Engineer’s Manual, Safety-Safety & Health Requirements, EM-385-1-1. 3. Uniform Facilities Criteria, UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7. 4. National Electric Code (ANSI C1). 5. National Electrical Safety Code. 6. Federal and State Requirements.

D. Comply with applicable provisions of ADA and UFAS to maintain accessible paths of travel and means of egress during construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls Plan for coordination that indicates dust/debris control measures, security measures, proposed locations and proposed time frame of necessity for such items.

1. Submit Plan(s) at a minimum scale of 1/8” = 1’-0”. 2. For each Phase of work indicate:

a. Locations of all temporary partitions. b. Proposed partition types. c. Door locations and door types to be provided. d. Other information to describe means of protecting occupied areas of the

building from dust, debris and personal injury.

3. Schematically indicate temporary isolation of HVAC system on plan.

a. Indicate location of proposed air filtration system, make-up air and air filtration discharge.

b. Other dust control measures.


4. Schematically indicate temporary isolation of building sprinkler system zones and duration of isolation during construction.

5. Schematically indicate waste management plan.

B. Provide narrative to accompany Drawing(s) that briefly describes procedures to be followed, regulatory requirement compliance and special provisions for items not specifically addressed in Drawing.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide the following under the Work of this Section:

1. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 6-mil minimum thickness, with flame spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84.

2. Dust Barrier Tape: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by polyethylene sheet manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations.

3. Dust Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats of 36” x 60” minimum size at exits from work areas and wherever necessary to control the spread of dust from foot traffic.

4. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool or rock wool with maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50.

B. Material may be new or used.

C. Materials shall be adequate for purposes intended.

D. Materials shall not create unsafe or unsanitary conditions.

E. Materials shall be furnished in compliance with specified codes and standards.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Provide the following minimum equipment items under work of this Section:

1. Spring-Loaded Poles, Ceiling and Wall Rails and Side Wall Clamps: Dust barrier system for fast setup and breakdown dust barrier systems that consist of spring-loaded support poles that extend from 4’-7” to 12’-0” or 6’-9” to 21’-0” and hold plastic sheet in position as a curtain barrier equal to system manufactured by Zipwall, 37 Broadway, Arlington, MA 02474, (800) 718-2255, (www.zipwall.com).

2. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated with class and extinguishing agent as required by specified Code and JBSA-Sam Houston Fire Department for locations and classes of fire exposure.

3. Air Filtration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter equipped portable units with four stage filtration.

a. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. b. Configure to run continuously.

2.3 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

A. Temporary Walls, Closures, Security Enclosures and Barricades:


1. Provide and maintain all barricades or enclosures required to protect the work in progress from outside elements, dust, interior construction dust and noise, and other disturbances as a result of work under this Contract.

2. Such protection shall be positive, shall meet the approval of the Contracting Officer or designated representative, and shall be maintained for the duration of the construction period, or as required to provide for the protection as specified.

B. Provide weather protection for materials and allow for effective construction heating and to prevent entry of unauthorized personnel.

C. Maintain site and work areas in secure, enclosed condition at end of each workday.

1. Provide temporary enclosures or barriers of substantial construction. 2. Provide temporary opening protections where areas cannot be closed and secured

at the end of each workday.

2.4 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE COVERINGS

A. Contractor coordinate installation of temporary protective coverings with work of various trades.

B. Contractor provide temporary protective coverings over finishes that could be damaged by construction activities.

C. Protective coverings shall be maintained throughout the duration when construction activities require surface protection or until the Contracting Officer authorizes removal.

D. Regularly clean areas and protective coverings as construction activities require in order to prevent damage to new finishes and substrates.

E. Upon completion of work remove temporary protective coverings, clean and repair any damage to new construction surfaces.

2.5 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION, EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTION

A. Provide, maintain, and remove upon completion of the work, all temporary rigging, scaffolding, hoisting equipment, ladders to roof, barricades around openings, and all other temporary work as required to complete all work of the Contract.

B. Contractor shall coordinate the use and furnishing of scaffolds with his subcontractors.

C. Provide, maintain and remove upon completion of the work, or sooner if authorized by the Contracting Officer, all fences, barricades, lights, shoring, pedestrian walkways, and other protective structures or devices necessary for the safety of workmen, AAFES employees, equipment, the public, and property.

D. All temporary construction and equipment shall conform to all regulations, ordinances, laws and other requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, including insurance companies, with regards to safety precautions, operation and fire hazard.

E. Pumping: Provide and maintain pumping facilities, including power, for keeping the site, excavations and structures free of accumulations of water at all times, whether from underground seepage, rainfall, drainage or broken lines.


2.6 MAINTENANCE OF SECURITY

A. Initiate security program in compliance with Installation’s directions prior to mobilization.

B. Maintain security program throughout construction period until AAFES acceptance precludes need for Contractor security.

C. Vehicle use shall be enforced as follows:

1. Keep all vehicles, mechanized or motorized equipment locked at all times when parked or unattended on site.

2. Do not leave vehicle unattended with engine running or with ignition key in place. 3. Parking will be permitted only in areas designated by JBSA-Sam Houston CES. 4. All traffic control shall be subject to JBSA-Sam Houston CES Traffic Control

approval.

D. Comply with requirements set forth in Paragraphs 2.3 and 2.4 for secure closure of all window and door openings after interior work progresses to where temperature and humidity control are necessary to maintain specified conditions.

2.7 ENTRANCE CONTROL

A. Provide control of all construction personnel and vehicles entering and leaving project site and building.

B. Unauthorized Entry:

1. Maintain provision for closing and locking the building as soon as possible. 2. When exterior work is in process such as concrete finish work, the Contractor shall

maintain a night watchman on the premises until such time that the work cannot be harmed or damaged.

C. Damage or Theft:

1. Protect the work and material to be used on the project, from damages or loss due to the elements, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, or other causes.

2. Contractor shall be held responsible for such damages, or loss, which he shall remedy at his expense.

2.8 TOOL AND EQUIPMENT SECURITY

A. Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of tool and equipment storage security program prior to commencement of work.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with tool and equipment security program and shall inform all workers of specific requirements affecting each craft.

C. Storage of tools and equipment will be allowed within the facility.

2.9 PROJECT BULLETIN BOARD

A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain, during the life of the project, a weather-tight bulletin board approximately 3 feet high by 5 feet wide, having not less than two hinged or sliding glass doors with provisions for locking.


1. The bulletin board shall be mounted where, and as approved by the Contracting Officer, in a prominent place, accessible to employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors, and to applicants for employment.

2. The bulletin board shall remain the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed by him upon completion of the contract work.

B. The following information, which will be furnished by AAFES to the Contractor (except safety posters), shall be posted on the bulletin board, and shall be maintained by the Contractor in an easily readable condition at all times for the duration of the Contract:

1. The Equal Employment Opportunity Poster and Notice of Nondiscrimination of Employment (Standard Form 38).

2. Wage Rate Information Poster (Form SOL 155), with the contract schedule of minimum rates as required by the Davis-Bacon Act.

3. Safety posters.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Consult with Contracting Officer, review site conditions and factors that affect construction procedures and construction aids, which may be affected by execution of the work.

B. Coordinate requirements for enclosures and installation procedures with JBSA-Sam Houston CES representative(s).

3.2 INSTALLATION-GENERAL

A. Provide temporary facilities, barriers and controls for use when necessary to avoid delay in performance of Contract and maintain until no longer necessary or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent construction.

B. Locate temporary facilities, barriers and controls where they will suitably serve Project, result in minimum interference with performance of Work and least interfere with AAFES operations.

C. Relocate and modify temporary facilities, barriers and controls as Work progresses to maintain criteria set forth above.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Maintain support facilities until Contracting Officer schedules Substantial Completion inspection.

2. Remove before Substantial Completion. 3. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use

permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.


C. Parking: Use designated areas of Site as approved by JBSA-Sam Houston Safety Office for construction personnel and equipment parking.

D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and maintain Project site, excavations and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Sections for requirements pertaining to waste disposal and recycling, including disposal of materials controlled by JBSA-Sam Houston.

F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed new opening cuts in exterior of existing building.

1. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

2. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

C. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Covered Walkway: Erect protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals through or adjacent to areas of Work where overhead hazard exists.

1. Coordinate with entrances, other temporary facilities, barriers, controls and obstructions.

2. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and requirements indicated on Drawings.

3. Provide overhead decking, protective enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, exit signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage.

E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and after completion from the following:

1. Exposure, inclement weather, other construction operations and similar activities. 2. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure for building exterior.

F. Temporary Barriers: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof barriers to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by AAFES and tenants from fumes and noise.

1. Dust Barrier: Where dust barriers are required, provide a single layer of 6 mil fire resistant clear polyethylene fiberglass reinforced sheet.

a. Tape all joints and provide fire resistive treated 2 x 4 wood or metal stud top and bottom runners and verticals 4 feet on center with polyethylene sheet wrapped and taped to the runners.


b. Seal Joints and Perimeter:

1.) Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required.

2.) Where practical, locate doors in or towards back of house areas to avoid tracking dust in areas open to the public while maintaining specified exiting requirements.

c. At Contractors option the specified Zipwall temporary barrier system may be used in lieu of field constructed temporary dust barriers.

2. Opaque Dust Barrier: Where dust barriers are required and where indicated for long duration separation of construction operations from AAFES and tenant spaces, provide braced metal stud framing:

a. Cover framing on construction side with 6-mil fire resistant clear polyethylene fiberglass reinforced sheet with taped joints and perimeter.

b. Provide ½ inch gypsum board, fire taped on the AAFES/tenant side from floor to ceiling.

c. Provide R-11 fiberglass batt insulation for thermal separation from unconditioned construction areas and noise reduction adjacent to sales, food service or office areas.

d. Seal Joints and Perimeter:

1.) Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required.

2.) Where practical, locate doors in or towards back of house areas to avoid tracking dust in areas open to the public while maintaining specified exiting requirements.

3. Security Weather-tight Barrier: Where a secure weather-tight barrier is required and where a temporary exit enclosure through surrounding and overhead construction is indicated, provide braced metal stud framing:

a. Cover framing on construction or exterior side with ½ inch plywood. b. Provide ½ inch gypsum board, fire-taped on the AAFES/public side on entire

enclosure. c. Provide R-11 fiberglass batt insulation for thermal separation from the

exterior, unconditioned construction areas and noise reduction adjacent to sales, food service or office areas.

d. Panelize framing for ease of removal and relocation.

G. Temporary Opening Protection: Provide temporary rated an non-rated hollow metal doors and frames or suitable equivalent of substantial construction as approved by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1. Dust Barriers and Opaque Dust Barrier Doors:

a. Construct at each access through the barrier. b. Doors shall be hinged with latches and provided with double high security

padlocks in accordance with AAFES security. c. Maintain adhesive surfaced foot mats in door locations.

2. Security Barrier Doors:

a. Construct at each exterior opening through barrier.


b. Doors and frames shall be hollow metal and of substantial gauge and anchorage to provide secure enclosure.

c. Set doors and frames to swing in the direction of exit. d. Provide hinges, exit devices and closers with exit devices always operable in

the direction of exiting and locked on the opposite side.

H. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses and in compliance with NFPA 241.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and

similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and protection program for personnel at Project site.

a. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures.

b. Post warnings and information.

3.5 REMOVAL

A. Upon Contracting Officer's prior written authorization, completely remove temporary materials and equipment.

B. Clean and repair all damage caused by installation.

C. Restore to original conditions.

END 01 55 00.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 58 00 – PROJECT IDENTIFICATION & SIGNS

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION & SIGNS 01 58 00-1

1 GENERAL


A. Double sided Project identification sign.

B. Vinyl sign face graphic.

C. Maintenance.

D. Removal.



B. Section 01 52 00 – Field Offices and Sheds.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Design sign and structure to withstand 90 miles/hr (145 km/hr) wind velocity.

B. Sign Graphic Supplier: Experienced as a professional sign installer for minimum three years.

C. Painting: Sign structure and background shall be adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit In compliance with Section 01 33 00, Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Provide Shop Drawings indicating the following:

1. Structure, sizes, and grades of members including sign face. 2. Background color chart for selection purposes. 3. Vinyl sign face graphic indicating colors in Pantone numbers.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Structure and Framing: New, wood, structurally adequate.

B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, 48 inches x 96 inches.

C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized.

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION & SIGNS 01 58 00-2

D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats; sign background of color as indicated on the drawing.

E. Graphics: Vinyl sign face graphic with adhesive backing.

2.2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN

A. One double-sided painted sign of construction, design, and content shown on Drawings, location designated.

B. Contractor provide two (2) sets of vinyl graphics with adhesive backing and install on Contractor prepared structure and painted background as indicated.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install project identification sign as indicated within 30 days after Notice to Proceed.

B. Erect at designated location.

C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings.

D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints and anchor securely.

E. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing a neutral off-white color as approved by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

F. Install vinyl sign graphics to both faces of sign panel as indicated.

3.2 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage.

3.3 REMOVAL

A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore the area.

END 01 58 00.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 65 00 – MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01 65 00-1

1 GENERAL



1. Specified materials and equipment. 2. Transportation and delivery. 3. Equipment and personnel at site. 4. Coordination of delivery for Materials and Equipment. 5. Coordination of space allocation to receive Materials and Equipment. 6. Coordinate and provide space allocation to receive Materials and Equipment

delivered by AAFES and AAFES Vendors.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01 10 15 – Option Proposals. 3. Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures. 4. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 5. Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities. 6. Section 01 55 00 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls. 7. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule. 8. Section 01 52 00 – Field Offices & Sheds. 9. Section 01 55 00 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls. 10. Section 01 66 00 – Storage and Protection. 11. Section 01 71 00 – Cleaning. 12. Section 01 78 00 – Project Record Documents. 13. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.2 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in installation:

1. Provide three (3) copies to the Contracting Officer. 2. Transmit one (1) copy to the Architect-Engineer. 3. Maintain one (1) set of complete instructions at job site during installation and until

completion. 4. Retain an additional three (3) sets of complete instructions for insertion in Operation

and Maintenance Manuals to be submitted at Final Completion.

B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.

1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Contracting Officer for further instructions.

2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.

C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT INCORPORATED INTO THE WORK

A. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.


B. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by Contracting Officer.

C. Manufactured and fabricated products:

1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with best engineering and shop practices. 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be

interchangeable. 3. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. 4. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. 5. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to

unless variations are specifically approved in writing.

D. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified.

E. Do not incorporate any materials or equipment into the work that contain asbestos, lead, lead paint, PCB's or other hazardous materials.

1. Contractor and all subcontractors furnishing materials for construction under this Contract shall complete and submit an executed “Asbestos, Lead, Lead Based Paint & PCB Certification” as found as an attachment at the end of this Section.

2. Completed and properly executed forms shall be submitted bound in O & M Manuals at Final Completion of the Project as set forth in Section 01 77 00.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Arrange deliveries of products in accord with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site.

1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.

2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of contract documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged.

B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging.

C. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of assemblies or equipment to permit easy identification of parts and to facilitate assembly.

D. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent scraping, marring or other damage to products, equipment or surrounding surfaces.

3.2 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. In accord with Section 01 66 00.

END 01 65 00.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 65 00 – MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT-ATTACHMENT


ASBESTOS, LEAD, LEAD BASED PAINT & PCB CERTIFICATION (To be filed with O & M Manuals)

I, , do hereby certify that no asbestos, lead, lead

based paint or PCB containing materials were used in the construction of Construct Dual Food, JBSA-

Sam Houston, Texas; AAFES PN: 3720-14-000002.

Signed: Contractor By Title (Print Name) Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 _ . NOTARY PUBLIC

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 66 00 – STORAGE & PROTECTION

STORAGE & PROTECTION 01 66 00-1

1 GENERAL


A. Contractor provide and maintain:

1. Coordination of location for storage of materials with JBSA-Sam Houston CES. 2. Storage for materials and equipment to be installed in project. 3. Protection and security for stored materials and equipment, on and off site. 4. Maintenance and protection for products, materials and equipment after installation

and until completion of project. 5. Cooperate and assist AAFES in storage and protection of equipment.


A. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule. 3. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 4. Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities. 5. Section 01 65 00 – Materials & Equipment. 6. Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning. 7. Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout. 8. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01 33 00, submit:

1. Request for allocation of storage space, if applicable. 2. List of materials and equipment to be stored. 3. Proposed location for storage. 4. Special storage requirements. 5. Schedule of anticipated storage dates.

1.4 STORAGE

A. Obtain permission from JBSA-Sam Houston CES and coordinate with appropriate authorities for suitable storage area on Project Site or in the vicinity of the Project Site and as indicated.

B. Store products immediately on delivery, and protect until installed in the work.

C. Store in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

D. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weathertight enclosures.

1. Maintain temperatures within ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. 2. Provide humidity control for sensitive products, as required by manufacturer's

instructions. 3. Store unpacked products on shelves, in bins or in neat piles, accessible for

inspection.

E. Exterior Storage:

1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking or skids to support fabricated products above ground.


a. Prevent soiling or staining. b. Cover products, subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the

elements, with impervious sheet coverings. c. Provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.

2. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces such as paved areas, or provide plywood or sheet materials to prevent mixing with foreign matter.

a. Provide surface drainage to prevent flow or ponding of rainwater. b. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious material or liquids.

F. Arrange storage in manner to provide easy access for inspection.

1. Do not inhibit use of:

a. Fire lanes and exits. b. Roadways. c. Adjacent properties.

G. Store combustible materials in accordance with applicable regulations.

1.5 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE

A. Maintain periodic system of inspection of stored products on scheduled basis to assure that:

1. State of storage facilities is adequate to provide required conditions. 2. Required environmental conditions are maintained on continuing basis. 3. Surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected. 4. Any weathering of products, coatings and finishes is not acceptable under

requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Provide continuous maintenance for all temporary structures.

C. Repair or refinish damaged or weathered portions of structure as required to maintain in specified condition.

D. Repair or replace defective utility connections required for temporary utilities.

E. Clean storage areas at least once a week.

1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

A. Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations and remove when no longer needed, prior to completion of work.

B. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment and surfaces.

C. Provide coverings to protect finished surfaces from damage.

1. Cover projections, wall corners, and jambs, sills and soffits of openings, in areas used for traffic and for passage of products in subsequent work.

2. Protect finished floors and stairs from dirt and damage:

a. In areas subject to foot traffic, secure heavy paper, sheet goods, or other materials in place.

b. For movement of heavy products, lay planking or similar materials in place. c. For storage of products, lay tight wood sheathing in place.

D. Waterproofed and roofing surfaces:

1. Prohibit use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of any products.


2. When some activity must take place in order to carry out the contract, obtain recommendations of installer for protection of surface.

a. Install recommended protection and remove on completion of that activity. b. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas.

E. Landscaping:

1. Protect and prohibit activities that could damage new landscaping. 2. Prohibit traffic of any kind across newly planted areas.

2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED.

3 EXECUTION

NOT USED.

END 01 66 00.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 73 13 – GRADES, LINES & LEVELS

GRADES, LINES & LEVELS 01 73 13-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


1. Lay out of Work. 2. Establish all working lines, levels, elevations and measurements.

B. Related requirements specified elsewhere:

1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 2. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work. 3. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 4. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.


A. Contractor shall provide:

1. Coordination and supervision of layouts of all subcontractors. 2. Coordination of AAFES and AAFES/Vendor layouts.

B. Contractor shall provide:

1. Coordination and supervision of overall layout of Work.

a. Coordination of AAFES Furnished/AAFES Installed equipment layout. b. Coordination and supervision of AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed

equipment layout. c. Supervision of all subcontractor layout.

2. Establish all working lines, levels, elevations and measurements for Work. 3. Employ qualified personnel to perform Work.

1.3 Contracting Officer will furnish:

1. Locations, dimensions and data pertaining to other improvements so far as known (shown of drawings).

2. Information and contact person for the purpose of Contractor coordination and supervision of AAFES furnished equipment and work.

END 01 73 13.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 73 29 – CUTTING & PATCHING

CUTTING & PATCHING 01 73 29-1

1 GENERAL


A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.



B. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

C. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping.

D. Individual Product Specification Sections:

1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section. 2. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those Sections. 3. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of AAFES or others.

B. Include in request:

1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected Work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed Work and Products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of AAFES or others. 7. Written permission of affected entity. 8. Date and time work will be executed.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

B. After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work.

CUTTING & PATCHING 01 73 29-2

C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work.

B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.

C. Provide protection from elements for areas that may be exposed by uncovering work.

3.3 CUTTING

A. Execute cutting and fitting to complete the Work.

B. Uncover work to install improperly sequenced work.

C. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.

D. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.

E. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of Fire Protection, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communications and Alarms and Surveillance work.

F. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and elements where finish surfaces will be exposed.

G. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill.

1. Pneumatic tools shall not be allowed without prior approval from Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.4 PATCHING

A. Execute patching to complement adjacent Work.

B. Fit Products together to integrate with other Work.

C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

D. Employ original installer to perform patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.

E. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

H. Refinish surfaces:

1. Match adjacent finish. 2. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. 3. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

END 01 73 29.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 74 00 – CLEANING

CLEANING 01 74 00-1

1 GENERAL


A. Progress Cleaning.

B. Final Cleaning.


A. General Provisions of the Contract.


C. Section 01 52 00 – Field Office & Sheds.

D. Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching.

E. Technical Sections of the Specifications – Cleaning Requirements.

1.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. Standards: Maintain project in accordance with the following safety and insurance standards:

1. The Corps of Engineers Manual, EM 385-1-1, latest edition, entitled: "General Safety Requirements", as referred to in General Provisions, Paragraph: Accident Prevention.

B. O.S.H.A. Standards:

1. The Contractor shall be required to comply with OSHA Standards. 2. The OSHA Standards are subject to change, and such changes may affect the

Contractor in his performance under the contract. 3. It is the Contractor's responsibility to know such changes, effective dates of changes,

and comply with all requirements.

C. Hazards Control:

1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. 2. Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during the use of volatile or noxious substances.

D. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.

1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the installation. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm

or sanitary drains. 3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned.

B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

CLEANING 01 74 00-2

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Execute cleaning to ensure that the building, grounds, and public properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.

B. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

C. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust.

D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and legally dispose of at public or private dumping areas off of Government property in accordance with Sections 01 35 43 and 01 74 19.

E. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

F. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible.

1. Do not drop or throw materials from heights. 2. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted.

G. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Employ professional cleaners for final cleaning.

B. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces and of concealed spaces.

C. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, temporary labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish surfaces so designated to shine; finish vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

D. Repair, patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces.

E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

F. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.

G. Clean all glass.

H. Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction.

I. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils, if air H.V.A.C. units were operated without filters during construction.

J. Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by AAFES.

END 01 74 00.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 74 19 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL 01 74 19-1

1 GENERAL


A. Base bid:

1. Contractor provide:

a. Salvaging non-hazardous site preparation waste and construction waste. b. Recycling non-hazardous site preparation waste and construction waste. c. Disposing of non-hazardous site preparation waste and construction waste.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of JBSA-Sam Houston. 2. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work. 3. Section 01 15 00 – Option Proposals. 4. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 5. Section 01 35 43 – AAFES Environmental Protection. 6. Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout. 7. Technical Sections of the Specifications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste:

1. Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations.

2. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Site improvement materials resulting from site preparation operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of site preparation and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of site preparation or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of site preparation or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of site preparation or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve End-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of not less than 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work.

B. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work.


C. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators.

D. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including but not limited to the following:

1. Demolition Waste:

a. Site lighting poles, fixtures, lamps and ballasts. b. Iron castings. c. Concrete. d. Asphalt paving. e. Rock and suitable soil materials. f. Underground piping, duct and conduit. g. Underground copper wiring.

2. Construction Waste:

a. Concrete. b. Reinforcing steel. c. Masonry and CMU. d. Steel materials. e. Lumber. f. Wood sheet materials. g. Wood trim. h. Insulation. i. Roofing. j. Aluminum and steel sheet metal. k. Gypsum board. l. Ceramic and resilient tile. m. Acoustical tile ceiling pads and grid. n. Empty paint cans. o. Plastic sheet materials. p. Piping. q. Electrical conduit. r. Copper and aluminum wiring. s. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General"

Paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials:

1.) Paper. 2.) Cardboard. 3.) Boxes. 4.) Plastic sheet and film. 5.) Polystyrene packaging. 6.) Wood crates. 7.) Plastic pails.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Authorization to Proceed.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS


A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report.

1. Use Form CWM-7 for construction waste and Form CWM-8 for demolition waste attached at end of Section.

2. Include the following information:

a. Material category. b. Generation point of waste. c. Total quantity of waste in tons. d. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. e. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. f. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons. g. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of

total waste.

B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated End-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

C. Records of Donations:

1. Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations.

a. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

D. Records of Sales:

1. Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations.

a. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records:

1. Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them.

a. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records:

1. Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them.

a. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator.


A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications:

1. Experienced firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements as waste management coordinator.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.


C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of this Section.

D. Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator.

2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.

3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays.

4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.

5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section.

1. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis.

2. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. 3. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout

waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work.

1. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste and Form CWM-2 for demolition waste attached at the end of this Section.

2. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator.

1. Use Form CWM-3 for construction waste and Form CWM-4 for demolition waste attached at the end of this Section.

2. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

3. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

4. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

5. Recycled Materials:

a. Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept.

b. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

6. Disposed Materials:

a. Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. b. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator

facility.


7. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed.


3 EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan.

1. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

2. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 01 55 00, Temporary Facilities & Controls.

B. Waste Management Coordinator:

1. Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.

2. Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within five days of submittal return.

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Section 01 55 00, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: Contractor shall establish a list of available recycling receivers and processors that will be used on this Project and submit list to Contracting Officer for approval.

C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.

D. Preparation of Waste:

1. Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements.


2. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

E. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.

1. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.

2. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site.

a. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. b. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated

materials if found.

3. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials.

a. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. b. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

4. Stockpile materials away from construction area.

a. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

5. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 6. Remove recyclable waste from Post and transport to recycling receiver or processor

in compliance with requirements set forth in Section 01 35 43, Environmental Protection-AAFES.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Asphalt Paving: For unused or excess demolished asphalt paving, break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.

B. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 1 ½ -inch size. 2. Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Division 31 for use as

satisfactory soil for fill or sub-base.

C. Metals: Separate metals by type.

1. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.

D. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size.

1. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.

3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes:

a. Break down packaging into flat sheets. b. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from

Project site.


a. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.

1. Clean Gypsum Board:

a. Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. b. Screen out paper after grinding.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Post property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 ATTACHMENTS

A. Form CWM-1 for construction waste identification.

B. Form CWM-2 for demolition waste identification.

C. Form CWM-3 for construction waste reduction work plan.

D. Form CWM-4 for demolition waste reduction work plan.

E. Form CWM-7 for construction waste

F. Form CWM-8 for demolition waste.

END 01 74 19.

EV

AL

UA

TIO

NS

AT

TA

CH

ME

NT

A

C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

WA

ST

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T &

DIS

PO

SA

L

01 7

4 19

C

opyr

ight

200

8 by

The

Am

eric

an I

nsti

tute

of

Arc

hite

cts

(AIA

) E

xclu

sive

ly p

ubli

shed

and

dis

trib

uted

by

Arc

hite

ctur

al C

ompu

ter

Ser

vice

s, I

nc. (

AR

CO

M)

for

the

AIA

FOR

M C

WM

-1: C

ON

STR

UC

TIO

N W

AST

E ID

EN

TIF

ICA

TIO

N

MA

TE

RIA

L C

AT

EG

OR

Y

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

POIN

T

EST

. QU

AN

TIT

Y

OF

MA

TE

RIA

LS

RE

CE

IVE

D*

(A)

EST

. WA

STE

- %

(B

)

TO

TA

L E

ST.

QU

AN

TIT

Y O

F W

AST

E*

(C =

A x

B)

EST

. VO

LU

ME

C

Y (C

M)

EST

. WE

IGH

T

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

R

EM

AR

KS

AN

D

ASS

UM

PTIO

NS

Pack

agin

g: C

ardb

oard

Pack

agin

g: B

oxes

Pack

agin

g: P

last

ic S

heet

or

Film

Pack

agin

g: P

olys

tyre

ne

Pack

agin

g: P

alle

ts o

r Sk

ids

Pack

agin

g: C

rate

s

Pack

agin

g: P

aint

Can

s

Pack

agin

g: P

last

ic P

ails

Site

-Cle

arin

g W

aste

Mas

onry

or

CM

U

Lum

ber:

Cut

-Off

s

Lum

ber:

War

ped

Piec

es

Plyw

ood

or O

SB (s

crap

s)

Woo

d Fo

rms

Woo

d W

aste

Chu

tes

Woo

d T

rim

(cut

-off

s)

Met

als

Insu

latio

n

Roo

fing

Join

t Sea

lant

Tub

es

Gyp

sum

Boa

rd (s

crap

s)

Car

pet a

nd P

ad (s

crap

s)

Pipi

ng

Ele

ctri

cal C

ondu

it

Oth

er:

* In

sert

uni

ts o

f m

easu

re.

EV

AL

UA

TIO

NS

AT

TA

CH

ME

NT

A

C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

WA

ST

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T &

DIS

PO

SA

L

01 7

4 19

C

opyr

ight

200

8 by

The

Am

eric

an I

nsti

tute

of

Arc

hite

cts

(AIA

) E

xclu

sive

ly p

ubli

shed

and

dis

trib

uted

by

Arc

hite

ctur

al C

ompu

ter

Ser

vice

s, I

nc. (

AR

CO

M)

for

the

AIA

FOR

M C

WM

-2:

DE

MO

LIT

ION

WA

STE

IDE

NT

IFIC

AT

ION

MA

TE

RIA

L D

ESC

RIP

TIO

N

EST

. QU

AN

TIT

Y

EST

. VO

LU

ME

C

Y (C

M)

EST

. WE

IGH

T

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

R

EM

AR

KS

AN

D A

SSU

MPT

ION

S

Asp

halti

c C

oncr

ete

Pavi

ng

Con

cret

e

B

rick

C

MU

L

umbe

r

Pl

ywoo

d an

d O

SB

Woo

d Pa

nelin

g

W

ood

Tri

m

Mis

cella

neou

s Met

als

Stru

ctur

al S

teel

R

ough

Har

dwar

e

In

sula

tion

Roo

fing

Doo

rs a

nd F

ram

es

Doo

r H

ardw

are

Win

dow

s

G

lazi

ng

Aco

ustic

al T

ile

Car

pet

Car

pet P

ad

Dem

ount

able

Par

titio

ns

Equ

ipm

ent

Cab

inet

s

Pl

umbi

ng F

ixtu

res

Pipi

ng

Pipi

ng S

uppo

rts a

nd H

ange

rs

Val

ves

Spri

nkle

rs

Mec

hani

cal E

quip

men

t

E

lect

rica

l Con

duit

Cop

per

Wir

ing

Lig

ht F

ixtu

res

Lam

ps

Lig

htin

g B

alla

sts

Ele

ctri

cal D

evic

es

Switc

hgea

r an

d Pa

nelb

oard

s

T

rans

form

ers

Oth

er:

EV

AL

UA

TIO

NS

AT

TA

CH

ME

NT

A

C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

WA

ST

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T &

DIS

PO

SA

L

01 7

4 19

C

opyr

ight

200

8 by

The

Am

eric

an I

nsti

tute

of

Arc

hite

cts

(AIA

) E

xclu

sive

ly p

ubli

shed

and

dis

trib

uted

by

Arc

hite

ctur

al C

ompu

ter

Ser

vice

s, I

nc. (

AR

CO

M)

for

the

AIA

FOR

M C

WM

-3: C

ON

STR

UC

TIO

N W

AST

E R

ED

UC

TIO

N W

OR

K P

LA

N

MA

TE

RIA

L C

AT

EG

OR

Y

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

POIN

T

TO

TA

L E

ST.

QU

AN

TIT

Y

OF

WA

STE

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

DIS

POSA

L M

ET

HO

D A

ND

QU

AN

TIT

Y

HA

ND

LIN

G A

ND

TR

AN

SPO

RT

ION

PR

OC

ED

UR

ES

EST

. AM

OU

NT

SA

LV

AG

ED

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

EST

. AM

OU

NT

R

EC

YC

LE

D

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

EST

. AM

OU

NT

DIS

POSE

D

TO

LA

ND

FIL

L

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

Pa

ckag

ing:

Car

dboa

rd

Pack

agin

g: B

oxes

Pa

ckag

ing:

Pla

stic

She

et o

r Fi

lm

Pack

agin

g: P

olys

tyre

ne

Pack

agin

g: P

alle

ts o

r Sk

ids

Pack

agin

g: C

rate

s

Pack

agin

g: P

aint

Can

s

Pack

agin

g: P

last

ic P

ails

Site

-Cle

arin

g W

aste

Mas

onry

or

CM

U

Lum

ber:

Cut

-Off

s

Lum

ber:

War

ped

Piec

es

Plyw

ood

or O

SB (s

crap

s)

Woo

d Fo

rms

Woo

d W

aste

Chu

tes

Woo

d T

rim

(cut

-off

s)

Met

als

Insu

latio

n

Roo

fing

Join

t Sea

lant

Tub

es

Gyp

sum

Boa

rd (s

crap

s)

Car

pet a

nd P

ad (s

crap

s)

Pipi

ng

Ele

ctri

cal C

ondu

it

Oth

er:

EV

AL

UA

TIO

NS

AT

TA

CH

ME

NT

A

C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

WA

ST

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T &

DIS

PO

SA

L

01 7

4 19

C

opyr

ight

200

8 by

The

Am

eric

an I

nsti

tute

of

Arc

hite

cts

(AIA

) E

xclu

sive

ly p

ubli

shed

and

dis

trib

uted

by

Arc

hite

ctur

al C

ompu

ter

Ser

vice

s, I

nc. (

AR

CO

M)

for

the

AIA

FOR

M C

WM

-4: D

EM

OL

ITIO

N W

AST

E R

ED

UC

TIO

N W

OR

K P

LA

N

MA

TE

RIA

L C

AT

EG

OR

Y

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

POIN

T

TO

TA

L E

ST.

QU

AN

TIT

Y

OF

WA

STE

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

DIS

POSA

L M

ET

HO

D A

ND

QU

AN

TIT

Y

HA

ND

LIN

G A

ND

TR

AN

SPO

RT

ION

PR

OC

ED

UR

ES

EST

. AM

OU

NT

SA

LV

AG

ED

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

EST

. AM

OU

NT

R

EC

YC

LE

D

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

EST

. AM

OU

NT

D

ISPO

SED

TO

LA

ND

FIL

L

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

A

spha

ltic

Con

cret

e Pa

ving

C

oncr

ete

Bri

ck

CM

U

Lum

ber

Plyw

ood

and

OSB

W

ood

Pane

ling

Woo

d T

rim

M

isce

llane

ous M

etal

s

St

ruct

ural

Ste

el

Rou

gh H

ardw

are

Insu

latio

n

R

oofin

g

D

oors

and

Fra

mes

D

oor

Har

dwar

e

W

indo

ws

Gla

zing

A

cous

tical

Tile

C

arpe

t

C

arpe

t Pad

D

emou

ntab

le P

artit

ions

E

quip

men

t

C

abin

ets

Plum

bing

Fix

ture

s

Pi

ping

Su

ppor

ts a

nd H

ange

rs

Val

ves

Spri

nkle

rs

Mec

hani

cal E

quip

men

t

E

lect

rica

l Con

duit

Cop

per

Wir

ing

Lig

ht F

ixtu

res

Lam

ps

Lig

htin

g B

alla

sts

Ele

ctri

cal D

evic

es

Switc

hgea

r an

d Pa

nelb

oard

s

T

rans

form

ers

Oth

er:

EV

AL

UA

TIO

NS

AT

TA

CH

ME

NT

A

C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

WA

ST

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T &

DIS

PO

SA

L

01 7

4 19

C

opyr

ight

200

8 by

The

Am

eric

an I

nsti

tute

of

Arc

hite

cts

(AIA

) E

xclu

sive

ly p

ubli

shed

and

dis

trib

uted

by

Arc

hite

ctur

al C

ompu

ter

Ser

vice

s, I

nc. (

AR

CO

M)

for

the

AIA

FOR

M C

WM

-7: C

ON

STR

UC

TIO

N W

AST

E R

ED

UC

TIO

N P

RO

GR

ESS

RE

POR

T

MA

TE

RIA

L C

AT

EG

OR

Y

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

POIN

T

TO

TA

L

QU

AN

TIT

Y

OF

WA

STE

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

(A)

QU

AN

TIT

Y O

F W

AST

E S

AL

VA

GE

D

QU

AN

TIT

Y O

F W

AST

E R

EC

YC

LE

D

TO

TA

L

QU

AN

TIT

Y O

F W

AST

E

RE

CO

VE

RE

D

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

(D

= B

+ C

)

TO

TA

L

QU

AN

TIT

Y

OF

WA

STE

R

EC

OV

ER

ED

%

(D

/ A

x 1

00)

EST

IMA

TE

D

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

AC

TU

AL

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

(B)

EST

IMA

TE

D

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

AC

TU

AL

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

(C)

Pack

agin

g: C

ardb

oard

Pack

agin

g: B

oxes

Pa

ckag

ing:

Pla

stic

She

et o

r Fi

lm

Pack

agin

g: P

olys

tyre

ne

Pack

agin

g: P

alle

ts o

r Sk

ids

Pack

agin

g: C

rate

s

Pack

agin

g: P

aint

Can

s

Pack

agin

g: P

last

ic P

ails

Site

-Cle

arin

g W

aste

Mas

onry

or

CM

U

Lum

ber:

Cut

-Off

s

Lum

ber:

War

ped

Piec

es

Plyw

ood

or O

SB (s

crap

s)

Woo

d Fo

rms

Woo

d W

aste

Chu

tes

Woo

d T

rim

(cut

-off

s)

Met

als

Insu

latio

n

Roo

fing

Join

t Sea

lant

Tub

es

Gyp

sum

Boa

rd (s

crap

s)

Car

pet a

nd P

ad (s

crap

s)

Pipi

ng

Ele

ctri

cal C

ondu

it

Oth

er:

EV

AL

UA

TIO

NS

AT

TA

CH

ME

NT

A

C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

WA

ST

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T &

DIS

PO

SA

L

01 7

4 19

C

opyr

ight

200

8 by

The

Am

eric

an I

nsti

tute

of

Arc

hite

cts

(AIA

) E

xclu

sive

ly p

ubli

shed

and

dis

trib

uted

by

Arc

hite

ctur

al C

ompu

ter

Ser

vice

s, I

nc. (

AR

CO

M)

for

the

AIA

FOR

M C

WM

-8: D

EM

OL

ITIO

N W

AST

E R

ED

UC

TIO

N P

RO

GR

ESS

RE

POR

T

MA

TE

RIA

L C

AT

EG

OR

Y

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

POIN

T

TO

TA

L Q

UA

NT

ITY

O

F W

AST

E

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

(A

)

QU

AN

TIT

Y O

F W

AST

E

SAL

VA

GE

D

QU

AN

TIT

Y O

F W

AST

E R

EC

YC

LE

D

TO

TA

L

QU

AN

TIT

Y O

F W

AST

E

RE

CO

VE

RE

D

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

(D

= B

+ C

)

TO

TA

L

QU

AN

TIT

Y

OF

WA

STE

R

EC

OV

ER

ED

%

(D

/ A

x 1

00)

EST

IMA

TE

D

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

AC

TU

AL

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

(B)

EST

IMA

TE

D

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

AC

TU

AL

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

(C)

Asp

halti

c C

oncr

ete

Pavi

ng

Con

cret

e

B

rick

C

MU

L

umbe

r

Pl

ywoo

d an

d O

SB

Woo

d Pa

nelin

g

W

ood

Tri

m

Mis

cella

neou

s Met

als

Stru

ctur

al S

teel

R

ough

Har

dwar

e

In

sula

tion

Roo

fing

Doo

rs a

nd F

ram

es

Doo

r H

ardw

are

Win

dow

s

G

lazi

ng

Aco

ustic

al T

ile

Car

pet

Car

pet P

ad

Dem

ount

able

Par

titio

ns

Equ

ipm

ent

Cab

inet

s

Pl

umbi

ng F

ixtu

res

Pipi

ng

Supp

orts

and

Han

gers

V

alve

s

Sp

rink

lers

M

echa

nica

l Equ

ipm

ent

Ele

ctri

cal C

ondu

it

C

oppe

r W

irin

g

L

ight

Fix

ture

s

L

amps

L

ight

ing

Bal

last

s

E

lect

rica

l Dev

ices

Sw

itchg

ear

and

Pane

lboa

rds

Tra

nsfo

rmer

s

O

ther

:

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 75 00 – SYSTEMS START-UP

SYSTEMS START-UP 01 75 00-1

1 GENERAL


A. Starting Special Construction, Mechanical and Electrical systems.

B. Demonstration and instructions for JBSA-Sam Houston and AAFES personnel for Special Construction, Mechanical and Electrical systems.

C. Initial starting and operational testing for AF/AI, AF/CI equipment, fixtures and signage.

D. Coordination of testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC systems.


A. Section 01 10 17 – AAFES Furnished/AAFES Installed Equipment.

B. Section 01 10 18 – AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment.

C. Section 01 45 16 – Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports.

D. Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials.

E. Division 11 – Equipment.

F. Division 21 – Fire Protection.

G. Division 22 – Plumbing.

H. Division 23 – HVAC.

I. Division 26 – Electrical.

J. Division 27 – Communications.

K. Division 28 – Alarms & Surveillance.

1.3 STARTING AND TESTING SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall coordinate and schedule start-up of various equipment and systems.

B. Notify Contracting Officer and designated representative seven (7) days prior to start-up of each item.

C. Contractor shall provide:

1. Initial start-up and functional testing of all Food Service Equipment to ensure installation is complete and equipment is functionally ready for AAFES provided final start-up and training demonstrations to employees.

2. Final start-up and testing of Fire Alarm, Fire Protection, HVAC, Electrical, and Communications equipment items and training for JBSA-Sam Houston and AAFES employees for operation, adjusting and maintenance of that equipment.


D. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.

E. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

F. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

G. Execute initial start-up and functional testing under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative and/or Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

H. When specified in individual specification Sections for building equipment, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

I. Submit a typewritten report in accordance with Section 01 33 00 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

1. Provide copies of typewritten reports in O & M Manuals at Project Close-out.

1.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Contractor shall provide sign-in log sheets and written meeting minutes for each unit or group of units demonstrated.

1. Obtain contact information and signature for each demonstration attendee. 2. Provide written minutes of each demonstration conducted. 3. Submit dated written record of each demonstration, along with sign-in log sheet

and meeting minutes as part of Project Closeout submittals and specifically include with Operation and Maintenance Manuals submitted under Section 01 77 00.

B. Contractor provide video recorded CD in four (4) copies of each training session and each equipment demonstration session required to be conducted by Contractor below for submittal to AAFES and JBSA-Sam Houston CES at Final Closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 01 77 00 and as follows.

1. Training and demonstration of Food Service Equipment and other major AAFES furnished equipment items will be performed by AAFES.

2. Training and demonstration of Fire Alarm, Hood Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical and Communications systems equipment items shall be provided by Contractor and shall be recorded for submittal as indicated in Paragraph 1.4, B. above.

C. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to AAFES and Installation personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection.

D. Demonstrate project equipment by a qualified representative who is knowledgeable about the project.

E. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months.


F. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction.

G. Review contents of operation and maintenance manuals with AAFES and Installation personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

H. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time at designated location.

I. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

J. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual Sections but in no case less than 1-hour for each unit or group of units demonstrated.

1.5 TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING

A. AAFES will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. The independent firm will perform services specified in Section 23 05 95.

C. Reports shall be submitted by the independent firm to the Contracting Officer and designated representative indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.



END 01 75 00.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 77 00 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Substantial Completion.

B. Final Inspections.

C. Closeout Submittals.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. General Provisions of the Contract: Final Acceptance and Payment.

B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.

C. Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning.

D. Section 01 78 00 – Project Record Documents.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:

A. Contractor:

1. Submit written certification to Contracting Officer and designated representative that project, or designated portion of Project, is substantially complete.

2. Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected.

B. Contracting Officer will make an inspection after receipt of certification.

C. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is substantially complete:

1. Architect-Engineer will prepare, and submit to Contracting Officer and Contractor, a list of items to be completed or corrected, as determined by the inspection.

2. Contracting Officer will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion, containing:

a. Date of Substantial Completion. b. Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, verified, and amended by

Contracting Officer. c. The time within which Contractor shall complete or correct work of listed items. d. Time and date AAFES will assume possession of work or designated portion

thereof. e. Responsibilities of AAFES and Contractor for:

1.) Utilities. 2.) Operation of mechanical, electrical, and other systems. 3.) Maintenance and cleaning. 4.) Security.

f. Signatures of:

1.) Contracting Officer. 2.) Contractor.

3. AAFES occupancy of project or designated portion of project:

a. Contractor shall perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01 74 00. b. AAFES will occupy project, under provisions stated in Certificate of Substantial

Completion.


4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within designated time.

D. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is not substantially complete:

1. He will immediately notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor shall complete work and send second written notice to contracting officer

and designated representative, certifying that project, or designated portion of project, is substantially complete.

3. Contracting Officer will reinspect work.

1.4 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall submit written certification that:

1. Contract documents have been reviewed. 2. Project has been inspected for compliance with contract documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of AAFES and Installation

personnel are operational. 5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection.

B. Contracting Officer will make final inspection after receipt of certification.

C. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is finally complete in accordance with requirements of contract documents, he shall request Contractor to make project closeout submittals.

D. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is not finally complete:

1. He shall notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send

second written notice to the Contracting Officer certifying that work is complete. 3. The Contracting Officer will reinspect work.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. Project Record Documents: Specified requirements of Section 01 78 00.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers.

B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "Operation and Maintenance Manuals", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.

C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on 20 pound white paper, in three parts as follows:

1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.

2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section.


a. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers.

b. Identify the following:

1.) Significant design criteria. 2.) List of equipment. 3.) Parts list for each component. 4.) Operating instructions. 5.) Value chart. 6.) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 7.) Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning

methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

8.) End user agreement(s) and software license(s) where applicable.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:

a. All approved shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties. e. Training Sessions attendance roster. f. Executed Asbestos, Lead, Lead Based Paint & PCB Certification Forms.

E. Submit four (4) copies of the operation and maintenance manual to Architect-Engineer for review.

F. Architect-Engineer will review documents, advise Contractor of deficiencies, if any, and request that Contractor supplement initial submittals with additional information.

G. Upon receipt of complete Operation and Maintenance Manuals the Architect-Engineer will distribute documents as follows:

1. JBSA-Sam Houston GM: One (1) copy. 2. JBSA-Sam Houston FMO: One (1) copy. 3. JBSA-Sam Houston CES: Two (2) copies.

H. In addition to specified hard copies the Contractor shall electronically duplicate all information contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manual, formatted in identical order, and provide five (5) CD's copies of Manuals in digital format.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION:

A. The Contractor shall provide, at his expense, manufacturer's representatives to completely check out all mechanical and electrical systems and items covered by the drawings and specifications.

B. This requirement shall be scheduled just prior to, and during the initial start up.

C. After all systems are functioning properly, the representatives shall instruct Facility Maintenance Personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of each item.

D. In addition to instructions given at the project, the Facility Maintenance Personnel shall be given a classroom instruction course on operation and maintenance of the systems.

1. Training sessions shall be limited to four (4) continuous hours where practical.


E. Schedule additional four (4) hour sessions as required.

1.8 WARRANTY AND EXTENDED WARRANTIES:

A. Upon completion of project and prior to final payment Contractor shall furnish warranties as required by Contract and technical Sections of Specifications.

1. Contractor shall fully warrant all labor and materials for a full year following Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance of the Project by the Contracting Officer as required by the Contract for Construction in compliance with requirements set forth in Exhibit F of the Solicitation Package.

2. All applicable products, materials, systems and equipment entering into the Work shall be warranted by the manufacturer’s standard commercial warranty for a period of not less that one (1) year.

3. In addition to the standard warranty there are products, materials, systems and equipment designated in the Technical Sections of the specifications that shall be warranted beyond one (1) year.

a. Refer to Technical Sections for extended warranties beyond one (1) year. b. Provide manufacturer’s fully executed warranty for specified period,

commencing on date of Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance, covering items listed.

4. All warranties shall be properly executed in six copies (1 original and 5 copies) by Contractor and submitted in conjunction with the O & M Manuals at Project Closeout for distribution to AAFES and JBSA-Sam Houston CES.

B. Delivery of guarantees shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation assumed under contract.

C. Submit guarantee covering entire project for one year.

D. Submit separate extended warranties and guarantees for portions of work where Technical Sections of the specifications require longer periods of time.

1. Contractor's guarantee shall be extended to cover such longer periods on these items.

E. Guarantees shall become valid and operative upon issuance of Certificate of Inspection and Acceptance by AAFES.

F. Guarantees shall not apply to work where damage is a result of abuse, neglect by AAFES, or his successor(s) in interest.

1.9 DD FORM 1354:

A. Preparation of DD Form 1354 "Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property":

1. At the conclusion of the project the Contractor will compile and furnish to the Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer cost information and quantity data of materials and systems furnished and installed.

2. A list of items for which the costs and quantity data are required will be furnished to the Contractor.

B. Such information shall be returned to the Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer within 10 days from the receipt of the list.


C. Architect-Engineer will prepare and submit a copy of DD Form 1354 to the Contracting Officer for transmittal to JBSA-Sam Houston Real Property office at completion of Project.

D. DD Form 1354 Attachments:

1. Department of Defense Instruction, Form 4165.40. 2. Suggested Instructions for Preparing DD Form 1354. 3. Checklist for Buildings Info for DD Form 1354 & Real Property Card. 4. Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property, DD Form 1354.



END 01 77 00.

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

1


2


3

SUGGESTED INSTRUCTIONS FOR PREPARING DD FORM 1354 (TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY)

1. The page number and the total number of pages comprising each transfer shall be shown in the space provided at the top

right-hand part of the form. 2. When two or more pages are required, Items 27 through 29 shall be completed only on the final page. In such cases, the

bottom portion of the form shall be torn off of all pages, except the final page, at the line above Items 27 and 28. ITEM 1 - Self – explanatory ITEM 2 - Primarily for Navy use, the district number will be assigned by area or district public works office in accordance with coding pattern set forth in NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 6. For Army use, enter appropriate Army Engineer district where construction is performed and/or from which the transfer is made. For transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter appropriate Army Engineer district or the district number assigned by area, or Naval district public works office from which the construction transfer is made. ITEM 4 - For Navy use only, see NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 5. ITEM 5 - Enter date of preparation. ITEM 6 – For Army use, enter appropriate Army job and directive number. For Air Force use, enter base job number, as appropriate, when form is used for transfer within the Air Force. ITEM 7 – For Army use, or for transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter separate series of numbers, by fiscal year, for each installation to which real property is transferred; e.g., for FY 1962 show 62-1, 62-2, etc. For Navy use, this serial number will be assigned by respective area or district public works office and will represent the numerical sequence of submissions by respective contract number. ITEM 8 – Insert appropriate contract number. ITEM 9 – Self-explanatory. ITEM 10 – 12: Instructions for Items 2,3 and 4 apply. (not applicable for Air For Use.) ITEM 13 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to or used by the activity named in accordance with Item 9. See NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 10. ITEM 14 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to the activity performing the official property accounting for the activity shown in Item 9. See NAVCompt Manual, Vol. 2, Chapter 5, for accounting numbers. ITEM 15 – Insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (A) to indicate whether the transfer involves new construction, existing facilities or capital improvements to existing facilities. If the “other” category is used, explain in remarks, Item 31. Additionally, insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (B) to indicate whether transfer is being made at time of beneficial occupancy, physical completion or financial completion (with respect to new construction). If the “other” category is used, explain in remarks, Item 31. ITEM 16 – Enter the code number assigned to identify the project with the appropriate construction authorization law. ITEM 17 – Each single entry will be identified as an item number and this item number will be shown in this column. ITEM 18 – 19: Category Code and Description. Enter the category code and description (see DoD Instruction 4165.3 (reference (a) ) or attachment 1 to enclosure 1 to DoD Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)) that appropriately describes the primary use for which the facility (buildings, structures, utilities) is designed. Not more than one category code (Item 18) will be listed as a line item (Item 17).


4

ITEM 20 – Number of Units in terms of buildings or other structures. ITEM 21 – Type – enter type of construction; i.e., “P” for permanent, “S” for semipermanent or “T” for temporary. ITEM 22 – Enter the unit of measure abbreviation, such as “SF” for square feet, etc. (see attachment 2 to enclosure 1 to DoD Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)). ITEM 23 – Enter total quantity as described In Item 22. ITEM 24 –Indicate by item number, category code, and description the appropriate cost. In those instances where a document is prepared which lists items carrying costs which, in some cases, may be final and in others may be preliminary, each cost figure by line item will carry an alphabetical suffix of (P) for preliminary or (F) for final. ITEM 25 – 31: Self-explanatory. #First amendment (Ch 1, 7/28/67)

HQ

Arm

y &

Air

Fo

rce

Exc

han

ge

Ser

vice

Des

ign

Cri

teri

a M

anu

al

EX

HIB

IT J

TR

AN

SF

ER

AN

D A

CC

EP

TA

NC

E O

F M

ILIT

AR

Y R

EA

L P

RO

PE

RT

Y

PA

GE

O

F

PA

GE

S

1.

FR

OM

: (I

nsta

llatio

n/A

ctiv

ity/S

ervi

ce)

2.

O

PE

RA

TIN

G

UN

IT

3. D

IS

TR

ICT

C

OD

E

4. O

PE

R

AT

ING

A

GE

NC

Y

5. D

AT

E

6. J

OB

NU

MB

ER

7.

SE

RIA

L N

UM

BE

R

7. C

ON

TR

AC

T

NU

MB

ER

15.

TY

PE

OF

TR

AN

SA

CT

ION

1.

F

RO

M:

(Ins

talla

tion/

Act

ivity

/Ser

vice

) 2.

O

PE

RA

TIN

G

UN

IT

11.

DIS

-T

RIC

T

CO

DE

12.

OP

ER

A

TIN

G

AG

EN

CY

13. A

C

CO

UN

TIN

GN

UM

BE

R

14. A

C

CO

UN

T-

OF

FIC

E

NU

MB

ER

NE

W C

ON

ST

R

EX

IST

ING

FA

C

CA

PIT

AL

IM

P

OT

HE

R (

SP

EC

IFY

)

B

EN

F/O

P

HY

SIC

AL

C

OM

F

IN. C

OM

O

TH

ER

(S

PE

CIF

Y)

16.

PR

OJE

CT

N

UM

BE

R

ITE

M

NO

.

17

CA

TE

GO

RT

Y

CO

DE

18

FA

CIL

ITY

(c

ateg

ory

desc

riptio

n)

19

NO

. O

F

UN

ITS

20

TY

PE

21

UN

IT

OF

M

EA

S

22

TO

TA

L Q

UA

NT

ITY

23

CO

ST

24

DR

AW

ING

N

UM

BE

RS

25

RE

MA

RK

S

26

41

65

27.

STA

TE

ME

NT

OF

CO

MPL

ET

ION

: T

he f

acil

ites

list

ed h

ereo

n ar

e in

acc

orda

nce

with

map

s, d

raw

ings

, an

d sp

ecif

icat

ions

and

cha

nge

orde

rs a

ppro

ved

by th

e au

thor

ized

rep

rese

ntat

ive

of th

e us

ing

agen

cy e

xcep

t fo

r th

e de

fici

enci

es li

sted

on

the

reve

rse

side

.

28. A

CC

EP

TE

D B

Y (

Sig

natu

re)

DA

TE

TR

AN

SF

ER

RE

D B

Y (

Sig

natu

re)

Titl

e (A

rea

Eng

r./B

ase

Eng

r/ D

PW

O)

DA

TE

TIT

LE (

Pos

t E

ngr.

/Bas

e E

ngr.

/Nav

y R

ep.)

29

. PR

OP

ER

TY

V

OU

CH

ER

NU

MB

ER

DD

FO

RM

1 N

0V 6

1 135

4

SU

PE

RS

ED

ES

EN

G F

OR

MS

290

AN

D 2

90B

AN

D N

AV

DO

CK

S F

OR

M 2

317

4165.40 (Encl 1) Nov 14, 61

5 of 11


Page 6 of 11

30. CONSTRUCTION DEFICIENCIES

31. REMARKS

This form has been designed and issued for use in connection with the transfer of military real property between the military departments and to or form other government agencies. It supersedes ENG Forms 290 and 290B (formerly used by the Army and Air Force) and NAVDOCKS Form 2317 (formerly used by the Navy). Existing instruction issued by the military departments relative to the preparation of the three superseded forms are applicable to this form to the extent that the various items and

columns on the superseded forms have been retained. Additional instructions, as appropriate, will be promulgated by the military departments in connection with any new items appearing hereon. With the issuance of this DD form, it is not intended that the department shall revise and reprint manuals and directives simply to show the number of this DD form. Such action can be accomplished through the normal course of revision for other reasons.


Page 7 of 11

ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 CATEGORY CODES: VERIFY FOR ARMY FACILITIES AND AIR FORCE FACILITIES OF THE SAME DESCRIPTION • • • (ABBREVIATION-NOMENCLATURE) * DESCRIPTION: ARMY AIR FORCE SHOPPING CENTER: (EXCH MAIN RETL) : 740-53 (EXCH SALES STORE) 740111 SHOPPETTE (EXCHANGE BRANCH) :740-50 (EXCH BRANCH) 740382 CLASS SIX (CLASS VI) :740-84 (BSE PACKAGE STORE) 740269 CAR CARE CENTER (EXCH SVC STA) :740-52 (EXCH SVC STN) 740383 BURGER KING (POST RESTAURANT) :740-64 (EXCH CAFE SNK BAR) 722345 CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST

1. BUILDING SQUARE FOOTAGE: A.RETAIL AREAS:___________SF B. ADMIN/EMPLOYEE AREA_________SF C. MPA:___________SF D. SERVICES ACTIVITIES: ____________________SF E. FOOD ACTIVITIES________SF. F. MALL/PUBLIC TOILETS: ___________________SF G. MERCH. EQUIP. RM______SF H. TOTAL BLDG:___________SF

2. BUILDING $ _____________________ (TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE LESS THE SUM OF THE FOLLOWING) 3. HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM $ _____________________ TOTAL:_________________TONS

(AR)826-11 OVER 100 TONS (AC PL OV 110 TN) (AF)826123 OVER 100 TONS (A/C PLT OVET 100 TN) (AR)826-12 26-100 TONS (AC PL-26-100 TN) (AF)826122 25-100 TONS (A/C PLT 25<100 TN) (AR)826-13 6-25 TONS (AC PL 6-25- TN) (AF)890121 5-25 TONS (A/C PL 5 TO 25 TN)

4. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (FIRE ALARM SYS) AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM $______________________

(AR)880-50 (AUTO SPNLKR SYS) (AF)880221 (AUTO FR DTECTN SYS) TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________ FOAM FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (AR)880-60 (AUTO SPNKLR SYS) $______________________ (AF)980235 (DRY CHEM SYS) TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________ (AR)843-11 FIRE HYDRANTS $______________________ (AF)843315 (FR HYDR)

5. UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (INCLUDE. METER $______________________ (AR)812-42 UNGD ELEC DISTR) (AF) (SEC DISTR LNE UG) (AF)890181 (UTIL LNE DUCTS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:___________L.F OF____IN. CONDUIT AND_____________CONDUCTOR


Page 8 of 11

ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 (CONTINUED)

CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST 6. ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER $______________________

(AR)813-60 (TRANSFORMER) (AF)812225 (PRIM DISTR LNE UG) PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER____________KVA

7. NATURAL GAS LINE TO BUILDING (INC. METER) $______________________ (AR)824-10 (GAS PIPE LIBE) (AF)824464 (GAS MAINS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________)

8. UNDERGROUND TELEPHONE $______________________ (AR)..... (UNDG TELEPHONE) (AF)135583 (TEL DUCT FCLTY) (AF)890181 (UTIL LNE DUCTS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. CONDUIT

9. SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM $______________________ (AR)832-10 (SANITARY SEWER) (AF)932267 (SAN SEWAGE MAIN) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL: _________________)

10. GREASE INTERCEPTOR $______________________ (AR)833-90 (LOCAL DESCRIPTION) CAPACITY ___________GALLONS

11. STORM SEWER SYSTEM

(AR)871-10 (STORM SEWER) (AF)871183 (STRM DRN DSPL) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________) TOTAL NUMBER OF DROP INLETS:___________

12. DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM $______________________ (AR)842-10 (WATER PIPE LN P) (AF)842245 (WTR DISTR MAINS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING :____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________) (INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER)

13. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM $______________________ (INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER) (AR)871-30 (IRRIGATION FAC) TOTAL NUMBET OF HEADS_________________

14. DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE $______________________ (AR)833-12 (REFUSE COLL BLD) TOTAL AREA:_____________S.F.


Page 9 of 11


CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST 15. PAVING (NON ORGANIZATION VEHICLE PARKING) $______________________

(AR)852-15 (NON ORG VEH PRK) (AF)852262 (VEH PKING N/ORGN) TOTAL ASPHALT PAVING:___________S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN. ________________BASE MATERIAL TOTAL CONCRETE PAVING:_________ S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN. ________________BASE MATERIAL

16. CONCRETE WALKS, SLABS & PADS $______________________ (AR)852-20 (SIDEWALK) (AF)852289 (SIDEWALK) PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC TOTAL AREA:____________S.F. (EXCLUDING PAVER TILES)

17. CONCRETE CURBS & GUTTERS $______________________ (AR)851-10 (ROADS PAVED) (AF)851143 (CURBS & GUTTERS) TOTAL AREA:____________L.F.

18. EXTERIOR SITE LIGHTING (EXT LIGHTING) $______________________ (AR)812-30 (EXT LIGHTING) (AF)812926 (EXTERIOR AREA LTG) TOTAL NUMBER OF POLES______________________

19. LANDSCAPING (RELATED LAND IMPROV NB) $______________________ (AR)871-75 (RELATED LAND INPROV NB)

20. GASOLINE DISPENSING SYSTEMS $______________________ (AR)411-90 (LOCAL DESCRIPTION) UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS: NUMBER OF TANKS:_____ SIZE:______ GALLONS NUMBER OF DISPENSERS:__________ NUMBER OF HOSES:_______________ CANOPY SIZE:______ SF $_________________ KIOSKS: NUMBER________MGFR____________ COST $ ____________________

21. CHAIN LINK FENCING (FENCE OR WALLS) $______________________ (AR)872-10 (FENCE OR WALLS) (AF)872248 (FENCE INTERIOR) TOTAL LINEAR FEET:_______________L.F.

22. TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COSTS: $______________________


Page 10 of 11


ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS H.V.A.C. UNITS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. EXHAUST FANS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. SUPPLY FANS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. CHILLER BOILER HEAT PUMP ROOFTOP A/C UNITS DOCK LEVELERS DOCK SHELTERS ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PANELS / LIGHT FIXTURES ITEM NO MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER QUANTITY DESCRIPTION PLUMBING # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ WATER HEATER WATER CLOSET WATER CLOSET (H.C.) URINAL LAVATORY LAVATORY (H.C.) FLOOR SINKS(___#) FLOOR DRAINS(___#) MOP SINK ROOF DRAINS (___#)


Page 11 of 11


ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS FOR FOOD ACTIVITIES ANSUL CHEMICAL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM TYPE OF SYSTEM:____________ TOTAL NUMBER OF: HEADS_________ AUTOMAN RELEASE_________ REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATIONS___________ SNAP ACTION ASSEMBLIES__________________ MECHANICAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES________’

ITEMS REQUIRED IN CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTS 1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S TESTING / TRAINING REPORTS: A. TEST AND BALANCE REPORT ON MECHANICAL SYSTEMS B. CERTIFICATION OF GROUNDING (RESISTANCE) POWER TRANSMISSION C. INSTRUCTION / TRAINING SESSIONS ON ALL MECH/ELEC/EQUIPMENT (INCLUDING PARTICIPANTS’ ROSTER) 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY 3. ROOF(S) WARRANTY 4. ELECTRIC WARRANTY 5. HVAC WARRANTY 6. GREENHOUSE WARRANTY 7. TERMITE PROTECTION GUARANTEE 8. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT ON “NO ASBESTOS BEARING MATERIALS” USED IN CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 78 00 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.

B. Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout.

C. Section 02 41 16 – Structure Demolition.

1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain at job site, one copy of:

1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Reviewed Shop Drawings. 5. Change Orders. 6. Other Modifications to Contract. 7. Field Test Records.

B. Store documents in field office apart from documents used for construction.

C. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.

D. File documents in accordance with Project Filing Format of Uniform Construction Index.

E. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition.

F. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

G. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.3 MARKING DEVICES

A. Provide red colored pencils for all marking.

1.4 RECORDING

A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT" in 2-inch high printed letters.

B. Keep record documents current.

C. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded.

D. Contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction.

1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to first floor level. 2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced

to permanent surface improvements.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 00-2

3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features of structure.

4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by change order or field order. 6. Details not on original contract drawings.

E. Specifications and Amendments: Legibly mark up each Section to record:

1. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. 2. Other matters not originally specified.

1.5 SUBMITTAL

A. Transmit one (1) complete edited set of As-Built Record Document mark-ups to the Architect-Engineer for review.

1. Resubmit until Architect-Engineer approves Documents for use in developing electronic copies for distribution.

B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:

1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Title and number of each record document. 5. Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate. 6. Signature of Contractor, or his authorized representative.

C. Architect-Engineer will correct original Drawing and Project Manual files using Contractor furnished mark-ups.

D. Architect-Engineer will deliver corrected As-Build Record Documents to Contracting Officer and JBSA-Sam Houston CES.

1. AAFES:

a. Two (2) sets. b. One (1) CD.

2. JBSA-Sam Houston CES:

a. Two (2) sets. b. One (1) CD.

END 01 78 00.

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONDITIONS Section 02 31 00 – SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION & GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION & GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 02 31 00-1

1. GENERAL


A. Base Bid:


a. Verification of data and existing conditions. b. At Contractor’s option, perform additional subsurface investigation at own

expense upon approval by Contracting Officer.



1. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01 45 29 – Testing Laboratory Services. 3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 4. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving. 5. Section 32 12 16 – Asphalt Paving. 6. Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving.

B. By others:

1. Architect-Engineer has caused borings to be made and other subsurface exploratory work to be performed at the Site by:

a. Raba Kistner Consultants, Inc. 12821 West Golden Lane San Antonio, Texas 78249

Phone (210) 699-9090

2. Results of this subsurface exploratory work is presented in the Geotechnical Engineering Study dated 27 January 2016.

3. Boring Location Plan and Boring Logs are included in this Section for informational purposes only:

a. Neither AAFES, the Contracting Officer nor the Architect-Engineer can guarantee the accuracy, validity or continuity of conditions from the data.

b. Neither AAFES, the Contracting Officer nor the Architect-Engineer assume any responsibility for the Contractor’s interpretation of the data.

1.3 SOIL BORING DATA

A. Information shown on the following pages is bound herein for the offerer’s benefit.

1. Offerers shall realize the possible variation of soil conditions within the areas to be excavated.

2. Contractor shall assume responsibility for any conclusions interpreted from the data and shall be responsible for any consequences of acting on conclusions obtained.

B. The complete soils investigation report is bound on the following 62 pages:

1. Cover Sheet 2. Letter of Transmittal

SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION & GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 02 31 00-2

3. Preface 4. Table of Contents 5. Narrative, Pages 1-3 6. Site Conditions, Pages 3-4 7. Analysis and Recommendations, Pages 5-29 8. Construction Related Services, Pages 29-30 9. Attachments:

a. Boring Location Map, Figure 1 b. Log of Boring CTB-1, Figure 2 c. Log of Boring CTB-2, Figure 3 d. Log of Boring CTB-3, Figure 4 e. Log of Boring CTB-4, Figure 5 f. Log of Boring CTB-5, Figure 6 g. Log of Boring CTB-6, Figure 7 h. Log of Boring CTB-7, Figure 8 i. Log of Boring CTB-8, Figure 9 j. Log of Boring STB-1, Figure 10 k. Log of Boring STB-2, Figure 11 l. Log of Boring STB-3, Figure 12 m. Log of Boring STB-4, Figure 13 n. Key to Terms and Symbols, Figures 14a-14c o. Results of Soil Sample Analysis, Figures 15a-15b p. Moisture Density Relationship Curves, Figures 16a-16b q. pH-Lime Series Curves, Figures 17a-17b r. Supplementary Information and Back, 3 Pages

END 02 31 00.

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY

FOR

JBSA-SAM HOUSTON BURGER KING AND POPEYE'S RESTAURANTS

SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY

For

JBSA SAM HOUSTON BURGER KING AND POPEYE'S RESTAURANTS

SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS

Prepared for

H. MICHAEL BOHNSACK ARCHITECTS Carbondale, Illinois

Prepared by

RABA KISTNER CONSULTANTS, INC. San Antonio, Texas

PROJECT NO. ASA15-113-00

January 27, 2016

Project No. ASA15-113-00 January 27, 2016

TABLE OF CONTENTS

i

INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 1

PROJECT DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................ 1 LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 1 PREVIOUS STUDIES .................................................................................................................................. 2 BORINGS AND LABORATORY TESTS ......................................................................................................... 2

GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS ..................................................................................................................... 3 SITE DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................................... 3 GEOLOGY ....................................................................................................................................................... 4 SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 4 STRATIGRAPHY .............................................................................................................................................. 4

GROUNDWATER ............................................................................................................................................ 4 FOUNDATION ANALYSIS .......................................................................................................................... 5

EXPANSIVE SOIL-RELATED MOVEMENTS ..................................................................................................... 5 Overexcavation and Select Fill Replacement ........................................................................................ 5

FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS ....................................................................................................... 7

FOUNDATION OPTIONS ................................................................................................................................ 7 SITE GRADING ................................................................................................................................................ 7 SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS ............................................................................................................................. 7

Allowable Bearing Capacity .................................................................................................................... 8 Uplift Resistance ..................................................................................................................................... 8 Lateral Resistance ................................................................................................................................... 8

DRILLED-AND-UNDERREAMED PIERS ........................................................................................................... 9 Pier Shaft Potential Uplift Forces ........................................................................................................... 9 Allowable Uplift Resistance .................................................................................................................... 9

PIER SPACING .............................................................................................................................................. 10 LATERAL RESISTANCE .................................................................................................................................. 10 GRADE BEAMS ............................................................................................................................................. 11

FLATWORK AND FLOOR SLABS ................................................................................................................... 11 LATERAL EARTH PRESSURES ....................................................................................................................... 12 BACKFILL COMPACTION .............................................................................................................................. 13 DRAINAGE .................................................................................................................................................... 14

GLOBAL STABILITY ANALYSES ..................................................................................................................... 14 DETENTION POND OR PONDS .................................................................................................................... 14 PERMANENT SLOPES ................................................................................................................................... 15


TABLE OF CONTENTS

ii

FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS ................................................................................. 15 SITE DRAINAGE ............................................................................................................................................ 15

SITE PREPARATION ...................................................................................................................................... 16 SELECT FILL .................................................................................................................................................. 16 SHALLOW FOUNDATION EXCAVATIONS .................................................................................................... 18 DRILLED PIERS .............................................................................................................................................. 18

Reinforcement and Concrete Placement ............................................................................................ 18 Temporary Casing ................................................................................................................................. 18

EXCAVATION SLOPING AND BENCHING ..................................................................................................... 18 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................................................... 19

CRAWL SPACE CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................................................................... 19 Ventilation ............................................................................................................................................ 19 Below Slab Utilities ............................................................................................................................... 19 Drainage ................................................................................................................................................ 19 Carton Forms ........................................................................................................................................ 20

INTERIOR WALLS ......................................................................................................................................... 20 UTILITIES ...................................................................................................................................................... 20

PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS ......................................................................................................... 21 SUBGRADE CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................. 21 SWELL/HEAVE POTENTIAL .......................................................................................................................... 22

DESIGN INFORMATION ............................................................................................................................... 22 RIGID PAVEMENT ........................................................................................................................................ 23

Reinforced Pavement ........................................................................................................................... 24 Joints ..................................................................................................................................................... 24

FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT ................................................................................................................................... 24 SUBGRADE PREPARATION .......................................................................................................................... 25 DRAINAGE CONSIDERATIONS ..................................................................................................................... 26

SOIL FILL ....................................................................................................................................................... 26 SUBGRADE TREATMENT ............................................................................................................................. 26 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE ............................................................................................................................... 27 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE .................................................................................................. 27

PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE ................................................................................................................. 27 MISCELLANEOUS PAVEMENT RELATED CONSIDERATIONS ....................................................................... 28

CONSTRUCTION RELATED SERVICES ...................................................................................................... 29 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS TESTING AND OBSERVATION SERVICES ...................................................... 29


TABLE OF CONTENTS

iii

BUDGETING FOR CONSTRUCTION TESTING ............................................................................................... 30

ATTACHMENTS The following figures are attached and complete this report: Boring Location Map .......................................................................................................................... Figure 1 Logs of Borings ........................................................................................................................ Figures 2 to 13 Key to Terms and Symbols ............................................................................................................... Figure 14 Results of Soil Analyses .................................................................................................................... Figure 15 Moisture-Density Relationship Curve .............................................................................................. Figure 16 pH-Lime Series Curve ....................................................................................................................... Figure 17 Important Information About Your Geotechnical Engineering Report


1

INTRODUCTION RABA KISTNER Consultants Inc. (RKCI) has completed the authorized subsurface exploration for the proposed Burger King and Popeye’s Restaurants located at JBSA-Sam Houston in San Antonio, Texas, as illustrated on Figure 1. This report briefly describes the procedures utilized during this study and presents our findings along with our recommendations for foundation design and construction considerations, as well as for pavement design and construction guidelines.

PROJECT DESCRIPTION The facilities being considered in this study include a new single story Burger King and Popeye’s Restaurant located at JBSA-Sam Houston in San Antonio, Texas. Our understanding of the existing topography at this site is based on a drawing provided to us on November 25, 2015, entitled “Construct Dual Food – Site Grading Plan.” Based on this drawing, the topographic high and low within the project site are El 753 and El 737 ft, respectively. We understand that the dual food building will have a finished floor at El 748.6. Hence, cuts and fills of approximately 5 to 6 feet are anticipated to develop the building pad. The structure is anticipated to create relatively light structural loads to be carried by the foundation systems. The improvements will also include ancillary driveway, parking area pavements, and detention pond or ponds.

LIMITATIONS This engineering report has been prepared in accordance with accepted Geotechnical Engineering practices in the region of South/Central Texas and for the use of H. Michael Bohnsack Architects (CLIENT) and its representatives for design purposes. This report may not contain sufficient information for purposes of other parties or other uses. This report is not intended for use in determining construction means and methods. The attachments and report text should not be used separately. The recommendations submitted in this report are based on the data obtained from a total of 12 borings; 4 building borings, 7 pavement borings, and 1 water retention boring drilled at this site, our understanding of the project information provided to us, and our experience in the area. If the project information described in this report is incorrect, is altered, or if new information is available, we should be retained to review and modify our recommendations. This report may not reflect the actual variations of the subsurface conditions across the site. This is particularly true of this site with respect to the depth of the upper surficial clays and fill materials. The nature and extent of variations across the site may not become evident until construction commences. The construction process itself may also alter subsurface conditions. If variations appear evident at the time of construction, it may be necessary to reevaluate our recommendations after performing on-site observations and tests to establish the engineering impact of the variations. The scope of our Geotechnical Engineering Study does not include an environmental assessment of the air, soil, rock, or water conditions either on or adjacent to the site. No environmental opinions are presented in this report.


2

If final grade elevations are significantly different from those discussed in this report (more than plus or minus 1 ft), our office should be informed about these changes. If needed and/or if desired, we will reexamine our analyses and make supplemental recommendations.

PREVIOUS STUDIES RKCI performed a previous geotechnical engineering study at this site in 2010 (RKCI Project No. ASA10-075-00, dated July 16, 2012), the results of which are on file in our office. Our previous data was used as supplementary information in the preparation of this report.

BORINGS AND LABORATORY TESTS Subsurface conditions at the site were evaluated by 12 borings drilled at the locations shown on the Boring Location Map, Figure 1. These locations are approximate and distances were measured using a hand-held, recreational-grade GPS locator; tape; angles; pacing; etc. The borings were drilled to depths ranging from 5 to 40 ft below the existing ground surface using a truck-mounted drilling rig. Ground surface elevations were estimated from the preliminary site grading plan provided to us on November 25, 2015.The estimated ground surface elevation at each of the boring locations is listed in the table below as well as the approximate bottom elevation of each boring.

Boring No. Estimated Ground Surface Elevation (ft, MSL)

Approximate Boring Bottom Elevation (ft, MSL)

CTB-1 753.0 743.0 CTB-2 744.0 734.0 CTB-3 745.0 740.0 CTB-4 745.0 740.0 CTB-5 745.0 740.0 CTB-6 745.0 725.0 CTB-7 745.0 735.0 CTB-8 747.0 737.0 STB-1 750.0 710.0 STB-2 746.0 706.0 STB-3 745.0 705.0 STB-4 749.5 709.5

During drilling operations, the following samples were collected:

Type of Sample Number Collected

Split-Spoon (with Standard Penetration Test) 73

Undisturbed Shelby Tube 4

Hand Grab Samples 1


3

Each sample was visually classified in the laboratory by a member of our geotechnical engineering staff. The geotechnical engineering properties of the strata were evaluated by the following tests:

Type of Test Number Conducted

Natural Moisture Content 78

Atterberg Limits 3

Percent Passing a No. 200 Sieve 3

Unconfined Compression 15

California Bearing Ratio (CBR) 2

pH-Lime Series 2

Sulfate Content 2

Organic Content 1

The results of all laboratory tests are presented in graphical or numerical form on the boring logs illustrated on Figures 2 through 13. A key to classification terms and symbols used on the logs is presented on Figure 14. The results of the laboratory and field testing are also tabulated on Figure 15 for ease of reference. Standard Penetration Test (SPT) results are noted as “blows per ft” on the boring logs and Figure 15, where “blows per ft” refers to the number of blows by a falling hammer required for 1 ft of penetration into the soil/weak rock (N-value). Where hard or dense materials were encountered, the tests were terminated at 50 blows even if one foot of penetration had not been achieved. When all 50 blows fall within the first 6 in. (seating blows), refusal “ref” for 6 in. or less will be noted on the boring logs and on Figure 15. In addition to the above listed testing and sampling, a bulk samples of the surficial soils were collected for use in a California Bearing Ratio (CBR) tests and pH-Lime Series testing. The results of the CBRs are presented on the Moisture-Density Relationship Curve presented on Figure 16 and the results of the pH-lime series test are presented on the pH-Lime Series Curve on Figure 17. Samples will be retained in our laboratory for 30 days after submittal of this report. Other arrangements may be provided at the request of the Client.

GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS SITE DESCRIPTION The project site is a vacated tract of land located north of Wilson Street and east of Camp Travis Road on the JBSA-Sam Houston Base in San Antonio, Texas. In general, the site is grass-covered and the topography generally slopes downward toward the southeast with vertical relief of about 16 ft across the site. Surface drainage is visually estimated to range from fair to poor.


4

There may be a significant number of buried structures and utilities throughout the area; it is also likely that abandoned foundations, structures, and utilities are present and not encountered during field operations. The presence of buried structures (old foundations, pavements, brick, abandoned utilities, etc.) should be anticipated during construction. GEOLOGY A review of the Geologic Atlas of Texas, San Antonio Sheet, indicates that this site is naturally underlain by Uvalde Gravel which can consist of clays, silts, and gravels including cobbles, chert, boulders, and caliche-cemented gravel. The Uvalde Gravels can be highly variable and can therefore result in highly variable conditions over relatively short distances. Key geotechnical engineering concerns for development supported on the Uvalde Gravels are the expansive nature of the clays, the consistency and/or relative density of the deposits, the absence/presence as well as thickness of potentially water-bearing gravels, and the absence/presence of cobbles, boulders and/or cemented materials. SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS Based on Basic Wind Speeds, Seismic Spectral Accelerations, Ground Snow Loads of the US Army Corps of Engineers Southwestern Division Architectural and Engineering Instruction Manual (CESWD-AEIM), the Spectral Accelerations for JBSA-Sam Houston, Texas are Ss = 0.12g and S1 = 0.04g. Based on the soil borings conducted for this investigation, the upper 100 feet of soil may be characterized as stiff soil. Hence, the Site is classified as Class D. STRATIGRAPHY The subsurface stratigraphy at this site can generally be described as localized fill material (in Borings CTB-3 and CTB-6) overlying dark brown clay which in turn is underlain by tan clay. The tan clay gradually transitions to a blocky, tan and gray clay. Gravel was encountered in a number of our borings at variable depths and thicknesses within both the tan clays and the tan and gray clays. The boring logs should be consulted for more specific stratigraphic information. Each stratum has been designated by grouping soils that possess similar physical and engineering characteristics. The lines designating the interfaces between strata on the boring logs represent approximate boundaries. Transitions between strata may be gradual. GROUNDWATER Groundwater was not observed in the borings either during or immediately upon completion of the drilling operations. All borings remained dry during the field exploration phase. However, it is likely for groundwater to exist beneath this site at shallow depths on a transient basis following periods of precipitation. Fluctuations in groundwater levels occur due to variation in rainfall and surface water run-off. The construction process itself may also cause variations in the groundwater level.


5

FOUNDATION ANALYSIS EXPANSIVE SOIL-RELATED MOVEMENTS The anticipated ground movements due to swelling of the underlying soils at the site were estimated for slab-on-grade construction using the empirical procedure, Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Tex-124-E, Method for Determining the Potential Vertical Rise (PVR). PVR values ranging from 3-1/4 to 3-3/4 in. were estimated for the stratigraphic conditions encountered in our borings. A surcharge load of 1 psi (concrete slab and aggregate layer), an active zone of 15 ft, and dry moisture conditions were assumed in estimating the above PVR values. The TxDOT method of estimating expansive soil-related movements is based on empirical correlations utilizing the measured plasticity indices and assuming typical seasonal fluctuations in moisture content. If desired, other methods of estimating expansive soil-related movements are available, such as estimations based on swell tests and/or soil-suction analyses. However, the performance of these tests and the detailed analysis of expansive soil-related movements were beyond the scope of the current study. It should also be noted that actual movements can exceed the calculated PVR values due to isolated changes in moisture content (such as due to leaks, landscape watering....) or if water seeps into the soils to greater depths than the assumed active zone depth due to deep trenching or excavations. Overexcavation and Select Fill Replacement To reduce expansive soil-related movements in at-grade construction, a portion of the upper highly expansive subgrade clays in the proposed building area can be removed by overexcavating and backfilling with a suitable select fill material. On the basis of the preliminary site grading plan, we understand that approximately 5 ft of fills and 3 ft of cut are required to achieve the planned Finished Floor Elevation. Overexcavation and select fill replacement in conjunction with a surcharge addition (to raise the finished floor) was considered to reduce PVR values. Provided in the following, PVR values have been estimated for various elevations of overexcavation and select fill replacement resulting in final grades to achieve the FFE of 748.6 ft. Recommendations for the selection and placement of select backfill materials are addressed in a subsequent section of this report.

Approximate Elevation of Overexcavation

(ft)

Estimated

PVR (in.)

748 3-3/4

746 2-1/2

744 2

742 1-3/4

740 1-1/2

738 1-1/4

736 1


6

We recommend that clay material be removed from within and 5 ft around the proposed building area to the overexcavation depth. To maintain the estimated PVR values, subsequent fill placed in the building area should consist of select fill material in accordance with the Select Fill section of this report. If revised site grading plans include raising the existing ground surface, the added surcharge load will assist in reducing the expansive soil-related movements. We estimate the PVR values will be reduced by about 1/4 in. for each 1 ft of granular select fill placed above El 748.6 ft. Reducing the overexcavation to approximately Elevation 740 (and replacing with aggregate select fill) will have an estimated differential soil related movement of approximately 3/4 in. The structural engineer should evaluate to if this differential movement is tolerable. As an alternative to overexcavation and select fill placement, the floor slab can be structurally suspended with a positive void space of at least 12 in. Additional floor slab recommendations are discussed in subsequent sections of this report.

Chemical Treatment Another option that may be considered to reduce potential vertical movements for the proposed improvements is chemical treatment of the natural expansive subgrade soils. Proprietary potassium-based, aqueous solutions have been used successfully on several projects similar to the one proposed. Tests conducted by RKCI on soil samples obtained from project sites after chemical treatment have demonstrated favorable reductions in swell potential of the treated clays. Based on our experience this chemical treatment process/technique provides an additional option for managing highly plastic, expansive clay soils. Since the chemical injection spacing and quantities can be varied to achieve different swell reduction results, no specific application recommendations can be provided. These factors impact not only the swell reduction but also the cost of the treatment process. If this method is to be considered at this site, the Owner should arrange a meeting as early as possible with personnel from RKCI, the chemical treatment contractor, the structural engineer, architect, and the Owner’s representatives. The purpose of the meeting would be to establish the required depth of treatment, feasible reductions in post-injection swell potential, the required application process, and acceptance criteria. Drainage Considerations When overexcavation and select fill replacement is selected as a method to reduce the potential for expansive soil-related movements at any site, considerations of surface and subsurface drainage may be crucial to construction and adequate foundation performance of the soil-supported structures. Filling an excavation in relatively impervious plastic clays with relatively pervious select fill material creates a “bathtub” beneath the structure, which can result in ponding or trapped water within the fill unless good surface and subsurface drainage is provided. Water entering the fill surface during construction or entering the fill exposed beyond the building lines after construction may create problems with fill moisture control during compaction and increased access for moisture to the underlying expansive clays both during and after construction. Several surface and subsurface drainage design features and construction precautions can be used to limit problems associated with fill moisture. These features and precautions may include but are not limited to the following:

• Installing berms or swales on the uphill side of the construction area to divert surface runoff away from the excavation/fill area during construction;


7

• Sloping of the top of the subgrade with a minimum downward slope of 1.5 percent out to the base of a dewatering trench located beyond the building perimeter;

• Sloping the surface of the fill during construction to promote runoff of rain water to drainage features until the final lift is placed;

• Sloping of a final, well maintained, impervious clay or pavement surface (downward away from the building) over the select fill material and any perimeter drain extending beyond the building lines, with a minimum gradient of 6 in. in 5 ft;

• Constructing final surface drainage patterns to prevent ponding and limit surface water infiltration at and around the building perimeter;

• Locating the water-bearing utilities, roof drainage outlets and irrigation spray heads outside of the select fill and perimeter drain boundaries; and

• Raising the elevation of the ground level floor slab. Details relative to the extent and implementation of these considerations must be evaluated on a project-specific basis by all members of the project design team. Many variables that influence fill drainage considerations may depend on factors that are not fully developed in the early stages of design. For this reason, drainage of the fill should be given consideration at the earliest possible stages of the project.

FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS FOUNDATION OPTIONS It may be possible to support the structure on shallow foundations or a mat foundation. However, due to the relatively deep overexcavations to reduce expansive soil-related movements, consideration could be given to suspending the floor slabs and supporting the structures on drilled-and-underreamed piers. SITE GRADING Site grading plans can result in changes in almost all aspects of foundation recommendations. Based on the preliminary site grading plan provided to us on November 25, 2015, we understand that site grading plans at this site will include cuts and fills up to 6 feet. If site grading plans differ from those discussed in this report by more than plus or minus 1 ft, RKCI must be retained to review the site grading plans prior to bidding the project for construction. This will enable RKCI to provide input for any changes in our original recommendations that may be required as a result of site grading operations or other considerations. SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS The proposed structures may be founded on shallow foundations, on a ribbed/monolithic mat foundation, or a stiffened engineered beam and slab foundation, provided the selected foundation type can be designed to withstand the anticipated soil-related movements (see Expansive Soil-Related Movements) without impairing either the structural or the operational performance of the structures.


8

llowable Bearing Capacity We understand that the proposed building will create relatively light structural loads to be carried by the foundation systems. Hence, we anticipate that the monolithic mat foundation will have a contact pressure less than 2,000 psf. Therefore, the monolithic mat foundation may be designed for a net allowable bearing pressure of 2,000 psf or less (using a factor of safety of 3). In general, the mat foundation subgrade modulus is the relationship between foundation settlement and bearing pressure. Using the allowable bearing pressures provided herein (2,000 psf), mat foundations proportioned and constructed as recommended may have differential settlements of approximately 1/2 inch. Hence, a subgrade modulus of 27 pci may be used. Shallow foundations founded on compacted, select fill should be proportioned using the design parameters tabulated below.

Shallow Foundation Design Parameters

Minimum depth below final grade 18 in.

Minimum beam or strip footing width 12 in.

Minimum widened beam or spread footing width 18 in.

Maximum net allowable bearing pressure for grade beams or strip footings 2,500 psf

Maximum net allowable bearing pressure for widened beams or spread footings 3,000 psf

The above presented maximum allowable bearing pressures will provide a factor of safety of about 3, provided that fill is selected and placed as recommended in the Select Fill section of this report. Total settlement is estimated to be 1 percent of the select fill pad. Differential settlement is estimated to be approximately 1/2 of the total settlement. Uplift Resistance Resistance to vertical force (uplift) is provided by the weight of the concrete footing plus the weight of the soil directly above the footing. For this site, it is recommended that the ultimate uplift resistance be based on total unit weights for soil and concrete of 120 pcf and 150 pcf, respectively. The calculated ultimate uplift resistance should be reduced by a factor of safety of 1.2 to calculate the allowable uplift resistance. Lateral Resistance Horizontal loads acting on spread footings will be resisted by passive earth pressure acting on one side of the footing and by base adhesion for footings bearing on engineered fills or natural materials. Resistance to sliding for foundations bearing on natural/compacted soil or select fill should be calculated utilizing an ultimate coefficient of friction of 0.30 or 0.35, respectively. The ultimate resistance for these foundations should be limited to 750 psf. An ultimate equivalent fluid pressure of 250 pcf may be utilized to determine the ultimate passive resistance, if required.


9

DRILLED-AND-UNDERREAMED PIERS Due to the highly expansive nature of the subgrade soils at this site, drilled-and-underreamed piers may be considered to support the structure. We recommend that piers extend to a minimum depth of 30 ft below the ground surface existing at the time of our study, or below the final ground surface, whichever is greater. The piers should be designed as end-bearing units using a maximum allowable bearing pressure of 10 ksf. This bearing pressure was evaluated using a calculated factor of safety of at least 2 with respect to the design shear strength. Furthermore, it has been our past experience that groundwater seepage may be encountered at this project site. Therefore, we recommend that the bid documents require the foundation contractor to specify unit costs for different lengths of casing that may be required. At the time of construction, deeper piers than anticipated may be required to allow construction of the underream beneath gravel layers that were encountered at variable depths in our borings. We anticipate that a majority of the gravel layers will be encountered well above the pier bearing depths. However, the owner should anticipate that deeper piers will be required in some areas. If gravel is encountered near the pier bearing elevations, deeper piers may be required in order to facilitate construction of the underreams below the temporary casing. Consequently, contractors bidding on the job should include unit costs for various depths of additional pier embedment. Pier Shaft Potential Uplift Forces The pier shafts will be subject to potential uplift forces if the surrounding expansive soils within the active zone are subjected to alternate drying and wetting conditions. The maximum potential uplift force acting on the shaft may be estimated by:

Fu = 85*D where:

Fu = uplift force in kips; and D = diameter of the shaft in feet.

Allowable Uplift Resistance Resistance to uplift forces exerted on the drilled piers will be provided by the sustained axial compressive force (dead load) plus the allowable uplift resistance provided by the soil. The resistance provided by the soil depends on the bearing capacity of the soils located above the pier underream (bell) and below the active zone. The allowable uplift resistance for underreamed piers founded at the depth recommended above may be estimated using:

Ru = 15*(B2 - D2)


10

where:

Ru = uplift resistance in kips; B = diameter of the underream in feet; and D = diameter of the shaft in feet.

We recommend that the bell-to-shaft diameter ratio be a minimum of 2, and not exceed 3. Reinforcing steel will be required in each pier shaft to withstand a net force equal to the uplift force minus the sustained compressive load carried by the pier. We recommend that each pier be reinforced to withstand this net force or an amount equal to 1 percent of the cross-sectional area of the shaft, whichever is greater. PIER SPACING Where possible, we recommend that the piers be spaced at a center to center distance of at least three bell-diameters for underreamed piers. Such spacing will not require a reduction in the load carrying capacity of the individual piers. If design and/or construction restraints require that piers be spaced closer than the recommended three bell diameters, RKCI must re-evaluate the allowable bearing capacities presented above for the individual piers. Reductions in load carrying capacities may be required depending upon individual loading and spacing conditions. LATERAL RESISTANCE Resistance to lateral loads and the expected pier behavior under the applied loading conditions will depend not only on subsurface conditions, but also on loading conditions, the pier size, and the engineering properties of the pier. Once pier sizes, concrete strength, and reinforcement are finalized, piers should be analyzed to determine the resulting lateral deflection, maximum bending moment, and ultimate bending moment. This type of analysis is typically performed utilizing a computer analysis program and usually requires a trial and error procedure to appropriately size the piers and meet project tolerances. To assist the design engineer in this procedure, we are providing the following soil parameters for use in analysis. These parameters are in accordance with the input requirements of one of the more commonly used computer programs for laterally loaded piles, the LPile program. If a different program is used for analysis, different parameters and limitations may be required than what were assumed in selecting the parameters given below. Thus, if a program other than LPile is used, RKCI must be notified of the analysis method, so that we can review and revise our recommendations if required. Evaluating the lateral resistance on different pier sizes is outside our scope of work at this time.


11

The soil-related parameters required for input into the LPile program are summarized in the tables below:

Assumed Behavior for Analysis

Estimated Elevation

(ft) c

(psf) ks

(pci)

Ɛ50 γ’

(pcf)

Stiff Clay without free water (Reese) 748 -735 1,000 100 0.01 57.6

Stiff Clay without free water (Reese) 735 – 700 3,000 1,000 0.005 72

Where: c = undrained cohesion

ks = p-y modulus (static) Ɛ 50 = strain factor γ’ = effective unit weight

The parameters presented in the above table do not include factors of safety. Per the general procedures of Section 1810.3.3.2 of the IBC 2012 edition, the allowable lateral capacity shall not exceed one-half of the lateral load that produces a lateral movement of 1-inch at the ground surface. It should be noted that where piers are spaced closer than three shaft diameters center to center, a modification factor should be applied to the p-y curves to account for a group effect. We recommend the following p-Multipliers for the corresponding center to center pier spacings.

Spacing (in shaft diameters)

p-Multiplier

3 1.0

2 0.75

1 0.50 GRADE BEAMS We recommend that the grade beams interconnecting the piers be structurally suspended due to the anticipated ground movements. A positive void space of at least 12 in., preferably more, should be provided between the soffits of grade beams and the underlying soils. FLATWORK AND FLOOR SLABS It should be noted that ground-supported flatwork such as pavements, as well as buried piping, will be subject to the same magnitude of potential soil-related movements as discussed previously (see Expansive Soil-Related Movement section). Thus, where these types of elements abut rigid foundations or isolated structures, differential movements should be anticipated. As a minimum, we recommend that flexible joints or connections be provided where such elements abut the main structure to allow for differential movement at these locations. Slabs may be designed assuming a vertical subgrade modulus of 100 pci or less.


12

For a shallow foundation system to be considered, we recommend that the building pad subgrade be modified, overexcavated and replaced as discussed previously. The floor slab may be constructed on the select structural fill building pad and isolated from the foundations supporting the building superstructure. Two alternatives are available to construct the floor slab system for pier supported structures. The Owner may select the alternative best satisfying the required performance criteria.

Alternative No. 1: Floor slabs which have high performance criteria or which are movement sensitive in nature should be structurally suspended because of the anticipated ground movements. A positive void space of at least 12 in., preferably more, should be provided between the slab and the underlying soils (see also Crawl Space Considerations). Areas containing critical entry/exit points, such as doorways, should consider using a suspended system to relieve those areas of heave stresses caused by expansive soils. Alternative No. 2: Floor slabs within the superstructure may be ground supported provided the anticipated movements discussed under the Expansive Soil-Related Movements section of this report will not impair the performance of the floor, frame, or roof systems. This alternative is recommended as an option provided that the owners and the design team agree that the floor slab movements can be controlled within acceptable structural and operational tolerances using the overexcavation and select fill replacement options presented in this report. If these movements are considered excessive then this floor slab should be structurally suspended with a permanent void space as recommended for the other floors of these structures.

If differential movements between the slab and the structure are objectionable, soil-supported floor slabs could be dowelled to the perimeter grade beams. Dowelled slabs that are subjected to heaving will typically crack and develop a plastic hinge along a line which will be approximately 5 to 10 ft inside and parallel to the grade beams. Slabs cast independent of the grade beams, interior columns and partitions should experience minimum cracking, but may create difficulties at critical entry points such as doors and may impact interior partitions that are secured to exterior walls.

Regardless of the alternative selected, and where potential moisture penetrating from underneath the slab is objectionable, we recommend that a vapor barrier (6-mil or thicker) comprised of polyethylene or polyvinylchloride (PVC) sheeting be placed between the supporting soils and the concrete floor slab.

RETAINING STRUCTURES Retaining walls may be used to accommodate the proposed grade changes. The following sections provide general information for evaluating lateral earth pressures, backfill compaction and drainage, for the retaining walls, if used. LATERAL EARTH PRESSURES Equivalent fluid density values for computation of lateral soil pressures acting on retaining walls were evaluated for various types of backfill materials that may be placed behind the retaining walls. These


13

values, as well as corresponding lateral earth pressure coefficients and estimated unit weights, are presented below in preferential order for use as backfill materials.

Back Fill Type

Estimated Total Unit

Weight (pcf)

Active Condition At Rest Condition

Earth Pressure

Coefficient, ka

Equivalent Fluid Density

(pcf)

Earth Pressure

Coefficient, ko

Equivalent Fluid Density

(pcf)

Washed Gravel 135 0.29 40 0.45 60

Crushed Limestone 145 0.24 35 0.38 55

Clean Sand 120 0.33 40 0.5 60

Pit Run Clayey Gravels or Sands 135 0.32 45 0.48 65

Inorganic Clays of Low to Medium Plasticity (Liquid Limit less than 40 percent)

120 0.40 50 0.55 65

The values tabulated above under “Active Conditions” pertain to flexible retaining walls free to tilt outward as a result of lateral earth pressures. For rigid, non-yielding walls the values under “At-Rest Conditions” should be used. The values presented above assume the surface of the backfill materials to be level. Sloping the surface of the backfill materials will increase the surcharge load acting on the structures. The above values also do not include the effect of surcharge loads such as construction equipment, vehicular loads, or future storage near the structures. Nor do the values account for possible hydrostatic pressures resulting from groundwater seepage entering and ponding within the retained backfill materials. As discussed later, the walls should be provided with a drain system to allow for the dissipation of water. Surcharge loads and groundwater pressures should be considered in designing any structures subjected to lateral pressures. The on-site clays exhibit significant shrink/swell characteristics. The use of clay soils as backfill against the proposed retaining structures is not recommended. These soils generally provide higher design active earthen pressures, as indicated above, but may also exert additional active pressures associated with swelling. Controlling the moisture and density of these materials during placement will help reduce the likelihood and magnitude of future active pressures due to swelling, but this is no guarantee. BACKFILL COMPACTION Placement and compaction of backfill behind the retaining walls will be critical, particularly at locations where backfill will support adjacent near-grade foundations and/or flatwork. If the backfill is not properly compacted in these areas, the adjacent foundations/flatwork can be subject to settlement. To reduce potential settlement of adjacent foundations/flatwork, the backfill materials should be placed and compacted as recommended in the Select Fill section of this report. Each lift or layer of the backfill should be tested during the backfilling operations to document the degree of compaction. Within at least a 5-ft zone of the wall backside, we recommend that compaction be accomplished using hand-


14

guided compaction equipment capable of achieving the maximum density in a series of 3 to 5 passes. Thinner loose lifts may be required to achieve the required level of compaction. DRAINAGE The use of drainage systems is a positive design step toward reducing the possibility of hydrostatic pressure acting against the retaining structures. Drainage may be provided by the use of a drain trench and pipe. The drain pipe should consist of a slotted, heavy duty, corrugated polyethylene pipe and should be installed and bedded according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. The drain trench should be filled with gravel (meeting the requirements of ASTM D 448 coarse concrete aggregate Size No. 57 or 67) and extend from the base of the structure to within 2 ft of the top of the structure. The bottom of the drain trench will provide an envelope of gravel around the pipe with minimum dimensions consistent with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. The gravel should be wrapped with a suitable geotextile fabric (such as Mirafi 140N or equivalent) to help minimize the intrusion of fine-grained soil particles into the drain system. The pipe should be sloped and equipped with clean-out access fittings consistent with state-of-the-practice plumbing procedures. As an alternative to a full-height gravel drain trench behind the proposed retaining structures, consideration may be given to utilizing a manufactured geosynthetic material for wall drainage. A number of products are available to control hydrostatic pressures acting on earth retaining structures, including Amerdrain (manufactured by American Wick Drain Corp.), Miradrain (manufactured by Mirafi, Inc.), Enkadrain (manufactured by American Enka Company), and Geotech Insulated Drainage Panel (manufactured by Geotech Systems Corp.). The geosynthetics are placed directly against the retaining structures and are hydraulically connected to the gravel envelope located at the base of the structures. Weepholes may be provided along the length of the proposed retaining structures, if desired, in addition to one of the two alternative drainage measures presented above. Based on our experience, weepholes, as the only drainage measure, often become clogged with time and do not provide the required level of drainage from behind retaining structures. We recommend that RKCI review the final retaining structure drainage design before construction. GLOBAL STABILITY ANALYSES Global stability analyses were not a part of our scope of work and were therefore not performed for any retaining walls. A global stability analysis for any wall requires details regarding the wall type and the specific site topography at the wall location. Often wall designers provide a global stability analysis for their wall designs. If this is not the case with this project then RKCI can be retained at a later date to evaluate the global stability for any proposed retaining walls. DETENTION POND OR PONDS The clays at this site are highly plastic. These types of clays exhibit very low hydraulic conductivity values, which are usually on the order of 1x10-6 cm/sec or less1. Infiltration rates in these types of clays are also low, and decrease over the duration of the infiltration. This is especially true if the soil dries and cracks form at the surface. In this case, the initial infiltration will be relatively higher and the rate will decrease as

1 Braja M. Das, Principles of Geotechnical Engineering, Sixth Edition (Stamford, CT: Cengage Learning, 2006), 160.


15

the material absorbs water, expands, and the cracks close. Generally, a pond constructed in this material will drain very slowly. An infiltration rate of approximately 0.1 cm/hr may be estimated for the system constructed at this site. However, zones of granular materials with higher infiltration rates may be encountered in the side walls and base of the pond. If the higher infiltration rate materials are a concern, we can assist in evaluating ways of mitigating these materials. PERMANENT SLOPES The stability of permanent slopes depends on many factors, including the height and geometry of the slopes, the types of soils contained in the slopes, effects of groundwater, and any surface pressures present. In general, permanent cut and fill slopes, constructed at 1V:3H (1 vertical on 3 horizontal) have been observed to perform satisfactorily. Therefore, it is our opinion that slopes should be constructed at 1V:3H or flatter. Fill slopes should be constructed by extending the compacted fill beyond the planned profile of the slope and then trimming the slope to the desired configuration. Cut slopes can be designed similar to fill slopes. However, the potential for sloughing and/or general slope failure increases with an increase in the steepness and depth of cut, particularly if low strength soil occurs in or near the base of the slope.

FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS SITE DRAINAGE Drainage is an important key to the successful performance of any foundation. Good surface drainage should be established prior to and maintained after construction to help prevent water from ponding within or adjacent to the building foundation and to facilitate rapid drainage away from the building foundation. Failure to provide positive drainage away from the structure can result in localized differential vertical movements in soil supported foundations and floor slabs (which can in turn result in cracking in the sheetrock partition walls, and shifting of ceiling tiles, as well as improper operation of windows and doors). Current ordinances, in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), may dictate maximum slopes for walks and drives around and into new buildings. These slope requirements can result in drainage problems for buildings supported on expansive soils. We recommend that, on all sides of the building, the maximum permissible slope be provided away from the building. Also to help control drainage in the vicinity of the structure, we recommend that roof/gutter downspouts and landscaping irrigation systems not be located adjacent to the building foundation. Where a select fill overbuild is provided outside of the floor slab/foundation footprint, the surface should be sealed with an impermeable layer (pavement or clay cap) to reduce infiltration of both irrigation and surface waters. Careful consideration should also be given to the location of water bearing utilities, as well as to provisions for drainage in the event of leaks in water bearing utilities. All leaks should be immediately repaired.


16

Other drainage and subsurface drainage issues are discussed in the Expansive Soil-Related Movements section of this report and under Pavement Construction Considerations. SITE PREPARATION Building areas and all areas to support select fill should be stripped of all vegetation, loose topsoil, large rocks, abandoned structures, utilities, associated utility backfill, existing fill and deleterious material. Furthermore, as discussed in a previous section of this report, we recommend that the estimated PVR be reduced, through overexcavation and fill replacement, to a level that will not impair either the structural or operational performance of the structure. Beyond the building pad footprint, existing utilities and trenches that are not removed should be properly abandoned. This would include grouting abandoned pipes and sealing off granular fill in utility trenches to prevent the migration and seepage of water into the building pad of the new building. Exposed subgrades should be thoroughly proofrolled in order to locate any weak, compressible zones. A fully-loaded dump truck or a similar heavily-loaded piece of construction equipment should be used for planning purposes. Proofrolling operations should be observed by the Geotechnical Engineer or his representative to document subgrade condition and preparation. Weak or soft areas identified during proofrolling should be removed and replaced with suitable, compacted on-site clays, free of organics, oversized materials, and degradable or deleterious materials. Upon completion of the proofrolling operations and just prior to fill placement or slab construction, the exposed subgrade should be moisture conditioned by scarifying to a minimum depth of 6 in. and recompacting to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density determined from TxDOT, Tex-114-E, Compaction Test. The moisture content of the subgrade should be maintained within the range of optimum moisture content to 3 percentage points above optimum moisture content until permanently covered. SELECT FILL Materials used as select fill for final site grading preferably should be crushed stone or gravel aggregate. Recommendations for select fill materials are provided below.

Treated Onsite Materials –Lime/cement/super slurry treatment of the onsite soils may be considered in reducing the soil plasticity index (TxDOT Item 260 for Lime and Item 275 for cement). A sufficient quantity of product should be mixed with the subgrade soils to reduce the soil-product mixture plasticity index to approximately 15 or less. We estimate that approximately 4 percent lime and 6 percent cement by dry unit weight be assumed for treatment. If cement treatment is selected, the mellowing period may be reduced to 24 hours prior to placing subsequent lifts. The final lift shall be cured for a minimum of 48 hours prior to placement of building foundation.


17

Alternatively super slurry treatment can be used to reduce the PI and increase the soil stiffness. However, this is a proprietary product and the supplier should be contacted to evaluate the appropriate dosage rate. For this process, the contractor should allow a minimum of 12 hours, preferably 24 hours, before placing subsequent lifts.

We recommend that during site grading operations that additional laboratory testing be performed to determine the appropriate treatment dosage rate and concentration of soluble sulfates in the subgrade and imported soils. Imported Crushed Limestone Base – Imported crushed limestone base materials should be crushed stone or gravel aggregate. We recommend that materials specified for use as select fill meet the TxDOT 2004 Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges, Item 247, Flexible Base, Type A or B, Grades 1 or 2. Granular Pit Run Materials – Granular pit run materials should consist of GC, SC & combination soils (clayey gravels), as classified according to the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). Alternative select fill materials shall have a maximum liquid limit not exceeding 40, a plasticity index between 7 and 15, and a maximum particle size not exceeding 4 inch. In addition, if these materials are utilized, grain size analyses and Atterberg Limits must be performed during placement at a rate of one test each per 5,000 cubic yards of material due to the high degree of variability associated with pit-run materials. Low PI Materials – Low PI materials should consist of CL clays, as classified according to the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). Alternative select fill materials shall have a maximum liquid limit not exceeding 40, a plasticity index between 7 and 15, and a maximum particle size not exceeding 4 inch. In addition, if these materials are utilized, grain size analyses and Atterberg Limits must be performed during placement at a rate of one test each per 5,000 cubic yards of material due to the high degree of variability associated with these materials.

Select fill should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8 in. in thickness and compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum density as determined by TxDOT, Tex-113-E, Compaction Test. The moisture content of the fill should be maintained within the range of 2 percentage points below to 2 percentage points above the optimum moisture content until final compaction for imported crushed limestone base or granular pit run materials. For low PI materials, the moisture content of the fill should be maintained within the range of optimum to plus 3 percentage points above the optimum moisture content until final compaction. Potentially expansive clays (PI greater than 15) should not be used as select fill unless the clay is treated with lime or cement to reduce the plasticity index. If lime or cement treatment of the highly expansive clays is considered as an option, we recommend performing additional laboratory testing to evaluate the optimum lime/cement content and sulfate content. Alternatively, untreated material may be used in areas where potential vertical movements will not adversely impact either the structural or operational tolerances for the individual foundations, slabs, walls, or pavements for which this material is being considered.


18

SHALLOW FOUNDATION EXCAVATIONS Shallow foundation excavations should be observed by the Geotechnical Engineer or his representative prior to placement of reinforcing steel and concrete. This is necessary to verify that the bearing soils at the bottom of the excavations are similar to those encountered in our borings and that excessive loose materials and water are not present in the excavations. If soft pockets of soil are encountered in the foundation excavations, they should be removed and replaced with a compacted non-expansive fill material or lean concrete up to the design foundation bearing elevations. DRILLED PIERS Each drilled pier excavation must be examined by an RKCI representative who is familiar with the geotechnical aspects of the soil stratigraphy, the structural configuration, foundation design details and assumptions, prior to placing concrete. This is to observe that:

• The shaft and/or bell has been excavated to the specified dimensions at the correct depth established by the previously mentioned criteria;

• The bell is concentric with the pier shaft; • The shaft has been drilled plumb within specified tolerances along its total length; and • Excessive cuttings, buildup and soft, compressible materials have been removed from

the bottom of the excavation. Reinforcement and Concrete Placement Reinforcing steel should be checked for size and placement prior to concrete placement. Placement of concrete should be accomplished as soon as possible after excavation to reduce changes in the moisture content or the state of stress of the foundation materials. No foundation element should be left open overnight without concreting. Temporary Casing Groundwater seepage was not observed in the test borings at the time of our subsurface exploration. However, based on our experience groundwater seepage and/or side sloughing is likely to be encountered at the time of construction, depending on climatic conditions prevalent at the time of construction. Therefore, we recommend that the bid documents require the foundation contractor to specify unit costs for different lengths of casing that may be required. EXCAVATION SLOPING AND BENCHING If utility trenches or other excavations extend to or below a depth of 5 ft below construction grade, the contractor or others shall be required to develop a trench safety plan to protect personnel entering the trench or trench vicinity. The collection of specific geotechnical data and the development of such a plan, which could include designs for sloping and benching or various types of temporary shoring, are beyond the scope of the current study. Any such designs and safety plans shall be developed in accordance with current OSHA guidelines and other applicable industry standards.


19

To assist in preparing an excavation safety plan, we have classified the soils encountered at this site based on the data collected during this study. The clays encountered at this site are classified as Type “B” soils under current Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations pertaining to excavations. In excavations penetrating these soils, the sloping and benching schemes specified for Type “B” soils under the OSHA regulations require that the excavation sidewalls be sloped no steeper than 1 Horizontal : 1 Vertical. EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Our boring logs are not intended for use in determining construction means and methods and may therefore be misleading if used for that purpose. We recommend that earth-work and utility contractors interested in bidding on the work perform their own tests in the form of test pits to determine the quantities of the different materials to be excavated, as well as the preferred excavation methods and equipment for this site. CRAWL SPACE CONSIDERATIONS If the structurally suspended floor system described as Alternative No. 1 under the Flatwork and Floor Slab section of this report is selected, several special design issues should be considered for the resulting subfloor crawl space. These issues are discussed below. Ventilation Observations by members of our firm of open crawl spaces have indicated a need for adequate subfloor ventilation for suspended floor systems. Such ventilation helps promote evaporation of subgrade moisture which may accumulate in spite of special surface and subsurface drainage features. As a minimum, free flowing passive vents may need to be installed along the perimeter beam to provide cross ventilation. If structural configurations will limit the free flow of air through passive vents, forced air, power vents should be installed. All vents should be designed such that they will not allow the drainage of surface water into the crawl space. Below Slab Utilities A minimum clearance of 12 in. has been recommended between both the grade beams and floor slab and the underlying finished subgrade should a suspended floor system be employed. Such a minimum clearance is also recommended between the subgrade and any utilities which may be suspended from the underside of the floor. This clearance will allow swell-related subgrade movements without damaging the utilities. It is recommended that the utility clearance not be provided by the addition of narrow trenches running parallel to and immediately below the utilities, unless proper slopes and drainage outlets are provided to prevent ponding of water in the trenches. Drainage As discussed throughout this report, positive drainage is a key factor in the long term performance of any foundation. This is not only critical around the perimeter of the structure, but also in any subfloor crawl


20

spaces. In crawl areas, surface drainage should be established that will direct water away from and will prevent water from ponding adjacent to piers. This positive drainage should be maintained both prior to and after construction. Compaction control of the backfill around the perimeter of the building following the placement of soil retainer blocks is critical to the drainage away from the building following construction. Materials for the backfill around the perimeter of the building should be the on-site clays. These materials should be compacted in uniformly thin lifts (8-inch maximum loose thickness) to at least 90 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by TxDOT Test Method TEX-114-E. These clays should be placed and compacted at optimum to plus 3 percent above optimum moisture content. Compaction by hand operated mechanical tampers will help to avoid damage to the soil retainer blocks. Following backfilling operations the soil retainer blocks should be checked to see that they have not been broken or collapsed during the compaction operations. Any soil retainer blocks that are broken or collapsed should be repaired or replaced. Carton Forms When carton forms are used to form subfloor void spaces, the forms often get wet or sometimes absorb water from humid air. This can result in collapse of the forms during the placement of concrete, thus diminishing the design void space. Conversely, if the carton forms are too strong and do not decompose sufficiently with time, they may not collapse as soil heave occurs, resulting in heave damage to the floor slab. Where there is sufficient moisture to cause the appropriate deterioration after construction, there may be a resulting moisture problem in the floor slab as a result of poor ventilation and the accumulation of condensation within the resulting unventilated void space. The lack of ventilation may also result in increased soil movements that will diminish the design void space. For these reasons, we recommend that where possible, consideration be given to methods other than the use of carton forms to form the recommended void space beneath floor slabs. If project specifics require the use of carton forms, then as a minimum, care should be taken to ensure that the carton forms are designed for use in the project location, and that carton forms are properly stored, protected, and installed during construction. INTERIOR WALLS It is not uncommon for cracking to occur in interior partition walls that are supported by a “floating” floor slab and structurally tied to either an interior column or an exterior wall supported by deep foundations. This should be taken into account during the design phase of the project if a “floating” slab foundation is used to support the proposed building. UTILITIES Utilities which project through slab-on-grade, slab-on-fill, “floating” floor slabs, or any other rigid unit should be designed with either some degree of flexibility or with sleeves. Such design features will help reduce the risk of damage to the utility lines as vertical movements occur. These types of slabs will generally be constructed as monolithic, grid type beam and slab foundations or as a “floating” floor slab described as Alternate No. 2 under the Floor Slab section of this report.


21

Our experience indicates that significant settlement of backfill can occur in utility trenches, particularly when trenches are deep, when backfill materials are placed in thick lifts with insufficient compaction, and when water can access and infiltrate the trench backfill materials. The potential for water to access the backfill is increased where water can infiltrate flexible base materials due to insufficient penetration of curbs, and at sites where geological features can influence water migration into utility trenches (such as fractures within a rock mass or at contacts between rock and clay formations). It is our belief that another factor which can significantly impact settlement is the migration of fines within the backfill into the open voids in the underlying free-draining bedding material. To reduce the potential for settlement in utility trenches, we recommend that consideration be given to the following:

• All backfill materials should be placed and compacted in controlled lifts appropriate for the type of backfill and the type of compaction equipment being utilized and all backfilling procedures should be tested and documented.

• Curbs should completely penetrate base materials and be installed to a sufficient depth to reduce water infiltration beneath the curbs into the pavement base materials.

• Consideration should be given to wrapping free-draining bedding gravels with a geotextile fabric (similar to Mirafi 140N) to reduce the infiltration and loss of fines from backfill material into the interstitial voids in bedding materials.

PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS

Recommendations for both flexible and rigid pavements are presented in this report. The Owner and/or design team may select either pavement type depending on the performance criteria established for the project. In general, flexible pavement systems have a lower initial construction cost as compared to rigid pavements. However, maintenance requirements over the life of the pavement are typically much greater for flexible pavements. This typically requires regularly scheduled observation and repair, as well as overlays and/or other pavement rehabilitation at approximately one-half to two-thirds of the design life. Rigid pavements are generally more "forgiving", and therefore tend to be more durable and require less maintenance after construction. For either pavement type, drainage conditions will have a significant impact on long term performance, particularly where permeable base materials are utilized in the pavement section. Drainage considerations are discussed in more detail in a subsequent section of this report. SUBGRADE CONDITIONS We have assumed the pavement subgrade will consist of compacted on-site or imported soils. The CBR for on-site soils were measured using ASTM D 1883 Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory-Compacted Soils and the average CBR was calculated to be approximately 5.5 using the soaked sample methodology. Swell was also measured as part of the CBR procedure and was determined to be approximately 1 percent. Based on these results and our experience with the soils in this area, we have assumed a design CBR value of 5.0 for use in our pavement section analysis. If soils


22

are imported for the purpose of constructing the pavements then imported materials must be selected that have a CBR value of at least 5.0. If lower quality fill materials are utilized, the pavement sections will have to be increased based on the quality (tested CBR value) of the imported materials. SWELL/HEAVE POTENTIAL The subgrade soils at this site are classified as plastic to highly plastic, and the potential exists for the soils to expand or heave when water is introduced, causing the pavement to become rough or uneven over time. Pavement roughness is generally defined as an expression of irregularities in the pavement surface. Pavement heave can be reduced through various measures but cannot be totally eliminated without full removal of the problematic soil. The following measures to reduce heaves are options and are not required as part of the pavement thickness design presented in the following sections.

• Soil Treatment with Lime, Cement, or Other Chemicals • Removal and Replacement of Moderate to High PI Soils • Drains or Barriers to Collect or Inhibit Moisture Infiltration

Soil treatment with lime (or other chemicals) is typically used to reduce the swelling potential of the upper portion of the pavement subgrade containing moderately plastic soils. Lime and water are mixed with the top 8 to 12 inches (or possibly more) of the subgrade and allowed to mellow or cure for a period of time. After mellowing the soil-lime mixture is compacted to form a strong soil matrix that can improve pavement performance and potentially reduce soil heave. However, the chemical reaction between the calcium-based additives and the sulfates and/or sulfide minerals in the soil can create a heaving problem in the pavement. In addition, capturing water infiltration via French drains, pavement edge drains, or inhibiting water through the use of vertical moisture barriers would reduce the potential for heave since one important component of the heaving mechanism, water, would be reduced. Using geogrid is also another tool available that may help reduce the damage that heaving subgrades cause to flexible pavements and may be considered in addition to or as an alternative to other mitigation techniques. It should be noted that the pavement sections derived in the following sections are structurally adequate for the given traffic levels and subgrade strength, but do not consider the long-term effects of pavement roughness due to heave, which can only be addressed by the measures discussed in this section. DESIGN INFORMATION The following recommendations were prepared using the DARWin 3.1 software program which utilizes a procedure based on the 1993 “Guide for the Design of Pavement Structures” by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). At the time of this report, we did not have specific vehicular traffic loading and distribution information, so we have assumed different categories for the heavy-and light-duty pavements based on the UFC 3-250-01FA. Therefore, the Project Civil Engineer and/or Architect should review anticipated traffic loading and frequencies to verify that the assumed traffic loading and frequency is appropriate for the intended use of the facility. If loading conditions differ from those assumed in this report, RKCI should be notified so that we may revise our recommendations.


23

RIGID PAVEMENT Below we have provided recommendations for both heavy- and light-duty pavements for this project. The following input variables are utilized to design rigid pavements (commonly referred to as Portland Cement Concrete or PCC pavements) when using the procedures detailed in the 1993 AASHTO Guide for Design of Pavement Structures:

• Initial Serviceability = 4.5 • Terminal Serviceability = 2.0 • 28-Day Mean PCC Modulus of Rupture = 650 psi • 28-Day Mean Elastic Modulus of Slab = 4,000,000 psi • Mean Effective k-Value = 120 pci (based on estimated CBR value of 5.5) • Reliability Level = 85% • Overall Standard Deviation = 0.35 • Load Transfer Coefficient = 3.2 • Overall Drainage Coefficient = 0.9

Heavy-Duty Traffic The following recommendations were based on criteria UFC 3-250-01FA Category III Traffic Class F with design index 2 traffic containing not more than 1 percent trucks having three or more axles per day for 25-Year design life. The heavy-duty pavement section can be used for garbage dumpsters, entrances, driveways, and channelization. The following heavy-duty rigid pavement section may be considered:

Portland Cement Concrete Design - Cross Sections

Layer Description TxDOT Spec. Item

Layer Thickness

Heavy Duty Pavement PCC Surface

Compacted Subgrade Combined Total

360 260

7.0 in. 6.0 in. 13.0 in.

Light-Duty Traffic A light-duty pavement section may be utilized in areas which will only experience automobile traffic (i.e. Privately Owned Vehicles Parking Areas and Access Driveways). The following recommendations were based on criteria UFC 3-250-01FA Category II Traffic Class F with design index 2, traffic composed primarily of Privately Owned Vehicles, but may contain as much as 10 percent two-axle trucks for a design period of 25 years. We recommend that light-duty rigid pavement sections at this site consist of the following:

Portland Cement Concrete Design - Cross Sections

Layer Description TxDOT Spec. Item

Layer Thickness

Light Duty Pavement PCC Surface

Compacted Subgrade Combined Total

360 260

6.0 in. 6.0 in. 12.0 in.


24

Reinforced Pavement With effective preconstruction planning and proper construction practices, unreinforced pavements may be considered for the concrete pavements. However, if the concrete pavements are to be reinforced with welded wire mats or bar mats, we recommend the following reinforcement. As a minimum, Reinforced PCC surfaces should be reinforced with welded wire mats or bar mats. As a minimum, the welded wire mats should be 6 x 6 in., W4.0 x W4.0, and the bar mats should be No. 4 reinforcing bars spaced 16 in. on center in both directions. The concrete reinforcing should be placed approximately 1/3 the slab thickness below the surface of the slab, but not less than 2 in. The reinforcing should not extend across expansion joints. In accordance with UFC 3- 250-01 FA, odd-shaped slabs should be reinforced in two directions normal to each other using a minimum of 0.05 percent of steel in both directions. The entire area of the slab should be reinforced. An odd-shaped slab is considered to be one in which the longer dimension exceeds the shorter dimension by more than 25 percent or a slab which essentially is neither square nor rectangular. Joints Joints in concrete pavements aid in the construction and control the location and magnitude of cracks. Where practical, lay out the construction, expansion, control and sawed joints to form square panels, but not to exceed recommendations as given in the TxDOT Pavement Design Guide. The ratio of slab length-to-width should not exceed 1.25. Recommended joint spacings are 15 ft longitudinal and 15 ft transverse. All control joints should be formed or sawed to a depth of at least 1/4 the thickness of the concrete slab except for Joints between exterior slab on grade pavements and vertical surfaces of buildings and other vertical construction which require a full-depth expansion joint. Sawing of control joints should begin as soon as the concrete will not ravel, generally the day after placement. Control joints may be hand formed or formed by using a premolded filler. We recommend that all longitudinal and transverse construction joints be dowelled to promote load transfer. Expansion joints are needed to separate the concrete slab from fixed objects such as drop inlets, light standards and buildings. Expansion joint spacings are not to exceed a maximum of 75 ft and no expansion or construction joints should be located in a swale or drainage collection locations. If possible, the pavement should develop a minimum slope of 0.015 ft/ft to provide surface drainage. Reinforced concrete pavement should cure a minimum of 3 and 7 days before allowing automobile and truck traffic, respectively. FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT Below are recommendations for a light-duty flexible pavement option for this project. The following input variables are utilized to design hot mix asphalt pavements (commonly referred to as Asphaltic Cement Concrete or Asphalt pavements) when using the procedures detailed in the 1993 AASHTO Guide for Design of Pavement Structures:


25

• Performance Period = 20 Years. • Initial Serviceability = 4.2 • Terminal Serviceability = 2.0 • Roadbed Soil Resilient Modulus = 8,250 psi • Reliability Level = 70% • Overall Standard Deviation = 0.45

Based on the input variables for hot mix asphalt pavements design discussed above the design SN values, the minimum layer thicknesses and the optional pavement sections presented below are recommended.

Flexible Base Option Layer Description

Layer Thickness

Recommended SN Coeff.

S.N. Extension

Heavy-Duty Pavement

Type D Surface Course Aggregate Base Lime Stabilized Subgrade Compacted Subgrade Combined Total

3.0 in. 6.0 in. 7.0 in. 6.0 in.

22.0 in.

0.44 0.14 0.14 0.00

1.32 0.84 0.98 0.00 3.14

Light-Duty Pavement

Type D Surface Course* Aggregate Base Lime Stabilized Subgrade Compacted Subgrade Combined Total

1.5 in. 6.0 in. 7.0 in. 6.0 in.

20.5 in.

0.44 0.14 0.14 0.00

0.66 0.84 0.98 0.00 2.48

*If Type C Hot Mix Asphalt is used, the layer thickness needs to be increased to 2 in. Based on our experience, the reported sections often perform adequately; however, maintenance or an overlay is generally needed sooner than would be required for a thicker design section. Consideration could be given to adding additional asphalt (i.e. an additional 1 in.) or incorporating a geotextile or geogrid below the flexible base. These are options and are not required. The geogrid reinforcement should conform to TxDOT Type 2 geogrid, or an approved substitute. If geogrid is used in the provided options, we do not recommend reducing the report sections without further discussion with the design team. If clay fill is utilized for fill grading, it should be placed and compacted as discussed in the On-Site Clay Fill section of this report. For areas that require fill, the final 6 in. of fill should be lime treated (see Lime Treated Subgrade). If fill grading is not planned and clays remain in place, then lime treatment of the exposed clay subgrade should be performed in conjunction with the scarifying, moisture conditioning, and recompaction described in the Site Preparation section of this report. SUBGRADE PREPARATION Areas to receive fill or support pavements should be stripped of all vegetation and organic topsoil and the exposed subgrade should be proofrolled in accordance with the recommendations in the Site Preparation section under Foundation Construction Considerations.


26

After completion of the proofrolling operations and just prior to flexible base placement, the exposed subgrade should be moisture conditioned by scarifying to a minimum depth of 6 in. and recompacting to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density determined from the Texas Department of Transportation Compaction Test (TxDOT, Tex-114-E). The moisture content of the subgrade should be maintained within the range of optimum moisture content to 3 percentage points above optimum until permanently covered. DRAINAGE CONSIDERATIONS As with any soil-supported structure, the satisfactory performance of a pavement system is contingent on the provision of adequate surface and subsurface drainage. Insufficient drainage which allows saturation of the pavement subgrade and/or the supporting granular pavement materials will greatly reduce the performance and service life of the pavement systems. Surface and subsurface drainage considerations crucial to the performance of pavements at this site include (but are not limited to) the following:

1) Any known natural or man-made subsurface seepage at the site which may occur at sufficiently shallow depths as to influence moisture contents within the subgrade should be intercepted by drainage ditches or below grade French drains.

2) Final site grading should eliminate isolated depressions adjacent to curbs which may allow surface water to pond and infiltrate into the underlying soils. Curbs should completely penetrate base materials and should be installed to sufficient depth to reduce infiltration of water beneath the curbs.

3) Pavement surfaces should be maintained to help minimize surface ponding and to provide rapid sealing of any developing cracks. These measures will help reduce infiltration of surface water downward through the pavement section.

SOIL FILL We recommend that on-site soils be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8 in. in thickness and compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by TxDOT, Tex-114-E. The moisture content of the fill should be maintained within the range of optimum water content to 3 percentage points above the optimum water content until permanently covered. We recommend that fill materials be free of roots and other organic or degradable material. We also recommend that the maximum particle size not exceed 4 in. or one half the lift thickness, whichever is smaller. SUBGRADE TREATMENT Lime treatment of the subgrade soils should be in accordance with the TxDOT Standard Specifications, Item 260. A sufficient quantity of hydrated lime should be mixed with the subgrade soils to reduce the soil-lime mixture plasticity index to 15 or less. For estimating purposes, we recommend that 4 percent lime by dry weight of the soil be assumed for treatment. For construction purposes, we recommend that the optimum lime content of the subgrade soils be determined by laboratory testing. Lime-treated subgrade soils should be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density at a moisture content within the range of optimum moisture content to 3 percentage points above the optimum moisture content as determined by Tex-114-E.


27

It is recommended to perform additional laboratory testing to determine the concentration of soluble sulfates in the subgrade soils, in order to investigate the potential for a recently reported adverse reaction to lime in certain sulfate-containing soils. The adverse reaction, referred to as sulfate-induced heave, has been known to cause cohesive subgrade soils to swell in short periods of time, resulting in pavement heaving and possible failure. FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE The flexible base course should be crushed limestone conforming to TxDOT Standard Specifications, Item 247, Type A, Grades 1 or 2. Base course should be placed in lifts with a maximum thickness of 8 in. and compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density at a moisture content within the range of 2 percentage points below to 2 percentage points above the optimum moisture content as determined by Tex-113-E. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE The asphaltic concrete surface course should conform to TxDOT Standard Specifications, Item 340, Type D. Asphaltic material for the paving mixture should be asphaltic cement, viscosity grade AC-20, or performance grade PG64-22. The asphaltic concrete should be compacted to a minimum of 92 percent of the maximum theoretical specific gravity (Rice) of the mixture determined according to Test Method Tex-227-F. Pavement specimens, which shall be either cores or sections of asphaltic pavement, will be tested according to Test Method Tex-207-F. The nuclear-density gauge or other methods which correlate satisfactorily with results obtained from project roadway specimens may be used when approved by the Engineer. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the required roadway specimens at their expense and in a manner and at locations selected by the Engineer. Prime Coat And Tack Coat The prime coat shall be cut-back asphalt, grade MC-30, conforming to the requirements of TXDOT, Standard Spec, Item 300, Asphalts, Oils, Emulsions. Prime coat should be applied to the surface of the crushed limestone base coarse. The tack coat shall be cut-back asphalt, grade RC-250, or emulsified asphalt, grade SS-1, conforming to the requirements of TXDOT, Standard Specification, Item 300, Asphalts, Oils, Emulsions. Tack coat should be applied to all surfaces that contact new asphalt pavement. See additional requirements for prime coats in the appropriate Unified Facilities Code (UFC) Standard Specification for Asphaltic Concrete Materials. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE The Mr of concrete is a measure of the flexural strength of the concrete as determined by breaking concrete beam test specimens. A Mr of 650 psi at 28 days was used in the analysis The Portland cement concrete should be air entrained to result in a 4 percent plus/minus 1 percent air, should have a maximum slump of 5 inches. A liquid membrane-forming curing compound should be applied as soon as practical after broom finishing the concrete surface. The curing compound will help reduce the loss of water from the concrete. The reduction in the rapid loss in water will help reduce shrinkage cracking of the concrete.


28

MISCELLANEOUS PAVEMENT RELATED CONSIDERATIONS Drainage Considerations As with any soil-supported structure, the satisfactory performance of a pavement system is contingent on the provision of adequate surface and subsurface drainage. Insufficient drainage which allows saturation of the pavement subgrade and/or the supporting granular pavement materials will greatly reduce the performance and service life of the pavement systems. Surface and subsurface drainage considerations crucial to the performance of pavements at this site include (but are not limited to) the following:

• Any known natural or man-made subsurface seepage at the site which may occur at sufficiently shallow depths as to influence moisture contents within the subgrade should be intercepted by drainage ditches or below grade French drains.

• Final site grading should eliminate isolated depressions adjacent to curbs, which may allow surface water to pond and infiltrate into the underlying soils. Curbs should be installed to a sufficient depth to reduce infiltration of water beneath the curbs and into the pavement base materials.

• Pavement surfaces should be maintained to help minimize surface ponding and to provide rapid sealing of any developing cracks. These measures will help reduce infiltration of surface water downward through the pavement section.

Longitudinal Cracking It should be understood that asphalt pavement sections in highly expansive soil environments, such as those encountered at this site, can develop longitudinal cracking along unprotected pavement edges and along the wheel path. In the semi-arid climate of south central Texas this condition typically occurs along the unprotected edges of pavements where moisture fluctuation is allowed to occur over the lifetime of the pavements. Pavements that do not have a protective barrier to reduce moisture fluctuation of the highly expansive clay subgrade between the exposed pavement edge and that beneath the pavement section tend to develop longitudinal cracks 1 to 4 ft from the edge of the pavement. Once these cracks develop, further degradation and weakening of the underlying granular base may occur due to water seepage through the cracks. The occurrence of these cracks can be more prevalent in the absence of lateral restraint and embankments. This problem can best be addressed by providing either a horizontal or vertical moisture barrier at the unprotected pavement edge. At a minimum, we recommend that the curbs are constructed such that the depth of the curb extends through the entire depth of the granular base material and into the subgrade to act as a protective barrier against the infiltration of water into the granular base.


29

In most cases, a longitudinal crack does not immediately compromise the structural integrity of the pavement system. However, if left unattended, infiltration of surface water runoff into the crack will result in isolated saturation of the underlying base. This will result in pumping of the flexible base, which could lead to rutting, cracking, and pot-holes. For this reason, we recommend that the owner of the facility immediately seal the cracks and develop a periodic sealing program. Pavement Maintenance Regular pavement maintenance is critical in maintaining pavement performance over a period of several years. All cracks that develop in asphalt pavements should be regularly sealed. Areas of moderate to severe fatigue cracking (also known as alligator cracking) should be sawcut and removed. The underlying base should be checked for contamination or loss of support and any insufficiencies fixed or removed and the entire area patched. All cracks that develop in concrete pavements should be routed and sealed regularly. Joints in concrete pavements should be maintained to reduce the influx of incompressible materials that restrain joint movement and cause spalling and/or cracking. Other typical TxDOT or City of San Antonio maintenance techniques should be followed as required. Construction Traffic Construction traffic on prepared subgrade, granular base should be restricted as much as possible until the protective asphalt surface pavement is applied. Significant damage to the underlying layers resulting in weakening may occur if heavily loaded vehicles are allowed to use these areas.

CONSTRUCTION RELATED SERVICES CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS TESTING AND OBSERVATION SERVICES As presented in the attachment to this report, Important Information About Your Geotechnical Engineering Report, subsurface conditions can vary across a project site. The conditions described in this report are based on interpolations derived from a limited number of data points. Variations will be encountered during construction, and only the geotechnical design engineer will be able to determine if these conditions are different than those assumed for design. Construction problems resulting from variations or anomalies in subsurface conditions are among the most prevalent on construction projects and often lead to delays, changes, cost overruns, and disputes. These variations and anomalies can best be addressed if the geotechnical engineer of record, RKCI is retained to perform construction observation and testing services during the construction of the project. This is because:

• RKCI has an intimate understanding of the geotechnical engineering report’s findings and recommendations. RKCI understands how the report should be interpreted and can provide such interpretations on site, on the client’s behalf.

• RKCI knows what subsurface conditions are anticipated at the site.


30

• RKCI is familiar with the goals of the owner and project design professionals, having worked with them in the development of the geotechnical workscope. This enables RKCI to suggest remedial measures (when needed) which help meet the owner’s and the design teams’ requirements.

• RKCI has a vested interest in client satisfaction, and thus assigns qualified personnel whose principal concern is client satisfaction. This concern is exhibited by the manner in which contractors’ work is tested, evaluated and reported, and in selection of alternative approaches when such may become necessary.

• RKCI cannot be held accountable for problems which result due to misinterpretation of our findings or recommendations when we are not on hand to provide the interpretation which is required.

BUDGETING FOR CONSTRUCTION TESTING Appropriate budgets need to be developed for the required construction testing and observation activities. At the appropriate time before construction, we advise that RKCI and the project designers meet and jointly develop the testing budgets, as well as review the testing specifications as it pertains to this project. Once the construction testing budget and scope of work are finalized, we encourage a preconstruction meeting with the selected contractor to review the scope of work to make sure it is consistent with the construction means and methods proposed by the contractor. RKCI looks forward to the opportunity to provide continued support on this project, and would welcome the opportunity to meet with the Project Team to develop both a scope and budget for these services.

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

ATTACHMENTS

!? !?

!?

!?

!?

!?

!?

!?!? !?

!? !?

Camp

Travis

Road

Scott R

oad

STB-04STB-03

STB-02STB-01CTB-08

CTB-07CTB-06

CTB-05

CTB-04

CTB-03

CTB-02CTB-01

BORING LOCATION MAPBURGER KING AND POPEYE'S FORT SAM HOUSTON, TEXAS

PROJECT No.:ASA15-113--00

DRAWN BY:ISSUE DATE:

REVIEWED BY:CHECKED BY:

KRB12/02/2015

EJNSH

NOTE: This Drawing is Provided for Illustration Only, May Not be to Scale and is Not Suitable for Design or Construction Purposes

µLEGEND!? BORING

San Antonio§̈¦35

§̈¦10 §̈¦410

§̈¦10

§̈¦410£¤281

UV13

UV78

UV421

UV536

Bexar

SITE LOCATION MAP

S I T E

FIGURE1BEXAR

COUNTY

_̂

TBPE Firm Number 3257

12821 West Golden LaneSan Antonio, Texas 78249

(210)699-9090 TEL(210)699-6426 FAX

www.rkci.com

0 50 10025FEET

1 INCH = 100 FEET

SOURCE: Aerial Photography Obtained from the City of San Antonio (COSA) - 2013

CLAY, Firm to Very Stiff, Dark Brown, withgravel and chert

GRAVEL (Chert), Medium Dense, Tan, withclay

CLAY, Very Stiff to Hard, Tan, withcalcareous deposits

Boring Terminated

68

LOG OF BORING NO. CTB-1

PLA

STIC

ITY

IND

EX

SURFACE ELEVATION: 753 ft

Straight Flight Auger

% -2

00

DRILLINGMETHOD: LOCATION:

PLASTICLIMIT

LIQUIDLIMIT

WATERCONTENT

BLO

WS

PER

FT

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0

SHEAR STRENGTH, TONS/FT2

UN

IT D

RYW

EIG

HT,

pcf

N 29.44962; W 98.45100

NO

TE: T

HES

E LO

GS

SHO

ULD

NO

T BE

USE

D S

EPAR

ATEL

Y FR

OM

TH

E PR

OJE

CT R

EPO

RT

DEPTH DRILLED:DATE DRILLED:

DEPTH TO WATER:DATE MEASURED:

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SYM

BOL

SAM

PLES

Burger King and Popeye's RestaurantsAt Fort Sam HoustonSan Antonio, Texas

DRY12/29/2015

DEP

TH, F

T

10.0 ft12/29/2015

ASA15-113-002

PROJ. No.:FIGURE:

TBPE Firm Registration No. F-3257

7

26

24

39

26

CLAY, Firm, Dark Brown, with gravel andchert

CLAY, Stiff to Very Stiff, Tan, with gravel,chert and calcareous deposits

Boring Terminated

53


PLA

STIC

ITY

IND

EX



% -2

00


PLASTICLIMIT

LIQUIDLIMIT

WATERCONTENT

BLO

WS

PER

FT

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80



UN

IT D

RYW

EIG

HT,

pcf

N 29.44959; W 98.45035

NO

TE: T

HES

E LO

GS

SHO

ULD

NO

T BE

USE

D S

EPAR

ATEL

Y FR

OM

TH

E PR

OJE

CT R

EPO

RT



5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SYM

BOL

SAM

PLES


DRY12/28/2015

DEP

TH, F

T

10.0 ft12/28/2015

ASA15-113-003

PROJ. No.:FIGURE:


7

8

17

16

18

FILL: SAND, Gravelly, Firm, TanCLAY, Dark Brown


Boring Terminated

40


PLA

STIC

ITY

IND

EX



% -2

00


PLASTICLIMIT

LIQUIDLIMIT

WATERCONTENT

BLO

WS

PER

FT

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80



UN

IT D

RYW

EIG

HT,

pcf

N 29.44947; W 98.45026

NO

TE: T

HES

E LO

GS

SHO

ULD

NO

T BE

USE

D S

EPAR

ATEL

Y FR

OM

TH

E PR

OJE

CT R

EPO

RT



5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SYM

BOL

SAM

PLES


DRY12/28/2015

DEP

TH, F

T

5.0 ft12/28/2015

ASA15-113-004

PROJ. No.:FIGURE:


5

25

CLAY, Stiff, Dark Brown, with calcareousdeposits


Boring Terminated


PLA

STIC

ITY

IND

EX



% -2

00


PLASTICLIMIT

LIQUIDLIMIT

WATERCONTENT

BLO

WS

PER

FT

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80



UN

IT D

RYW

EIG

HT,

pcf

N 29.44902; W 98.45025

NO

TE: T

HES

E LO

GS

SHO

ULD

NO

T BE

USE

D S

EPAR

ATEL

Y FR

OM

TH

E PR

OJE

CT R

EPO

RT



5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SYM

BOL

SAM

PLES


DRY12/28/2015

DEP

TH, F

T

5.0 ft12/28/2015

ASA15-113-005

PROJ. No.:FIGURE:


12

30

CLAY, Firm, Dark Brown


Boring Terminated


PLA

STIC

ITY

IND

EX



% -2

00


PLASTICLIMIT

LIQUIDLIMIT

WATERCONTENT

BLO

WS

PER

FT

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80



UN

IT D

RYW

EIG

HT,

pcf

N 29.44888; W 98.45051

NO

TE: T

HES

E LO

GS

SHO

ULD

NO

T BE

USE

D S

EPAR

ATEL

Y FR

OM

TH

E PR

OJE

CT R

EPO

RT



5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SYM

BOL

SAM

PLES


DRY12/28/2015

DEP

TH, F

T

5.0 ft12/28/2015

ASA15-113-006

PROJ. No.:FIGURE:


7

14

FILL: CLAY, Gravelly, Stiff, Tan

CLAY, Firm to Stiff, Dark Brown

GRAVEL (Chert), Dense, Tan, with clay

CLAY, Stiff, Tan, with calcareous deposits

Boring Terminated

32

15


PLA

STIC

ITY

IND

EX



% -2

00


PLASTICLIMIT

LIQUIDLIMIT

WATERCONTENT

BLO

WS

PER

FT

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80



UN

IT D

RYW

EIG

HT,

pcf

N 29.44884; W 98.45068

NO

TE: T

HES

E LO

GS

SHO

ULD

NO

T BE

USE

D S

EPAR

ATEL

Y FR

OM

TH

E PR

OJE

CT R

EPO

RT



5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SYM

BOL

SAM

PLES


DRY12/29/2015

DEP

TH, F

T

20.0 ft12/29/2015

ASA15-113-007

PROJ. No.:FIGURE:


12

6

12

12

41

15

12

CLAY, Firm, Dark Brown, with gravel andchert


CLAY, Very Stiff, Tan, with calcareousdeposits

Boring Terminated


PLA

STIC

ITY

IND

EX



% -2

00


PLASTICLIMIT

LIQUIDLIMIT

WATERCONTENT

BLO

WS

PER

FT

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80



UN

IT D

RYW

EIG

HT,

pcf

N 29.44886; W 98.45114

NO

TE: T

HES

E LO

GS

SHO

ULD

NO

T BE

USE

D S

EPAR

ATEL

Y FR

OM

TH

E PR

OJE

CT R

EPO

RT



5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SYM

BOL

SAM

PLES


DRY12/29/2015

DEP

TH, F

T

10.0 ft12/29/2015

ASA15-113-008

PROJ. No.:FIGURE:


6

8

22

17

16

CLAY, Very Stiff, Dark Brown, with graveland chert

CLAY, Stiff to Very Stiff, Tan, with calcareousdeposits

GRAVEL (Chert), Very Dense, Tan, with clay

Boring Terminated

6


PLA

STIC

ITY

IND

EX



% -2

00


PLASTICLIMIT

LIQUIDLIMIT

WATERCONTENT

BLO

WS

PER

FT

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80



UN

IT D

RYW

EIG

HT,

pcf

N 29.44925; W 98.45112

NO

TE: T

HES

E LO

GS

SHO

ULD

NO

T BE

USE

D S

EPAR

ATEL

Y FR

OM

TH

E PR

OJE

CT R

EPO

RT



5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SYM

BOL

SAM

PLES


DRY12/29/2015

DEP

TH, F

T

10.0 ft12/29/2015

ASA15-113-009

PROJ. No.:FIGURE:


18

17

13

24

50/6"

112

CLAY, Very Stiff, Dark Brown, with graveland chert

GRAVEL (Chert), Loose, Tan, with clay

- with calcareous deposits from 3 ft to 18 ft

CLAY, Stiff to Very Stiff, Tan, with gravel andchert

Boring Terminated

47

29

54

LOG OF BORING NO. STB-1

PLA

STIC

ITY

IND

EX



% -2

00


PLASTICLIMIT

LIQUIDLIMIT

WATERCONTENT

BLO

WS

PER

FT

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80



UN

IT D

RYW

EIG

HT,

pcf

N 29.44934; W 98.45078

NO

TE: T

HES

E LO

GS

SHO

ULD

NO

T BE

USE

D S

EPAR

ATEL

Y FR

OM

TH

E PR

OJE

CT R

EPO

RT



5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SYM

BOL

SAM

PLES


DRY12/28/2015

DEP

TH, F

T

40.0 ft12/28/2015

ASA15-113-0010

PROJ. No.:FIGURE:


17

8

12

18

25

26

27

26

28

28

113

CLAY, Stiff, Dark Brown, with gravel andchert


- with calcareous deposits from 3 ft to 11 ftCLAY, Stiff to Very Stiff, Tan, with gravel and

chert

Boring Terminated

39

32

54


PLA

STIC

ITY

IND

EX



% -2

00


PLASTICLIMIT

LIQUIDLIMIT

WATERCONTENT

BLO

WS

PER

FT

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80



UN

IT D

RYW

EIG

HT,

pcf

N 29.44937; W 98.45049

NO

TE: T

HES

E LO

GS

SHO

ULD

NO

T BE

USE

D S

EPAR

ATEL

Y FR

OM

TH

E PR

OJE

CT R

EPO

RT



5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SYM

BOL

SAM

PLES


DRY12/28/2015

DEP

TH, F

T

40.0 ft12/28/2015

ASA15-113-0011

PROJ. No.:FIGURE:


13

20

21

13

19

22

25

24

25

25

109

CLAY, Firm to Stiff, Dark Brown, with graveland chert

GRAVEL (Chert), Loose to Medium Dense,Tan, with clay

CLAY, Stiff to Very Stiff, Tan- with calcareous deposits from 6 ft to 18 ft

Boring Terminated

42

43

16


PLA

STIC

ITY

IND

EX



% -2

00


PLASTICLIMIT

LIQUIDLIMIT

WATERCONTENT

BLO

WS

PER

FT

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80



UN

IT D

RYW

EIG

HT,

pcf

N 29.44917; W 98.45081

NO

TE: T

HES

E LO

GS

SHO

ULD

NO

T BE

USE

D S

EPAR

ATEL

Y FR

OM

TH

E PR

OJE

CT R

EPO

RT



5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SYM

BOL

SAM

PLES


DRY12/29/2015

DEP

TH, F

T

40.0 ft12/29/2015

ASA15-113-0012

PROJ. No.:FIGURE:


10

6

14

11

11

18

20

26

27

25

CLAY, Very Stiff, Dark Brown


CLAY, Stiff to Hard, Tan- with calcareous deposits from 4 ft to 12 ft

Boring Terminated

38

43

55


PLA

STIC

ITY

IND

EX

SURFACE ELEVATION: 749.5 ft


% -2

00


PLASTICLIMIT

LIQUIDLIMIT

WATERCONTENT

BLO

WS

PER

FT

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80



UN

IT D

RYW

EIG

HT,

pcf

N 29.44918; W 98.45047

NO

TE: T

HES

E LO

GS

SHO

ULD

NO

T BE

USE

D S

EPAR

ATEL

Y FR

OM

TH

E PR

OJE

CT R

EPO

RT



5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SYM

BOL

SAM

PLES


DRY12/28/2015

DEP

TH, F

T

40.0 ft12/28/2015

ASA15-113-0013

PROJ. No.:FIGURE:


22

21

20

12

27

21

24

22

29

37


CLAY-SHALE

SAMPLE TYPES

NO INFORMATION

BLANK PIPE

ASPHALT

IGNEOUS

LIMESTONE

FILL

GEOPROBESAMPLER

TEXAS CONEPENETROMETER

DISTURBED

METAMORPHIC

MARL

MUDROTARY

NORECOVERY SPLIT BARREL

SPLIT SPOONNX CORE

SHELBY TUBE

CALCAREOUS

CLAY

CLAYEY

GRAVEL

GRAVELLY

WELL CONSTRUCTION AND PLUGGING MATERIALS

SILTSTONE

CALICHE

CONGLOMERATE

AIRROTARY

GRABSAMPLE

DOLOMITE

BENTONITE

CORE

SOIL TERMS OTHER

NOTE: VALUES SYMBOLIZED ON BORING LOGS REPRESENT SHEARSTRENGTHS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED

BASE

KEY TO TERMS AND SYMBOLS

CUTTINGS

SAND

SANDY

SILT

SILTY

CHALK

STRENGTH TEST TYPES

CEMENT GROUT GRAVEL

SAND

POCKET PENETROMETER

TORVANE

UNCONFINED COMPRESSION

TRIAXIAL COMPRESSIONUNCONSOLIDATED-UNDRAINED

TRIAXIAL COMPRESSIONCONSOLIDATED-UNDRAINED

BRICKS /PAVERS

SCREEN

MATERIAL TYPES

VOLCLAY

SANDSTONE

SHALE

ROCK TERMS

WASTE

CONCRETE/CEMENT

PEAT

BENTONITE &CUTTINGS

CONCRETE/CEMENT

CLAYSTONE

ROTOSONIC-DAMAGED

ROTOSONIC-INTACT

PITCHER

FIGURE 14aREVISED 04/2012


KEY TO TERMS AND SYMBOLS (CONT'D)

TERMINOLOGY

RELATIVE DENSITY PLASTICITYCOHESIVE STRENGTH

PenetrationResistance

Blows per ftDegree ofPlasticity

PlasticityIndex

RelativeDensity

ResistanceBlows per ft

0

4

10

30

-

-

-

-

>

4

10

30

50

50

Very Loose

Loose

Medium Dense

Dense

Very Dense

ConsistencyCohesion

TSF

-

-

-

-

>

-

-

-

-

-

>

Benzene

Toluene

Ethylbenzene

Total Xylenes

Total BTEX

Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons

Not Detected

Not Analyzed

Not Recorded/No Recovery

Organic Vapor Analyzer

Parts Per Million

2

4

8

15

30

30

Very Soft

Soft

Firm

Stiff

Very Stiff

Hard

0

2

4

8

15

0

0.125

0.25

0.5

1.0

-

-

-

-

-

>

0.125

0.25

0.5

1.0

2.0

2.0

0

5

10

20

5

10

20

40

40

None

Low

Moderate

Plastic

Highly Plastic

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

ABBREVIATIONS

Qam, Qas, Qal

Qat

Qbc

Qt

Qao

Qle

Q-Tu

Ewi

Emi

Mc

EI

Kknm

Kpg

Kau

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

Kef

Kbu

Kdr

Kft

Kgt

Kep

Kek

Kes

Kew

Kgr

Kgru

Kgrl

Kh

Quaternary Alluvium

Low Terrace Deposits

Beaumont Formation

Fluviatile Terrace Deposits

Seymour Formation

Leona Formation

Uvalde Gravel

Wilcox Formation

Midway Group

Catahoula Formation

Laredo Formation

Navarro Group and MarlbrookMarl

Pecan Gap Chalk

Austin Chalk

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

Eagle Ford Shale

Buda Limestone

Del Rio Clay

Fort Terrett Member

Georgetown Formation

Person Formation

Kainer Formation

Escondido Formation

Walnut Formation

Glen Rose Formation

Upper Glen Rose Formation

Lower Glen Rose Formation

Hensell Sand

B

T

E

X

BTEX

TPH

ND

NA

NR

OVA

ppm

Terms used in this report to describe soils with regard to their consistency or conditions are in general accordance with thediscussion presented in Article 45 of SOILS MECHANICS IN ENGINEERING PRACTICE, Terzaghi and Peck, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,1967, using the most reliable information available from the field and laboratory investigations. Terms used for describing soilsaccording to their texture or grain size distribution are in accordance with the UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM, as describedin American Society for Testing and Materials D2487-06 and D2488-00, Volume 04.08, Soil and Rock; Dimension Stone;Geosynthetics; 2005.

The depths shown on the boring logs are not exact, and have been estimated to the nearest half-foot. Depth measurements maybe presented in a manner that implies greater precision in depth measurement, i.e 6.71 meters. The reader should understandand interpret this information only within the stated half-foot tolerance on depth measurements.

FIGURE 14bREVISED 04/2012


KEY TO TERMS AND SYMBOLS (CONT'D)

TERMINOLOGY

SOIL STRUCTURE

SAMPLING METHODS

Having planes of weakness that appear slick and glossy.Containing shrinkage or relief cracks, often filled with fine sand or silt; usually more or less vertical.Inclusion of material of different texture that is smaller than the diameter of the sample.Inclusion less than 1/8 inch thick extending through the sample.Inclusion 1/8 inch to 3 inches thick extending through the sample.Inclusion greater than 3 inches thick extending through the sample.Soil sample composed of alternating partings or seams of different soil type.Soil sample composed of alternating layers of different soil type.Soil sample composed of pockets of different soil type and layered or laminated structure is not evident.Having appreciable quantities of carbonate.Having more than 50% carbonate content.

SlickensidedFissuredPocketPartingSeamLayerLaminatedInterlayeredIntermixedCalcareousCarbonate

RELATIVELY UNDISTURBED SAMPLING

NOTE: To avoid damage to sampling tools, driving is limited to 50 blows during or after seating interval.

STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (SPT)

Cohesive soil samples are to be collected using three-inch thin-walled tubes in general accordance with the Standard Practicefor Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils (ASTM D1587) and granular soil samples are to be collected using two-inch split-barrelsamplers in general accordance with the Standard Method for Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils (ASTMD1586). Cohesive soil samples may be extruded on-site when appropriate handling and storage techniques maintain sampleintegrity and moisture content.

Description

25 blows drove sampler 12 inches, after initial 6 inches of seating.50 blows drove sampler 7 inches, after initial 6 inches of seating.50 blows drove sampler 3 inches during initial 6-inch seating interval.

Blows Per Foot

2550/7"Ref/3"

FIGURE 14c

A 2-in.-OD, 1-3/8-in.-ID split spoon sampler is driven 1.5 ft into undisturbed soil with a 140-pound hammer free falling 30 in.After the sampler is seated 6 in. into undisturbed soil, the number of blows required to drive the sampler the last 12 in. is theStandard Penetration Resistance or "N" value, which is recorded as blows per foot as described below.

REVISED 04/2012

SPLIT-BARREL SAMPLER DRIVING RECORD

CTB-1 0.0 to 1.5 7 6

2.5 to 4.0 26 9

4.5 to 6.0 24 14 89 21 68 CH

6.5 to 8.0 39 7

8.5 to 10.0 26 12

CTB-2 0.0 to 1.5 7 19

2.5 to 4.0 8 26

4.5 to 6.0 17 17

6.5 to 8.0 16 24 71 18 53 CH

8.5 to 10.0 18 20

CTB-3 0.0 to 1.5 5 18 40

3.5 to 5.0 25 10

CTB-4 0.0 to 1.5 12 18

3.5 to 5.0 30 7

CTB-5 0.0 to 1.5 7 22

3.5 to 5.0 14 7

CTB-6 0.0 to 1.5 12 6

2.5 to 4.0 6 31

4.5 to 6.0 12 21

6.5 to 8.0 12 21

8.5 to 10.0 41 8 15

13.5 to 15.0 15 24 46 14 32 CL

18.5 to 20.0 12 24

CTB-7 0.0 to 1.5 6 23

2.5 to 4.0 8 21

4.5 to 6.0 22 17

6.5 to 8.0 17 6

8.5 to 10.0 16 22

CTB-8 0.0 to 1.5 18

2.5 to 4.0 17 19

4.5 to 6.0 13 24 28 22 6 CL-ML

6.5 to 8.0 24 17

8.5 to 9.5 50/6" 6

STB-1 0.0 to 1.5 17 7

2.5 to 4.0 8 16

4.5 to 6.0 12 20 65 18 47 CH

6.5 to 8.0 18 17 46 17 29 CL

8.5 to 10.0 25 23

13.5 to 15.0 26 18

PlasticityIndex

LiquidLimit

PP = Pocket Penetrometer TV = Torvane UC = Unconfined Compression FV = Field Vane

PlasticLimit

WaterContent

(%)

Dry UnitWeight

(pcf)

PROJECT NAME:

FILE NAME: ASA15-113-00.GPJ

USCS % -200Sieve

ShearStrength

(tsf)

StrengthTest

BoringNo.

1/21/2016

UU = Unconsolidated Undrained Triaxial

SampleDepth

(ft)

CU = Consolidated Undrained Triaxial


RESULTS OF SOIL SAMPLE ANALYSES

Blowsper ft

FIGURE 15a


16

STB-1 18.0 to 19.5 27 22 71 17 54 CH

23.5 to 25.0 20 112 3.11 UC

28.5 to 30.0 26 21

33.5 to 35.0 28 20

38.5 to 40.0 28 20

STB-2 0.0 to 1.5 13 14 55 16 39 CH

2.5 to 4.0 20 12

4.5 to 6.0 21 9 46 14 32 CL

6.5 to 8.0 13 16

8.5 to 10.0 19 19 74 20 54 CH

13.0 to 14.5 17 113 2.83 UC

18.5 to 20.0 22 20

23.5 to 25.0 25 20

28.5 to 30.0 24 19

33.5 to 35.0 25 19

38.5 to 40.0 25 19

STB-3 0.0 to 1.5 10 6 16

2.5 to 4.0 6 22 62 20 42 CH

4.5 to 6.0 14 7

6.5 to 8.0 11 21

8.5 to 10.0 11 22

13.5 to 15.0 18 22 65 22 43 CH

18.5 to 20.0 20 22

23.5 to 25.0 26 20

28.0 to 29.5 21 109 2.16 UC

33.5 to 35.0 27 20

38.5 to 40.0 25 20

STB-4 0.0 to 1.5 22 20 55 17 38 CH

2.5 to 4.0 21 15

4.5 to 6.0 20 15 59 16 43 CH

6.5 to 8.0 12 14

8.0 to 9.5 17 74 19 55 CH 2.25 PP

9.5 to 10.5

13.5 to 15.0 27 15

18.5 to 20.0 21 21

23.5 to 25.0 24 21

28.5 to 30.0 22 18

33.5 to 35.0 29 17

38.5 to 40.0 37 18

PlasticityIndex

LiquidLimit

PP = Pocket Penetrometer TV = Torvane UC = Unconfined Compression FV = Field Vane

PlasticLimit

WaterContent

(%)

Dry UnitWeight

(pcf)

PROJECT NAME:

FILE NAME: ASA15-113-00.GPJ

USCS % -200Sieve

ShearStrength

(tsf)

StrengthTest

BoringNo.

1/21/2016

UU = Unconsolidated Undrained Triaxial

SampleDepth

(ft)

CU = Consolidated Undrained Triaxial


RESULTS OF SOIL SAMPLE ANALYSES

Blowsper ft

FIGURE 15b


115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

0 5 10 15 20

Dry

De

nsi

ty (

pcf

)

Moisture Content (%)

MOISTURE DENSITY RELATIONSHIP CURVE

%Swell = 0.3

CBR = 6.3

Max. Dry Density (pcf) = 96.7

Optimum Moisture Content (%) = 21.3

1/21/2016 Figure 16a

ASA15-113-00Raba Kistner

Burger King and Popeye's Restaurants at Fort Sam Houston - Boring CTB-1

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

0 5 10 15 20

Dry

De

nsi

ty (

pcf

)

Moisture Content (%)

MOISTURE DENSITY RELATIONSHIP CURVE

%Swell = 1.4

CBR = 4.7

Max. Dry Density (pcf) = 98.2

Optimum Moisture Content (%) = 21.1

1/21/2016 Figure 16bASA15-113-00

Raba Kistner


5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

0% 1% 2% 3% 4% 5% 6% 7% 8% 9% 10%

So

il p

H

Percent Lime

pH-LIME SERIES CURVE

1/21/2016 Figure 17aASA15-113-00

Raba Kistner


5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

0% 1% 2% 3% 4% 5% 6% 7% 8% 9% 10%

So

il p

H

Percent Lime

pH-LIME SERIES CURVE

1/21/2016 Figure 17bASA15-113-00

Raba Kistner


Geotechnical-Engineering Report

Geotechnical Services Are Performed for Specific Purposes, Persons, and ProjectsGeotechnical engineers structure their services to meet the specific needs of their clients. A geotechnical-engineering study conducted for a civil engineer may not fulfill the needs of a constructor — a construction contractor — or even another civil engineer. Because each geotechnical- engineering study is unique, each geotechnical-engineering report is unique, prepared solely for the client. No one except you should rely on this geotechnical-engineering report without first conferring with the geotechnical engineer who prepared it. And no one — not even you — should apply this report for any purpose or project except the one originally contemplated.

Read the Full ReportSerious problems have occurred because those relying on a geotechnical-engineering report did not read it all. Do not rely on an executive summary. Do not read selected elements only.

Geotechnical Engineers Base Each Report on a Unique Set of Project-Specific FactorsGeotechnical engineers consider many unique, project-specific factors when establishing the scope of a study. Typical factors include: the client’s goals, objectives, and risk-management preferences; the general nature of the structure involved, its size, and configuration; the location of the structure on the site; and other planned or existing site improvements, such as access roads, parking lots, and underground utilities. Unless the geotechnical engineer who conducted the study specifically indicates otherwise, do not rely on a geotechnical-engineering report that was:• not prepared for you;• not prepared for your project;• not prepared for the specific site explored; or• completed before important project changes were made.

Typical changes that can erode the reliability of an existing geotechnical-engineering report include those that affect: • the function of the proposed structure, as when it’s changed

from a parking garage to an office building, or from a light-industrial plant to a refrigerated warehouse;

• the elevation, configuration, location, orientation, or weight of the proposed structure;

• the composition of the design team; or• project ownership.

As a general rule, always inform your geotechnical engineer of project changes—even minor ones—and request an

assessment of their impact. Geotechnical engineers cannot accept responsibility or liability for problems that occur because their reports do not consider developments of which they were not informed.

Subsurface Conditions Can ChangeA geotechnical-engineering report is based on conditions that existed at the time the geotechnical engineer performed the study. Do not rely on a geotechnical-engineering report whose adequacy may have been affected by: the passage of time; man-made events, such as construction on or adjacent to the site; or natural events, such as floods, droughts, earthquakes, or groundwater fluctuations. Contact the geotechnical engineer before applying this report to determine if it is still reliable. A minor amount of additional testing or analysis could prevent major problems.

Most Geotechnical Findings Are Professional OpinionsSite exploration identifies subsurface conditions only at those points where subsurface tests are conducted or samples are taken. Geotechnical engineers review field and laboratory data and then apply their professional judgment to render an opinion about subsurface conditions throughout the site. Actual subsurface conditions may differ — sometimes significantly — from those indicated in your report. Retaining the geotechnical engineer who developed your report to provide geotechnical-construction observation is the most effective method of managing the risks associated with unanticipated conditions.

A Report’s Recommendations Are Not FinalDo not overrely on the confirmation-dependent recommendations included in your report. Confirmation-dependent recommendations are not final, because geotechnical engineers develop them principally from judgment and opinion. Geotechnical engineers can finalize their recommendations only by observing actual subsurface conditions revealed during construction. The geotechnical engineer who developed your report cannot assume responsibility or liability for the report’s confirmation-dependent recommendations if that engineer does not perform the geotechnical-construction observation required to confirm the recommendations’ applicability.

A Geotechnical-Engineering Report Is Subject to MisinterpretationOther design-team members’ misinterpretation of geotechnical-engineering reports has resulted in costly

Important Information about This

Subsurface problems are a principal cause of construction delays, cost overruns, claims, and disputes.

While you cannot eliminate all such risks, you can manage them. The following information is provided to help.

problems. Confront that risk by having your geo technical engineer confer with appropriate members of the design team after submitting the report. Also retain your geotechnical engineer to review pertinent elements of the design team’s plans and specifications. Constructors can also misinterpret a geotechnical-engineering report. Confront that risk by having your geotechnical engineer participate in prebid and preconstruction conferences, and by providing geotechnical construction observation.

Do Not Redraw the Engineer’s LogsGeotechnical engineers prepare final boring and testing logs based upon their interpretation of field logs and laboratory data. To prevent errors or omissions, the logs included in a geotechnical-engineering report should never be redrawn for inclusion in architectural or other design drawings. Only photographic or electronic reproduction is acceptable, but recognize that separating logs from the report can elevate risk.

Give Constructors a Complete Report and GuidanceSome owners and design professionals mistakenly believe they can make constructors liable for unanticipated subsurface conditions by limiting what they provide for bid preparation. To help prevent costly problems, give constructors the complete geotechnical-engineering report, but preface it with a clearly written letter of transmittal. In that letter, advise constructors that the report was not prepared for purposes of bid development and that the report’s accuracy is limited; encourage them to confer with the geotechnical engineer who prepared the report (a modest fee may be required) and/or to conduct additional study to obtain the specific types of information they need or prefer. A prebid conference can also be valuable. Be sure constructors have sufficient time to perform additional study. Only then might you be in a position to give constructors the best information available to you, while requiring them to at least share some of the financial responsibilities stemming from unanticipated conditions.

Read Responsibility Provisions CloselySome clients, design professionals, and constructors fail to recognize that geotechnical engineering is far less exact than other engineering disciplines. This lack of understanding has created unrealistic expectations that have led to disappointments, claims, and disputes. To help reduce the risk of such outcomes, geotechnical engineers commonly include a variety of explanatory provisions in their reports. Sometimes labeled “limitations,” many of these provisions indicate where geotechnical engineers’ responsibilities begin and end, to help

others recognize their own responsibilities and risks. Read these provisions closely. Ask questions. Your geotechnical engineer should respond fully and frankly.

Environmental Concerns Are Not Covered The equipment, techniques, and personnel used to perform an environmental study differ significantly from those used to perform a geotechnical study. For that reason, a geotechnical-engineering report does not usually relate any environmental findings, conclusions, or recommendations; e.g., about the likelihood of encountering underground storage tanks or regulated contaminants. Unanticipated environmental problems have led to numerous project failures. If you have not yet obtained your own environmental information, ask your geotechnical consultant for risk-management guidance. Do not rely on an environmental report prepared for someone else.

Obtain Professional Assistance To Deal with MoldDiverse strategies can be applied during building design, construction, operation, and maintenance to prevent significant amounts of mold from growing on indoor surfaces. To be effective, all such strategies should be devised for the express purpose of mold prevention, integrated into a comprehensive plan, and executed with diligent oversight by a professional mold-prevention consultant. Because just a small amount of water or moisture can lead to the development of severe mold infestations, many mold- prevention strategies focus on keeping building surfaces dry. While groundwater, water infiltration, and similar issues may have been addressed as part of the geotechnical- engineering study whose findings are conveyed in this report, the geotechnical engineer in charge of this project is not a mold prevention consultant; none of the services performed in connection with the geotechnical engineer’s study were designed or conducted for the purpose of mold prevention. Proper implementation of the recommendations conveyed in this report will not of itself be sufficient to prevent mold from growing in or on the structure involved.

Rely, on Your GBC-Member Geotechnical Engineer for Additional AssistanceMembership in the Geotechnical Business Council of the Geoprofessional Business Association exposes geotechnical engineers to a wide array of risk-confrontation techniques that can be of genuine benefit for everyone involved with a construction project. Confer with you GBC-Member geotechnical engineer for more information.

8811 Colesville Road/Suite G106, Silver Spring, MD 20910Telephone: 301/565-2733 Facsimile: 301/589-2017

e-mail: [email protected] www.geoprofessional.org

Copyright 2015 by Geoprofessional Business Association (GBA). Duplication, reproduction, or copying of this document, or its contents, in whole or in part, by any means whatsoever, is strictly prohibited, except with GBA’s specific written permission. Excerpting, quoting, or otherwise extracting wording from this document

is permitted only with the express written permission of GBA, and only for purposes of scholarly research or book review. Only members of GBA may use this document as a complement to or as an element of a geotechnical-engineering report. Any other firm, individual, or other entity that so uses this document without

being a GBA member could be commiting negligent or intentional (fraudulent) misrepresentation.

Austin, TX

Brownsville, TX

Corpus Christi , TX

Dallas , TX

El Paso, TX

Houston, TX

McAllen, TX

Mexico

Salt Lake City, UT

San Antonio, TX

CONSULTANTS • ENVIRONMENTAL • FACILITIES • INFRASTRUCTURE

R A B A K I S T N E R

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONDITIONS Section 02 41 16 – STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02 41 16-1

1. GENERAL


A. Base Bid:


a. Verification of data and existing conditions. b. Cooperation and coordination with JBSA-Sam Houston, AAFES Contracting

Officer and utility owners for:

1.) Notifications. 2.) Utilities. 3.) Salvage operations (by AAFES).

c. Disconnecting, capping and/or sealing site utilities indicated. d. Complete demolition and legal disposal of all site utility services and related

structures indicated. e. Legal removal, packaging, transport and disposal of all universal and

hazardous waste. f. Legal recovery and transfer of all ozone depleting substances. g. Complete demolition and legal disposal of miscellaneous equipment, fixtures

and furnishings not salvaged by AAFES. h. Complete demolition and legal disposal of all site paving and outdoor dining

patio indicated. i. Complete demolition and legal disposal of all site features and improvements

indicated. j. Complete demolition and removal of building, canopies and superstructure

indicated. k. Demolition and removal of below-grade concrete masonry foundations and

cast-in-place reinforced concrete footing substructure indicated. l. At Contractor’s option, perform additional hazardous materials investigation

at own expense upon approval by Contracting Officer.

2. Site verified parameters for base bid substructure demolition of existing Popeye's building:

a. Top of Floor Slab Elevation: ±749.79' b. Top of Crawl Space Slab Elevation: ±746.46'.

3. Estimated parameters of footing and foundation system to be included in base bid:

a. Base bid foundation demolition shall be based on 8" concrete masonry foundation walls and concrete masonry interior piers supported on continuous reinforced concrete mat footing/crawl space slab at elevation ±746.46'.

b. Base bid footing demolition shall be based on a continuous reinforced concrete mat footing extending past the exterior face of the building walls approximately 2'-0" with the following overall dimensions:

1.) N-S Dimension: 53'-6" (53.50'). 2.) E-W Dimension: 79'-8" (79.67'). 3.) Thickness: 1'-0" (1.0').

B. Unit Price:


1. Contractor provide unit price per in place unit of demolition work and materials added to or deleted from the Contract Sum for variations between estimated in place volume of reinforced concrete mat footing demolition, provided in parameters above, and backfill in accordance with Section 01 10 10, Unit Prices:

a. Contractor shall provide unit price per in place cubic yard for demolition, loading, hauling and disposal of reinforced concrete mat footing and for hauling, placement and compaction of fill required to properly backfill excavations.

b. Unit price shall be as determined by actual field dimensions verified by in place exiting conditions on site prior to commencement of reinforced concrete mat footing demolition operations and shall include:

1.) Price per in place cubic yard to excavate, demolish, load, haul and dispose of or recycle additional unit quantities or to delete unit quantities of reinforced concrete mat footing.

2.) Include in unit price cost to haul, place and compact suitable fill material, if any, to backfill excavations resulting from removal of reinforced mat footing.

c. Supporting documentation shall be furnished by Contractor prior to final settlement of quantities of reinforced concrete mat footing demolished and backfill placed as follows:

1.) All supporting paperwork showing actual in place quantities of reinforced concrete footing material legally removed, hauled and disposed of in approved landfill or recycling center off JBSA-Sam Houston property.

2.) All supporting paperwork, including delivery tickets, for hauling, placement and compaction of in place backfill materials, if necessary.



1. Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of JBSA-Sam Houston. 2. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work. 3. Section 01 10 10 – Unit Prices. 4. Section 01 31 13 – Project Management & Coordination. 5. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule. 6. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 7. Section 01 35 43 – AAFES Environmental Protection. 8. Section 01 35 56 – Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures (SWPPP). 9. Section 01 45 29 – Testing Laboratory Services. 10. Section 01 55 00 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls. 11. Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management & Disposal. 12. Section 01 78 00 – Project Record Drawings. 13. Section 02 81 10 – Hazardous Materials Report. 14. Section 02 81 33 – Removal of Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB’s). 15. Section 02 81 34 – Removal of Mercury Containing Lamps & Devices. 16. Section 02 91 10 – Ozone Depleting Substance Recovery. 17. Division 22 – Plumbing. 18. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning (HVAC). 19. Division 26 – Electrical. 20. Division 27 – Communications. 21. Section 31 10 00 – Site Clearing. 22. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving.


B. Included but specified elsewhere:

1. Provide unit prices in accordance with information contained herein and in accordance with Section 01 10 10, Unit Prices.

2. Legal removal, packaging, transport and disposal of any lighting ballasts/capacitors found to contain polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's) is included in the scope of work of this Section and specified in Section 02 81 33, Removal of Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's) (JBSA-SH).

3. Legal removal, packaging, transport and disposal of all mercury-containing lamps, mercury-containing thermostats and tritium containing exit signs is included in the scope of work of this Section and specified in Section 02 81 34, Removal of Mercury Containing Lamps & Devices (JBSA-SH).

4. Legal recovery, transport and transfer of refrigerants or other ozone depleting substances (ODS's) is included in the scope of work of this Section and specified in Section 02 91 10, Ozone Depleting Substance Recovery (JBSA-SH).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of or recycle them off-site unless otherwise indicated.

B. Salvage: Equipment, fixtures and furnishing items to be removed, hauled and stored by AAFES.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of AAFES.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly deliver to AAFES General Manager with written transmittal copied to AAFES Contracting Officer and designated representative.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Qualifications and/or licensure of individuals for removal, recovery, packaging, transfer, transport and disposal of universal and hazardous waste materials as required by Sections 02 81 33, 02 81 34 and 02 91 10.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit informational report, including Drawings and narrative description of proposed PPE, indicating the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection.

C. Construction Barriers: Indicate construction of barriers and proposed locations.

D. Schedule of Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of demolition work, with starting and ending dates for each activity.

2. Temporary interruption of utility services. 3. Shutoff and capping or re-routing of utility services.

E. Inventory: In coordination with AAFES personnel submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged by AAFES prior to start of demolition.


F. Pre-demolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including paving surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations and submit prior to commencement of demolition operations.

G. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of universal and hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept universal and hazardous wastes, including completely executed waste manifests, in full compliance with requirements set forth in Sections 02 81 83 and 02 81 84.

H. Verification of Refrigerant Recovery: In accordance with 40 CFR 82.156(a)(3) and all associated regulations in full compliance with requirements set forth in Section 02 91 10 Ozone Depleting Substance Recovery.

I. Record drawings.


A. Universal and Hazardous Waste Technician Qualifications: In accordance with requirements set forth in Section 02 81 33 and 02 81 34.

B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: In accordance with requirements set forth in Section 02 91 10.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing authorities having jurisdiction prior to commencement of demolition, hauling and disposal operations:

1. Department of Defense. 2. State of Texas. 3. JBSA-Sam Houston. 4. AAFES. 5. EPA.

D. Notifications: Provide legally required and other notifications in compliance with all regulations and authorities having jurisdiction prior to commencement of demolition, hauling and disposal operations.

E. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

F. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished. 2. Review and finalize building demolition schedule and verify availability of

demolition personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review and finalize protection requirements. 4. Review procedures for protection of adjacent new and existing construction. 5. Review items to be salvaged by AAFES.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Demolition activities will occur during Phase 1 of the construction sequence.

1. Building to be demolished will be vacated and use discontinued before start of the Work.

2. AAFES will salvage specified items from the facility prior to demolition.


B. Contractor is responsible for coordination of all demolition operations whether performed by AAFES or by the Contractor.

C. Contractor is responsible for scheduling notifications and coordination of utility disconnects at least 21 calendar days prior to need for these utilities to be disconnected.

D. Buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied.

1. Conduct building demolition so operations of occupied buildings will not be disrupted.

2. Provide not less than 7 days advance notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent occupied buildings or roadways.

3. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings and the Installation unless written permission is obtained from authorities having jurisdiction and AAFES Contracting Officer or designated representative.

a. Do not close or obstruct roadways affecting the Installation. b. Do not close or obstruction driveways, walkways, exits, or other facilities used

by occupants of adjacent buildings. c. Do not disrupt utility services that affect normal operations of Installation and

other building functions or traffic control functions.

E. AAFES and the Installation assume no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished.

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by AAFES and the Installation as far as practical.

2. Before building demolition AAFES will remove, load, haul and store all equipment, fixtures, furnishings and signage items of value to AAFES.

3. All remaining items shall be demolished, loaded, hauled and legally disposed of by the Contractor.

F. Universal and Hazardous Materials: Controlled and regulated materials designated as universal and hazardous waste are present in buildings and structures to be demolished.

1. A report on the presence of known or anticipated universal and hazardous waste materials is bound herein under Section 02 81 10 for informational purposes only.

2. Contractor is advised to examine report to become aware of locations where universal and hazardous materials are present.

a. Neither AAFES, the Contracting Officer nor the Architect-Engineer can guarantee the accuracy, validity or continuity of conditions from the report.

b. Neither AAFES, the Contracting Officer nor the Architect-Engineer assume any responsibility for the Contractor's interpretation of report findings.

G. Universal and hazardous waste material removal, packaging, hauling and disposal is specified under Sections 02 81 33 and 02 81 34 in the Contract Documents.

1. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under specified procedures.

2. Contractor shall obtain, provide and submit material safety data sheets for materials that are known to be present in buildings and structures to be demolished.

3. If during the demolition process, the Contractor encounters a hazardous material in locations other than noted above, Contractor shall cease operations immediately, notify JBSA-Sam Houston Environmental Management Division, AAFES Contracting Officer and designated representative of its findings in writing.


4. Contractor shall not reinstate demolition operations until areas have been cleared for continuation of demolition work.

H. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations or operations of adjacent occupied buildings.

1.9 NOTIFICATIONS

A. Contractor shall provide at least the following notifications:

1. Notify utilities of required service disconnects at least 21 calendar days prior to needing disconnects.

2. Notify adjacent occupied buildings not less than 7 days prior to activities that may affect their operations.

3. Notify Texas Department of State Health Services (TDSHS) regarding the building demolition.

4. Notify AAFES Contracting Officer, JBSA-Sam Houston Environmental Management Division and other required regulatory agencies regarding demolition activities and environmental abatement efforts.

2. PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped and/or sealed prior to commencement of demolition operations.

B. Contractor shall review Contract Documents as provided by AAFES under this Project that generally illustrate the existing conditions of the site and building to be demolished.

1. Neither AAFES nor the Architect-Engineer guarantees the detailed accuracy of existing conditions indicated in Contract Documents.

2. Contractor shall be responsible for verification of detailed accuracy of AAFES furnished Contract Documents prepared by Architect-Engineer under this Project.

C. Contractor shall inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged by AAFES in coordination with requirements of this Section.

D. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations including existing roadways and other Installation owned property.

E. Verify that universal and hazardous waste materials have been abated in compliance with all applicable rules, regulations and authorities having jurisdiction in accordance with Contract Documents prior to proceeding with building demolition operations.

F. Verify that ozone depleting substances have been recovered in compliance with all applicable rules, regulations and authorities having jurisdiction in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to AAFES removal of equipment, fixtures and furnishings and prior to proceeding with building demolition operations.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all demolition operations whether performed by AAFES or by the Contractor.

1. Contractor shall schedule, provide notifications and coordination of utility disconnects at least 21 calendar days prior to need for these utilities to be disconnected.

B. Universal and Hazardous Waste: Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that universal and hazardous waste materials have been abated in compliance with all applicable rules, regulations and authorities having jurisdiction in accordance with Contract Documents prior to proceeding with building demolition operations.

C. Ozone Depleting Substances: Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that ozone depleting substances have been recovered in compliance with all applicable rules, regulations and authorities having jurisdiction in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to AAFES removal of equipment, fixtures and furnishings and prior to proceeding with building demolition operations.

1. Contractor is responsible for the recovery, containment and transfer of refrigerants from all condensing equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction before starting demolition.

2. Contractor is responsible for removal, containment and transfer of compressor oils related to refrigerant recovery according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction before starting demolition.

D. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving building and structures to be demolished and submit written evidence of verification prior to commencement of demolition work.

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility owners. 2. If removal, relocation or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent

occupied buildings or Installation services provide temporary utilities that bypass building and structures to be demolished that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures.

3. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade and cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Identify utilities and indicate capping locations on Project Record Documents.

E. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition.

F. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.

G. Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances, and structures that are not to be demolished

3.3 SAFETY AND FENCING

A. Safety: Contractor shall comply with all applicable current federal, state and local safety and health regulations.


B. Temporary Fencing: Contractor shall furnish and place a fence around site of work adequate to secure demolition site, including any resulting debris or excavation, and to prevent unauthorized access.

C. Duration: Fence shall remain in place until demolished materials are removed from site and holes or excavated areas are backfilled and site is rough graded.

D. Removal: Remove temporary fencing when no longer needed to secure area or as directed by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during demolition operations and maintain exits from existing buildings.

B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition operations.

1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied and operational facilities or Installation services unless authorized in writing by Contracting Officer and JBSA-Sam Houston and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Provide at least 7 days notice to occupants of affected buildings if shutdown of service is required during changeover.

C. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist.

D. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place.

3.5 WORK BY OTHERS

A. AAFES personnel will disconnect, remove, load, haul, salvage and store or dispose of food service equipment, fixtures and furnishings of value to AAFES including:

1. Fixed and movable equipment items such as preparation, serving and interior drive-up equipment.

2. Fixtures such as stainless-steel counters, shelving units, free standing cabinets, dry storage shelving and stainless-steel cook's tables.

3. Furnishings including dining tables, chairs, desks and similar items. 4. A Functional cooler/freezer box and a non-functional freezer, evaporators interior

to the boxes, all ceiling, wall and floor panels, and the related condensers.

B. Other miscellaneous equipment, fixtures, furnishings and signage deemed to have value to AAFES.

3.6 DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish indicated buildings and site improvements completely. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

2. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 8 hours after flame cutting operations.


3. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 4. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not

to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls:

1. Conduct building demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

2. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.

D. Relics, antiques, and similar objects remain property of Owner.

E. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials encountered.

F. Do not burn or bury materials on site.

G. Keep work sprinkled to minimize dust.

1. Provide hoses and water main or hydrant connections for this purpose.

a. Water utility is owned and operated by JBSA-Sam Houston. b. Make arrangements to obtain permits and pay for water usage as required by

JBSA-Sam Houston BCE using POC listed in Section 01 10 00, Project Summary.

2. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.

3.7 STRUCTURAL PARTS OF BUILDINGS:

A. Contractor shall demolish indicated building, structures and appurtenances in accordance with removal procedure and schedule, including but not limited to piping, filters, mechanical equipment, pumps and all hydraulic or other fluids incidental to equipment and legally dispose of in landfill or recycling facility as appropriate for debris.

B. Contractor shall demolish building equipment and systems not associated with food service equipment, fixtures and furnishings removed and salvaged by AAFES including, but not limited to:

1. Kitchen exhaust hoods, fans and ductwork. 2. Stainless kitchen and hand wash sinks and piping. 3. Toilet fixtures and piping. 4. Interior and exterior signage and wiring not salvaged by AAFES. 5. Exterior drive-up equipment including pre-order board, menu board, order

confirmation unit and signage not salvaged by AAFES including wiring, footings and foundations.

6. Building services equipment including water heater(s), roof top units, exhaust fans, piping, ductwork and wiring.

C. Cease operations and notify Contracting Officer immediately if adjacent structures appear to be endangered.

D. Do not resume operations until corrective measures have been taken.


E. No wall or part thereof shall be permitted to fall outwardly from building except through chutes or by other controlled means or methods, which will ensure safety and minimize dust, noise, and other nuisance.

F. Remove any part of a building, whether structural, collateral, or accessory, which has become unstable through removal of other parts as soon as practicable and no such unstable part shall be left free-standing or inadequately braced against reasonably possible causes of collapse at end of each day.

G. Basements and Foundation Walls:

1. Completely remove building floors, foundations from site unless specifically stated otherwise in Contract Documents.

2. Contractor is to assume the crawl space slab is a 12-inch thick reinforced concrete mat footing extending 2'-0" outside the perimeter walls of the building as described under Paragraph 1.1, A., subparagraphs 2. and 3. above.

3. Footing and foundation areas shall be inspected and approved by Contracting Officer before backfilling starts.

a. Contractor shall contact Contracting Officer when removal is complete to schedule foundation removal inspection prior to commencing backfill and compaction operations.

b. Failure to contact Contracting Officer may result in re-excavation of foundation area at Contractor’s expense.

4. Contractor shall ensure that no foundation/basement excavation will remain open and exposed for more than 24 hours.

H. Partially Buried Objects:

1. Remove piping, posts, reinforcing bars, anchor bolts, railings, and other partly buried objects protruding from ground.

2. Fill remaining void with approved fill and compact in accordance with Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving.

I. Vegetation:

1. Contractor shall remove trees identified for removal, stumps, trees which are not an asset to property as determined by Contracting Officer, including bushes, vegetation, brush, and weeds, whether standing or fallen, unless specifically stated otherwise in Contract Documents.

2. Contractor shall protect trees, not scheduled to be removed, from damage from demolition operations.

J. Immediately remove demolished material from site unless approved demolition procedure and schedule submitted in accordance with this section provides otherwise.

3.8 SITE RESTORATION

A. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving.

B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.

C. Remove top layer of topsoil and stockpile on site for use as final topsoil and grading material.


D. If adequate topsoil is not available on site, Contractor shall bring in enough approved topsoil from off-site to place a minimum six-inch layer on entire demolition area.

E. Excess excavation materials shall not be removed from site. Any excess material must be spoiled on site.

F. Topsoil material shall not be permitted as deep fill material.

G. Any borrow or fill material shall be approved by Contracting Officer before and during placing of approved material.

H. All depressions on property shall be filled, compacted, and graded to a uniform slope with adequate drainage.

I. Contractor shall notify Contracting Officer forty-eight hours in advance of placing any backfill or original backfill material so a soil sample can be obtained.

J. Contractor shall deliver sample to approved testing laboratory to obtain information relating to density for on-site testing that will be performed during and after placement of backfill material.

K. Additional fill material shall be of equal quality to soil adjacent to excavation, and free of rubble or organic matter.

L. There shall be no payment for additional fill material, which shall be considered incidental to demolition bid price.

M. Before acceptance of demolition work, Contractor shall remove unused material and rubbish from site of the Work, remedy any objectionable conditions Contractor may have created on private property, and leave right-of-way in a neat and presentable condition.

N. Contractor shall not make agreements that allow salvaged or unused material to remain on adjacent private property.

O. On demolition sites where seeding will be delayed because of allowable seeding dates, Contractor shall complete fine grading and shaping of site to leave site in a neat and presentable condition subject to approval of Contracting Officer.

P. Final clean-up is subject to approval of Contracting Officer and shall be in accordance with applicable regulations.

3.9 REPAIRS

A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings or improvements caused by demolition operations.

3.10 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA- approved landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. See Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management & Disposal for recycling and disposal of demolition waste.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent

surfaces and areas. 3. Do not burn demolished materials. 4. Contractor shall be responsible to pay all fees for waste disposal, disposal fees

shall be considered incidental to demolition work.


5. Contractor shall submit to Contracting Officer copies of all disposal tickets for each structure demolished, where available, which identify specific location of origin of debris associated with each ticket.

B. PCB and Mercury Removal and Disposal:

1. Handling of lighting fixtures ballasts containing PCB or lamps and devices containing mercury are subject to applicable state and federal mandates and regulations.

2. Work shall be performed in accordance with Section 02 81 33 Removal of Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB’s) and Section 02 81 34 Removal of Mercury Containing Lamps & Devices

C. Ozone Depleting Substance Recovery, Containment and Transfer:

1. Handling of Freon containing appliances is subject to applicable state and federal mandates and regulations.

2. Work shall be performed in accordance with Section 02 91 10 Ozone Depleting Substance Recover.

3.11 CLEANING

A. At end of each workday, Contractor shall clean sidewalks, streets, and private property of any debris caused by demolition operations.

B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition operations began.

1. Clean roadways of debris caused by debris transport.

END 02 41 16.

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONDITIONS Section 02 81 10 – HAZMAT INVESTIGATION & REPORT

HAZMAT INVESTIGATION & REPORT 02 81 10-1

1. GENERAL


A. Base Bid:


a. Verification of data and existing conditions. b. At Contractor’s option, perform additional hazardous materials investigation

at own expense upon approval by Contracting Officer.



1. Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of JBSA-Sam Houston 2. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work. 3. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule. 4. Section 01 35 43 – AAFES Environmental Protection. 5. Section 01 35 56 – Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures (SWPPP) 6. Section 01 73 29 – Cutting & Patching 7. Section 02 41 16 – Structure Demolition. 8. Section 02 81 33 – Removal of Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's). 9. Section 02 81 34 – Removal of Mercury Containing Lamps & Devices. 10. Section 02 91 10 – Ozone Depleting Substance Recovery. 11. Division 22 – Plumbing. 12. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning (HVAC) 13. Division 26 – Electrical. 14. Division 31 - Earthwork.

B. By others:

1. AAFES has caused a non-destructive hazardous materials survey and other hazardous materials evaluations to be performed at the existing Popeye's Building 380 scheduled for demolition upon completion of the new Dual Food Project.

2. This hazardous materials survey was performed by:

a. AEHS, Inc. 4402 Center Gate San Antonio, Texas 78217

Phone: (210) 656-9300 E-mail: [email protected]

3. Results of this non-destruction hazardous material survey work is presented in the "LIMITED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS (Asbestos, Lead, PCB & Mercury) SURVEY" with on-site inspection performed on 01 November 2016.

4. Materials surveyed, sampled and tested are included in this Section for informational purposes only:

a. Neither AAFES, the Contracting Officer nor the Architect-Engineer can guarantee the accuracy, validity or conditions from the information presented.

b. Neither AAFES, the Contracting Officer nor the Architect-Engineer assume any responsibility for the Contractor’s interpretation of the information presented.

HAZMAT INVESTIGATION & REPORT 02 81 10-2

1.3 SURVEY INFORMATION

A. Information shown on the following pages is bound herein for the offerer’s benefit.

1. Offerers shall realize the possible variation of conditions related to the non-destructive nature of this Survey and information presented.

2. Contractor shall assume responsibility for any conclusions interpreted from the data and shall be responsible for any consequences of acting on conclusions obtained.

B. The complete hazardous materials survey is bound on the following 24 pages with the following major Table of Contents:

A. GENERAL, Page 1.

B. ASBESTOS, Pages 1-5.

C. LEAD BASED PAINT, Pages 6-8.

D. POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBs), Pages 8-9.

E. MERCURY, Pages 10-11.

F. OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES, Pages 11-12.

Appendix A – Asbestos Lab Reports & Chain of Custody, 8 Pages.

Appendix B – Photographs, 2 Pages.

Appendix C – XRF Measurements, 2 Pages.

END 02 81 10.

Hazardous Conditions/Hazardous Materials Survey AEHS, Inc.

Building 380, Fort Sam Houston, Texas Environmental, Health, and Safety Consulting

November 2016

1

Hazardous Conditions/Hazardous Materials Survey

Building 380

Fort Sam Houston, Texas

A. GENERAL

This report is divided into five sections corresponding to the Media addressed.

The respective assessment media included Asbestos, Lead, Polychlorinated

Biphenyls, Mercury, and Ozone Depleting Substances. The on-site inspections

were performed by Matthew Louderback under the overall direction of Ronald M.

Bishop. Matt Louderback is a Texas Department of State Health Services

(TDSHS) licensed Asbestos Inspector (No. 60-2816) and Lead Risk Assessor (No.

2070871). Ron Bishop is a TDSHS licensed Asbestos Consultant, Lead Risk

Assessor, Lead Project Designer, and Mold Consultant as well as a Certified

Industrial Hygienist, Certified Safety Executive, Registered Sanitarian, Diplomate

in Environmental Health, and Registered Environmental Professional, Registered

Environmental Manager, Certified Environmental and Safety Compliance Officer,

and Green Consultant.

B. ASBESTOS

1.0. GENERAL.

1.1. Construction materials containing asbestos have been used extensively in buildings

because it possesses excellent properties for fire-proofing, insulation, and condensation

control. Asbestos may be found in: (1) cement products; (2) spray applied or trowel applied

materials on ceiling, walls, and other surfaces; (3) insulation on pipes, boilers, tanks, ducts,

and other equipment; (4) vinyl floor tiles; (5) roofing; (6) flooring coatings; and (7) other

miscellaneous products.

1.2. Friable materials are those materials that when dry can be crumbled, pulverized, or

reduced to powder by hand pressure. Material that contains more than one percent asbestos by

weight is considered to be asbestos containing material. Some of these asbestos-containing

building materials are not considered friable now, but could become friable if not properly

managed and maintained under an asbestos management program.

1.3. The concern about exposure to asbestos in buildings is based on evidence linking



November 2016

2

various respiratory diseases with occupational exposure in the shipbuilding, mining, milling,

and fabricating industries. The presence of asbestos in a building does not mean that there is a

significant health risk to building occupants. As long as asbestos-containing materials remain

in good condition and are not disturbed, exposure is unlikely. Through proper control of

building operations and maintenance activities, disturbance or damage to asbestos-containing

materials is minimized, thus limiting the building occupant's exposure to airborne asbestos

fibers.

1.4. Building alterations and/or demolition require knowledge of what materials contain

asbestos and if they will be removed or disturbed during the project. Under the Clean Air Act,

EPA has issued a National Emission Standard for Asbestos (40 CFR 61.140 - 61.156). This

Standard regulates reporting requirements, work practices, waste disposal, and emissions from

facility modification and/or demolition operations. The Standard applies only to materials

containing more than one percent asbestos. The State of Texas has adopted a set of

regulations (25 TAC 295.31 - 295.70) known as "Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules"

which govern asbestos removal, encapsulation, or enclosure, including licensing and

regulation, in all buildings of public occupancy or access. Any disturbance or removal of

ACBM in the building or facilities are subject to this Texas Statute.

2.0. BACKGROUND.

2.1. AEHS, Inc. was contacted by Harlan Bohnsack to perform Hazardous Materials

inspections at Building 380, Fort Sam Houston, Texas.

2.2. The facility to be inspected was a restaurant scheduled for demolition.

3.0. SCOPE OF WORK.

3.1. The asbestos inspection was performed on 1 November 2016 and consisted of visual

assessments to determine the presence of suspect ACBM. Bulk samples of suspect ACBM

(materials which possibly contain asbestos, as determined by an accredited EPA AHERA

Building Inspector/Consultant) were collected. The visual inspection, bulk sampling, and

inspection documentation was performed by Matt Louderback [Asbestos Inspector (No. 60-

2816)].

3.2. AEHS, Inc. is a TDSHS Licensed Asbestos Constant Agency (No.10-0335), PCM

Laboratory (No. 30-0295), and Training Provider (No. 00-0068).

3.3. The specific objectives of the survey were to:



November 2016

3

Perform a visual inspection and physical assessment following the Asbestos

Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) protocol as a guideline to identify,

quantify, and assess accessible friable and non-friable ACBM;

Collect and analyze bulk samples of suspect material for asbestos content and

identification by an American Industrial Hygiene Association Accredited

Laboratory that is also licensed by the Texas Department of State Health Services;

Ensure the technical quality of all work by using the AHERA protocol and a

TDSHS licensed consultant and inspector for the inspection.

ssue a final report that includes findings, bulk sample locations, and confirmed

asbestos-containing building materials.

4.0. DESCRIPTION. The inspection was of the interior and exterior surfaces of the building.

5.0. INVESTIGATIVE METHODS.

5.1. Visual Inspection.

5.1.1. Building materials were inspected and assessed using the methods presented

in the federal AHERA regulations (40 CFR, Part 763) as a guideline. The procedures

mandated are considered the industry standard and are applied to all surveys performed by

AEHS, Inc.

5.1.2. The suspect ACBM consisted of a wallboard/float mud, panel mastic, three (3) types

of ceiling tile, stucco, and roof penetration mastic.

5.2. Bulk Sampling.

5.2.1. Bulk samples of all homogeneous materials from identified functional spaces

containing suspect ACBM were collected. A homogeneous material is defined as a

surfacing material, thermal system insulation, or miscellaneous material that is uniform in

use, color and texture. Examples of homogeneous materials include:

Pipe insulation produced by the same manufacturer and installed during the same

time period;

Floor or ceiling tile of identical size, color and/or pattern;

Sprayed-on acoustical ceiling materials located in contiguous areas; and

Trowelled on plaster of same texture and location.



November 2016

4

5.2.2. A functional space is defined as any spatially distinct unit within a building that

contains identifiable populations of current or previous building occupants. Examples of

functional spaces include:

Office areas,

Exam Rooms, and

Locker rooms.

The functional space concept is helpful in determining the use and occupancy of building

areas containing confirmed ACBM. Knowing the types of occupants and their use of an

area also may influence the selection of an asbestos management option and/or corrective

action. If multiple corrective actions are necessary, the occupancy and use of individual

areas may also become important factors when establishing the priority, or ranking, of each

corrective action.

5.2.3. Prior to obtaining the samples, all friable suspect material are sprayed with amended

(surfactant added) water to minimize fiber release. Small pieces of the suspect material

were sampled by cutting off a sufficient quantity of the wetted suspect material in an

inconspicuous location and securing the sample in a plastic bag. Samples were extracted

from the center of the wetted area. The tool used to collect the suspect sample was then

cleaned to ensure no cross-contamination occurred between samples. A plastic bag was

used to contain the samples of the suspect material and quickly sealed to prevent the escape

of the material or the introduction of ACBM contamination from outside sources.

5.3. Bulk Sample Analysis.

5.3.1. All bulk samples collected during this survey were analyzed by Environmental

Hazards Services, Inc.’s Laboratory in Richmond, Virginia. Environmental Hazards

Services laboratory is accredited under the National Institute of Standards and

Technology’s National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) and the

American Industrial Hygiene Association. Additionally, the laboratory is a TDSHS

licensed (No. 30-0188) Asbestos Laboratory (Polarized Light Microscopy). Their address,

telephone number, and quality assurance review are depicted on their laboratory reports.

5.3.2. All asbestos samples were analyzed using Polarized Light Microscopy/Dispersion

Staining (PLM/DS) techniques in accordance with methodology approved by the U.S.

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), method number 600/R-93/116. The percentage

of asbestos present in the samples was determined on the basis of a visual area estimation

as set forth in 40 CFR Part 763, Appendix A, Subpart F, Section 1.2 and 1.7.2.4. The

lower limit of reliable detection for asbestos using the PLM/DS method is approximately

1% by volume.

5.3.2.1. The Environmental Protection Agency considers materials with greater than



November 2016

5

one percent (>1%) asbestos content to be asbestos containing. Therefore, when asbestos

containing building material (ACBM) appear in this report, it should be interpreted as

meaning the sample(s) taken contained greater than (>1%) asbestos and is considered a

regulated material. However, material that contains equal to or less than one percent is

not considered to be asbestos containing material. If the results of sampling indicate

that the asbestos containing material is a trace or up to 10% asbestos, the results must be

verified by polarized light microscopy point counting or presumed to be asbestos. For

this survey, AEHS personnel used their experience with similar materials.

5.3.2.2. When “No Asbestos Detected” (NAD) appears in this report, it should be

interpreted as meaning no asbestos was observed in the sample material above the

reliable limit of detection for the PLM/DS method.

5.3.2.3. The Texas Department of State Health Services requires a minimum of three

samples to be collected from each homogeneous area. In order for a material to be

considered negative, all samples must be negative. On the other hand, if one of the

three samples is positive, then the material is considered positive.

6.0. RESULTS OF INSPECTION.

6.1. Analytical Results. The analytical results from the inspection and chain of custody are

at Appendix A. A total of twenty-one (21) samples were collected which resulted in twenty-

three (23) analyses due to layering.

6.2. Photographs. Photographs are at Appendix B.

6.3. Summary Positive Asbestos Containing Building Materials. None. The laboratory

results indicated “NAD – No Asbestos Detected” in all samples.

7.0. ASSESSMENT.

7.1. Friable Asbestos Material. None.

7.2. Non-Friable Materials. None.

8.0. RECOMMENDATIONS. Maintain a copy of this report with the project files.



November 2016

6

C. LEAD BASE PAINT

1.0. GENERAL.

1.1. Background.

1.1.1. Inspections and risk assessments for lead base paint (LBP) hazards emerged in

response to an insurance problem in the nation’s public housing programs after children in

housing units throughout the nation were found to contain elevated blood lead levels.

When investigations pursued, the houses were found to contain LBP where deterioration

was extensive and the children were ingesting the paint directly (chewing on the sills, etc.)

or indirectly by placing contaminated items into their mouths.

1.1.2. At the present time, many of the standards used in lead hazard assessments are not

health-based standards. A limit that will not produce adverse health affects has not been

established for lead content of paint, dust or in soil. This is due in part to differences in

individual behavior, particularly with respect to hand-to-mouth activity. However, the

limits that are established in the various standards will significantly reduce the health

impacts. Also, these limits dictate requirements for action, if exceeded.

1.1.3. The reason lead base paint inspections are conducted for commercial facilities is to

determine potential worker exposure and environmental insult during demolition and

disposal of the wastes based on the lead content.

1.2. Standards. As indicated in the Table 1 below, there are various standards that currently

define lead base paint. The applicable standards to this project include the OSHA

requirements, for worker protection performing the renovation, and the environmental

requirements for disposal of materials painted with lead base paint.

Table 1

Lead Standards

Standard/Regulation Level Remarks

Consumer Product Safety Commission 600 ppm

0.06%

parts per million

% by weight

HUD – 24 CFR Part 35 0.5% by weight

1.0 mg/cm2

NLLAP Accredited Lab

XRF

TELLR - Texas Environmental Lead

Reduction Rules

0.5% by weight

1.0 mg/cm2

NLLAP Accredited Lab

XRF

OSHA - 29 CFR 1926.62 - Lead in

Construction; Interim Final Rule Any amount Worker Protection

EPA - 40 CFR 261 - Identification and 5 ppm TCLP TCLP - Toxicity Characteristic



November 2016

7

Standard/Regulation Level Remarks

Listing of Hazardous Wastes Leaching Procedure

1.3. Lead Risk Assessment.

1.3.1. A Lead Risk Assessment is to determine, and then report on the existence, nature,

severity, and location of lead base paint hazards in residential dwellings through on-site

investigations. Normally, risk assessments determine the immediately available sources of

lead in a dwelling and provides advice on long-term and/or short-term responses to any

hazards found. In general, inspections measure lead base paint concentrations while risk

assessments measure lead base paint hazards.

1.3.2. The specific differences between an Inspection and a Risk Assessment are depicted

in Table 2 below.

Table 2

Inspections/Risk Assessments

Inspections Risk Assessments

Measure the concentration of

lead in the paint on a surface-by-

surface basis

Measure the level of lead in dust and soil and

deteriorated paint

Identify the presence of lead

base paint on all components

Identity the location and nature of all lead base

paint hazards (primary prevention)

Allow the owner to avoid

treating paint that is not lead

base paint

Consider information about past maintenance

and management practices

Allow the owner to treat all lead hazards

present

Limited Risk Assessment/Inspection

A combination of the Inspection and Risk Assessment tailored to the specific

renovations to be performed under the specifications.

2.0. APPROACH.

2.1. Limited Inspection. A limited lead base paint inspection was conducted on 1 November

2016 at the location as described in paragraph 4 of the Asbestos Section.

2.2. Credentials.

2.2.1. The Limited Inspection was performed by Matthew Louderback. Matt is a TDSHS

certified Lead Risk Assessor (2070871).



November 2016

8

2.2.2. AEHS, Inc. is a TDSHS certified/licensed Lead Firm (No. 21100283) and Lead

Training Provider (No. 20439)

2.3. Methodology. XRF measurements were taken at representative locations on interior

painted surfaces. XRF Niton Model XLp 300A (Serial No. 10381) was used in the testing for

lead base paint. Calibrations were performed prior to and after testing each building in

accordance with Performance Characteristics Sheets (PCS). See Appendix C for a table of the

results.

3.0. RESULTS.

3.1. Measurements. Thirty (30) measurements were made with the XRF for lead content.

3.2. Results. Based on the XRF measurements, AEHS, Inc. has determined that the

following components contain lead in the exterior and interior surfaces tested during the LBP

inspection or should be considered positive due to the mixture of surfaces:

None

4.0. DISCUSSION/CONCLUSIONS.

4.1. The HUD/EPA guidance for target housing is 1 mg/cm2 while the EPA Toxic

Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for lead is 5 parts per million (ppm).

4.2. The OSHA requirements, as promulgated in 29 CFR 1926.62 (Lead Standard for the

Construction Industry), considers any amount of lead as lead containing paint; however, any

measured surface below 0.1 mg/cm2 should be considered negative for lead base paint.

5.0. RECOMMENDATION. Maintain a copy of this report with the project files.

D. POLYCHOLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBs)

1.0 GENERAL.

1.1. Background.

1.1.1. Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) are synthetic chemicals that were manufactured

for use in various industrial and commercial applications - including oil in electrical and



November 2016

9

hydraulic equipment, and plasticizers in paints, plastics and rubber products - because of

their non-flammability, chemical stability, high boiling point and electrical insulation

properties. PCBs (polychlorinated biphenyls) belong to a broad family of organic

chemicals known as chlorinated hydrocarbons.

1.1.2. Light ballasts are the primary electric components of fluorescent light fixtures and

are generally located within the fixture under a metal cover plate. The ballast units are

generally composed of a transformer to reduce the incoming voltage, a small capacitor

(which may contain PCBs), and possibly a thermal cut-off switch, capacitors, or a safety

fuse. These components are surrounded by a tar-like substance that is designed to muffle

the noise that is inherent in the operation of the ballast. This tar-like coating covers the

small capacitor. When a ballast unit fails, excessive heat can be generated which will melt

or burn the tar material, creating a characteristic foul odor.

1.2. Standards.

1.2.1. Congress enacted the Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) to control the

distribution, use, and disposal of harmful chemicals, including PCBs. Through TSCA,

Congress established a number of requirements for identifying and controlling toxic

chemical hazards that pose risks to human health and the environment.

1.2.2. With respect to transformers, the following was extracted from 40 CFR 761.2: “Any person must assume that a capacitor manufactured prior to July 2, 1979, whose PCB

concentration is not established contains ≥500 ppm PCBs. Any person may assume that a

capacitor manufactured after July 2, 1979, is non-PCB (i.e., < 50 ppm PCBs). If the date of

manufacture is unknown, any person must assume the capacitor contains ≥500 ppm PCBs. Any

person may assume that a capacitor marked at the time of manufacture with the statement ‘No

PCBs’ in accordance with §761.40(g) is non-PCB.”

2.0. APPROACH. Based on DoD requirements, the approach taken for this inspection was to

view a representative sample of transformers to determine if they were labeled “No PCBs”. If

they were not, then the dates of manufacturing would be the determining factor as to sample or

not.

3.0. RESULTS. All of the transformers/ballasts observed indicated “No PCBs”. See

Photographs, Appendix B.

4.0. RECOMMENDATION. Maintain a copy of this report.



November 2016

10

E. MERCURY

1.0. GENERAL.

1.1. Background.

1.1.1. Mercury thermostats contain bimetal coils that contract and expand with the room

temperature. When the coil contracts or expands, it moves the mercury bulb (switch) that

opens or closes a circuit to activate the heat or cooling source. A mercury thermostat may

contain one or more switches, depending on how many heating and cooling systems it

activates. Additionally, some equipment switches contain mercury or have mercury

thermometers.

1.1.2. It is estimated that the total amount of mercury used in a thermostat is four (4)

grams.

1.2. Standard.

1.2.1. There are various environmental standards for mercury to include limits for ambient

water, drinking water, sludge, fish, ground water, and hazardous waste. The hazardous

waste standard is the Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure limit of 0.2 ppm.

1.2.2. Thermostats would have to be disposed of as hazardous waste.

1.2.3. Switches containing mercury would have to be disposed of as hazardous waste.

1.2.4. Fluorescent and Mercury vapor lamps would have to be disposed of as Universal

waste.

2.0. APPROACH. Heating and cooling control devices would be visually observed to

determine if they contained mercury. Additionally, lamps would be assessed.

3.0. FINDINGS. Thermostats were present that contained mercury. See Photographs,

Appendix B.

4.0. RECOMMENDATIONS.

4.1. Maintain a copy of this report.



November 2016

11

4.2. The thermostats that contained mercury within the building should be managed as

hazardous waste.

4.3. The fluorescent lamps must be disposed of as universal wastes.

4.4. All individuals handling the mercury containing thermostats must be trained in

accordance with 29 CFR 1910.120.

F. OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

1.0. GENERAL.

1.1. Background.

1.1.1. In the United States, ozone-depleting substances (ODS) are regulated as class I or

class II controlled substances. Class I substances have a higher ozone depletion

potential and have been completely phased out in the U.S.; with a few exceptions, this

means no one can produce or import class I substances. Class II substances are all

hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs), which are transitional substitutes for many class I

substances. New production and import of most HCFCs will be phased out by 2020. The

most common HCFC in use today is HCFC-22 or R-22, a refrigerant still used in existing

air conditioners and refrigeration equipment.

1.1.2. Classifications of refrigerants are indicated below:

CFCs- R-11, R-12, R-13, R-113, R-114, R-500, R-502, R-503 (Chlorofluorocarbons)

HCFCs – R-22, R-123, R-124, R-401A & B, R-402A, R-406a, R-408a, R-409

(Hydrochlorofluorocarbons)

HFCs- R-23, R-134a, R-404A, R-407c, R-410a, R-416A, R-507, 508

(Hydrofluorocarbons)

1.2. Standards.

While there are not specific standards per se, phase out and reclaiming are required.

2.0. APPROACH. Data plates on the refrigeration/cooling equipment were observed and

discussions with maintenance personnel were conducted.



November 2016

12

3.0. FINDINGS.

3.1. R22 refrigerant was being used in the HVAC and cooler, 502 refrigerant was being used

in the freezer, 404 refrigerant was being used in the ice machine, and 134A refrigerant was

being used in the under-counter coolers.

3.2. See Photographs, Appendix B.

4.0. RECOMMENDATIONS.

4.1. Maintain a copy of this report.

4.2. Reclaim R22 and R502.

4.3. Seal the equipment with the R404 and 135 prior to selling to a recycler or reclaim the

refrigerant.

Note: All firms/individuals performing the reclamation must be certified to do so.

DISCLAIMER

This report, which contains inspections/measurements for hazardous material is given for the

sole benefit of the aforementioned client(s). The client expressly confirms their understanding

that the conclusions/ recommendations stated in this report are limited to and based solely upon

the scope of the assignment, and samples and field measurements taken. In addition, the client

understands that any field observations contained herein reflect the conditions present on the date

and time of inspection. No representations or warranties are made or may be implied as to the

validity of their applicability to any other days or times.

Ronald M. Bishop, MPH, CIH

ABIH (814)

TDSHS Asbestos Consultant (10-5492)

TDSHS Lead Risk Assessor/Project Designer (20-70124)/(20-90015)

5 November 2016

Appendix A

Asbestos Lab Results

Asbestos BulkAnalysis Report

Client:

Report Number:

Project/Test Address:

Client Number:

Reported Date:

Received Date:Analyzed Date:

AEHS 11/02/2016

45-5371

11/02/2016

16-11-00208

7469 Whitepine Rd

Telephone: 800.347.4010

Richmond, VA 23237

Environmental Hazards Services, L.L.C.

Ft Sam Houston; B-380; Popeye's; San Antonio, TX

Laboratory ResultsFax Number:210-656-8499

4402 Center GateSan Antonio, TX 78217

11/02/2016

Layer Type AsbestosClient SampleNumber

OtherMaterials

Lab Gross DescriptionLab SampleNumber

White Paint-Like; GrayFibrous Inhomogeneous

16-11-00208-001 CT-A1 60% Cellulose30% Fibrous Glass10% Non-Fibrous

NAD

White Paint-Like; GrayFibrous; Inhomogeneous


NAD



NAD



NAD



NAD

1 of 4Page



NAD



NAD



NAD



NAD

Beige Powdery; Fibrous;Homogeneous

16-11-00208-010 CWS-A10 8% Cellulose92% Non-Fibrous

NAD

White Paint-Like; BrownFibrous; Beige Powdery;Inhomogeneous


NAD

Beige Powdery; Fibrous;Homogeneous


NAD

Environmental Hazards Services, L.L.C

Project/Test Address:Client Number: Report Number:45-5371 16-11-00208

Ft Sam Houston; B-380; Popeye's; SanAntonio, TX

OtherMaterials

AsbestosLab SampleNumber

Layer Type Lab Gross DescriptionClient SampleNumber

2 of 4Page

Tan Adhesive; BrownFibrous; Inhomogeneous

16-11-00208-013 PM-A12 35% Cellulose65% Non-Fibrous

NAD



NAD



NAD

Black Tar-Like; Fibrous;Homogeneous


NAD

Brown Pliable;Homogeneous

16-11-00208-017A PM-A17 100% Non-FibrousOther * NAD

*Pliable Material I

White Pliable;Homogeneous

16-11-00208-017B PM-A17 100% Non-FibrousOther * NAD

*Pliable Material II

Brown Pliable;Homogeneous

16-11-00208-018A PM-A18 100% Non-FibrousOther * NAD

*Pliable Material I

White Pliable;Homogeneous

16-11-00208-018B PM-A18 100% Non-FibrousOther * NAD

*Pliable Material II




OtherMaterials



3 of 4Page

Beige Granular;Homogeneous

16-11-00208-019 STU-A19 100% Non-FibrousNAD





Tasha Eaddy

1% Asbestos

Analyst:

Reporting Limit:

Method:

QC Blank:

QC Sample:

Keleigh King

EPA Method 600/R-93/116, EPA Method 600/M4-82-020

QA/QC Clerk

Reviewed By Authorized Signatory:

88-M22011-4

SRM 1866 Fiberglass

NAD = no asbestos detectedLEGEND:

The condition of the samples analyzed was acceptable upon receipt per laboratory protocol unless otherwise noted on this report. Each distinctcomponent in an inhomogeneous sample was analyzed separately and reported as a composite. Results represent the analysis of samples submittedby the client. Sample location, description, area, volume, etc., was provided by the client. This report cannot be used by the client to claim productendorsement by NVLAP or any agency of the U.S. Government. This report shall not be reproduced except in full, without the written consent of theEnvironmental Hazards Service, L.L.C. California Certification #2319 NY ELAP #11714 NVLAP #101882-0 VELAP 460172. All information concerningsampling location, date, and time can be found on Chain-of-Custody. Environmental Hazards Services, L.L.C. does not perform any sample collection.

Environmental Hazards Services, L.L.C. recommends reanalysis by point count (for more accurate quantification) or Transmission Electron Microscopy(TEM), (for enhanced detection capabilities) for materials regulated by EPA NESHAP (National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants) andfound to contain less than ten percent (<10%) asbestos by polarized light microscopy (PLM). Both services are available for an additional fee.

400 Point Count Analysis, where noted, performed per EPA Method 600/R-93/116 with a Reporting Limit of 0.25%.

* All California samples analyzed by Polarized Light Microscopy, EPA Method 600/M4-82-020, Dec. 1982.




OtherMaterials



4 of 4Page

Appendix B

Photographs

Hazmat Photos Ft. Sam Houston

Building 380

San Antonio, Texas

1. Front of Building Inspected 2. Composite Wall Samples, 3. Roof Penetration Mastic - NAD Ceiling Tiles (Three Types), - NAD No Asbestos Detected

No Asbestos Detected

4. Ceramic Floor Tile – Not 5. Clay Roof Tiles – Not Suspect 6. Walls, Doors, Casings, Jambs,

Suspect etc. - No Lead Detected (NLD)

7. Walls, Doors, Casings, Jambs, 8. Soffits, Beams, Fascia, Doors, 9. Mercury Thermostats – 7

etc. - No Lead Detected (NLD) etc. - No Lead Detected (NLD) Mercury Bulbs in 4 Thermostats.

10. Light Ballasts – No PCB’s 11. Light Ballasts – No PCB’s 12. Under Counter Coolers –

134A Freon Used.

Appendix C

XRF Measurements

Ft. Sam Houston

Building 380

Popeye's Chicken

No. Time Bldg. Room Component Feature Substrate Cond. Color Results PbC

1 11/1/2016 14:29 4.16

2 11/1/2016 15:00 Calibration Negative 0.9


4 11/1/2016 15:01 Calibration Positive 1.1

5 11/1/2016 15:02 380 Exterior Wall Stucco Intact Beige Negative 0

6 11/1/2016 15:02 380 Exterior Door Wood Intact Beige Negative 0

7 11/1/2016 15:02 380 Exterior Door Casing Metal Intact Beige Negative 0

8 11/1/2016 15:02 380 Exterior Door Jamb Metal Intact Beige Negative 0

9 11/1/2016 15:03 380 Exterior Window Trim Wood Intact White Negative 0

10 11/1/2016 15:04 380 Exterior Soffit Metal Intact Beige Negative 0

11 11/1/2016 15:04 380 Exterior Fascia Stucco Intact Beige Negative 0

12 11/1/2016 15:05 380 Exterior Column Stucco Intact Beige Negative 0

13 11/1/2016 15:05 380 Exterior Beam Metal Det Beige Negative 0

14 11/1/2016 15:06 380 Exterior Rafter Metal Det Beige Negative 0

15 11/1/2016 15:06 380 Exterior Porch Ceiling Metal Det Beige Negative 0

16 11/1/2016 15:07 380 Exterior Bench Fiberglass Det Brown Negative 0

17 11/1/2016 15:08 380 Exterior Bollard Metal Det Beige Negative 0

18 11/1/2016 15:09 380 Exterior Fascia Metal Det Brown Negative 0

19 11/1/2016 15:09 380 Exterior Fence Wood Det Brown Negative 0

20 11/1/2016 15:10 380 Exterior Door Metal Det Beige Negative 0.03

21 11/1/2016 15:12 380 Interior Wall Drywall Det Orange Negative 0

22 11/1/2016 15:12 380 Interior Wall Wood Intact Varnish Negative 0.01

23 11/1/2016 15:13 380 Interior Wall Drywall Intact Yellow Negative 0

24 11/1/2016 15:13 380 Interior Chair Rail 1 Wood Intact Varnish Negative 0.04

25 11/1/2016 15:14 380 Interior Chair Rail 2 Wood Intact Varnish Negative 0

26 11/1/2016 15:14 380 Interior Wall Panel Intact Varnish Negative 0

27 11/1/2016 15:15 380 Interior Wall Drywall Intact Orange Negative 0

28 11/1/2016 15:16 380 Interior Door Wood Det Brown Negative 0

29 11/1/2016 15:16 380 Interior Door Jamb Metal Det Brown Negative 0

30 11/1/2016 15:16 380 Interior Door Casing Metal Det Brown Negative 0.01

31 11/1/2016 15:16 380 Interior Door Wood Det Brown Negative 0

32 11/1/2016 15:17 380 Interior Column Metal Det White Negative 0.01

33 11/1/2016 15:18 380 Interior Door Wood Det Varnish Negative 0

34 11/1/2016 15:19 380 Interior Wall Drywall Det White Negative 0


36 11/1/2016 17:14 Calibration Positive 1.2


DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK Section 02 81 33 – REMOVAL OF POLY- CHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCB's) (JBSA-SH)

REMOVAL OF POLYCHLORINATED 02 81 33-1 BIPHENYLS (PCB's) (JBSA-SH)

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. This Section outlines procedures for the legal removal, proper packaging and legal disposal of any lighting ballasts/capacitors found to contain polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's) at JBSA-Sam Houston in accordance with Department of Defense and State of Texas rules and regulations.

1. The Environmental Management Division (502ABW/CEIE) is the office of primary responsibility for this Section of the specifications and for the Contractor's ultimate removal of PCB’s from the site for legal disposal.

B. Materials containing PCB’s that result from cleanup of spills caused by the Contractor shall be the full responsibility of the Contractor.

1. These materials shall be contained and disposed of at the Contractor’s expense in full compliance with AAFES, Environmental Management Division (502 ABW/CEIE), Department of Defense and State of Texas rules, regulations and requirments.

C. Base Bid:


a. Notifications as legally required by State and Federal agencies, AAFES and JBSA-Sam Houston.

b. Identification of all components and materials that contain polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's) prior to structure demolition including, but not limited to:

1.) All fluorescent and HID lighting ballasts/capacitors. 2.) Electrical or hydraulic equipment oil.

c. Legal removal, packaging, transporting and disposal of all components and materials that are identified as containing polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's) prior to structure demolition including, but not limited to:

1.) Fluorescent and HID lighting ballasts/capacitors. 2.) Electrical or hydraulic equipment oil.

d. Proper cleanup of spills caused by Contractor.

1.) Containment. 2.) Notify CEIE. 3.) Cleanup. 4.) Disposal.

e. Preparation of hazardous waste disposal manifest:

1.) Obtain required signatures from JBSA-Sam Houston for their records. 2.) Provide copies of fully processed waste manifests to the AAFES and

the Architect-Engineer upon legal disposal.

f. Legal disposal of ballasts/capacitors containing PCB's in compliance with Federal, State and JBSA-Sam Houston rules and regulation outlined in this Section.


g. Communication and cooperation with Environmental Management Division (502 ABW/CEIE) in accordance with this Section.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of JBSA-Sam Houston. 2. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work. 3. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule. 4. Section 01 35 43 – AAFES Environmental Protection. 5. Section 01 73 29 – Cutting & Patching. 6. Section 02 41 16 – Structure Demolition. 7. Division 26 – Electrical.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

1. Title 40 Code of Federal Regulations, Part 761, all applicable Subparts, the most recent amendments.

B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

1. Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1910.120, 1920.1200 and Part 1926; all applicable Subparts, and the most recent amendments.

C. Department of Transportation (DOT):

1. Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 171-180 and other applicable parts; and the most recent amendments.

1.4 SPILLS

A. Immediately report PCB spills of any size:

1. During working hours to Glenn Williams (502ABW/CEICA), Environmental Management Division, (210) 201-5063.

2. After hours emergencies shall be reported by dialing 911.

B. All materials and/or surfaces contaminated with PCBs spilled by the Contractor during the work shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the cleanup, testing for contamination, restoration of area to or near original condition, and disposal of any wastes to the satisfaction of JBSA Sam Houston Environmental Management Division, AAFES and all other Federal and State of Texas regulatory agencies.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Installation Required Submittals:

1. Within twenty-four hours after the Contractor has completed ballast removal and containerized the ballasts, the Contractor shall complete a regulated waste manifest form and submit it to JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental Management Division representative for coordination.


2. The CES Environmental Management Division representative shall then sign the waste manifest authorizing scheduling for picking up containerized ballasts.

3. The CES Environmental Management Division representative shall ensure at this time the 30-day limit for temporary storage is not exceeded.

4. Contractor shall provide transportation of the ballasts for legal disposal in a land fill certified by the EPA to receive PCB containing components.

B. Post-Disposal Submittals:

1. Submit fully executed disposal manifest with original signatures to JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental Management Division or as directed by representative.

2. Provide one copy of fully executed disposal manifest to:

a. AAFES representatives:

1.) Contracting Officer. 2.) General Manager. 3.) Project Manager.

b. Architect-Engineer.

3. Retain sufficient copies of fully executed disposal manifest for submittal in each set of O & M Manuals, in accordance with Section 01 77 00, Project Closeout.

1.6 PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all personal protective equipment (PPE) required by 29 CFR 1910.120 to perform PCB spill cleanup operations.

B. The Contractor shall also provide the necessary PPE for removal of PCB ballasts from light fixtures.

C. This equipment is to be disposable to the extent allowable by regulations.

D. Protective equipment shall include, but not limited to:

1. Gloves. 2. Coveralls. 3. Safety shoes. 4. Safety glasses. 5. Hardhats.

1.7 DEFINITIONS

A. Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB): Any chemical substance that is limited to the biphenyl molecule that has been chlorinated to varying degrees or any combination of substances that contains such substance.

B. Lighting Ballast: A device that electrically controls light fixtures and includes a capacitor containing 0.1 kg. or less of dielectric fluid.

1. PCB Light Ballast: A light ballast that contains PCB's at a concentration above 50 PPM.

a. A light ballast that is manufactured prior to 02 July 1979 shall be considered as a PCB ballast.

b. A light ballast that is NOT marked “No PCBs” shall be considered as a PCB ballast.


2. Non-PCB Ballast: A light ballast that is manufactured after 02 July 1979 or specifically marked by the manufacturer as not containing PCB or for which manufacturer’s literature is available by serial or catalog number to support that the item does not contain PCB.

a. Contractor is encouraged to recycle non-PCB ballasts, light fixtures and other metals.

b. JBSA-Sam Houston Recycling Center may allow Contractor to recycle non-PCB ballasts and other recyclable materials.

3. For more information contact CEIE at (210) 221-5063.

C. PCB Debris: Any debris, such as light fixtures and personal protective equipment, that is contaminated with PCB.

D. PCB Spill: The intentional and/or unintentional spill, leak and other uncontrolled discharges where the release results in any quantity of PCB running off or about to run off the external surface of the equipment, and the contamination resulting from those releases.

2. PRODUCTS (Not Used).

3. EXECUTION

3.1 SECURITY OF SITES

A. Install physical barriers (i.e. self-supporting barricades, roping, caution tape, etc.) to secure work site where PCB ballasts are being removed and stored.

3.2 SPILL CONTAINMENT

A. The Contractor shall install temporary covers (i.e. plastic drop cloths) over surfaces (floor, carpet, tables) that may come in contact with PCB ballasts.

3.3 EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION

A. Any non-disposable item contaminated with PCB shall be decontaminated in accordance with 40 CFR 761.

3.4 REMOVAL AND PACKAGING

A. Ballasts shall be visually inspected to determine whether or not they are marked “No PCB”.

1. If ballasts are not marked “No PCB”, treat them as containing PCBs. 2. If PCB, remove the ballast(s) from the fixture. 3. Do not puncture or damage the ballast in any way.

B. Place PCB light ballasts into 30 or 55 gallon open head steel (DOT type 1A2) shipping drums with a packaging design type performance standard of either ‘X’, ‘Y’ or ‘Z’.

1. Do NOT place more than one hundred fifty F40 (ballasts from four foot light fixtures) or more than seventy-five F96 (ballasts from eight foot fixtures) light ballasts into one drum.

2. The gross weight of loaded drums shall not weigh more than 600 pounds.


3. The Contractor shall provide drums that meet all Department of Transportation specifications and be in good condition.

4. Leaking PCB ballasts shall be wrapped in plastic and placed in drums with other non-leaking ballasts.

5. Mark the drums as containing PCB light ballasts, the facility building number and the date when the first ballast was placed within the container.

C. Any contaminated portions of the light fixture, resulting from leaking PCB ballasts, shall be cut away and placed into separate 30 or 55 gallon open head steel drums (DOT type 1A2 with a packaging design type performance standard of either ‘X’, ‘Y’ or ‘Z’).

1. Do not mix ballasts and debris. 2. Any contaminated plastic or personal protective equipment shall also be placed

into these drums for disposal. 3. Mark the drums as containing PCB debris, the facility building number and the

date the debris was placed within the container.

D. At the time of use, the Contractor shall mark each container individually with the following:

1. The PCB label as shown in Figure 1 at the end of this Section. 2. The container accumulation start date (i.e. date removed from service). 3. Contents of container, i.e. light ballasts, debris. 4. The building number from which the ballasts were removed.

E. Ensure that all drum lids are secure and fully tightened with bolt ring pointing downward.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for repackaging any containers that are considered by Environmental Management to be unsuitable for shipment.

3.5 TEMPORARY STORAGE

A. The temporary storage location for the drummed PCB ballasts shall be approved by Environmental Management.

1. Drums of PCB items shall be stored indoors.

B. The Contractor shall not have any PCB light ballasts in temporary storage for over 30 calendar days.

1. Do not relocate items for the purpose of extending the storage time. 2. The Contractor shall contact CEIE at (210) 221-5063 if the thirty-day storage limit

will be exceeded.

3.6 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF PCB CONTAINERS

A. PCB containers shall be removed from temporary storage by the Contractor upon authorization from JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental Management Division.

1. Authorization may be construed to be given upon signature of waste manifest by Environmental Management Division representative.

B. Legal disposal of PCB's or PCB-contaminated items is the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Submit required waste manifests to all parties as indicated upon legal disposal in full compliance with Federal, State of Texas, JBSA-Sam Houston and AAFES rules, regulations and requirements.


CAUTION CONTAINS PCBs

(Polychlorinated Biphenyls)

A toxic environmental contaminant requiring

special handling and disposal in accordance with

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Regulations

40 CFR 761 For Disposal Information contact

the nearest U.S.E.P.A. Office.

3.7 AAFES AND JBSA-SAM HOUSTON PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall be liable for all claims, costs, losses, damages and other expenses AAFES, JBSA-Sam Houston and the Architect-Engineer may incur as a result of the Contractor’s negligence or willful misconduct during the performance of this contract.

B. In case of accident or spill, call toll free the U.S. Coast Guard National Response Center (800) 424-8802.

END 02 81 33. Figure 1:

Large PCB Mark. Letters and striping shall be on a yellow background and shall be sufficiently durable to equal or exceed the life (including storage for disposal) of the PCB article, PCB equipment, or PCB container.

The size of the mark shall be at least 15.25 cm (6 inches) on each side.

Facility Number: JBSA-Sam Houston, Building 380

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK Section 02 81 34 – REMOVAL OF MERCURY-CONTAINING LAMPS & DEVICES (JBSA-SH)

REMOVAL OF MERCURY-CONTAINING 02 81 34-1 LAMPS & DEVICES (JBSA-SH)

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. This Section outlines procedures for the legal removal, proper packaging and legal disposal of mercury-containing lamps (fluorescent, mercury vapor, metal halide and high pressure sodium lamps), mercury-containing thermostats and tritium containing exit signs at JBSA-Sam Houston in accordance with Department of Defense and State of Texas rules and regulations.

1. The Environmental Management Division (502ABW/CEIE) is the office of primary responsibility for this Section of the specifications and for the Contractor's ultimate removal of mercury from the site for legal disposal.

B. Universal Waste:

1. Lamps containing mercury are classified by the Department of Defense and the State of Texas as Universal Waste.

2. These materials shall be contained and recycled or disposed of at the Contractor's expense in full compliance with AAFES, Environmental Management Division (502ABW/CEIE), Department of Defense and State of Texas rules, regulations and requirements.

C. Hazardous Waste:

1. Thermostats with mercury bulb switches are estimated to contain four (4) grams of mercury and shall be classified as hazardous waste.

2. Self-illuminating exit signs containing tritium, a low-level radioactive material, shall be classified as hazardous waste.

3. These materials shall be contained and disposed of at the Contractor's expense in full compliance with AAFES, Environmental Management Division (502 ABW/ CEIE), Department of Defense and State of Texas rules, regulations and requirements.

D. Base Bid:


a. Notifications as legally required by State and Federal agencies, AAFES and JBSA-Sam Houston.

b. Identification of mercury-containing lamps for removal and disposal prior to structure demolition including, but not limited to:

1.) Fluorescent. 2.) Mercury vapor. 3.) Metal halide. 4.) High pressure sodium.

c. Identification of thermostats with mercury bulb switches for removal and disposal prior to structure demolition.

d. Identification of self-illuminating exit signs containing tritium for removal and disposal prior to structure demolition.


e. Legal removal, packaging, transporting and disposal of all mercury-containing lamps, thermostats with mercury bulb switches and self-illuminating exit signs containing tritium.

f. Proper cleanup of broken lamps:

1.) Containment. 2.) Notify CEIE. 3.) Cleanup. 4.) Disposal.

g. Proper cleanup of damaged thermostats leaking mercury:

1.) Emergency procedures. 2.) Containment. 3.) Notify CEIE. 4.) Cleanup. 5.) Disposal.

h. Preparation of disposal manifests for:

1.) Universal waste disposal including, but not limited to:

a) Mercury-containing lamps:

2.) Hazardous waste disposal including:

a) Thermostats containing mercury bulb switches. b) Self-illuminating exit signs containing tritium.

3.) Obtain required signatures from JBSA-Sam Houston for their records. 4.) Provide copies of fully processed waste manifests to the AAFES and

the Architect-Engineer upon legal disposal.

i. Legal recycling or disposal of mercury-containing lamps in compliance with Federal, State and JBSA-Sam Houston rules and regulation outlined in this Section.

j. Legal disposal of thermostats containing mercury bulb switches and self-illuminating exit signs containing tritium.

k. Communication and cooperation with Environmental Management Division (502 ABW/CEIE) in accordance with this Section.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of JBSA-Sam Houston. 2. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work. 3. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule. 4. Section 01 35 43 – AAFES Environmental Protection. 5. Section 01 73 29 – Cutting & Patching. 6. Section 02 41 16 – Structure Demolition. 7. Division 26 – Electrical.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Environmental, Health and Safety Regulations.

1. Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Parts 1910.120, 1910.1200 and 1926 – OSHA.


2. 10 CFR Part 31.5 – Radioactive Waste. 3. 40 CFR Subtitle C – Hazardous Waste. 4. 49 CFR 171-178 – U.S. Department of Transportation. 5. State of Texas adopted "Universal Waste Rule". 6. All other applicable state and local laws and regulations.

1.4 HAZARD COMMUNICATION/PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

A. Mercury-containing lamps pose a potential hazard if broken.

1. Breakage of lamps may result in exposure to broken glass, phosphor powder dust and elemental mercury vapor.

2. No adverse health effects are expected from occasional exposure to a small quantity of broken lamps, but prolonged or frequent exposure should be avoided through the use of appropriate ventilation and hand/eye/respiratory protection.

B. Thermostats containing mercury bulb switches pose a potential hazard if vessel containing mercury is broken or leaking.

1. Breaking of mercury bulb switches may result in exceeding limits if mercury leaches into ambient water, drinking water, sludge, fish, ground water and hazardous waste.

2. Other health effects could result from mercury exposure through absorption or ingestion and should be avoided in addition to containment procedures to keep mercury from infiltrating or leaching into water sources listed in 1. above.

C. Self-illuminating exit signs should not pose an eminent with short term exposure when handled and legally disposed of in accordance with cited rules and regulations.

D. The Contractor shall provide hazard communication training and the appropriate personal protective equipment to all employees as required by 29 CFR 1910.120 and 1910.1200.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Mercury-containing lamps include the following:

1. Fluorescent (lengths greater than 1.5 feet). 2. Fluorescent U shape and circular. 3. High pressure sodium. 4. Metal halide. 5. Mercury vapor.

B. Mercury-containing thermostats contain bi-metal coils that contract and expand with room temperature moving a mercury bulb switch that opens or closes a circuit and include the following hazardous component:

1. The bulb, typically an elongated thin glass vessel, containing a quantity of mercury.

C. Tritium-containing exit signs include the following:

1. Exit signs that are self-illuminating identified by lighting the "EXIT" portion of the sign plate without a power source.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Notifications:


1. At least forty-eight hours prior to starting lamp removal, thermostats containing mercury removal and self-illuminating exit sign removal the Contractor shall contact JBSA-Sam Houston Environmental Management Division at (210) 201-5063 and provide the scheduled removal start date.

B. Installation Required Submittals:

1. Universal Waste Manifest Form:

a. Within twenty-four hours after the Contractor has completed lamp removal and containerized lamps, the Contractor shall complete a universal waste manifest form.

b. Form shall be submitted to JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental Management Division representative for coordination.

2. Hazardous Waste Manifest Form:

a. Within twenty-four hours after the Contractor has completed removal and containerized thermostats containing mercury bulb switches and self-illuminating exit signs containing tritium, the Contractor shall complete a hazardous waste manifest form.

b. Form shall be submitted to JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental Management Division representative for coordination.

3. The CES Environmental Management Division representative shall then sign the universal waste manifest authorizing scheduling for removal of the containerized lamps, thermostats and exit signs.

4. The Contractor shall document and provide quantities of:

a. Lamps, number of containers and accumulation start date (start date for filling of each container).

b. Thermostats, number of containers and accumulation start date. c. Exit signs, number of containers and accumulation start date.

5. Contractor shall provide transportation of:

a. Containerized lamps for recycling or legal disposal in a land fill or facility certified by the EPA to receive universal waste.

b. Containerized thermostats for legal disposal in a land fill or facility certified by the EPA to receive hazardous waste.

c. Containerized exit signs for legal disposal by a Nuclear Regulatory Commission licensed radioactive waste broker or licensed low-level radioactive waste disposal facility.

C. Post-Disposal Submittals:

1. Submit fully executed disposal manifests with original signatures to JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental Management Division or as directed by representative.

2. Provide one copy of each fully executed disposal manifest to:

a. AAFES representatives:

1.) Contracting Officer. 2.) General Manager. 3.) Project Manager.

b. Architect-Engineer.


3. Retain sufficient copies of each fully executed disposal manifest for submittal in each set of O & M Manuals, in accordance with Section 01 77 00, Project Closeout.

2. PRODUCTS (Not Used).

3. EXECUTION

3.1 SPILL CONTAINMENT AND CLEANUP OF BROKEN LAMPS

A. The Contractor shall install temporary seals over all floor drains, conduits, and other openings within the lamp removal area where breakage of lamps may occur.

B. In the event lamps are broken, the Contractor shall proceed as follows:

1. If more than 36 lamps are broken at the same time, immediately call Environmental Management Division at (201) 201-5063, cordon off and ventilate the area.

2. If CES Environment Management Division cannot be reached dial 911 using an Installation phone to report spill.

3. Appropriate hand/eye/respiratory protection shall be worn when cleaning up and handling any quantity of broken lamps.

a. Avoid inhalation of airborne dust. b. An acceptable cleanup method is sweeping up the broken lamps and all

visible powder with a room.

4. The broken/crushed pieces and powder shall be cleaned up and placed in a separate container and sealed closed (i.e. drum or bucket with lid).

a. The broken lamps shall not be recycled with the unbroken lamps.

3.2 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES AND CONTAINMENT OF MERCURY

A. The Contractor shall install temporary seals over all floor drains, cracks in floors and other openings to water sources within the thermostat removal area where breakage of vessels containing mercury could occur or where vessels containing mercury are found to be leaking.

B. In the event a mercury containing bulb switch is broken or leaking, the Contractor shall proceed as follows:

1. Immediately isolate the area where the spill occurs. 2. Workers shall don personal protective equipment (PPE) prior to reentering isolated

area. 3. Wipe the area that has been contaminated and/or the leaking thermostat with

absorbing pad. 4. Double bag leaking thermostat and absorbing pads in 6 mil thick polyethylene

bags.

C. Individual thermostats and/or double bag containing the leaking thermostat and absorbing materials shall be placed into an over-pack container meeting DOT requirements and be labeled HAZARDOUS WASTE.

3.3 REMOVAL AND PACKAGING UNIVERSAL WASTE

A. The Contractor shall take precautions to remove mercury-containing lamps from fixtures without damaging or breaking the lamps.


B. Lamps that are shielded (with sleeves or covers) shall be separated from the shields.

C. The lamps shall be packaged in boxes provided by the Contractor in the following manner:

1. Lamps of the same type (i.e. HID, U-shape) and length shall be packaged snugly in the box.

a. Do not package different length or different type lamps in same container. b. Tritium-containing lamps shall be packaged separately from mercury-

containing lamps. c. Provide spacers between lamps to prevent breakage.

2. Count and write the type and quantity of lamps on either END of the box (i.e. 36 – 4’).

3. Label containers "HANDLE WITH CARE/FRAGILE" in addition to identifying contents in accordance with the Universal Waste Rule.

4. Tape the box closed (after it is full). 5. A full box will ensure the bulbs are packaged snugly and will prevent breakage

when transporting.

D. The Contractor shall not have mercury and tritium-containing lamp containers in temporary storage for over 30 calendar days.

1. Do not relocate items for the purpose of extending the storage time. 2. The Contractor shall contact CEIE at (210) 221-5063 if the thirty-day storage limit

will be exceeded.

3.4 REMOVAL AND PACKAGING HAZARDOUS WASTE

A. The Contractor shall identify all thermostats that contain mercury bulb switches:

1. Examine thermostat to determine if the mercury bulb switch shows any signs of leakage prior to removing thermostat from wall mounting.

2. Take precautions to remove thermostats from wall mounting without damage or breakage.

B. Package each thermostat by double bagging in 6-mil polyethylene bags immediately upon removal from mounting:

1. Package each thermostat individually in double bags. 2. Seal each bag to reduce the likelihood of leakage if thermostat should become

damaged.

C. Handle bagged thermostats with care and place in a DOT approved over-pack container.

1. Pack bagged thermostats, one per over-pack container. 2. Label over-pack container as HAZARDOUS WASTE and indicate contents. 3. Complete labeling as required by JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental

Management Division in conjunction with Federal and State of Texas rules and regulations.

D. Remove, package, over-pack and label self-illuminating exit signs containing tritium in a similar process as indicated for thermostats.

3.5 TEMPORARY STORAGE

A. All boxes containing lamps shall be stored upright and indoors.


B. In the event a lamp(s) is broken or crushed:

1. The intact part of the lamp shall be placed in the box. 2. The broken/crushed pieces and powder shall be placed into a separate container

(i.e. plastic/paper bag, cardboard box) and placed next to the box. 3. The container with the broken pieces will be removed when the box is removed.

C. All over-pack containers shall be stored indoors and isolated from activities that could cause damage to containers and contents.

3.6 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF CONTAINERIZED UNIVERSAL WASTE

A. Containerized lamps shall be removed from temporary storage by Contractor upon authorization from JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental Management Division.


B. Recycling or legal disposal of containerized mercury-containing lamps is the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Submit required universal waste manifests to all parties as indicated upon recycling or legal disposal in full compliance with Federal, State of Texas, JBSA-Sam Houston and AAFES rules, regulations and requirements.

3.7 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF CONTAINERIZED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Over-pack containers shall be removed from temporary storage by Contractor upon authorization from JBSA-Sam Houston CES Environmental Management Division.


B. Legal disposal of containerized thermostats containing mercury bulb switches and self-illuminating exit signs is the responsibility of the Contractor.

1. A licensed hazardous waste transporter shall be subcontracted to haul all items designated as HAZARDOUS MATERIAL.

C. Submit required hazardouls waste manifests to all parties as indicated upon legal disposal in full compliance with Federal, State of Texas, JBSA-Sam Houston and AAFES rules, regulations and requirements.

3.8 AAFES AND JBSA-SAM HOUSTON PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall be liable for all claims, costs, losses, damages and other expenses AAFES, JBSA-Sam Houston and the Architect-Engineer may incur as a result of the Contractor’s negligence or willful misconduct during the performance of this contract.

B. In case of accident or spill, call toll free the U.S. Coast Guard National Response Center (800) 424-8802.

END 02 81 34.

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK Section 02 91 10 – OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCE RECOVERY (JBSA-SH)

OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCE 02 91 10-1 RECOVERY (JBSA-SH)

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Recovery of refrigerant and compressor oil or other ozone depleting substances (ODS's) prior to structure demolition.

B. Containment of recovered Class I, II or III ODS's within cylinders approved by JBSA-Sam Houston in accordance with Department of Defense and State of Texas rules and regulations.

1. Department of Defense recovery cylinders for Class I ODS's are available through the Defense General Supply Center (DGSC) or by contacting the Environmental Management Division (502ABW/CEIE) at (210) 201-5063.

2. Call the DGSC Representative at (804) 279-5203 for more information.

C. Legal transfer and disposal of all refrigerant including, but not limited to:

1. R-22: Found in RTU condensers and walk-in cooler condensers. 2. R-502: Found in walk-in freezer condensers. 3. R-404: Found in ice machine condensers. 4. R-134A: Found in under-counter refrigeration units.

D. All refrigerant work must be performed by a “Certified Refrigerant Reclaimer using Certified Recovery or Recycling Equipment”.

1. For the purposes of this work, “Certified Refrigerant Reclaimer” is defined in Section 608 of the Clean Air Act as a facility that uses laboratory protocol set forth in the Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Standard 700-1988 and has obtained certification from the Section 608 Recycling Program Manager.

E. Contractor shall verify that ODS's have been recovered from all ODS equipment before final disposal of the equipment in accordance with 40 CFR 82.156(a)(3) and all associated regulations.

F. Base Bid:


a. Recovery of refrigerant and compressor oil or other ozone depleting substances (ODSs) from all equipment prior to structure demolition including, but not limited to:

1.) RTU refrigerant systems. 2.) Walk-in cooler and freezer refrigerant systems. 3.) Ice machine refrigerant systems. 4.) Under-counter refrigeration unit refrigerant systems.

b. Recovery and handling by Certified Refrigerant Reclaimer. c. Recovery and handling using Certified Recovery or Recycling Equipment. d. Containment and transfer of recovered ODS's.

1.) Class I. 2.) Class II. 3.) Class III.


e. Certification of ODS recovery prior to equipment removal.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Section 01 10 00 – Requirements of JBSA-Sam Houston. 2. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work. 3. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule. 4. Section 01 35 43 – AAFES Environmental Protection. 5. Section 01 73 29 – Cutting & Patching. 6. Section 02 41 16 – Structure Demolition. 7. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning (HVAC).

1.3 REFERENCES

A. MILSTRIP Regulation DoD 4000.25-1-M, Chapter 9.

B. 49 CFR 173.301 “Requirements for the Shipment of Compressed Gas Cylinders”.

C. Section 608 of the Clean Air Act.

D. 40 CFR Part 82 “Protection of Stratospheric Ozone; Refrigerant Recycling”.

E. Defense Logistics Agency (DLA): DGSC-RP (804) 279-5203.

F. 502ABW/CEIE: (210) 201-5063.


A. Qualifications of Technicians/Recovery Equipment

1. Technicians must be certified by EPA under Section 608 of the Clean Air Act. 2. Recovery equipment must be tested by an approved EPA testing organization to

ensure that it meets requirements under Section 608 of the Clean Air Act. 3. Knowingly venting ODSs into the atmosphere is prohibited under the Clean Air

Act. 4. Technicians releasing “de minimis” quantities of ODS's in the course of making

good faith attempts to recapture, recycle or dispose of ODS's are not subject to the prohibition.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00 copies of certifications and qualifications required by this Section and a brief work plan detailing the procedures required to perform the work.

B. Certification of Refrigerant Recovery Technician and Certified Recovery or Recycling Equipment.

2. PRODUCTS (Not Used)


3. EXECUTION

3.1 REFRIGERANT RECOVERY

A. Contractor shall:

1. Identify the pressure conditions under which the refrigerator unit or equipment was designed to operate.

2. Ensure that technicians have received the appropriate certification (i.e. Type I, Type II, Type III, and/or Universal Technician) that corresponds with the equipment form which ODS is to be recovered.

3. Identify the appropriate type of recovery/recycle equipment and ensure that equipment rating is maintained in accordance with Section 608 of the Clean Air Act relative to:

a. Liquid Refrigerant Recovery. b. Vapor Refrigerant Recovery. c. Final Recovery Vacuum. d. Refrigerant Loss due to Non-Condensable Purging.

4. Ensure refrigerant and compressor oil recovery is performed in compliance with all applicable regulations.

5. Prepare cylinders containing recovered refrigerant and compressor oil for shipping in accordance with all applicable regulations.

6. Transfer cylinders for shipment as described in Part I of this specification.

B. The Contractor will be liable for all claims, costs, losses, damages and other expenses AAFES, JBSA-Sam Houston and the Architect-Engineer may incur as a result of the Contractor’s negligence or willful misconduct during the performance of this contract.

END 02 91 10.

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Concrete building mat footing and foundations. b. Concrete footings and foundations at trash and recycling enclosures. c. Concrete footings and foundations at monument signage. d. Concrete footings, foundations and pedestals for drive-up equipment. e. Concrete stoop slabs and frost walls. f. Concrete building slabs exposed and polished, concealed by floor finishes or

to receive clear sealer. g. Initial surface finish, curing and protection for normal and polished concrete

building slabs. h. Forming and/or saw cutting and sealing of control joints and expansion joints

for normal and polished concrete building slabs. i. Joint filler strips and joint sealants. j. Concrete equipment and housekeeping pads. k. Grouting under all base plates. l. Concrete filled post hole foundations and concrete fill for pipe bollards. m. Concrete filled post hole foundations for all site signage. n. Formwork. o. Reinforcing. p. Assistance for testing of base course and concrete.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Specified Elsewhere:

1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02 31 00 – Subsurface Investigation & Geotechnical Report. 3. Section 03 35 36 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish. 4. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 5. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel. 6. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 7. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 8. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 9. Section 07 21 00 – Building Insulation. 10. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 11. Section 12 48 13 – Floor Mats & Frames. 12. Division 22 – Plumbing. 13. Division 23 – HVAC. 14. Division 26 – Electrical. 15. Division 31 – Earthwork. 16. Division 32 – Sitework.


1. Refer to Section 03 35 36, Polished Concrete Floor Finish for additional requirements at concrete slabs exposed to view and polished.


2. Structural steel anchor bolts are installed under this Section and specified in Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel.

3. Joint sealants installed under this Section are specified in Section 07 90 00, Building Joint Sealers.

4. Floor mat frames installed in concrete work under this Section are specified in Section 12 48 13, Floor Mats & Frames.

5. Building related excavation, backfill and granular base course work is specified in Division 31, Earthwork.

6. Site related excavation, backfill, grading and paving are specified in Division 31, Earthwork.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Design Mixtures:

1. For each concrete mixture:

a. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

b. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. 2. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar

diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

E. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Waterstops. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Floor and slab treatments. 7. Vapor retarders. 8. Semirigid joint filler. 9. Joint-filler strips. 10. Repair materials.

F. ACI Certification: Submit current ACI flatwork and finisher certifications for technicians and crew supervisor assigned to perform work on this Project.

G. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

H. Field quality-control reports.



A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer employing project assigned personnel qualified as ACI certified flatwork technicians and finishers with a supervisor who is an ACI certified flatwork technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following sections, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. "General Requirements." 2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." 3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 4. "Concrete Mixtures." 5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing."

E. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.".

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMWORK

A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301.

B. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces.

1. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 2. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

C. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

1. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT


A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064, plain, fabricated from as drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place.

1. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire or plastic according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete.

2. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms and in bottom of trench or wall footing cuts use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III. 2. At Contractor’s option, supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F. b. Maximum Content: No more than 15 percent.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.

1. Provide aggregates from a single source. 2. 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Fine aggregate free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M; potable.

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures:

1. Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete.

2. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

a. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. b. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. c. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. d. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. e. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/

C 494M, Type G. f. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

C. Limit water soluble chloride ion content in hardened concrete to 0-15 percent by weight of cement.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS


A. Vapor Retarder: Multi-ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick.

B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

C. Non-Shrink Grout: Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, non-corrosive and non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 POLISHED CONCRETE CURING COMPOUND MATERIALS

A. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Membrane-forming curing compound for new polished building slabs exposed to view in final finish shall be a resin or waxed based product complying with the following:

1. ASTM C 309, Type 1, Classes A and B. 2. AASHTO M 148, Type 1, Classes A and B.

B. Acceptable Curing Compound Products: Use one of the following manufacturers and products for curing/sealing polished concrete slabs:

1. WR Meadows 1100 Clear, Resin Based. 2. WR Meadows 1300 Clear, Wax Based. 3. Euclid Kurez RC. 4. Or equal approved in advance.

2.7 STANDARD CURING MATERIALS FOR UNPOLISHED CONCRETE

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

2. Mix designs shall be provided based on laboratory testing.

B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated (4000 psi, minimum) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40. 3. Slump Limit:

a. 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch for standard concrete.


b. 8 inches with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301.

a. Do not allow air content of floor slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent.

C. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used and limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 15 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 20 percent.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M.

1. Furnish batch ticket information. 2. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60

minutes.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.

B. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.

1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

3.2 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. 2. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.


1. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover.

2. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging.

1. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. 2. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

Lace overlaps with wire. 3. Supply welded wire reinforcement in flat sheets only.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General:

1. Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 2. Refer to special requirements for joint cutting as specified in Section 03 35 36,

Polished Concrete Floor Finish.

B. Construction Joints: Locate and install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade:

1. Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated.

2. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:

a. Grooved Joints:

1.) Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to a radius of 1/8 inch.

2.) Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. 3.) Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.

b. Sawed Joints:

1.) Refer to special requirements for equipment to be used to produce sawed joints in polished concrete building slabs exposed to view as specified in Section 03 35 36, Polished Concrete Floor Finish.

2.) Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades.

3.) Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints:

1. Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.


3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved alternate mix is used as specified in Paragraph 1.4, D., 2.

C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.

D. Cold weather placement of concrete shall comply with ACI 306R-88.

E. Hot weather placement of concrete shall comply with ACI 305R-99.

3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched.

1. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/2 inch. 2. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams.

1. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. 2. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch. 3. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or indicated to receive a rubbed

finish.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following rubbed finish, defined in ACI 301, to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-rubbed finish.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces:

1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.

2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces.

1. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.

1. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface.

2. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.

C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, paint or another thin film-finish coating system.


1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.

E. Nonslip Broom Finish:

1. Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete stoop slabs.

2. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

3.8 STRUCTURAL GROUTING

A. Coordinate grouting work with work of the structural steel erector and the masonry subcontractor.

B. After steel base plates have been set and positioned to the approval of the Contracting Officer or designated representative, install non-shrink grout between supporting concrete or masonry and underside of steel plate.

C. Structural grout shall be mixed per manufacturer’s directions to provide a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 8000 psi.

1. Compact grout between surfaces to ensure that no voids are present when work is complete.

2. Finish edges of grout bed even with base plates and slightly taper sides to supporting structure so as not to interfere with continuation of unit masonry work.

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General:

1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

2. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder:

1. Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations.

2. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

D. Standard Curing Methods: Cure standard formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:


a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. d. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive

covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.

a. Cure for not less than seven days. b. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover

material and waterproof tape.

E. Polished Concrete Curing Methods: Cure concrete slabs to be polished for at least seven days by using one of the specified removable membrane forming curing compounds.

1. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. 3. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 4. Verification: Consult with final surface polishing installer to ensure new concrete

slabs to be polished meet requirements for final finishing as specified in Section 03 35 36, Polished Concrete Floor Finish.

F. Protection: Protect concrete slabs-on-grade throughout construction until received by surface finish installer for application of final finishing.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: AAFES will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports to Contracting Officer or designated representative during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article.

B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301.

1. Inspections at project site shall include the following:

a. Steel reinforcement placement. b. Headed bolts and studs. c. Verification of use of specified design mixture.

2. Testing at project site shall include the following:

a. Slump. b. Concrete temperature. c. Air content for both air entrained and non-air entrained concrete per ACI 301. d. Compressive strength.

3. Record the following information on submitted test reports.

a. Date of placement. b. Location of Placement. c. Time of day. d. Outside air temperature (degrees F.). e. Slump (in inches). f. Concrete temperature (degrees F.).


g. Air content (%). h. Date received in lab. i. Compressive strength with testing date, age in days and strength in psi.

4. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cubic yards but less than 25 cubic yards, plus one set for each additional 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof.

5. Within 24-hours after each pour measure floor slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E-1155.

3.11 REPAIRS

A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section.

END 03 30 00.

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 03 35 36 – POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH

POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 03 35 36-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Final preparation of concrete surface to receive polished finish. b. Removal of curing compounds, wax, sealers and other protective surface

treatments to facilitate final surface finishing and polishing. c. Installation of polished concrete floor system for new interior concrete slab

floors by dry grinding.

1.) Application of concrete densifier. 2.) Polishing with various size grit metal-bonded and resin-bonded

diamonds to the scheduled reflective sheen. 3.) Application of final stain guard sealer.

d. Installation of joint sealants.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 2. Section 01 45 16 – Quality Control. 3. Section 01 45 29 – Testing Laboratory Services. 4. Section 01 55 00 – Temporary Facilities & Controls. 5. Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning. 6. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 7. Division 9 – Finishes. 8. Division 22 – Plumbing. 9. Division 26 – Electrical.


1. New concrete building slabs concealed by floor finishes or to receive clear sealer are specified in Section 03 30 00 and will not require work under this Section.

2. New concrete building slabs exposed to view are specified in Section 03 30 00 and will receive polish and final finish under this Section.

3. Joint sealants are specified herein and in Section 07 90 00, Building Joint Sealers for installation under this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 1028 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.

B. ASTM D 523 – Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.

C. ACI 310 – A Guide to Decorative Concrete.

D. NFSI - National Floor Safety Institute; Test Method 101A; current edition.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Product Data:

1. Provide manufacturer's product data for:

a. Planetary grinder polishing equipment. b. Planetary grinder HEPA dust collection equipment. c. Hand tools. d. Hand tool dust collection equipment. e. Diamond tooling. f. High speed propane burnisher. g. Polyurea pump. h. Joint cutting saw.

2. Provide manufacturer’s chemical and product data for:

a. Liquid reactive surface densifyer. b. Liquid stain guard treatment. c. Joint filler.

C. Samples:

1. Submit two (2) polished concrete finish samples, 3 x 3 inch in size, illustrating color and representative gloss level of polished concrete.

D. Installer’s Certification:

1. Provide list of 5 projects performed with last three years of similar type, size and complexity.

2. Submit project names, addresses, contacts and phone numbers for each project. 3. General Contractor is to validate references and polisher’s capabilities prior to

submitting bid to AAFES.

E. Applicator Qualifications: Submit letter of certification from manufacturers of all products and equipment specified herein, stating that the applicator is a certified applicator of the system and is familiar with proper procedures and installation methods as required by the manufacturer.

1. Planetary grinder system. 2. Liquid reactive surface densifier and stain guard treatment. 3. Joint filler.

F. Maintenance Manual: Submit installer’s maintenance manual, including maintenance and cleaning instructions for polished concrete floor system in Operation and Maintenance Manuals upon Final Completion of work.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAGs) for Buildings and Facilities; Final Guidelines, revisions, and updates for static coefficient of friction for walkway surfaces.

2. Environmental Requirements:


a. Comply with current Federal and local toxicity and air quality regulations and with Federal requirements on content of lead, mercury, and other heavy metals.

b. Do not use solvents in floor polish products that contribute to air pollution or impact food quality.

B. Pre-installation Meeting:

1. General Contractor shall schedule and convene pre-installation meeting at the project site before start of installation of polished concrete floor system.

a. Meeting to occur only after review and approval of required Sub-contractor submittals completion of test panel mock-up, including specified grinding, polishing, joint filling, spall and crack repairs, and specified overall gloss values.

b. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including:

1.) AAFES Project Manager. 2.) AAFES Store Manager or Assistant Manager. 3.) Project Architect. 4.) AAFES Polishing Consultant. 5.) General Contractor. 6.) Polishing Subcontractor including Project Manager and Foreman.

2. Meeting agenda to include (but not limited to):

a. Review of existing conditions. b. Surface preparation. c. System installations. d. Field quality control. e. Protection. f. Environmental requirements. g. Coordination with other work. h. Controls to limit damage from dust. i. Field quality control methods and reporting.

1.6 MOCK-UP

A. Provide polished concrete floor finish mock-up:

1. Mock-up shall be a continuation of final surface finishing the new concrete floor slab constructed under the work of Section 03 30 00.

a. Mock-up, minimum of 250 square feet, shall illustrate completed finish including all specified liquid surface treatments and specified gloss levels.

b. Mock-up will include properly installed joint treatment in any color for the purpose of judging workmanship.

1.) The specific joint color to be used on the project will be selected based on the color of the completed polished concrete sample.

c. Half of the sample area should include completed stain protection application and half should be without stain protection for testing purposes.

d. The sample should also include edge finishing treatments for the purpose of review per specifications.

B. Locate mock-up where directed by AAFES Contracting Officer or designated representative.


C. Accepted mock-up will serve as standard to judge quality and workmanship of completed polished concrete floor finish.

D. Accepted mock-up of concrete slab may remain as part of finished product subject to compliance with specified requirements and approval.

E. Mock-up shall be approved by AAFES Contracting Officer or designated representative and AAFES Concrete Finish Consultant.

F. Non-compliant work shall be corrected and approved before Contractor continues with work.


A. Sequence application of concrete polishing after completion of other construction activities that would be damaging to completed polished finish.

B. Close areas to traffic during and after floor application for time period recommended in writing by manufacturer.

C. Polished Concrete should be sequenced to complete after final lighting is in operation to allow for a proper installation.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRE-CERTIFIED INSTALLERS

A. All bidding subcontractors must have completed AAFES in house certification for this Project.

PRE-APPROVED APPLICATOR LIST

Company Name Phone Number

1. American Concrete Inc. 877.775.0030 2. Budget Maintenance Concrete 610.323.7702 3. Diama-Shield 888.730.4075 4. Industrial Restoration & Coatings 801.866.9896 5. Jeffco Concrete Contractors 800.226.2668 6. K & J Concrete Polishing 865.971.1760 7. Pacific Decorative Concrete 916.725.9269 8. Perfect Polish Inc 877.917.4463 9. Preferred Global 800.317.2450 10. Premier Concrete Construction 603.654.2471

B. Refer to specifications Division 1 for substitution qualifications.

1. Substitutions must be submitted to Contracting Officer in writing a minimum of 10-days prior to Solicitation closing date.

2.2 EQUIPMENT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION

A. Floor Grinder:

1. Manufacturers:

a. HTC. b. SASE.


c. Concrete Polishing Solutions. d. Diamatic. e. PrepMaster.

2. Type: Multi-orbital, planetary-action, opposing-rotational, 3 or 4 diamond-headed floor grinders.

3. Weight: 850 pounds or more. 4. Grinding Pressure: 600 pounds minimum.

B. Dust Extraction System and pre-separator for grinding/polishing: Heavy-duty industrial HEPA filtration vacuum system, suitable for extracting and containing large quantities of fine concrete dust (minimum 350 CFM air flow) in conjunction with manufacturer recommended pre-separator:

1. HTC 80ID. 2. Pullman-Ermator S36. 3. SASE Bull 50. 4. Equal approved in advance.

C. Diamond Tooling for Initial Grinding and Preparing Floor for Polishing: Tooling manufacturer subject to submittal review prior to approval.

1. Metal Bonded Diamonds:

a. Grit Size: 80 and 150.

1.) Reference paragraph 3.3, C of this Section.

D. Diamond Tooling for Polishing Concrete:

1. Resin Bonded, Phenolic Diamonds:

a. Grit Size: 100, 200, 400, 800 and 1500 or equivalent.

E. Grinding / Polishing Pads for Edges:

1. Grit Size: 80, 100, 120, 200, 400, 800, 1500 and 3000.

F. Hand Grinder with dust extraction attachment and pads.

G. Joint Cutting Saw with dust extraction attachment:

1. Hump Back, Joe Due. 2. Dust Buggy, US Saws. 3. The Mongoose, Engrave-a-Crete. 4. Substitutions approved in advance.

H. High speed propane burnisher:

1. Minimum 27 inch head generating pad speeds of 2,500 RPM or higher.

I. Diamond Impregnated Burnisher Pads in 800 grit size only:

1. Twister Diamond Cleaning System Pads, HTC. 2. Diamond Polishing Pads, Norton. 3. SpinFlex Diamond Polishing Pads, CPS. 4. Substitutions approved in advance.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Penetrating Hardener/Densifier: Clear liquid reactive lithium-silicate based:

1. Consolideck LS, Prosoco.


2. RetroPlate 99, Advanced Floor Products. 3. Flor-Sil, Diamatic Inc. 4. FGS Permashine, L & M Construction Chemicals. 5. 3DHS Densifier, AmeriPolish. 6. Substitutions approved in advance.

B. Protective Surface Treatment (Stain Guard):

1. Consolideck LS Guard, Prosoco. 2. RetroGuard, Advanced Floor Products. 3. Flor-Finish, Diamatic Inc. 4. FGS Stain Protection, L & M Construction Chemicals. 5. SR2 Stain Protector, Ameripolish. 6. Substitutions approved in advance.

C. Joint Filler: Products shall be provided in a complementary color to match Polished Concrete finish after polishing.

1. RS65 Polyurea, Metzger McGuire. 2. HT-PE65 Polyurea, Hi-Tech Systems. 3. SL/65 Polyurea, VersaFlex Incorporated. 4. Colors shall be matched as closely as possible using a chip set provided by

AAFES Concrete Finish Consultant.

a. Manufacturer shall produce product to match this color selection.

D. Pin Hole and Surface Pitting Grout Coat: Products shall be provided in a complementary color to match Polished Concrete finish after polishing.

1. GM 3000, Husqvarna Construction Products. 2. RSG, Diamatic Inc. 3. Spall TX3, Hi-Tech. 4. Versa-Grout, VersaFlex Incorporated. 5. Pit-Grout, Metzger McGuire. 6. Substitutions approved in advance. 7. Colors shall be reviewed and approved by Contracting Officer, designated

representative or AAFES Concrete Finish Consultant in Mock-up.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine floor to receive polished concrete floor system.

B. Notify the Contracting Officer of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use prior to commencement of polishing.

C. Do not begin surface preparation or installation until conditions are corrected and approved.

D. Verify the Following for new floor slabs:

1. Floor Finish: Wide channel floated, smooth, pan, combination blade and plastic blade finished floor from edge to edge, with no rough areas.

2. Floor and Joints:

a. Free of debris and excessive dirt, dust, clay, and mud. b. Dry.

3. Concrete Curing:


a. Minimum 7 days disposable wet curing blankets or removable dissipating curing compound applied.

b. Concrete shall be cured for 14-days minimum before start of grinding process.

4. Concrete Adjacent to Floor Penetrations: Troweled flat and level with surrounding concrete.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from the following:

1. Minimal accumulation of dust from grinding and polishing. 2. Contact with overspray of penetrating hardener/densifier. 3. Contact with overspray of protective surface treatment (stain guard). 4. Contact with joint filler.

B. Completely remove cure/seal compounds on new concrete floor slabs to be polished as installed under Section 03 30 00.

C. Clean Surfaces: Remove dirt, dust, debris, oil, grease, curing agents, bond breakers, paint, coatings, and other surface contaminants that could adversely affect installation of polished concrete floor system.

D. Repair all slab defects and joints.

E. Fill concrete joints in accordance with Section 07 90 00.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install polished concrete floor system in accordance with installer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Aggregate Exposure:

1. Fine Aggregate: Mottled salt-and-pepper aggregate exposure.

C. Polished Concrete Floor System:

1. Open Slab Surface:

a. As required to provide a uniform final polish or removal of existing floor coatings.

1.) For new polished concrete floor slabs, open up concrete by grinding with 80-grit metal-bonded diamonds.

2.) Expose coarse concrete aggregate only when required to level low spots with floor surface.

b. Review condition of floor with AAFES Project Manager.

1.) Obtain approval from AAFES Project Manager if large coarse aggregate is required to be exposed to remove slab deficiencies.

2.) Variations to the precise grinding, densifying, polishing and stain guard application are anticipated, but shall be discussed and approved in writing by the AAFES Project Manager prior to executing the work.

c. Progressive edge grinding will be necessary to within ½” of all vertical abutments, including walls, cases, columns, posts and racking systems.


d. Joint filler shall be flush with surface after grinding and polishing steps. e. Additional passes along curled joints may be necessary to remove joint filler

chatter.

2. Remove metal-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with progressively finer metal-bonded diamonds up to 150-grit.

3. Apply densifier to the point of rejection to ensure complete acceptance of the

densifier product at the recommended step per manufacturer’s written instructions. 4. Floor Polishing:

a. Remove 150-grit metal-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with a transitional diamond per manufacturer’s recommendations.

b. Remove transitional resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 100-grit resin-bonded diamonds.

c. Remove 100-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 200-grit resin-bonded diamonds.

d. Remove 200-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 400-grit resin-bonded diamonds.

e. Remove 400-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 800-grit resin-bonded diamonds.

f. Remove 800-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 1500-grit resin-bonded diamonds.

5. Apply Stain Guard:

a. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions. b. Apply first coat per manufacturer’s recommendation (DO NOT OVER

APPLY). c. Use applicator pad, pre-wetted with stain guard, to pull material out to create

a thin film prior to drying. d. Remove product completely from areas of over application, as evidenced by

surface streaking, and replace with unused stain guard. e. Apply second coat of stain guard at all areas per manufacturer’s instructions.

6. High speed burnish:

a. After each application of stain guard is dry, burnish surface. b. Burnish using approved pads at a slow movement pace using high-speed

machine with 400 or 800 grit diamond impregnated pads as required to attain specified gloss requirements.

c. Burnish with several passes.

1.) Make each progressive pass at 90 degrees from previous pass.

d. Burnishing, pad type, and pace of forward movement shall combine to develop a minimum floor surface temperature of 91-degrees F. directly below the burnishing pad as continuously measured by the operator during installation.


A. Inspect completed polished concrete floor system with the Contracting Officer or designated representative, Contractor and Installer.

B. Review procedures with Contracting Officer or designated representative to correct unacceptable areas of completed polished concrete floor system.


C. Specular Gloss/Reflectance, ASTM D 523:

1. Perform polishing and burnishing work necessary to produce a Specified Overall Gloss Value (SOGV) > 50 prior to applying protective surface treatment, SOGV > 60 after applying protective surface treatment and Minimum Local Gloss Value (MLGV) > 40 after applying protective surface treatment as measured using a Horiba IG-320, 60 Degree Gloss Checker.

2. Gloss shall be considered as a quantitative value that expresses the degree of reflection when light hits the concrete floor surface.

3. Gloss measurements will be taken independent of ambient lighting and will be taken within a sealed measurement window located beneath the test unit.

4. A minimum of 12 readings will be collected.

a. High and low measurements will be discarded and the remaining measurements averaged.

b. Average calculated value shall exceed specified SOGV. c. No single measurement value less than the specified MLGV will be accepted.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect completed polished concrete floor system from damage until Substantial Completion.

1. Do not allow vehicle and pedestrian traffic on unprotected floor. 2. Do not allow construction materials, equipment, and tools on unprotected floor. 3. Prohibit parking of vehicles on concrete slab. 4. If construction equipment must be used for application, diaper components that

might drip oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquids. 5. No tire embedments (rocks, nails, screws, etc.) that will scratch or pit slab surface. 6. Prohibit pipe cutting using pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab. 7. Prohibit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slab. 8. Prohibit acids and acidic detergents from contacting concrete surfaces. 9. Cover concrete floors with drop cloths or use breathable drop cloths during

painting. 10. If paint is spilled on concrete floor, remove paint immediately. 11. Protect slab surface from moisture for 72 hours to prevent re-emulsification of

surface treatment prior to cure.

B. Immediately remove mortar splatter, spilled liquids, oil, grease, paint, coatings, and other surface contaminants, which could adversely affect completed polished concrete floor system.

C. Repair damaged areas of completed polished concrete floor system to satisfaction of Contracting Officer.

END 03 35 36.

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY Section 04 20 00 – UNIT MASONRY

UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Normal weight concrete unit masonry. b. Lightweight concrete unit masonry. c. Architectural ground-faced concrete unit masonry. d. Special architectural ground-faced concrete unit masonry shapes. e. Economy modular clay unit brick masonry. f. Special shape clay unit brick masonry. g. Masonry mortar. h. Masonry reinforcing. i. All accessories indicated and required for a complete and proper installation

of the masonry construction.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel. 4. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 6. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 7. Section 07 62 00 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 8. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 9. Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors & Frames. 10. Section 08 41 10 – Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors. 11. Section 10 14 00 – Specialty Signs. 12. Division 21 – Fire Protection. 13. Division 22 – Plumbing. 14. Division 26 – Electrical. 15. Division 27 – Communications. 16. Division 28 – Alarms & Surveillance. 17. Division 31 – Earthwork. 18. Division 32 – Sitework. 19. Division 33 – Utilities.

B. Installed but furnished elsewhere:

1. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. (Lintels, sunshade/canopy brackets, anchors, inserts.)

2. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. (Joint fillers and sealants.)


A. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics from one manufacturer for each related area.


2. Products required for each continuous surface or visually related surface shall be obtained from one manufacturer based on performance criteria, color and texture characteristics.

3. Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color and texture for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate.

B. Regulatory requirements:

1. Building Code: the International Building Code (2015) governs the work. 2. Perform masonry work in accord with ANSI A41.1 – Building Code Requirements

for Masonry, unless in conflict with building code specified above or as indicated otherwise in this Section.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.

1. Construct sample panel at location indicated or directed, and as follows:

a. Size: 8 feet by 8 feet. b. Include all unit types and sizes to be used, including cut and random stone,

and mortar joint treatments. c. Obtain acceptance of sample panel by Contracting Officer or designated

representative and JBSA-Sam Houston CES before beginning construction activities of this Section.

d. Do not remove sample panel until construction activities of this Section have been accepted by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Cited references, or specified portions thereof, current at date of Bidding Documents unless otherwise specified, govern the work.

1. If conflict between cited standards and project specifications do not proceed with any work:

a. Contractor shall consult with Architect-Engineer for determination of governing standard.

b. Architect-Engineer will issue written clarification.

2. Proceed with work based on determination after receipt of written clarification.

B. Standards:

1. ASTM C150 – Specified for Portland Cement. 2. ASTM C216 – Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay

or Shale). 3. ASTM C62 – Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay

or Shale). 4. ASTM C5 – Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes. 5. ASTM C207 – Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 6. ASTM C144 – Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 7. ASTM C90 – Specification Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 8. ASTM C145 – Specification for Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 9. ASTM C129 – Specification for Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 10. ASTM C55 – Specification for Concrete Building Brick. 11. ASTM C476 – Specification for Grout for Reinforced and Non-Reinforced Masonry. 12. ASTM C270 – Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 13. ASTM A123 – Specification for Zinc (hot-dip) Galvanized Coating Iron or Steel

Products.


14. ASTM A153 – Specification for Zinc (hot-dip) Galvanized Coating Iron or Steel Hardware.

15. ASTM C140: minimum compressive strength. 16. ASTM C426: drying shrinkage requirements. 17. ASTM A116: Class 3; galvanized wire. 18. ASTM A82: wall ties. 19. ASTM A305: deformed bars. 20. ASTM A615: bar steel. 21. ASTM C404: coarse aggregate.

C. Manufacturer’s Catalogs: Manufacturers catalogs, current at the date of Bidding Documents, are incorporated by reference to the same force and effect as if repeated herein at length.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01 33 00:

1. Submit Shop Drawings for vertical masonry foundation reinforcement and reinforced masonry wall reinforcement as prepared by supplier for fabrication, bending and placement.

a. Coordinate with Shop Drawings for concrete footing reinforcing. b. Coordinate with lap splicing and solid grouting requirements for reinforced

concrete unit masonry.

2. Submit Unit Masonry Shop Drawings for:

a. Special shaped, colored ground-faced concrete unit masonry. b. Special shaped clay unit masonry sills. c. Special sized solid clay masonry units for wall caps at trash enclosure.

3. Submit manufacturer’s published product data attesting to compliance with applicable specifications for:

a. Standard and light weight unit masonry. b. Colored ground-faced concrete unit masonry. c. Clay unit masonry. d. Anchors and ties. e. Horizontal joint reinforcing f. Mortar, flashing materials and other specified accessories.

B. Certificates: Prior to delivery, submit to Architect Manufacturer’s certificates attesting compliance with the project specifications for grades, types, and row classes included in these specifications.

C. Samples for selection purposes:

1. Unit masonry samples in hand panels or sample boxes showing full extent of colors available for exposed masonry required.

a. Contractor shall submit six (6) samples of colored ground-faced concrete masonry units in manufacturer’s full range of Prairie Stone and Earth Blend colors.

b. Contractor shall six (6) submit samples of each clay unit masonry product specified.

c. Architect-Engineer will review samples with Contracting Officer and JBSA-Sam Houston to make final selection of masonry colors to be used in construction.


1.) If reviewed samples result in rejection of any samples furnished by Contractor the Architect-Engineer will make recommendations on sources for additional samples.

2.) Contractor shall obtain additional samples until a satisfactory color is approved by Contracting Officer and JBSA-Sam Houston.

2. Unit masonry special shape samples in actual size, shape and finish as proposed for use.

a. Contractor shall submit three (3) samples of colored ground-faced concrete masonry units for each special shape required including jamb units, L-corners, cap units, sill units and other special units indicated.

b. Contractor shall submit three (3) special shape clay unit masonry units for each special shape required including sloped sill units and 12" nominal solid cap units used for terminating rowlock runs on trash enclosure walls and other locations indicated.

3. Provide three (3) sample boxes of mortar colors, showing example of finished mortar joint colors available, for selection of tinted mortar.

D. In accord with 01 78 00: Submit Project Record Documents.

1. Include all authorized changes in drawings and specifications. 2. Include location of all utility lines and other items passing through masonry work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver all materials in sufficient quantity and time to maintain approved construction schedule.

B. Store all packaged materials in manufacturer’s original containers, with all labels and markings intact and legible.

C. Remove materials and damaged containers immediately from the site.

D. Protection:

1. Store masonry units off ground on level platforms or pallets that allow air circulation under stacked units and prevent absorption of moisture.

2. Cover and protect against contamination by mud, dust, materials likely to cause staining or wetting prior to use

3. Store cement, lime, gypsum and air setting mortar in watertight sheds with elevated floors.

4. Protect anchors, ties and reinforcing materials from the elements. 5. Handle materials on pallets or flat bed barrows. 6. Do not permit free discharge from conveyer units or transporting mortar trays.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Cold Weather Protection:

1. Preparation:

a. Remove snow or ice formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to touch.

b. Remove frozen or damaged masonry. c. Sprinkle brick with heated water when suction exceeds 20 grams per minute

per brick (30 square inches) until rate of absorption (suction) falls below 20 grams per minute.


1.) When units are above 32°F: heat water above 70°F. 2.) When units are below 32°F: heat water above 130°F.

d. Use dry concrete masonry units. e. Do not lay frozen units.

2. Protection while masonry units are being laid:

a. At all times when daily air temperature is below 40°F., mortar mixing water and aggregate shall be heated to a minimum of 70°F., and a maximum of 160°F.

b. Additional protection measures as enumerated below shall be taken as the temperature falls.

1.) Temperature 40°F. to 32°F.: Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours.

2.) Temperature 32°F. to 25°F.: Completely cover masonry for 24 hours. 3.) Temperature 25°F. to 20°F.:

a) Heat both sides of walls under construction. b) Provide windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph.

4.) Temperature 20°F. and below:

a) Provide complete enclosures and heat to maintain air temperature above 32°F.

b) Minimum temperature of units when laid shall be 32°F.

B. Hot Weather Protection: Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in an ambient air temperature of 99°F. in the shade with relative humidity less than 50%.

C. Protection of completed masonry:

1. Cover top of walls with non-staining waterproof coverings at end of each day of shutdown.

2. Cover partially completed walls with non-staining waterproof membrane when work is not in progress.

3. Provide minimum 2 feet overhang of protective covering on each side of walls, securely anchored.

4. Protect as follows for Mean daily air temperature within specified ranges:

a. Temperature 40°F. to 32°F.: Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with non-staining weather-resistive membrane.

b. Temperature 32°F. to 25°F.: Completely cover masonry with non-staining weather-resistive membrane for 24 hours.

c. Temperature 25°F. to 20°F.: Completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or equal protection for 24 hours.

d. Temperature 20°F. and below: Maintain masonry temperature above 32°F. for 24 hours by enclosure and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps or other acceptable methods.

5. Do not apply uniform loading for at least 24 hours after completing load bearing masonry walls.

6. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after completing load bearing masonry walls.


2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. General: Comply with requirements indicate below applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit required.

B. Concrete Block Units: Provide units complying with characteristics indicated below for grade, type, face size, exposed face and weight classification.

1. Hollow load bearing units shall comply with ASTM C90, Type I, Grade N. 2. Solid load bearing units shall comply with ASTM C145, Type I, Grade U. 3. Hollow non-load bearing units shall comply with ASTM C129, Type I. 4. Nominal face dimensions of all units shall be 8 inches by 16 inches. 5. Exposed faces shall be furnished in manufacturer’s standard color and texture as

indicated. 6. Thickness of units shall be as indicated on drawings. 7. Provide lightweight aggregate units for all above grade work and normal weight for

use below building slab reference elevation 100’-0” or any conditions below grade, unless noted otherwise on drawings.

8. Pressure steam cure all units at a minimum steam temperature of 350F., minimum steam pressure of 125 PSI for the required time period necessary to complete hydrothermal reaction of lime and silicenous ingredients, or cure and dry all units with CO2 system whereby the kiln atmosphere will contain over 5 percent CO2 and be circulated at 180F. to complete hydrothermal reaction of lime and silicenous ingredient and at 200F to remove moisture and reduce shrinkage to comply with ASTM C90.

9. Maximum drying shrinkage for units shall be .02 percent for normal weight and .03 percent for lightweight units as determined by ASTM C426.

10. Moisture content at time of delivery shall not exceed 35 percent of total absorption capacity.

C. Concrete Building Brick: Provide units with characteristics indicated below for grade, type, size and weight.

1. Concrete building brick shall comply with ASTM C55, Type I, Grade N, normal weight.

2. Nominal modular size dimensions of: 2-2/3 in. x 8 in. x 4 in. thick. 3. Use only for concealed work.

2.2 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer:

1. Single Source: All Architectural concrete masonry units shall be the product of a single manufacturer as indicated.

2. Product: Burnished Block Units. 3. Manufacturer:

Anchor Block Co. 2300 McKnight Road North St. Paul, Minnesota Phone: 651.777.8321

4. All high-density pre-finished concrete masonry units shall be fabricated in compliance with manufacturer’s published literature and the “Standard Specification for Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units” (Current Edition).


a. All units shall and conform to ASTM C90-97. b. Units shall be furnished in sizes and textures as indicated.

B. Acceptable Products:

1. Architectural Ground Faced Units (GFCMU-1): Provide manufacturer’s standard pre-finished modular ground faced concrete masonry units.

a. Size: 4” wide x 8” high x 16” long (3 5/8” x 7 5/8” x 15 5/8” actual). b. Special Shapes: Furnish special corner shapes to maintain running bond

pattern at inside and outside corners.

2. Architectural Ground-Faced Window Sill Units (GFCMUS-1): Provide manufacturer’s custom window sill pre-finished modular ground-faced concrete masonry units with flat top horizontal plane transitioning to a wash as indicated.

a. Size: 4” wide x 8” high x 16” long (3 5/8” x 7 5/8” x 15 5/8” actual). b. Horizontal Plane: 5/8" wide actual (under aluminum curtain wall sill framing). c. Wash Chamfer: 3” horizontal x 3/8” vertical actual.

C. Provide additional special shapes where indicated and as follows:

1. For lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions.

2. Plant shaped outside return corner units shall be furnished for concrete masonry where indicated.

D. Integral Water Repellent for Exposed Concrete Masonry:

1. Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength.

2. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen.

3. Provide manufacturer’s standard water repellant admixture equal to products manufactured by one of the following:

a. Block Plus W-10; Addiment Inc. b. Dry-Block; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division. c. Rheopel; Master Builders.

2.3 CLAY MASONRY UNITS

A. Clay Masonry Units shall be manufactured by the Belden Brick Company, Post Office Box 20910, Canton, OH 44701-0910, (330) 456-0031.

1. Provide manufacturer’s extruded brick with the following characteristics:

a. Face Brick Designation BRK-1:

1.) Name: “Gray”. 2.) Color: Gray/Beige Blend. 3.) Texture: Velour. 4.) Number: 8530 A 04-35. 5.) Manufacturing Plant: 8.

B. Brick Standard:

1. ASTM C216 and per requirements set forth below. 2. Provide units of grade and minimum average net area compressive strength

indicated below:


a. Grade: SW. b. Compressive Strength: 3000 p.s.i. minimum.

3. Type: FBX 4. Size: Provide bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions within the

tolerances specified in ASTM C216:

a. Economo Modular: 3 5/8 inches thick by 3 5/8" inches high by 7 5/8 inches long for use at all walls.

b. Utility: 3 5/8 inches thick by 3 5/8" high by 11 5/8" long for use at Trash Enclosure wall caps only.

5. Color and Texture: As indicated and approved by Contracting Office or designated representative and JBSA-Sam Houston CES.

C. Comply with the following requirements applicable to each form of brick required as indicated:

1. Provide special molded shapes where indicated and as follows:

a. For applications requiring brick of form, color, texture and size on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing standard brick sizes.

1.) Window sills as indicated. 2.) Exposed ends of rowlock courses:

a) Exposed ends of Trash Enclosure wall cap rowlocks shall be nominal 12" long solid units without cores as indicated.

b. For applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes and lintels.

2. Provide units without cores or frogs and with all exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills, caps and similar applications that expose brick surfaces that otherwise would be concealed from view.

D. Comply with the following requirements applicable to each form of brick required as indicated:

1. Provide special molded shapes where indicated and as follows:

a. For applications requiring brick of form, color, texture and size on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing standard brick sizes.

b. For applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes and lintels.

2. Provide units without cores or frogs and with all exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills, caps and similar applications that expose brick surfaces that otherwise would be concealed from view.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, grade 60, deformed billet steel bars; uncoated finish.

B. Horizontal reinforcing for single wythe walls:

1. Single wythe wall horizontal reinforcing: Truss type; plain steel; galvanized finish; 3/16 in. or No. 9 ga. side rods with 9 ga. cross ties as indicated or, if not indicated, provide No. 9 ga. side rods as standard.


2. Acceptable products:

MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION CATALOG NO. a. A.A. Wire Products Co. Blok-Truss AA600 6100 E. New England Ave. Chicago, IL 60638 (312) 586-6700 b. Homann & Bernard Inc. Truss-Mesh No. 120 30 Rasons Court P. O. Box 270 Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 234-0600 c. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. Truss Type WB 302 of America P. O. Box 240146 400 Round Tree Road Charlotte, NC 28244 (704) 525-5554

C. Horizontal reinforcing for multiple wythe walls:

1. Multiple wythe wall horizontal reinforcing: Truss type; plain steel; galvanized finish, 3/16 in. or No. 9 ga. side rods with 9 ga. cross ties as indicated or, if not indicated, provide No. 9 ga. side rods as standard; and receptor for adjustable “U” shaped anchor and wire tie.


MANUFACTURER NO. DESCRIPTION CATALOG

a. A.A. Wire Products Co. Blok-Truss AA680 6100 E. New England Ave. Chicago, IL 60638 (312) 586-6700 b. Homann & Bernard Inc. Truss-Box Mesh No. 165 30 Rasons Court P. O. Box 270 Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 234-0600 c. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. Adjustable WB 700-C of America Truss Tab P. O. Box 240146 400 Round Tree Road Charlotte, NC 28244 (704) 525-5554

D. Adjustable masonry veneer anchors:

1. Provide two-piece assemblies allowing vertical and/or horizontal differential movement between masonry wythe and substrate, parallel to plane of substrate, but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it.

a. Assemblies shall be capable of withstanding 110 l.b.f. load in either tension or compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.

b. Attachment:


1.) Steel stud walls: Zinc coated hex head screws, self drilling, self tapping, #10 TEK screws by 2 ¼” minimum length.

2.) Concrete or solid grouted masonry: Self-tapping, hex head, epoxy coated, #10 TEK screw by 2 ¼” long.

2. Tie and Anchor Units:

a. Wire tie shall be triangular, hot dip galvanized, 3/16” diameter and in lengths as required to extend 3 inches into masonry wythe of face veneer.

b. Anchor section shall be 12-gauge mill galvanized sheet metal stiffened strap stamped to provide slot between strap and plate for connection of wire tie.

1.) Nominal ¾-inch wide by 9 inches long by 3/8 inch offset. 2.) 1” stand-off legs to prevent compression of insulated sheathing.

c. Foam seal shall be polyethylene foam supplied in 1/8” x 3” rolls conforming to ASTM D 3575.


MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION CATALOG NO.

a. Homann & Bernard, Inc. Screw Anchor X-seal 1” with 30 Rasons Court “VeeTie” and Foam Seal P. O. Box 270

Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 234-0600

2.5 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS AND SEALANTS

A. Flexible Copper Fabric Flashing: Laminated flexible sheet flashings comprised of copper sheet bonded under pressure with a ductile asphalt between two layers of asphalt saturated woven fabric , black in color and of weight indicated below:

1. Weight: 2 oz./ Sq.Ft. 2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

B. Adhesive for Flashing: Of type recommended by manufacture of flashing material for use indicated.

C. Flashing Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Flexible Copper Fabric Flashing:

a. “AFCO Copper Fabric”; Afco Products Inc. b. “Copper Fabric”; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. “York Copper Fabric”; York Manufacturing Inc. d. “Copper Fabric”; Advanced Building Products.

D. Cavity Mat: Provide continuous trapezoidal shaped mesh fabric cavity mat at base of wall over in-wall flashing to suspend mortar droppings permanently above flashing.

1. Mortar Net. 2. CavClear.

E. Weep Joint Material: 90% open weave polyester mesh head joint weep material for modular veneer masonry applications designed to reduce mold and allow moisture to migrate from wall, used in conjunction with cavity mat, and furnished in color as selected by Architect-Engineer from manufacturer’s standard colors.


1. Mortar Net. 2. CavClear.

F. Sealant Products: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants that are compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates and other related materials and comply with requirements specified in Section 07 90 00.

2.6 CLEANING AGENTS

A. Use only the following cleaning agents for new masonry as indicated:

1. Extreme care shall be taken to avoid any unnecessary deposits of mortar on the face of the masonry units.

2. Initial Cleaning:

a. Soak surface area to be cleaned with potable water. b. Work from top to bottom of area to be cleaned using stiff brush before the

mortar has had a chance to cure and rigidly bond itself to the masonry units.

3. Alternate Cleaning if Initial Cleaning is unsuccessful:

a. Soak surface area to be cleaned with potable water. b. Work from top to bottom of area to be cleaned using only the following:

1.) Weak solution of water and common laundry detergent mixed at a rate of ½ cup detergent per 5-gallon bucket.

2.) Use stiff brush to apply solution and rinse thoroughly with clean, potable water.

B. For stains or mortar removal that cannot be removed using above methods contact masonry unit manufacturer for specific written recommendations of materials and methods.

C. Do not use commercial masonry cleaning solutions under any circumstances without express written consent of Contracting Officer or designated representative.

2.7 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type IA.

1. Gray for all mortar used for laying unexposed masonry units. 2. Pigmented mortar shall be used for all exposed masonry units.

B. Hydrated lime shall comply with ASTM C207, Type S.

C. Quicklime: in accordance with ASTM C5.

D. Sand shall conform to ASTM C144.

E. Water shall be clean and potable.

F. Coarse aggregate for masonry grout shall conform to ASTM C404; maximum size 3/8 inch.

G. Masonry Cement: Not allowed.

H. Colored Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in type N mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C979.

1. Pigment requirements shall meet or surpass those set forth by ASTM C79, “Pigments for Integrally Colored Mortar/Concrete”.


2. Pigments shall have been successfully tested in accordance with specifications detailed in ASTM C91 and ASTM C270.

3. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar used to lay similar masonry units and as acceptable to masonry unit manufacturer.

2.8 MORTAR MIXING AND PROPORTIONING

A. All mortar and grout materials shall comply with requirements of ASTM C270.

B. Mortar types and locations:

1. Provide Type S mortar for all below grade regular weight concrete masonry walls and for above grade light weight structurally reinforced concrete masonry walls.

2. Provide Type N mortar for all clay brick masonry and glazed concrete masonry veneer walls.

C. Proportions of materials for mortar shall be by volume for unit masonry and shall meet the following mix requirements:

1. Type S mortar proportions, 2,000 psi, minimum 28 day compressive strength:

a. 1 part Portland cement. b. 1/2 part hydrated lime or lime putty. c. Not less than 2 1/4 parts and not more than 3 parts, damp loose aggregate.

2. Type N mortar proportions, 1,500 psi, minimum 28 day compressive strength:

a. 1 part Portland cement. b. 1 part hydrated lime or lime putty. c. Not less than 2 1/4 parts and not more than 3 parts, damp loose aggregate.

3. Enhance mortar to improve durability and water resistance for glazed concrete masonry units only in compliance with manufacturer's written recommendations for water based mortar additives.

D. Volume of aggregate for all mortar proportions shall be not less than 2-1/4 times nor more than 3 times the sum of volume of cement and lime used.

1. Weights per cubic foot of materials in mortar are:

MATERIAL WEIGHT PER CUBIC FOOT

Portland Cement 94 lbs. Hydrated Lime 40 lbs. Sand (Damp & Loose) One cubic foot contains 80 lbs. dry sand.

2. Measurement of volume of mortar ingredients shall be by barrow, buggy, manufacturer’s package, or other containers of known capacity, or by approved batching device so that specified proportions will be consistently maintained.

E. All mortar shall be thoroughly mixed in a mechanical mixer for a minimum of 5 minutes.

1. Mixer shall be completely emptied and thoroughly cleaned by hosing down or other acceptable means between batches.

2. Mortar consistency shall be adjusted to satisfaction of mason, but as much water shall be added as is compatible with convenience in using mortar.

3. If mortar begins to stiffen from evaporation or absorption of a part of mixing water, mortar shall be re-tempered by adding water and remixing.

F. All mortar shall be discarded if not used within 2-1/2 hours of initial mixing or after it has begun to set.

G. Materials that are frozen, caked, or lumpy shall not be used for mortar.


2.9 GROUT

A. Provide coarse grout in accordance with ASTM C476.

B. Grout shall be proportioned as specified for mortar above except as follows:

1. Coarse aggregate shall be substituted for a portion, not to exceed 50 percent, of the sand.

2. Water shall be added to produce a consistency for pouring without segregation of materials.

3. Minimum compressive strength of grout shall be 2000 p.s.i.

C. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use.

1. Place grout within 1-1/2 hours from introducing water to the mixture and prior to initial set.

2. Re-tempered grout is not allowed.

D. Do not antifreeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.

E. Do not introduce admixtures to grout.

2.10 CONCRETE

A. Concrete for bond beams: Provide concrete with 3000 PSI compressive strength at 28 days; 3 inch maximum slump; conforming to the following requirements:

1. Cement: ASTM C150, Normal – Type I. 2. Coarse aggregate: Maximum 3/8 in. size; graded in compliance with ASTM C33. 3. Fine aggregate: Graded in compliance with ASTM C33.

2.11 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER STRIPS

A. Strips shall be factory-molded product of rubber conforming to ASTM D375, Grade R-805, with compressive neoprene compound edge conforming to ASTM D375, Grade SC-310C, durometer hardness of 30.

B. All strips shall be wide flange type with shear lugs, resistant to oil and solvents and shall meet requirements of ASTM D736 after being exposed to a temperature of minus 40 degrees F.

C. Width of strips shall be as required by wall masonry thickness.

2.12 BRICK MASONRY WATER REPELLANT PRODUCTS

A. Provide a premixed, high performance, water based, clear silane/siloxane water repellant sealer designed for protecting vertical brick masonry surfaces.

1. Solution shall be colorless, non-toxic and produce no change in the appearance of the surfaces being coated.

2. Solution shall be suitable for use as a warranted, high performance, general water repelling coating on all types of vertical brick masonry.

B. Water repellant manufacturer shall approve cleaning methods and preparation of substrate to receive water repellant materials.

C. Acceptable manufacturers and products:


BRAND NAME MANUFACTURER PRODUCT

1. PROSOCO ProSoCo, Inc. Sure Klean Weather Kansas City, KS Seal Siloxane PD

2. HYDROZO ChemRex, Inc. Enviroseal Double 7 Shakopee, MN for Brick 3. EDISON Edison Coatings, Inc. System 90-W Plainville, CT

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Inspect bearing surfaces to assure surface to support masonry work at proper elevation, free of dirt and other deleterious materials and all surfaces not properly prepared have been satisfactorily corrected.

B. Remove all dirt, ice, loose rust and scale from anchors, ties and reinforcement prior to installation.

C. Do not lay masonry when temperature of outside air is below 40F., unless suitable means are provided to heat materials.

1. Protect work from cold and frost and insure that mortar will harden without freezing.

2. No antifreeze ingredients shall be used in mortar.

D. Before closing up any pipe, duct or similar inaccessible spaces or shafts with masonry, remove all rubbish and sweep out the area to be enclosed.

E. Where fresh masonry joins masonry that is partially set or totally set, or existing masonry, clean exposed surfaces of set masonry and wet lightly so as to obtain best possible bond with new work.

1. Remove all loose masonry mortar. 2. If it is necessary to “Stop Off” a horizontal run of masonry, this shall be done by

racking back one-half unit length in each course. 3. Toothing will not be permitted.

F. Consult other trades and make provisions that will permit installation of their work in a manner to avoid unnecessary cutting and patching and build in work specified under other sections, as work progresses.

G. Set steel lintels with 8 inch minimum bearing each end in beds of mortar and build in wood thermal breaks for windows as indicated.

H. When cutting is necessary for unit masonry, use motor driven masonry saw to produce clean, cut edges.

1. Do all necessary cutting to accommodate installation of miscellaneous built-in items such as electrical boxes, sleeves, anchors, grounds and other built-in items.


2. Do not cut ends of unit masonry exposed to view.

I. Chases and recesses shall be built into walls at time walls are built so structural stability and weather resistance of wall is maintained.

J. Bond each course of all units at corners by lapping alternate courses.

1. Laps shall generally be one-half unit length where possible, but in no case less than 4 inches.

2. Intersecting and butting walls shall be bonded together by interlocking alternate courses.

K. Masonry wall reinforcing shall be installed in horizontal joints of all masonry walls as follows:

1. Foundation walls: 16 inches on center with one additional continuously reinforced course directly below bond beams.

2. Running bond walls: 16 inches o.c. and in bed joint on top courses. 3. All reinforcement shall be continuous except it shall not pass through vertical

expansion joints in walls.

a. Splices in reinforcement shall be lapped to interlock a minimum of 6 inches to assure continuity of reinforcement.

b. Use prefabricated corners throughout.

L. All unit masonry shall be built to the following tolerances:

1. Maximum variation from plumb:

a. In vertical lines and surfaces of walls and arises:

1.) 1/4 inch in 10 feet (1/480). 2.) 3/8 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum (1/640). 3.) 1/2 inch in 40 feet (1/960).

b. For external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines:

1.) 1/4 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum (1/960). 2.) 1/2 inch in 40 feet (1/960).

2. Maximum variation from level or grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines:

a. 1/4 inch in any bay or 20 feet (1/960). b. 3/4 inch in 40 feet (1/960).

3. Maximum variation of linear building line from an established position in plan and related portions of walls:

a. 1/2 inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum (1/480). b. 3/4 inch in 40 feet (1/640).

M. Lay Masonry units plumb, true to line and with level courses accurately spaced within allowable tolerances.

1. Adjust units to final position while mortar is soft and plastic. 2. If units are displaced after mortar has stiffened, remove, clean joints and units of

mortar and relay with fresh mortar.

N. Set all anchors and anchor bolts required as masonry work progresses and fill all space around built-in items solid with mortar, if in joints, or grout if in voids of masonry units.

O. Flashings:

1. Install through-wall and in-wall flashings.


2. Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections that might puncture or otherwise damage flashing material.

3. Place through-wall and in-wall flashings on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. 4. In-wall flashing shall be installed at locations as indicated or minimum as follows:

a. At heads and sills of masonry openings. b. In coursing directly above grade in exterior walls.

5. Splices required in flashings shall be lapped 3 inches and sealed with mastic. 6. In-wall flashings above openings shall extend a minimum of 6 inches beyond

jambs. 7. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or plug weep

holes. 8. Flashing membrane shall be trimmed so that outside edge of material does not

project visibly beyond face of mortar joint.

P. All equipment used in mixing, transporting and storing mortar shall be thoroughly cleaned at end of each day of work.

3.3 LAYING CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

A. Lay only dry masonry units.

B. Mortar bed:

1. Hollow units:

a. Lay with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. b. Provide full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells and webs

in all courses of the following:

1.) Starting courses on footing and solid foundation walls. 2.) Where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout or concrete.

C. Joints:

1. Layout vertical coursing on story poles before starting and maintain joint thickness thus established.

2. Provide sufficient line blocks to maintain level bed joints within established tolerances.

3. Vertical face joints under Base Bid materials shall be approximately 3/8” thick. 4. Construct uniform joints. 5. Shove vertical joints tight. 6. All joints shall be cut flush.

a. When joints in foundation masonry and masonry not exposed to view are thumbprint hard, they shall be tooled with a 5/8 inch diameter round tool to form a concave joint.

1.) Tooling shall compact the mortar firmly against masonry units on both sides of joint.

2.) Head joints shall be tooled first.

b. When joints in decorative faced masonry units exposed to view are thumbprint hard, they shall be tooled to form a 3/8 inch deep rake joint.

1.) Scored joints in “ground face” bull-nose sill units shall be wetted and tuckpointed with fresh mortar.

2.) After mortar in thumbprint hard they shall be tooled to form a 3/8 inch deep rake joint to match normal head and bed joints.


c. Nominal width of these joints shall be approximately 3/8 inch.

7. Remove mortar protruding into cells of cavities to be reinforced or filled. 8. Control joints shall be kept clean of all mortar and debris prior to sealing.

D. Bond facing and backing of single and multiple wythe walls with horizontal joint reinforcement.

E. Avoid unnecessary cutting and patching around built in items.

1. Install bolts, anchors, nailing blocks, inserts, frames, flashings, conduits, boxes, sleeves and other items as work progresses.

2. Solidly grout spaces around built-in items. 3. Provide sealant joints, 1/4 inch wide by 3/4 inch deep, at all intersections with

dissimilar materials.

F. Exposed decorative faced masonry block walls shall be carefully laid up to produce a smooth, uniformly textured wall surface free from cracks, spalls, broken corners, chips and unevenness.

G. Any uneven, out-of-plane, cracked, broken, chipped or spalled units shall be removed from the wall and replaced with a sound unit.

3.4 LAYING BRICK

A. Reduce absorption of brick to less than 20 grams per minute per brick (30 square inches) by thoroughly wetting bricks with clean water 24 hours before placing.

B. Do not install cracked, broken or chipped units exceeding ASTM allowances.

1. Use masonry saws to cut and fit exposed units.

C. Mortar beds:

1. Lay brick with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical joints in all courses. 2. Provide sufficient mortar on ends of brick to fill head joints. 3. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against 2 adjacent bricks in place. 4. Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units after setting in place. 5. Where adjustment to corners or jambs must be made after mortar has started to

set, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar.

D. Joints:

1. Lay out vertical coursing on story poles before starting and maintain joint thickness thus established.

2. Provide sufficient line blocks to maintain level bed joints within established tolerances.

3. Brick shall be laid in coursing heights to match existing coursing of original building.

4. Vertical face joints (head joints) shall be approximately 3/8 inch thick. 5. Shove vertical (head) joints tight. 6. Construct uniform joints. 7. All joints shall be cut flush and when joints are thumbprint hard, they shall be

tooled with a 5/8 inch diameter round tool to form a concave joint.

a. Tooling shall compact the mortar firmly against masonry units on both sides of joint.

b. Head joints shall be tooled first.

8. Expansion joints shall be kept clean of all mortar and debris.


E. Weepholes:

1. Install polyester mesh weep joint material in head joints of brick at all in-wall flashings:

a. Base of all walls at grade. b. Heads of all openings in exterior walls.

2. Weep joints shall be spaced as indicated on drawings or, if not indicated:

a. 24 inches on center at flashings above floor level. b. 24 inches on center at bottom of all exterior walls in first course above grade.

3. Keep weep joints and area above flashings free of mortar droppings by installing cavity mat as indicated.

F. Provide sealant joints, 1/4 inch wide by 3/4 inch deep, for backer rod and sealant, around outside perimeters of exterior window frames and other wall openings.

3.5 FLASHING

A. Install all through-wall and in-wall flashings.

B. Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections that might puncture or otherwise damage flashing materials.

C. Place through-wall and in-wall flashing on: bed of mortar and over with mortar.

D. In-wall flashing shall be installed at heads of openings, under sills and at grade line in exterior walls and at other locations noted on drawings.

E. Splices required in flashings shall be lapped 3 inches or per manufacturer’s instructions and sealed with mastic.

F. In-wall flashings above and below openings shall extend a minimum of 6 inches beyond jambs.

3.6 LINTELS

A. Install loose steel where scheduled on drawings.

B. Maintain minimum 8-inch lintel bearing on each side of opening or as called for on drawings.

C. Grout hollow CMU cells solid for a minimum of two courses below lintel bearing, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

D. Set steel lintels in bed of mortar.

3.7 GROUTED COMPONENTS

A. Grout reinforce bond beams and walls vertically as indicated on drawings.

B. Lap splices minimum 48 bar diameters.

C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position.


D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.

E. Vertical grouting requirements:

1. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening.

2. At all vertical reinforcing grout block cells solid. 3. Grouting shall be installed in lifts not to exceed 4’-0” maximum before continuing

with wall construction.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.

B. Form control joints by cutting existing brick masonry units for placement of backer rod and sealant.

C. Locate control joints at all locations shown on drawings and maintain existing control joints to remain when patching occurs at these locations.

D. Control joints shall be sized for sealant performance in accord with Section 07 90 00.

3.9 POINTING AND CLEANING

A. All masonry surfaces shall be dry and brushed with stiff bristles (not metal) brushes after mortar has set at end of each day’s work and after final pointing of holes and joints.

B. Point all holes in exposed masonry joints to match surrounding work with mortar and tool.

C. Clean all masonry from top down.

D. Final cleaning of masonry shall remove all mortar spots, stains, dirt, grease and oil.

1. Cleaning procedures shall be terminated as soon as satisfactory results are obtained.

2. Final cleaning operations shall not be started until mortar has thoroughly set and cured.

E. Protect all glass, metal and other finish materials, subject to damage from cleaning agents, from contact with cleaning agents.

F. In addition to normal daily dry brush cleaning, all concrete unit masonry shall be cleaned as follows if required for satisfactory appearance.

1. Large particles or spots of mortar on face of block shall be removed with a wooden paddle or scraper.

2. Wet surface of exposed masonry surfaces as indicated. 3. Masonry surfaces shall be vigorously scrubbed with a wet, stiff bristled fiber brush. 4. Leave surface clean and uniformly textured to blend with surrounding work.

G. Leave entire work area and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings and broken masonry.

3.10 WATER REPELLANT COATING APPLICATION AT BRICK MASONRY


A. Provide protective covering over both vertical and horizontal surfaces that will be subject to damage, staining or streaking as a result of the application of water repellant materials.

1. Protect metal, glazed masonry walls and glazed areas from damage. 2. Protect existing landscaping, grass areas, sidewalks and surrounding surfaces,

including vehicles, from damaging over spray. 3. Thoroughly clean and rinse any areas where over spray causes staining or

streaking and immediately make reparations to damaged surfaces at no cost to Owner.

B. Do not apply coating until moisture content of masonry surface is within limitations recommended by sealer manufacturer.

1. Surfaces shall be tested with a moisture meter. 2. In no case shall coating be applied less than 5 days after cleaning operation have

been completed and final inspection for staining has been accomplished.

C. Apply masonry water repellant coating to clay masonry products only with spray equipment as recommended by manufacturer for maximum penetration and even coverage in order to obtain warranted system.

1. Do not apply water repellant coating to glazed masonry surfaces. 2. Completely cover glazed masonry surfaces to protect from overspray.

D. New brick masonry shall be treated with one coat of product installed in strict compliance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

E. Comply with all regulations regarding Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content and installation for water repellant materials.

F. Inspect and recoat any areas that contain thin spots or skips and to comply with manufacturer’s recommended application rates.

G. Inspect and clean any water repellant coating that has streaked or produces white film appearance for surfaces and recoat areas to comply with manufacturer’s recommended application rates and to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect sills, ledges and offsets from mortar droppings or other damage during construction.

B. Remove misplaced mortar or grout immediately.

C. Protect face materials against staining.

D. Protect doorjambs and corners from damage during construction.

E. Cover top of walls with non-staining waterproof coverings when work is not in progress. Provide minimum 2-foot overhang of protective covering each side of wall and securely anchor.

F. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities.

END 04 20 00.

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05 12 00 – STRUCTURAL STEEL

STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All structural steel columns and beams. b. All cross-bracing for lateral support of structural system. c. All base plates, anchor bolts and high strength bolts. d. All miscellaneous steel and accessories necessary to complete the structural

framing system. e. Erection of structural steel components. f. Assistance for testing welded and bolted connections.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 4. Section 05 21 00 – Steel Joists. 5. Section 05 31 00 – Steel Deck. 6. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 7. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 8. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Structural grouting under base plates shall be performed by Contractor as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.

2. Provisions shall be made in structural steel members by punching holes for bolt connection of wall framing as specified in Section 05 40 00, Cold-Formed Metal Framing and wood blocking as specified in Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry.

1.3 DEFINITIONS AND PREFORMANCE

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.

B. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.

C. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified structural engineer, licensed in the State of Texas, to prepare structural analysis data for structural steel connections.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field

welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.

Identify pre-tensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, professional engineer and testing agency.

E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements:

1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies.

F. Source quality-control test reports.

G. Design Calculations: Submit design calculations, performed by structural engineer licensed to practice in the State of Texas, for all structural steel connections.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed steel erection similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," AISC 303. 2. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," AISC 360-05. 3. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 4. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members." 5. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification.

B. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers.


C. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.

1. Store fasteners in a protected place. 2. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion,

damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. 4. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work.

B. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:

1. ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy hex head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.

2.3 PRIMER AND PROTECTION

A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, non-asphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI #79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Where high performance or proprietary top coat paints and finishes are specified, provide a primer that is compatible with the applied finish material.


B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint-12 except containing no asbestos fibers.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 3. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting

shop-priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting:

1. Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 2. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 2. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 3. Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch base plate holes perpendicular to

steel surfaces.

2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Pretensioned.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles and elevations.


B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads.

B. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."

B. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base plates.

C. Clean bottom surface of base plates.

1. Set base plates for structural members on steel wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and

plumbed. 4. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base

plate before packing with grout. 5. Coordinate with Contractor to promptly pack grout solidly between bearing

surfaces and base plates so no voids remain as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete.

D. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

E. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening.

1. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members.

2. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

3. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 4. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

F. Splice members only where indicated.

G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins but ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS


A. High-Strength Bolts: Field install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tight except where indicated to be slip critical.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.


A. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, fifty (50) percent of all field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

B. Bolted Connections: Field bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts", Section 9 as follows:

1. Snug-Tightened Joints:

a. Visually confirm that all plies of connection are in firm contact. b. Visually confirm that washer are provide at all nuts.

2. Pretensioned Joints:

a. “Turn-of-Nut” pretensioning method shall be used and verified by routine observation ensuring proper rotation of the nut relative to the bolt.

b. Nut shall be turned relative to bolt as prescribed in Table 8.2 of the referenced specification.

c. “Twist-off-Type Tension-Control Bolt Pretensioning” or “Direct-Tension Indicator Pretensioning” will not be required.

C. Correct deficiencies in Work that inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

END 05 12 00.

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05 21 00 – STEEL JOISTS

STEEL JOISTS 05 21 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All steel joists. b. All end bearings, ceiling extensions, bridging, bridging anchors and lateral

bracing. c. All miscellaneous accessories necessary to complete the structural roof joist

framing system. d. Erection of structural joists, joist girders and related components. e. Assistance for testing of field bolted and field welded connections.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 3. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel. 4. Section 05 31 00 – Steel Deck. 5. Section 05 40 00 – Cold Formed Metal Framing. 6. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 7. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 8. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping. 9. Division 21 – Fire Suppression. 10. Division 22 – Plumbing. 11. Division 23 – HVAC. 12. Division 26 – Electrical.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise indicated or specified:

1. ASTM A307-80 – Carbon Steel Threaded Standard Fasteners. 2. ASTM A325-80a – High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 3. AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code. 4. FS TT-P-636 – Primer Coating, Alkyd, Wood and Ferrous Metal. 5. SJI – Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists K-Series. 6. SSPC 15 – Red Oxide.

B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joist complying with applicable standard specification and load table in SJI’s “Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables”.

C. Provide joists fabricated in compliance with the following, and as herein specified.

1. Steel Joist Institute (SJI) "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables" for joist girders.


2. By a manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI’s Specifications.

3. Manufacturer’s responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.

D. Qualification of Field Welding: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with American Welding Society "Structural Welding Code," AWS D1.1.

E. Inspection: Inspect joists in accordance with SJI specifications.

F. Performance Test: If required, conduct performance tests in accordance with procedures described in SJI "Recommended Code of Standard Practice".

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for joist girders and accessories.

2. Include manufacturer's certification that joist girders comply with SJI "Specifications".

B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, special connections, joining and accessories.

1. Include mark, number, type and location of joists. 2. Include location of bottom chord lateral bracing including requirements, spacing

and connection details.

C. Qualification Data: Manufacturers qualifications.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by a qualified structural engineer, licensed in the State of Texas, responsible for preparation.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver, store and handle joist girders as recommended in SJI "Specifications".

B. Handle and store in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated:

1. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level. 2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load vertical deflections no

greater than 1/360 of the span.

2.2 MATERIALS:

A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Specifications".


B. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size and type required by SJI’s Specifications for type of joist, chord size, spacing and span.

1. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.

C. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular hexagon type, low carbon steel.

D. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 325 or A 490 heavy hexagon structural bolts with nuts and hardened washers.

2.3 PRIMERS

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer’s standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate steel joist girders in accordance with SJI "Specification".

B. Holes in Chord Members: Provide holes in chord members where shown for securing other work to joists, however, deduct area of holes from the area of chord when calculating strength of member.

C. Provide bottom chord lateral bracing gussets at spacing to comply with SJI "Specifications."

D. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages including bearing plates, to secure joists to steel columns, complying with SJI "Specifications", unless otherwise indicated.

E. Shop Painting: Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories before application of shop paint.

F. Apply one shop coat of steel prime paint to joists and accessories, by spray, dipping, or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 ERECTION

A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Specifications", final shop drawings, and as herein specified.

B. Placing Joists:

1. Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured. 2. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing

before permanently fastening.


C. Provide temporary bracing, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction.

D. Bracing:

1. Install permanent bracing before additional construction loads are applied. 2. Anchor ends of bracing members at bottom chords and at roof deck as indicated.

E. Fastening Joists:

1. Field connect joists to supporting steel columns in accordance with SJI "Specifications."

2. Coordinate sequence and procedure with placement of structural steel. 3. Touch-Up Painting:

a. After joist installation, paint field bolt heads and nuts, welded areas, abraded and rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members.

b. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting. c. Use same type of paint as used for shop painting.


A. Testing Agency: AAFES, through Architect-Engineer, will engage a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports.

B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test fifty (50) percent of all field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following procedures, as applicable:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709. c. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164. d. Radiograpic Testing: ASTM E 94.

C. Visually inspect bolted connections.

D. Contractor shall correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements.

E. Testing Agency provide additional testing where non-compliant Work requires retesting to ensure compliance.

1. Contractor pay for performance of additional testing to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Touch-up Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare and prime or re-prime field connections, rust spots and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting structural steel and accessories.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and the Contracting Officer or designated representative, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END 05 21 00.

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05 31 00 – STEEL DECK

STEEL DECK 05 31 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Base Bid:

a. All primed steel roof deck units. b. All deck attachment accessories including welding washers and/or TEK

screws. c. All deck accessories including closure channels and filler sheets. d. All deck reinforcing at openings in excess of 6” diameter/square. e. Installation of complete steel deck system to provide a structural diaphragm

and surface for the installation of specified roofing system.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel. 3. Section 05 21 00 – Steel Joists. 4. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 6. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 7. Section 07 54 00 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO). 8. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping. 9. Section 08 31 05 – Access Doors. 10. Division 23 – HVAC. 11. Division 26 – Electrical.

B. Steel reinforcing angles for mechanical equipment, roof access door and other miscellaneous openings are specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications and shall be installed in coordination with work of this Section.


A. Manufacturer: Regularly engaged in the production of metal decking.

B. Qualifications of Erector:

1. Firm with minimum of 5 years documented experience in successful completion of steel roof deck projects similar in size and complexity to this project.

2. Use qualified welding processes and welding operators in accordance with “Welder Qualification” procedures of AWS.

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise indicated:

1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), “Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”.

2. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.3 “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel”. 3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), “Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and

Roof Decks”.


4. ASTM A-123 “Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized Coating of Iron and Steel Products”, latest edition.

5. ASTM A-780 “Specification for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings”, latest edition.

6. SSPC “Steel Structures Painting Manual”, Volume 11, Sixth Edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 Specification Sections.

1. Product data: including manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories.

2. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck units, anchorage details, and conditions requiring closure strips, supplementary framing, sump pans, cat strips, cut openings, special jointing and other accessories.

B. Manufacturer’s Catalogs: Specified manufacturers’ catalogs are incorporated by reference to same force and effect as if repeated herein in full.

C. Manufacturer’s Literature: Recommend installation instructions.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver products to site in accord with 01 65 00.

B. Metal Deck:

1. Store decking in accord with: 01 66 00 on wood sleepers with slope for positive drainage.

2. Do not bend or mar decking. 3. Store off ground with one end elevated for drainage. 4. Cover deck with waterproof materials and vent to prevent condensation.

2 PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI’s “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

1. Bowman Metal Roof Deck Chicago, IL 2. Nucor Corporation, Vulcraft Div. Charlotte, NC 3. Wheeling – Pittsburgh Steel Corp. Wheeling, WV

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Steel for Deck Units: ASTM A 446, grade as required to comply with SDI specifications.

B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36.

C. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526; commercial quality, galvanized.

D. Galvanizing:

1. ASTM A 525: G60. 2. Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in

accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780.


E. Primer: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 minimum, shop primed with manufacturer’s standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements indicated.

F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.

G. Cell Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, profiled to decking.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Form deck units in lengths as indicated with interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, and width as indicated.

B. Roof Deck Units: Provide deck configurations that comply with SDI “Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck”.

1. Interior Building Locations: Primed Type 1.5 B steel deck.

C. Roof Sump Pans: Fabricate from single piece of 0.071-inch min. (14 gage) galvanized, primed sheet steel with level bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow to drain.

1. Provide sump pans of adequate size to receive roof drains and with bearing flanges not less than 3 inches wide.

2. Recess pans not less than 1 1/2 inches below roof deck surface unless otherwise shown or required by deck configuration.

3. Holes for drains will be cut in the field.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect supporting members for correct layout and alignment.

B. Verify that surfaces to receive roof deck are free of debris.

C. Do not proceed with installation until defects are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Erect metal decking in accord with SDI Design Manual for:

1. Roof Decks. 2. Provide welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

B. On steel support members provide 1-1/2 in. minimum bearing.

C. Align and level deck units on supports.

D. Fasten all roof deck panels to steel supporting members with 5/8" puddle welds in patterns indicated.

E. Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of ½ of the span or as indicated, and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, #10 carbon-steel TEK screws.

F. Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1 ½ inches with end joints lapped 2 inches minimum.


G. Cut and fit roof deck units and accessories around openings through roof.

1. Cut openings in roof deck true to dimensions using metal saws or drills. 2. Make cuts neat, square and trim.

H. Reinforce deck openings from 6 to 18 in. in size with 2 x 2 x 1/4 in. steel angles.

1. Place angles perpendicular to flutes. 2. Extend minimum two flutes each side of opening and weld to deck.

I. Place roof sump pans over drain openings in roof deck and weld to top decking surface.

1. Space TEK screws not more than 12 inches o.c., with at least 1 screw to top decking surface.

2. Cut opening in bottom of roof sump pan to accommodate drain.

J. Install metal closure strips at all open, uncovered ends and edges of top surface of roof decking, in voids between decking and other construction, and for support of roof insulation where rib openings in top surface occur adjacent to edges and openings.

1. Lap closure strips minimum of 3 inches. 2. Weld closure strips into position at 12-inch centers.

K. Install flexible closure strips where rib openings in bottom surface bear on perimeter walls, beams and at bearings areas, after touch-up painting is complete.

3.3 TOUCH-UP PAINTING

A. Wire brush, clean and paint all scarred areas and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members.

1. Spots in exposed areas, requiring touch-up shall be feather-edged by sanding or grinding before applying touch-up finish.

2. Touch-up Primed surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Do not use deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured in position.

B. Assure that construction loads do not exceed carrying capacity of deck.

C. Properly protect previously placed materials from damage; especially weld splatter or burns.

3.5 CLEAN-UP

A. At completion of installation, deck and surrounding area shall be cleaned of dirt and debris and deck surfaces left in a condition ready for installation of work by others.


A. Visual inspection installation for fastener placement and spacing.

B. Inspect Primed surfaces and touch-up any defects in Primed coating.

END 05 31 00.

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05 40 00 – COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Exterior wall framing. b. Parapet wall framing. c. Exterior and interior header framing. d. All related fabricated steel framing accessories. e. All related anchors clips and fasteners. f. All related anchor bolts. g. All miscellaneous rough hardware items needed for proper installation of non-

load bearing metal framing. h. All labor to complete installation of cold-formed metal framing system.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 4. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel. 5. Section 05 21 00 – Steel Joists. 6. Section 05 31 00 – Steel Deck. 7. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 8. Section 07 21 00 – Building Insulation. 9. Section 08 10 00 – Metal Doors & Frames. 10. Section 08 31 00 – Access Doors. 11. Section 08 41 10 – Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors. 12. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems.


1. Coordinate wood blocking and other requirements for installation of millwork, casework, specialty items and aluminum curtain wall systems with work specified in Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry and with requirements for anchorage of such items specified in other Sections of the specifications.

2. Coordinate insulated sheathing, wall insulation, firestopping and other requirements for installation with work specified in Sections 07 21 00, Building Insulation and 07 84 00, Firestopping.

3. Related interior steel stud framing, suspension systems and gypsum board work are specified in Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Drywall Systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definition below is based on description of delivered minimum thickness in AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness:


1. Minimum uncoated thickness of cold-formed framing delivered to the Project site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness used in the cold-formed framing design.

2. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at bends due to cold forming.

C. Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold-formed members.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including uncoated steel thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and galvanized-coating thickness.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel."

E. AISI Specifications:

1. Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" or "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and the following for calculating structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing.

2. CCFSS Technical Bulletin: "AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining Work.

C. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements.

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products:

1. Power-actuated anchors. 2. Mechanical fasteners. 3. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.



A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Clark Dieterich Building Systems. 2. Consolidated Fabricators Corporation (CONFAB). 3. Craco Manufacturing, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: 33 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0478 inch and less; 50, Class 1 or 2 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0598 inch and greater.

2. Coating: G90.

2.3 WALL FRAMING

A. Primary Exterior Steel Wall Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel stud/joists of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0478 inch (18 gauge). 2. Flange Width: 1 5/8 inches. 3. Return: ½ inch.

B. Primary Exterior Steel Wall Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0566 inch (16 gauge). 2. Standard Track Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.

C. Steel Deflection Track: Manufacturer’s standard U-shaped slotted steel deflection control track of web depths indicated, capable of allowing up to 1” vertical movement complying with the requirements of ASTM E 119 and ASTM E 814 for hose stream testing and seismic cycling standards found in UL2079 and ASTM E 1966 and as follows:

1. Minimum Design Thickness; 0.0566 (16 gauge). 2. Flange Width: 2 ½ inches with ¼ inch wide x 1 ½ inch long vertical slots spaced 1”

on center.

D. Exterior and Interior Steel Headers: Manufacturer’s standard C-shaped steel stud/joists of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:


1. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0478 inch (18 gauge), 0.0566 inch (16 gauge) or 0.0747 inch (14 gauge) as indicated unless shown otherwise on drawings.

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Return: ½ inch. 4. Tracks: Provide manufacturer’s standard U-shaped steel track, compatible with

wall and header framing, in design thickness to match header sections.

E. Parapet Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard Z-shaped steel furring of 1 1/2 inch web depth or as indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Design Thickness: 30-mil, 0.0312 inch (20 gauge). 2. Flange Width: 3/4 inches x 1 1/4 inches.

2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Standoff Clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates.

2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Track Anchorage: Provide top and bottom track anchorage designed by cold-formed metal framing manufacturer to resist vertical and lateral loads indicated on Structural Drawings using one of the following methods:

1. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123.

2. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts, 5/8-inch diameter, 8-inch long (including 1 ½ inch projection), zinc coated, with 3-inch diameter (1/8 inch minimum thickness) hardened-steel washers.

3. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

4. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.

a. Head Type:

1.) Low-profile head beneath sheathing. 2.) Manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

B. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

C. Provide all other anchors, clips and fasteners required to resist specified load criteria and as recommended by the cold-formed metal framing manufacturer to provide positive anchorage of all components.


2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

B. Cement Grout:

1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. 2. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water

required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as

standard with fabricator. 4. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

5. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses and lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location.

2. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.



3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Provide drill-in adhesive anchors with heavy-duty washer for anchoring sill track to concrete at beginning of work to ensure installation without delaying work of other trades.

B. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

C. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

D. Install shop or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints.

2. Maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels shall not exceed 1/16 inch.

E. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as

standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

F. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

G. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed.

H. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

I. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

J. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

K. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:


1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location.

2. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.3 WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs.

1. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends. 2. Provide deflection control track systems at all locations where walls connect to

structural members or including, but not limited to:

a. Structural steel. b. Roof deck. c. Other locations where movement is anticipated.

B. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks.

1. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. 2. Space studs as indicated.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.

E. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing.

1. Locate headers above openings as indicated. 2. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to

supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

3. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings.

4. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

F. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing.

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

2. Provide coordination between this work and that of carpentry so that wood blocking is installed properly to fasten finish work.

G. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches or the dimension indicated on Shop Drawings apart.

1. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

2. Fasten at each stud intersection.


H. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, shear wall bracing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period.

C. Ensure that cold-formed metal framing will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering for work by other trades.

END 05 40 00

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATIONS

METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Galvanized steel lintels at exterior masonry openings. b. Galvanized steel pipe bollards. c. Removable bollards and ground sleeves. d. Fabricated pre-finished aluminum plate canopy brackets including

coordination with sunshade and canopy manufacturer. e. Miscellaneous steel angles, roof deck support angles, plates, bearing plates,

brackets and inserts for mounting and/or fastening items to structural support. f. Erection of metal fabrications. g. Anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts. h. Expansion anchors and screw type masonry fasteners. i. Rough hardware. j. Miscellaneous bolts, nuts, washers, screws and fasteners.

B. Definition: Metal fabrications include items made from aluminum, iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, rods, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems specified elsewhere.

1. All fasteners, bolts and anchorage devices necessary for complete installation of items.

2. Galvanized coatings for protection of metal fabrication items exposed directly to the exterior, including lintel angles, shall be included under this work.

a. All galvanized coatings shall be shop primed. b. Aluminum fabrications for awnings, sunshades and canopies shall also be

shop powder coated prior to shipping to Project site.

C. Extent of metal fabrications is indicated on drawings and in specifications.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 4. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel. 5. Section 05 52 00 – Metal Railings. 6. Section 07 61 03 – Preformed Metal Soffit Panels. 7. Section 07 62 00 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 8. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 9. Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors & Frames. 10. Section 08 41 10 – Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors. 11. Section 09 90 00 – Painting. 12. Section 10 71 10 – Fixed Sunshades & Canopies. 13. Section 32 12 16 – Asphalt Paving. 14. Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving.


B. Furnished elsewhere:

1. Concrete for footings and filling of steel pipe bollards furnished under this Section is specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2. Sealants for use with metal fabrications are specified in Section 07 90 00, Building Joint Sealants and shall be provided wherever joints between metal fabrications and dissimilar materials occurs to ensure weather tightness.

3. Fixed sunshade and canopy structures related to aluminum brackets furnished under this Section are specified in Section 10 71 10, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies and may be fabricated here or under that Section by sunshade and canopy structure manufacturer.

a. Contractor is advised that brackets furnished under Section 10 71 10 have a long lead-time and must be coordinated with installation of clay unit masonry and other exterior finishes during installation of those finishes.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AA ADM-1 "Aluminum Design Manual", 2010 Edition.

B. Aluminum Specifications:

1. ASTM B-209 "Aluminum Sheeting and Plating". 2. ASTM B-210 "Drawn Seamless Tubing". 3. ASTM B-211 "Aluminum Bar, Rod and Wire". 4. ASTM B-221 "Extruded Aluminum Bars, Rods, Wires and Tubes". 5. ASTM B-241 "Seamless Aluminum Pipe". 6. ASTM B-247 "Aluminum Die Forgings". 7. ASTM B-233 "Allowed Levels of Impurities in Aluminum and its Alloys". 8. ASTM B-308 "Aluminum 6061 Standard Structural Profiles".

C. AISC “Manual of Steel Construction”, Fourteenth Edition.

D. ASTM A-36 “Specifications for Structural Steel”, latest edition.

E. ASTM A-53 “Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless”, latest edition.

F. ASTM A-123 “Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized Coating of Iron and Steel Products”, latest edition.

G. ASTM A-500 “Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes”, latest edition.

H. ASTM A-513 “Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing”, latest edition.

I. ASTM A-569 “Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality”, 1991.

J. ASTM A-780 “Specification for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings”, latest edition.

K. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code – Steel”, latest edition.

L. AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel”, latest edition.


M. Military Specification MIL-PRF 24712, Coatings, Powder.

N. AAMA 605.2 "Voluntary Specification For High Performance Organic Coatings On Architectural Extrusions And Panels", 1992.

1.4 PERFOMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide structural assemblies capable of withstanding the affects of loads and stresses without permanent deformation of assembly or components including loads due to:

1. Dead load. 2. Gravity and lateral live loads, as specified in the International Building Code (IBC),

2015 Edition for:

a. Snow. b. Wind. c. Seismic.

3. Vibration due to thermal and structural movement and wind. 4. Weakening of fasteners, attachments, welds and other components.

B. Provide assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from a maximum change in ambient and surface temperature of 120 degrees F. and designed to prevent:

1. Buckling. 2. Opening of joints. 3. Overstressing of components:

a. Thermal stresses. b. Framing member transferred stresses resulting from:

1.) Thermal movement. 2.) Structural movement.

4. Other detrimental effects on building support structure or metal fabrications.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01 33 00.

1. Product Data: Fabricators technical and descriptive data for products used in metal fabrications, including:

a. Galvanized finishes. b. Painting procedures and finishes.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings illustrating the following:

a. Overall plan showing location of each metal fabrication component, 1/4" per foot minimum scale.

b. Dimensioned plans, elevations and sections of each fabrication, 1/2" per foot minimum scale.

c. Large scale details drawn at 1 1/2" per foot minimum scale illustrating:

1.) Dimensioned profiles of components including primary and secondary members.

2.) Dimensioned supporting components as assembled and mechanically fastened to join metal fabrications to building support systems.

3.) Indicated connection requirements at supporting building structures including breaks required to prevent electrolysis between ferrous and non-ferrous metals.


d. Provide unit dimensions relating metal fabrications to supporting and adjoining structures and other construction.

e. Illustrate fabrication and erection techniques to be implemented for each metal fabrication assembly indicated.

3. Samples:

a. Fabricator's color charts showing full range of colors available for shop finishing metal fabrications for initial selection process.

b. Actual components representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

B. Structural Calculations:

1. Submit a comprehensive analysis of design loads including dead, live and thermal movement on fabricated structural metal fabrication assemblies.

a. Contractor shall obtain design loads and shop drawings from manufactured sunshade and canopy structures for use by fabricator to design aluminum plate structural support brackets.

b. Refer to Section 10 71 10, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies for additional submittals requirements for sunshade and canopy structures.

2. Structural analysis and design calculations for structural components and metal fabrication assemblies shall be sealed and signed by a professional structural engineer licensed to practice in the State of Texas.


A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. NOMMA “Guideline 1 – Joint Finishes”, December 1994.

C. AWS “Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification”, 1994.

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A386 – Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-dip) on Assembled Steel Products.

E. SSPC “Steel Structures Painting Manual”, Volume 11, Sixth Edition.

F. Shop Prime Coating:

1. Zinc Dust Zinc Oxide for galvanized surfaces. 2. Paint, Oil; Iron Oxide, ready mixed, red and brown.

G. Powder Coating: Powder coating applications for exterior galvanized and primed steel components shall comply with applicable requirements established in Military Specification MIL-PRF-24712, Coatings, Powder for the Type, and performance characteristics Class of coating indicated.

H. High Performance Organic Coating: High performance coatings for exterior aluminum components and fabrications shall comply with applicable requirements of AAMA 605.2 "Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings On Architectural Extrusions And Panels", 1992 for cleaning, preparation and finishing.


I. Aluminum Design Manual, The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA), 900 19th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006 (latest edition).

J. Specifications for Aluminum Structures, The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA), 900 19th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006 (latest edition).

K. Manual of Steel Construction, American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700, Chicago, IL 60601-1802


A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of existing structure and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.

B. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.

1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements.

2. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions and allow for trimming and fitting.


A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification.

1. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. 2. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 3. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate before use. 4. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or

damage to members or supporting structures. 5. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

C. Protect shop finished products from damage and repair or replace all damaged components to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty in accordance with Section 01 77 00, Project Closeout.

B. Provide a written warranty, signed by the fabricator, agreeing to repair or replace paint finishes found to be defective.

1. Paint finish defects are defined as peeling, chipping, chalking, fading, abnormal aging or deterioration.

2. Warranty period for paint finishes shall be 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes.


1. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

2. Do not use sheet or plate metal with variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates and Shapes: ASTM A-36; galvanized coating for exterior applications.

B. Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A-500; or hot-rolled, ASTM A-501; galvanized coating for exterior applications.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:

1. Black finish, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Galvanized finish for exterior installations, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless

otherwise indicated.

D. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported members, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A-47, or cast steel, ASTM A-27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A-153.

F. Steel Anchor Bolts: Threaded end with standard ACI hook, ASTM A-307, Grade A, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A-153.

2.3 NON-FERROUS METALS

A. Structural Aluminum Properties: Provide extruded structural aluminum shapes as indicated meeting ASTM 6061-T6/T651.

B. Aluminum Plate: Bare aluminum complying with AMS-QQ-A 250/11, ASTM B-209 and the following properties:

1. Ultimate tensile strength: 45,000 psi. 2. Minimum yield strength: 40,000 psi. 3. Modulus of elasticity: 10 x 106.

C. Aluminum Tubes: Square edge square or rectangular aluminum complying with ASTM B-221, alloy 6061-T6 and the following properties:


D. Aluminum Pipe: Nominal diameter indicated complying with ASTM B-241, alloy 6061-T6 and the following properties:


E. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B-209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

F. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B-26, alloy 319.


2.4 FASTENERS

A. Provide the same basic metal and alloy being fastened or 300 series stainless steel unless otherwise indicated and required by design loading.

1. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. 2. Use types and sizes as indicated and to suit installation conditions. 3. Provide flat head Phillips, Torx or Allen type screws in matching color for exposed

fasteners unless otherwise indicated for joining fabricated components. 4. Provide zinc-coated or stainless steel fasteners for exterior use or where built into

exterior walls.

B. Select fasteners for the type, grade, class required and as indicated.

C. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A-307, Grade A.

D. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.

E. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.

F. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-11.

G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.

H. Drill-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VIII (anchors, expansion, (non-drilling), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5.

I. Drill-In Adhesive Anchor Systems: Hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin, hardener, cement and water designed for fast curing in a wide range of solid base material temperatures from 104º F. to 23º F. developed as a system in conjunction with various bolt or threaded rod stud anchors.

J. Screw Type Masonry/Concrete Anchors: High carbon or stainless steel screws designed to fasten by self-tapping into pre-drilled holes shall be used for fastening medium-duty installations into solid or hollow masonry or concrete.

K. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required.

L. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.

M. Fixed Sunshade Bracket Bolts: 5/8" diameter, stainless steel hollo-bolt with washer by Lindapter.

2.5 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Nonshrink Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, ferrous aggregate grout complying with CE CRD-C 621, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy duty loading applications of type specified in this section.

B. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section.


C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Nonshrink Metallic Grouts:

a. “Metox RM”; Chem-Masters Corp. b. “Hi Mod Grout”; Euclid Chemical Co. c. “Embeco 885 and 636”; Master Builders. d. “Stonecrete MGI”; Stonhard, Inc.

2. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grouts:

a. “Euco N-S Grout”; Euclid Chemical Co. b. “Kemset”; Chem-Masters Corp. c. “Masterflow 713”; Master Builders. d. “Sealtight 588 Grout”; W.R. Meadows, Inc.

2.6 GALVANIZING, PRIMING AND PAINT

A. Ferrous Metals:

1. Galvanizing for Ferrous Metal: All ferrous metal indicated to be galvanized shall receive coatings by hot dipped process in compliance with ASTM A-123, Standard Specifications for Zinc Coatings (Hot Dipped Galvanized) on Iron and Steel Products.

2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.

3. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645 and selected for:

a. Good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion. b. Compatibility with finish paint systems indicated. c. Capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite

prolonged exposure.

4. Finish Paint for Ferrous Metal:

a. Powder coat all surfaces whether visible or not in finished fabrications. b. Powder coat finish shall comply with Military Specification MIL-PRF-24712,

Type III, Class 3 finishes.

5. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint-12 except containing no asbestos fibers.

B. Non-ferrous Metals:

1. Shop Primer for Non-ferrous Metal: Fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645 and selected for:

a. Superior resistance to atmospheric corrosion. b. Compatibility with finish paint systems indicated. c. Compatibility to provide a sound foundation for shop applied topcoats despite

prolonged exposure.

2. Finish Paint for Non-ferrous Metal: Provide high performance organic coating for aluminum fabrications, connections and components used for construction of the sunshade and canopy brackets and awning framing structures complying with AAMA 605.2.


a. AA-C12C42R1X chemical finish cleaned with inhibited chemicals or acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating.

b. Prepare, pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer’s instructions.

c. Provide clear fluorocarbon topcoat with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight per AAMA 605.2.

d. Color shall be as selected by Architect-Engineer from manufacturer’s custom range of colors and gloss to comply with Popeye's branding requirements and as indicated.

3. Fabricator shall furnish non-conductive separation products as recommended to prevent electrolysis at connection joints between ferrous and non-ferrous metals.

2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Construct metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated.

1. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support.

2. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.

B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.

C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and over stressing of welds and fasteners.

1. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

2. Temperature Change (Range): 100 F (55.5 C).

D. Shear and punch metals cleanly, accurately and remove burrs.

1. Perform thermal cutting by machine. 2. Cut, drill or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated and form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

G. Weld connections, corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following:

1. Plane thermally cut ends and edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Steel and AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum.

2. Fabricate connections by welding members as indicated and in compliance with AWS D1.2 welding procedure tolerances for appearance and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

a. Joint type: Pre-tensioned.


3. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing.

4. Contour of welded surface shall match those adjacent.

H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible.

1. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat head (countersunk) screws or bolts.

2. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated:

1. Coordinate with supporting structure. 2. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended

use.

J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 3. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

K. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.8 ROUGH HARDWARE

A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, rods, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous metal shapes as required for framing and anchoring metal or wood to concrete, masonry, steel, or other structures.

B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required.

C. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, furnish stainless steel washers for heads and nuts that bear on structural connections or steel connections.

2.9 STEEL LINTEL ANGLES

A. Fabricate structural steel lintel and ledger angles from steel angle of size indicated.

B. Provide holes for anchorage of blocking or other items as indicated.

C. Galvanize all exterior steel lintel angles by hot-dip method after fabrication and shop prime per specifications.

2.10 PIPE BOLLARDS

A. Permanent Bollards:

1. Fabricate pipe bollards from 6” outside diameter Schedule 80 steel pipe. 2. Galvanize exterior steel bollards by hot-dip method after fabrication and shop

prime per specifications.

B. Removable Bollards as manufactured by Traffic Guard Direct, Inc. P.O. Box 201,


Geneva, Illinois 60134, phone: (877) 727-7347:

1. Model: Round Post Lock. 2. Style: RPL6 – 6.625-inch outside diameter, 36-inch height.

2.11 ALUMINUM CANOPY BRACKETS

A. Bracket materials:

1. Bracket flanges shall be fabricated from aluminum plate material in thickness and sizes indicated, in the following configurations, to support manufactured sunshades and canopies furnished under Section 10 71 10, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies:

a. T-shaped brackets used as intermediate support for pairs of manufactured outrigger members indicated.

b. L-shaped brackets used as end support for single member manufactured outriggers indicated.

2. Brackets shall be fabricated with flanges at right angles to each other, whether T-shaped or L-shaped, with joints welded per AWS requirements using weld types and sizes indicated.

3. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces in preparation for finish coating.

4. Materials shall be selected to comply with requirements to meet specified building Code loading criteria.

5. Accurately fabricate aluminum bracket components for field anchorage to supporting building elements and for attaching manufactured aluminum outriggers.

6. Space brackets on supporting building elements according to manufactured outrigger spacing and in compliance with specified performance criteria and as indicated.

B. Bracket attachments:

1. Provide 6-bolt hole pattern as indicated for mechanically attaching brackets to supporting building elements.

a. Punch or drill bolt holes in back flange of bracket to receive stainless steel mounting bolts indicated allowing 1/16" clearance between bolt and sides of hole (1/8" overall diameter larger than bolt diameter).

b. Ensure bolt holes are free of burrs and roughness to allow easy field marking, drilling and installation of bolts to supporting building elements.

c. Furnish bond breaker material between aluminum back flange of bracket and ferrous metal supporting elements.

2. Provide 6-bolt hole pattern as indicated for mechanically attaching aluminum outriggers manufactured under Section 10 71 10 to the outstanding leg of brackets.

a. Punch or drill bolt holes in outstanding flange leg of bracket to receive stainless steel outrigger mounting bolts indicated allowing 1/16" clearance between bolt and sides of hole (1/8" overall diameter larger than bolt diameter).

b. Ensure bolt holes are free of burrs and roughness to allow easy field marking, drilling and installation of bolts to supporting building elements.

C. Furnish specified stainless-steel bolts and washers with each fabrication for use in field tapping and attachment of brackets to structural steel supports.


D. Clean, prepare and provide high performance organic coating on all components complying with AAMA 605.2 to match manufactured aluminum sunshade and canopy components specified in Section 10 71 00.

E. Package finished sunshade and canopy bracket fabrications for shipping to prevent damage to finishes and repair or replace damaged finishes immediately upon receipt at job site to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND ACCESSORIES

A. Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges.

C. Use concealed field splices wherever possible.

D. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

C. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc-coating by the hot-dip process compliance with the following requirements:

1. ASTM A-153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A-123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel

products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP3 “Commercial Blast Cleaning.” 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 “Power Tool Cleaning.”

E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1 “Paint Application Specification No. 1” for shop painting.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including sleeve anchors, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.

B. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site so that progress of work can be maintained without delay.


C. Drill holes where required in concrete or masonry for anchorages as indicated or as recommended by anchor manufacturer for application and to resist applied forces.


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction.

B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement:

1. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications.

2. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

2. Do no weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.

3.3 INSTALLING STEEL ANGLE LINTELS

A. Coordinate work of this Section closely with that of Section 04 20 00 for proper field measurements and alignment in masonry walls.

B. Locate lintel angle assemblies as indicated and centered over new masonry openings.

1. Provide sound, level bearing surfaces on masonry walls in lengths as indicated or if not indicated, provide a minimum of 8 inches of bearing.

2. Embed lintel assembly bearing surfaces on mortar bed at coursing elevation and level assembly over opening(s).

3. Adjustments shall be made to ensure that lintel support angle is directly under wythe of masonry to be supported.

4. Cut masonry units to fit neatly around legs of angles so that final assembly sets in wall with vertical alignment on coursing bed joint.

C. Coat surfaces of steel at field modifications or welds and wherever shop coating has been damaged in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Exterior: Touch-up galvanizing repair paint complying with ASTM A-780 2. Interior: Touch-up shop primer.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPE BOLLARDS


A. Permanent Bollards:

1. Anchor bollards in concrete by means of direct embedment into concrete filled post holes at drive-up islands.

a. After bollards have been inserted, plumb units. b. Fill annular space between bollard and posthole solid with concrete and

integral with island pour.

2. After concrete has cured fill open ended pipes with lean concrete, striking off top approximately level with end and provide a 1/4 inch chamfer at circumference using edging tool.

B. Removable Bollards:

1. Comply with manufacturer provided instructions and drawings. 2. Ground sleeves should be installed with the top of the sleeve set flush with the

finished surface. 3. Ensure that a minimum of 3-inch gravel base is put down prior to installation to

ensure drainage of the bollard, per installation details. 4. Bollard should not be inserted into the ground sleeve until it is leveled and fully

cured. 5. If touch up painting in the field, do not paint moving parts which may restrict the

bollard’s proper function.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CANOPY BRACKETS

A. Contractor shall obtain shop drawings for manufactured sunshades and canopies early in Project so that outrigger locations and spacing to coordinate bracket placement locations with respect to building supporting elements.

1. Contractor shall be responsible for field verification of all dimensions to determine bracket placement and connections to supporting elements.

2. Carefully mark field verified dimensions for outrigger centerlines on each supporting element.

3. Temporarily place brackets in precise vertical and horizontal alignment at previously determined locations and use bracket back plate as template to transfer bolt hole locations onto supporting elements and prick punch centerline of each bolt hole.

B. Once bolt holes are marked and verified for accuracy, drill holes in supporting elements.

1. Confirm bolt sizes and ensure that holes are accurately drilled, perpendicular to the face of the supporting element for bolt diameters to be used for connections.

a. Drill holes into structural steel elements for stainless steel bolts furnished with brackets.

2. After drilling, carefully tap structural steel supporting elements to proper thread type for stainless steel bolts.

C. Mount sunshade and canopy support brackets as indicated:

1. Install manufacturer's recommended non-conduction bond breaker separation between back side of bracket back flange and structural steel or concrete masonry to prevent electrolitic reactions between dissimilar materials.

2. Mount all bracket plates to structural support elements and ensure that bolts and nuts are torqued to optimum capacity to resist specified loading.


D. Fit bracket connections properly aligned and positioned for proper projection of outstanding flange past face of brick masonry exterior wall finishes and to accurately attached outriggers specified under Section 10 71 10.

E. Inspect and protect completed assemblies, including prefinished brackets, for installation of other work and until final acceptance.

3.6 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS ANGLES

A. Coordinate work of this Section closely with that of other Section for proper field measurements and opening sizes.

1. Refer to Section 01 10 17 for Walk-in Cooler/Freezer roof mounted condensing units for proper placement of steel deck support angles under Contractor provided equipment supports and pipe/power portals indicated.

2. Refer to Division 23, Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning for equipment curb sizes and openings in roof deck that are to be reinforced with steel angle framing.

3. Refer to Section 08 31 00, Access Doors, for roof hatch opening requiring steel angle roof deck support.

B. Locate loose angles and/or angles assemblies as indicated and centered under roof curbs of about roof openings.

1. Provide sound, level bearing surfaces on bar joists. 2. Cope legs of angles to clear outstanding leg of joist angles. 3. Adjustments shall be made to ensure that support angle is directly under roof curb

or equipment to be supported.

C. Coat surfaces of steel at field modifications or welds and wherever shop coating has been damaged with touch-up primer in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.7 MISCELLANEOUS ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 2. Exposed surfaces shall be cleaned and prepared to receive finishes as specified.

B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A-780.

END 05 50 00.

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05 52 00 – METAL RAILINGS

METAL RAILINGS 05 52 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Manufactured prefinished aluminum pipe railings. b. Manufactured prefinished aluminum guardrails. c. Erection of railings and guard rails. d. Stainless steel bolts, washers and nuts. e. Expansion anchors and screw type masonry fasteners. f. Rough hardware.

B. Definition: Metal railings include custom fabricated or proprietary designed items made from aluminum shapes, plates, bars, rods, strips, tubes, pipes and malleable iron or aluminum castings which are not a part of metal fabrications or other metal systems specified elsewhere.

1. All fasteners, bolts and anchorage devices necessary for complete installation of items.

2. Coatings for protection of metal fabrication items exposed directly to the exterior, including anodized and painted finishes, shall be included under this work.

C. Extent of metal railings is indicated on drawings and in specifications.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 4. Section 07 61 03 – Preformed Metal Roof & Soffit Panels. 5. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 6. Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code – Aluminum”, latest edition.

B. AAMA 605.2 "Voluntary Specification For High Performance Organic Coatings On Architectural Extrusions And Panels", 1992.

1.4 PERFOMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide assemblies capable of withstanding the affects of loads and stresses without permanent deformation of assembly or components including loads due to:

1. Applicable loads as specified in the International Building Code (IBC), 2015 Edition 2. Vibration due to thermal and structural movement and wind. 3. Weakening of fasteners, attachments, welds and other components.



1. Buckling. 2. Opening of joints. 3. Overstressing of components:

a. Thermal stresses. b. Transferred stresses resulting from:

1.) Thermal movement. 2.) Structural movement.

4. Other detrimental effects on support structure or metal railings.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01 33 00.

1. Product Data: Fabricators technical and descriptive data for products used in metal railings, including:

a. High performance coatings. b. Painting procedures and finishes.


a. Dimensioned plans, elevations and sections of each metal railing, 1/2" per foot minimum scale.

b. Large scale details drawn at 1 1/2" per foot minimum scale illustrating:

1.) Dimensioned profiles of components including primary and secondary members.

2.) Dimensioned supporting components as assembled and mechanically fastened to join metal railings to support systems.

3.) Indicated connection requirements at support systems.

c. Provide unit dimensions relating metal railings to supporting and adjoining construction.

d. Illustrate fabrication and erection techniques to be implemented for each metal railing assembly indicated.

3. Samples:

a. High performance organic coatings:

1.) Fabricator's color charts showing full range of colors available for shop finishing metal railings for initial selection process.

2.) Actual metal samples representative of materials and finished products.


A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. NOMMA “Guideline 1 – Joint Finishes”, December 1994.


C. AWS “Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification”, 1994.

D. High Performance Organic Coating: High performance coatings for exterior aluminum components and fabrications shall comply with applicable requirements of AAMA 605.2 "Voluntary Specification For High Performance Organic Coatings On Architectural Extrusions And Panels", 1992 for cleaning, preparation and finishing.

E. Aluminum Design Manual, The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA), 900 19th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006 (latest edition).

F. Specifications for Aluminum Structures, The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA), 900 19th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006 (latest edition).


A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of existing structure and other construction to which metal railings must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.

B. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.

1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements.

2. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions and allow for trimming and fitting.


A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification.

1. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. 2. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 3. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate before use. 4. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or

damage to members or supporting structures. 5. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

C. Protect shop finished products from damage and repair or replace all damaged components to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-FERROUS METALS

A. Structural Aluminum Properties: Provide extruded structural aluminum shapes as indicated meeting ASTM 6061-T6/T651.

B. Aluminum Plate: Bare aluminum complying with AMS-QQ-A 250/11, ASTM B-209 and the following properties:



C. Aluminum Tubes: Square edge square or rectangular aluminum complying with ASTM B-221, alloy 6061-T6 and the following properties:


D. Aluminum Pipe: Nominal diameter indicated complying with ASTM B-241, alloy 6061-T6 and the following properties:


E. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B-209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

F. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B-26, alloy 319.

G. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A-47.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. Provide the same basic metal and alloy being fastened or 300 series stainless steel unless otherwise indicated and required by design loading.


fasteners unless otherwise indicated for joining fabricated components. 4. Provide stainless steel fasteners for exterior use or where anchoring into exterior

walls.

B. Select fasteners for the type, grade, class required and as indicated.

C. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A-307, Grade A.

D. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.

E. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.

F. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-11.

G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.

H. Drill-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VIII (anchors, expansion, (non-drilling), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5.

I. Drill-In Adhesive Anchor Systems: Hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin, hardener, cement and water designed for fast curing in a wide range of solid base material temperatures from 104º F. to 23º F. developed as a system in conjunction with various bolt or threaded rod stud anchors.

J. Screw Type Masonry/Concrete Anchors: High carbon or stainless steel screws designed to fasten by self-tapping into pre-drilled holes shall be used for fastening medium-duty installations into solid or hollow masonry or concrete.


K. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required.

L. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.

2.3 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grouts:

a. “Euco N-S Grout”; Euclid Chemical Co. b. “Kemset”; Chem-Masters Corp. c. “Masterflow 713”; Master Builders. d. “Sealtight 588 Grout”; W.R. Meadows, Inc.

2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. High Performance Organic Coating: Exposed metal finish shall be a high performance organic coating as follows.

1. AA-C12C42R1X chemical finish cleaned with inhibited chemicals or acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating.

2. Prepare, pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Fluorocarbon 3-coat coating system:

1. Manufacturer’s standard 3-coat thermo-cured system, composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluorocarbon color coat.

2. Provide clear fluorocarbon topcoat with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2.

C. Color shall be as selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer’s standard range of colors and gloss.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Construct metal railings from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated.

1. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support.

2. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.

B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.

C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and over stressing of welds and fasteners.


1. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

2. Temperature Change (Range): 100 F (55.5 C).

D. Shear and punch metals cleanly, accurately and remove burrs.

1. Perform thermal cutting by machine. 2. Cut, drill or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated and form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

G. Weld connections, corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following:

1. Plane thermally cut ends and edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum.

2. Fabricate connections by welding members as indicated and in compliance with AWS D1.2 welding procedure tolerances for appearance and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

a. Joint type: Pre-tensioned.

3. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing.

4. Contour of welded surface shall match those adjacent.

H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible.

1. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat head (countersunk) screws or bolts.

2. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated:

1. Coordinate with supporting structure. 2. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended

use.

J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 3. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

K. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.6 ROUGH HARDWARE

A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, rods, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous metal shapes as required for framing and anchoring metal or wood to concrete, masonry, steel, or other structures.


B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required.

C. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, furnish stainless steel washers, nuts and bolts.

2.7 ALUMINUM PIPE RAILINGS

A. Pipe railing materials:

1. Top and intermediate rails and primary posts shall be fabricated from 1 ½-inch O.D. drawn aluminum pipe with all welded jointing.

a. Fabricate bends and joints using elbows and T-shapes. b. Provide concealed spigots for linear splicing of handrail sections. c. Maintain uniform curvature and cylindrical cross-section throughout lengths of

railing.

2. Provide galvanized steel pipe sleeve inserts with shims for fastening primary posts into concrete.

3. Materials shall be selected to comply with requirements for compliance with specified building Code loading criteria.

B. Pipe rail fabrication:

1. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. 2. Fit and shop assemble sections in largest practical sizes, for delivery to site and

installation. 3. Accurately form components for anchorage of railing to each other and to

supporting structure. 4. Space primary posts for compliance with specified performance criteria and as

indicated. 5. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces in preparation for

finishing. 6. Provide high performance organic coating as indicated in color as selected by

Contracting Office or designated representative.

2.8 ALUMINUM GUARDRAILS

A. Guard rail materials:

1. Primary bracket posts shall be fabricated from 1 ½-inch O.D. drawn aluminum pipe and all welded jointing as a separate component from the horizontal guard rail assembly.

a. Upper end of vertical component of bracket shall be fitted with a concealed spigot to receive open end of T-shape fitting welded to horizontal guard rail as indicated.

b. Horizontal component of bracket shall be fitted with 4" x 1/4" x 0'-6" aluminum plate with holes for field bolting to vertical 3" x 3" HSS structural steel parapet framing.

c. Provide separation membrane between face of structural steel and aluminum plate.

d. Maintain uniform cylindrical cross-section throughout length of bracket posts.

2. Top rails shall be fabricated from 1 ½-inch O.D. drawn aluminum pipe with rounded end caps and all welded jointing as a separate component from the bracket posts.


a. Fabricate joint connections between horizontal guard rail and bracket posts using T-shapes welded to horizontal guard rail.

1.) T-shapes shall be shop welded and ground smooth to connect lengths of horizontal rail.

2.) Provide concealed spigots for linear splicing between horizontal joints. 3.) T-shapes shall be drilled and tapped for stainless steel set screws for

removable attachment to upper end spigot of bracket posts.

b. Maintain uniform cylindrical cross-section throughout length of guardrails.

3. Materials shall be selected to comply with requirements for compliance with specified building Code loading criteria.

B. Guardrail fabrication:

1. Verify dimensions and spacing of vertical 3" x 3" HSS structural parapet framing on site prior to shop fabrication.

2. Accurately form bracket post components and weld end plate for anchorage to HSS framing members using self-threading stainless steel bolts furnished by manufacturer.

3. Space bracket posts for compliance with specified performance criteria and as indicated.

4. Accurately form horizontal guardrail components for anchorage of pipe to T-shaped connections and to supporting bracket posts for continuous and rigidly supported guardrail as indicated.

5. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces in preparation for finishing.

6. Provide high performance organic coating as indicated in color as selected by Contracting Office or designated representative.

7. Fit and shop assemble sections in largest practical sizes for delivery to site and installation prior to installation of other parapet wall framing and surfaces.

a. Bracket posts shall be shipped early in construction and prior to completion of parapet sheathing for anchorage to structural steel parapet framing.

b. Horizontal rail to be installed after completion of parapet sheathing, roof membrane and installation of flashing boot as indicated.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including sleeve anchors, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.

B. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site so that progress of work can be maintained without delay.

C. Drill holes where required in concrete or masonry for anchorages as indicated or as recommended by anchor manufacturer for application and to resist applied forces.


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction.


B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement:

1. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications.

2. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

2. Do no weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM PIPE RAILINGS

A. Install pipe railing systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

1. Final installation, connections and anchorages shall comply with specified building Code structural performance requirements for lateral loading.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints.

C. Inspect and protect completed assemblies for installation of other work and until final acceptance.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM GUARDRAILS

A. Install guardrail systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Separate bracket posts from horizontal guardrail by loosening set screws in T-shaped fittings and store guardrail components for installation after completion of roof membrane installation and pipe boots.

1. Install bracket posts to 3" x 3" HSS vertical structural steel framing posts as indicated ensuring that spacing is uniform and in alignment to receive horizontal guardrails.

2. Install manufacturer furnished separation membrane between face of structural steel post and face of anchorage plate.

3. Drill and install self-tapping stainless steel bolts, with washers, through pre-drilled holes in anchorage plates into HSS posts ensuring that bolts are torqued to manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Final installation, connections and anchorages shall comply with specified building Code structural performance requirements for lateral loading.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints.

D. Inspect and protect completed assemblies for installation of other work and until final acceptance.

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touch-Up Painting: Repair finishes damaged by erection procedures:


1. Restore fabricator finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work to the exposed portions of the railing assemblies.

2. Replace items that cannot be finished in the field to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

END 05 52 00.

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06 10 00 –ROUGH CARPENTRY

ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All performance rated and non-rated wood construction panels. b. All wood blocking, nailers, grounds and supports. c. Installation of rigid foam core insulated sheathing. d. Rough hardware needed for proper installation of all carpentry. e. All labor to complete installation of other normal rough carpentry items

furnished under other Sections of the Specifications.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 01 10 17 – AAFES Furnished & Installed Equipment. 3. Section 01 10 18 – AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment. 4. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 5. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 6. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel. 7. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 8. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry. 9. Section 06 40 00 – Architectural Woodwork. 10. Section 07 60 00 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 11. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 12. Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors & Frames. 13. Section 08 31 00 – Access Doors. 14. Section 08 41 10 – Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors. 15. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 16. Division 10 – Specialties. 17. Section 11 40 00 – Food Service Equipment.

B. Installed but furnished and specified elsewhere:

1. Wood blocking and backing for AF/AI and AF/CI shelving, menu boards and other equipment and accessory items indicated on drawings shall be installed under this Section.

2. Sill sealer for installation between top of masonry and roof edge blocking is specified in Section 07 21 00, Building Insulation.

3. Coordinate installation of prefinished sheet metal window head flashings specified in Section 07 60 00, Flashing & Sheet Metal to be installed prior to installation of rigid foam core insulated sheathing installed under this Section and specified in Section 07 21 00, Building Insulation.

4. Other items related to Rough Carpentry, including fire retardant treated solid blocking and plywood backing for attachment of items to construction, are specified in Divisions 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10.



A. Lumber grading rules and wood species to conform to Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-70; Grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished under this section.

1. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer's Association, Inc.(NELMA). 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 5. National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA). 6. Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer's Association (NHPMA).

B. Plywood grading rules:

1. Softwood Plywood - Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PSI-66.

C. Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade marks:

1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded, where applicable and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.

a. S-GRN: Unseasoned. b. S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content. c. MC-15 or KD: Maximum of 15% moisture content. d. Dense.

2. Softwood Plywood - Appropriate grade trademark of the American Plywood Association.

a. Type, grade, class and identification index. b. Inspection and testing agency mark.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Test Reports. 2. Certifications. 3. Product Data.


A. Deliver materials with grade marks and labels intact and legible.

B. Store materials under cover and in dry location in accord with Section 01 66 00.

1. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. 2. Stack lumber and plywood to provide for air circulation within and around stacks

and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 3. Store rigid foam core insulated sheathing panels flat in weatherproof storage shed.

1.6 WORKMANSHIP QUALITY

A. Workmanship for rough carpentry shall be in accordance with requirements of National Lumber Manufacturer's Association.


1. Cut members square on bearings and fit closely. 2. Set accurately to lines, levels and plumb. 3. Secure rigidly in place at bearings and connections. 4. Provide expansion anchors, sleeve anchors and masonry screw anchors for

fastening into concrete or masonry substrates.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. Lumber:

1. Dimensions:

a. Specified lumber dimensions are nominal. b. Actual dimensions conform to industry standards established by American

Lumber Standards Committee and rules writing agencies.

2. Moisture Content: Kiln dried to 19% maximum at time of installation. 3. Surfacing: Surface four sides (S4S) unless specified otherwise. 4. All framing lumber and blocking, 2 inches to 4 inches thick, 2 inches to 12 inches

wide, Douglas Fir/Larch or Southern Pine:

a. Economy grade shall not be used. b. Plates, blocking, bracing, bulk heads, nailers, and general utility purposes:

Construction grade or better. c. Strength of materials:

1.) Light framing/blocking, “Construction” grade, 2” to 4” thick, 2” to 4” wide.

a) Allowable extreme fiber stress in bending (Fb): 1250 psi. b) Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,500,000 psi. c) Compression to grain (Fc): 1300 psi.

2.) Structural framing, “No. 2” grade, 2” to 4” thick, 5” and wider.

a) Allowable extreme fiber stress in bending (Fb): 1500 psi. b) Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,600,000 psi. c) Compression to grain (Fc): 1200 psi.

B. Plywood: Kiln dried to 15% maximum moisture content at time of installation and furnish as follows:

1. Concealed APA performance rated construction panels at interior face of parapet walls and other locations:

a. Thickness: 23/32”. b. Exposure durability classification: EXPOSURE 1. c. Span rating: 48/24. d. Edge configuration: Square.

2. Concealed APA performance rated construction panels to support shelving, menu boards and other equipment and accessory items:

a. Thickness: 23/32”. b. Exposure durability classification: EXPOSURE 1. c. Span rating: 48/24. d. Edge configuration: Square.


2.2 BOARDS

A. Exposed Boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the following:

1. Moisture Content: 15 percent maximum, (S-DRY or KD-15). 2. Provide Birch grade FAS per NHLA rules for all exposed installations.

B. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide the following:

1. Moisture Content: 15 percent maximum, (S-DRY or KD-15). 2. Provide the following species and grades:

a. Southern Pine “No. 2 Boards” per SPIB rules. b. Any hardwood species graded “No. 2 Common” per NHLA rules.

C. Board Sizes: Provide nominal or actual sizes as indicated.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND HARDWARE

A. Rough hardware needed for proper installation of all carpentry items shall be provided.

B. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Hot-dipped galvanized, stainless steel or aluminum for exterior locations and high humidity locations; size and type to suit application; staples shall not be used for fastening wood structurally.

C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Medium carbon-steel; sized to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations and high humidity locations.

D. Expansion Type Anchors: Plastic or non-ferrous metal type plug inserts designed to expand when screw and lag bolt type anchors are secured shall be used for fastening light-duty installations to solid or hollow masonry or concrete.

E. Drill-In Adhesive Anchor Systems: Hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin, hardener, cement and water designed for fast curing in a wide range of solid base material temperatures from 104º F. to 23º F. developed as a system in conjunction with various bolt or threaded rod stud anchors.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Screw Type Masonry/Concrete Anchors: High carbon or stainless steel screws designed to fasten by self-tapping into pre-drilled holes shall be used for fastening medium-duty installations into solid or hollow masonry or concrete.

G. Expansion Sleeve Type Anchors: High carbon or stainless steel wedge type expansion core anchor with nut and washer designed to fasten into concrete and conforming to Federal Specification FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1 shall be used for fastening heavy-duty installations into concrete substrates.

H. Trim Head Screws: #7 self-drilling, phosphate coated reduced head screw with square bit head recess.


3 EXECUTION


A. Blocking and all other carpentry items shall be laid out as called for by drawings and shall be cut and fitted as necessitated by conditions encountered.

B. All work shall be plumbed, leveled and braced with sufficient nails, spikes, bolts, etc., to ensure rigidity.

1. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated.

2. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

C. Use galvanized wire nails, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side with be exposed.

2. Make tight connections between members. 3. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required.

D. All pieces of wood or other carpentry material with a defect or defects that prevent it from serving its intended purpose satisfactorily, including crooked, warped, bowed, or otherwise defective material, even if within the limits of grade specified, will be rejected and shall be replaced with an acceptable piece.

E. Verify that surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are prepared to exact requirements, dimensions and as detailed since installation of rough carpentry materials constitutes acceptance of surface conditions.

F. Frame wood members to a close fit.

1. Set accurately to required lines and levels and secure rigidly in place in accordance with details.

2. Cut and fit framing, blocking, and furring to accommodate other work as required.

G. Coordinate requirements for connecting wood blocking and framing with structural steel fabricator to ensure the holes are properly punched at designated or adequate spacing to support and attach rough carpentry items.

H. Coordinate requirements for connecting wood blocking and plating with requirements for setting anchor bolts specified under Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications and installed under Sections 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete, 04 20 00, Unit Masonry and 04 43 00, Stone Masonry.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, PLATES, NAILERS, GROUNDS AND SUPPORTS

A. Blocking shall be sizes and shapes indicated on details and as required by conditions encountered.

B. Install wood blocking, plates, nailers, grounds and supports where shown and where required for attachment of other work.

1. Provide and form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached.

2. Coordinate location with other work involved in systems.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading.


1. Countersink screw anchors, bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Headed or hooked anchor bolts shall be used as indicated to attach wood plates to concrete or masonry structure.

3. Provide wedge type sleeve anchors only where indicated or to attach miscellaneous blocking and plating to concrete or masonry.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30, “APA Design/Construction Guide – Residential & Commercial,” for types of construction panels and application indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Parapet and Fascia Wall Sheathing: #10 TEK screws to steel framing and blocking.

a. 12 inch centers in field of panels. b. 12 inch centers at all panel edges.

2. Backing Panels: #10 TEK screws to steel framing.

a. Provide wood or light gauge steel angle support for backing panels securely fastened to sides of light gauge metal framing with screws to allow backing panels to nest between studs.

b. Fasten backer panels to support at edges using screws at maximum spacing of 8” centers or as necessary to support applied loads.

3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Remove from site all rubbish, debris and packaging produced by operations and leave site in a "broom clean" condition.

B. Adjust all working items to fit snugly yet work freely.

C. Confirm blocking heights and locations and make adjustments as required for proper installation of other items of work.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed items of other trades from damage during construction.

B. Protect completed work from damage until project is completed and accepted.

END 06 10 00.

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06 20 00 – FINISH CARPENTRY

FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All solid surface interior window stools. b. Wood wall cladding and trim. c. Installation of Contractor furnished casework items indicated. d. Installation of AAFES furnished casework items indicated. e. Installation of all items associated with finish carpentry. f. Rough hardware needed for proper installation of finish carpentry items.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06 40 00 – Architectural Woodwork. 5. Division 8 – Doors & Windows. 6. Division 9 – Finishes. 7. Division 10 – Specialties.

B. Installed but furnished and specified elsewhere:

1. AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed items and requirements are specified in Section 01 10 18 and indicated on Drawings.

2. Casework items to be installed under this Section are specified in Section 06 40 00, Architectural Woodwork and indicated on Drawings.

3. Other items normally associated with finish carpentry installation are specified in Divisions 8, 9 and 10.


A. Lumber grading rules and wood species shall conform to Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-70: Grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished.

1. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association, Inc. (NELMA). 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 5. Redwood Inspection Service (RIS). 6. Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer’s Association (NHPMA).

B. Hardwood lumber to comply with: National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) Rules.

C. Plywood Grading Rules:

1. Softwood Plywood – Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PS 1/ANSI A199.1.

2. Hardwood Plywood: Product Standard PS 51.

D. Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade mark:


1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded, where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.

a. S-GRN: Unseasoned. b. S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content. c. MC-15 or KD: Maximum 15% moisture content. d. Dense.

2. Softwood Plywood: Appropriate grade-mark of the American Plywood Association. 3. Hardwood Plywood: Appropriate grade-mark of qualified inspection, testing or

grading agency.

E. Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) shall apply and by reference are hereby made a part of this specification.

1. Any reference to Premium, Custom or Economy, in this specification shall be as defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.

2. Any item not given a specific quality grade in this specification shall be Custom Grade as defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.

F. Finish Carpentry item manufacturer must have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work.

1. Regularly and actively engaged in manufacture of this type of work for a period of 10 years.

2. In addition, manufacturer shall have fabricated work of a similar character and magnitude, which has been in satisfactory use for at least 7 years.

G. Finish Carpentry item manufacturer shall be responsible for all details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and shall show on his shop drawings all millwork profiles required.

H. Contractor and Finish Carpentry item manufacturer shall coordinate to establish and maintain field dimensions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each product and process specified as work of this Section and/or incorporated into finish carpentry items including:

a. Solid surfacing materials. b. Wood species, grade and moisture content. c. Fabrication techniques as related to AWI standards. d. Finishing techniques. e. Installation procedures. f. Hardware items.

2. Certifications: Submit manufacturer’s/fabricator’s certification stating that fabricated wood items complies with quality grades and AWI requirements indicated.

3. Shop drawings:

a. Solid surface window stool trim profile and quantities. b. Miscellaneous trim profiles and quantities.


c. Other miscellaneous custom fabricated finish carpentry items indicated.

4. Samples:

a. Solid Surface Plastics:

1.) Submit 12-inch long sample of trim profile to match profiles indicated.

b. Wood Wall Cladding & Miscellaneous Finish Wood Trim:

1.) 12-inch long section of each product and trim profile. 2.) Submit trim profile samples finished to match other manufacturer

finished wood items.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store products in accord with Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00.

B. Protect finish carpentry items during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.

C. Do not deliver finish carpentry items until taping, wet work, grinding and similar operations that could damage, soil or deteriorate items have been completed.

D. Finish carpentry items shall only be stored in installation areas or areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.


A. Conditioning: Finish carpentry woodwork manufacturer and installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for installation of finish carpentry items.

1. Requirements shall be identical for storage areas if items are stored prior to installation.

2. Do not install finish carpentry items until required temperature and relative humidity can be established, stabilized and maintained in installation areas.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed finish carpentry within 1 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content.

1. Maintain from date of installation through remainder of construction period. 2. Contractor shall require finish carpentry woodwork manufacturer to provide written

documentation of optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity conditions.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas.

B. Fabrication: Fabricate wood finish carpentry items to dimensions, profiles and details indicated with openings and mortises precut, where applicable, to receive hardware and other items and work.


C. Finish Edges: Unless indicated otherwise, ease edges of all solid wood or plastic finish carpentry items as follows:

1. 1/16-inch radius for corners and edges of solid wood or plastic members 1 1/8-inch actual thickness or less.

2. 1/8-inch radius for edges of solid wood, plastic and similar members over 1 1/8-inch actual thickness.

D. Assembly: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware mortising/fitting and other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible.

1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for field scribing,

trimming and fitting.

E. Pre-cut Openings: Fabricate finish carpentry items with pre-cut openings, where possible, to receive hardware, appliances, fixtures, electrical work and similar items.

1. Locate openings accurately and use templates or rough-in diagrams as furnished by the Contractor for proper size and shape.

2. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in potentially damp locations, seal edges of cutouts with water resistant coating.

F. Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of finish wood items required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as necessary for accurate fit.

2.2 SOLID SURFACE WINDOW STOOLS AND CHAIR RAILS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300 as applicable to solid surface materials.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers of Solid Surface Materials:

1. Corian.

C. Comply with AWI Custom grade for fabrication of window stools in profiles indicated.

2.3 WOOD WALL CLADDING

A. Acceptable Manufacturers of Popeye's wall cladding:

1. Moss Retail – 1x6 Pine Tongue & Groove Wall Plank, AE-3 "Car Siding" with Clear Stain.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD TRIM ITEMS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section applicable to item indicated.

B. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Popeye's corner trim & wood wall cladding edge trim:

a. Grade: Custom. b. Lumber Species: Pine. c. Size: 1"x1" d. Finish: Field finish to match wood wall cladding.

2. Miscellaneous areas:

a. Grade: Custom. b. Lumber Species: Birch.


c. Finish: Primed for Field Finish.

2.5 FASTENERS, ANCHORS AND REINFORCEMENT

A. Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use.

1. Comply with FS FF-S-0111 for applicable requirements. 2. Trim head type screws shall be used where exposed.

B. Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage.

1. Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at installations subject to moisture for corrosion resistance.

2. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 3. Furnish inserts and anchors, as applicable, to be set into concrete or masonry

work for subsequent anchorage of finish carpentry items.

D. Adhesives: Products as recommended by finish carpentry manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that surfaces to receive finish carpentry materials are prepared to exact levels and dimensions.

B. Application or installation of materials constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

C. Condition finish carpentry items to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.

D. Prior to installation examine shop-fabricated work for completion, finish, back priming and removal of all packaging.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install wood finish carpentry items to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section.

B. Install wood finish carpentry items plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.

1. Shim as required using concealed shims. 2. Install to a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level and with no

variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.

C. Scribe and cut finish carpentry items to fit adjoining work.

1. Repair damaged wood surfaces at cuts. 2. Coordinate installations with installation specified in other Sections of the

specifications.

a. Fit and protect wood finish carpentry items prior to installation of adjacent work and equipment.

b. Remove protection from wood items after completion of work by other trades that might damage finishes or installation.


D. Anchor wood items to blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates.

1. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.

2. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with wood finish surface to match final factory applied transparent finish.

E. Trim shall be installed with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces from maximum length of finish wood available.

1. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. 2. Cope at returns, miter at corners and comply with referenced Quality Standards for

joinery.

F. Install all miscellaneous trim and mouldings required and all related finish carpentry items indicated for a complete job.

3.3 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry items where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually.

1. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 2. Where repair does not produce visual or functional deficiencies, replace finish

carpentry items.

B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware.

C. Clean all finish carpentry items on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.

D. Touch-up finishes at field fabricated joints and wood filler at fastener heads using finish materials as recommended by finish carpentry woodwork manufacturer to produce final finish that matches factory finish in every respect.

E. Buff and polish exposed surfaces of solid surface plastic items to remove superficial scratches and apply liquid sealer to provide a smooth, scratch resistant finish.

F. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures finish carpentry items to remain, without damage or deterioration, until final acceptance by Contracting Officer.

3.4 CLEANING UP

A. Keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during execution of this portion of the work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut-ends, and debris.

B. Sweeping:

1. At the end of each working day, and more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep surfaces where refuse from this portion of the work has settled.

2. Remove the refuse to the area of the job site set aside for its disposal. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the work, thoroughly broom clean all surfaces.

END 06 20 00

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06 30 00 – FIRE RETARDANT WOOD TREATMENT

FIRE RETARDANT WOOD TREATMENT 06 30 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Fire retardant pressure treatment for all dimension lumber. b. Fire retardant pressure treatment for all plywood indicated.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

2. ASTM A653 / A653M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

3. ASTM D3201 Standard Test Method for Hygroscopic Properties of Fire-Retardant Wood and Wood-Base Products.

4. ASTM D5516 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Flexural Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Softwood Plywood Exposed to Elevated Temperatures.

5. ASTM D5664 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire-Retardant Treatments and Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber.

6. ASTM D6305 Standard Practice for Calculating Bending Strength Design Adjustment Factors for Fire retardant Treated Plywood Roof Sheathing.

7. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

B. American Wood-Protection Association (AWPA):

1. AWPA E12 Standard method of determining the corrosion of metal in contact with wood.

2. AWPA P17 Fire Retardant Formulations. 3. AWPA P23 Standard for Chromated Copper Arsenate Type C (CCA-C). 4. AWPA P25 - Standard for Inorganic Boron (SBX). 5. AWPA P26 - Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type A (ACQ-A). 6. AWPA P27 - Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type B (ACQ-B). 7. AWPA P28 Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type C (ACQ-C). 8. AWPA P29 Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type D (ACQ-D). 9. AWPA P47 - Standard for DCOI/Imidacloprid/Stabilizer, Waterborne (EL2). 10. AWPA P50 Standard for Fire Retardant FR-2 (FR-2). 11. AWPA T1 - Use Category System: Processing and Treatment Standard. 12. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood.


C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 255 Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 723 Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's instructions for use, including requirements for storage, cutting, and finishing.

C. Fire-Retardant Treatment Certification: Treating plant's certification of compliance with specified requirements.


A. Wood Treatment Plant Qualifications: Wood treatment plant experienced in performing work of this section.

1. Provide current licensing documentation from nationally recognized company. 2. Provide written certification of plant’s qualifications and quality control procedures.

B. Source Quality: Obtain treated wood products from a single approved source.

C. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Mark each piece of plywood and lumber to show compliance with specified standards.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Provide fire retardant treatment which complies with the following regulatory requirements:

1. International Building Code (IBC). 2. International Code Council Evaluation Service ICC-ES ESR 2645.

E. Independent Third Party Inspection:

1. Provide written documentation of regular plant inspections by third party laboratory or responsible party.

F. Kiln Dry after Treatment (KDAT): Provide kiln dry material as indicated or required.

1. Kiln dry after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content for lumber in accordance with AWPA T1, Section 7 - Drying After Treatment (lumber).

2. Kiln dry after treatment to 15 percent for plywood in accordance with AWPA T1, Section F: Pressure treated composites (3c) kiln drying after treatment.


A. Store and protect wood products in accordance with Section 01 66 00.

B. Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional changes, in accordance with instructions from treating plant.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard 40-year transferable limited warranty for pressure-treated wood.


B. Warranty shall not restrict AAFES from exercising rights under this Contract and shall protect AAFES against defects in fire retardant treatment of wood products including, but not limited to:

1. Deterioration of plywood used in conjunction with roofing materials subjected to normal heat and weather conditions common to the location of this Project.

2. Deterioration of fasteners, cold-formed metal framing or other ferrous metals that come into contact with products furnished under this Section.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer:

Viance 200 E. Woodlawn Rd. Suite 350 Charlotte, NC 28217 Phone: 800-421-8661 Email: [email protected]

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Dimension Lumber: As specified in Section 06 10 00.

B. Construction Panels: As specified in Section 06 10 00.

C. Fasteners In Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Use only code approved fasteners as specified in ICC-ES ESR 2645.

2.3 FIRE RETARDANT PRESSURE TREATMENT OF LUMBER AND PLYWOOD

A. Fire retardant treatment for wood blocking, sheathing and finish paneling:

1. Lumber: Comply with AWPA U1 UCFA, Type A or ICC-ES ESR 2645. 2. Plywood: Comply with AWPA U1, UCFA, Type A or ICC-ES ESR 2645. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: UL FR-S rating; or flame spread and smoke

developed ratings of 25 or less in a test of 30 minutes' duration in accordance with IBC section 2303.2.

4. Treatment: D-Blaze FRT as manufactured by Viance. 5. Kiln dry after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content for lumber and 15

percent for plywood. 6. Treat wood used for the following applications:

a. Roof edge and other miscellaneous blocking. b. Wall sheathing at parapets indicated and locations. c. Wall paneling used as finish in areas indicated d. Concealed and exposed backing panels for attaching finish items, fixtures,

accessories and equipment to walls.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Wood Blocking: Comply with installation requirements in Section 06 10 00.

B. Construction Panels: Comply with installation requirements in Section 06 10 00.


C. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood:

1. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation.

2. End cuts and drilling are permitted. 3. Do not rip or mill lumber after fire-retardant treatment.

3.2 COMPLETION

A. All field cuts and holes in fire retardant treated materials shall be field treated with two brush coats of same preservative used in pressure treatment.

B. Remove from site all extra materials, rubbish, debris and packaging.

END 06 30 00.

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06 40 00 – ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Shop fabricated solid surface serving counter, nosing and counter frontal system at food concepts.

b. Shop fabricated plastic laminate architectural casework. c. Shop fabricated plastic laminate countertops, nosings and splash. d. Rough and finish hardware items for casework. e. Miscellaneous wood finish items and trim indicated in drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Division 9 – Finishes. 6. Division 16 – Electrical.


1. Coordinate blocking and backing required for supporting work of this Section with requirements specified in Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry.

2. Trim, moldings and installation of miscellaneous Architectural Woodwork items are specified in Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry.

3. Coordinate work of this Section with work of Section 09 30 00, Tile for field installation of ceramic tile on and tile transition under Food Concept serving counter frontal systems.

4. Coordinate work of this Section with work of Section 09 21 00, Gypsum Drywall Systems.

C. AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed items are listed in Section 01 10 18 and indicated on Drawings.


A. Architectural Woodwork manufacturer shall have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work.

1. Regularly and actively engaged in manufacture of this type of work for a period of 10 years.

2. Woodwork manufacturer shall, in addition have fabricated work of a similar character and magnitude, and which has been in satisfactory use for at least 7 years.

B. Architectural Woodwork manufacturer shall provide single-source responsibility to assume undivided responsibility for architectural woodwork and finish specified in this Section including:


1. Fabrication. 2. Finishing. 3. Field installation.

C. Architectural Woodwork manufacturer shall be responsible for all details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and shall show on Shop Drawings all millwork profiles required.

D. Contractor and Custom Woodwork manufacturer shall:

1. Coordinate and cooperate to establish and maintain field dimensions. 2. Coordinate with Contracting Officer or designated representative for fabrication

and installation of equipment.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Lumber grading rules and wood species shall conform to Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-70: Grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished.

1. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association, Inc. (NELMA). 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 5. Redwood Inspection Service (RIS). 6. Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer’s Association (NHPMA).

B. Hardwood lumber to comply with: National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) Rules.

C. Plywood Grading Rules:

1. Softwood Plywood – Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PS 1/ANSI A199.1.

2. Hardwood Plywood: Product Standard PS 51.

D. Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade mark:

1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded, where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.

a. S-GRN: Unseasoned. b. S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content. c. MC-15 or KD: Maximum 15% moisture content. d. Dense.

2. Softwood Plywood: Appropriate grade-mark of the American Plywood Association. 3. Hardwood Plywood: Appropriate grademark of qualified inspection, testing or

grading agency.

E. Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) shall apply and by reference are hereby made a part of this specification.

1. Any reference to Premium, Custom or Economy, in this specification shall be as defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.

2. Any item not given a specific quality grade in this specification shall be Custom Grade as defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



1. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each product and process specified as work of this Section and/or incorporated into finish carpentry items including:

a. Substrate wood grade and moisture content. b. Solid surface plastics. c. Plastic laminate grades. d. Fabrication techniques as related to AWI standards. e. Installation procedures.

2. Certifications: Submit manufacturer’s/fabricator’s certification stating that fabricated wood items complies with quality grades and AWI requirements indicated.

3. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings illustrating the following:

a. Location of each item. b. Dimensioned plans and elevations. c. Large scale details illustrating:

1.) Construction of item. 2.) Relationship of attached components. 3.) Relationship to other finish components of construction including

walls, floors, soffits and equipment.

d. Internal and external attachment devices. e. Finish hardware. f. Other miscellaneous components.

4. Samples:

a. Solid Surface Plastics:

1.) Solid surface manufacturer’s sample for color verification purposes. 2.) Submit 4 inch by 4 inch pieces of each color selection indicated.

b. High Pressure (HP) plastic laminate:

1.) Plastic laminate manufacturer’s standard sample chain for preliminary selection.

2.) 8 inch by 12 inch pieces of final laminate selection for each type, color, pattern and surface finish selected.

c. Low Pressure (LP) laminate: 8 inch by 12 inch pieces finished with laminate proposed for semi-exposed surfaces.

d. Metallic laminate surfaces: 8 inch by 12 inch pieces finished with metallic laminate selection for each type, color, pattern and surface.

e. Stainless steel surfaces: 8 inch by 12 inch pieces for each type and surface finish.

f. Cabinet hardware: (1) unit of each type and finish of exposed cabinet hardware.


A. Deliver and store products in accord with Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00.

B. Protect woodwork items during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.


C. Do not deliver woodwork items until taping, wet work, grinding and similar operations that could damage, soil or deteriorate items have been completed.

D. Woodwork items shall only be stored in installation areas or areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.


A. Conditioning: Woodwork manufacturer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for installation of woodwork.

1. Requirements shall be identical for storage areas if items are stored prior to installation.

2. Do not install woodwork until required temperature and relative humidity can be established, stabilized and maintained in installation areas.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed finish carpentry within 1 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content.

1. Maintain from date of installation through remainder of construction period. 2. Contractor shall require woodwork manufacturer to provide written documentation

of optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity conditions.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Solid Surface Plastics: Subject to compliance with requirements provide solid surface plastic product of the following manufacturer for specific applications as indicated:

1. Popeyes: LG Surfaces. 2. Burger King: Avonite.

B. Plastic Laminate: Subject to compliance with requirements provide high pressure decorative laminates of the following manufacturer for specific applications as indicated:

1. Break Room and Offices: Wilsonart.

C. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels: Subject to compliance with requirements set forth in Section 09 77 00, provide fiberglass reinforced plastic panel products for use in woodwork fabrications of the following manufacturer for specific applications as indicated:

1. Popeye’s: Marlite. 2. Burger King: Marlite.

D. Ceramic Tile: Subject to compliance with requirements set forth in Section 09 30 00, provide ceramic tile of the following manufacturer for specific applications as indicated:

1. Burger King: Granitifiandre/Eurowest.

E. Glass Mosaic Tile: Subject to compliance with requirements set forth in Section 09 30 00, provide decorative color glass mosaic tile of the following manufacturer for specific applications as indicated:

1. Popeye’s: Interceramic.

F. Cabinet Hardware: Subject to compliance with requirements provide cabinet hardware of as manufactured by the following for the various products specified:

1. Blum.


2. Grant Hardware. 3. Grass America. 4. Hafele. 5. Knape & Vogt. 6. Stanley. 7. Soss.

G. Wall Mounted Adjustable Shelf Standards and Brackets: Subject to compliance with requirements provide adjustable shelf standards of the following manufacturer:

1. Knape & Vogt.

2.2 SHOP FABRICATED CASEWORK ITEMS AND FINISH PRODUCTS

A. Food Court Frontal Systems:

1. Popeye's Serving:

a. Glass Mosaic Tile:

1.) GT-1: Mosaic Tile, DB Pattern/Border/Mural, "Mardigras Carnival", 1" x 1".

b. Edge Trim:

1.) Schluter – Jolly profile in anodized satin aluminum finish.

c. Back Panels:

1.) FRP-1: Pebbled surface, P100 – "White".

2. Burger King Serving:

a. Ceramic Tile:

1.) CT-6: Legni High Tech-Ariostea, PAR15323, "Rovere Moka", 6" x 36".

b. Back Panels:

1.) FRP-1: Pebbled surface, P100 – "White".

B. Base and Wall Cabinets:

1. Break Room:

a. Plastic Laminate:

1.) PLAM-2: 4878-38 – “Pewter Mesh”.

C. Countertops:

1. Popeye’s Serving:

a. Solid Surface:

1.) SS-3: GT927 – “Cayenne”.

2. Burger King Serving:

a. Solid Surface:

1.) SS-2: #7885 – Custom Color “BK Smoke”.

3. Break Room, Popeye's and Burger King Offices:


1.) PLAM-1: 4811-60 – “Silicon EV”.


D. Shelving:

1. Popeye's and Burger King Offices:


1.) PLAM-1: 4811-60 – “Silicon EV”.

2.3 GENERAL

A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas.

B. Fabrication: Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles and details indicated with openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware and other items and work.

C. Assembly: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware mortising/fitting and other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible.

1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for field scribing,

trimming and fitting.

D. Pre-cut Openings: Fabricate woodwork with pre-cut openings, where possible, to receive hardware, appliances, fixtures, electrical work and similar items.

1. Locate openings accurately and use templates or rough-in diagrams as furnished by the Contractor for proper size and shape.

2. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in potentially damp locations, seal edges of cutouts with water resistant coating.

E. Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of wood finish carpentry items required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as necessary for accurate fit.

2.4 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS, LAMINATE CLAD

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and Division 400B, “Laminate Clad Cabinets”.

B. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Cabinet Construction Type: Flush overlay. 3. Laminate Cladding: High pressure decorative laminate complying with the

following requirements:

a. Colors, patterns and finishes shall be as selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer’s standard “Solid Colors” or “Pattern Colors” products category.

b. Laminate grade for exposed surfaces shall comply with the following requirements for type of surface and grade:

1.) Horizontal Surfaces Other than Tops: GP-50 (0.050” nominal thickness).

2.) Vertical Surfaces: GP-28 (0.028” nominal thickness). 3.) Edges: GP-28 (0.028” nominal thickness).


4. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Provide manufacturer’s standard low pressure laminate surface material in solid neutral color.

5. Provide dust panels of ¼ inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments, except where located directly under tops.

2.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIAL

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with custom built architectural cabinets.

B. Hardware Standard: Comply with ANSI/BBMA A156.9 “American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware” for items indicated by reference to BBMA number or referenced to this standard.

C. Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA 1301 for finishes indicated by BHMA Code Numbers or if not otherwise indicated, provide finishes as follows:

1. For exposed hardware comply with requirements BMHA 626 Satin Chrome plated finish over brass or bronze base.

2. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer’s standard finish that complies with product class requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.9.

D. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Schedule shall be standard with the manufacturer, but shall meet the following minimum criteria.

1. Hinges: Concealed, steel, horizontal and vertical adjustment, 120 degree opening, mortised in door, self-closing.

a. Acceptable Cabinet Hinge Products:

1.) Stanley #1511. 2.) Hafele H-series.

2. Catches: Cabinet door catches shall be magnetic pressure release type, self-aligning.

3. Pulls: Door and drawer pulls shall be through-bolted from backside, 5/16-inch diameter, 4-inch screw hole spacing, wire pulls.

4. Adjustable Shelf Standards: Cradle type to support specified wire shelving. 5. Drawer Guides: Full extension slide, side mounting type.

a. Cold rolled steel, zinc plated, clear chromate. b. Nylon rollers and steel ball bearing action. c. 100 pound per pair load capacity.

2.6 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET TOPS

A. Quality Standards: Comply with AWI Section 400 and Divisions 400B and 400C.

B. Type 1: High Pressure Decorative Laminate.

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surface:

a. Colors, patterns and finishes shall be as selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer’s standard “Solid Colors” or “Pattern Colors” products category.

b. Laminate grade shall comply with NEMA LD 3, GP-50 (0.050” nominal thickness).

3. Edge and Splash Treatment: Comply with the following requirements:


a. Edge or nosing treatment on all plastic laminate countertops shall be plastic laminate or solid surfacing as determined by type of horizontal surface indicated.

b. Splash Treatment shall be ¾ inch by 3 ¾ inch standard size unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

C. Type 2: Solid Surface Plastic.

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Solid Material for Horizontal Surface:

a. Thickness: ½” minimum.

3. Edge Treatment:

a. Nosing: Provide solid plastic material in thickness and color to match countertop.

b. Edges: Pencil edge radius.

4. Fabricate and install in strict compliance with solid surface manufacture’s written instructions.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use.

1. Comply with FS FF-S-0111 for applicable requirements. 2. Trim head type screws shall be used where exposed.

B. Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage.

1. Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at installations subject to moisture for corrosion resistance.

2. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 3. Furnish inserts and anchors, as applicable, to be set into concrete or masonry

work for subsequent anchorage of finish carpentry items.

D. Adhesives: Products as recommended by wood finish carpentry manufacturer.

E. Refer to Sections 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications and 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry for other fasteners, anchors and reinforcement necessary for a complete, durable installation.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that surfaces to receive architectural woodwork items are prepared to exact levels and dimensions.

B. Application or installation of materials constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

C. Condition architectural woodwork items to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.

D. Prior to installation examine shop fabricated work for completion, finish, back priming and removal of all packaging.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install wood finish carpentry items to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section.

B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.

1. Shim as required using concealed shims. 2. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level and with no variations

in flushness of adjoining surfaces.

C. Scribe and cut woodwork items to fit adjoining work.

1. Refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.

D. Anchor wood items to blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates.

1. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.

2. Except where pre-finished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with wood finish surface to match final factory applied transparent finish.

E. Install cabinets without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned.

1. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.

2. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

F. Anchor countertops securely to base units and other support systems indicated.

G. Complete the finishing work specified as work of this Section, to whatever extent not completed at shop or prior to installation of woodwork.

H. Install all miscellaneous trim and mouldings required and all related woodwork items indicated for a complete job.

3.3 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork items where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually.

1. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 2. Where repair does not produce visual or functional deficiencies, replace finish

carpentry items.

B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware.

C. Clean all finish carpentry items on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.

D. Touch-up all shop applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled work.

E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer and that ensures woodwork items to remain, without damage or deterioration, until final acceptance by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.4 CLEANING UP


A. Keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during execution of this portion of the work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut-ends, and debris.

B. Sweeping:

1. At the end of each working day, and more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep surfaces where refuse from this portion of the work has settled.

2. Remove the refuse to the area of the job site set aside for its disposal. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the work, thoroughly broom clean all surfaces.

END 06 40 00.

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 21 00 – BUILDING INSULATION

BUILDING INSULATION 07 21 00-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Perimeter foundation insulation indicated. b. Roof edge blocking sill seal cushion. c. Rigid foam core insulated sheathing, joint tape and fasteners. d. Unfaced fiberglass batt fill insulation indicated. e. Open cell spray foam wall insulation. f. Vapor barrier. g. Miscellaneous accessories including joint tape, adhesives and fastenings.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 4. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 6. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping. 7. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems.

B. Specified but provided and installed by others:

1. Perimeter foundation wall insulation is specified in this Section but shall be installed under Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2. Perimeter roof edge foam sealer installed between top of masonry and roof edge blocking is specified in this Section but shall be installed under Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry.

3. Rigid foam core insulated sheathing is specified in this Section but shall be installed under Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry.

4. Window head flashing specified under Section 07 62 00, Flashing & Sheet Metal shall be coordinated and installed prior to installation of rigid foam core insulated sheathing specified under this Section.


A. R-Value designation is thermal resistance of insulation only, not including alleged air spaces or other factors assumed to result in higher R-values.

B. Provide insulation materials that are identical to those whose fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, or by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136.


1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data:

a. Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each type of insulation stating brand names, R-value and composition.

b. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature for joint tape used to seal foam core insulated sheathing joints to form air infiltration vapor barrier.

c. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature for vapor barrier stating physical characteristics, including perm rating and components.

2. Installation Instructions:

a. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for installation of each type of insulation.

b. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions for installation of joint tape for rigid foam core sheathing.

c. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions for vapor barrier and joint sealing tape.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. In accord Sections 01 65 00 and 06 66 00.

B. Clearly identify manufacturer, contents, brand name, applicable standard, and R-value.

C. Protect insulations and vapor barrier from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled or covered with ice or snow.

D. Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation.

2. PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements set forth, provide products of one of the following.

B. Provide products of one of the following manufacturers of high density extruded polystyrene perimeter insulation and insulation used at furred masonry exterior walls:

1. Dow Chemical Company 2020 Dow Center Midland, MI 48674 (800) 232-2436 “Styrofoam- Square Edge”

2. DiversiFoam Products, Inc. 9091 Country Road 50 Rockford, MN 55373 (763) 477-5854 “Certifoam 25”.

3. Owens Corning, Inc. One Owens Corning Parkway Toledo, OH 43659 (800) 438-7465 “Foamular CW 25”


C. Provide products of one of the following manufacturers of medium density fiberglass insulation:

1. CertainTeed Corporation Post Office Box 860

Valley Forge, PA 19482 (800) 523-7844

2. Ownes Corning One Owens Corning Parkway

Toledo, OH 43659 (800) 438-7465

3. Johns Manville International, Inc. Post Office Box 5108

Denver, CO 80217 (800) 654-3103

D. Provide rigid board wall sheathing for thermal protection as manufactured by Atlas Roofing Corporation, 1775 The Exchange, Suite 160, Atlanta, Georgia 30339, (770) 952-1442, “R-board”, or equal.

E. Provide two component, open cell, spray applied, semi-rigid polyurethane spray-in-place, open celled Class 1 insulation that is spray applied, equal to Sealection Agribalance as manufactured by Demilec LLC, 2925 Galleria Drive, Arlington, TX 76011.

F. Provide continuous 6-mil, low density, polyethylene film stud wall vapor barrier, adhesives, anchors and joint sealant tape equal to products manufactured by Tex-Trude, Post Office Box 58, Channelview, TX 77530, (281) 452-5961.

2.2 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD PERIMETER INSULATION

A. Perimeter insulation shall be provided here and installed in conjunction with back filling operations and Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Insulation shall be provided here for furred exterior masonry wall and installed in conjunction with furring installation specified in Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Drywall Systems.

C. Extruded polystyrene board shall be rigid, cellular thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high-density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process.

1. Insulation shall comply with ASTM C578 for type indicated. 2. 5-year aged R-values of 5.4 and 5 at 40 and 75 degrees F. respectively and as

follows:

a. Type: Type IV, 1.6 pounds per cubic foot density, unless otherwise indicated. b. Minimum Compressive Strength: 25 pounds per square inch. c. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke

developed values of 5 and 165, respectively. d. Thickness: Provide 2-inch thickness unless indicated otherwise. e. Width: As indicated or minimum of 32-inch width including separation

between slab edge and perimeter wall.

2.3 RIGID FOAM CORE WALL SHEATHING

A. Rigid foam wall sheathing shall comply with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 2.


B. Rigid foam wall sheathing shall have a closed-cell polyisocyanurate foam core integrally laminated to heavy, coated glass fiber facers.

C. Performance Characteristics:

1. Sheet Size: 4’ x 8’ panels. 2. Thickness: 1”. 3. R-value: 6.0 when tested in accordance with CAN/ULC-5770/LTTR.

D. Provide 4” wide joint tape for sealing all joints equal to BT20XL window and door sealing tape manufactured by Protecto Wrap, 2255 South Delaware, Denver Colorado 80223, (303) 777-3001, Fax (303) 777-9273, or equal.

E. Provide self-tapping screws with insulation washer as recommended by manufacturer for attaching insulated sheathing to cold-formed steel studs and other construction.

2.4 UNFACED FIBERGLASS FILL INSULATION

A. Unfaced glass fiber thermal insulation complying with ASTM C-665, Type I and ASTM E-136.

B. Performance Characteristics:

1. Thickness: 3 ½ inches to 8 ¼ inches as required to insulate spaces that will be concealed after completion of framing and building closure, but before primary wall insulation system is installed.

2. Width: 16 to 24 inches. 3. Length: As indicated or required to fill space. 4. Density: 1.5 pounds per cubic foot. 5. R-value: 13.0 to 19.0 when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.

C. Surface Burning Characteristics:

1. Maximum flame spread; 10, in compliance with ICBO requirements. 2. Maximum smoke developed; 10, in compliance with ICBO requirements.

D. Dimensional Stability shall be inherent in product with linear shrinkage less that 0.1 percent.

2.5 OPEN CELL SPRAY INSULATION

A. Spray foam insulation shall be a Class 1, two component, semi-rigid polyurethane insulation that contains more than 20 percent agricultural based materials using water as a blowing agent.

B. Isolation shall be a spray-applied, semi-rigid, low-density, air impenetrable cellular polyurethane foam plastic insulation produced in the field by combining the following components:

1. Part A: Polymeric isocyanurate component. 2. Part B: Resin-based component.

C. The material shall be job-site mixed in and spray applied by and through equipment designed for this purpose.

D. Insulation shall conform to the following:


TEST STANDARD DESCRIPTION VALUE ASTM C518 Thermal Resistance at 75 F., ft2 hF /BTU R-4.45 per inch ASTM D1622 Density 0.60-0.80 lbf/ft3 ASTM D1623 Tensile Strength 3.87 psi ASTM D1621 Compressive Strength 1.86 psi ASTM2126 Dimensional Stability 3.16% ASTM E84 Flame Spread Index

Smoke Developed Index (5.5” Thickness) 15-20 400

ASTM E283 Air Leakage < 0.02 L/s/m2 ASTM E96 Water permeance @ 5" 4.95 perms

E. Spray foam shall exhibit low VOC’s in the finished foam and no CFC’c or HCFC’s.

F. Spray foam insulation system shall have a minimum R-value of 26.7 at 6-inch total average finished thickness.

2.6 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Continuous Roof Edge Blocking to Masonry Sealer:

1. Compressible foam. 2. ¼ inch thick x 4 inch nominal width.

B. Adhesive for bonding insulation shall be type recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with the requirements for fire performance characteristics.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas scheduled to receive insulation to insure protection against inclement weather and other hazards and verify that work of preceding trades is completed.

B. Examine space allocated for insulation for proper width and depth to receive material.

C. Proceed with installation when conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove projections unnecessary to permanent construction that may damage or prevent proper installation.

B. Insulate all cavities or spaces that will be permanently closed when actual insulation work begins as other work progresses.

1. Corners and jambs where stud framing is doubled. 2. Headers where access after framing is completed will be limited.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER INSULATION

A. Bevel top edge of insulation board at vertical wall intersection with slab edge so that top of insulation board is no more than ½-inch wide and install so that top edge is recessed a minimum of ½-inch below finished surface of concrete.

1. Pocket formed at top edge of insulation at perimeter walls shall be filled with pourable sealant.

2. Refer to Section 07 90 00 for sealant applications.


B. Set vertically installed units in adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

C. Vertical insulation shall extend from ½ inch below top of slab to top of footing.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF RIGID FOAM CORE INSULATING SHEATHING

A. Ensure that sheet metal window head flashing has been installed to wood blocking at window heads prior to installation of rigid foam core insulating sheathing.

B. Install specified rigid foam core insulated sheathing panels at all exterior steel stud walls.

C. Install panels directly over studs with long direction vertical.

1. Fit boards tightly together to assure proper edge contact and thermal performance. 2. Mechanically anchor boards through sheathing into wall framing or, at Contractor’s

option, sheathing may be installed with adhesive as recommended by sheathing manufacturer.

a. Coordinate anchorage or attachment of foam core sheathing products with fastening of masonry veneer anchors to minimize penetrations through sheathing.

b. Mechanical Anchorage:

1.) Use self-drilling screws as recommended by manufacturer but not less than with minimum ¾” diameter washer caps.

a) Use care to avoid breaking the facing material when drawing the washer cap down to the facer.

b) Seal any broken panel facing areas with caulking or flashing tape.

c) 24” centers at all edges and in field of panels in coordination with fastening of masonry veneer anchors.

c. Adhesive Attachment: Use only adhesives approved by manufacturer of foam core wall sheathing products and install in strict compliance with sheathing manufacturers written instructions.

D. Install flashing tape at all joints per tape manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Assure that surfaces to receive tape are clean and dry to assure adhesion. 2. Sealing tape shall be centered over each joint.

a. Apply the flashing tape to horizontal joints first. b. Apply flashing tape to all vertical joints, continuing over the junctures of the

previously taped horizontal joints, starting from the bottom of the wall and working upward.

c. Overlap all splices in tape a minimum of 3 inches. d. Tape splices in vertical joints shall be installed in a shingle fashion.

3. Apply flashing tape or sheathing manufacturer approved sealants that comply with ASTM C 834 minimum to all other penetrations and around door and window openings as indicated.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF WALL INSULATION

A. Unfaced medium density fiberglass wall insulation shall be installed where indicated on drawings.


B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for particular conditions of installation.

C. Friction fit insulation between framing members after foam core sheathing cover has been installed on one side of the cavity.

D. Install adhesive or mechanical fasteners as supplementary support to hold the product in place until finish surface is applied where insulation will not remain in place by friction.

E. Install unfaced medium density fiberglass insulation on both sides of structural steel beams and other locations where full depth wall insulation cannot be used.

1. Fill internal spaces of headers, corners and other spaces that cannot be accessed after completion of framing.

2. Pack insulation in joints between metal framing and exterior penetrations such as door and window openings to prevent thermal gaps and/or thermal bridges in the overall thermal insulation system.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF SPRAY FOAM INSULATION

A. Examination and Verification:

1. Verify that all members and substrates scheduled or intended to receive spray-applied insulation products are in place and suitable for this application.

2. Verify that all rough-ins for electrical, plumbing and other work on and within spaces to be insulated are complete prior to application of foam insulation.

B. Preparation:

1. Mask and protect adjacent finish surfaces and construction from overspray or damage.

2. Prepare all substrates scheduled or intended to receive spray foam material in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

a. Prepare all surfaces to receive spray foam application b. Properly seal all areas that require sealant to ensure a proper air seal when

complete. c. Properly mask all windows, doors and areas to be protected from overspray. d. Protect floors and drywall areas from overspray.

3. Remove foreign materials from substrates that may affect application of spray applied insulation products.

4. Application of materials by spray foam applier shall constitute acceptance of job-site conditions and substrates.

C. Apply spray foam insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s written application instructions.

1. Ensure all equipment is clean and ready for spraying foam using safety guidelines as offered by the Spray Foam Insulation Association.

2. Adjust equipment for proper temperature and pressure settings.

D. Spray foam to specified thickness and trim as necessary to framed wall cavity thickness.

1. Apply to a minimum 7 7/8-inch cured thickness and to obtain specified minimum R-value of 30.0.

2. Apply minimal expanding foam to fill voids around doors and windows. 3. Apply insulation to fill all voids around accessible service and equipment

penetrations.

a. Seal plumbing and electrical conduit penetrations.


b. Apply approved sealant where needed to fill small voids.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Contractor shall install foam sealer between all wood roof edge blocking and top of masonry veneer walls to ensure a flexible expansion joint between masonry and wood and to provide an air infiltration seal at the roof perimeter prior to installation of sheet metal.

B. Coordinate installation of auxiliary materials with work of other Sections.

1. Ensure proper installation of foam sealer prior to installation of sheet metal roof edge items in conjunction with blocking installed under Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry.

2. Ensure proper installation of joint taping over rigid foam core insulated sheathing to provide exterior air infiltration barrier prior to installation of masonry veneer under Section 04 20 00, Unit Masonry.

C. Extend vapor retarder membrane to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission and secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage systems as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Vapor barrier shall be installed on the warm side of the insulation on all wall areas. 2. Maintain vapor retarder integrity by tightly extending sheets over face of insulation.

a. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarder over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs.

b. Seal joints, fastener and other penetrations with tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.

3. Repair all punctures or tears in vapor retarder facing with tape prior to installation of finish materials.

3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from harmful weather exposure and from physical abuses and where possible by immediate installation of concealing work or where that is not possible by temporarily covering.

B. Remove and dispose of excess materials, litter and debris, leave work areas in clean condition.

END 07 21 00.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 24 00 - EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB

EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM – CLASS PB 07 24 00-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Fiberglass faced gypsum substrate/sheathing panels over metal stud framing systems.

b. Exterior insulation and finish system including the following:

1.) Air/weather barrier system. 2.) Base coat and adhesive, including trowel applied drainage plane. 3.) Expanded polystyrene insulation board. 4.) Expanded polystyrene shapes and features for detailing indicated. 5.) Back wrapping of all polystyrene insulation board edges where

meeting dissimilar materials. 6.) Fiber reinforcing mesh. 7.) Exterior finish. 8.) Accessory components, drainage strips, sealants, control joints and

other items necessary for complete installation of the exterior insulation and finish system.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 3. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 4. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 5. Section 07 21 00 – Building Insulation. 6. Section 07 54 00 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO). 7. Section 07 62 00 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 8. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 9. Section 08 41 10 – Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors. 10. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exterior insulation and finish systems refer to exterior assemblies composed of the following:

1. Approved substrate. 2. Moisture and air protection barrier. 3. Trowel applied drainage plane adhesive under layer of rigid board insulation. 4. Outer layer composed of a glass-fiber-mesh-reinforced base coat applied directly

to board insulation. 5. Textured protective finish coat.

B. These assemblies are applied to supporting substrates of construction indicated.


C. Designation PB for class of exterior insulation and finish systems specified in this Section is based on the classification developed by the Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Association (EIMA).

D. System in this Section refers to Class PB exterior insulation and finish systems.

E. System manufacturer refers to the manufacturer of exterior insulation and finish systems.

F. An R-value that represents the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value) designates thermal resistivity of the insulation board.

1. Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick.

2. Thermal resistivity (R-value) is expressed by the temperature difference between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through 1 square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide system complying with the following performance requirements:

1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions.

2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into system and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of system and assemblies behind system including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish.

3. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Flame Spread of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84.

b. Identity materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacturing products for system indicated and with at least 8 years successful experience in applications similar to that required for this project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer that is certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified for installation of systems indicated.

C. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Obtain materials for system from either a single manufacturer or from manufacturers approved by the system manufacturer as compatible with other system components.

2. System selected shall be compatible with intended design and performance characteristics.


1.6 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data for each component of exterior insulation and finish system and related products specified under this Section.

2. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of system including elevation(s), section(s), details of components including back wrapping, flashing tape and drainage strips, joint locations between system and construction and attachments to construction behind system.

3. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes:

a. E.I.F.S. manufacturer's standard color charts and small-scale samples indicating textural choices available.

b. Fiberglass faced gypsum sheathing/substrate, 6-inch by 12-inch panel. c. Drainage strip, 6-inch long piece.

4. Samples for Verification Purposes: Samples, 2 foot square, for each finish, color, and texture selected.

a. Prepare verification samples using same tools and techniques intended for actual work.

b. Incorporate within each sample a typical edge joint filled with sealant of color as selected by Architect.

B. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.

1. Product test reports for system prepared by a qualified independent testing laboratory within the last 3 years certifying and interpreting test results relative to system's compliance with requirements for fire performance characteristics, bond integrity, and material properties.

2. Sealant compatibility and test report from sealant manufacturer certifying that materials forming joint substrates of system have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

a. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of results relative to sealant performance.

b. Provide recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.


A. In accordance with Section 01 66 00 and other requirements below.

B. Deliver products in original, unopened packages with manufacturer's labels identifying products legible and intact.

C. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, damage from construction traffic and other causes.

D. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground.


A. Environmental Conditions:


1. Do not install system when ambient outdoor temperatures are 40 degrees F or below or when overnight temperatures are scheduled to fall below that limit.

2. Temporary protection and heat may by provided to sustain a temperature above 40 degrees F. if temperatures are 40 degrees F. and falling.

B. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees (4 degrees C.) during installation of wet materials and for 24 hours after installation or longer to allow them to become thoroughly dry and weather resistant.

1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence installation of system with related work specified in other sections to ensure that wall assemblies, including joint sealers, are protected against damage from weather, aging, corrosion, or other causes.

B. Install finish materials in coordination with installation of elastomeric coating system for continuity of finishes.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer: Furnish a written manufacturer's warranty for a period of seven (7) years for defects in materials.

B. Repairs or replacement shall be done at no cost to AAFES or the Government.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Class PB System of one of the following:

1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. One Energy Way West Warwick, RI 02893 (800) 556-7752 2. Senergy - BASF Corporation 3550 St. Johns Bluff Road South Jacksonville, FL 32224 (800) 221-9255 3. Sto Corp 3800 Camp Creek Parkway SW Building 1400 Suite 120 Atlanta, GA 30331 (800) 221-2397

2.2 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS:

MANUFACTURER PRODUCT

Dryvit “Outsulation Plus" Senergy “Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design" Sto “Sto Therm Classic CI"

2.3 MATERIALS


A. Compatibility: Provide substrate, board insulation, reinforcing fabric, base and finish coat materials, adhesives, anchors, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by system manufacturer.

B. Fiberglass faced gypsum substrate/sheathing panels: Paperless, mold-resistant, inorganic, exterior gypsum panel sheathing designed as substrate behind permanent building cladding systems.

1. Product: DensGlass Gold as manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corporation or equal as approved by system manufacturer.

2. Size: 5/8-inch thick x 4 feet wide x 8, 9 or 10 feet in length.

C. Air/weather barrier: 100 percent acrylic product designed to mix with Portland cement including accessory items as recommended and approved by the system manufacturer:

1. Fiberglass mesh tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. 2. Polyethylene backed flashing tape with rubberized asphalt adhesive. 3. Water-based flashing tape surface conditioner. 4. Accessory adhesives. 5. Corrugated plastic drainage strip. 6. Other miscellaneous accessories required by manufacturer for complete substrate

preparation.

D. Adhesive for Application of Insulation:

1. System manufacturer’s standard formulation designed for indicated use and compatible with substrate.

2. Adhesive shall be job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C-150, Type 1 and compatible with polymer based adhesive specified for base coat.

E. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation:

1. Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C-578 for Type 1.

2. Insulation shall be approved by system manufacturer for material qualities including square corners, other dimensional tolerances and the following:

a. Age insulation in block form prior to cutting and shipping by air drying for not less than 6 weeks or by another method approved by system manufacturer that produces equivalent results.

b. Provide insulation in boards not less than 2 feet x 4 feet and in thickness indicated, but not less that that allowed by system manufacturer.

c. Provide accurately cut polystyrene shapes and features for detailing indicated.

F. Reinforcing Fabric: System shall be constructed with two (2) layers of balanced, alkali-resistant open-weave glass fiber fabric treated for compatibility with other system materials, made from continuous multi-end strands with tensile strength of not less than 145 lbs. and 150 lbs. in warp and fill directions, respectively, per ASTM D-1682 and complying with ASTM D-578, and of the following minimum weight:

1. First layer: Standard duty reinforcing mesh, 4.30 oz. per sq. yd. minimum. 2. Second layer: Standard duty reinforcing mesh, 4.30 oz. per sq. yd. minimum. 3. Detailing mesh: Standard duty reinforcing mesh (short rolls), 4.30 oz. per sq. yd.

G. Base Coat Materials:


1. System manufacturer's standard, job mixed formulation of Portland cement complying with ASTM C-150, Type I.

2. Cement shall be of natural color and combined with system manufacturer’s standard polymer-based adhesive designed for use indicated.

H. Finish Coat Materials:

1. System manufacturer's standard factory mixed formulation of polymer emulsion admixture, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles and fillers.

2. Provide color and texture of protective coating to comply with the following requirements:

a. EIFS-1: Provide color to match PPG Paint, "Monterey Cliffs". b. EIFS-2: Provide color to match Benjamin Moore Paint, "Delightful Golden". c. Texture shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard sand texture finishes.

I. Water: Clean and potable.

J. Supplemental Anchorage:

1. Where recommended provide system manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fastener assemblies, complete with system manufacturer's standard washer attachments, selected for properties of pullout, tensile, and shear strength required to resist design loads of application indicated, capable of pulling fastener head below surface of insulation board.

2. Fasteners shall be designed for attachment to metal studs complying with ASTM C 954.

2.4 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. Sealant Product: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant that is listed and recommended by system manufacturer for use indicated.

1. Joint sealant shall be compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials.

2. Sealant shall be a multi-part, non-sag urethane composition complying with requirements of Section 07 90 00, Building Joint Sealers.

B. Sealant Color: Provide color selected by Architect-Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.5 MIXING

A. General: Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials.

B. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as approved by system manufacturer.

C. Mix materials in clean containers.

D. Use materials within time period specified by system manufacturer or discard.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


A. Examine sheathing and framed sub-substrates, with installer present, to determine if they are in satisfactory condition for installation of system.

B. Do not proceed with installation of system until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling resulting from application of systems.

B. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coatings on other work.

C. Attach approved substrate products over wood sheathing and framing as indicated.

D. Prepare and clean sub-substrates to comply with system manufacturer’s requirements to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.

3.3 E.I.F.S. INSTALLATION

A. Comply with system manufacturer’s current published instructions for installation of system as applicable to type of substrate indicated.

B. Apply system manufacturer’s air/weather barrier system over approved substrate in compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

C. Adhesively attach insulation to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Treat exposed edges of insulation board, including those forming substrates of sealed joints within system or between system and other work, by encapsulation with base coat, reinforcing fabric and finish coat.

a. All edges of insulation that adjoin dissimilar materials or that are discontinuous shall be factory back wrapped with detail mesh and adhesive.

b. At Contractor’s option, edges may be field back wrapped prior to adhering to substrate as follows:

1.) Detail mesh and adhesive shall be extended a minimum of 2 inches continuously along back surface of board.

2.) Spread adhesive on edge of board and embed detail mesh allowing free edge of mesh to drape over face of insulation.

3.) Edges shall receive coat of finish during finishing process or, if not accessible during finish process, prior to adhesion of insulation board to substrate.

c. Detail fabric shall be completely embedded and covered with adhesive. d. No exposed mesh or insulation shall be allowed. e. Exposed mesh or insulation board shall be grounds for rejection of entire

system.

2. Apply adhesive vertically to insulation by notched towel method in manner that results in adhesive coating entire surface of gypsum sheathing after insulation is placed against sheathing, unless system manufacturer instructions specify use of surface sealer in combination with ribbon and dab method.


3. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented horizontally beginning first course from a level base line and working upwards.

4. Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern and offset joints of insulation from joints in sheathing.

5. Interlock ends at internal and external corners where applicable. 6. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,

continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between insulation boards.

a. If gaps occur or cannot be avoided, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly. b. Insert insulation filler into gap without use of adhesive.

7. Where required and recommended install supplemental mechanical fasteners to ensure that insulation board is securely retained as follows:

a. Secure mechanical fasteners to framing members behind sheathed substrates so that they penetrate framing members 5/8 inch or more and recess flush with exterior surface of insulation board.

b. Space fasteners horizontally in line with framing members at approximately 16” to 24” centers and vertically not more that 16” on center.

8. Allow adhered, mechanically attached insulation to remain undisturbed for period prescribed by system manufacturer by not less that 24 hours, prior to beginning rasping and sanding insulation or application of base coat and reinforcing fabric.

9. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/32 inch from surface of insulation and yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch.

10. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes conforming to details indicated.

a. Coordinate detailed flashing installation with installation of insulation to produce a wall system that does not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating.

b. Metal flashings are specified in Section 07 62 00.

11. Interrupt insulation where expansion joints are indicated or required by system manufacturer.

12. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps of width needed between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces that produce joint widths indicated after encapsulation of joint substrates with base coat, reinforcing fabric and finish coat.

a. Embed strips of standard duty mesh in adhesive on sheathing or masonry surface at each joint leaving approximately 6 inches of strip hanging loose.

b. After application of insulation and during installation of base coat and initial layer of mesh, wrap loose ends of strips around edges of insulation to protect sides of joint.

13. Cut grooves, drips, rabbets, slopes and other features in outside face of insulation using hot wire knife and do not reduce insulation thickness at features to less than one half the insulation thickness or ¾ inch.

D. Apply base coat to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness specified by system manufacturer.


E. Fully embed base layer of reinforcing fabric of type indicated in wet base coat to produce wrinkle free installation with fabric continuous at corners and lapped or otherwise treated at joints to comply with system manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. After initial base coat has cured apply a second base coat and subsequent layer of reinforcing fabric, of type indicated, in same manner as first application.

G. Apply finish coat over cured base coat in thickness specified by system manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of texture and color matching approved verification sample.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANT

A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements of Division 7, Section 07 90 00.

B. In addition to requirements of Section 07 90 00, comply with "EIMA Joint Sealant Specification for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems."

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove protective coatings from window and doorframes and any other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive protective coating.

B. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering and soiling of new exterior insulation and finish system.

C. Maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to installer and system manufacturer that ensures systems being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END 07 24 00

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 54 00 – THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING (TPO)

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING (TPO) 07 54 00-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor Provide:

a. Walk-in Cooler/Freezer roofing and flashing systems:

1.) Contractor provide single-ply, fully adhered TPO membrane roofing, flashing system and roof insulation as indicated for building and external walk-in cooler/freezer boxes furnished by AAFES.

b. Roof mounted condenser supports and pipe/power portals:

1.) Appropriately sized equipment supports for roof mounted Walk-in Cooler/Freezer condensers.

2.) Appropriately sized equipment supports for ice maker condensers. 3.) Pipe/power portal curbs for routing piping and wiring between roof

mounted condenser units and equipment.

c. Building roofing systems:

1.) Mechanically fastened gypsum-fiber roof board base layer. 2.) Adhered 2-layer roof insulation. 3.) Adhered tapered system. 4.) Adhered cricket system. 5.) Adhered glass mat-faced ISO overlay. 6.) Fully adhered TPO membrane system. 7.) Base flashings. 8.) Roof projection flashings. 9.) Roof drain flashings. 10.) Walkway pads. 11.) Miscellaneous accessory items necessary to complete the weather-

tight, UL rated, warranted roofing system indicated.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Section 01 10 00 – Project Summary. 2. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals. 3. Section 01 55 00 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls. 4. Section 01 65 00 – Material & Equipment. 5. Section 01 66 00 – Storage & Protection. 6. Section 01 73 29 – Cutting & Patching. 7. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel. 8. Section 05 31 00 – Steel Deck. 9. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 10. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 11. Section 07 62 00 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 12. Section 08 31 00 – Access Doors. 13. Division 22 – Plumbing.


14. Division 23 – HVAC. 15. Division 26 – Electrical.

B. Installed but specified elsewhere:

1. Sheet metal cap flashings for indicated equipment supports are specified in Section 07 62 00, Flashing & Sheet Metal.

2. Sheet metal top housings for indicated pipe/power portal curbs are specified in Section 07 62 00, Flashing & Sheet Metal.

3. Sheet metal coping covers, fascia flashings and TPO coated sheet metal Walk-in Cooler/Freezer edge drip flashing are specified in Section 07 62 00, Flashing & Sheet Metal.


A. Roofing Subcontractor Qualifications:

1. The installing subcontractor shall be approved or franchised by the roofing system manufacturer.

2. The job foreman shall be trained by the manufacturer in the installation of the specified system.

B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Any of the manufacturers whose systems are specified under "Acceptable Roofing System Manufacturers" in this Section shall be deemed as qualified Roofing System Manufacturers under this Contract subject to strict compliance with the Contract Documents.

C. Uplift Criteria:

1. System shall be provided to comply with FM’s updated Loss Prevention Data Sheet (LPDS) 1-29, “Roof Deck Securement and Above Deck Roof Components”.

2. System shall be provided as tested in accordance with UL 580, “Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies”.

3. System performance shall meet requirements for UL 580, Class 60 uplift resistance rating.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Cited standards and specified manufacturers' catalogs, current at the date of bidding documents, unless otherwise specified, are incorporated herein by reference and govern he work.

1. If conflict is discovered between referenced Standards or catalogs and the project specifications, request written clarification from the Contracting Officer.

2. Do not proceed with the work until receiving such clarification.

B. Standards:

1. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual (NRCA). 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM). 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 6. Federal Specifications (FS).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accord with Section 01 33 00.


B. Additional submittals directly related to work by Contractor NOT directly specified in this Section shall be coordinated with roofing system and submitted as specified under the requirements in those respective Sections.

C. Endorsement of Roofing Firm: Contractor shall, within 15 days of receiving the Notice of Award, submit the manufacturer's endorsement of architectural design drawings pertaining to roof system specified herein.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings to the manufacturer for review and comment.

a. Indicate vapor retarder and method of attachment to steel roof deck. b. Indicate mechanical fastener pattern for roof board underlayment to existing

or newly patched steel roof deck, including any additional requirements at perimeter in order to meet specified uplift requirements.

c. Confirm adhesive requirements for adhering insulation system. d. Indicate adhesive requirements for roofing membrane, flashings and other

components to meet specified uplift resistance.

2. Submit only manufacturer approved shop drawings for review. 3. Minimum Scale for Roof Plan: 1/8" = 1' 0". 4. Minimum Scale for Details: 1 1/2" = 1' 0. 5. Submit the following:

a. Roof plans including mechanical fastener pattern for roof board underlayment and requirements for vapor retarder membrane and include:

1.) Roof insulation plans with adhesion requirements. 2.) Tapered roof insulation plans.

a) Include all slopes, saddles and crickets of drawings. b) Include requirements for additional mechanical fasteners or

adhesion requirements, if any, at perimeters for increased with uplift loading.

b. Details illustrating installation and fastenings of the following:

1.) Perimeter membrane termination and flashings at parapets. 2.) Base flashing and membrane termination including counter flashings. 3.) Roof curb and roof projection flashings and terminations. 4.) Equipment support and pipe portal flashings. 5.) Roof drain membrane flashings and terminations. 6.) Pipe and plumbing vent flashings. 7.) Strip flashings and seam sealant. 8.) Hot pipe collar flashings. 9.) Walkway pads.

E. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturers specifications for all major roof components specified herein including:

a. Vapor barrier specifications for roofing system. b. Roof insulation specifications. c. Manufacturer's specifications for roofing system. d. Mechanical anchors and insulation adhesive specifications.


2. Submit manufacturers data and standard cut sheets on all accessory and auxiliary roof related items specified herein including:

a. Insulation adhesives. b. Termination bars and fasteners. c. Pipe flashing and pipe boots. d. Equipment supports and pipe/power portal curbs. e. Hot pipe collars f. Retro-fit roof drains. g. Pipe supports. h. Rough carpentry components: Refer to Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry. i. Sheet metal components: Refer to Section 07 62 00, Flashing & Sheet

Metal.

F. Samples:

1. Roof board underlayment, 8” x 10”, 2 pieces. 2. Underlayment fasteners, 2 of each type. 3. Vapor barrier, 8” x 10”, 2 pieces. 4. Roof insulation, 8" x 10”, 2 pieces. 5. Glass mat-faced polyisocyanurate cover board, 8” x 10” , 2 pieces. 6. TPO membrane, 4" x 6", 3 pieces. 7. Sheet Metal: Refer to Section 07 62 00.


A. Uplift Criteria: The specified roofing assembly must have been successfully tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the design uplift pressures calculated according to American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE 7) for components and cladding and after multiplying the results with a safety factor of 1.25.

B. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.


A. Per roofing manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Deliver materials requiring fire resistant classifications packaged with labels intact and legible.

1.8 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Construction:

1. New roof structure consists of bar joists spaced as indicated and supported on structural steel framing system.

2. A slope of approximately ¼ inch per foot is built into the structure. 3. New roof deck consists 1 ½” galvanized roof deck. 4. Penetrations include:

a. PVC plumbing vents. b. Pipe/conduit portals. c. Package rooftop units. d. Exhaust fans. e. Kitchen exhaust fans. f. Condenser equipment supports.


B. Environmental Conditions:

1. Install roofing and insulation only in dry weather. 2. Comply with manufacturer's climatic restrictions.

C. Protection:

1. Protect roof membrane, building surfaces, paving and landscaping from traffic and roofing equipment.

2. Restore or replace all work or materials damaged by the roofing operation. 3. Remove protection materials upon completion of work. 4. Avoid traffic on completed roofing work.

D. Sequencing, Scheduling Coordination: As coordinated by Contractor.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer: Execute Roofing System Manufacturer's Total System Warranty covering both labor and material with no dollar limitation.

1. Warranty shall cover all roofing components including insulation attachment. 2. Maximum wind speed coverage shall be peak gusts of 90 mph measured at 10

meters above ground level. 3. Warranty shall be from membrane manufacturer.

a. No dual source warranties will be accepted b. Pro-rated system warranties will not be accepted.

4. Warranty Period: Twenty years.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide all adhesives, sealants, pre-molded and field fabricated flashings, fasteners, and other related components for the entire roofing system as manufactured or recommended by the selected manufacturer.

B. Use only materials and components manufactured or recommended by the selected manufacturer throughout the project.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE ROOFING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

CODE MANUFACTURER

A. CAR Carlisle SynTec Systems, Carlisle, PA

B. FIR Firestone Bldg. Products Co., Carmel, IN

C. GAF GAF Materials Corporation, Wayne, NJ

2.3 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS

A. Fully Adhered .060 thick TPO (Thermoplastic Polyolefin) membrane as follows:

1. CAR – Sure-Weld TPO 2. FIR – UltraPly TPO 3. GAF – EverGuard


B. Minimum membrane thickness over reinforcing scrim shall be nominal .015” thick (15 mil).

C. Membrane and related flashing components shall be white in color.

2.4 VAPOR BARRIER & UNDERLAYMENT LAYER

A. Polyethylene Vapor Barrier:

1. ASTM D4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. 2. Provide manufacturer’s recommended pressure sensitive tape for sealing joints

and penetrations.

B. Provide 1/2” water resistant, fire retardant, gypsum-fiber roof board panels designed for exterior installation as a thermal barrier substrate underlayment for adhesion of subsequent roof insulation equal to USG, “Securerock” with R-value of 0.50 per ½-inch.

1. Maximum width: 4’. 2. Maximum length: 8’.

C. Provide screw-type mechanical fasteners with plates as recommended by the underlayment and the roofing system manufacturer for application indicated.

2.5 ROOF INSULATION

A. Contractor shall select a brand acceptable to the roofing manufacturer.

TYPE ASTM R/INCH

1. ½” Glass Mat-Faced ISO C1289-06 2.50 @ ½” (LTTR) 2. Extruded Polyisocyanurate C1289 6.00 (LTTR)

B. Building Roof Insulation Thickness and Slopes:

1. Roof insulation for primary non-tapered areas:

a. Type: Extruded polyisocyanurate, 4’ x 4’ maximum sheet size. b. First layer:

1.) Thickness 2”. 2.) Attachment: Fully adhered.

c. Second layer:

1.) Thickness 2”. 2.) Attachment: Fully adhered.

d. Overlay board: ½” Glass Mat-Faced ISO, fully adhered.

2. Roof insulation for crickets and saddles:

a. Type: Extruded polyisocyanurate. b. Thickness: ½” minimum. c. Slope: ½” per foot as indicated to attain a net slope of ¼” per foot to valley

and roof drains. d. Attachment: Fully adhered. e. Overlay board: ½” Glass Mat-Faced ISO, fully adhered.

C. External Walk-in Cooler/Freezer Box Insulation and Slopes:


1. Tapered roof insulation system:

a. Type: Extruded polyisocyanurate, 4’ x 4’ maximum sheet size. b. Second layer:

1.) Thickness: ½” at low end roof edge. 2.) Slope: 1/8” per foot slope toward building. 3.) Attachment: Mechanical.

c. Overlay board: ½” Glass Mat-Faced ISO, fully adhered.

2.6 AUXILIARY INSULATION AND SUBSTRATE MATERIALS

A. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints and filling voids.

B. Insulation attachment shall be by two component, heated, insulation type adhesive as manufactured or approved by the roofing system manufacturer with the following properties:

1. 150% elongation. 2. No more than 25% MDI content.

C. Heated adhesive shall be designed to be applied using one of the following methods as approved by roofing system manufacturer:

1. Full coverage spray application. 2. High pressure extrusion process at a minimum pressure of 500 psi with

attachment rows spaced at a maximum of 4” on center.

D. No cold applied products or asphalt will be allowed.

E. Adhesive shall be manufactured or approved by the roofing system manufacturer and certified by roof system manufacturer to provide specified uplift requirements when used for adhesion of multiple layers of insulation and related roofing materials.

2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND PIPE/POWER PORTAL CURBS

A. Acceptable Manufactures:

1. Thybar Corporation/ThyCurb 913 South Kay Addison, Illinois 60101 800.828.8424

2. Roof Products and Systems Corporation (Portal Plus, Inc.)

484 Thomas Drive Bensenville, IL 60106 800.624.8642

3. The Pate Company 245 Eisenhower Lane South Lombard, IL 60148 800.243.3018

B. Equipment Supports:

1. Provide manufactured equipment supports as designed for flange mounting on steel roof deck surface for new heat pump equipment.


a. Construction shall be minimum 14 gauge galvanized sheet metal with 1 1/2”, 3 pound density insulation.

b. Top edge of the curb shall have an integral pressure treated wood nailer for terminating roof membrane base flashing.

c. Supports shall be constructed to seismically retain the rooftop equipment.

1.) Furnish with anchorage preapproval “R” from OSHPD in the state of California.

2.) Approval shall attest to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings.

2. Height of curb shall be a minimum of 18” above existing roof deck with height adjusted to accommodate slope of roof and provide a minimum base flashing height of 8” minimum above top of membrane roof surface.

3. Length of curbs shall be as indicated but no less than 3'-0" long.

C. Pipe/Power Portal Curbs:

1. Provide manufactured pipe/power portal curbs as designed for flange mounting on steel roof deck surface to provide access for line sets and power conduits.

a. Construction shall be minimum 14 gauge galvanized sheet metal with 1 1/2", 3 pound density

b. Top edge of the curb shall have an integral pressure treated wood nailer for terminating roof membrane base flashing.

c. Portal curbs shall be constructed to seismically retain the rooftop equipment.

1.) Furnish with anchorage preapproval “R” from OSHPD in the state of California.

2.) Approval shall attest to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings.

2. Curb height shall be selected and coordinated with fabricated sheet metal top housing so that top of housing extends a minimum of 1'-8" above existing roof deck and provide a minimum base flashing height of 8” minimum above top of membrane roof surface.

2.8 OTHER MATERIALS

A. TPO .060 flashings as approved by the manufacturer.

B. Molded Pipe Seals: Pre-molded flashing/counter flashing cap and step boot with adjustable stainless steel clamp and cap flashing screws as approved by roof system manufacturer for roof penetrations and at guardrail support brackets flashed into parapet wall as indicated.

C. Molded Walkway Pads: White, molded walkway pads, 30” x 30”, 3/16” thickness, with slip resistant surface and factory rounded corners.

D. Termination Bars: Aluminum bar predrilled for anchors at 6” centers and acceptable to roofing membrane manufacturer.

E. Refer to Section 01 10 17, AAFES Furnished & Installed Equipment and Section 01 10 18, AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment for Contractor’s provision of equipment curbs and pipe/power/control wiring portals for roof top mounted refrigeration condensers furnished by AAFES.


F. Refer to Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry for edge blocking or other rough carpentry items specified to be installed in conjunction with the roof system.

1. Refer to Section 07 21 00, Building Insulation for foam seal to be placed between top course of face masonry and roof edge blocking.

G. Refer to Section 07 62 00, Flashing & Sheet Metal for sheet metal items indicated.

H. Refer to Division 22, Plumbing; Division 23, HVAC; and Division 26, Electrical and related Drawing Sheets for information pertaining to roof top mounted equipment, penetrations and flashing requirements.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Installation shall be performed only during dry weather conditions.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s climatic restrictions.

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Examine all surfaces and components for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture, unevenness or other conditions that could prevent the best quality and longevity of roofing, flashing and accessory components.

1. Inspect parapet walls to ensure that substrate is free from nails, hollow spots or other defects that could reduce adhesion of base flashings prior to installation of roofing system components.

2. Inspect galvanized steel roof deck to ensure that attachment patterns are complete prior to installation of thermal barrier substrate.

a. Identify any low areas or uneven deck conditions that could inhibit the positive flow of water to roof drains.

b. Notify Contracting Officer or authorized representative of all deficiencies.

3. Verify that other related construction including wood blocking, insulation and related parapet top blocking components are securely installed to resist specified wind uplift ratings and per prefabricated sheet metal component manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Do not proceed with the work until all deficiencies have been corrected to the satisfaction of the roof system manufacturer and the Contracting Officer.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that all surfaces are clean and dry before starting and during performance of work.

B. Install foam seal, wood blocking, thermal insulation and sheathing panels to inside face and top of parapet walls as indicated and in compliance with requirements of Division 6.

C. Verify that installation of roof hatch curb and door assembly have been properly installed and secured.

D. Verify that installation of plumbing vents, roof drains, RTU curbs, RTC curbs, equipment supports and other pipe and electrical portal work that penetrates the roofing system has been completed before proceeding with roofing system installation.


E. Verify that all other work of subcontractors that requires men and equipment to traverse the roof deck has been completed before proceeding with roofing system installation.

3.4 VAPOR BARRIER, SUBSTRATE & INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install polyethylene vapor barrier directly over metal roof deck.

1. Lap joints a minimum of 6” and seal with tape as recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer.

2. Do not disturb or damage vapor barrier while placing thermal barrier substrate underlayment and roof insulation.

B. Install thermal barrier substrate underlayment per manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Ends and sides of adjacent sheets shall butt tightly together to provide a continuous solid and secure substrate for adhesive application of subsequent layers of insulation.

2. Space mechanical fasteners at ends, sides and in the field of the sheet per roofing system manufacturer’s recommendations for specified uplift rating.

C. Install the roof insulation with end joints staggered at midpoint and joints butted tightly together with no joints or gaps greater that ¼ inch.

1. Position sheets to accommodate irregularities in substrate to avoid bucking water. 2. Adhesive attach insulation directly to surface of previously installed thermal barrier

substrate underlayment.

a. Secure insulation to substrate with adhesive in accordance with roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions.

b. Use adhesive specifically acceptable to the roofing system manufacturer using a two component, full coverage, expanding, low-rise urethane type adhesive to be covered by the Total System Warranty.

3. Adhesive attach fiberglass reinforced gypsum board overlay to the face of the roof insulation per manufacturer’s written instructions similar to installation of insulation.

3.5 MEMBRANE PLACEMENT AND ATTACHMENT

A. Install the roofing and flashing system and all accessory items in accord with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Position membrane over manufacturer approved substrate by folding sheet back lengthwise so half the underside of the membrane is exposed.

C. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions, to the exposed underside of the membrane and the corresponding substrate area.

1. Do not apply bonding adhesive along the splice edge of the membrane to be hot air welded over the adjoining sheet.

2. Allow the adhesive to dry until it is tacky but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch.

3. Roll the coated membrane into the coated substrate while avoiding wrinkles. 4. Brush down the bonded section of the membrane sheet immediately after rolling

the membrane into the adhesive with a soft bristle push broom to achieve maximum contact.

5. Fold back unbonded half of the sheet lengthwise and repeat the bonding procedures.


D. Position adjoining sheets to allow a minimum overlap of 2” and hot air weld the membrane sheets as set forth below and in accordance with the manufacturer’s hot air welding procedures.

1. Pull the unbonded adjoining membrane back along the welded splice so the entire underside of the membrane is exposed one the hot air weld has been completed.

2. Apply adhesive to the exposed underside of the membrane sheet and substrate and allow to dry until tacky as specified above.

3. Roll the membrane onto the substrate and brush down the bonded section with a bristle broom following the procedures specified above.

E. Continue to install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner, overlapping edges a minimum of 2” and complete the bonding procedures set forth above.

3.6 MEMBRANE SPLICING/NOT AIR WELDING PROCEDURES

A. Hot air weld membrane using an automatic hot air welding machine or hot air hand welder in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s specifications.

1. At all splice intersections, toll the seam with a silicone roller to ensure a continuous hot air welded seam.

2. All splice intersections shall be overlaid with non-reinforced flashing.

B. Probe all seams after the hot air weld have thoroughly cooled (approximately 30-minutes) and repair all seam deficiencies immediately after they are discovered.

C. Apply cut edge sealant on all cut edges of reinforced membrane where scrim reinforcement is exposed after seam probing is complete.

3.7 FLASHING

A. Flash parapets, curbs, penetrations and other parts of the roof using reinforced membrane flashings.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s standard flashing procedures for all wall, curb and penetration flashing including pipe and power portals, metal copings and roof drain applications.

C. Coordinate installation of standard pipe penetration flashings with guardrail support bracket flashings at parapet walls.

3.8 WALKWAY PADS

A. Install molded walkway pads at all traffic concentration points including roof hatches and as indicated.

B. Hot air weld walkway pads to the membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.


A. The Contracting Officer or designated representative will provide on-site observation during installation.


B. The roofing manufacturer will provide on-site observation and instruction as the manufacturer deems necessary to effect issuance of Total System Warranty.


A. Carefully inspect all completed work and correct all defects.

B. Remove from job site and legally dispose of rubbish and debris.

C. Remove tools, equipment and construction aids.

D. Prevent storage of material or equipment on the completed roof.

E. Prior to manufacturer’s inspection for warranty, the Contractor shall perform a pre-inspection to review all work and to verify that all flashing has been properly placed and sealant application has been completed.

F. Contractor shall accompany the manufacturer's Technical Inspector during inspection and assist with equipment and workmen if necessary to provide access to the roof.

G. Correct all defects noted during inspection.

END 07 54 00.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 61 03 – PREFORMED METAL SOFFIT PANELS

PREFORMED METAL SOFFIT PANELS 07 61 03-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Preformed perforated flush soffit panels. b. Trim and closures required for a complete soffit panel installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 3. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel. 4. Section 05 31 00 – Steel Deck. 5. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 6. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 7. Section 07 21 00 – Building Insulation. 8. Section 07 62 00 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 9. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 10. Section 10 71 10 – Fixed Sunshades & Canopies.

B. Furnished Elsewhere:

1. Sealants for use with metal roofing systems that are not furnished by the metal roofing system manufacturer are specified in Section 07 90 00, Building Joint Sealants and shall be provided wherever joints between metal roofing products and other materials are encountered to ensure weather tightness.

2. Canopy structures to receive non-perforated metal soffit panels specified herein are specified in Section 10 71 10, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies and shall be coordinated with requirements for installation of metal soffits.


A. The following standards and criteria (of most recent issue) shall be used where applicable in the design of the metal soffit panels covered by this specification.

1. “Cold Formed Steel Design Manual”, American Iron and Steel Institute. 2. “Recommended Design Practices Manual”. Metal Building Manufacturer’s

Association.

B. The following standards and criteria (of most recent issue) shall be used where applicable in the design and installation of the meal soffit panels covered by this specification.

1. “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

1.4 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

A. Cited standards and manufacturer’s catalogs, current at the date of bidding documents, unless otherwise specified, are incorporated herein by reference and govern the Work.


B. If conflict exists between these standards or catalogs and the Project Specifications, request written clarification from the Contracting Officer.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in Accord with Section 01 33 00.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Manufacturer shall supply Shop Drawings. 2. Submit the following:

a. Soffit panel layout plan. b. Details of trim items. c. Method of attachment. d. Joining of side laps between units.

C. Samples:

1. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer’s actual metal color chips showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for soffit panels with factory-applied finishes.

2. Samples for verification purposes in form of two (2) sample panels, 12” long by actual panel width in the profile, style, color and texture selected.

D. Product Data:

1. Specifications and standard details for soffit panels, attachment, trim and miscellaneous accessories.

2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions, and general recommendations, as applicable to each component and for total panel system.


A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions to prevent components from being damaged, deformed or stained.

1. Deliver panels and other components so that they will not be damaged or deformed.

2. Package soffit panels for protection against transportation damage.

B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting soffit panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight ventilated covering.

1. Store metal soffit panels so that they will not accumulate water. 2. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,

denting, or other surface damage.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Requirements Include:

1. All materials either furnished or approved by the manufacturer shall be warranted. 2. The use of manufacturer supplied shop drawing during construction shall be the

basis for installation.

B. General Contractor Soffit Panel System: Two (2) years.


C. Manufacturer: The following warranties shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for distribution before Final Completion and will become effective on the date the materials were shipped from the factory.

1. The manufacturer shall provide a 20 year finish warranty on paint integrity and color retention including:

a. Cracking. b. Flaking. c. Blistering. d. Chalking in excess of number 8 rating of ASTM D 659. e. Fade in excess of 5 units per ASTM D 2244.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Manufactured soffit panels shall be the product of one manufacturer as specified.

B. Acceptable Soffit Panels Systems: Manufacturers standard vented and non-vented soffit panels with flush profile.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE METAL SOFFIT PANEL MANUFACTURERS

A. The following soffit panel manufacturers and systems are acceptable:

MANUFACTURER ABBREVIATION

1. A.E.P. Span AEP 5100 East Grand Avenue Dallas, TX 75223

2. ATAS International, Inc. ATA 6612 Snowdrift Road Allentown, PA 18106

3. MBCI MBC 1780 McCall Drive Shelbyville, IN 46176

2.3 PREFORMED METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A. Preformed soffit panels shall have the profile configuration indicated.

1. Fabricate from .040 painted aluminum. 2. Aluminum panels shall be smooth factory prefinished in color as selected from

manufacturer’s standard high performance organic coatings.

B. Panel width shall be 12 inches.

C. Soffit system at all locations shall be perforated non-perforated.

D. Panel depth shall be 1 inch nominal.

E. Factory Finishes:

1. Exterior finish shall be Kynar 500 containing 70 percent fluoropolymer or Hylar 5000 polyvinylidene fluoride coating.


2. Interior finish shall be manufacturer’s standard corrosion resistant paint.

3. Metal soffit panel and trim color for Drive-up and Entry canopies shall be as selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer's full range of high performance organic coatings.

2.4 OTHER MATERIALS AND TRIM

A. Provide all sheet metal trim including soffit trim, drips, starter trim, moldings and other miscellaneous sheet metal items indicated to provide a finished, ventilated soffit system as indicated.

1. Finish all components to match adjoining panel components. 2. Provide other shapes and fasteners as required or recommended by the

manufacturer to complete system.

B. Sealants shall be provided as required of recommended by the system(s) manufacturer(s) and are not included as part of the general purpose sealant specifications in Section 07 90 00, Building Joint Sealers.

C. Provide Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 touch-up paint to match panel and trim finish.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify that framing system and attachment substrates are properly installed and prepared for placement of soffit system.

B. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing of unsatisfactory conditions that may adversely affect the performance or appearance on the roof and do not proceed with installation until conditions are corrected.

3.2 SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Contractor and soffit panel installer shall inspect framing and support system for consistency with design criteria and verify proper alignment of system in plumb, level condition, ready to receive soffit panel installation as indicated.

1. Verify end conditions where soffit panel system abuts wall construction and framing.

B. Coordinate soffit panel installation with installation of work of all trades.

1. Panels shall be fitted neatly and trimmed around lighting fixtures and other penetrating elements of the Project.

C. Install soffit panels in accord with Shop Drawings and manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Follow sequential procedures for layout of panels as outlined therein. 2. Erect true to line with tolerances as specified for other metal panel work.

D. Install all attachment accessories and metal trim as indicated and per manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Paint all field cut and other raw edges with Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 touch-up paint as furnished by manufacturer and install sealants at all conditions indicated or where factory applied sealant has not been furnished.


3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT

A. Carefully inspect all completed work and correct all defects.

B. Prevent movement or storage of materials or equipment on the completed roof.

C. Remove from the Project Site and legally dispose of all debris and metal scraps.

1. Remove all surplus materials, tools and equipment. 2. Power wash the entire installation using low to medium pressure sprayer and

clean water to remove all dust, dirt, debris and steel shaving.

3.4 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall be responsible for completion of the information contained therein and delivery of Warranty Information to Contracting Officer, along with Manufacturer’s Warranty, as part of Project Closeout.

1. Submit per requirements of this Section and Standard Documents for Construction.

2. Warranty Information sheet shall be submitted in type written form.

B. Refer to requirements set forth in Section 01 77 00, Project Closeout for additional information regarding warranty submittal requirements.

END 07 61 03.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 62 00 – FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 62 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Prefinished manufactured coping cover system. b. Prefinished manufactured fascia system. c. Prefinished shop fabricated counter flashings. d. Prefinished shop fabricated base flashings. e. Prefinished shop fabricated window head flashings. f. Prefinished shop fabricated roof edge blocking cladding. g. Prefinished shop fabricated equipment support cap flashings. h. Prefinished shop fabricated pipe/power portal top housings. i. Prefinished TPO coated edge drip flashing. j. Miscellaneous sheet metal items and accessories related to exterior closure.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05 31 00 – Steel Deck. 3. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 4. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 5. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 6. Section 07 54 00 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO). 7. Section 07 61 03 – Preformed Metal Roof & Soffit Panels. 8. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 9. Section 08 41 10 – Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors. 10. Division 22 – Plumbing 11. Division 23 – HVAC. 12. Division 26 – Electrical.

B. Rigid foam core insulated sheathing is installed under Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry as specified in Section 07 21 00, Building Insulation and window head flashings specified herein shall be installed prior to installation of sheathing.

C. Prefinished roof edge blocking cladding specified herein shall be coordinate with installation of blocking specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry and with EIFS installation specified in Section 07 24 00, Exterior Insulation & Finish System-Class PB.

D. Installation of all sheet metal items related to membrane roofing, including Walk-in Cooler/Freezer sheet metal, shall be coordinated with work performed under Section 07 54 00, Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO).

E. Base flashing for aluminum flat roof fixed canopies specified herein shall be coordinated with work performed under Section 10 71 10, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies and shall be installed in conjunction with that Section.



A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Codes, Regulations and Recommendations:

1. Comply with pertinent codes and regulations. 2. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in current edition of

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by the Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).

C. Substitution of shop fabricated sheet metal items will not be allowed where manufactured items are specifically called for under this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and in coordination with Sections 07 24 00, 07 54 00 and 08 41 10.

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the

specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, that after review by the

Contracting Officer or designated representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.

B. Detailed Shop drawings illustrating the following:

1. Gauge and finish of stock material. 2. Fabrication techniques. 3. Installation drawings including techniques and anchorage. 4. Interface of work of this Section with work of adjacent trades.

a. Coordinate shop drawings with those of other manufactured items related to this work to illustrate interrelationship between components.

b. Show all blocking and substrates to which sheet metal components will be attached.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging with all labels intact and legible.

B. Store materials on raised platforms and protect with coverings at outdoor locations and in a manner to prevent damage, in a secure place, out of the way of construction operations.

C. Materials furnished under this Section that may be installed by other trades shall be delivered to the site in time to avoid delays to construction progress.

D. Handle all material in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's standard 20-year warranty.


2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet Metal:

1. ASTM B209-76, alloy 3003, temper H14. 2. Minimum thickness subject to performance requirements of AAMA 1402-86:

a. Prefinished coping cover up to 16” width: .050”. b. Prefinished coping cover up to 27” width: .063”. c. Cleats: .040”. d. Cladding: .040" e. Counter flashing: .040”. f. Aluminum Canopy Base Flashing: .032" g. Pipe/Power Portal Top Housings: .050" h. Cap flashings: .040”. i. Window/door head drip flashing: .040”. j. Roof edge drip flashing: .040" k. Miscellaneous sheet metal items not specifically designated: .032”.

B. Sheet Metal Finish:

1. Exposed metal finish shall be high performance organic coating as follows:

a. AA-C12C42R1X chemical finish cleaned with inhibited chemicals or acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating.

b. Prepare, pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer’s instructions.

c. Fluoropolymer 2-coat coating system, thermocured, composed of specially formulated primer and fluoroplymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.

2. Items specified to be used in conjunction with Section 10 71 10, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies shall exactly match finish specified for the fixed canopies.

3. Items not directly exposed to view such as cleats, reglets and anchor clips may be fabricated from mill finish aluminum or manufacturers standard sheet metal material.

4. Sheet metal for low point drip edge flashing at Walk-in Cooler/Freezer shall be TPO coated and furnished in "Gray" color to match as closely as possible to insulated aluminum wall panels.

C. Fasteners:

1. Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.

2. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Sealant: Type I as specified in Section 07 90 00.

B. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

C. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, cleats, backer plates, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work.


1. Accessories shall match or be compatible with material being installed. 2. Materials shall be non-corrosive. 3. Size and gage as required for specified performance.

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Prefabricate system in manufacturer’s plant to greatest extent possible.

B. Miter and weld joints in tops and faces of end caps and weld joint in top and inside corner.

1. Continuously weld all joints. 2. Perform welding prior to finishing.

C. Pop rivets, interlocking discontinuities and other fasteners exposed in finish work are unacceptable.

2.4 SHOP FABRICATED UNITS (Only Items Without Specified Manufacturer)

A. General Metal Fabrication:

1. Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible.

a. Fabricate for waterproof and weather resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of work.

b. Form work to fit substrates. c. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil canning, buckling, and

tool marks; true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Comply with drawing details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices.

3. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for forming material.

B. Seams:

1. Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. 2. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 3. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for strength where

required.

C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant concealed within joints.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards.

E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer or fabricator.

F. Equipment Support Cap Flashings:

1. Provide custom fabricated sheet metal cap flashings to counter flash built-up roofing base flashings with drip leg extending a minimum of 4 inches over flashing terminations as indicated.


a. Material: Smooth surfaced formed aluminum alloy in thickness as determined by fabricator to comply with indicated performance but not less than .040 inch.

b. Break-Forming: Front drip leg, back drip leg and roof flange shall be break-formed.

c. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating system. d. Face Height: 4 inch plus drip as indicated e. Lengths: As indicated without joints. f. Attachment: Continuous cleat each side, hooked one side and mechanically

fastened to cleat on opposite side of curb with pop rivets.

G. Pipe/Power Portal Top Housings:

1. Provide custom fabricated sheet metal top housings to enclose roof curbs and to counter flash roofing base flashings with vertical extension/drip leg extending a minimum of 4 inches over flashing terminations as indicated.

a. Material: Smooth surfaced formed aluminum alloy in thickness as determined by fabricator to comply with indicated performance but not less than .050 inch.

b. Break-Forming:

1.) Vertical drip leg extension shall be break formed to fit manufactured curb furnished under Section 07 54 00, Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO).

2.) Horizontal removable cap shall be fabricated with vertical drip legs to extend over vertical extension and shall be break formed to provide an overhanging outlet for line sets and power conduits.

c. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating system. d. Face Height: 18 inch minimum above roof surface as indicated or as required

for piping and conduit requirements. e. Attachment: Neoprene washered mechanical fasteners.

2. Provide the following accessories:

a. Fiberglass batt insulation to infill curb and portal cover as indicated. b. Uni-strut framing to mount disconnect switch to top housing at island cooler

condenser only. c. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be as provided or recommended by fabricator and

roofing system manufacturer. d. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic,

nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

3. Provide sealant per requirements of Section 07 90 00.

H. TPO coated sheet metal shall be furnished in profile indicated for roof edge flashing and fascia located at low end side of Walk-in Cooler/Freezer box.


2.5 ALUMINUM COPING COVER & FASCIA SYSTEMS

A. Use only the specified products of the following manufacturers for stock items indicated:

MANUFACTURER COPING PRODUCT FASCIA PRODUCT

1. Metal-Era, Inc., Perma-Tite Coping Perma-Tite Fascia 1600 Airport Road System 200 Waukesha, WI 53188

(800) 558-2162 2. IMETCO ES-C Coping ES-F Fascia

4648 S. Old Peachtree Road Norcross, GA 30071 (800) 646-3826

3. W.P. Hickman Company Permasnap Coping Single Ply Fascia 9 Hickman Drive Asheville, NC 28803 (800) 892-9173

B. Characteristics:

1. Material: Smooth surfaced formed aluminum alloy in thickness as determined by manufacturer to comply with indicated performance but not less than .050 inch.

2. Roll-Forming: Front and back drip legs shall be factory roll-formed. 3. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating system. 4. Face Height: 6 inch minimum as indicated. 5. Lengths: 12’-0” minimum or as long as practical to minimize joints. 6. Joints: Concealed splice plates in accordance with manufacturer’s product data.

C. Accessories:

1. Splice Plates: Minimum .032 inch thick aluminum sheet, 6 inch minimum length, continuous with front and rear legs and with extruded butyl seal for concealed installation in finish to match coping.

2. Anchor Plate: Galvanized steel of manufacturer’s FM approved standard design. 3. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be as provided or recommended by coping system

manufacturer. 4. Prefabricated sections: Factory assembled, continuously welded, mitered corners

and continuously welded transitions shall match copings in design and finish. 5. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally

free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

2.6 COUNTER FLASHINGS

A. 2-Piece Counter Flashings:

1. Provide two-piece sheet metal counter flashings as indicated at all base flashing conditions where membrane roofing is flashed vertical wall or where coping is flashed to stepped parapet wall.

a. Form two-piece counter flashing receptor with horizontal flange to fit into saw-cut joint in masonry or vertical flange to fit under EIFS drainage strip.

b. Horizontal flange shall extend into previously prepared sawcut made in masonry bed joint and securely anchored using lead shim and sealant.

c. Vertical flange shall extend above EIFS drainage strip and be securely anchored to solid blocking using fasteners approved by manufacturer.


d. Angle exposed end of horizontal or vertical flange out ¾ inch at 45 degrees and double back hem ¾ inch to form a reglet to receive flange of lower two-piece counter flashing.

e. Form second piece cover leg of counter flashing as indicated to extend down over base flashing.

1.) Break and fold over top edge of lower component ¾ inch at 45 degrees to insert into double back hem of reglet.

2.) Pop-rivet two-piece reglet and lower component flange together to form a solid unit capable of future removal by drilling out rivets.

3.) Provide break in face of lower component to ensure compression against base flashing and fold bottom edge of vertical flange out ½ inch at a 45 degree angle to form a hemmed drip.

f. Face height of counter flashing shall cover TPO base flashing a minimum of 4 inches plus the drip.

2. Form counter flashings in 10-foot lengths except where shorter pieces are required and provide shop fabricated closures at ends of counter flashing runs to return to face of wall.


2.7 ALUMINUM CANOPY BASE FLASHING

A. Base Flashings:

1. Provide sheet metal base flashings as indicated at all conditions where aluminum sheet metal roofing is flashed to a vertical masonry wall.

a. Form base flashing with horizontal flange to fit into saw-cut joint in masonry. b. Horizontal flange shall extend into previously prepared sawcut made in

masonry bed joint and securely anchored using lead shim and sealant. c. Vertical flange shall extend downward to surface of aluminum sheet metal

roof and embedded in sealant or mastic to seal flat to the masonry wall. d. Form horizontal leg of base flashing as indicated to extend over surface of

aluminum sheet metal roof and embed leg in sealant or mastic to seal flat to top surface of roof.

e. Face height and horizontal extension of base flashing shall extend vertically on wall and horizontally on roof 4 inches.

2. Form base flashings in 10-foot lengths except where shorter pieces are required and provide shop fabricated closures at ends of counter flashing runs to return to face of wall.


2.8 HEAD DRIP FLASHINGS

A. Aluminum Window and Door Head Drip Flashings:

1. Provide sheet metal drip flashing at all aluminum curtain wall windows, entry doors, automatic entry doors and serving window heads and dissimilar construction.

a. Form drip flashing with horizontal leg to fit below wall framing prior to installation of window and shim blocking as indicated.

1.) A vertical flange shall be provided wherever possible to extend a minimum of 1 ¼” up the wall and be anchored to wall construction.


2.) Horizontal flange shall be bent down to form a sealant pocket as indicated and finished with a ½” minimum hemmed drip.

b. Coordinate fabrication with requirements of applicable Sections of Division 8.

B. Form flashings in 10-foot lengths except where shorter pieces are required and finish in high performance organic coating to match aluminum frames.

C. Provide backer rod and sealant per requirements of Section 07 90 00.

D. Coordinate for installation prior to installation of rigid foam core wall sheathing.

2.9 ROOF EDGE BLOCK CLADDING

A. Cladding at exposed wood roof edges associated with EIFS finishes:

1. Provide sheet metal cladding at all exposed wood roof edge blocking at top of all EIFS finishes to conceal and finish underside blocking.

a. Form angle shaped cladding with horizontal leg to fit below and fasten to underside and vertical leg to fasten into face of wood roof edge blocking prior to installation of EIFS insulation board and coping cover as indicated.

1.) A vertical flange shall be provided to extend a minimum of 1 1/2" up the face of the 2 x wood blocking and be face anchored to the wood using non-corrosive fasteners.

2.) Horizontal flange shall be broken back to cover exposed horizontal surface of wood blocking and be face anchored behind EIFS finish plane using non-corrosive fasteners.

b. Coordinate fabrication with requirements of Sections 06 10 0 and 07 24 00.

B. Form cladding in 10-foot lengths except where shorter pieces are required and finish in high performance organic coating to match manufactured sheet metal coping covers.

C. Form shop fabricated corner pieces with clean, 90-degree corners where blocking changes direction.

D. Provide backer rod and sealant per requirements of Section 07 90 00.

E. Coordinate for installation prior to installation of EIFS insulation embedment.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.

1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. 2. Do not proceed with flashing or sheet metal work until unsatisfactory conditions

are corrected.

B. Verify that sawcut masonry reglets, blocking and sheathing to receive sheet metal items are installed properly and free of excess moisture, debris or defects.

C. Coordinate items to be shop fabricated with related items to ensure dimensional compatibility and clearances.


3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENT AND VERIFICATION

A. Before ordering sheet metal, verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered by making and recording all necessary field measurements.

B. Determine lengths of runs and other required dimensions to avoid delays in production and installation.

C. Ensure that all substrates are properly prepared, free of distortions that could effect finished sheet metal appearance and that all ice and water dam membrane installations are complete before commencing with flashing and sheet metal work.

3.3 WORKMANSHIP

A. Screws, bolts and similar fastenings required for proper installation and anchorage of work shall be type best suited for application, intended purpose and shall be non-corrosive.

B. Keep work straight during erection.

1. Free from buckles, dents, twists, warps, waves or unfinished edges. 2. Without fastening stresses or distortions. 3. Reinforce all edges and anchoring points if required to maintain alignment.

C. Patching of work will not be permitted and if damage occurs, entire piece shall be removed and replaced with new material.

D. Do not allow ferrous and non-ferrous metals to come into contact with each other.

1. Aluminum in direct contact with masonry, steel or other dissimilar metals shall receive a protective coating of bituminous paint.

2. Provide minimum of 7.5 mil. Thickness on each contact surface.

3.4 SEAMING

A. Field joints in aluminum .040-inch and thinner shall be made mechanically.

B. All seams and joints shall be lapped in direction of water flow.

3.5 GENERAL FLASHING

A. Sheet metal flashings indicated shall be provided as required to produce a watertight installation.

B. Joints shall be lapped, riveted, welded, locked or sealed as conditions warrant.

C. Provide all accessories as required for proper installation.

3.6 PREFABRICATED COPING AND FASCIA INSTALLATION

A. Install coping and fascia systems in accord with manufacturer’s product data and approved shop drawings.

B. Install anchor plates with concealed fasteners at spacing as recommended by manufacturer.


C. Install concealed splice plates at coping and fascia intersections.

D. Snap copings and fascia covers into place over anchor plates and splice plates, with minimum ¼ inch wide joints over splice plate intersections.

E. Set copings and fascia cover over splice plates with extruded butyl tape, ½ inch from intersection edges.

F. Provide weather-tight fit, allowing for expansion and contraction.

3.7 COUNTER FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install base flashings in coordination with TPO roofing requirements.

B. Provide shop formed inside and outside corners and concealed splice plates at all joints.

C. Install metal receptor portion of two-piece counter flashings at locations and to profile indicated on drawings.

1. Where counter flashing terminates in reglet joint in masonry wall, horizontal bent flange shall extend into sawcut joint a minimum of 1 ½ -inch.

a. Complete installation in joint by inserting lead wedges for tight, solid fit. b. Fill joint with continuous backer rod and sealant of color to match adjacent

masonry mortar.

2. Securely anchor receptor by nailing where counter flashing terminates on equipment curb as indicated.

D. Insert vertical face flanges of two-piece counter flashings into receptor hems and pop rivet at 8-inch centers.

1. Counter flashing shall provide spring action against base flashing when installation is complete.

2. Seal pop rivet holes with sealant as specified in Section 07 90 00.

3.8 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install base flashings in coordination with fixed aluminum canopy.

B. Provide shop formed inside and outside corners and concealed splice plates at all joints.

C. Install upper horizontal metal portion of base flashing at locations and to profile indicated.

1. Terminate base flashing in reglet joint in masonry wall with horizontal bent flange extending into sawcut joint a minimum of 1 ½ -inch.

a. Complete installation in joint by inserting lead wedges for tight, solid fit. b. Fill joint with continuous backer rod and sealant of color to match adjacent

masonry mortar.

D. Seal vertical and horizontal legs of base flashing to masonry walls and to top surface of aluminum canopy roof.

3.9 WINDOW AND DOOR HEAD DRIP FLASHING

A. Coordinate installation of window and door head drip flashing with installation of units, soffit panels and metal wall panel system work.


B. Sheet metal head flashings shall be installed prior to installation of window and door frames with horizontal flange fastened securely to window header.

C. Cut flashing to exact length of head members.

1. Where head member length is greater than flashing length provide sufficient overlap of aluminum flashing to prevent water infiltration.

2. Align joints symmetrically about centerline of head frame and minimize number of splices.

D. Install sealant components as specified in Section 07 90 00 after installation of window frames keeping flashing straight and in proper alignment with head frames.

3.10 ROOF EDGE BLOCK CLADDING

A. Coordinate installation of cladding with installation of roof edge blocking and EIFS work.

B. Sheet metal cladding shall be installed and fastened to substrate blocking prior to embedment EIFS insulation board over fiberglass faced gypsum substrate.

C. Cut cladding to exact length of exposed wood blocking above EIFS work.

1. Where blocking length is greater than cladding length provide sufficient overlap of aluminum flashing to prevent water infiltration.

2. Align joints symmetrically about centerline of blocking runs and minimize number of splices.

3. Provide shop fabricated corners where blocking changes direction.

D. Install sealant components as specified in Section 07 90 00 after installation of window frames keeping flashing straight and in proper alignment with head frames.

3.11 ADJUST & CLEANING

A. Examine completed work for damage and conformance with contract documents.

B. Remove damaged pieces and replace with new, materials meeting requirements of the specification.

C. Completed work shall be cleaned as in accordance with sheet metal manufacturer's instructions and left free of stains, discoloration and sharp edges.

D. Remove all scrap and debris and dispose of off site and leave all work areas clean.

END 07 62 00.

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 84 00 – FIRESTOPPING

FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide coordination of firestopping penetrations on entire project. 2. Each subcontractor provide:

a. Firestopping of own penetrations through wall assemblies. b. Firestopping of own penetrations through ceiling assemblies.

3. Coordinate all work related to this Section with the Base Fire Department Office prior to construction of fire resistive assemblies and installation of firestopping products.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Concrete Work. 3. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 4. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 6. Section 08 10 00 – Metal Doors & Frames. 7. Section 08 31 00 – Access Doors. 8. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 9. Division 21 – Fire Protection. 10. Division 22 – Plumbing. 11. Division 23 – HVAC. 12. Division 26 – Electrical. 13. Division 27 – Communications. 14. Division 28 – Alarms & Surveillance.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for construction and sealing perimeters of and penetrations through fire rated wall assemblies and fire rated ceiling assemblies as indicated herein and specified in Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Drywall Systems.


A. Provide Firestopping systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified under paragraph for Performance Requirements.

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified, testing and inspection agency such as UL or other agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Firestopping products shall bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency.

B. Engage an experienced installer who is certified, licensed or otherwise qualified by the Firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install firestop products per specified requirements.

C. Obtain firestop systems for each type of penetration or joint opening and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer.


1.4 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Fire Test Requirements:

1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

a. ANSI/UL 1479, “Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops”. b. ANSI/UL 2079, “Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems”. c. ANSI/UL 263, “Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials”. d. ANSI/UL 723, “Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”.

2. America Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. ASTM E-814, “Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops”. b. ASTM E-1966, “Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems”. c. ASTM E-119, “Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials”. d. ASTM E-84, “Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”.

B. References:

1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL “Fire Resistance Directory”.

a. Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) b. Joint Systems (XHBN) c. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW) d. Firestop Devices (XHJI) e. Forming Materials (XHKU) f. Wall Opening Protective Materials (CLIV)

2. All major building codes:

a. National Building Code published by BOCA. b. International Building Code published by ICC.

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) of Quincy, MA “NFPA 101: Life Safety Code”.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) of Quincy, MA “NFPA 70: National Electrical Code”.

C. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. Provide products that upon curing, do not re-emulsify, dissolve, leach, breakdown or otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to atmospheric moisture, sweating pipes, ponding water or other forms of moisture characteristic during and after construction.

2. Provide firestop sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate motion such as pipe vibration, water hammer, thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to the seal.

3. Pipe insulation shall not be removed, cut away or otherwise interrupted through wall or floor openings and provide products appropriately tested for the thickness and type of insulation utilized.

4. Openings within walls and floors designed to accommodate communication and data cabling shall be provided with re-enterable products specifically designed for retrofit.

5. Penetrants passing through fire-resistance rated ceiling assemblies contained within chase wall assemblies shall be protected.

a. Provide products tested by being fully exposed to the fire outside of the chase wall.


b. Systems within the UL Fire Resistance Directory that meet this criterion are identified with the words “Chase Wall Optional”.

6. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate movement such as thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to the seal.

7. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants designed to accommodate a specific range of movement and tested for this purpose in accordance with a cyclic movement test criteria as outlined in Standards, ASTM E-1399, ASTM E-1966 or ANSI/ UL 2079.

8. Provide fire-resistive joint systems subjected to an air leakage test conducted in accordance with Standard, ANSI/UL2079 with published L-Ratings for ambient and elevated temperatures as evidence of the ability of the fire-resistive joint system to restrict the movement of smoke.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of firestopping product indicated.

B. System Drawings: Submit documentation from a qualified third-party testing agency that is applicable to each firestopping system configuration for construction, joint opening width and/or penetrating items.

C. Product Certificates: Certificate of conformance signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that products comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.

A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturer’s labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture and the following in accord with 01 65 00 and 01 66 00:

1. Lot number. 2. Shelf life, where applicable. 3. Qualified testing and inspection agency’s classification marking. 4. Mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials for firestopping products to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants or other causes.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping products that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping products manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials.

C. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.


A. Subject to compliance with through-penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) and/or joint systems (XHBN) listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below:


1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) Somerville, New Jersey (800) 992-1180

2. Other manufacturers listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. General: Use only firestopping products that have been tested for specific fire-resistance-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type or joint opening width and movement capabilities, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.

B. Latex Sealants: Single component latex formulations that upon cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSS Intumescent Sealant. 2. (STI) SpecSeal Series LCI Intumescent Sealant. 3. (STI) SpecSeal Series LC Endothermic Sealant. 4. (STI) SpecSeal Series AS Elastomeric Spray. 5. (STI) SpecSeal Series ES Elastomeric Sealant.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled steel collars lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific outside diameter of penetrating item, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSC Firestop Collars. 2. (STI) SpecSeal Series LCC Firestop Collars.

D. Wall Opening Protective Materials: Intumescent, non-curing pads or inserts for protection of electrical switch and receptacle boxes to reduce horizontal separation to less than 24”, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSP Firestop Putty Pads. 2. (STI) SpecSeal Series EP PowerShield Insert Pads.

E. Firestop Putty: Intumescent, non-hardening, water resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers or silicone compounds, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSP Firestop Putty.

F. Firestop Pillows: Re-enterable, non-curing, mineral fiber core encapsulated with an intumescent coating contained in a flame retardant poly bag, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSB Firestop Pillows.

G. Mortar: Portland cement based dry-mix product formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a non-shrinking, water-resistant, homogenous mortar, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSM Firestop Mortar.

H. Silicone Sealants: Moisture curing, single component, silicone elastomeric sealant for horizontal surfaces (pourable or non-sag) or vertical surface (non-sag), the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) Pensil 300 Silicone Sealant. 2. (STI) Pensil 300 SL Self-Leveling Silicone Sealant.

I. Silicone Foam: Multi-component, silicone-based liquid elastomers, that when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam, the following products are acceptable:


1. (STI) Pensil 200 Silicone Foam.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examination of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

B. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, scale, laitance, rust, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may inhibit optimum adhesion.

C. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials.

D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FIRESTOPPING INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in accordance with “Performance Criteria” Article and in accordance with the conditions of testing and classification as specified in the published design.

B. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of firestopping products.

1. Seal all openings or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal.

2. Consult with appropriate subcontractor prior to installation of through-penetration firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.

3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. 4. Apply a suitable bond-breaker to prevent three-sided adhesion in applications

where this condition might occur such as the intersection of a gypsum wallboard/steel stud wall to floor or roof assembly where the joint is backed by a steel ceiling runner or track.

5. Where joint application is exposed to the elements, fire-resistive joint sealant must be approved by manufacturer for use in exterior applications and shall comply with ASTM C-920, “Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants”.


A. Inspections: Contractor shall inspect or, at Contracting Officer or designated representative direction as an additional cost, engage a qualified independent inspection agency to inspect through-penetration firestop systems.

B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Where deficiencies are found, repair or firestopping products so they comply with requirements.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.

B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed openings to be free of excess firestopping materials and soiling as work progresses.

END 07 84 00.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 90 00 – BUILDING JOINT SEALERS

BUILDING JOINT SEALERS 07 90 00-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All sealing of exterior building joints. b. All sealing and caulking of interior building joints. c. All joint fillers and accessories indicated and herein specified.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. All Sections of the Specifications.


A. Qualifications of installers: Employ only experienced craftsmen, skilled in the installation of specified products.

B. Contractor shall select one manufacturer for all exposed sealants and caulking.

1. Coordinate purchase of sealants and caulking with individual subcontractors so that each trade will furnish compatible products of the selected manufacturer.

2. Coordinate installation with individual subcontractors so that methods and colors for all exposed sealants and caulking will match.

C. Color(s) will be selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from standard range of colors available from manufacturer selected by Contractor.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Industry standards as set forth by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

B. Manufacturer's Catalogs: The acceptable manufacturer's catalogs, current at date of bidding documents, are incorporated by reference to the same force and effect as if repeated herein at length.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and applicable technical Sections.

B. Product data:

1. Materials description. 2. Manufacturer's current printed installation instructions for each product.

C. Samples: Each compound and joint filler for color selection.



A. Deliver all products in manufacturer's original containers, with seals unbroken, labels, product and manufacturer's names intact and legible.

B. Store all products in a manner to prevent damage, in a secure place, out of way of construction operations and provide protection until ready for use.

C. Handle in accord with manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Environmental conditions:

1. Weather: Do not install products during adverse weather conditions. 2. Temperature: Ensure that surface and ambient temperatures are within the range

recommended by the manufacturer.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule work to coincide with work of other subcontractors.

B. Perform work of this Section as soon as possible after permanent installation of products requiring joint sealants.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES

A. Use only the specified products of the following manufacturers:

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. BASF BASF Construction Chemicals Beachwood, OH

2. DOW DOW Chemical Co. Midland, MI

3. GE GE Silicones Waterford, NY

4. MEAD W.R. Meadows, Inc. Elgin, IL

5. PECO Pecora Chemical Corp. Harleysville, PA

6. TREM Tremco Manufacturing Co. Cleveland, OH

7. WIL Williams Products Inc. Troy, MI

2.2 SEALANTS

A. Generic description and use:

1. S-1: One component urethane, non-sag, gun grade elastomeric sealant.

a. Use in all joints one-inch wide or less wherever movement may occur, at contraction and expansion joints.

b. Designed for joints in metal to metal, sheet metal to masonry or concrete, masonry to masonry, E.I.F.S. to E.I.F.S., E.I.F.S. to masonry or concrete and wherever manufacturer recommends use.


2. S-2: Two component urethane, non-sag, gun grade elastomeric sealant for use in all joints wherever movement may occur in locations indicated for S-1 sealant.

3. S-3: One component acetoxy silicone sealant, gun grade for use in glazing joints wherever glazing manufacturer recommends use and in shop fabricated sheet metal joints where recommended.

a. Do not use this sealant for masonry or other applications.

B. Contractor shall coordinate with subcontractors for selection of one of the following specified sealants for use on entire Project.

C. Acceptable products:

MFGR/TYPE S-1 S-2 S-3

1. BASF MasterSeal NP1 MasterSeal NP2 2. DOW 791 Silicone 3. GE SCS2000 4. MEAD Pourthane NS 5. PECO Dynatrol I Dynatrol II 895 Silicone 6. TREM Dymonic Dymeric

D. Color: Provide color as selected by Contracting Officer for specific locations and to match adjacent materials.

2.3 CAULKS

A. Provide caulking materials as specified for interior use only.

B. Generic description:

1. C-1: One part butyl gun grade. 2. C-2: One part acrylic gun grade.


MFGR/TYPE C-1 C-2

1. PECO Butyl BC 158 AC20 acrylic latex 2. TREM Butyl sealant 400/500 Acrylic latex calk

2.4 JOINT FILLERS

A. Generic description and use:

1. JF-1: Backer rod for elastomeric sealants.

a. Extruded closed-cell polyethylene foam or polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam.

b. Non-bleeding, non-staining, oversized 30 to 50 percent.

B. Acceptable products:

MFGR/TYPE JF-1

1. BASF MasterSeal 920 2. DOW Ethafoam 3. MEAD Backer Rod 4. WIL Expand-O-Foam

2.5 JOINT CLEANER


A. Joint Cleaner: Type recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing compound for the specific joint surface and condition.

2.6 BOND BREAKER

A. Bond Breaker: Polyethylene tape; pressure sensitive recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application where joint depth is limited and backer rod cannot be used.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Thoroughly inspect all existing construction and the conditions under which the work will be performed and report to the Contracting Officer or designated representative all conditions that would adversely affect installation of the work.

B. Verify that all joint dimensions are in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of construction and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare and size joints in accord with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Remove all loose materials and foreign matter using compressed air. 2. Proof areas to ensure that joint is free of all materials that might impair adhesion of

sealant or caulking.

B. Prior to installing sealants in horizontal joints where asphalt impregnated expansion joint fillers or other non-polyethylene joint fillers have already been placed, cut filler to 1 inch below surface of concrete and install polyethylene tape directly over the cut edge.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Install bond breaker tape wherever recommended by manufacturer to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly.

C. Install sealants and caulking in uniform, continuous ribbons, without gaps or air pockets.

1. Ensure complete "wetting" of the joints. 2. Bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. 3. Fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces.

D. Install sealants to depths indicated or when not indicated, within the following limitations:

1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75 percent of joint width, but not more than 3/4” deep or less than 3/8” deep.

2. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to depth equal to 50 percent of joint width but not more than 1/2” deep or less than 1/4” deep.

3. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking compounds, fill joints to a depth in the range of 75 percent to 125 percent of joint width.

E. Spillage:


1. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces. 2. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining

surfaces.

3.4 CURING

A. Cure sealant compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.

3.5 ADJUST & CLEAN

A. Upon completion, carefully examine all sealant and caulking work.

1. Remove all damaged and defective work. 2. Replace defective work with new materials.

B. Clean up and remove all surplus products, containers and rubbish and dispose of off site.

C. Remove all spilled or spattered materials from all surfaces.

1. When adjacent surfaces or other work has been damaged or stained as a result of sealing work, repair all damage.

2. Remove all stains to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed work during remainder of construction period.

B. Ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal wear or weathering) at substantial completion.

3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Sealants:

1. Use for all exterior applications where joint filling is required such as:

a. Between masonry and door and window frames. b. Between masonry to masonry joints. c. Between metal to metal joints. d. Between metal and door and window frame head flashings. e. Between metals and other dissimilar materials. f. Between dissimilar finish materials.

2. Bed all thresholds. 3. At contraction and expansion joints. 4. At other locations noted on drawings or where joint filling is required to provide a

weather tight seal between materials.

B. Caulking:

1. At all interior joints.

a. Between countertops and walls. b. Between dissimilar finish materials.

2. At other locations noted on drawings or where joint filling is required to provide neat appearance and transition between materials.

END 07 90 00.

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 11 00 – METAL DOORS & FRAMES

METAL DOORS & FRAMES 08 11 00-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Items of hollow metal work and accessories indicated including:

1.) Standard hollow metal frames. 2.) Standard insulated exterior hollow metal doors. 3.) Anchors, strike boxes, mortar guards and accessories required for

proper installation of doors and frames. 4.) Stops required for proper installation of glazing in doors and frames. 5.) Reinforcement for finish hardware. 6.) Solid grouting of all interior and exterior hollow metal frames. 7.) Mortising door head to receive magnetic contact switches.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 3. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 4. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 5. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry. 6. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping. 7. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 8. Section 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors. 9. Section 08 71 00 – Finish Hardware. 10. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 11. Section 09 30 00 – Tile. 12. Section 09 65 00 – Resilient Tile Flooring. 13. Section 09 77 00 – Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels. 14. Section 09 90 00 – Painting. 15. Division 26 – Electrical.

B. Coordination of mortised magnetic switches for door frames indicated.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with provisions of the “Americans with Disabilities Act”. 2. Department of Defense, “Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards” (UFAS).

B. References:

1. Steel Door Institute (SDI), “Standard Steel Doors and Frames Fact File”, S.D.I. 100 series of Standards.

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI), “A250” series of Standards. 3. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) Division of the National

Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers Association (NAAMA), “The Hollow Metal Manual”, HMMA-800 series Standards.


4. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), for rolled steel sheet and zinc-coating.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop drawings shall indicate item type, size and location, dimensional elevations, materials and thickness, reinforcements, methods of securing items to adjoining construction, jointing details, methods of assembly and hardware locations.

2. All hollow metal doors and frames furnished for project shall be products of one manufacturer and shall be compatible with each other for hardware locations and reinforcements.


A. In accord with Section 01 66 00.

2. PRODUCTS


A. Black Mountain Door.

B. Ceco.

C. Steelcraft.

D. Pioneer Industries.

E. Republic.

F. Curries.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Hardware locations: Mounting heights for hardware shall be in accord with Table V of Steel Door Institute “Technical Data Series” S.D.I. 100-80, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Doors shall be made of commercial quality; level cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A-366 and free of scale, pitting or other surface defects.

1. Standard doors:

a. Face sheets for all standard doors shall be not less than 16-gauge. b. All doors shall have zinc coating of not less than 0.30 ounces per square foot. c. All doors shall be factory primed to receive field finish. d. All standard exterior doors shall be provided with core insulation material

filling entire cavity and chemically bonded to all interior surfaces.

C. Hollow metal frames for all openings shall be made of commercial grade cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM Designation A366.

1. Standard exterior frames:

a. Frames shall be 14-gauge. b. Frames shall have zinc coating of not less than 0.30 ounces per square foot. c. Frames shall be factory primed to receive field finish d. Interior surfaces of frames shall be factory coated with 10 mils coating of

asphalt emulsion paint after priming.

2. Standard interior frames:

a. Frames shall be 16-gauge. b. Frames shall have zinc coating of not less than 0.30 ounces per square foot.


c. Frames shall be factory primed to receive field finish. d. Interior surfaces of frames shall be factory coated with 10 mils coating of

asphalt emulsion paint after priming.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Standard Doors:

1. Doors shall be strong, rigid and neat in appearance, free from warpage or buckles. 2. Corner bends shall be true and straight, of minimum radius for gauge of metal

used. 3. Doors shall be types and sizes shown on reviewed and approved Shop Drawings

with no visible seams or joints on faces or vertical edges. 4. Minimum door thickness shall be 1-3/4 inches. 5. Face sheets shall be stiffened by 22 gauge formed steel sections continuously

spanning full thickness of door, spaced 6 inches on center and spot welded to both faces at 5 inches on center or kraft paper honey-comb core laminated to both faces or foamed polyurethane core bonded to both faces.

a. Spaces between steel stiffeners shall be sound deadened and insulated full height with an inorganic non-combustible material.

b. At exterior locations, core insulating material shall be polyurethane foam providing the following thermal characteristics:

1.) U Factor: 0.067. 2.) R Value: 14.97.

6. Door faces shall be joined at vertical edges by spot weld or mechanical interlock extending full height and all seams shall be ground, filled and dressed smooth to make them invisible and provide a smooth flush surface.

7. Top and bottom edges of all doors shall be closed with a continuous recessed steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending full width of door and spot welded to bottom face and adhesive bonded and/or mechanically interlocked to top face.

a. Exterior doors shall have an additional flush steel closing channel at top edge.

b. Openings shall be provided in bottom closure of exterior doors to permit escape of entrapped moisture.

8. Vertical edges of doors shall be beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 9. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at factory for fully templated

hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware manufacturer.

a. Hinge reinforcements shall be not less than 8 gauge plates securely welded to reinforcing grid.

b. Mortise lock, cylinder lock, head and foot bolt reinforcements shall be not less than 14 gauge plates securely welded to reinforcement grid.

c. Door closer reinforcements shall be not less than 12 gauge plates. d. Reinforcements for push/pull surface mounted hardware and panic devices

shall be not less than 14 gauge plates. e. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, doors shall have

reinforcing plates only with all drilling and tapping done by others.

10. Where specified or shown, doors shall be provided with hollow metal moldings to secure glazing.


a. Fixed stops shall occur on outside of exterior doors and secure side of interior doors.

b. Loose stops shall be not less than 20-gauge with butt corner joints.

11. After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be dressed, filled and sanded as required to make all faces and vertical edges smooth, level and free of all irregularities.

a. All doors shall have zinc coating of not less than 0.30 ounces per square foot. b. All doors shall then be chemically treated to insure maximum paint adhesion. c. Coat all doors on all exposed surfaces with a rust-inhibitive primer that is fully

cured before shipment.

B. Standard Frames:

1. Frames shall be welded units with integral trim, of sizes and shapes shown on reviewed shop drawings.

a. Knocked-down frames will not be accepted. b. Furnish integral sidelight frames at doors indicated on drawings.

2. Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects, warp or buckle.

3. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight and of uniform profile throughout their length.

4. Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends shall be as indicated and shown on reviewed shop drawings.

5. Corner joints shall have all contact edges closed tight, with trim faces mitered, and continuously welded and stops butted.

a. Gussets will not be permitted.

6. Minimum depth of stops shall be 5/8 inch. 7. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at factory for fully

templated mortised hardware only, in accord with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware contractor.

a. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only; all drilling and tapping shall be done by others.

b. Hinge reinforcement plates shall be not less than 8 gauge or equivalent number of threads, 1-1/4 inches by 10 inches or 1-1/2 inches by 9 inches, securely welded to frame.

c. Closer reinforcement plates not less than 12 gauge, securely welded to frame.

d. Strike and flush bolt reinforcements not less than 16 gauge, securely welded to frame.

e. Reinforcements for all other surface mounted hardware shall be not less than 12 gauge, securely welded to frame.

8. Floor anchors shall be securely welded inside each jamb with two holes provided at each jamb for floor anchorage.

a. Floor anchors shall be designed to extend under threshold at exterior doors or otherwise provide access for installation in existing walls.

b. If access is provided, permanently close openings in field and patch so that access panel is inconspicuous and completely hidden upon completion of finishes.

9. Jamb Anchors:


a. Frames for installation in masonry walls shall be provided with standard masonry “T” anchors.

b. Frames for installation in metal stud partitions shall be provided with standard metal stud anchors.

c. Provide 3 anchors for each jamb on frames up to 7 feet 6 inches high and 4 anchors for taller frames.

10. Dust cover boxes (or mortar guards) of not thinner than 26-gauge steel shall be provided at all hardware mortises on frames.

11. All frames shall be provided with steel spreader temporarily attached to feet of both jambs to serve as brace during shipping and handling.

12. Loose glazing stops shall be of cold rolled steel, not less than 20 gauge thickness, butted at corner joints and secured to interior side of frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-plated screws.

13. After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be removed and exposed faces of all welded joints shall be dressed smooth.

a. All frames shall have zinc coating of not less than 0.30 ounces per square foot on all surfaces.

b. All frames shall be chemically treated to insure maximum paint adhesion. c. All frames shall then be chemically coated on all surfaces with a rust-

inhibitive primer that is fully cured before shipment. d. Prime inside surfaces of all loose stops, as well as frame area covered by

stops.

2.4 SHOP PAINTING

A. Thoroughly clean all galvanized metal surfaces of loose scale, shavings, filings, dirt and other deleterious materials by use of wire brushes or other effective means. Remove grease and oil by solvent cleaning.

B. Chemically treat all surfaces to assure maximum paint adherence.

1. Apply zinc chromate primer baked on in shop; brush coat touch-up in field. 2. Cover all surfaces uniformly without runs, smears or bare spots.

C. Paint inside surfaces of all removable stops, as well as frame area covered by stops.

D. All frames shall be coated on inside with an approved asphalt emulsion paint prior to erection, minimum dry film thickness of 10 mils.

2.5 DOOR SILENCERS

A. Furnish grey rubber door silencers for all hollow metal frames, three for each single door and two for each double door without a mullion.

B. Apply to jamb stop strip for single doors, three per door, and to header stop strip for double doors, one per door.

2.6 CLEARANCES

A. Edge clearances shall be provided as follows:

1. Between doors and frames at head and jambs, not more than 1/8 inch. 2. Between door and floor, 3/4 inch. 3. Between meeting edges of pairs of doors, not more than 1/4 inch except fire doors

not more than 1/8 inch.

B. Provide all interior door jambs in depths to allow a minimum ½ inch return of frame to finish material on either side of door opening.


3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify that door frames are of type required for door and are installed as required for proper installation of doors.

B. Do not install doors in frames that would hinder operation of doors.

C. Prior to installation, verify that all frames have been coated on the inside with asphalt emulsion paint as stipulated in this Section.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMES

A. Set hollow metal frames accurately in location; in alignment, plumb, straight and true.

B. Brace frames as required to prevent displacement.

1. Provide spread at mid-height where height of frame dictates. 2. Shim frames plumb in existing concrete openings.

C. Adjust frame placement in interior wall installations to ensure the specified ½ inch return to finish materials on either side of opening.

D. Anchor door frames, through bottom angle, to floor with bolts or power fasteners.

E. Install frame anchors at standard hollow metal frames at 2 feet 6 inches maximum spacing but not less than 3 anchors per jamb.

1. Coordinate installation of jamb anchors as required with other trades for proper installation with their work.

2. Verify that all frames have been coated on the inside with asphalt emulsion paint as stipulated.

F. Install frame anchors at blast resistant frames by field welding legs of clip angles to reinforcing channels within frame and to structural steel jamb and head framing as indicated.

G. Grout all frames solid during installation as anchors are installed in new wall construction.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. Install hollow metal doors in frames after walls are finished and chance of construction damage is minimal.

B. Apply necessary hardware for hanging doors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Drill and tap for machine screws as required. 2. Do not use self-tapping sheet metal screws. 3. Install reinforcing plates as required for proper installation of hardware items.

C. Remove and replace doors that are found to be warped, bowed or otherwise damaged or which cannot be properly fitted in frames.

D. Adjust doors to provide uniform clearances at heads, jambs and floor as indicated below and to contact stops uniformly.

1. Head clearance – 1/16 inch. 2. Lock jamb clearance – 1/8 inch. 3. Hinge jamb clearance – 1/16 inch. 4. Floor clearance – 3/4 inch.


E. At completion of installation, doors shall be undamaged and at all surfaces shall be in satisfactory condition for finishing.


A. Replace and rehang doors that are hinge-bound and do not swing or operate freely.

B. Refinish or replace job finished doors damaged during installation.

C. Fill Anchorage and Grout Holes:

1. Plug and fill all holes for grouting, sand smooth and spot prime ready for final finishes.

2. Filled areas shall not be visible to the naked eye.

D. Protect doors and frames from damage before, during and after finishing.

END 08 11 00

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 14 16 – FLUSH WOOD DOORS

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Non-rated flush wood doors with factory installed finish. b. Stops required for proper installation of glazing in doors. c. Factory preparation of all doors to receive finish hardware. d. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for

complete installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry. 4. Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors & Frames. 5. Section 08 71 00 – Finish Hardware. 6. Section 08 81 00 – Glass & Glazing. 7. Section 09 30 00 – Tile. 8. Section 09 65 00 – Resilient Tile Flooring. 9. Section 09 90 00 – Painting.

B. Related hollow metal frames shall be furnished per Section 08 11 00 and installed by Contractor.

C. Related door finish hardware shall be furnished and installed on factory prepared and finished doors by Contractor per Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware.

D. Related door lites shall be furnished per Section 08 81 00, Glass & Glazing.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Extent and location of each type of wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules.

B. Factory finishing of doors with high pressure plastic laminate is included in this Section.

C. Factory preparation for hardware and factory pre-machining for hardware for wood doors is included in this Section.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Flush Wood Doors:

1. WDMA I.S. 1A – Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA). 2. AWI – Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). 3. ASTM E90-90 – Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building

Partitions.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


A. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including:

1. Details of core and edge construction. 2. Fire rating information for rated doors. 3. Details of trim for lite openings. 4. Manufacturer’s data sheets, completely describing door construction, WDMA I.S. 1A

and AWI Classification.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating:

1. Location of each door. 2. Elevation of each kind of door illustrating type and size. 3. Details of construction including location and extent of hardware blocking. 4. Indicate fire ratings.

a. Neutral Pressure Testing. b. Positive Testing.

5. Requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. 6. For factory pre-machined doors, indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for

locksets and other cutouts adjacent to lite openings.

C. Samples: Submit samples for verification purposes in color and pattern indicated.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Company specializing in manufacturing products specified with minimum of five years documented experience.

2. A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B. All doors shall be obtained from one manufacturer.

C. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards:

1. Flush Wood Doors:

a. WDMA Standard: I.S. 1A (Window and Door Manufacturers Association).

2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"; including Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors" of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grade of door, core construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those of NWWDA quality standard.

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.

B. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of WDMA’s Appendix Section “Care and Installation at Job Site” as well as with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Store doors flat and off the floor on a level surface in a dry, well ventilated building.

a. Do not store on edge. b. Protect doors from dirt, water and abuse.

2. Protect finish surfaces from exposure to light after delivery.


3. Do not subject doors to extremes in either heat or humidity and follow manufacturer’s recommendations for temperature and humidity limitations.

C. Identify each door with individual opening numbers that correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project's geographical location:

1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100 S-3 "Moisture Content".

1.9 WARRANTY

A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights AAFES may have under the Contract Documents.

B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards.

1. Warranty shall also include reinstallation that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging.

2. Warranty shall be in effect during and following period of time after date of Substantial Completion.

3. Solid Core interior doors shall be warranted for the life of original installation.

C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Door Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Solid Core Wood Doors:

a. Masonite Architectural: Aspiro Series. b. VT Industries. c. Eggers Industries: Architectural Door Division.

2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS

A. Solid Core Doors with Transparent Finish:

1. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Faces: Rotary Sliced White Birch. b. AWI Grade: Premium. c. Construction: PC-5 (Particleboard core, 5-ply).


2. Light Frames: Door manufacturer's standard solid wood beads compatible with face veneer for light sizes indicated.

B. Solid Core Doors with High Pressure Laminate Finish:

1. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Faces: High pressure decorative laminates meeting the minimum requirements of NEMA LD3.

b. Edges: High pressure decorative laminates meeting the minimum requirements of NEMA LD3.

c. Laminate Thickness: 0.050 inches. d. AWI Grade: Premium. e. Construction: PC-5 (Particleboard core, 5-ply).

2. Light Frames: Door manufacturer’s standard beads compatible with plastic laminate finish for light sizes indicated.

3. Laminate Color:

a. Panolam-Nevamar – SO330 “Café Sienna”. b. Formica – 6440-58 “Smoked Knotty Ash”.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Select veneers for transparent finish to match in finish appearance with minimal variation in wood color from sap wood to heart wood.

1. No “Barber Poling” will be accepted on faces of doors.

B. Fabricate wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements:

1. Factory pre-fit and pre-machine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels:

a. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for pre-fitting.

1.) Bevel doors 3 degrees to suit frame size indicated, 3/16” pre-fit in width to within + 0” to -1/32” tolerance.

2.) Prefit top of door 1/8” to within +1/16” to –0” tolerance. 3.) Under cut door as indicated or as determined by floor finishes.

b. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates.

2. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in hollow metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory pre-machining.

C. Openings: Cut and trim opening through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors required.

1. Wood beads shall be compatible with face veneer. 2. Profiles and installation shall be per manufacturer’s standards. 3. Cutting and trimming for lights shall be in conjunction with manufacturer’s

requirements to maintain door warranty.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHING:

A. General transparent finish requirements:

1. Comply with referenced AWI quality standard including Section 1500 "Factory Finishing".

2. Pre-finish wood doors at factory.


3. Architect shall select finish from manufacturer's standard transparent finishes with a clear penetrating stain for species of veneer indicated.

B. General plastic laminate finish requirements:

1. Comply with referenced AWI quality standard including Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors”.

2. Provide laminate finish in product and color indicated.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine installed frame prior to hanging door:

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.

2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation see Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and referenced AWI standard and as indicated.

C. Factory finish shall be restored before installation where fitting or machining is required at the job site.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION:

A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Reparations: Repair or replace doors damaged during installation.

C. Protection: Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END 08 14 16

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 31 00 – ACCESS DOORS

ACCESS DOORS 08 31 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Non-rated access doors. b. Insulated roof hatch, safety pole, access ladder and guard rail system. c. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for


1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05 21 00 – Steel Joists. 3. Section 05 31 00 – Steel Deck. 4. Section 05 40 00 – Cold Formed Metal Framing. 5. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 6. Section 07 54 00 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO). 7. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping. 8. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 9. Section 08 71 00 – Finish Hardware. 10. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall. 11. Section 09 90 00 – Painting. 12. Division 23 – HVAC. 13. Division 26 – Electrical.

B. Install firestopping materials for maintaining fire rated assembly as specified in Section 07 84 00, Firestopping.

C. Refer to Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware for roof hatch paddlelock and access door cylinders.

D. Refer to Division 23, HVAC and Division 26, Electrical for related information pertaining to access doors for equipment and controls.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire Project from one source and by a single manufacturer.

B. AA – Aluminum Association.

C. ASTM B 209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

D. ASTM B 221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes.

E. OSHA 1910.27 – Fixed Ladders.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Make submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product Data:

1. For each type of access door, roof hatch assembly and access ladder specified including:

a. Details of construction relative to adjacent construction framing and finishes. b. Individual components. c. Profiles and finishes.

2. Include complete schedule illustrating types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

C. Shop drawings:

1. Indicate exact location of each access door and roof hatch on plan and in schedule.

2. Show fabrication and installation of access doors, frames, roof hatch doors, curbs and access ladders.

3. Details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, anchorage, and accessory items.

4. Relationship of items and anchorage to actual adjacent construction.

a. Access doors and frames. b. Roof hatches and curbs. c. Roof access ladders.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Verification: Prior to submission of proposal, Contractor shall review controls, valve and equipment locations for access door locations not specifically indicated on drawings with other trades to determine locations sizes and quantities of access doors needed to gain access.

B. Proposal: Contractor shall base proposal upon furnishing all incidental access doors required by these other trades to access controls, valves and equipment that are installed in otherwise inaccessible spaces.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Roof Hatches: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following manufacturer of roof hatches:

1. Bilco – Model S-50TB Roof Hatch with LU-4 Ladder up Safety Post.

B. Roof Hatch Railing System: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following manufacturer of roof hatch railing systems:

1. Bilco – Bil-Guard 2.0 Hatch Railing System, Model RL2-STB.

C. Access Ladders: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following manufacture of fixed roof access ladders:

1. O’Keeffe’s, Inc. – Model 500 Standard Duty Channel Rail.


D. Standard Access Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers of access doors:

1. Karp Associates, Inc. – Model KDW. 2. Milcor, Inc. – Model DW. 3. Nystrom, Inc. – Model MW.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum:

1. Mill finish, sheet aluminum, Alloy 5005-H34 to comply with ASTM B209. 2. Mill finish, extrusions, Alloy 6063-T6 to comply with ASTM B221.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A-366/A-366M commercial-quality, cold-rolled steel sheet with baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.

C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A-591/A-591M, Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet with Class C coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting.

2.3 ROOF HATCHES

A. Provide single leaf, aluminum roof hatch and safety post as indicated with the following nominal dimensions:

1. Width: 30 inches. 2. Length: 36 inches.

B. Roof hatch shall be single-leaf, torsion bar spring mounted in cover.

1. Frame shall be 11-gauge mill finished aluminum with 12-inch high curb.

a. Curb shall have integral counter flashing. b. Curb shall have 5 ½ inch with mounting flange. c. Provide 3-inch rigid foam insulation.

2. Cover shall be 11-gauge mill finished aluminum with a 5" beaded flange with formed reinforcing members.

a. Interior of cover shall be lined with 18-gauge aluminum liner to conceal core of 3-inch rigid foam insulation.

b. Cover operation shall be assisted by compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes.

c. Cover hardware shall be bolted into heavy gauge channel reinforcing welded to the underside of the cover and concealed within the insulation space.

1.) Provide outside and inside handles. 2.) Latching mechanism shall be fitted to receive inside and exterior

paddlelock hasps. 3.) Provide permanently anchored, extruded EPDM rubber gasket.

C. Hardware:

1. Engineered compression spring tubes. 2. Steel compression springs with electro-coated acrylic finish. 3. Hinges shall be type 316 stainless steel. 4. All other hardware shall be zinc plated/chromate sealed.

2.4 ROOF HATCH RAILING SYSTEM


A. Provide roof hatch railing system as indicated subject to compliance with the following requirements:

1. Rail system shall attach to the capflashing of the roof hatch and shall not penetrate any roofing material.

2. Hinged gate shall ensure continuous barrier around the roof hatch. 3. Self-closing gate hinge and positive latching system shall be provided with hatch

rail system.

B. Posts and Rails: Not less than 1 1/4 inches 6061 T6 schedule 40 aluminum pipe.

C. Finish: Safety yellow powder coat paint finish.

D. Hardware:

1. Mounting brackets shall be 3/8 inch thick extruded aluminum. 2. Pivoting post guides with compression fittings and latching mechanism shall be

cast aluminum. 3. Self-closing hinges and all fasteners shall be type 316 stainless steel.

2.5 LADDERS

A. Rungs: Not less than 1 ¼ inches in section and 18 3/8 inches long, formed from tubular aluminum extrusions.

1. Squared and deeply serrated on all sides. 2. Rungs shall withstand a 1,500 pound load without deformation or failure.

B. Channel Side Rails: Not less than 1/8 inch wall thickness by 3 inches wide.

2.6 STANDARD ACCESS DOORS

A. Standard Access Doors: Standard, non-fire rated, self-latching units consisting of frame, trim, door, insulation, and hardware, including automatic closer, interior latch release, and complying with the following requirements:

1. Frame with Exposed Trim: Perimeter frame with integral drywall trim complying with the following requirements:

a. Metal: 16 gauge thick galvanized bonderized steel. b. Trim: Manufacturer’s standard flange overlapping gypsum board surfaces

surrounding door frame.

2. Door: 20 gauge thick galvanized bonderized steel, welded pan type. 3. Door Size: 22” by 22” (nominal) or as required for access to controls or equipment. 4. Hinges: Continuous type, 16 gauge with stainless steel pin. 5. Latches: Key operated cylinder lock for keyed access from outside the door.

B. Furnish standard access doors in gypsum drywall ceiling at each end of Passage 105 for access to rolling overhead grille torsion spring mechanisms.

C. Provide additional units that comply with the requirements for access to Mechanical or Electrical system controls, valves or equipment as specified in Divisions 15 and 16.

2.7 ACCESS DOOR FABRICATION

A. General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.


B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction.

1. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 2. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access

panels to types of supports indicated. 3. Exposed Flange: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame. 4. Furnish frames with edge trim for gypsum board.

C. Latching Devices: Furnish number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Advise Installers of other related work about specific requirements relating to access door and roof hatch installation.

1. Confirm that opening openings in wall and in roof deck are properly framed and supported.

2. Ensure that curb blocking has been properly placed and anchored for leveling and anchoring roof hatch curb.

B. Include sizes of rough openings to receive access doors and roof hatch, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.

1. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other construction.

2. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installing access doors.

B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finished surfaces.


A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged.

END 08 31 00

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 41 10 – ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS & ENTRANCE DOORS

ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS & ENTRANCE DOORS 08 41 10-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor shall provide:

a. Thermally broken/improved, self-supporting aluminum curtain wall system including entrance doors.

b. Thermally broken/improved, self-supporting aluminum curtain wall transom and side light framing.

c. Thermally broken/improved, self-supporting aluminum curtain wall window framing.

d. Thermally broken/improved aluminum storefront system at drive-up windows. e. Automatic bi-parting drive-up serving windows. f. Manual single slide drive-up serving windows. g. Hardware items related to aluminum entrance doors. h. Other related accessory items such as flashings, fasteners, clips and other

items of installation to complete aluminum curtain wall system.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 3. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 4. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 6. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry. 7. Section 07 60 00 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 8. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 9. Section 08 71 00 – Finish Hardware. 10. Section 08 81 00 – Glass & Glazing. 11. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 12. Division 26 – Electrical.

B. Exit devices, lock cylinders and threshold for aluminum entrance doors are specified in Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware.

C. Glazing requirements for all exterior curtain walls, doors, transoms and windows are specified in Section 08 81 00, Glass & Glazing and shall comply with requirements of UFC 4-010-01 for glazing.

D. Coordination of mortised magnetic switches for door frames indicated.


A. Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum curtain wall assemblies that comply with: specified performance characteristics.


1. Design system to meet UFC 4-010-01, 09 February 2012 with Change 1, 01 October 2013 requirements:

a. Drive-up franchised food service buildings are exempt from minimum Standoff Distances to parking and roadways.

b. Refer to Appendix B, Paragraph B-3.1 and subsequent subparagraphs for minimum design of glazed assemblies for deflection and connection requirements of frames to supporting structure and glazing bite.

c. Contractor shall coordinate connection of blocking to structural members at window frames to resist load reactions provided by window manufacturer.

2. Each system shall be tested by a recognized testing laboratory or agency in accordance with specified test methods.

3. Provide certified test results.

B. Thermal Movement: Provide systems capable of withstanding thermal movements resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F. (67 deg. C.), that could cause a metal surface temperature range of 180 deg. F. (100 deg. C.) within the framing system.

C. Wind Loading: Provide assemblies capable of withstanding a uniform test pressure of 25 psf inward and 25 psf outward when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.

D. Fixed Framing Transmission Characteristics: Provide self-supporting aluminum curtain wall framing system that complies with requirements indicated for transmission characteristics after glazing:

1. Air Infiltration: Provide framing system with an air infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 – 84 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 psf.

2. Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no water penetration as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 – 86 at an inward test pressure differential of 15.0 psf.

3. Condensation Resistance: Where framing systems are "thermal-break/improved" construction, provide units tested for thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1502.7 showing condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 70.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

1. Product data:

a. Provide for each type of aluminum curtain wall and entrance door required including:

1.) Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods. 2.) Data on finishing, hardware and accessories. 3.) Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.

b. Provide for each drive-up window assembly required including:

1.) Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods. 2.) Data on finishing, hardware and accessories. 3.) Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.

2. Shop drawings:

a. Provide for each aluminum curtain wall and entrance door required including:


1.) Layout and installation details including actual relationship to adjacent work.

2.) Elevations at ½” equals 1’-0” scale. 3.) Detail sections of typical composite members. 4.) Anchors and reinforcement. 5.) Hardware mounting heights. 6.) Provisions for expansion and contraction. 7.) Glazing details for field glazing.

b. Provide for each drive-up window assembly required including:

1.) Layout and installation details including actual relationship to adjacent work.

2.) Elevations at ½” equals 1’-0” scale. 3.) Detail sections of typical composite members. 4.) Anchors and reinforcement. 5.) Glazing details for field or manufacturer glazing.

3. Hardware Schedule: Submit complete hardware schedule organized into sets based on hardware specified.

a. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish.

b. Include item name, name of the manufacturer and complete designations of every item required for each door opening.

4. Samples for Finish Selections:

a. Submit pairs of samples of each specified finish on 12-inch-long sections of extrusions or formed shapes.

b. Where normal finish variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of variations.

5. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Contracting Officer or designated representative reserves the right to require additional samples, that show fabrication techniques and workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories.

6. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing that aluminum curtain wall systems have been tested in accordance with specified test procedures and comply with performance characteristics indicated.


A. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurement before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work; show measurements on final shop drawings.

1. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay in the work.

2. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabricate tolerances to ensure proper fit.

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum curtain walls and entrance doors produced by a single manufacturer experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.


C. Fabricator Qualifications: Provide aluminum curtain walls and entrance doors fabricated by a firm experienced in producing systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project.

1. Demonstrate a successful record of installation in-service performance. 2. The fabricator shall have sufficient production capacity to produce components

required without causing delay in progress of the Work.

D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum curtain walls and entrance doors from one source and from a single manufacturer.

E. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and dimensional requirements of aluminum curtain wall and entrance door work required and are based on the specific types and models indicated.


A. Deliver aluminum curtain wall, entrance door and drive-up window components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging in accord with Section 01 66 00.

B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or concrete.

1. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air.

2. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or permanent damage.


A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work.

1. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. 2. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the

work. 3. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and

coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, installer and manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units (including glazing) that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period.

B. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration.

2. Faulty operation. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

C. Warranty Period: 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion.


D. The warranty shall not deprive the Government of other rights or remedies the Government may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DRIVE-UP SERVING WINDOWS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide serving windows as manufactured by Quikserv Corporation, Post Office Box 40466, Houston, TX 77240-0466.

B. Products:

1. Burger King: Provide manufacturer’s standard manual single slide drive-up serving window model number SC-4030 in standard 204R1 clear anodized aluminum finish.

a. Serving windows shall be self-closing single slider type with clear service opening of 20 1/4-inches wide by 29-inches high.

b. Provide magnetic hold open device, automatic locking when closed and meeting health code requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

c. Serving window may be provided with factory glazing of 1/4" laminated safety glass meeting the requirements of UFC 4-010-01 or units may be field glazed to meet those requirements.

d. Provide manufacturer's standard weather stripping.

2. Popeye's: Provide manufacturer’s standard fully automatic bi-parting drive-up serving window model number BP-7241E in standard 204R1 clear anodized aluminum finish.

a. Serving windows shall be self-closing slider type with clear service opening of 29 1/2-inches wide by 32-inches high.

b. Provide magnetic hold open device, automatic locking when closed and meeting health code requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

c. Serving window may be provided with factory glazing of 1/4" laminated safety glass meeting the requirements of UFC 4-010-01 or units may be field glazed to meet those requirements.

d. Provide manufacturer's standard weather stripping.

C. Framing System: Tubular aluminum framing system shall be thermally broken and designed to be fully compatible for integration with framing system specified in this Section for aluminum curtain walls used as sidelight and transom framing at perimeter of serving windows.

2.2 ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL & INTERIOR FRAMING MANUFACTURER

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide aluminum curtain walls and entrance doors manufactured by the following:

1. Kawneer Company, Inc.: 1600 Wall System and Narrow Stile 190 Door Systems.


2.3 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire.

B. Major portions of extrusion sections shall have 0.125 inch minimum thickness.

C. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components.

1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts.

2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of hardware.

3. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat-head machine screws that match the finish of member or hardware being fastened.

D. Concealed Flashings: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead-soft stainless steel or: 0.026-inch-thick minimum aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components.

E. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123.

F. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hit-dip galvanized steel inserts complying with ASTM A123.

G. Exterior Entry Door Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287.

H. Head flashing shall be custom shop fabricated aluminum, .040” thick, in profile indicated and color to match frames as specified in Section 07 62 00, Flashing & Sheet Metal.

I. Glass and Glazing Materials: Glass and glazing materials shall comply with requirements of Section 08 81 00, Glass and Glazing.

2.4 HARDWARE

A. General: Refer to finish hardware schedule in Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware for required hardware items on each door leaf.

B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number and type recommended by manufacturer for service required, in finish to match door.

1. Offset Pivot sets: Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1.

a. Provide exposed part of cast aluminum alloy. b. Provide an intermediate pivot for doors.


2. Surface Mounted Overhead Closers: Modern type with metal cover, for parallel arm type mounting installation, BMHA 626 (US26D), Satin Chrome finish to match door.

a. Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. b. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for size of closer depending

on door size, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. c. Comply with all requirements for pull resistance and delayed action closing

for handicap accessibility per the ADA and UFAS standards.

3. Overhead Door Stop: Concealed equal to Glynn Johnson No. 104S, BMHA 626 (US26D), Satin Chrome finish to match door.

4. Cylinders are supplied under Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware for keying into the building system.

5. Exterior Entrance Door Panic Hardware: Concealed rod “Paneline II” panic exit devices activated by full width push panel mounted into cross rail in door as indicated in BMHA 626 (US26D), Satin Chrome anodized finish with black insert and clear letters.

6. Exterior and Interior Door Pull Handles: Provide contemporary styled 1” round bent bar offset pull with 9” centerlines in number 14 clear anodized finish.

7. Threshold: Extruded aluminum half saddle threshold equal to National Guard Products 350, 5” wide x ½” high (maximum), mill finish aluminum, complete with anchors and clips, coordinated with pivots, panic strike and floor finish.

8. Exterior Door Sweep/Weatherstrip: Nylon brush gasket, 45-degree, bottom channel concealed surface mount, clear anodized aluminum equal to National A626A.

2.5 COMPONENTS

A. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront window framing systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of overall 2 ½” wide x 6” deep primary members as indicated.

1. Provide for center glazing storefront from the exterior. 2. Shop-fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. 3. Provide storefront frame sections without exposed seams. 4. Exterior and interior sides of head frames at entrance doors shall be infilled with

extruded aluminum sections to provide head frame sightline height indicated. 5. Provide 1/8" thick break metal covers with concealed attachment flanges at

outside corners and jambs as indicated.

B. Entrance Door Frames:

1. Provide tubular and channel frame entrance door frame assemblies, as indicated, with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer’s standards.

2. Reinforce as necessary to support required loads.

C. Stile and Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts.

1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of stiles and rails.

a. Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops. b. Exterior stops shall be anchored for non-removal.


2. Design: Provide 1 ¾” thick doors of design indicated.

a. Narrow stile, 2 1/8” width. b. Head rail, 2 ¼” width. c. Center rail, 8 ¼” width with panic push panel. d. Bottom rail, 3 7/8” width.

D. Include sub-frames and other reinforcing members of the type indicated.

E. Furnish trim components and sill flashing as indicated.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards.

1. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. 2. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions

required, to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. 3. Fabricate storefront window framing system with an integrally concealed, low-

conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and exposed interior members to eliminate direct metal-to-metal contact.

4. Use manufacturer's standard construction that has been in use for similar projects for period of not less than 3 years.

B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site.

1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.

a. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces.

b. Complete these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes.

2. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site.

C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations.

1. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides and restore mechanical finish.

2. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface.

D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance rigidity.

E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, a suitable sealant, or a non-absorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces.

F. Do not use coatings containing lead.

G. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members.

H. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.


I. Weather stripping:

1. For exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping against fixed stops. 2. Provide EPDM or vinyl blade gasket weather stripping in bottom door rail,

adjustable for contact with threshold. 3. At interior doors and other location without weather stripping, provide neoprene

silencers to prevent contact between metal and doors.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application and designation of finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by “AA” conform to system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

C. Provide Class I anodic Coating conforming to AA-M12C22A42/44, Clear Anodized Finish.

1. Mechanical finish: As fabricated, non-specular. 2. Chemical finish: Etched, medium matte. 3. Anodic coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.7 mil complying with

AAMA 607.1.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts.

B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the installation.

C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation.

B. Coordinate and install sheet metal head and sill flashings specified in Section 07 62 00 as indicated to provide proper sealing of head frame conditions and path for water to escape at sill conditions.

C. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors or panels.

1. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and elevations indicated.

2. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.

D. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum storefront windows to comply with the following tolerances:

1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length or 1/4 inch in any total length.


2. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/16 inch.

3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements shall not exceed 1/8 inch.

4. Offset at Corners: The maximum out-of-plane offset of framing at corners shall not exceed 1/32 inch.

E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication.

2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum. 3. Paint unexposed aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other

masonry with alkali resistant coating. 4. Paint unexposed wood and similar absorptive material in contact with aluminum

and exposed to the elements or otherwise subject to wetting, with two coats of aluminum house paint.

5. Seal joints between the materials with sealant.

F. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface mounted hardware items.

1. Comply with hardware manufacturer’s instructions and template requirements. 2. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible.

G. Set and secure sub-sill flashing onto wood blocking in bed of sealant.

1. After placement of sub-sill flashing provide sash cord weeps at minimum of 12” centers extending 8” parallel to back flange of flashing and extending out and over sill.

2. Set sub-sill member in bed of sealant making certain that sash cord weeps are clear to drain any water from window frame assembly.

H. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction.

I. Sealants, fillers and gaskets are specified in Section 07 90 00, Building Joint Sealers.

J. Installation of glass indicated to be set into framing is specified in Section 08 81 00, Glass & Glazing.

3.3 SERVING WINDOW INSTALLATION

A. Inspect openings for correct dimensions and clearances prior to installation.

B. Install serving window units in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation.

C. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members or sliding panels.

1. Coordinate installation with installation of sill flashing specified in Section 07 62 00, Flashing and Sheet Metal.

2. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated.

3. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.


D. Field glaze units, if not factory glazed, in full compliance with requirements set forth in UFC 4-010-01.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust framing to fit neatly together, with hairline joints and other requirements of this Section.

B. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, for weather tight closure and to comply with the requirements of the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS).

C. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings.

D. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in Section 08 81 00 for cleaning and maintenance.

E. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.

END 08 41 10.

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 71 00 – FINISH HARDWARE

FINISH HARDWARE 08 71 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All finish hardware shown and indicated. b. Coordination of hardware item templates with hollow metal door and frame,

wood door, roof access door and aluminum entry door manufacturers/suppliers.

c. Coordination of keying with General Manager, JBSA-Sam Houston CES and Contracting Officer.

d. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for complete installation.

e. Cleaning.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 03 35 36 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish. 4. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors & Frames. 6. Section 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors. 7. Section 08 31 00 – Access Doors. 8. Section 08 41 10 – Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entry Doors. 9. Section 09 90 00 – Painting.


A. Supplier: Minimum ten (10) years experience in the distribution of finish hardware. Supplier shall employ a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to supervise and prepare all schedules, details and services for project.

B. Reference and Standards: Where cited, and except as modified by Project Specifications, applicable standards of following organizations apply.

1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA). 4. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

C. Provide only locksets, deadlocks and cylinders that will receive Best interchangeable core systems.

1. Contractor shall retain a hardware supplier capable of supplying specified system acceptable to JBSA-Sam Houston and the Contracting Officer or designated representative and submit the following:

a. Schedule of doors, grilles and access doors requiring interchangeable cores and the number of cores per door opening.


b. Schedule shall be prepared by the acceptable hardware supplier as specified above.

c. Contractor shall check the keying schedule to ensure that no locks have been omitted prior to submittal to the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

2. The Contracting Officer or designated representative will review submittal and forward a copy of this schedule to JBSA-Sam Houston CES for coordination of exterior mechanical and electrical room keying requirements.

3. The Contracting Officer or designated representative and AAFES General Manager will then review the schedule with the Contractor and provide information to establish desired keying arrangement for Project and approve keying schedule.

a. All locks, except those designated to be keyed separately that are controlled by JBSA-Sam Houston, are to be master keyed in one or more sets and keyed individually.

b. All keying shall be coordinated with AAFES General Manager.

4. Contractor shall purchase the interchangeable cores and keys based on the approved keying schedule and shall cause all permanent keys and interchangeable cores to be shipped to the AAFES General Manager via “Certified Mail”.

a. Shipping package shall be marked with AAFES Project Number. b. Package shall be shipped to the following address:

Mr. John W. Burk, General Manager Army and Air Force Exchange Service Building 2420 2503 Funston Road JBSA-Sam Houston, TX 78234

5. Contractor shall provide temporary construction cores to secure the building until such time as the Contracting Officer or designated representative authorizes the Contractor to install permanent cores.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for each item of hardware.

1. Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with specified requirements.

2. Include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finishes.

C. Hardware Schedule: submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated herein and coordinate hardware with doors, frames and other related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware products.

1. Submit hardware schedule based of finish hardware indicated, organized into hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door opening including:

a. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on

floor plans and in door and frame schedule.


e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes and other data contained in the schedule.

f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Keying information.

2. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date as acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the project construction schedule and include:

a. Product data, samples and shop drawings of other work affected by finish hardware.

b. Other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware schedule.

D. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware.

1. If necessary, check shop drawings of other work for compliance with this Section. 2. Confirm that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of

hardware.


A. Accept all new materials at site and provide personnel to unload, handle and store materials.

B. Storage shall be in accordance with 01 66 00.

C. Hardware supplier shall package and label each item of hardware separately.

1. Tag each item in accordance with approved hardware schedule. 2. Each package shall contain appropriate fastenings, instructions and installation

templates.

D. Should markings on any item become separated from item after delivery, Contractor shall return item to supplier by for remarking before attempting to install.

E. Supplier shall deliver a final schedule to Contracting Officer and Contractor when hardware is delivered.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Various items specified for this Project will require coordination between manufacturers of those products, the hardware supplier and the Contractor including:

1. Factory preparation of hollow metal frames specified in Section 08 11 00, Metal Doors & Frames.

2. Factory preparation of wood doors specified in Section 08 14 16, Flush Wood Doors.

3. Factory preparation of aluminum curtain wall system for aluminum doors and frames as specified in Section 08 41 10, Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with hardware supplier and all other suppliers listed above shall cooperate to ensure that hardware items are provided and installed as indicated.

1.7 WARRANTY


A. Contractor shall warrant installation to be free from defects due to faulty workmanship or materials for a period of 2 years.

B. All such defects shall be repaired or replaced immediately after written notice.

C. Hardware manufacturer shall provide a written 10-year warranty for door closers.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED HARDWARE

A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware is indicated in the Finish Hardware Data Sheet and Hardware Schedule at the end of this Section.

B. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of one or more manufacturers for each hardware type required.

2.2 MATERIAL AND FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Door Handing:

a. Drawings show direction of swing or hand of each door leaf. b. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door

movement as shown.

2. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer's products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with required UL labels and as otherwise acceptable to Contracting Officer or designated representative.

a. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. b. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method

indicated.

1.) Use manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness.

2.) In no case use metals of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI A156 series standard for each type hardware item and with ANSI A156.18 for finish designations indicated.

c. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated.

3. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation.

a. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws except as specifically indicated.

4. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item.

a. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. b. Finish screws exposed under any condition to match hardware finish or, if

exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such other work as closely as possible.

c. Include items "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish.


5. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners.

a. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work.

b. In such cases, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.

6. Tools and Maintenance Instructions for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of finish hardware.

2.3 HINGES, BUTTS AND PIVOTS

A. Templates: Provide only template-produced units.

B. Screws: Except as otherwise indicated provide screws as follows:

1. Furnish Phillips flat-head machine screws for installation of units to metal. 2. Furnish Phillips flat-head wood screws for installation of units into wood. 3. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.

C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:

1. Steel Hinges: Steel pins. 2. Non-ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins. 3. Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins. 4. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. 5. Number of hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated.

a. Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 84" or less in height. b. One additional hinge for all doors greater than 84” in height.

6. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves.

2.4 LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS

A. Locks and Latches: Heavy-duty mortise type, anti-friction latch bolts with lever handle.

1. All locksets, latchsets and cylinders shall be the product of one manufacturer. 2. Certifications: ANSI A156.13, 1987, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 3 Security. 3. Backset: 2 3/4 inches. 4. All locksets and cylinders shall have 7-Pin removable core cylinders furnished with

construction cores.

B. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set.

1. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold conditions require the use of non-recessed strike for bolt.

C. Lock Throw:

1. Provide ¾ " minimum throw of latch and 1” minimum throw of deadbolts unless designated otherwise.

2. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.

2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING


A. General: All new cylinders and mortised locks shall have 7-pin Best interchangeable core systems as indicated with temporary construction cores and keying furnished.

B. Coordination:

1. Contractor shall coordinate with the Contracting Officer or designated representative, JBSA-Sam Houston CES and the hardware supplier for cylinder keyway and keying requirements as indicated in Paragraph 1.3 above.

2. Prior to occupancy, Contractor shall deliver all permanent interchangeable cores and keys from factory to AAFES General Manager as set forth in Paragraph 1.3, C., 4. above.

a. Contractor shall submit typewritten confirmation of shipping transmittal to Contracting Officer or designated representative.

b. Include scheduled dates and times when permanent cylinders and interchangeable cores will be required for installation at the Project Site.

c. Contractor shall coordinate dates with Contracting Officer or designated representative, AAFES General Manager and JBSA-Sam Houston CES.

3. Contractor shall remove temporary construction cores and install the permanent interchangeable cores at the coordinated dates and times arranged above.

C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver.

D. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.

E. Key Quantity and Inscription:

1. Furnish 3 change keys for each lock. 2. Furnish 5 master keys for each master system. 3. Stamp each key with change number and inscription “U.S. Property-Do Not

Duplicate”.

2.6 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES

A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard sex nut and bolt fastener for closer installation.

B. Size of Units:

1. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use.

2. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than recommended for use with standard arms.

2.7 DOOR TRIM UNITS

A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws.

B. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1 1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated.

1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage), beveled three sides.

2.8 HARDWARE FINISHES

A. Finish of all hardware shall be:


1. Aluminum Entry Doors shall receive hardware finished to match clear anodic aluminum door finish including hinges, closers, overhead stops, panic devices, pulls, metal components of weather stripping and thresholds.

2. All other doors shall receive hardware finished in BMHA 626 (US26D), Satin Chrome for all items unless indicated otherwise.

B. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated.

1. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening.

2. In general, match items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set for color and texture.

C. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI A156.18 "Materials & Finishes Standard", including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.

2.9 MANUFACTURER

A. Catalog numbers of manufacturers listed in Columns 1, 2 and 3 have been used to establish quality required.

1. Only manufacturers listed are approved. 2. Other manufacturers seeking approval shall do so in writing per General

Requirements and shall list exact catalog numbers and description of items proposed to furnish.

ITEM 1 2 3

Hinges Hager Lawrence Stanley Locks Corbin-Russwin Sargent Schlage Cylinders Best ------------- ------------- Exit Devices Corbin/ Russwin Sargent Von Duprin Closers Corbin/Russwin LCN Sargent Overhead Stops Arch. Bldrs. Glynn-Johnson Sargent Wall Stops Baldwin Glynn-Johnson Ives Push/Pulls Ives Hager Rockwood Kick-plates Baldwin Hager Rockwood Threshold National Pemko Reese Weatherstrips National Pemko Reese Paddlelocks Corbin/Russwin Schlage Sargent Peepholes Baldwin Rockwood Ives

B. Designations: Following abbreviations identify listed manufacturers.

ABH Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. Elk Grove Village, IL BAL Baldwin Hardware Mfg. Corp., Reading, PA BES Stanley/Best Access Solutions Indianapolis, IN COR Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Berlin, CT 06037 GJ Glynn-Johnson, Div. of Dayton-Walter Corp., Chicago, IL 60640


HAG Hager Hinge Co. St. Louis, MO 63104 IVE Ives, Div. Of Leigh Products, New Haven, CT 06508 LAW Lawrence Brothers, Inc. Sterling, IL 61081 LCN LCN Closer Princeton, IL 61356 NAT National Guard Products, Memphis, TN 38107 PEM Pemko Ventura, CA 93003 REE Reese Enterprises, Inc. Rosemount, MN 55068 ROC Rockwood Manufacturing Company Rockwood, PA 15557 SAR Sargent, Div. Of Kidde, New Haven, CT 06511 SCH Schlage Lock Company Barrington, IL 60010 STA Stanley Hardware New Britain, CT 06050 VON Von Duprin Indianapolis, IN 46225

2.10 PRODUCTS

A. Hinges:

1. Hinges: Non-ferrous, stainless steel pin, ball bearing, full mortise, non-removable pin, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) HAG – BB 1191. 2.) LAW – LH191BB. 3.) STA – RPFBB191.

2. Hinges: Steel, steel pin, ball bearing, full mortise, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) HAG – BB1279. 2.) LAW – LH179BB. 3.) STA – RPFBB179.

B. Locks:

1. Lockset: Mortised, extra heavy-duty, storeroom lock function F07, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – ML 2057 x LSR. 2.) SCH – L9080 x 03L. 3.) SAR – 8204 x LE2J.

2. Lockset: Mortised, extra heavy-duty, office function F04, BMHA 626 (US26D).


a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – ML2051 x LSR. 2.) SCH – L9050 x 03L. 3.) SAR – 8205 x LE2J.

3. Lockset: Mortised, extra heavy-duty, classroom lock function F05, BMHA 626, (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – ML 2055 x LSR. 2.) SCH – L9070 x 03L. 3.) SAR – 8237 x LE2J.

C. Exit Devices:

1. Exit Device: Mortise lock exit device, key and lever operation, outside trim operation in alarm mode, 9-volt battery powered internal alarm horn and keyed alarm activation switch with indicator lamp, low battery indicator, entrance/classroom lock function F08, satin chrome finish.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – ED 5000 Series, ED5600L x M61 x L9M. 2.) SAR – 80 Series, 8913 x AL x ETJ. 3.) VON – 98 Series x 9875L x ALK x 03.

D. Cylinders:

1. Cylinder: Mortise type, BMHA 626 (US26D) with Clear Anodized Aluminum Cylinder Scalps to match Doors.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) BES – 1E Series.

2. Cylinder: Mortise type, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) BES – 1E Series.

E. Closers:

1. Closer: Non-sized, parallel arm, metal cover, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – DC6210. 2.) LCN – 4110N. 3.) SAR – 1430/1431.

F. Stops:

1. Doorstop: Overhead, concealed mounted, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) ABH – 1000 Series – 1023. 2.) GJ – 100 Series – 104S. 3.) SAR – 690 Series – 698S.

2. Doorstop: Wall mount, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:


1.) BAL – 4293. 2.) ROC – 404. 3.) IVE – WS402.

G. Push/Pulls:

1. Push: Wrought, .050” thick, beveled edges, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) IVE – 8200 – 3 ½” x 15” Push. 2.) HAG – 30S – 3 ½” x 15” Push. 3.) ROC – 70B – 3 ½” x 15” Push.

2. Pull: 1” diameter offset, cast, BMHA 626 (US26D)

a. Manufacturers:

1.) IVE – 8190HD – 1”ø x 2 3/4” x 3” Offset x 10”. 2.) HAG – 12J – 1” ø x 2 3/4” x 3” Offset x 10”. 3.) ROC – BF157 – 1” ø x 2 3/4” x 3” Offset x 10”.

H. Kickplates:

1. Kickplate: Bronze, .050” thick, beveled three sides, 10” high x 2” less door width, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) BAL – 2001. 2.) HAG – 193S. 3.) ROC – K1050.

I. Threshold:

1. Threshold: Flat half-saddle, aluminum, 5” wide x ½” high, mill finish aluminum.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) NAT – 350. 2.) PEM – 255A. 3.) REE – S245A.

2. Threshold: Flat saddle, aluminum, 5” wide x ½” high, mill finish aluminum.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) NAT – 425E. 2.) PEM – 171A. 3.) REE – S205A.

J. Weatherstrip:

1. Weatherstrip Sill Protection: Nylon brush gasket, 45-degree, bottom channel surface mount, clear anodized aluminum.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) NAT – A626A. 2.) PEM – 45062NB. 3.) REE – 970C.

2. Weatherstrip Jamb Protection: Head and jambs, surface mount, clear anodized aluminum, neoprene insert.


a. Manufacturers:

1.) NAT – 127NA. 2.) PEM – 305R. 3.) REE – DS70C.

K. Paddlelock:

1. Heavy duty, interchangeable core, solid brass with hardened steel shackle.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – PL5090 2.) SCH – PL4000 3.) SAR – 63758

L. Peephole:

1. Provide through door peephole view port with vision from secure side of door, BMHA 612 (US10).

a. BAL – 0155. b. ROC – 620. c. IVE – U696.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine all doors, frames and hardware for damage, defects, and suitability for intended use.

B. Restore all parts or items found damaged, defective, or inadequate, or replace with good material before installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Heights given are centerline heights up from finish floor unless stated:

1. Heights given “Number to Number” indicate that all shall be at one height within limits given.

2. Where heights of items are not listed, mount in accord with recommendations of the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).

a. Bottom Hinge – 10 to 13 inches. b. Top Hinge – 6 to 8 inches down from head. c. Intermediate Hinges – Equally spaced. d. Door Lever – 36 to 40-5/16 inches.

B. Fitting: Fit all hardware accurately and properly.

1. Remove exposed parts until after painter’s finishing is completed, then reinstall. 2. Securely fasten all fixed parts. 3. Fit faces of mortised parts snug and flush. 4. Make sure operating parts move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking or

excessive clearance.

C. Adjusting and Finishing: After work has been otherwise completed, examine all hardware for complete and proper installation.

1. Lubricate bearing surfaces of moving parts. 2. Adjust latching and holding devices to proper function. 3. Adjust door control devices to proper speed and power.


4. Test keys for conformance to approved keying system. 5. Clean all exposed surfaces, check for surface damage and polish.

D. Thresholds:

1. Install in one continuous piece, full width of opening. 2. Set exterior thresholds in full bed of mastic and fasten with matching countersunk

anchors at 6 inches on center. 3. Adhere interior thresholds to concrete slab with construction adhesive and fasten

with matching countersunk anchors at 6 inches on center.

3.3 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Where hardware is found defective in materials or installation; rework, restore or replace or otherwise correct as directed.

B. Following will be considered as defective materials:

1. Unauthorized substitutes. 2. Items delivered with missing, broken, damaged or defaced parts. 3. Items of incorrect hand or function.

C. Following will be considered as defective installation:

1. Items broken, damaged or defaced: after delivery. 2. Items incomplete, misaligned or incorrectly located.

3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Where a pair of doors is installed, items listed shall be provided for both leafs, except lockset or exit device on inactive leaf as indicated and flush bolt on adjacent active leaf.

B. SEE SECTION 08 41 10, ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS & ENTRANCE DOORS, PAGE 08 41 10-6, PARAGRAPH 2.4, FOR DOOR HARDWARE BY ALUMINUM DOOR SUPPLIER.

GROUP 1: Doors 100, 101, 102 & 103 (AL x AL Entry)

Cylinder: #1

GROUP 2: Doors 107 & 108 (HM x WD)

Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #2 Push/Pull: #1 & #2 Closer: #1 Stop: #2 Kickplate: #1

GROUP 3: Door 109 (HM x WD)

Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #2 Lock: #3 Closer: #1 Stop: #2 Kickplate: #1 (Each Face)


Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #2 Lock: #3 Closer: #1 Stop: #1 Kickplate: #1 (Each Face)


GROUP 5: Door 115 (HM x HM)

Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #1 Exit Device: #1 Cylinder: #2 Closer: #1 Stop: #1 Kickplate: #1 (Each Face) Threshold: #1 Weatherstrip: #1 & #2 Peephole: #1


Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #2 Lock: #2 Closer: #1 Stop: #2 Kickplate: #1

GROUP 7: Doors 118A & 118B (HM x WD)


GROUP 8: Door 124 (HM x WD)


GROUP 9: Door 131 (HM x HM)

Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #1 Lock: #1 Closer: #1 Stop: #1 Threshold: #2 Weatherstrip: #1 & #2

GROUP M: Miscellaneous Hardware (Various Locations)

ROOF HATCH DOOR: Paddlelock: #1

DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE GATES: Paddlelock: #1 (4 each)

END 08 71 00.

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 81 00 – GLASS & GLAZING

GLASS & GLAZING 08 81 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Exterior glazing for aluminum curtain wall and window systems. b. Exterior glazing for door, sidelight and transoms at aluminum curtain wall

entrance doors. c. Exterior glazing at drive-up window, sidelights and transoms. d. Interior glazing for view windows. e. Interior glazing for view lites in wood doors. f. All other related accessory items such as fasteners, clips, setting blocks,

glazing beads and other items of installation to complete glazing work for the Project.

g. Cleaning.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry. 3. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 4. Section 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors. 5. Section 08 41 10 – Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors.


A. Safety Glass:

1. Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201 for Category II materials.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety units permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations as follows:

1. FGMA Publications: “FGMA Glazing Manual”. 2. SIGMA Publications: TM-3000, “Vertical Glazing Guidelines”.

C. Fire Resistive Glazing Products for Door Assemblies:

1. Products identical to those tested per ASTM E152. 2. Fire resistive glazing units shall be listed and labeled by UL or other testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Insulating Glass Certification: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either in spacers or at least on component lite of units with appropriate certification label of one of the following inspecting and testing agencies:

1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). 2. Associated Laboratories (ALI). 3. National Certified Testing Laboratories (NCTL).


E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated:

1. Primary glass of each type and class indicated per ASTM C 1036. 2. Heat-treated glass of each condition indicated per ASTM C 1048. 3. Insulating glass of each construction indicated.

F. Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated.


A. General:

1. Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading without failure.

2. Included in these requirement are loss or glass breakage attributable to the following:

a. Defective manufacturer fabrication. b. Installation defects. c. Failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight. d. Deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in glazing installation.

B. Glass Design:

1. Glass thicknesses are indicated or, where not indicated, shall be the minimum thickness required for installation.

2. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions.

C. Provide glass lites for the various size opening in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) to meet or exceed the following:

1. Minimum nominal glass thickness of lites in exterior opening shall be ¼ inch. 2. Minimum nominal glass thickness of lites, whether compose of annealed or heat-

treated glass, are selected so the worst case probability of failure does not exceed:

a. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind loading.

b. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E 1300.

c. For other than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness per glass per glass manufacturer’s standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 base on types of glass.

D. Thermal Movement:

1. Design glazing based on normal thermal movement results in ambient and surface temperatures acting of glass, framing members and glazing components for temperature change range as follows:

a. 120 degrees F., ambient. b. 180 degrees F., material surfaces.

2. Base engineering calculations on actual material surface temperature due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s Data, Glass:

1. Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each type of glass required.


2. Include test data substantiating that glass complies with specified requirements.

B. Manufacturer’s Data, Glazing Materials:

1. Submit manufacturer’s specifications, and installation instructions for each type of glazing sealant and compound, gasket and associated miscellaneous material.

2. Include manufacturer’s published data, or letter of certification, or certified test laboratory report indicating that each material complies with the project specifications and is suitable for the applications shown.

C. Samples, Glass:

1. Submit 4-inch minimum square samples of each type of glass specified. 2. Insulating glass need not be hermetically sealed but edge construction shall be

included.

D. Samples, Glazing Materials:

1. Submit 4-inch minimum long samples of each color specified (except black) for each type of glazing sealant or gasket exposed to view.

2. Install sample between two strips of material similar to or representative of channel surfaces where sealant or gasket will be used, held apart to represent typical joint widths.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Temperature Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of liquid sealants when temperatures are below or above manufacturer’s recommended limitations for installation.

B. Maintain security of buildings prior to installation of glazing products.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the owner may have under the Contact Documents.

B. Provide manufacturer’s ten (10) year warranty against seal separation for all insulated glass products used on project.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass that complies with ASTM C 1036 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, class, quality, form, finish and pattern, where applicable.

B. Clear Float Glass:

1. Type I: Transparent glass, flat. 2. Class 1: Clear. 3. Quality: q3 glazing select.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Guardian Industries Corp. 2. Pilkington Building Products. 3. PPG Industries, Inc. 4. Oldcastle.


2.2 TEMPERED GLASS

A. Tempered glass: ¼ inch thick, clear, meeting Federal Standards 16 CFR 1201 Category I or II.

1. Interior doors. 2. Interior view windows or sidelights.

B. Acceptable products:

1. Guardian Industries Corp. 2. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. 3. Pilkington Building Products 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Oldcastle.

2.3 LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS

A. Laminated glass: Nominal ¼ inch thick, clear lite panels complying with the Consumer Product Safety commission 16 CFR 1201 and the requirements of ANSI Z-97.1.

B. Laminated glass shall be constructed in a three layer system:

1. Inboard pane bonded together by a tough, durable polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer, .030” thick.

C. Laminated glass shall be used at all interior automatic entry doors and transoms and as the glass for construction of insulating glass units specified below.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Guardian Industries Corp. 2. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. 3. Pilkington Building Products. 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Viracon, Inc. 6. Oldcastle.

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Construct nominal 1-inch units of one pane of ¼-inch tempered glass and one pane of ¼-inch laminated glass with air space between.

1. Curtain Wall and Windows:

a. Subject to regulatory requirements:

1.) Exterior pane: ¼” tempered (Light Gray). 2.) Interior pane: ¼” laminated (1/8” Coated Clear Low E-Surface 5,

0.030 Clear PVB, 1/8” Clear).

2. Exterior Entry Doors, Sidelights and Transoms:




3. Drive-up Windows, Sidelights and Transom:





B. Minimum performance characteristics:

1. Thermal:

a. U-factor (summer daytime): 0.34. b. U-factor (winter nighttime): 0.34. c. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.56. d. Shading Coefficient: 0.48. e. Relative Heat Gain (Btu/hr-ft2): 116. f. Light to Solar Gain: 1.04.

2. Optical:

a. Visible light transmittance (Vtc): 50 percent. b. Outdoor reflectance: 10 percent. c. Indoor reflectance: 15 percent. d. Total solar transmittance: 35 percent. e. Outside total solar reflectance: 9 percent. f. Ultraviolet transmittance: < 1 percent.


1. Oldcastle. 2. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. 3. Pilkington Building Products 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Guardian Industries Corp. 6. Curtain wall and automatic door manufacturer’s standard glazing suppliers will be

considered acceptable manufacturers after providing written certification of compliance with requirements set forth herein.

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS/COMPOUNDS

A. Provide color selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer’s standard colors.

B. Provide only compounds that are proven to be fully compatible with surfaces contacted.

C. Silicone Base Sealant:

1. Silicone base, single component, chemical curing; capable of withstanding movement of up to 50 percent of joint width and satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 to 80 F. Shore A hardness of maximum 50; non-staining color; color will be selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer’s standard colors.

2. Acceptable manufacturers and products:

a. General Electric “Silpruf”. b. General Electric “Silglaze 2400”. c. Woodmont Products “Chem-Caul 1000”. d. Dow Corning “790”. e. Pecora “863”.

3. Refer also to Type S-3 Sealants specified in Section 07 90 00 for silicone sealant products used for field glazing.


D. Preformed Butyl Rubber Glazing Sealant:

1. Tape or ribbon (coiled on release paper) of polymerized butyl, of mixture of butyl and polyisobutylene, compounded with inert fillers and pigments, solvent based with minimum of 95% solids, with thread of fabric reinforcement, tack-free within 24 hours, paintable, non-staining.

2. Provide combination tape and encased continuous rubber shim, of approximately 50 durometer hardness.

2.6 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Provide glazing gaskets recommended by manufacturer.

B. Molded Neoprene Glazing Gaskets:

1. Molded or extruded neoprene gaskets of profile and hardness shown for watertight construction; comply with ASTM D 2000 designation 2BC 415 to 3BC 620, black.

C. Polyvinyl Chloride Glazing Gaskets:

1. Extruded, flexible PVC gaskets of the profile and hardness shown for watertight construction; comply with ASTM D 2287.

D. Vinyl Foam Glazing Tape:

1. Closed cell, flexible, self adhesive, non-extruding, polyvinyl chloride foam tape; recommended by manufacturer for exterior, exposed, watertight, installation of glass, with only nominal pressure in the glazing channel, comply with ASTM D 1667.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 79-90 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used.

B. Spacers: Neoprene 40-50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used.

C. Compressible Filler Rod: Closed cell or waterproof, jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 510 psi compression strength for 25% deflection.

D. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION.

A. Examine the framing and glazing channel surfaces, backing, removal stop design, and the conditions under which the glazing will be performed.

B. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing of all conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

C. Do not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.2 JOB REQUIREMENTS


A. Provide secure and airtight installation of each piece of glass.

B. Each installation shall withstand normal temperature changes, loading, impact loading (for operation doors) without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain secure and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work.

C. Protect glass from edge damage at all time during handling, installation and operation of the building.

D. Glazing channel dimensions indicated provide for a minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Be responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and dimensions established.

E. Comply with combined recommendation of glass manufacturer and manufacture of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where manufacturer’s technical representative direct otherwise.

F. Comply with “Glazing Manual” by Flat Glass Marketing Association except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by the manufacturer of the glass and glazing materials.

G. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and eliminate all that have observable edge damage or face imperfections.

H. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other pieces.

3.3 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING

A. Clean the glazing channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing.

1. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. 2. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces wherever elastomeric sealants are used.

B. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.4 GLAZING

A. Comply with ANSI Standard Z97.1-(Current Edition) Safety Glazing Code.

B. Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. Set blocks in thin course of the heel bead compound.

C. Glazing shall be set with equal bearing for entire width.

D. Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and spacing, for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, except where gaskets are used for glazing.


E. Provide 1/8 in. minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

F. Voids and Filler Rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or compounded by forming voids or installing filler rods in the channel at the heel of jambs and heads (do not leave voids in the sill channels) except as otherwise indicated, depending on light size, thickness and type of glass, and complying with manufacturer’s recommendations.

G. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass that is chemically strengthened, tempered, or heat strengthened.

H. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete “wetting” or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

1. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial “wash” away from the glass.

2. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of the channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.

3. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations.

I. Wedge shaped gaskets:

1. Where driven into one side of the channel to pressurize the sealant or gasket on the opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not “walk” out when subjected to dynamic movement.

2. Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, or by proven adhesive, including embedment of gasket tail in cured heel bead.

3.5 CURE, PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.

B. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of crossed streamers to framing held away from glass and do not apply markers of any type to surfaces of glass.

C. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during the construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

D. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action and will not contribute (by washoff) to the deterioration of glazing materials and other work.

E. Wash and polish on both faces not more than four days prior to Owner’s acceptance of the work in each area.

1. Comply with glass manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Washing shall be performed by a professional firm.

END 08 81 00

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09 21 16 – GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEMS

GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEMS 09 21 16-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All heavy duty drywall stud framing for interior partitions. b. All miscellaneous light gauge steel framing for ceilings and soffits. c. All gypsum board ceiling suspension systems and related light gauge metal

framing members. d. All gypsum fire-rated and fire-rated/water resistant gypsum drywall for

ceilings, interior soffits, walls and partitions systems. e. All cementitious backer board for low walls in back-of-house areas. f. All fasteners, beads, trim, control joints and related accessory items

necessary to complete the work of this Section.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05 21 00 – Steel Joists. 3. Section 05 31 00 – Steel Deck. 4. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. Division 6 – Wood & Plastics. 6. Section 07 21 00 – Building Insulation. 7. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping. 8. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 9. Division 8 – Doors & Windows. 10. Division 9 – Finishes. 11. Division 10 – Specialties. 12. Division 21 – Fire Protection. 13. Division 22 – Plumbing. 14. Division 23 – HVAC. 15. Division 26 – Electrical.


A. Installation: Installation and application of materials specified shall be in accord with latest printed directions and specifications of manufacturers.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings:

1. Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide fire-resistance-rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA File No's. in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing and agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product data: Complete manufacturers’ product data for each product installed under work of this Section including:

1. Gypsum drywall products. 2. Gypsum drywall accessories. 3. Gypsum drywall framing and suspension systems.

C. Certification and Instructions:

1. Manufacturers’ certification stating that materials furnished comply with standards set forth in these specifications.

2. Manufacturer’s printed instruction for installation.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes.

C. Neatly stack gypsum board panels flat to prevent sagging.

D. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.

E. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.


A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Minimum Room Temperatures:

1. For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C).

2. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete.

C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials.

D. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Steel Framing and Furring:

a. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems. b. Consolidated Fabricators Corporation (CONFAB). c. Craco Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Gypsum Boards and Related Products:

a. Georgia Pacific Building Products. b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. United States Gypsum Co.

2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

A. Ceiling suspension systems may be used, at Contractor’s option, to furr down gypsum drywall ceilings in lieu of using heavy duty gypsum drywall stud sections.

B. General: Provide components, which comply with ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

D. Grid Suspension System: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members which interlock to form a modular supporting network.

E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following fire rated products:

Manufacturer Product

1. Chicago Metallic Corp. 650 Furring System 2. United States Gypsum Co. Wall-to-Wall-Heavy Duty 3. Armstrong World Industries Drywall Grid System-Heavy Duty

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS AND FURRED CEILINGS

A. Steel Framing: ASTM C 645, of profile, size, and base metal thickness required to produce assemblies complying with structural performance requirements, with sectional properties computed to conform with AISI "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

1. Steel Studs and Runners: 33 ksi, heavy duty drywall stud with 1 ¼” wide flange with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:

a. Thickness: 30 mil (nominal). b. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch. c. Depth: 1 5/8", 2 1/2", 3 5/8”, 4" and 6” or as otherwise indicated.

2. Miscellaneous Framing: 50 ksi, standard duty drywall stud with 1 ¼” wide flange with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:

a. Thickness: 19 mil (nominal).


b. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0200 c. Depth: 1 5/8", 2 ½”, 3 5/8” or as otherwise indicated.

3. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard Z-shaped furring members with slotted or non-slotted web, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M) for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and as follows:

a. Thickness: 25 gauge unless otherwise indicated. b. Face flange: 1 1/4". c. Wall-attachment flange: 3/4". d. Depth: 1", 1 1/2" unless indicated otherwise on drawings or required to fit

conditions of construction.

B. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers for applications indicated.

2.4 GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end joints.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, and as follows:

1. Type: Type “X” for all assemblies. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: 5/8” or as indicated. 4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

products for Type “X” gypsum wallboard:

a. "ToughRock FireGuard”; Georgia Pacific Building Products. b. "Fire-Shield"; Gold Bond Building Products Div. National Gypsum Co. c. "Sheetrock Brand Firecode Gypsum Panels"; United States Gypsum Co.

5. Provide water resistant, fire resistant core gypsum drywall, subject to requirements listed above, at all locations to receive ceramic tile and fiberglass reinforced wall panels (FRP).

C. Backer Board: Cementitious, water durable, board; surfaced with fiberglass reinforcing mesh on front and back; long edges wrapped; and complying with ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1325

1. Type: Cementitious Tile Backer Board, Edges: Tapered. 2. Thickness: 5/8” or as indicated. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

products for cementitious backer board:

a. “DensShield Tile Backer”; Georgia Pacific Building Products. b. “PermaBase Cement Board”; National Gypsum Co. c. “DUROCK Cement Board”; United States Gypsum Co.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction that comply with referenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board.


B. Corner-bead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim and control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:

1. Material: Formed metal complying with the following requirement:

a. Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process.

2. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047:

a. "LC" or “L” Bead (USG #200A), unless otherwise indicated.

3. One-Piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047, with slot opening covered with removable strip.

C. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002.

2.6 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application indicated.

B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape.

C. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-prepackaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.

1. Ready-Mix Formulation: Factory-premixed product. 2. Job-Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site. 3. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners

and flanges of corner beads and edge trim. 4. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. 5. All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping and topping compound.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset wood and hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of overhead structural systems to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceiling.

B. Verify that all installations are level, plumb and within specified tolerances to receive installations specified for this Project.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL


A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work, at unsupported edges of structural exterior wall sheathing and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co.

C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement, at locations indicated below to comply with details shown on Drawings:

1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at ceiling perimeters or penetration of structural elements.

2. Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.

D. Anchor framing tracks so that they do not bridge building expansion and control joints by anchoring tracks to one side only for all runs.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR FURRED AND SUSPENDED CEILINGS

A. Drywall Stud Furring: Contractor may use heavy duty drywall stud framing for furring ceilings in lieu of using grid suspension systems.

1. Frame ceilings for finish ceiling heights indicated. 2. Follow similar procedures for installation of drywall stud framing used to furr

ceilings as specified below for installation of steel framing for partitions.

B. Grid Suspension System: At Contractor’s option, suspension system may be used to furr ceilings by attaching perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces.

C. Joining: Mechanically join main beam and cross furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS

A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other construction.

1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall.

B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surface do not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing.

C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceilings to provide support for gypsum board.

D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacing indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard.


E. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum boards can be installed in the direction opposite to that of the flange.

F. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219 and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.

G. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on doorframes; install runner track section (for cripple studs) and header at head and secure to jamb studs.

1. Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above.

2. Provide continuous wood blocking attached to steel framing as indicated for fastening finish wood and other materials.

H. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated, or if none indicated, in same manner as required for door openings and install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CEMENT BACKER BOARD

A. Install backer board from floor to 2’-0” above finish floor in areas indicated in compliance with ASTM C 1280, GA-253 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten backer board to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install backer boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction

abuts structural elements. 3. Install backer boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar

materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Horizontal Installation: Abut ends of backer boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing.

1. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 2. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch

from edges and ends of boards.

C. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing.

3.7 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install boards with end joints staggered over studs in manner that minimizes the number of end-butt joints or avoid them entirely where possible.

1. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls as possible. 2. Stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board.

C. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner that minimizes the number of end-butt joints.

1. Avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. 2. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches.

D. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out.

1. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards.


2. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between boards.

3. Do not force into place.

E. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints.

1. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends.

2. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. 3. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.

F. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first.

G. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts.

H. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories.

I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls that are braced internally.

1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. area, and may be limited to not less than 75 percent of full coverage.

2. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments.

1. Provide 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. 2. Seal joints with acoustical sealant.

K. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.

3.8 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION

A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows:

1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible.

2. On partitions/walls or walls furred with resilient channels apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths that will minimize end joints.

3. On partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally (perpendicular to framing); use maximum length sheets possible to minimize end joints.

4. On Z-furring members apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods:

1. Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows: 2. Fasten with screws.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES


A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports or otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install corner beads at external corners.

C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed.

D. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound.

1. Install "LC" bead where drywall construction is tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.

2. Install "L" bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board is installed.

E. Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated, at spacings and locations required by referenced gypsum board application and finish standard, and approved by the Contracting Officer or designated representative for visual effect.

3.10 FINISHING OF DRYWALL

A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required; to prepare work for decoration.

B. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated.

C. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats and sand between coats and after last coat:

1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or taping compound.

2. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound. 3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound.

D. Finish concealed gypsum board panels by fire taping to maintain the equivalent of a new 1-hour rated system equal to UL design L512.

E. Finish cementitious backer board by taping and skim-coating surfaces to smooth and match surface of gypsum board above so that texture does not telegraph through finishes.


A. Inspect installation for defective materials and workmanship and promptly repair or replace any defective items with new, acceptable products.

1. Fasteners:

a. When face paper is punctured, drive new screw approximately 1 ½” from defective fastener and remove original screw.

b. Fill damaged surface with joint taping compound and repair facer surface with joint tape.

2. Fill cracks or voids and prepare finished gypsum sheathing surface to receive EIFS work.


B. Remove excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of legally, leaving work areas in a clean, safe condition ready for work by other trades.

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer.

B. Ensure gypsum drywall construction to be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END 09 21 16

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09 30 00 – Tile

TILE 09 30 00-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All interior ceramic floor tile and base. b. All interior ceramic wall tile. c. All interior glass wall tile. d. All interior quarry tile and base. e. All bond coat mortar, additives, grout, expansion joints and miscellaneous

materials for a complete installation. f. Metal termination and control joint strips. g. Slip resistive ceramic tile surface treatment. h. Coordination between tile installer and concrete subcontractor for surface

preparation of tile beds. i. Clean up.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 03 35 36 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish. 4. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 06 40 00 – Architectural Woodwork. 6. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 7. Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors & Frames. 8. Section 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors. 9. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 10. Section 09 90 00 – Painting. 11. Section 10 21 13 – Toilet Compartments. 12. Section 10 28 13 – Toilet Accessories. 13. Division 11 – Equipment.

B. Concrete, vapor barrier and concrete finishing is specified in Section 03 30 00 and is critical to the ceramic tile installations specified herein.

1. Refer to Section 03 30 00 for concrete surface finishing and ensure specified finishing of surfaces will result in proper installation of ceramic tile flooring systems.

2. Refer to Section 03 30 00 for curing materials and methods to ensure specified options of curing concrete will result in proper installation of ceramic tile floor finishes.

C. Polished concrete floor finishes as specified in Section 03 35 36 shall be coordinated with installation of tile specified in this Section.

D. Coordinate tile installation with clearance undercuts for doors specified in Section 08 11 00, Metal Doors & Frames; Section 08 14 16, Flush Wood Doors.


A. Single Source Responsibility:

TILE 09 30 00-2

1. Obtain tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

2. Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project.

C. All tile shall be comply with applicable portions of ANSI A137.1 – 1988 standards.

D. Bond coat setting bed shall conform to ANSI A118.4 - 1992.

E. Grout shall conform to ANSI A118.6 - 1992 for type specified.

F. Workmanship shall comply to the following:

1. Tile installation shall conform to ANSI A118.5 – 1992. 2. Grout installation shall conform to ANSI A118.10 – 1992.

G. Expansion joint sealant shall comply with ASTM C920.

1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. The Tile Council of North America, Inc. (TCNA), “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation” (2011 Edition).

1. Interior Applications: Method F113.

B. ANSI A137.1 – 1988, Ceramic Tile.

C. ANSI A118.5 – 1992, Mortar Bed.

D. ANSI A118.10 – 1992, Grout.


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, product shall demonstrate a minimum static coefficient of friction of 0.6 when tested per ASTM C-1028.

B. Floor Tile Installation: Floor tile installation shall perform to the referenced standards specified above.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in accord with Section 01 33 00.

B. Product data:

1. Product data for each type of product specified including:

a. Master Grade Certificate for each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

b. Tile manufacturer’s Product Certificate of compliance with specified standards including slip resistance of surface.

c. Tile Manufacturer’s printed instructions for installation including references to ANSI standards for specific applications.

TILE 09 30 00-3

1.) Interior method for thin setting tile on concrete substrate using latex-Portland cement mortar.

d. Setting bed mortar, grout and additives. e. Expansion requirements and methods of installation.

C. Shop drawings:

1. Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. 2. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation

joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

a. Exact locations of expansion joints shall be conveyed to Contractor for coordination with concrete subcontractor for preparation of substrate.

b. Base locations from actual field dimensions of walls during construction and before exterior concrete entrance slab and frost walls are poured.

D. Samples:

1. Initial Selection:

a. For each type of tile and grout indicated. b. Include samples of accessories involving color selection.

2. Verification:

a. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.

b. Units of each type of trim and accessory.


A. General: Deliver and store in accord with Section 01 66 00.

B. Packaged Materials:

1. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.

2. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

C. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

E. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

F. Temporary Protective Coatings:

1. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units.

2. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


A. Confirm that tile pattern and expansion joint layout are accurately coordinated with expansion and control joints in concrete substrates.

TILE 09 30 00-4

B. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.

C. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup.

D. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated.

B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting.

C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearances characteristics, provide specific products or materials or equal as approved in advance by Contracting Officer or designated representative per Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures.

D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Interior Unglazed Ceramic Floor Tile:

1. Toilets:

a. Floor: Dal-Tile - Fabrique, Color Number P690, "Gris Linen", 12" x 12". b. Base: Dal-Tile – Semi-Gloss Cove Base (A-3601), Color Number K175,

"Biscuit", 6" x 6".

B. Interior Unglazed Quarry Tile:

1. Back-of-House and all Serving Areas:

a. Floor: Dal-Tile – Quarry Tile, Color Number OQ42, "Arid Gray", 6" x 6" with abrasive grain.

b. Base: Dal-Tile – Quarry Tile Cove Base (Q-3565), Color Number OQ42, "Arid Gray", 5" x 6".

C. Interior Ceramic Wall Tile:

1. Toilets:

a. Field Tile: Dal-Tile – Semi-Gloss, Color Number K175, "Biscuit", 3" x 6". b. Accent Band: Dal-Tile – Semi-Gloss, Color Number K175, "Biscuit", 2" x 6"

Bullnose.

TILE 09 30 00-5

2. Burger King:

a. Ceramic Technics – Sassuolo Stone Tones, "White Glossy", 3" x 12". b. Granitifiandre/Eurowest – Legni High Tech-Ariostea, Product Number

PAR15323, "Rovere Moka", 6" x 36".

3. Dining Area Columns:

a. Dal-Tile – Slimlite Panels Terra Collection, Color Number TP42, "Vapor", 12" x 20".

D. Interior Glass Wall Tile:

1. Popeye's:

a. Interceramic – Mosaic Tile, DB Pattern/Border/Mural, "Mardigras Carnival", 1" x 1".

E. Refer to schedules on drawings for scheduled finishes and interior elevations for patterns.

F. Mortars and Grouts:

1. Provide Mapei “Kerabond” premium premixed thinset mortar for all floor and wall tile installations.

2. Provide Mapei “Keracolor” premium sanded grout for all wall tile installations. 3. Provide Mapei “Kerapoxy” stain-free epoxy grout for all glass wall tile, floor tile and

base installations. 4. Provide Mapei “Keralastic” water emulsion latex additive, serving as replacement for

part or all of gaging water, or type specifically recommended by manufacturer for use with field-mixed Portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.

G. Provide manufacturer’s standard membrane product for crack suppression and waterproofing that complies with ANSI A118.10.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Wall Tile Metal Corner Trim:

1. Height to match tile and setting-bed thickness. 2. Product shall be as manufactured by Schluter.

a. Toilets: ECK-E profile in brushed stainless steel (304) (EB) finish. b. Dining Area Column Enclosures and Burger King Orders and Pick-Up: Quadec

profile in satin anodized aluminum finish.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, half-hard exposed-edge material.

1. Product shall be as manufactured by Schluter:

a. Install at all transitions between tile and dissimilar flooring materials, designed specifically for flooring applications.

1.) Reno-Ramp profile in satin anodized aluminum finish.

b. Install at outside edge of glass/ceramic wall tile.

TILE 09 30 00-6

1.) Jolly profile in anodized satin aluminum finish.

D. Metal Expansion Joint Strips: “U”-shape movement profile with edge protection, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications where expansion/contraction is necessary, half-hard exposed metal edge.

1. Install at all transitions between tile and tile expansion/contraction joints. 2. Strips shall provide a movement zone made of soft synthetic rubber. 3. Product shall be as manufactured by Schluter, Dilex-KS profile in stainless steel (304)

(E) finish.

E. Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to manufacturer of tile and grout manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation, 112 North Alfred St., Alexandria, VA 22134 or Ceramic Tile Institute, 700 N. Virgil Ave., Los Angeles, CA 90029.

F. Slip Resistive Sealer: Provide natural look, colorless penetrating protective sealer equal to Miracle Sealants Company, “511 Inpregnator”.

1. Sealer shall provide water, stain and slip resistance. 2. Sealer shall be as approved by tile and grout manufacturers for use on specified

products.

2.4 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in, or behind, tile has been completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that control and expansion joints in exterior concrete slab are exactly in alignment with tile pattern layout for alignment of tile expansion joints.


3.2 PREPARATION

TILE 09 30 00-7

A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.

B. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated.

B. TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCNA installation methods indicated.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown.

D. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

E. Accurately form intersections and returns.

1. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. 2. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight

aligned joints. 3. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that

plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

F. Jointing Pattern:

1. Lay tile to grid pattern indicated on drawings. 2. Align joints when adjoining tile on floor and base when units are same size. 3. Provide factory formed inside and outside corners at base installations where corners

must be turned. 4. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall

area. 5. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. 6. Provide uniform joint widths of 1/8-inch unless otherwise shown.

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including isolation joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile.

1. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. 2. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above expansion joints in concrete substrates. 3. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Section 07920,

Building & Pavement Joint Sealers.

H. Control Joints: Locate control joints at sawcut or construction joints as indicated by installing specified metal edge strips.

I. Install penetrating sealer to unpolished floor tile per manufacturer’s printed instructions.

1. Allow to penetrate surface 3 to 5 minutes and remove ALL excess by buffing surface with a clean dry towel.

TILE 09 30 00-8

2. Allow penetrating sealer to cure for a minimum of 12 to 24 hours before proceeding with grout installation.

J. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the installation standards.

1. Apply penetrating sealer to all grout joints using paint brush. 2. Wipe excess sealer off surface of tile with a clean dry towel before it dries.

3.4 FLOOR AND WALL INSTALLATION METHODS

A. Glazed and Unglazed Ceramic Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated for setting bed methods and TCNA installation methods related to types of sub-floor construction, and grout types.

B. Glazed Ceramic Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated for setting bed methods and TCNA installation methods related to types of wall substrate, and grout types.

C. Setting Pattern:

1. Dal-Tile - Fabrique floor tile shall be set in an alternating 90-degree pattern. 2. All other floor tile shall be set in a conventional non-directional pattern.


A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

a. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation.

b. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning.

2. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.

B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, un-bonded, and otherwise defective tile work.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer to ensure that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile base and floors. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

END 09 30 00

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09 51 00 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All non-rated acoustical panel ceilings. b. All vinyl faced panel ceilings. c. 15/16” grid and suspension system. d. Perimeter reveal edge moldings, standard wall angles and custom edge

extensions. e. Miscellaneous accessory items for complete and proper installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 5. Section 09 30 00 – Tile. 6. Section 09 77 00 – Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels. 7. Section 09 90 00 – Painting. 8. Division 21 – Fire Protection. 9. Division 23 – HVAC. 10. Division 26 – Electrical.


A. Installation of acoustical ceilings shall be by workmen with a minimum experience of 3 project installations of comparable extent as proposed project.

B. Performance:

1. Suspension system components, hangers and fastening devices supporting light fixtures, ceiling grids and acoustical units shall permit a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span.

2. Finished acoustical ceiling system shall be level with 1/8 inch in 12 feet. 3. Panels shall have edges in alignment.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units and Suspension System: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-alarm system components, security system components and partition system.


1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers complete printed product data:

1. Acoustical tile ceiling pads. 2. Vinyl faced ceiling pads. 3. Acoustical tile ceiling suspension system. 4. Accessory items including reveal edge trim.

C. Samples:

1. Samples, 12” square, of each type acoustical tile or vinyl faced gypsum panel. 2. Samples, 12” long, of exposed grid tee and reveal edge shadow line perimeter wall

angle.


A. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00.

B. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

C. Store acoustical ceiling units to comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for temperature and humidity.

D. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Complete installation of roofing materials and wall/ceiling perimeter painting before beginning work.

2. Maintain humidity of 65%-70% in area where acoustical materials are to be installed, during and 24 hours before and after installation.

3. Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. prior to and during installation of materials.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

B. Acoustical ceiling units: furnish minimum of two extra cartons of units or 2% of the amount installed, whichever is greater.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Use only specified products of the following manufacturers of grid systems and perimeter reveal.


CODE MANUFACTURER

1. USG USG Interiors, Inc. 101 S. Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606; (312) 321-4000

B. Use only specified products of the following manufactures of ceiling pads.

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. USG USG Interiors, Inc. 101 S. Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606; (312) 321-4000

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Suspension systems shall be intermediate duty grid with all exposed surfaces having a painted finish in color to be selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1. Acceptable products for 15/16” standard grid: MANUFACTURE NON-RATED SYSTEM

a. USG “DX System”

B. Hanger wire for grid system shall be minimum of No. 12 gauge galvanized soft annealed, mild steel wire.

C. Shadowline molding: Perimeter edge reveal shall be minimum, .020 inch steel channel, 3/4 inch x 3/4 inch Shadowline molding shape compatible with grid system specified above and painted to match exposed 15/16” tees at areas indicated.

D. Wall angle: Perimeter edge, 7/8” wall angle molding shape compatible with grid system specified above at areas indicated.

E. Wall angle extension: Custom perimeter edge extension shall be minimum .050 sheet metal compatible with grid system specified above and painted to match exposed 15/16" tees at locations indicated.

F. Acoustical Panels, General

1. Acoustical panels shall conform to Federal Specifications SS-S-118a, Type III, Class 25 and shall meet the requirements of sound absorption described in the Acoustical Association Bulletin.

G. Products: Refer to drawing schedule and reflected ceiling plan for location of products.

1. Standard acoustical lay-in panels as indicated shall be a mineral fiberboard, 24 inches by 48 inches by 5/8 inch thick, fissured design, square edge with a factory applied white vinyl latex paint finish, USG product number 586.

2. Standard vinyl faced lay-in panels as indicated shall be mineral fiberboard, 24 inches by 48 inches by 5/8 inch thick, square edge with a factory applied white vinyl stippled finish, USG Clean Room, product number 56091.

3. Standard vinyl faced lay-in panels as indicated shall be mineral fiberboard, 24 inches by 24 inches by 5/8 inch thick, square edge with a factory applied white vinyl stippled finish, USG Clean Room, product number 56099.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION


A. Examine surfaces to receive suspended acoustical units for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall coordinate work with subcontractors to assure that light fixture layouts and all grills are located in accordance with drawings.

B. Suspension system shall be supported by 12 gauge hanger wires, nominally 48 inches on center.

1. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member and at light fixtures, 6 inches from vertical surface.

2. Wrap wire a minimum of 3 times horizontally, turning ends upward.

C. Main runners shall be spaced as required for panel size and shall be level and square to adjacent walls.

1. Space cross runners as required by panel size. 2. All joints shall meet perfectly.

D. Install reveal edge perimeter shadow line and angle wall molding at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces at areas indicated; miter corners where wall moldings intersect.

E. Install custom wall angle extension at intersection of suspended ceiling and higher gypsum drywall ceiling at locations indicated.

F. Acoustical units shall be installed to bear all around on suspension members; width of border units shall generally be a minimum of one-half unit dimension.

G. Joints in acoustical units around pipes, ducts, conduit, grilles, fixtures and hangers shall be cut fit neatly and where necessary, provide a plated escutcheon cover to trim out unit.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled or discolored tile, touch-up scratches, voids and other defects in painted surfaces.

B. Tile that is defective or improperly installed shall be replaced.

C. Remove all excess materials and debris from site and dispose of properly; leave area clean.

D. Leave extra replacement materials at Project Site and protect until acceptance by Owner.

END 09 51 00

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09 65 00 – RESILIENT FLOORING

RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Preparatory work where required. b. Rubber cove base. c. Adhesives, accessories and anchorage as required. d. Cleaning.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 03 35 36 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish. 4. Section 06 40 00 – Architectural Woodwork. 5. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 6. Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors & Frames. 7. Section 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors. 8. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 9. Section 09 30 00 – Tile. 10. Section 09 77 00 – Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels. 11. Section 09 90 00 – Painting.


A. Provide resilient flooring and related materials that comply with the following fire test performance criteria determined by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Critical Radiant Flux – not less than 0.45 watts per sq. cm. per ASTM E648 or NFPR 253.

2. Flame Spread – 0-25 per ASTM E84. 3. Smoke Developed – 0-450 per ASTM E84. 4. Smoke Density – 0-450 per ASTM E662.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data:

1. Material descriptions. 2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for each project. 3. Two copies of manufacturer’s recommended maintenance methods, procedures

and products.

C. Samples:

1. Contracting Officer or designated representative will make final selections for type, style and design specified.


2. Provide for selection purposes:

a. Manufacturer’s current standard chain of color samples for vinyl base. b. Manufacturer’s current standard chain of color samples for vinyl reducer

strips.

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver and store products in accordance with provisions of Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00.

B. Deliver products to Project in manufacturer’s original unopened cartons and store in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage.

C. Follow manufacturer’s written instructions for temperature and humidity limitations for storage.


A. Maintain temperature in space to receive flooring between 70 degrees F., and 90 degrees F., for not less than 24 hours before and 48 hours after installation.

B. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F., after flooring is installed except as specified in Paragraph 1.5A.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Use only the products of the following manufacturers of rubber cove base:

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. JON Johnsonite Flooring 16910 Munn Road Chagrin Falls, OH 44023 (800) 899-8916

2.2 FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS

A. Resilient Base: Rubber cove base shall be furnished as indicated.

1. Rubber cove base (with toe) shall be provided at all hard surface flooring requiring base as indicated.

2. All rubber base moldings shall be .125 minimum gauge, in continuous rolls as long as practical to minimize butt joints.

3. All inside and outside corners shall be factory preformed. 4. Acceptable rubber base products:

a. All rubber base used in the Dining areas indicated shall be:

1.) Manufacturer: JON. 2.) Type: Rubber Cove Base. 3.) Size: 6 inch. 4.) Color: Number 179, “Steel”.

b. All rubber base used in the Janitor and Mechanical/Electrical areas indicated shall be:


1.) Manufacturer: JON. 2.) Type: Rubber Cove Base. 3.) Size: 4 inch. 4.) Color: Number 48, “Grey”.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesives, primer and other materials required shall be waterproof of type recommended by flooring manufacturer.

B. Latex type trowelable underlayment per resilient flooring manufacturer’s recommendations shall be provided at all locations where patch leveling is required before installation of new floor surfaces.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION OF SURFACES

A. Examine substrates for excessive moisture and unevenness that would prevent execution and quality of resilient flooring specified.

B. Notify Contracting Officer in writing of all unacceptable conditions observed.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove dirt, oil, grease of other foreign matter from surfaces to receive resilient floor finishes.

B. Prime wall surfaces and floor surfaces for adhesion of transition strips if recommended by manufacturer.

C. Refer to ASTM F710, "Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring" for preparation of concrete floor slab prior to installation of resilient flooring.

3.3 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES

A. Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.

B. Apply adhesives uniformly over surface, covering only that amount of areas that can be covered by flooring material within the recommended working time of the adhesive.

C. Apply adhesives with notched trowel or other suitable tool.

1. Do not soil walls, bases or adjacent areas with adhesives. 2. Promptly remove any spillage.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Resilient base shall be installed using installation and workmanship conforming to printed specifications of manufacturer whose flooring is being used.

B. Vinyl reducer strips and transitions shall be glued to surfaces thoroughly and neatly with adhesive recommended by manufacturer.


3.5 FINISHING AND CLEANING

A. Upon completion of floor covering, flooring subcontractor shall remove all equipment, debris and excess materials resulting from work and leave all floors broom clean.

B. Clean surfaces of resilient base of all excess cement, dirt and markings.

END 09 65 00.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09 77 00 – FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS 09 77 00-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. General Contractor provide:

a. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels. b. Fiber-reinforced laminates (FRL). c. Edge and joint mouldings and accessories. d. Adhesives. e. Panel joint sealants. f. Fasteners.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Division 6 – Wood & Plastics. 3. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping. 4. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 5. Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors & Frames. 6. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 7. Section 09 30 00 – Tile. 8. Section 09 51 00 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings. 9. Section 09 65 00 – Resilient Tile Flooring. 10. Section 09 90 00 – Painting. 11. Section 10 26 00 – Wall Surface Protection Systems.

B. Corner guards for wall protection to replace panel manufacturer's standard corner trim are specified in Section 10 26 00, Wall Surface Protection Systems.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacturing products for system indicated and with at least 5 years successful experience in applications similar to that required for this project.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain materials for system from either a single manufacturer or from manufacturers approved by the system manufacturer as compatible with other system components.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for each material and component part with specified requirements.

B. Samples: Submit full range of color samples for each type of panel, trim and accessory required.


1. Provide 3” square samples of sheet materials and 3” lengths of trim members for

color verification after selections have been made.

C. Certificate of Compliance: Submit manufacturer’s certification that all materials furnished for project comply with requirements specified herein.


A. Panels and accessories shall be sorted so as not to scratch or damage the surface.

B. Panels shall be stored inside on a flat dry surface.

C. Panels shall be preconditioned for at least 24 hours in temperature and humidity conditions of areas of installation.

2. PRODUCT


A. Use only the products of the following manufacturers of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) wall panels:

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. MAR Marlite 202 Harger Street Dover, OH 44622 (800) 377-1221

B. Use only the products of the following manufacturers of fiber-reinforced laminate (FRL) wall panels:

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. PAN Panolam Industries International, Inc. 20 Progress Drive Shelton, CT 06484 (888) 375-9255

2.2 PRODUCTS

A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) wall panels for use throughout shall be provided as indicated on drawings.

1. Back-of-House, Janitor Closets and Mechanical/Electrical: MAR - “Standard” series FRP panels with pebbled surface, color P 100 “White”.

B. Fiber-reinforced laminate (FRL) wall panels for use throughout shall be provided as indicated on drawings.

1. Burger King Serving: PAN – FRL Nevamar Decorative surface with suede finish, color NS473 “Café Sienna”.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Technical Data:

1. FRP:


a. Flexural Strength: 14 x 103 psi per ASTM D790. b. Tensile Strength: 7 x 103 psi per ASTM D638. c. Barcol Hardness: 45 per ASTM D2583. d. Izod Impact: 4.0 ft-lb/in2 per ASTM D256. e. Water Absorption: 0.16% (24 hrs at 77° F.)/0.16% (24 hrs at 25° F.) per

ASTM D570. f. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A per ASTM E84.

1.) Flame spread < 25. 2.) Smoke developed < 450.

2. FRL:

a. Flexural Strength: 20,148 psi per ASTM D790. b. Wear Resistance (Cycles): 3,500 typical per NEMA 3.13. c. IMO Certified for marine use. d. Surface Burning Characteristics: US Standard UL-723/ASTM E 84 Class A.

B. FRP Panel:

1. Nominal Thickness: 0.09” 2. Nominal Weight: 0.73 lb/ft2 3. Width: 4’-0” 4. Height: 10’-0” to eliminate horizontal joints between floor and ceiling. 5. Grid Pattern: None. 6. Finish: Clear "Sani-Coat" sealer.

C. FRL Panel:

1. Thickness: 0.075” 2. Width: 5’-0” 3. Height: 10’-0” to eliminate horizontal joints between floor and ceiling.

D. Components: Provide adhesives, sealants, moldings, fasteners and other components for complete system as made by manufacturer of panel product or recommended in writing by such manufacturer as best suited for purpose intended.

1. Moldings: Moldings, colored to match panels, as recommended by manufacturer for each particular condition.

2. Sealant: Super Silicone Adhesive, SS-W (white) for white panels, SS-C (clear) for colored panels.

3. Adhesive: Moisture-retardant Type I material designed for securement of panels to gypsum drywall and plywood backing panels as recommended by manufacturer.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces to receive panels for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Tape and feather joints between gypsum drywall and plywood to provide a smooth transition between dissimilar materials that will not telegraph through face of finish.

C. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION


A. Comply fully with recommendations of manufacturer and final shop drawings.

B. Conform to USDA Requirements.

C. Install units in vertical orientation indicated and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Keep vertical lines straight and plumb. 2. Provide all grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim,

and accessories for complete installation.

D. Unless otherwise indicated or approved, secure panels with adhesive directly to gypsum drywall and plywood backer panels.

1. Comply with panel manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Provide supplemental mechanical fasteners only if required by conditions, and as

indicated on final shop drawings.

E. Provide appropriate moldings at all panel joints:

1. Internal corners, at intersections with other construction, elsewhere as required. 2. Cut face of moldings to fit at top of wall base to ensure that base seals against

face of panel. 3. Exterior corners shall receive corner guards as specified in Section 10 26 00, Wall

Surface Protection Systems.

F. Seal panels at moldings full length, at edges of cutouts for piping and the like, at tops and bottoms of panels, and at all other intersections with other construction.

G. Coordinate installation with that of trades providing studs and other concealed supports.

H. Locate all fasteners only over centers of concealed supports, including properly located and installed nailers or support plates between studs where required.

3.3 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT, INSTRUCTIONS

A. Verify that accessories required for each unit are properly installed.

B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Provide instructions to AAFES maintenance staff on care of panel surfaces.

END 09 77 00.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09 90 00 – PAINTING

PAINTING 09 90 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Surface preparation for all items to be field finished. b. Priming and finish coating indicated for interior and exterior finishes. c. Color coding and finishing of exposed, unfinished interior and exterior piping,

ducts and related mechanical and electrical system components. d. Preparation and touch-up of factory finished items. e. Preparation and sealing of exposed concrete floor slabs. f. Protection of finished construction. g. Cleaning.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 4. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel. 5. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 6. Section 06 40 00 – Architectural Woodwork. 7. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 8. Division 8 – Doors & Windows. 9. Division 9 – Finishes.


A. Included on label of containers:

1. Manufacturer’s name and stock numbers. 2. Type of paint. 3. Color. 4. Label analysis.

B. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Provide primers, under coatings and finish paint products from one manufacturer. 2. Provide stain and stain products produced by one manufacturer. 3. Where field touch-up is required on factory finishes, and is acceptable to the

Contracting Officer, provide touch-up materials matching those used by the manufacturer of the product needing touch-up work.

C. Fungus Control: Coatings shall show no fungus growth when tested as specified in Federal Test Method Standard No. 141, Method 6271.1.

D. Field Quality Control: Request review of first finished room, space or item of each color scheme required for color, texture and workmanship.

E. Work shall be done by skilled craftsmen: all paints shall be smoothly and evenly spread on or flowed on and shall be free from runs, sags, crawls, holidays or other defects.

PAINTING 09 90 00-2

1. All painting shall be done under favorable weather conditions, or conditions suitable for production of good, durable work.

2. No succeeding coats shall be applied until preceding coat is thoroughly dry. 3. No paint is to be applied to a metal surface in temperatures below 50 degrees F.

F. Painter will receive surfaces to be painted or otherwise treated by him, free from foreign matter such as concrete, taping compound and grease caused by other crafts and shall be required to do normal sandpapering and cleaning before proceeding with his work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical information, label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use.

1. List each material and cross reference the specific coating and finish system and application.

2. Identify each material by the manufacturer’s catalog number and general classification.

C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.

1. Define each separate coat. 2. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. 3. Resubmit until required sheen, color and texture are achieved. 4. Submit samples on the following substrates for Contracting Officer’s review of

color and texture:

a. Painted Gypsum Board: Provide 12” x 12” samples of each color and material on hardboard.

b. Stained or Natural Wood for Touch-up: Provide 4” x 8” samples of natural and stained wood finish on actual wood surfaces.

c. Ferrous Metal: Provide 4” x 4” samples of sheet metal and 4” x 8” samples of solid metal for each color and finish.


A. Deliver and store products and materials in accordance with provisions of Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00.

B. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Federal Specification number, if applicable. 4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number.

C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) and maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

PAINTING 09 90 00-3

1. Protect from freezing. 2. Keep storage area neat and orderly. 3. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 4. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected

from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.


A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied.

B. Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other crafts and surfaces not being painted concurrently or not to be painted.

C. Do not apply paint in areas where dust is being generated.

D. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).

E. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).

F. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Use only the specified products of the following paint manufacturer:

MANUFACTURER CODE

1. Sherwin Williams SHE

B. Use floor sealer for areas not scheduled to receive polished finish or other finish materials as manufactured by Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corp, 4226 Kansas Avenue, Kansas City, KS 66016, (913) 233-1750.

C. Materials selected for coating systems shall be from a single manufacturer as specified for areas indicated.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Paint Materials List:

1. Exterior Metal Primer:

a. SHE: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer.

2. Exterior Metal Finish:

a. SHE: Pro-Industrial DTM Acrylic Gloss.

3. Exterior Unit Masonry Primer/Sealer:

a. SHE: Pro Industrial Heavy Duty Blockfiller.

PAINTING 09 90 00-4

4. Exterior Unit Masonry Finish.

a. SHE: Pro-Industrial DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss.

5. Interior Metal Primer:

a. SHE: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer.

6. Interior Metal Finish:

a. SHE: Pro-Industrial DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss.

7. Gypsum Board Ceiling Primer.

a. SHE: Pro-Mar 200 Zero VOC Latex Wall Primer.

8. Gypsum Board Ceiling Finish:

a. SHE: Pro-Mar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat.

9. Gypsum Board Wall Primer:

a. SHE: Pro-Mar 200 Zero VOC Latex Wall Primer.

10. Gypsum Board Wall Finish:

a. SHE: Pro-Mar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel.

B. Concrete Floor Sealer: Concrete finish floor sealer shall be Dayton Sure Hard Densifier (J17), single component transparent liquid sealer developed specifically for concrete floor surfaces.

1. Liquid sealer shall be a water based product and VOC compliant to meet local jurisdiction.

2. Sealer shall be resistant to oil and grease. 3. Sealer shall form a durable, glossy film finish.

2.3 MIXING AND TINTING COLORS

A. Colors shall be as indicated on drawings.

B. Tint primer per manufacturer's recommendation for best topcoat color development.

C. Paints and enamels shall be store tinted and mixed.

1. Fungicidal agent shall be incorporated into paint by manufacturer. 2. No materials are to be reduced or changed except as specified by manufacturer.

D. Job mixing and job tinting will not be permitted.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into acceptable condition through preparatory work.

B. Call adverse conditions to attention of Contracting Officer for direction on responsibility for rectifying conditions.

C. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are suitable.

PAINTING 09 90 00-5

3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. All puttying of cracks, open joints and other defects shall be done after primer or first coat is dry and before second coat is applied.

1. Putty is to be spackling or a similar non-shrinking compound.

B. Underwriters or Factory Mutual rated door and frame labels:

1. Do not remove factory applied label ratings from doors or frames. 2. Mask labels to protect legibility.

C. All metal surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned with benzine or mineral spirits before any paint is applied.

D. Rust on metal surfaces shall be removed by sanding, wire brushing, or application of navel jelly, as appropriate for surface and area being cleaned and shall be left clean and ready to receive finish coat.

E. Feather edge sound paint around chipped areas by grinding or sanding prior to touch-up of shop primer coats so following coats will blend in smoothly without photographing.

F. Consult manufacturers of factory primed or finished items for written instructions on touch-up of primer or finish where touch-up of items is acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

G. Concrete surfaces to receive water based epoxy finish:

1. Remove all dirt, oils and accumulated salts prior to employing specific surface preparation methods.

2. Remove form/release agents by pressure washing or other methods recommended by manufacturer.

3. Light abrasive blasting required per manufacturers recommendations.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitation recommended by paint manufacturer.

B. Test surface with a moisture meter.

C. Apply paint coatings with suitable brushes, rollers, or airless spray equipment.

D. Rate of application shall not exceed paint manufacturer’s recommendation for surface involved and shall be not less than wet mil thickness indicated in 3.5 for various products and surfaces.

E. Keep brushes, rollers and spray equipment clean, dry and free from contaminants and suitable for finish required.

F. Drying time between succeeding coats shall be as recommended by manufacturer of coating.

G. Slightly vary color between succeeding coats.

1. Sand and dust as required between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of 3 feet.

2. No runs, blisters, glue spots, checking, crazing or cracking will be allowed.

PAINTING 09 90 00-6

H. Finish coats shall be smooth, free of brush marks, roller fibers, streaks, runs, laps or pile up of paints, and skipped or missed areas.

I. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no overlapping.

J. Refinish entire wall where portion of finish has been damaged or is not acceptable.

K. Back prime all trim that has not been pre-finished at factory before installation.

L. Shop coat and prime coat touch-up on metal shall be done while metal surface is bright and clean.

M. Mouldings or ornaments that are painted shall be left clean and true to details with no undue amount of paint in corners and depressions.

N. Final coat of interior finish shall not be applied until all other crafts, except floor covering, are finished with their work, their materials and debris removed and premises turned over in broomclean condition.

3.4 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Exterior Ferrous Metals (Including but not limited to Factory Primed Hollow Metal, Metal Fabrications, Lintel Angles): Full-gloss finish.

1. Primer: 1 coat of exterior metal primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of exterior metal finish or more as required to achieve

desired color.

B. All exterior metal components including soffit panels, copings, trim and accessory items shall be factory finished and will not require field coating.

C. All non-ferrous items including aluminum storefront system shall be factory finished and will not require field coating.

D. Exterior Unit Masonry Primer/Sealer: Semi-gloss finish.

1. Primer: 1 coat of interior unit masonry primer/sealer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of interior unit masonry finish or more as required to

achieve desired color.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Interior Ferrous Metals (Including Factory Primed Hollow Metal): Semi gloss finish.

1. Primer: 1 coat of interior metal primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of interior metal finish or more as required to achieve

desired color.

B. Miscellaneous interior metal surfaces such as exposed ducts, conduit, hangers, etc., shall receive preparatory cleaning and surfaces painted as follows:

1. Primer: 1 coat of interior metal primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of interior metal finish or more as required to achieve

desired color.

a. Finish in same color as surface on which it is mounted.

C. Gypsum Drywall Ceilings: Flat finish.

PAINTING 09 90 00-7

1. Primer: 1 coat of gypsum board ceiling primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of gypsum board ceiling finish or more as required to


D. Gypsum Drywall Walls: Eg-shel finish.

1. Primer: 1 coat of gypsum board wall primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of gypsum board wall finish or more as required to


3.6 PAINT THICKNESS

A. Wet thicknesses for various products shall be as recommended by paint manufacturer or as follows, whichever is greater:

1. Concrete Masonry Undercoating – 2.0 mils. 2. Concrete Masonry Finish – 3.2 mils. 3. Metal Primer – 2.3 mils. 4. Metal Finish – 3.5 mils. 5. Gypsum Primer – 1.6 mils. 6. Gypsum Finish – 2.1 mils.

3.7 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER APPLICATION

A. Clean floor surfaces free of all foreign materials, stains, construction dust and thoroughly inspect for structural soundness of surface.

1. Concrete floor slabs shall be allowed to cure for 28-days minimum prior to application of sealer.

2. Avoid application in direct sunlight or to hot surfaces.

B. Apply floor sealer per manufacturers written instructions using spray, brush or roller equipment.

1. Apply product at a rate of approximately 250 square feet per gallon. 2. Maintain a wet edge while applying. 3. Do not roll or brush excessively or when material begins to become tacky. 4. Avoid runs, bubbles and puddling and remove excess material with a brush or

roller before surface becomes tacky.

C. Apply two separate thin applications of sealer allowing the first coat to cure for 2-4 hours before installation of the second application.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades and surfaces not being painted.

B. Protect completed work from damage by other trades.

3.9 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP

A. At conclusion of work, remove all empty containers, rags, drop clothes, excess materials and debris from project site.

B. Remove drops, splatters and runs from surfaces not scheduled to receive paint.

C. Touch up or repaint any skips, holidays, mars or thin spots.

END 09 90 00

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10 14 00 – SPECIALTY SIGNS

SPECIALTY SIGNS 10 14 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Installation of exterior AAFES furnished building signage indicated. b. Installation of exterior AAFES furnished monument signage indicated. c. Installation of exterior AAFES furnished drive-through service equipment,

menu board and signage. d. Accessible parking signage. e. Site directional and traffic control signage. f. Entry door accessibility identifications. g. Interior room identification signage. h. Interior accessibility identifications. i. Coordination of interior AAFES furnished/AAFES installed signage, menu

boards and graphics indicated. j. Accessories for installing signage and graphics.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 4. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 6. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 7. Section 09 30 00 – Tile. 8. Section 09 77 00 – Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels. 9. Section 09 90 00 – Painting. 10. Division 32 – Sitework.

B. Various sign products are indicated to be furnished by AAFES and installed by Contractor.

1. This Section establishes a quality standard for installation of signage furnished by AAFES to the same degree as for signage furnished under this Section.

2. Contractor shall coordinate, receive, store and install AAFES furnished signage products with identical standards as those set forth below for signage furnished by Contractor.


A. Uniformity of Manufacturer: For each sign form and graphic image process indicated furnish products of a single manufacturer.

B. Where manufacturers or supplier/installers are specified, equal manufacturers, suppliers and installer s will be considered prior to Solicitation and subject to compliance with the provisions set forth in Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of sign required.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of specialty signs.

1. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale details of sign wording and lettering layout.

2. Show anchorages and accessory items. 3. Furnish location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent

construction.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each sign form and material showing finishes, colors, surface textures and qualities of manufacturer and design of each sign component including custom and stock graphics.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following manufacturers of interior plastic room identification signage indicated and not provided by AAFES:

1. Best Sign Systems 1202 North Park Avenue Montrose, Colorado 81402 (800) 235-2378

2. Premier Sign System 4850 West Belmont Avenue Chicago, Illinois 60641 Phone: 312-283-1181

3. Mohawk Sign Systems P.O. Box 966 Schenectady, NY 12301-0966 Phone: 518-842-5303

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Custom exterior site identification, directional, and traffic control signage shall be constructed as indicated on drawings from manufacturers standard and custom products and fabrication techniques.

B. Interior plastic room identification and symbol of accessibility signage shall be fabricated from manufacturers extruded and molded plastic as indicated, for engraved sign faces, inserts and frames in color(s) as selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer’s standard range of available colors.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are non-corrosive to either the sign material or the mounting surface.

D. Use non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance.

1. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 2. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into site paving work.

2.3 FABRICATION OF EXTERIOR SIGNAGE


A. Handicap Parking Signs: Shall be aluminum signs with reflective vinyl finish as indicated in compliance with ADA Standard R7-8 Sign and Van Accessible Sign.

1. Size:

a. R7-8 Sign: 12"wide x 18"high b. Van Accessible Sign: 12"wide x 6"high c. Radius corners.

2. Finishes:

a. Legend and Border: As indicated. b. Symbol of Accessibility: As indicated. c. Background: As indicated.

3. Mounting:

a. Provide pre-punched mounting holes and non-corrosive anchors. b. Mount sign on 2"x2" extruded clear anodized aluminum post. c. Bottom of Van Accessible Sign shall be minimum 5'-0" above grade.

4. Location: Mount directly in front of parking space as indicated. 5. Quantity: Provide one (1) each of two (2) signs for each accessible parking stall

indicated.

B. Motorcycle Parking Only Signs: Shall be aluminum signs with reflective vinyl finish as indicated.

1. Size:

a. Motorcycle Parking Only Sign: 12" wide x 18" high b. Radius corners.

2. Finishes:

a. Legend and Border: As indicated. b. Background: As indicated.

3. Mounting:

a. Provide pre-punched mounting holes and non-corrosive anchors. b. Mount sign on 2"x2" extruded clear anodized aluminum post. c. Top of sign shall align with handicap parking signs.

4. Location: Mount directly in front of parking space as indicated. 5. Quantity: Provide one (1) sign for motorcycle parking stalls indicated.

C. Traffic Control Signs: Shall be aluminum signs with reflective vinyl finish as indicated in compliance with manual on uniform traffic control devices for streets and highways, R1-1 Stop Sign, and R5-1 Do Not Enter Sign for permanent construction and other traffic control signage necessary to safely control customer vehicular and pedestrian traffic.

1. Size:

a. Stop Sign: 30”x30” Octagon. b. Do Not Enter Sign: 30”x30” Square with radius corners.

2. Finishes:

a. Legend and Border: As indicated. b. Background: As indicated.

3. Mounting:

a. Provide pre-punched mounting holes and non-corrosive anchors.


b. Mount sign on 2"x2" extruded clear anodized aluminum post. c. Bottom of sign shall be 5’-0" above grade or as indicated.

4. Location: As indicated for permanent construction and as necessary to safely control customer vehicular and pedestrian traffic.

5. Quantity: As indicated for permanent construction and as necessary to safely control customer vehicular and pedestrian traffic.

2.4 FABRICATION OF INTERIOR SIGNAGE

A. Room Identification Signage:

1. Acrylic plastic framed panel signs shall be manufacturer's standard photomechanical, monolithic, tactile plague sign construction.

2. Signage shall comply with ADA regulations and requirements indicated for materials, thickness, finish, contrast, shapes, sizes and details of construction. Installed dimensional tolerances to be: plus/minus 1/16".

a. Tactile Copy: 1/32" raised capital letters, Helvetica Regular, 1" high. b. Braille: grade 2 Braille including 189 part-word or whole word contradictions

in addition to grade 1 Braille 63 characters. c. Symbol: Tactile. d. Layout: Text and Braille centered with Braille below text. e. Frame: Radius corners. f. Size: Height and length as required by copy and symbol. g. Color: As selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3. Room identification shall be as scheduled at end of this Section for text and quantity.

4. Do not engrave room numbers on signage.

B. International Symbol of Accessibility:

1. Provide pressure sensitive vinyl decal with International Symbol of Accessibility.

a. Size: 4" x 4". b. Color: White image on blue background. c. Quantity: Provide four (4). d. Decal shall be adhered to glazing in doors or sidelight at primary building

entrances 100, 101, 102 and 103.

2. Provide building plaque signs with International Symbol of Accessibility.

a. Size: 6" x 6". b. Color: White image on blue background. c. Quantity: Provide one (1). d. Plaques shall be mounted to strike side of door at receiving building entrance

115.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that require selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Contracting Officer or designated representative from the manufacturer's standards.

B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and applications recommendations.


3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate sign units and accessories indicated or scheduled, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Exterior Building Signage: Install AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed exterior building wall signage as indicated and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Confirm sizes and rough-in requirements with Shop Drawings and other printed installation instructions prior to commencement of exterior building sign installation.

a. Install electrical rough-ins, wiring circuits and systems as indicated by Shop Drawings for wall mounted signage and/or logos.

b. Mount signs to exterior wall construction per Shop Drawing requirements and manufacturer’s printed instructions.

2. Wall mounted exterior building sign units shall be set level, plumb and at heights indicated, with sign bodies and surfaces free from distortion, warp or other defects in appearance.

3. Make final electrical connections and testing, complete signage installation and protect until acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

C. Exterior Monument Site Sign: Install AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed monument site signage as indicated and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Confirm rough-in requirements with Shop Drawings and other printed installation instructions prior to commencement of monument sign installation.

a. Install electrical rough-ins, wiring circuits and systems as indicated by Shop Drawings.

b. Anchor signs securely to cast-in-place concrete foundation in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

2. Set monument signage level and plumb as indicated with sign free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

3. Make final electrical connections and testing, complete signage installation and protect until acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

D. Drive-through Equipment, Menu Board and Signage: AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed drive-through menu board, equipment and signage as indicated and shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and written installation instructions.

1. Confirm rough-in requirements with Shop Drawings and other printed installation instructions prior to commencement of sign installation.

a. Install conduit and sensor loop wiring below concrete driveway slab as indicated.

b. Install electrical rough-ins, wiring circuits and systems as indicated by Shop Drawings.

c. Anchor clearance sign, preview board, menu board and order confirmation board units to cast-in-place concrete foundation in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

2. Set all units level and plumb as indicated, free from distortion or other defects in appearance.


3. Make final electrical connections and testing, complete equipment and drive-up system unit installations and protect until acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

E. Exterior and Site Signage: Mount units using standard method recommended by manufacturer for wall or on grade installation indicated.

1. Mount reserved parking signs for the handicapped, motorcycles and site directional signs as called for and indicated with aluminum posts sleeved and securely anchored into thickened concrete.

2. Install sign units level, plumb and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

F. Interior Signage: Install interior sign units and accessories as indicated or scheduled, using mounting methods of the type described and in conjunction with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

1. Install 60" above finish floor to baseline of highest tactile copy on wall adjacent to latch side of door.

a. At double doors with one active leaf locate sign on inactive leaf. b. At double doors with two active leafs locate sign to the right of the right-hand

door.

2. Use double-sided foam tape, of the thickness recommended by manufacturer, to mount signs to smooth, non-porous surfaces.

G. Miscellaneous Signage: Install no smoking signs, symbol of accessibility signs at building entrances indicated and install other miscellaneous adhesive backed signs or other signage using concealed fasteners to complete signage installation for entire building and site.


A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Protect units from damage until acceptance by Contracting Officer.

3.3 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGN SCHEDULE

A. Base Bid:

Area Room Name or Text Quantity

107 @ 109 WOMEN (WITH SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY & FEMALE PICTOGRAM) 1

107 @ 107 EMPLOYEES MUST WASH HANDS BEFORE RETURNING TO WORK 1

108 @ 109 MEN (WITH SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY & MALE PICTOGRAM) 1

108 @ 108 EMPLOYEES MUST WASH HANDS BEFORE RETURNING TO WORK 1

110 @ 109 EMPLOYEES ONLY 1

115 @ EXT EMPLOYEES ONLY 1



117 @ 116 OFFICE 1

118 @ 116 EMPLOYEE LOUNGE 1

118 @ 129 EMPLOYEE LOUNGE 1


130 @ 129 OFFICE 1

END 10 14 00

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10 21 13 – TOILET COMPARTMENTS

TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All floor-mounted overhead braced solid plastic toilet partitions. b. All wall mounted solid plastic urinal screens. c. Toilet partition and urinal screen accessory items as furnished by

manufacturer. d. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for


1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 6. Section 09 30 00 – Tile. 7. Section 10 28 13 – Toilet Accessories. 8. Division 22 – Plumbing.

B. Backup blocking for overhead bracing and urinal screens is specified in Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry and shall be provided in coordination with items specified herein.


A. Installer Qualifications: Employ only mechanics with a minimum of 3 to 5 years experience in installation of toilet partitions.

B. Completed work to comply with “Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards” (UFAS).


A. Fire Resistance: Partition materials shall comply with the following requirements, when tested in accordance with the ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials:

1. Smoke Developed Index: Not to exceed 450. 2. Flame Spread Index: Not to exceed 75. 3. Material Fire Ratings:

a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Class B. b. International Code Council (ICC): Class B.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop drawings. 2. Manufacturer’s; product data sheets.


3. Manufacturer’s: installation instructions. 4. Replacement parts information. 5. Color sample.


A. Deliver and store products in accordance with provisions of 01 65 00 and 01 66 00.

B. Examine containers for damage, inspect contents and reorder any damaged components immediately.

C. Reseal cartons and store until spaces are completed and ready for installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's warranty against breakage, corrosion, and delamination under normal conditions for 25 years from the date of receipt by the owner.

1. If materials are found to be defective during that period for reasons listed above, the materials will be replaced.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Scranton Products Inc., 801 East Corey Street, Scranton, PA 18505: (800) 445-5148.

2.2 TYPES

A. Toilet Compartments:

1. Overhead braced, floor supported toilet enclosures with pilasters extending from floor to headrails.

2. Style: Flush partitions and doors. 3. Doors: In-swinging, except accessible units. 4. Doors to physically handicapped compartments: 34 inches wide minimum, out-

swinging. 5. Headrails: Anti-grip style.

B. Urinal Screen:

1. Wall hung screen panel with wall mounting brackets. 2. Style: Flush screen panel.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Solid 1” thick high density polyethylene (HDPE) resins with homogeneous color throughout.

2. Partitions shall be fabricated for polymer resins compounded under high pressure, forming a single component which is waterproof, nonabsorbent and has a self-lubricating surface that resists marks.

3. All plastic components shall be covered with a protective plastic masking.

B. Finish:

1. Color: Charcoal Grey. 2. Texture: Orange Peel.


3. Edges:

a. Solid material. b. Rounded to a radius.

C. Door Hardware:

1. Hinges, Door Strike/Keeper and Latch:

a. Fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with bright dip anodized finish.

b. Fastened with a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolt.

2. Each door shall be supplied with one coat hook/bumper and door pull made of chrome plated zamak.

D. Stile Shoes: 20-gauge type 304 stainless steel, 3 inches high in satin finish.

1. Top shall have 90 degree return to stile. 2. Fastened with a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolt.

E. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer’s standard design for attaching panels to walls, and pilasters.

1. Fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with bright dip anodized finish.

2. Fastened with a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolt.

F. Headrails:

1. Fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with clear anodized finish.

2. Fastened with a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolt. 3. Headrail brackets:

a. 20 gauge stainless steel with a satin finish. b. Secured to wall with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head screws.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system.

B. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.

C. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 28-inch wide in-swinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 34 inch wide (clear opening) out-swinging doors for stalls equipped for accessibility.

D. Overhead-Braced Compartments: Furnish stainless steel supports and leveling bolts at pilasters as recommended by manufacturer to suit floor conditions.

1. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous, extruded, aluminum, anti-grip, overhead bracing at top of each pilaster.

2. Provide shoe at each pilaster to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

E. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment to comply with ANSI A117.1 for handicapped accessibility and as follows:


1. Hinges: Cutout insert type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90. Provide gravity type, spring-action cam type, or concealed torsion rod type to suit manufacturer’s standards.

2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer’s standard surface-mounted latch unit, designed for handicapped accessibility, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper.

3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer’s standard unit, combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door hitting mounted accessories.

4. Door Pull:

a. Manufacturer’s standard unit for out-swinging doors. b. Provide pulls on both faces of handicapped compartment doors.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Check areas to receive toilet partitions and urinal screens for correct height and spacing of support structures and plumbing fixtures that may affect quality and execution of work.

B. Commence installation of urinal screens when all checks have been made.

C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of job conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Anchor partitions, pilasters, headrails, and urinal screens to walls with brackets.

B. Anchor pilasters to floor with adjustable leveling type, corrosion resistant anchor plates and jack screws.

C. Install hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Conceal evidence of drilling in walls in finished work.

E. Adjust pilaster shoes to fit flush with finished floors.


A. Adjust brackets to provide uniform clearances not exceeding:

1. Pilaster in wall: 1 inch. 2. Panels and wall: 1 inch. 3. Pilaster and panels: 1/2 inch. 4. Pilaster and doors: 3/16 inch.

B. Adjust hardware for proper operation.

C. Set hinges to hold doors evenly ajar when not latched.

D. After completion of installation, clean and polish exposed screen surfaces and touch-up minor scratches.

END 10 21 13

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10 26 00 – WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10 26 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Surface mounted vinyl and metal corner guards. b. Continuous wall and corner guard retainers and pedestals. c. End caps and accessory items. d. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for


1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 6. Section 09 65 00 – Resilient Tile Flooring. 7. Section 09 77 00 – Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels. 8. Section 09 90 00 – Painting.

B. Backup blocking to wall surface protection systems is specified in Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry and shall be provided in coordination with items specified in this Section.


A. References:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) 5. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 6. International Building Code (IBC)

B. Rigid Vinyl Fire Performance Characteristics:

1. Vinyl cover shall be UL classified and conform with NFPA Class A fire rating. 2. Surface burning characteristics as determined by UL-723 (ASTM E-84) shall be as

follows:

a. Flame spread of 10. b. Smoke development of 350-450.

3. Vinyl shall have a UL-94 V-0 fire rating.


C. Self-Extinguishing: Vinyl shall have a CC1 classification, as tested in accordance with the procedures specified in ASTM D-635-74, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics as referenced by UBC 52-4-1988.

D. Impact Strength:

1. Vinyl profile materials shall have impact strength of 30.2 ft-lbs/inch of thickness as tested in accordance with the procedures specified in ASTM D-256-90b, Impact Resistance of Plastics.

2. Vinyl sheet shall have impact strength of 30.4 ft-lbs/inch of thickness as tested in accordance with the procedures specified in ASTM D-256-90b, Impact Resistance of Plastics.

E. System Impact Resistance: Rigid vinyl corner guards shall resist an impact of 153.9 ft-lbs while producing no visual blemishes upon the vinyl cover surface and no deformations in the aluminum retainers, as tested in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM F 476-84, paragraph 18, Impact Test.

F. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Vinyl shall show resistance to stain when tested in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM D-543.

G. Fungal and Bacterial Resistance: Vinyl shall not support fungal or bacterial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G-21 and ASTM G-22.

H. Color Consistency: Components shall be matched in accordance with SAE J-1545 - (Delta E) with a color difference no greater than 1.0 units using CIE Lab, CIE CMC, CIE LCh, Hunter Lab or similar color space scale systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals in accord with 01 33 00.

B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer’s printed product literature and data. 2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide Shop Drawings indicating location for each corner guard. 2. Provide Shop Drawings indicating location for each wall guard. 3. Provide mounting details with appropriate fasteners for each product and substrate

indicated.

D. Samples:

1. Provide samples for verification purposes of corner guards, 8 inches long x full profile of unit.

2. Provide samples for verification purposes of wall guard covers, 8 inches long x full profile of unit.


A. Make deliveries and store in accordance with requirements of Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00.


B. Store so that retainers are not bent and covers are not damaged.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Surface mounted corner guards:

1. Dining Area and Break Room:

a. Surface mounted corner guard with 2" legs, 1/4" radiused cover and continuous aluminum retainer as manufactured by Construction Specialties/Acrovyn, 6696 State Route 405, Muncy, PA 17756, (800) 233-8493.

1.) Model: SSM-20AN.

a) Ends: Color matched end caps with concealed fasteners. b) Color: 378 Brushed Nickel. c) Finish: Suede. d) Height: 4'-0" from top of base, unless noted otherwise.

2. Back-of-House Areas and Areas with FRP Wall Finish:

a. Surface mounted stainless steel corner guards as manufactured by Construction Specialties/Acrovyn, 6696 State Route 405, Muncy, PA 17756, (800) 233-8493.

1.) Model: CO-8 with 2" legs. 2.) Finish: #4 satin finish. 3.) Height: Top of base to bottom of finished ceiling/soffit, unless noted

otherwise.

a) Corner Guard shall be one continuous piece without seams or joints.

B. Surface mounted crash rails as manufactured by Construction Specialties/Acrovyn, 6696 State Route 405, Muncy, PA 17756, (800) 233-8493:

1. Dining Area:

a. Surface mounted crash rail consisting of aluminum retainer with snap-on Acrovyn Chameleon cover and integral shock absorbing cushions:

1.) Model: SCR-40N.

a) Ends: Color matched end caps with concealed fasteners. b) Material: Chemical and stain resistant polyvinyl chloride with the

addition of impact modifiers. c) Color: 378 Brushed Nickel. d) Finish: Suede.

2.2 COMPONENT CHARACTERISTICS

A. Surface Mounted Corner Guards:

1. At areas where walls are finished with sanitary panels provide full height corner guards as specified herein in lieu of panel manufacturer’s outside trim:

a. At outside corners run from top of base to bottom of ceiling wall angle. b. At door openings run from top of base to bottom of header/soffit.


c. All corner guards shall be one continuous piece without seams or joints.

2. At outside corner transitions between dissimilar materials provide full height corner guards from top of base to bottom of ceiling wall angle.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Check areas to receive corner and wall guards for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Commence installation when all checks have been made.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate corner and wall guards as indicated, using mounting methods as indicated on reviewed/approved shop drawings for the substrate and in compliance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

B. Install corner and wall guards plumb with surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

C. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 CLEAN UP

A. Remove all excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of legally, leaving work areas in a clean, safe condition.

B. Inspect installation for defective materials and workmanship and promptly repair or replace any defective items with new, acceptable materials.

C. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

END 10 26 00

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10 28 13 – TOILET ACCESSORIES

TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Toilet accessories and framed mirrors. b. Brackets, fastener plates, escutcheons and other miscellaneous trim items

furnished by toilet accessory manufacturer. c. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for

complete installation. d. Installation of all AAFES furnished accessories. e. Rough hardware items needed for proper installation of work.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 6. Section 09 30 00 – Tile. 7. Section 09 90 00 – Painting. 8. Division 22 – Plumbing. 9. Division 26 – Electrical.

B. Backup blocking for toilet accessories is specified in Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry and shall be provided in coordination with items specified in this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Comply with provisions of the “Americans with Disabilities Act” and the “Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards”.

B. ANSI specifications for toilet and bath accessories indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop drawings. 2. Product data. 3. Maintenance: data and operating instructions.


A. Deliver materials in accord with 01 65 00.

B. Storage of materials shall be in accord with 01 66 00.

2 PRODUCTS



A. Use only the specified products of the following manufacturers as indicated:

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. BOB Bobrick Washroom Equipment 2. GPAC Georgia-Pacific Professional 3. DYS Dyson

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel:

1. Type: 302/304, ASTM A 167. 2. Finish: No. 4, Satin.

B. Steel:

1. Cold rolled sheet: ASTM A 366, commercial quality. 2. Zinc-coated: ASTM A 123. 3. Chromium plating: ASTM B 456, Type SC 2.

C. Aluminum:

1. Extruded: 64-63-T5 alloy, anodized finish. 2. Sheet stock: 5005-H14.

D. Brass: Cast or forged quality alloy, FS WW-P-541.

E. Mounting Devices: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 386.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Locking units: Key alike for all accessories.

B. Weld corners, leaving no open miters.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect openings scheduled to receive recessed units for correct dimensions, plumbness of blocking or frames, preparation that would affect installation of accessories.

B. Inspect areas to receive surface-mounted units for conditions that would affect installation of accessories.

C. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures and toilet partitions that affect installation of accessories.

D. Do not begin installation of accessories until openings and surfaces are acceptable.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Drill holes to correct size and application so that they are concealed by item.

B. Mount surface-mounted accessories in accord with manufacturer’s instructions.



A. After completion of installation, clean and polish all exposed surfaces.

B. Deliver keys and instruction sheets to User.

3.4 SCHEDULE

A. Provide from one of the acceptable manufacturers the following products:

1. Straight grab bars: 18 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, 1-1/2” O.D., concealed mounting with 1/8” x 2” x 3 1/8 type 304 stainless steel mounting flange and 3 ¼” diameter, 22 gauge escutcheons, satin finish.

a. BOB: No. B-6806 x 36”. b. BOB: No. B-6806 x 42”.

2. Sanitary napkin disposal: Surface mounted, 18-8 S, type 304 heavy gauge stainless steel cabinet, 22-gauge stainless steel door secured to cabinet with piano-hinge and equipped with tumbler lock, 18-8 S, type 304 22-gauge disposal panel secured to door with spring-loaded piano hinge and displaying international graphic symbol, all furnished in satin finish with a removable leak-proof rigid molded polyethylene waste receptacle.

a. BOB: No. B-254.

3. Automatic hand dryer: Surface mounted, polycarbonate-ABS casing with antimicrobial molded additive in facia and blades, galvanized steel back plate and mounting bracket, mounted at height recommended for accessibility.

a. DYS: No. AB14 Gray.

4. Trash Receptacle: Recessed, 4” depth, 12-gallon removable trash receptacle, mounted at height recommended for accessibility.

a. BOB: No. B-3644.

5. Framed Mirror: Wall mounted, Type 430 stainless steel, ½” x ½” x 3/8” channel with ¼” return at rear, bright polished finish, one-piece frame with 90 degree mitered corners, 20-gauge galvanized steel back, concealed mounting brackets and ¼” select float glass, triple silvered, electro-copper plated, guaranteed 10 years.

a. BOB: No. B-165 1836.

6. Baby Changing Table: Wall mounted, 35” wide x 20” high density polyethylene horizontal mount changing station, concave changing area with nylon safety straps, universal instruction graphics and multi-language safety message plus Braille, pneumatic cylinder control, mounted at height recommended for accessibility.

a. BOB (Koala Kare): No. KB200-01.

7. Utility Shelf with Mop/Broom Holders and Rag Hooks: 18 gauge, type-304 stainless steel with all-welded construction; satin finish.

a. BOB: No. B-239.

B. Provide installation of the following AAFES furnished products:

1. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Surface mounted vertical double roll coreless dispenser with automatic drop down feature.

a. GPAC: No. 56790.


2. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser: Surface mounted 1/2-fold seat cover dispensing system.

a. GPAC: No. 57710.

3. Soap Dispenser: Surface mounted non-corrosive valve mechanism, ABS plastic mounting bracket and collar, 24 ounce translucent polyethylene container.

a. Ecolab Touch Free Dispenser.

C. Provide toilet accessories in areas listed below, at locations and mounting heights indicated and in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act.

1. Base bid:

a. Women 107

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

1.) Toilet Tissue Dispenser (AF/CI) 2 2.) Wall Mount Grab Bar – 36” 1 3.) Wall Mount Grab Bar – 42” 1 4.) Sanitary Napkin Disposal 2 5.) Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser (AF/CI) 2 6.) Soap Dispenser (AF/CI) 1 7.) Automatic Hand Dryer 1 8.) Trash Receptacle 1 9.) Wall Mount Mirror - 18"x36" 1 10.) Horizontal Baby Changing Station 1

b. Men 108


1.) Toilet Tissue Dispenser (AF/CI) 1 2.) Wall Mount Grab Bar – 36” 1 3.) Wall Mount Grab Bar – 42” 1 4.) Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser (AF/CI) 1 5.) Soap Dispenser (AF/CI) 1 6.) Automatic Hand Dryer 1 7.) Trash Receptacle 1 8.) Wall Mount Mirror - 18"x36" 1 9.) Horizontal Baby Changing Station 1

c. Passage 116 – Can Wash


1.) Utility Shelf with Mop/Broom Holders & Hooks 1

d. Passage 119 – Can Wash


1.) Utility Shelf with Mop/Broom Holders & Hooks 1

e. Janitor 124


1.) Utility Shelf with Mop/Broom Holders & Hooks 1 END 10 28 13

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10 44 00 – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES 10 44 00-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Fire extinguishers. b. Brackets. c. Cabinets. d. Accessory items. e. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for


1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping. 6. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 7. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 8. Section 09 77 00 – Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels. 9. Section 09 90 00 – Painting.

B. Backup blocking to fire extinguisher brackets is specified in Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry and shall be provided in coordination with items specified in this Section.


A. All fire extinguishers and accessories furnished shall be the product of one manufacturer.

B. All fire extinguishers shall comply with requirements of this specification and with requirements set forth in NFPA-10.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer’s: printed product literature and data. 2. Manufacturer’s: installation instructions. 3. Drawings showing details of rough openings, recess requirements, head, jamb and

sill details.


A. Make deliveries and store in accordance with requirements of Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00.


B. Store fire extinguisher so that valves and operating mechanisms are not damaged.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers are indicated on Drawings as FE-MP, FE-BC or FE-K. shall meet the following requirements:

1. Fire extinguishers shall be UL rated and capable of extinguishing fire classifications indicated below.

2. Fire extinguishers shall also comply with Underwriters Standard 299. 3. Capacity:

a. FE-MP: UL rated/labeled 4A/80B:C, 10 pound capacity regular multi-purpose dry chemical type extinguishers capable of extinguishing Class A, B and C fires.

b. FE-BC: UL rated/labeled 40/B:C, 6 pound capacity regular dry chemical type extinguishers capable of extinguishing Class B and C fires.

c. FE-K: UL rated/labeled K, 2 1/2 gallon capacity wet chemical type extinguishers capable of extinguishing Class K grease fires as required for restaurant kitchens.

4. Cylinders:

a. FE-MP and FE-BC: Fire extinguishers shall have heavy-duty steel cylinders, metal valve and siphon tube, replaceable molded valve stem seals, visual pressure gauges and high test UL rated hoses.

b. FE-K: Stainless steel cylinder with protective nozzle tip orifice seal, non-metallic nozzle tip finger guard and industry standard horn and nozzle design.

5. Finish:

a. FE-MP and FE-BC: Red finish to comply with OSHA requirements. b. FE-K: Stainless steel with Class K symbol on name plate.

6. All fire extinguishers shall bear UL label.

2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER WALL BRACKETS

A. Construction:

1. Brackets for wall mounted (FE) units shall be standard brackets constructed of heavy gauge steel capable of supporting extinguisher size.

a. Provide bracket with bottom support for extinguisher. b. Bracket shall be provided with strap ties to hold extinguisher in place.

2. Brackets for cabinet mounted (FEC) extinguishers shall be standard bracket furnished with extinguisher capable of supporting extinguisher size.

B. Finish: Baked enamel.

C. Hardware: Anchors as required to secure bracket to wall surface.

D. Size: To fit specified extinguisher as indicated.


2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Recessed cabinets for standard fire extinguishers indicated on Drawings as FEC:

1. Door: Aluminum backed textured obscure acrylic, 3/16” minimum thickness; vertical white silk-screened “FIRE EXTINGUISHER” lettering on black background; continuous piano hinge of material and color to match trim; cylinder lock and break glass insert.

2. Trim: Flat trim, aluminum, mitered corners; clear anodized finish. 3. Tub: Minimum 20 gauge cold-rolled steel, white epoxy finish. 4. Size: To fit 10 pound capacity multi-purpose dry chemical extinguisher.


CODE MANUFACTURER

1. JLI J.L. Industries Bloomington, MN (800) 554-6077

2. LMC Larsen’s Mfg. Co. Minneapolis, MN (763) 571-1181

3. MMP Modern Metal Products Owatonna, MN (800) 435-5544

2.5 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

A. Recessed cabinets for standard fire extinguishers indicated on Drawings as F.E.C.:

1. JLI - Panorama 1025 Q40. 2. LMC - Gemini G2409 R2. 3. MMP - Tonna T1026R1 WB.

B. Surface mounted brackets for standard fire extinguishers indicated on Drawings as F.E.:

1. JLI - MB Series (MB846) brackets. 2. LMC - B Series (B-2) brackets. 3. MMP - Z Series (Z-10) brackets.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Check areas to receive fire extinguishers for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Commence installation when all checks have been made.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install cabinets, fire extinguishers and brackets in locations shown on drawings in accord with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

1. Securely anchor brackets to structure, square and plumb.


B. After completion of installation, clean and polish cabinets; brackets.

C. Install fire extinguishers on all brackets or in cabinets after finish painting is complete, immediately prior to final inspection of building.

1. All fire extinguishers shall be fully charged, tagged and operable when installed.

3.3 CLEAN UP

A. Remove all excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of legally, leaving work areas in a clean, safe condition.

B. Inspect installation for defective materials and workmanship and promptly repair or replace any defective items with new, acceptable materials.

END 10 44 00.

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10 51 13 – METAL LOCKERS

METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Multi-person metal locker wardrobe assemblies. b. Lockable metal storage cabinets. c. Trim and accessories. d. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for


1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 4. Section 09 30 00 – Tile. 5. Section 09 90 00 – Painting.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00:

1. Shop drawings detailing layout of work, anchoring methods, hardware sizes and head, jamb and base conditions.

a. Catalog sheets and descriptive literature. b. Installation instructions. c. Current color charts for Contracting Officer’s color selection.


A. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 66 00.

2. PRODUCTS


A. Lyon Metal Products: Inc., P.O. Box 671, Aurora, IL 60507; telephone (800) 323-0096.

B. Penco Products, P.O. Box 378, Oaks, PA 19456; telephone (800) 562-1000.

C. Republic Storage Systems, 1038 Belden Ave., N.E., Canton, OH 44705; telephone (800) 477-1255.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Lockers:

1. 22-person multi-compartment unit:

a. (3) 6-tier side lockers with 12” wide x 15” deep x 12” high compartments.


b. (1) 4-door horizontal section with 12” wide x 15” deep x 12” high compartments.

c. Overall nominal size:

1.) 6’-0” high without legs. 2.) 7’-0” wide with 4’-0” wide hanging space.

2. Material: Cold-rolled sheet metal.

a. Frames: 16 gauge formed into deep 1” face channel with continuous vertical door strike.

b. Doors: 14 gauge one piece with ventilating louvers. c. Body: 16 gauge, sides, tops, bottoms and shelves. d. Backs: 18 gauge. e. Tops: Flat tops. f. Legs: 16 gauge front extension of frame with 16 gauge adjustable back legs,

6” high. g. Painted finish: Prime coat plus baked on enamel: Color as selected by

Contracting Officer.

3. Hardware:

a. Lock: Built-up hasp for padlock. b. Hinge: Five-knuckle type with tight pin. c. Handle: Die-cast with polished, plated finish.

4. Accessories:

a. Number plates: Satin finish aluminum. Number sequence as selected. b. Metal trim: 18-gauge. c. Coat rod: Manufacturer’s standard coat rod fixed under horizontal section to

inside uprights.

B. Storage Cabinets:

1. Size: 36" wide x 18" deep x 78" high with 4 shelves. 2. Material: Cold-rolled sheet metal.

a. Frames: 16 gauge formed into a channel section. b. Doors: 20 gauge with 24 gauge reinforcement. c. Body: 24 gauge, sides, top and back. d. Bottom: 20 gauge. e. Shelves: 20 gauge with front and rear edges formed into a channel section. f. Painted finish: Prime coat plus baked on enamel: Color as selected by

Contracting Officer.

3. Hardware:

a. Lock: Grooved key, built-in lever handle with three point locking mechanism. b. Hinges: Five-knuckle type with tight pin. c. Handle: Die-cast lever type with chrome plated finish.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Check areas to receive locker units for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Commence installation of locker units when all checks have been made.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble and install lockers, trim and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

B. All connections shall be tight and in same plane on both sides of joint.

C. Keep lockers straight, plumb and level.


A. Adjust doors and hardware for proper operation.

B. After completion of installation, clean and polish locker surfaces and touch-up minor scratches.

END 10 51 13.

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10 71 10 – FIXED SUNSHADES & CANOPIES

FIXED SUNSHADES & CANOPIES 10 71 10-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Fixed cantilevered aluminum canopies and fascias at entry doors and drive-up windows.

b. Fixed cantilevered aluminum sunshades and fascias at windows. c. Aluminum structural components, trim, flashing and accessories. d. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for


1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 3. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel. 4. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications (Brackets). 6. Section 07 61 03 – Preformed Metal Soffit Panels. 7. Section 07 62 00 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 8. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 9. Section 08 41 10 – Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors.

B. Installed but furnished elsewhere:

1. Work furnished under this Section shall be carefully coordinated with work furnished under Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications:

a. Bolted tee and angle connection brackets shall be exactly mounted to supporting structure at locations in precise coordination with shop drawings for fixed sunshades and canopies.

b. Drilling and taping of HSS tubes to secure tee and angle connection brackets shall be performed in field by Contractor in precise coordination with shop drawings for fixed canopies.

c. Tee and angle connection brackets shall be mounted in place prior to completion of unit masonry installation with masonry cut to fit.

d. At Contractor's option Tee and angle connection brackets may be furnished by sunshade and canopy manufacturer providing that lead time can be expedited to coordinate with brick masonry installation.

2. Soffit material and Contractor field installation requirements of soffits for canopy structures are specified in Section 07 61 03, Preformed Metal Soffit Panels and shall be carefully coordinated with shop drawings for fixed canopies specified herein.

3. Aluminum sheet metal base flashing for sealing walls to aluminum sheet metal canopy roofs is specified in Section 07 62 00, Flashing & Sheet Metal and shall be carefully coordinated with shop drawings for fixed canopies specified herein.

4. Backer rod and sealant to seal end-to-end outriggers of canopies and to seal back of awning to face of wall are specified in Section 07 90 00, Building Joint Sealers.



A. Provide exterior fascia, canopy and sunshade assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses without permanent deformation of assembly or components including loads due to:

1. Dead load. 2. Gravity and lateral live loads, as specified in referenced building codes.

a. Snow. b. Wind. c. Seismic.


1. Buckling. 2. Opening of joints. 3. Overstressing of components. 4. Other detrimental effects.

C. Deflection of assemblies shall be limited to l/480 under live load conditions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

1. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical and descriptive data on canopy components and assemblies.


a. Overall plan showing location of each item. b. Dimensioned plans, elevations and sections. c. Large scale details illustrating:

1.) Dimensioned profiles of components including outriggers, nosing, primary tee and angle bracket connections.

2.) Dimensioned supporting components as assembled. 3.) Indicate breaks required to prevent electrolysis between ferrous and

non-ferrous metals. 4.) Indicate connection requirements at supporting structure.

d. Provide unit dimensions related to supporting and adjoining structures and other construction.

3. Samples:

a. Provide one (1) set of manufacturer’s high performance fluoropolymer coating color chips on actual metal illustrating the full range of colors indicated for awning components and assemblies.

b. Provide two (2) 3-inch long finished samples of each visible component including nosing and outriggers.

c. Provide two (2) bolts of the type and design intended for use in connecting tee brackets to HSS tube supports sections.

B. Structural Calculations:

1. Submit a comprehensive analysis of design loads including dead, live and thermal movement.


a. Results of structural analysis shall be provided by Contractor for use to develop shop drawings for awning and canopy support brackets.

b. Coordination of various fabricators and manufacturers shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

2. Structural analysis and design calculations shall be sealed and signed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the State of Texas.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s 5-year warranty covering structural integrity of assemblies against excessive deflection under design loading, excessive joint movement under thermal loading and against manufacturing defects.

B. Provide manufacturer’s 20-year warranty covering high performance fluoropolymer coating system covering color retention, adhesion and weather resistance to chalking and fading.


A. Verify actual supporting and adjoining construction by field measurements prior to fabrication.

B. Coordinate supporting and adjoining construction to ensure that sunshade and awning assemblies fit properly and are structurally supported as designed.

C. Schedule delivery to avoid delays in construction progress.

1. Where field dimensions cannot be made without delaying work provide guaranteed dimensions and proceed with fabrication of assemblies.

2. Coordinate related and supporting construction to ensure that assemblies fit properly and are structurally supported as designed using established dimensions.


A. Provide materials in accordance with Section 01 65 00.

B. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 66 00.

2. PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements provide products as manufactured by the following approved manufacturers:

1. All-Lite Architectural Products 5101 Blue Mound Road Fort Worth, TX 76106 (817) 509-2300

2. AGS Inc. 9950 W. 190th Street Mokena, IL 60448 (708) 479-9458

3. Perfection Architectural Systems, Inc 2310 Mercator Drive Orlando Fl. 32807 (407) 671-6225


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-TB or T2.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, ally 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26 M, alloy 319.

D. Fasteners: Same as basic metal and alloy being fastened or 300 series stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.


fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

E. Bolts: 300 series stainless steel in size as required by design loading.

F. Drill-In Adhesive Anchor Systems: Hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin, hardener, cement and water designed for fast curing in a wide range of solid base material temperatures from 104º F. to 23º F. developed as a system in conjunction with various bolt or threaded rod stud anchors.

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

H. Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material integrity and product safety in order to meet the finished installation requirements.

2.3 FABRICATION GENERAL

A. Assemble canopy assemblies in factory to minimize field splicing and field assembly.

1. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation at job site.

B. Assemblies shall only be assembled in field under strict compliance with manufacturers written recommendations and instructions.

C. Maintain equal blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames to produce a uniform appearance.

D. Include supports, anchorage and accessories required for complete assembly.

2.4 FIXED ALUMINUM CANOPIES

A. Units shall be horizontal, fixed, extruded aluminum canopy assemblies as indicated, designed to protect customers from the elements at entries and drive-up windows, and complying with the following design characteristics:

1. Roof Finish:

a. Intermediate supports shall be aluminum tube sections spaced as determined by manufacturer to limit deflection of top cover.

b. Dead level 1/8 inch flat plate aluminum roof deck cover attached to intermediate supports, outriggers and nosing with neoprene washered, self-drilling stainless steel screws.

2. Ceiling Finish: Field installed aluminum soffit by Contractor as indicted. 3. Nosing: 16-inch deep rectangular aluminum tube or two (2) 8-inch deep tubes

stacked.


4. Outriggers: Flat bar. 5. Connections: Semi-concealed aluminum tee and angle sections. 6. Flashing: .050 aluminum sheet metal.

a. Provide continuous sheet metal cleat fastened into metal roof deck and designed to retain outstanding hemmed leg of flashing.

b. Break sheet metal flashing as indicated to form hood over top of outrigger connections.

c. Finish sheet metal flashing to match fascia member of awning assembly.

B. Units shall be designed to cantilever from face of HSS tube steel headers, concealed in wall as indicated, using tee and angle shaped aluminum brackets bolted into drilled and tapped header sections.

1. Aluminum tee brackets shall be located as indicated. 2. Provide aluminum angle brackets at ends of assemblies to fit in vertical clearance

joint between masonry building materials.

C. Assemblies shall be modular with end outriggers of adjacent units sandwiching the aluminum bracket and through bolted to secure canopy assembly to bracket.

D. Entire assembly shall be sealed to prevent water leakage after erection.

1. Seal adjacent outrigger joints on top of assembly of awning assembly. 2. Seal back of base flashing assembly to face of masonry wall.

2.5 HORIZONTAL FIXED ALUMINUM SUNSHADES

A. Units shall be horizontal, fixed, extruded aluminum sunshade assemblies as indicated and complying with the following design characteristics:

1. Blade Style: Airfoil. 2. Nosing: Rectangular tube. 3. Outriggers: Flat bar. 4. Connections: Semi-concealed aluminum tee and angle sections fabricated under

Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

B. Units shall be designed to cantilever from face of HSS tube steel headers, concealed in wall as indicated, using tee and angle shaped aluminum brackets bolted into drilled and tapped header sections.

1. Aluminum tee brackets shall be located as indicated at vertical joints in aluminum wall panels.

2. Provide aluminum angle brackets at ends of assemblies to fit in vertical clearance joint between wall panels and dissimilar building materials.

C. Assemblies shall be modular with end outriggers of adjacent units sandwiching the aluminum bracket and through bolted to secure sunshade assembly to bracket.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Provide high performance fluoropolymer coating complying with AAMA 2605.

B. Prepare, pre-treat and apply coatings to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers written instructions.

C. All exposed components of fascias and canopies shall be finished in color as selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer's full range of high performance fluoropolymer coatings.


3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION & COORDINATION

A. Inspect areas to receive canopy assemblies for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Coordinate Shop Drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions for:

1. Drilling and tapping HSS tube steel headers for receiving bracket anchor bolts.

C. Commence installation of assemblies only when all inspections have been made and it is verified that assemblies can be mounted as designed without binding or deformation of components.

D. Start of work constitutes acceptance of job conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place canopy, cantilever fascia and sunshade assemblies level and plumb, in strict compliance with approved Shop Drawings, and in alignment with adjacent construction.

B. Provide concealed and semi-concealed anchorages wherever possible.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding.

1. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. 2. Replace items that cannot be finished in the field to the satisfaction of the

Contracting Officer or designated representative.

E. Protect non-ferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coat of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, structural steel or dissimilar metals.


A. Protect assemblies from damage during construction with temporary protective coverings as approved by the sunshade/awning manufacturer.

B. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of assemblies that are not protected by temporary coverings to remove fingerprints and soil during installation.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and clean sunshade, fascia and awning assemblies in accordance with manufacturer’s written instruction.

D. Just prior to Substantial Completion perform final cleaning and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating furnished by the manufacturer to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

END 10 71 10

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Section 11 40 00 – FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00- 1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Complete installation of food service equipment indicated to be Contractor Furnished and Contractor Installed (CF/CI).

b. Installation of food service equipment indicated to be AAFES Furnished and Contractor Installed as scheduled (AF/CI).

c. Installation of all food service equipment indicated to be Vendor Furnished and Contractor Installed as scheduled (VF/CI)

d. Installation coordination of food service equipment indicated to be AAFES Furnished and AAFES Installed as scheduled (AF/AI)

e. Work related to AF/AI walk-in refrigeration systems including coordination with AAFES installer and provision of sprinkler systems, roof curbs and pipe/power portals in conjuction with other work for this Project.

f. Rough-in work for ALL food service equipment. g. Final connections between rough-ins and equipment for ALL hard-piped and

hard-wired food service equipment. h. Stainless steel wall panels with concealed fasteners not furnished with

hoods. i. Preliminary start-up and testing of equipment for ALL food service

equipment. j. Coordination of final equipment start-up and training conducted by AAFES.

2. Contractor provide all related equipment, accessories and labor including:

a. Plumbing work and connections to equipment:

1.) Final hard-piped connections to all equipment 2.) Fittings that are not an integral part of equipment. 3.) Drains. 4.) Natural gas lines, control valves and fittings. 5.) Water and waste lines including connections. 6.) Refrigerant lines to compressors including connections. 7.) Coordination of work with fire suppression system. 8.) All other work necessary to make equipment operational in

preparation for start-up.

b. Electrical work and connections to equipment:

1.) Final hard-wired connections to all equipment. 2.) Overload protection requirements. 3.) Wiring to starters. 4.) Panelboard rough-in and wiring for refrigerators and freezers. 5.) Interwiring for walk-in refrigerators and freezers. 6.) Lighting fixtures for walk-in refrigerators and freezers. 7.) All conduit, wiring, junction boxes. 8.) Coordination of fire suppression system with other work. 9.) All other work necessary to make equipment operational in

preparation for start-up.


1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included:

1. Food Service Equipment required for this work is indicated on the Drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following:

a. Furnish all labor, materials and services necessary to complete the work of this Section.

b. Installation of all new Food Service equipment and appliances indicated Contractor Furnished/Contractor Installed, AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed, Vendor Furnished/Contractor Installed and Concessionaire Furnished/ Contractor Installed.

1.3 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry. 4. Section 06 40 00 – Architectural Woodwork 5. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 6. Division 9 – Finishes. 7. Section 11 80 00 – Used Cooking Oil Equipment. 8. Division 21 – Fire Protection. 9. Division 22 – Plumbing. 10. Division 23 – HVAC. 11. Division 26 – Electrical.


A. Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, the following standards are applicable to the manufacture, fabrication, delivery and installation of equipment and other work covered in this section.

1. NSF Standards: Comply with National Sanitation Foundation standards and criteria, and provide NSF "Seal of Approval" on each manufactured item and on major items of custom-fabricated work.

2. U.L. Standards: For electrical components and assemblies, provide either U.L. labeled products or where no labeling service is available, "recognized markings" to indicate listing in the U.L. Recognized Component Index.

B. Food Service Equipment: All cooking equipment, food processing machinery intended for use here will be provided per specified manufacture and will bear applicable seals of approval as outlined above.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. AAFES Provided Shop Drawings and Cut Sheets: AAFES or their Vendors will furnish Shop Drawings of the various Food Service equipment items to be installed in the Project.

B. Contractor Provided Shop Drawings: Prior to commencement of installation the Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings indicating the following:


1. Floor plan(s) showing detailed dimensions for utility lines and equipment to a scale of ½-inch equals 1'-0".

a. These dimensions shall be taken from finished walls and columns and include all electrical and plumbing floor "stub-up", "out of wall" and "branch to connection (BTC)" notations for use in the field.

2. Floor plans, showing detailed dimensions for elevated bases, wall openings, locations of partitions and wall reinforcing as related to equipment supplied under this Section, to a scale of ½-inch equals 1'-0".

3. Dimensioned Equipment Construction Drawings, indicating reinforcement, anchorage and other work required for completion and installation of equipment under this Section to a scale of 1-inch equals 1'-0".

4. Manufacturer's standard catalog cut sheets shall be submitted in a covered, bound booklet preceded by a corresponding cover sheet.

a. Each cover sheet shall include the item number, model number, manufacturer's name, required utilities, and all options and accessories specified.

b. Three (3) booklets shall be submitted for review.

5. Schedule of Equipment and Connections: A schedule similar to that shown on Drawings including all remarks and general notes shall be submitted as part of the electrical rough-in, mechanical rough-in, HVAC and base drawings.

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Protection:

1. Protect metal finishes from damage during storage, handling, installation and construction of other work in the same spaces.

2. Wrap and crate each item of equipment as needed for protection from damage.

B. Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with self-adhesive protective paper, of a type recommended by the metal manufacturer, and do not remove until work is installed and ready for cleaning and start-up.

C. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Contracting Officer and at no additional cost to AAFES.

1.7 QUALIFICATION

A. To be considered eligible to work on this project, the sub-contractor for the work of this Section of the Specifications must:

1. Be a fully recognized Food Service Equipment Sub-Contractor currently engaged in the installation of standard manufactured and custom fabricated commercial Food Service Equipment for a period of five (5) years prior to submitting proposal.

2. Have successfully completed similar projects of the same Food Service Equipment dollar value and design scope within the last two (2) years.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Stainless steel: AISI type 302/304, hardest workable temper, No. 4 directional polish.


B. Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 526, except ASTM A 527 for extensive forming; ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, chemical treatment. Where painted finish is indicated, provide mill phosphatized treatment in lieu of chemical treatment.

C. Steel sheet: ASTM A 569 hot-rolled carbon steel.

D. Galvanized steel pipe: ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 120, welded or seamless, schedule 40, galvanized.

E. Steel structural members: Hot rolled or cold formed, carbon steel unless stainless steel is indicated.

F. Galvanized finish: ASTM A 123 hot-dipped zinc coating, applied after fabrication.

G. Aluminum: ASTM B209/B221 sheet, plate and extrusions (as indicated); alloy, temper and finish as determined by manufacturer/fabricator, except 0.40 mill natural anodized finish on exposed work unless another finish is indicated.

2.2 FABRICATED PRODUCTS

A. Wall Panels: All wall panels indicated shall be 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel finished with a 1/2" edge on exposed sides and shall be turned back to form 1/2" channel shape.

1. Edges shall be free from burrs and any excess material. 2. Corners shall be rounded. 3. Panels shall be cross-broke where required to prevent oil canning . 4. Provide concealed clips for attachment to wall surfaces and seal edges to wall

surface.

B. Fastening: No loose or visible fasteners such as face screws or buttons will be acceptable.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Equipment listed under "Schedules” of equipment shall match in every respect all mechanical and electrical requirements indicated.

B. The installation of all Food Service equipment shall be performed in strict accordance with the specifications and the approved printed directions of the Manufacturer.

C. Dimensions given herein are approximate only, and in all cases where equipment is intended to occupy fixed locations and spaces, the physical conditions of the building are to control the absolute sizes.

D. All penetrations in any work table or serving counter tops required to run mechanical services to any equipment items located on same shall be fitted with rubber grommets to protect these service lines.

E. Contractor to coordinate with all applicable trades.

3.2 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Inspection: Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

B. Discrepancies:

1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Contracting Officer.


2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. The installation of all Food Service equipment shall be performed under the supervision of an approved representative of the kitchen equipment sub-contractor and in strict accordance with the specifications and the approved printed directions of the manufacturer.

B. Cutting and Patching of Construction: Lay out the work in advance to prevent damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment.

C. Setting and Connecting:

1. Install equipment plumb and level. 2. Except for mobile and adjustable-leg equipment, securely anchor and attach items

and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless steel bolts. 3. Seal around equipment flashing and flanges, at walls, floor, and ceiling in

accordance with security standards listed in Section 07 90 00, Building Joint Sealers.

4. Contact fillers shall be continuous, without opening.

D. Jointing and Anchoring:

1. Set each item of non-mobile and non-portable equipment securely in place, leveled and adjusted to correct height.

2. Anchor to supporting surfaces where indicated and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation.

3. Conceal anchorages wherever possible. 4. Adjust surfaces to a level tolerance of 1/16" (maximum offset and plus-or-minus on

dimension and maximum variation of 2'-0" run from level or indicated slope). 5. Complete field assembly joints in the field (joints which cannot be completed in the

shop) by welding, grinding and polishing. 6. Treat enclosed spaces (inaccessible after equipment installation) by covering

horizontal surfaces with powdered borax at a rate of 4 oz. per square foot. 7. Install closure plates and strips where required with joints coordinated with units of

equipment. 8. Install sealants and gaskets around all penetrations to make joints air-tight, water-

proof, vermin-proof and sanitary for cleaning purposes.

a. In general, make sealed joints not less than 1/8" wide and stuff with backer rods to shape sealant bead properly at 1/4" depth.

b. Shape exposed surfaces of sealant slightly concave with edges flush with faces of materials at joint.

c. At internal corner joints, apply sealant or gaskets to form a sanitary cove, of not less than 3/8" joint width; metal closure strips for wider joints, with sealant application on each side of strip.

d. Anchor gaskets mechanically or with adhesives to prevent displacement.

E. Cleaning and Adjusting; Test and adjust equipment for proper operation.

1. Test rotating components and motors for proper rotation. 2. Lubricate moving parts if suggested by manufacturer's literature. 3. Prior to acceptance of the project, clean and sanitize equipment both inside and

outside.

3.4 PROTECTION OF WORK


A. For the period during which other trades shall be on or near equipment and/or work covered by this Contract, this contractor shall cover and protect the exposed surfaces of such equipment.

1. Preclude injury to the finish by absorption of oil, grease, chemicals, etc., contact from tools and machinery, and from all other causes which may be incidental to operation performed in the area.

2. Should Contractor fail to protect his work in the specified manner, he shall absorb all expenses for such work.

3.5 CLEANING

A. When all the work covered by this Contract, together with the work of other trades has been completed, the Contractor shall clean each and every item of equipment so that all traces of grease, stains, protective coatings, abrasive dust, markings, scratches, and other foreign matter are completely removed.

B. The cleaning process shall be one which shall eliminate any further cleaning on the part of AAFES with the exception of that which would ordinarily be undertaken daily to maintain accepted standards of sanitation and appearance.

3.6 PRELIMINARY START-UP AND TESTING

A. Contractor shall perform preliminary start-up and testing of all equipment prior to turning equipment over to AAFES.

B. All defects disclosed by the tests shall be eliminated to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative and the corrected areas retested.

C. Provide necessary technicians, materials, and equipment required to conduct these tests.

D. A statement shall be furnished by the Contractor showing the schedule of testing, date, and results.

3.7 START-UP, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

A. AAFES will make arrangements for a representative of AAFES to be present at start-up and adjustment of the various systems upon written verification that preliminary start-up and testing of all systems is complete and equipment is ready for final adjustment and training of AAFES personnel.

B. AAFES will make provisions for properly trained authorized personnel to demonstrate to the operators the operation of all equipment including refrigeration systems.

1. Contractor shall provide a sign-up sheet for start-up training sessions signed by all in attendance.

a. Sheet shall be dated and include description/purpose of session. b. Following information shall be recorded:

1.) Name of each person in attendance and receiving training. 2.) Title or responsibility of each person in attendance. 3.) Name of organization each person is representing. 4.) Business telephone and e-mail contact information for each person in

attendance.

c. Submit copy of sign-up sheet in each set of bound manuals submitted at Project Close-out per requirements of Section 01 77 00.


2. Contractor shall record minutes of all training sessions and submit in manuals along with sign-up sheets.

C. In addition, four (4) complete printed copies of equipment cut sheets, shop drawings and other technical data shall be furnished to AAFES with O & M manuals covering the operation and maintenance of all equipment.

1. A covered, bound booklet containing Manufacturer's current printed Installation/Operation/Maintenance/Parts manuals for all equipment hereinafter specified (including all accessories, components, faucets, etc.).

2. Each manual shall be clearly labeled with their respective item number designation as hereinafter specified.

3. Booklet shall include a Table of Contents listing each equipment item included within the booklet, complete with corresponding item number, quantity and description as hereinafter specified.

END 11 40 00

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Section 11 80 00 – USED COOKING OIL EQUIPMENT

USED COOKING OIL EQUIPMENT 11 80 00 -1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Double walled used cooking oil storage tank with secondary containment. b. Caddy transport system. (Burger King) c. Direct plumbed fryer manifolds and piping. (Popeye's) d. Control panel, branch circuiting and wiring connections to equipment. e. Through wall sleeve, connectors, hoses, piping and all accessory items

necessary to install and operate a used cooking oil collection system with exterior vendor collection capability.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 3. Section 07 90 00 – Building Joint Sealers. 4. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 5. Section 09 77 00 – Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels. 6. Section 09 30 00 – Tile. 7. Section 11 40 00 – Food Service Equipment. 8. Division 22 – Plumbing. 9. Division 26 – Electrical.


A. Manufacturer’s of used cooking oil collection systems equipment shall be currently UL approved for the design, manufacturing, assembly, distribution, marketing, sales, customer and technical support of systems and equipment for industrial and commercial applications.

B. Supplier of all equipment shall have successfully completed not less than five (5) similar projects of size, dollar value and design scope within the past three (3) years.

C. Installer of equipment shall be certified by the equipment manufacturer for installation, servicing and testing of equipment specified under this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data on each item of new equipment furnished:

a. Manufacturer’s standard cut-sheets indicating specific product, model number, accessories and other pertinent information.

b. Technical information sheets indicating physical size, delivery volumes and maximum capacity of system.

c. Control wiring, piping requirements and other pertinent requirements. d. Installation and operating instructions.


2. Shop drawings indicating the following:

a. Floor plan showing detailed dimension and sizes or requirements for discharge lines, electrical connections and equipment to a scale of ¼” = 1’-0”.

1.) Floor plan shall provide exact dimensional information existing walls for equipment and electrical rough-ins including stub-up, out-of-wall and branch to connection notations for use in field layout and construction.

2.) Floor plan shall be coordinated with other equipment, including high density dry storage shelving not furnished under this section to avoid conflicts with operation of all equipment.

3.) Indicate detailed dimensions for wall opening requirements related to equipment supplied under this Section.

b. Dimensioned equipment construction drawings indicating anchorage and other work required for completion and installation of equipment furnished under this Section.

c. Provide a detailed schedule of equipment, accessory items included, piping and electrical requirements including all remarks and general notes required for plumbing and electrical rough-ins.

3. Samples for selection purposes for standard finishes of products and accessories furnished under this Section where variations are available from manufacturers.


A. Deliver and store equipment items and accessories in accord with Section 01 66 00.

B. Protect equipment finishes from damage during shipping, receiving, storage, handling, installation and construction of other work.

1. Wrap and crate each item of equipment as necessary for protection from damage prior to installation.

C. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall provide a written warranty for defects in system, including oil pumps, related to manufacturing for a period of one (1) year after date of Substantial Completion.

B. Defects shall be repaired or faulty equipment replaced immediately during the warranty period after written notice at no cost to the Government.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Subject to compliance with the following provide complete double walled used cooking oil tank, collection and caddy transport system as manufactured by Frontline International, Inc., 95 16th Street SW, Barberton, OH 44203.

B. Double Walled Storage Tank:

1. Provide Frontline model number 4280-DCI-NA-DP double walled tank with secondary containment.


a. Storage tank shall be double walled with secondary containment built into the tank with 115 percent secondary containment of used oil products in compliance with all environmental, fire protection and health laws, rules and regulations set forth by Federal, State and local enforcement agencies.

b. Tank shall be free standing and have heavy gauge aluminum exterior.

1.) Outside diameter: 42-inches. 2.) Height: 80-inches.

2. Tank storage capacity shall be 2,378 pounds/317 gallons. 3. Tank shall be equipped with an energy-saving immersion heater system and

remote located control panel with dual-level sensor, power loss indicator and other features to ensure safe operation.

C. Grease Caddy: (Burger King)

1. Provide Frontline model number 10SS-NA grease caddy with 1/2 horse power motorized pump rated at 5 gallons per minute capacity.

a. Caddy shall be heavy duty stainless steel construction designed for safe and convenient transfer of used cooking oil products from fryer equipment to storage tank.

1.) Width: 12-inches. 2.) Length: 30-inches. 3.) Height: 9 ½-inches.

b. Caddy shall be designed in compliance with all environmental, fire protection and health laws, rules and regulations set forth by Federal, State and local enforcement agencies.

c. Caddy shall have heavy-duty, non-mark castors with swivel front castors and brakes, large crumb catcher basket, power switch and break away power cord, removable handle and lockable safety cover.

2. Grease caddy storage capacity shall be 75 pounds/10 gallons. 3. Grease caddy shall be equipped with a motor and durable pump with 5 gallon per

minute capacity. 4. Provide manufacturer’s standard quick-connectors for safe and easy transfer of

used cooking oil into storage tank.

D. Provide all other accessory items including, but not limited to:

1. Provide (2) Frontline model number 10030018 direct plumbed manifold kits, (1) for each fryer (Popeye's).

a. Plumbing shall be furnished as indicated on Plumbing Drawings for remote pumping of used cooking oil from fryers to storage tank.

b. Provide all piping, fittings and other accessories necessary to complete piping system.

2. Provide Frontline model INS inside installation kit designed to pipe from the storage tank through the exterior wall as indicated for used grease pick up by independent vendor.

a. Provide piping from tank to exterior nozzle location indicated in wall adjacent to the Receiving entrance door as indicated.

b. Provide accessory items including through-wall sleeve, recessed escutcheon plates at wall penetration, cam fitting designed to be compatible for service vehicle hose connection and cam dust cap to hide nozzle when not in use.


c. Provide all piping, fittings and other accessories necessary to complete piping system.

E. Provide sealants as specified in Section 07 90 00 to seal pipe penetration and prevent infiltration of air to interior of building.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect work of all other trades to which equipment is related for correct dimensions, plumbness, level and preparation that would affect installation.

1. Verify that all such work is complete to the point where installation may properly commence.

2. Verify that any variation in items of construction that would hinder or prohibit continuous and proper installation of equipment of this Section has been rectified.

B. Inspect areas to receive surface-mounted unit for conditions that would affect installation and proper use of system and accessories.

C. In the event of conflicts or discrepancies in other work, notify Contracting Officer or designated representative immediately in writing.

D. Do not proceed with installation of equipment in areas of variation or discrepancy until all such problems have been fully resolved.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. The installation and erection of the used cooking oil collection system equipment specified in this section shall be performed under the supervision of an approved representative of the equipment manufacturer and in strict accordance with the written instructions of that manufacturer and the approve Shop Drawings.

B. Cutting and Patching of Construction: Lay out the work in advance to prevent damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment.

C. Setting and Connecting: Install equipment plumb and level.

1. Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or other surfaces with fasteners as recommended by equipment manufacturer for type of substrate.

2. Seal around equipment flanges at walls and floors where necessary in accordance with Section 07 90 00 to prevent liquids from penetrating substrates.

3. Contact fillers shall be continuous, without opening.

D. Service Lines and Equipment Connections: Provide piping connections and wiring systems to standards specified in plumbing and electrical specifications for piping and electrical work including equipment connections.

1. Install piping connections and discharge outlets at equipment, with air gaps, vacuum breakers and similar provisions to comply with governing regulations, but not less than compliance with ANSI Standards A.40.4 and A.40.6 and the National Plumbing Code.

2. Assemble electrical components of equipment in accordance with National Electric Code.

E. Jointing and Anchoring:


1. Set each item of non-mobile and non-portable equipment securely in place, leveled and at correct height indicated on approved Shop Drawings.

2. Anchor to supporting surfaces where indicated and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation.

3. Conceal anchorages wherever possible. 4. Complete assembly joints in the field that cannot be completed in the shop. 5. Install closure plates and strips where required with joints coordinated with units of

equipment.

F. Cleaning and Adjusting; Test and adjust equipment for proper operation.

1. Test rotating components, motors and pumps for proper function. 2. Lubricate moving parts if suggested by manufacturer's literature. 3. Test valves, meters and gauges for accuracy and calibrate prior to Substantial

Completion of Project.

G. Prior to acceptance of the project, clean and sanitize equipment both inside and outside.

3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK:

A. For the period during which other trades shall be on or near equipment and/or work covered by this Section, Contractor shall:

1. Cover and protect the exposed surfaces of equipment. 2. Preclude injury to the finish by absorption of chemicals, contact from tools and

machinery, and from all other causes which may be incidental to operations performed in the area by other trades.

3. Contractor shall be responsible for repair or replacement of damaged equipment or systems specified in this Section.

3.4 CLEANING:

A. When work of this Section and work of other trades has been completed, Contractor shall clean equipment so that all traces of grease, stains, protective coatings, abrasive dust, markings, scratches, and other foreign matter are completely removed.

B. The cleaning process shall eliminate any further cleaning on the part of the Government with the exception of that which would ordinarily be undertaken daily to maintain accepted standards of cleanliness and appearance.

3.5 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION:

A. Contractor shall schedule testing and calibration of equipment

B. Testing and calibration of all equipment shall be performed prior to demonstration of equipment operation and maintenance.

1. Provide necessary technicians, materials, and equipment required to conduct these tests and accurately calibrate equipment.

2. All defects disclosed by the tests shall be eliminated to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative and the corrected areas retested.

3. Furnish documentation of testing, date and results as part of submittal of Operation and Maintenance Manuals as specified in Section 01 78 00.

C. Contractor shall schedule demonstration of equipment operation and maintenance procedures in accordance with Section 01 65 00, attended by the following:


1. Authorized representative of each manufacturer of equipment installed in the Project.

2. Authorized representatives of AAFES who’s responsibility will be to operate and/or maintain the equipment.

3. Contracting Officer or designated representative. 4. Contractor and subcontractors performing work that could affect the operation and

maintenance of this equipment.

D. Contractor shall provide documentation to confirm demonstration of equipment operation and maintenance procedures, required to be signed by:

1. AAFES and AAFES representative. 2. Contractor. 3. Manufacturer’s representative.

END 11 80 00.

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Section 12 48 13 – FLOOR MATS & FRAMES

FLOOR MATS & FRAMES 12 48 13-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Recessed aluminum base frames. b. Latex screed. c. Recessed rail and insert system. d. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for

complete installation. e. Rough hardware items needed for proper installation of work.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 03 35 36 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish. 4. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 5. Section 08 44 10 – Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors.

B. Refer to related building slab concrete work for installation of mat and frame recesses during floor pouring as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete.

C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include frames for floor mats set in concrete floor slabs during placement of concrete work.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain floor mats and frames from one source from a single manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Section 01 33 00.

B. Product data for each type of floor mat and frame specified including:

1. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. 2. Details of construction relative to materials. 3. Dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.

C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of floor mat and frames.

1. Show full-scale sections of typical installations, details of patterns or designs, anchors, and accessories.

2. Coordinate shop drawing submittal with concrete work shop drawings and show oversized recess for deferred installation of frames.

D. Samples for selection purposes:


1. Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of floor mat and frame materials.

2. Provide full range of colors, textures, finishes and patterns available for each type of floor mat and frame indicated.

E. Maintenance data in form of manufacturer's printed instructions for cleaning and maintaining floor mats.


A. Layout: Exact dimensions shall be determined for floor mat frames to be placed in concrete prior to forming and pouring concrete floor slab.

1. Concrete floor slabs will be exposed in the final polished floor finish. 2. There will be zero tolerance for adjustment of dimension, distortion or orientation of

the floor mat recesses after exposed concrete is poured.

B. Field Measurements: Check actual depressed concrete openings for mats by accurate field measurements before fabrication.

1. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. 2. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 3. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee

opening dimensions and proceed with fabrication without field measurements. 4. Coordinate floor construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions and heights of

finish floor materials correspond to guaranteed dimensions.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Floor Mat and Frame Manufacturers and Models: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

MANUFACTURER PRODUCTS

1. Construction Specialties, Inc. G1 Pedigrid P.O. Box 380 Muncy, PA 17756, (570) 546-5941

2. Use latex screed at recess in floor slab to receive entrance grid as manufactured by Mapei Corporation, 1144 E. Newport Center Drive, Deerfield Beach, Florida 33442.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide colors, patterns, and profiles of materials, including vinyl, rubber, metals and metal finishes, as indicated.

B. Aluminum - ASTM B 221, alloy 6105-T5 for rail extrusions and 6061-T6 for key lock bars.

C. Floor Grids:

1. Model: G1 Pedigrid shall be extruded 6105-T5 aluminum alloy tread rails joined mechanically by extruded 6106-T6 aluminum alloy key lock bars.

a. Welding or bolting shall not be permitted. b. Rail finish to be clear anodized aluminum.

D. Grid Frame:


1. LB - Level Base Frame shall be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy with 1/2" exposed surface and a depth of 1-13/16".

a. These assemblies receive 1/4" thick heavy gauge support cushions 1" long mounted to each continuous foot at 20" on center.

b. Frame color shall be clear anodized aluminum.

E. Tread Inserts:

1. RR – Recycled Rubber ECO Surfaces® Recycled Rubber Insert:

a. High slip resistant rubber (SC of 90) insert. b. Manufactured with recycled rubber and EPDM - 26%-90% dependent on color c. chosen. d. Color: 905 Granite Run.

F. Latex Screed: Latex screed shall be Latexplan Trade, two-part smoothing/leveling compound.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop-fabricate units of floor mat work to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated.

B. Provide single unit for each mat installation designed for removal from recess for cleaning.

C. Where joints in mats and end filler strips are necessary, space symmetrically in recessed frame.

1. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.

2. Verify sizes by field measurements before shop fabrication.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install latex screed per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

1. Coordinate thickness with grid height to ensure top of grid is level with finished floor.

B. Install recessed frames and grids to comply with manufacturer's instructions, at locations indicated.

C. Top of frames and grids shall be installed in proper relationship to one another and to adjoining finished flooring.

D. Set grid at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action.

E. Coordinate top of grid surfaces with doors that swing across mats to provide under-door clearance.

3.3 PROTECTION


A. Upon completion of frame installations and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses.

1. Cover frames with protective material. 2. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and project is near time of

Substantial Completion.

B. Defer installation of floor grids until near time of Substantial Completion for project.

END 12 48 13